Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Mechanica PDF
Mechanica PDF
Wildfire 2.0
4,310,615
4,310,614
4,310,614
5,297,053
5,513,316
5,689,711
5,506,950
5,428,772
5,850,535
21-December-1998
30-April-1996
22-April-1999
22-March-1994
30-April-1996
18-November-1997
09-April-1996
27-June-1995
15-December-1998
6,545,671 B1 08-April-2003
GB2354685B 18-June-2003
5,140,321 18-August-1992
5,423,023 05-June-1990
5,557,176 09-November-1996
5,561,747 01-October-1996
Third-Party Trademarks
Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Advanced ClusterProven, ClusterProven, and the
ClusterProven design are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States and other countries and are used under license. IBM Corporation does
not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of this software product. AIX is a registered
trademark of IBM Corporation. Allegro, Cadence, and Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence
Design Systems, Inc. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, and Panther are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of
Dassault Systemes. COACH is a trademark of CADTRAIN, Inc. DOORS is a registered trademark of
Telelogic AB. FLEXlm is a trademark of Macrovision Corporation. Geomagic is a registered trademark
of Raindrop Geomagic, Inc. EVERSYNC, GROOVE, GROOVEFEST, GROOVE.NET,
GROOVE NETWORKS, iGROOVE, PEERWARE, and the interlocking circles logo are trademarks of
Groove Networks, Inc. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft
America, Inc. HP-UX is a registered trademark and Tru64 is a trademark of the Hewlett-Packard
Company. I-DEAS, Metaphase, Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, and Unigraphics are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation (EDS). InstallShield is a registered
trademark and service mark of InstallShield Software Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon
Graphics, Inc. LINUX is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. MatrixOne is a trademark of
MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphics and Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design,
AMPLE, and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation. MEDUSA and
STHENO are trademarks of CAD Schroer GmbH. Microsoft, Microsoft Project, Windows, the Windows
logo, Windows NT, Visual Basic, and the Visual Basic logo are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Netscape and the Netscape N and
Ship's Wheel logos are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and
other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. OrbixWeb is a registered
trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. RAND
is a trademark of RAND Worldwide. Rational Rose is a registered trademark of Rational Software
Corporation. RetrievalWare is a registered trademark of Convera Corporation. RosettaNet is a
trademark and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet, a
nonprofit organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. SolidWorks is a
registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and
are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in
other countries. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun
Microsystems, Inc. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java
based marks, and The Network is the Computer are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. TIBCO, TIBCO Software, TIBCO
ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise for JMS, TIBCO Rendezvous, TIBCO Turbo
XML, TIBCO Business Works are the trademarks or registered trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in
the United States and other countries. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications, Inc.
Third-Party Technology Information
Certain PTC software products contain licensed third-party technology: Rational Rose 2000E is
copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software of
Convera Corporation. VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI)
containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI. HOOPS graphics system is a
proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. G-POST is copyrighted
software and a registered trademark of Intercim. VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered
trademark of CGTech. Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology. Moldflow is a
registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. The JPEG image output in the Pro/Web.Publish module
is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group. DFORMD.DLL is copyrighted software
from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be distributed. METIS, developed by George Karypis
and Vipin Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can be researched at
http://www.cs.umn.edu/~karypis/metis. METIS is 1997 Regents of the University of Minnesota.
LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork Design 19902001. Visual Basic for Applications
and Internet Explorer is copyrighted software of Microsoft Corporation. Parasolid Electronic Data
Systems (EDS). Windchill Info*Engine Server contains IBM XML Parser for Java Edition and the
IBM Lotus XSL Edition. Pop-up calendar components Copyright 1998 Netscape Communications
Corporation. All Rights Reserved. TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary
information of Technomatix Technologies Ltd. Technology "Powered by Groove" is provided by Groove
Networks, Inc. Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebEx Communications, Inc. Oracle 8i
run-time and Oracle 9i run-time, Copyright 20022003 Oracle Corporation. Oracle programs
provided herein are subject to a restricted use license and can only be used in conjunction with the PTC
software they are provided with. Apache Server, Tomcat, Xalan, and Xerces are technologies developed
by, and are copyrighted software of, the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org) their
use is subject to the terms and limitations at: http://www.apache.org/LICENSE.txt. Acrobat Reader is
copyrighted software of Adobe Systems Inc. and is subject to the Adobe End-User License Agreement as
provided by Adobe with those products. UnZip ( 1990-2001 Info-ZIP, All Rights Reserved) is provided
AS IS and WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. For the complete Info-ZIP license see
ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html. Gecko and Mozilla components are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version 1.1 at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL. Software distributed under the MPL is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied.
See the MPL for the specific language governing rights and limitations. The Java Telnet Applet
(StatusPeer.java, TelnetIO.java, TelnetWrapper.java, TimedOutException.java), Copyright 1996, 97
Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meiner, is redistributed under the GNU General Public License. This license
is from the original copyright holder and the Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND. You may obtain a copy of the source code for the Applet at http://www.mud.de/se/jta (for a
charge of no more than the cost of physically performing the source distribution), by sending e-mail to
leo@mud.de or marcus@mud.deyou are allowed to choose either distribution method. The source code
is likewise provided under the GNU General Public License. GTK+The GIMP Toolkit are licensed
under the GNU LGPL. You may obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.gtk.org, which is
likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. zlib software Copyright 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and
Mark Adler. OmniORB is distributed under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public
License and GNU Library General Public License. The Java Getopt.jar, copyright 1987-1997 Free
Software Foundation, Inc.; Java Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn (arenn@urbanophile.com), is
redistributed under the GNU LGPL. You may obtain a copy of the source code at
http://www.urbanophile.com/arenn/hacking/download.html. The source code is likewise provided under
the GNU LGPL. Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License
Version 1.1 (at http://www.mozilla.org/NPL). Software distributed under NPL is distributed on an "AS
IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied (see the NPL for the
specific language governing rights and limitations). The Original Code is Mozilla Communicator client
code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer of the Original Code is Netscape
Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape are Copyright 1998 Netscape
Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors: Kazu Yamamoto
(kazu@mozilla.gr.jp), Ryoichi Furukawa (furu@mozilla.gr.jp), Tsukasa Maruyama (mal@mozilla.gr.jp),
Teiji Matsuba (matsuba@dream.com).
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and
Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN95),
is provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements
predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the
restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software
Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at
FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable.
012304
Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA
Table Of Contents
Structure and Thermal Simulation Help .............................................................. 1
Updates for Mechanica Wildfire 2.0.................................................................. 1
Compatibility Issues ................................................................................... 2
Functionality Limitations ............................................................................. 2
Platform-Specific Limitations........................................................................ 2
Mechanica Wildfire Installation Issues ........................................................ 2
HP......................................................................................................... 2
Getting Started with Mechanica ......................................................................... 3
Configuration File Options ................................................................................. 3
config.pro Overview................................................................................. 4
config.pro Options ................................................................................... 4
Mechanica Products ....................................................................................... 21
Introducing the Mechanica Product Line.................................................... 21
Mechanica Structure .............................................................................. 22
Mechanica Thermal................................................................................ 22
Mechanica Workflow ...................................................................................... 23
Native Mode Workflow ........................................................................... 24
FEM Mode Workflow............................................................................... 25
Operating Modes ........................................................................................... 26
Integrated Mode.................................................................................... 27
Independent Mode................................................................................. 28
Operating Mode Comparison ................................................................... 29
Planning and Modeling Considerations .............................................................. 30
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Beams ................................................................................................145
Masses................................................................................................150
Springs ...............................................................................................155
Precedence Rules .................................................................................162
Properties....................................................................................................164
About Properties ..................................................................................164
Deleting Properties ...............................................................................164
Background Information ........................................................................165
Beam Sections .....................................................................................166
Beam Orientation .................................................................................173
Beam Releases ....................................................................................177
Shell Properties....................................................................................179
Spring Properties..................................................................................186
Mass Properties....................................................................................191
Materials .............................................................................................192
Material Orientation ..............................................................................215
Structural Constraints ...................................................................................224
About Structure Constraints...................................................................224
Adding Constraints ...............................................................................225
Constraints, Loads, and Analysis Types ...................................................226
Constraints on Entities ..........................................................................227
Guidelines for Structure Constraint Sets ..................................................228
Guidelines for Structure Constraints........................................................230
Displacement Constraints ......................................................................231
Symmetry Constraints ..........................................................................238
viii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
xviii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
xx
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
xxxii
Table of Contents
Point Loads, Point Constraints, Point Heat Loads, Point Prescribed Temperatures,
Point Convection Conditions.................................................................... 1117
PointPoint Pairs ................................................................................... 1118
Poisson's Ratio...................................................................................... 1119
Poisson's Ratio Isotropic ..................................................................... 1120
Polynomial Order .................................................................................. 1120
Predefined Systems of Units ................................................................... 1120
Predefined Units.................................................................................... 1121
Preview for Interpolation ........................................................................ 1122
Previous Analysis Options for Buckling Analysis ......................................... 1122
Previous Analysis Options for Dynamic Analysis......................................... 1122
Previous Analysis Options for Fatigue Analysis .......................................... 1123
Previous Analysis Options for Prestress Analyses ....................................... 1123
Printing Result Windows......................................................................... 1124
Pro/ENGINEER Parameters as Design Parameters ...................................... 1124
Pro/ENGINEER Parameters as Measures ................................................... 1125
Probing Fringe, Contour, and Vector Plots................................................. 1125
Probing Graphs ..................................................................................... 1126
Problems with Elements ......................................................................... 1127
Problems with Loads and Constraints ....................................................... 1127
Problems with Properties........................................................................ 1128
Projected Vector ................................................................................... 1128
Properties According to Mass Type (FEM mode)......................................... 1128
Property Type ....................................................................................... 1129
Quantity Basic Analyses ..................................................................... 1130
xxxiii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
xlvii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
xlix
Index
Compatibility Issues
Functionality Limitations
Platform-Specific Limitations
Compatibility Issues
Functionality Limitations
Platform-Specific Limitations
The following discussion covers limitations specific to a given platform or specific to
localized versions of the product, and includes:
HP
For the HP-UX operating system, the maxdsize parameter fixes a ceiling on
the amount of swap space any single process can utilize. If this parameter is
set too low, the Structure engine may terminate when solving large models
due to insufficient swap space. In this case, the system displays the error
message "An engine database error has occurred. Please check available disk
and swap space."
2
If the available swap space appears more than adequate, the maxdsize
parameter may be limiting the amount of the available swap space that
Mechanica can utilize. You can use the HP-UX utility sam to check the current
value of this parameter. You need to reconfigure the HP-UX kernel to change
the value for this parameter to a minimum value of 500 MB.
Mechanica products
Mechanica workflow
operating modes
planning and modeling considerations
working with the user interface
configuration options
getting help for Mechanica
config.pro Overview
config.pro Options
config.pro Overview
The settings in config.pro control various aspects of your Mechanica session. This
discussion covers all config.pro options supported for integrated mode. Here are
some guidelines to consider when creating or amending a config.pro file:
In general, configuration file options and values are not case sensitive.
In both UNIX and Windows, the actual file names on disk must use lowercase
characters only.
In both UNIX and Windows, directory names can contain a mix of uppercase
and lowercase characters. However, if Mechanica encounters two or more
directories in the same path that have the same parent and the same name
except for a different mix of uppercase and lowercase characters, it accesses
only the directory with the earliest uppercase characters (since their ASCII
values are lower.) This is true if you enter the full path with correct case
sensitivity. For example, if it encounters directories named aBc, ABc, and Abc,
it only looks in/through directory ABc.
A config.pro line should not exceed 80 characters. You cannot continue a
search path or mapkey on a second line.
In Windows, you should specify the drive at the beginning of the path, so as
to avoid problems if you change your working directory to another drive.
You can set these options from the Tools>Options menu, or you can
manually edit your config.pro file using a text editor.
config.pro Options
Here are the config.pro option categories available for Mechanica:
Options in each category begin with the keyword or attribute name in boldface type,
followed by a brief paragraph describing the option and a list of valid value types.
The options in each category appear in alphabetical order.
PROE_DEF
length = in
mass = lbm
time = sec
temperature = F
In this system, the unit of force is in x lbm/sec (inch lbm second), which
is not a common unit.
o
o
o
o
o
SIM_DISPLAY_FASTENERS
Toggles display of fastener icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_GAPS
Toggles display of gap icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_IN_SPIN
Toggles display of icons when a model is spinning.
SIM_DISPLAY_INTERFACES
Toggles display of interface icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_LOAD_COLORS
Toggles display of individual colors.
SIM_DISPLAY_LOAD_DISTRIBUTION
Toggles display of distributed load vectors over entire entity.
SIM_DISPLAY_LOAD_ICONS
Toggles display of load icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_LOAD_VALUE
Toggles display of load value tags.
SIM_DISPLAY_MASSES
Toggles display of mass icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_MATL_ASSIGNEMNTS
Toggles display of material assignment icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_MEASURES
Toggles display of Simulation Measure icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_AND_MODEL
Toggles display of geometry and mesh models.
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_CONTROLS
Toggles display of Mesh Control icons in FEM mode.
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_ENTITIES
Toggles display of all mesh entities.
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_MODE
Determines the initial state of the mesh display mode. You can set the initial
state so that it displays your mesh as wireframe, hidden line, visible line (no
hidden lines), or shaded. You can also set the initial state to display the
geometry only.
o
o
o
o
o
NO_MESH
WIREFRAME (default)
HIDDEN
NOHIDDEN
SHADING
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_QUALITY
Specifies the display refinement for mesh viewing.
o
o
o
COARSE (default)
FINE
MEDIUM
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_SHELLS_THICK
Determines whether Mechanica displays shells meshes with zero thickness or
the thickness that you defined for the shell. When this option is set to no,
Mechanica displays the shell mesh with a zero thickness. If you set this option
to Yes, Mechanica displays the shell mesh using the actual thickness.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_SHRINK_ELEMS
Specifies the size of displayed mesh elements. Enter a value between 0 and
100. If you do not want Mechanica to shrink the elements, you can use the
default value, which is 0. Note that, for complex models that have very high
element counts, shrinking the elements can degrade performance.
SIM_DISPLAY_NAMES
Toggles display of icon name tags.
SIM_DISPLAY_RIGID_CONNECTIONS
Toggles display of rigid connection icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_RIGID_DOF
Toggles display of DOF icons for rigid links.
SIM_DISPLAY_RIGID_LINKS
Toggles display of rigid link icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_SHELLS
Toggles shell boundary highlighting.
SIM_DISPLAY_SPOT_WELDS
Toggles display of spot weld icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_SPRINGS
Toggles display of spring icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_STRUCT_CONSTRAINTS
Toggles display of all Structure constraint icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_STRUCT_LOADS
Toggles display of all Structure load icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_THERM_BCS
Toggles display of Thermal constraint icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_THERM_LOADS
Toggles display of Thermal load icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_WEIGHTED_DOF
Toggle display of DOF icons for weighted links.
SIM_DISPLAY_WEIGHTED_LINKS
Toggles display of weighted link icons.
SIM_DISPLAY_WELDS
Toggles display of weld icons.
YES (default)
NO
SIM_BEAMSECTION_PATH
Specifies the path for the beam sections directory, which contains the beam
section library files. You must use the full path.
SIMULATION_PRODUCT
Specifies the product that you want to use as the default when you enter
Mechanica. If you set this option to "prompt," the Model Type dialog box
appears whenever you enter Mechanica with a new model. This behavior
persists until you save your model while working in a Mechanica product. After
the save occurs, Mechanica assumes that you will continue working in the
selected product and no longer displays the Model Type dialog box upon entry.
However, if you set this option to one of the product types, the software
assumes that all models you bring into Mechanica are 3D, will use the specified
product type, and, unless you specify otherwise through the
SIMULATION_FEM_MODE config.pro option, will use native mode. In this case,
Mechanica does not display the Model Type dialog box on entry. It simply
applies the appropriate assumptions. If you want to use a different product,
mode, or model type, you need to select the Edit>Mechanica Model Type
command after you enter Mechanica.
o
o
o
PROMPT (default)
STRUCTURE
THERMAL
NO (default)
YES
FEM_ANSYS_ANNOTATIONS
Enables Mechanica to output notes as ANSYS annotations.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
FEM_ANSYS_GROUPING
Determines your ability to group ANSYS commands. When you set this option
to "yes," you can use ANSYS CM commands for grouping nodes and elements
on a part-by-part basis. Group names must be shorter than 8 characters. If the
component name is longer than 8 characters, the software generates a default
name.
A part in part mode is not a group because you can select its elements and
nodes. An element or a node may be part of more than one group. An element
defined on a feature mentioned in a layer appears in the layer group and in the
parent group. Bar elements connecting two assembly members do not belong
to any group.
o
o
10
NO (default)
YES
FEM_ASP_RATIO
Sets the value against which FEM mode compares the aspect ratios of the
elements it creates. The value type is numeric and the default value is 7.
FEM_DEFAULT_SOLVER
Specifies the path to one of the solvers.
o
o
ANSYS (default)
MSC/NASTRAN
FEM_DIST_INDEX
Sets the value against which FEM mode compares the distortion indices of the
elements it creates. The value type is numeric and the default value is 0.4.
FEM_EDGE_ANGLE
Sets the angle between two adjacent element edges. Enter a value between 0
and 90. The value type is numeric and the default value is 30.
FEM_IGNORE_UNPAIRED
Determines whether Mechanica notifies you of unpaired surfaces when you test
shell compression. If you set this option to "no," Mechanica alerts you when it
encounters unpaired surfaces during a compression test. In this case, the
software shows you the entire model and highlights the unpaired surfaces.
If you set this option to "yes," Mechanica does not notify you of unpaired
surfaces. Instead, it displays your model without the unpaired surfaces.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
FEM_MESH_OPERATIONS
Activates the OPERATIONS menu, which enables you to perform specialized
operations on NASTRAN files and the finite element mesh for NASTRAN. When
you set this option to "yes," the Operations command appears on the Mesh
menu. If you set the option to "no," the Operations command does not
appear.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
FEM_MESH_PRESERVE
Determines whether Mechanica should automatically store the mesh in a
model_name.fmp(a) file. The storage location is the current directory, and
11
NO (default)
YES
FEM_MESH_SOLID_SHELL_AUTO_CONSTRAINT
Determines whether Mechanica constrains rotation for shell nodes. When you
set this option to "yes," Mechanica adds rotational constraints to shell nodes at
the interface between shell and solid elements at the shell node. These
additional constraints prevent unwanted degrees of freedom (DOFs) in shell
elements at the interface. Unwanted DOFs occur because the solid elements
typically have 3 translational DOFs whereas shells have 3 translational DOFs
plus 3 rotational DOFs. With FEM_MESH_SOLID_SHELL_AUTO_CONSTRAINT
set to "yes," the software freezes the rotational DOFs, creating a more
consistent interface between the shells and solids.
If you do not want Mechanica to add the rotational constraints for you, you can
set this option to "no." In this case, you are responsible for ensuring that the
nodes at the interface are not underconstrained. You can also set the option so
that Mechanica asks you whether you want automatic constraints or plan to
constrain the nodes yourself.
o
o
o
YES (default)
NO
ASK
FEM_MID_RATIO
Sets the value against which FEM mode compares the mid ratios of the
elements it creates. The value type is numeric and the default value is 0.1.
12
FEM_NEUTRAL_VERSION
Specifies the version number of the FEM neutral file.
o
o
o
1
2
3 (default)
FEM_REMOVE_UNOPPOSED
Defines the default state of the UseUnopposed toggle. The UseUnopposed
toggle determines whether Mechanica will keep or ignore unopposed surfaces
during compression.
If you set this option to "yes," the system ignores unopposed surfaces when
meshing the model; the system also deselects the UseUnopposed toggle.
When you set this option to "no," the system uses the unopposed surfaces in
the shell model.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
FEM_SKEW_ANGLE
Sets the maximum acceptable default skew angle value, measured in degrees.
Enter a value between 0 and 90. The value type is numeric and the default
value is 45.
FEM_SOLVER_TIME_LIMIT
For MSC/NASTRAN solutions, this option interrupts the solver after the
specified time limit. The default value is 60, and you specify values for this
option in minutes.
FEM_TAPER
Sets the minimum acceptable default taper value. Enter a value between 0 and
1. The value type is numeric and the default value is 0.5.
FEM_TWIST_ANGLE
Sets the maximum acceptable default twist angle between opposing element
faces. Applies to brick and wedge elements only. Enter a value between 0 and
90.
FEM_WARP_ANGLE
Sets the maximum acceptable default warp angle value, measured in degrees.
Enter a value between 0 and 90. The value type is numeric and the default
value is 10.
13
FEM_WHICH_ANSYS_SOLVER
Specifies whether Mechanica uses the Frontal, Iterative, or Powersolver ANSYS
solver.
o
o
o
FRONTAL (default)
ITERATIVE
POWERSOLVER
FEM_Y_DIR_COMPRESS
Specifies the Y direction based on compressed and uncompressed geometry.
The default value is "no," which indicates that Mechanica will use
uncompressed geometry.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
PRO_ANSYS_PATH
Specifies the path to the ANSYS executable.
PRO_NASTRAN_PATH
Specifies the path to the MSC/NASTRAN executable (nastran).
PRO_SOLVER_NAME
Specifies the name of the user-defined solver to be included in the Run FEM
Analysis dialog box.
PRO_SOLVER_PATH
Specifies the path to the user-defined solver whose name is included in the
Run FEM Analysis dialog box.
SIM_ADDITIVE_MASS
Adds any masses that reference the same geometrical entity or resolve to the
same mesh node. If you set this option to "yes," FEM suppresses the
precedence rules that apply to masses.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
SIM_FEM_NASTRAN_USE_PSHELL
For MSC/NASTRAN solutions, this option determines the form that FEM mode
uses to output laminated composite shell properties to the solver. When you
set this option to "no," FEM outputs laminated composite shell properties using
14
PCOMP cards that reference MAT8 material cards. If you set this option to
"yes," FEM outputs laminated composite shell properties using PSHELL cards
that reference MAT2 material cards.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
SIM_NASTRAN_USE_COUPMASS
For MSC/NASTRAN solutions, this option enables you to enforce consistent
mass matrix generation. When you set this option to "yes," FEM adds
PARAM,COUPMASS,1 to the NASTRAN deck to ensure that the solver generates
a consistent mass matrix. If you set this option to "no," FEM does not add this
statement, and NASTRAN generates a lumped mass matrix.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
SIM_OUTPUT_OBJ_NAMES
Output beam sections name, analyses name, coordinate systems names as
comments.
SIM_OUTPUT_IDS_FOR_LAYERS
Determines whether Mechanica will generate an XML file containing layer data
when you output a NASTRAN deck. If you set this option to "yes," Mechanica
generates the XML file that provides a listing of node and element IDs for any
idealizationssuch as beams, shells, and massesthat you place on layers.
The file provides lists for all layers that contain simulation entities.
The filename for the XML file is outputfilename_layers.xml, where
outputfilename is the name that you specified for the .nas file on the Run FEM
Analysis dialog box. Mechanica places the file in the same directory as the
.nas file.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
SIM_REGEN_ON_ENTRY
Determines whether Mechanica regenerates your model when you initiate a
session.
o
o
YES (default)
NO
SIM_SMOOTH_ASPECT_RATIO
Determines the element aspect ratio criterion that Mechanica will use when
smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization. You must specify a real
15
number for this option, and the default setting is 7.0. As a general rule, you
should not change the default setting unless the first optimization pass shows
that the overall element quality has degraded such that setting a new aspect
ratio criterion would result in better shaped elements.
SIM_SMOOTH_EDGE_ANGLE
Determines the element edge angle criterion that Mechanica will apply to
quadrilateral elements when smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization.
You must specify a real number in degrees for this option, and the default
setting is 30 . As a general rule, you should not change the default setting
unless the first optimization pass shows that the overall element quality has
degraded such that setting a new edge angle criterion would result in better
shaped elements.
SIM_SMOOTH_SKEW
Determines the element skew angle criterion that Mechanica will apply to
quadrilateral elements when smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization.
You must specify a real number in degrees for this option, and the default
setting is 45 . As a general rule, you should not change the default setting
unless the first optimization pass shows that the overall element quality has
degraded such that setting a new skew angle criterion would result in better
shaped elements.
SIM_SMOOTH_TAPER
Determines the element taper criterion that Mechanica will apply to
quadrilateral elements when smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization.
You must specify a real number for this option, and the default setting is 0.5.
As a general rule, you should not change the default setting unless the first
optimization pass shows that the overall element quality has degraded such
that setting a new taper criterion would result in better shaped elements.
SIM_SMOOTH_WARP_ANGLE
Determines the element warp angle criterion that Mechanica will apply to
quadrilateral elements when smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization.
You must specify a real number in degrees for this option, and the default
setting is 10 . As a general rule, you should not change the default setting
unless the first optimization pass shows that the overall element quality has
degraded such that setting a new warp angle criterion would result in better
shaped elements.
SIMULATION_FEM_MODE
Determines the initial state of the FEM Mode check box on the Model Type
dialog box. The default is "prompt," indicating that the Model Type dialog
appears when you enter Mechanica with a new or unsaved model and the
check box is unchecked.
16
If you select "No," the software assumes you always want to work in native
mode, and the check box is unchecked. If you select "Yes," the software
assumes you always want to work in FEM mode, and the check box is checked.
In either case, if the SIMULATION_PRODUCT config.pro option is set to a
specific product, the software bypasses the Model Type dialog box altogether
when you enter Mechanica with a new or unsaved model.
o
o
o
PROMPT (default)
NO
YES
STD_NASTRAN_TEMPLATE
Sets the file path of a NASTRAN deck template. Use the full path to avoid
problems.
Fatigue Options
Use these options to control fatigue analysis. You can also access some of these
options on the Fatigue Analysis Definition dialog box. For more information on
each of these settings, see Fatigue Analysis.
SIM_FATIGUE_BIAXIALITY_CORRECT
Controls the use of biaxiality correction. The value types are as follows:
o
o
YES (default)
NO
SIM_FATIGUE_BIAXIALITY_METHOD
Specifies the method Mechanica uses to model biaxiality: Klann-Tipton-Cordes,
Hoffman-Seeger, or the most conservative (WORST) of the two methods. The
value types are as follows:
o
o
o
WORST (default)
KTC
HS
SIM_FATIGUE_CONFIDENCE_LEVEL
Specifies the percentage confidence in the predicted life result value. The value
type is numeric and may range from 0.1 to 99.9. The default value is 90.
SIM_FATIGUE_EXTERNAL_MATDATA
Controls the use of external material data. The value types are as follows:
o
o
NO (default)
YES
17
SIM_FATIGUE_HYSTERESIS_GATE
Specifies the gate Mechanica applies to cycle counting as a percentage of peak
load. The value type is numeric and may range from 0 to 50. The default value
is 1.
SIM_FATIGUE_INFINITE_LIFE_VALUE
Specifies a value for the lives beyond cutoff. The value type is numeric and
may range from 1e15 to 1e30. The default value is 1e20.
SIM_FATIGUE_MEAN_STRESS
Controls the application of the mean stress correction. The value types are as
follows:
o
o
YES (default)
NO
SIM_FATIGUE_MEAN_STRESS_METHOD
Specifies the method Mechanica uses to model mean stress: the SmithWatson-Topper Approach, Morrow Correction, or the most conservative
(WORST) of the two methods. The value types are as follows:
o
o
o
WORST (default)
SWT
MORROW
SIM_FATIGUE_SAFETY_MARGIN
Specifies the factor Mechanica uses to determine the Life Confidence
quantity. The value type is numeric and may range from 1.1 to 100. The
default value is 3.
SIM_FATIGUE_USER_DIRECTORY
Specifies the directory for user files, for example, external materials files. The
value is the path to the directory. The default value is the current directory.
SIM_FATIGUE_WRITE_SURF_STRESS
Controls the writing of surface stresses to a neutral file. The value types are as
follows:
o
o
18
NO (default)
YES
Run Options
Use these options to control the engine run. You can also access many of these
functions through the Analysis>Mechanica Analyses and Design Studies
command and the associated dialog box. For more information on each of these
settings, see Setting Up a Run.
SIM_MAX_MEMORY_USAGE
Specifies the maximum amount of memory that the Mechanica mesher and
solver or the FEM mesher can use for the run. The value type is a numeric
value that is measured in megabytes and should be greater than 0. The default
value is 128. Be aware that, if you are a FEM user and enter a value of 0, the
FEM mesher will assume that it can use all available memory.
SIM_RUN_COPY_FEM_NEUTRAL_FILE
Controls whether Mechanica copies the FEM neutral file (.fnf extension) into the
study directory. The value types are as follows:
o
o
YES (default)
NO
SIM_RUN_OUT_DIR
Specifies the directory for output storage. The value type is a complete path
name. By default, Mechanica uses the current directory.
SIM_RUN_TMP_DIR
Specifies the directory for temporary file storage. The value type is a complete
path name. By default, Mechanica uses the current directory.
PROE (default)
BLUE
19
o
o
BLACK
WHITE
SIM_PP_PATH_ABSOLUTE
Controls whether Mechanica uses an absolute path for study directories when it
writes an .rwd file for results. When you create an .rwd file, Mechanica includes
the results windows currently defined in the results session. Further, it includes
path information on that indicates where the study directories for the results
windows are located. The path for the study directories can be either absolute
or relative, depending on how you set this config.pro option.
If you set this option to "yes," Mechanica uses absolute paths for study
directories when it writes the .rwd file. When you set the option to "no,"
Mechanica writes relative paths in the .rwd file. If you use this configuration
option, you should be sure you have a thorough understanding of your
operating environment and sharing needs. Setting this option to "no" can be
beneficial if you plan to share the entire file structure with another location or
plan to move the file set in the future. The value types are as follows:
o
o
YES (default)
NO
SIM_PP_VRML_EXPORT_FORMAT
Specifies the VRML export format that Mechanica uses when exporting VRML
reports:
o
o
VRML2.0 (default)
VRML1.0
SIM_PP_VRML_FEATURE_EDGES
Specifies that the VRML file will represent feature edges. By default, no feature
edges are represented in the VRML file. The value types are as follows:
o
o
NO (default)
YES
Miscellaneous Options
These options are not a part of any other larger category.
SIM_MAT_POISSONS_NOTATION
Specifies the convention used for defining Poisson's ratio for anisotropic
materials as being either Tsai (column-normalized) or Jones (row-normalized).
This option affects only the labels for Poisson's ratio on the Material
Definition dialog box. The value types are as follows:
20
IndexMechanica Products
o
o
TSAI (default)
JONES
SIM_USE_LAYERS
Specifies that Mechanica allows Pro/ENGINEER layers to transfer as groups into
independent mode. When set to "no," Mechanica transfers components as
groups, but does not transfer layers as groups. When set to "yes," Mechanica
transfers each relevant layer to a group. Note that Mechanica transfers blanked
or hidden layers as invisible. Also, if a Pro/ENGINEER coordinate system
resides on a blanked layer that transfers to independent mode, the
corresponding Mechanica UCS entity will be invisible.
o
o
NO (default)
YES
Mechanica Products
Introducing the Mechanica Product Line
The Mechanica product line features the Structure and Thermal modules, each of
which focuses on different aspects of mechanical behavior:
21
Mechanica Structure
Mechanica Structure allows design engineers to evaluate, understand, and optimize
the static and dynamic structural performance of their designs in a real-world
environment. Structure's unique adaptive solution technology provides fast, accurate
solutions automaticallysolutions that help to improve product quality and decrease
design costs. In addition to its native solver, Structure's FEM mode offers specialized
analyses that automatically create fully associative FEA meshes for third-party finite
element solvers.
Structure enables you to:
Mechanica Thermal
Mechanica Thermal provides design engineers with expert tools to simulate the
behavior of parts and assemblies subject to thermal loading. Thermal relies on
unique adaptive solution technology that provides fast, accurate solutions
automatically, helping you improve product quality and decrease design costs. In
addition to its native solver, Thermal's integrated mode offers specialized analyses
that automatically create fully associative FEA meshes for third-party finite element
solvers.
22
IndexMechanica Workflow
Mechanica Workflow
When you use any of the Mechanica products to analyze and optimize your design,
you typically complete the various activities required for simulation modeling and
analysis in a particular order. The workflow you use depends on the product. These
links take you to a discussion of the workflow for each product:
Native mode
FEM mode
The workflows described in these discussions represent the most common approach
to each product. However, there are several alternatives, some more efficient than
others. The workflow that you ultimately develop will depend on your design process,
the goals you are trying to achieve, and the nature of your model.
23
Define an analysis.
Run the analysis.
Review the analysis results.
Be aware that the order of the stepsparticularly during the model development
phasemay be different depending on your preferences, modeling goals, and
techniques.
24
IndexMechanica Workflow
Define an Analysis
25
Be aware that the order of the stepsparticularly during the model development
phasemay be different depending on your preferences, modeling goals, and
techniques. Additionally, if you plan to export a deck rather than run a FEM analysis
from within Mechanica, you can skip defining an analysis.
You can also consider an alternative workflow if you are working with an assembly
and create a hierarchical mesh.
Operating Modes
You can work with Mechanica in two operating modesintegrated mode or
independent mode. The mode you use governs whether you work primarily within
the Pro/ENGINEER or Mechanica user interface, how you apply modeling entities, the
modeling functions available to you, and the types of analyses you can perform.
26
IndexOperating Modes
Integrated Mode
Integrated mode incorporates Mechanica simulation functionality into Pro/ENGINEER.
In integrated mode, you create, analyze, and optimize your simulation model in the
same user environment that you use to create your Pro/ENGINEER geometry. Here
are some unique features of integrated mode:
You can choose whether to define your model for use in native mode or FEM
mode. Native mode provides P-element solutions and FEM mode lets you
solve your model using any of several third-party H-element solvers.
Mechanica creates the mesh automatically as part of model analysis. For solid
models, Mechanica uses solid elements such as tetrahedrons, wedges, or
bricks while, for shell models, it applies both triangle and quadrilateral shell
elements to achieve the best mesh. You can also have models that combine
solid and shell elements to create a mixed mesh.
As an option, you can manually add several specialized element types, or
idealizations and connections, to your model. These include beams, various
types of welds, springs, gaps, contacts, rigid connections, and masses.
Although native mode does not normally display elements except as a
background for study or analysis results, you can test and refine your mesh
before you run an analysis.
You indicate which aspects of your model can change during a sensitivity or
optimization study by defining design parameters for dimensions and
properties. For dimension changes, you create design parameters using
Pro/ENGINEER relations.
You can work in more than one model at a time. When you wish to work on
another model, you simply open it, and a new work area window opens
displaying the newly-chosen model. You do not need to save until you exit
integrated Mechanica. For more information, see Considerations for Multiple
Model Sessions.
To get a better idea of how integrated mode differs from independent mode, see
Operating Mode Comparison.
27
Independent Mode
Independent mode relies on the independent Mechanica user interface for all
simulation modeling, analysis and design study execution, and results viewing. In
independent mode, you have the option of building your model geometry in
Pro/ENGINEER, importing geometry from a third-party CAD package, or building the
geometry exclusively within Mechanica. After you work with your model in
independent mode, you break all association with Pro/ENGINEER and you can no
longer automatically update the Pro/ENGINEER model from Mechanica.
Here are some features of independent mode:
You can create elements manually or automatically. For solid models, you can
create solid elements such as tetrahedrons, wedges, or bricks. For shell
models, you can apply triangular and quadrilateral shell or plate elements. As
an option, you can manually add several specialized element types to your
model. These element types include beams, spot welds, springs, and masses.
Mechanica provides a variety of manual element generation methods including
geometry selection, point seeding, extrusion, and revolution. If you want
Mechanica to create elements automatically, you can use AutoGEM, a tool that
generates elements on curves, surfaces, and volumes.
You indicate which aspects of your model can change during a sensitivity or
optimization study by defining design variables for dimensions and design
parameters for properties. You cannot, however, use Pro/ENGINEER relations
or parameters to control shape changes.
You can create element-based measures to get information on stress intensity
factors (cracking) in your model, resultant forces and moments, and net heat
flux.
To get a better idea of how integrated mode differs from independent mode, see
Operating Mode Comparison.
28
IndexOperating Modes
Independent Mode
2D and 3D models
2D and 3D models
Geometry created in
Pro/ENGINEER only
Geometry created in
Pro/ENGINEER, Mechanica, or
one of several CAD file formats
Geometry-based measures
Elements generated
automatically with testing and
refinement capabilities
29
Each of these discussions assumes that you are already familiar with Pro/ENGINEER
part and assembly building techniques. Therefore, the focus lies with explaining
general methodology rather than with providing detailed instructions on how to
create Pro/ENGINEER parts and assemblies.
30
Most of the above guidelines focus on part planning and building, but some are valid
for assemblies as well. To learn more about issues you should consider if you are
working with assemblies, see Assembly Considerations.
Conceptual Design Stage In this early design stage, you can quickly and
easily conduct feasibility studies, even though you do not have a fully
constructed part or assembly.
Intermediate Design Stage You can complete a finite element model of
a partially defined assembly, or a part that has a few key areas still
undefined. There are two advantages:
o You can vary the completed areas of your part without having to wait
for the incomplete areas to be fully defined.
o You can guide the design of the incomplete areas with the results of
the analysis.
Analysis of a Complete Part You can reduce the complexity of the finite
element representation of the part or assembly.
There are a number of methods you can use to simplify a part or assembly. You
should determine the best approach by evaluating the nature of your model and your
simulation goals.
See Also
Example:
31
If the answer to both questions is no, consider suppressing the feature. Otherwise,
you need to limit the design parameter range to eliminate the problem or, in some
cases, rebuild the part using a different development scheme.
Note: If your part includes a large number of datum points that have no use
in Mechanica, consider suppressing these points before accessing Mechanica.
An excessive number of datum points can affect performance.
32
be. As you build the part, ensure that the movement of these features is not
artificially restrained by relationships, topology, and so forth.
Here are some techniques you can consider:
Plan your shape changes and develop your part to allow these changes.
Build larger, more basic features first.
Identify relationships that prevent desired movement or cause undesired
movement.
Change dimension names for easy identification.
Avoid topology conflicts introduced by design parameter ranges and part
building techniques that create interference between features or introduce
extreme topological changes.
See Also
Example:
33
Mechanica is unable to change areas of your design because one of the details
artificially limits movement. Provided you originally designed the details as
separate features, you can suppress the problem features and rerun the
Mechanica study.
Your part includes features that do not affect solution quality. By suppressing
these features, you often can achieve faster run times and smaller file sizes.
See Also
Example:
parent/child relationships If you move a parent, the child moves with it.
dimension relations If you define relations between your parts
dimensions and assign a design parameter to the independent dimension, the
dependent dimension changes in accordance with the relation you
established.
alignment If you align an aspect of your part with another aspect of your
part and assign design parameters in such a way that the aspect you used for
alignment disappears, your part fails to regenerate.
declared layout relations If you use a Pro/NOTEBOOK layout when
building your part or assembly, Pro/ENGINEER defines relations between the
aspects of the part or assembly you declare to the layout and the associated
aspect of the layout.
For example, if you declare the length of a part to the layout, Pro/ENGINEER
defines a relation tying the parts length dimension to the layouts length
dimension. The layout dimension is the independent dimension.
Because Pro/ENGINEER treats any part dimension you declare to a layout as
dependent, you cannot select the dimension as a Mechanica design parameter
without first undeclaring it.
34
See Also
Example:
You can check your part's current dimension names with the
Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Switch Dim command in
Mechanica or the Info>Switch Dimensions command on the Relations
dialog box in Pro/ENGINEER. You access the Relations dialog box through
the Tools>Relations command.
You can change dimension names when you define design parameters in
Mechanica. If you want to change the names before accessing Mechanica,
activate the dimension display in standard mode, select dimension, and use
the Edit>Properties command. Once you click this command, you can use
the Dimension Text tab on the Dimension Properties dialog box to change
the name.
See Also
Reference:
36
To test for topology interference, animate or review your shape changes using the
Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Animate and
Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Review commands in Mechanica
prior to starting your design study. Start with smaller shape changes to make sure
the shape changes are realistic before specifying the full range of movement.
In addition to interference and topology problems caused by complex blends and
sweeps, be aware that topology changes can introduce the following situations:
Mechanica may experience conflicts between existing loads. In this case, the
software may modify one of the loads as a result of the conflict.
If the topology change is large and sudden, as with the dynamic suppression
or addition of a feature through Pro/PROGRAM, the change may affect the
quality of the optimization. The sudden introduction or removal of a feature
can increase stresses in such a way that the optimizer stops prematurely,
assuming that it has found a lower-stress design immediately prior to the
topology change.
See Also
Reference:
Example:
Avoiding Interference
Assembly Considerations
Working with an assembly is similar to working with a part. However, you should
bear the following in mind as you work:
When you model an assembly, you are working with a nonmoving entity.
Regardless of the appearance or behavior of the assembly in real-world
conditions, Structure and Thermal treat all assemblies as nonmoving.
Mechanica requires that all the parts in the assembly use the same system of
units. You are responsible for ensuring that all dimensioning systems in your
assembly are consistent. If you use a different system of units for some of the
parts, Mechanica displays a message indicating that the software
automatically converts the part's units so that the units of measure are the
same.
Up to the point when you run an analysis or study, Mechanica treats your
assembly as a collection of individual parts. Thus, during the model
development phase, you add modeling entities to parts, rather than to the
assembly as a whole.
After you start a run, Mechanica merges the individual parts into a single,
multivolume body, where individual parts are either connected or
unconnected.
37
If you want Mechanica to treat your assembly as a set of shells, you must
first define shells or shell pairs for each part in the assembly. You define
shells and shell pairs on a part-by-part basis by accessing Mechanica after
opening the individual parts.
After you have defined shells and shell pairs for each of your parts, you can
access Mechanica from assembly mode and work with the assembly as a
whole. For more information on shells and shell pairs, see About Shells.
If you use midsurface compression for any parts in your assembly that are
made up of shells or shells and solids, gaps can form in your model where the
curves (edges) or surfaces (faces) are mated or have assembly constraints
applied to them. Mechanica creates connections between these gaps so the
parts deform together as if they are one entity.
Although Mechanica uses shell, surface region, beam, mass, and spring
definitions from the individual parts that make up an assembly, it ignores any
modeling entities and idealizations you added to the parts while working in
part mode. Consequently, you need to assign new modeling entities and
idealizations when you work with the assembly.
Mechanica disregards all design parameters assigned to individual parts.
For assemblies, be aware that you cannot place loads or constraints on
geometry that Mechanica merges during a run. If a portion of a merged
surface is freefor example, two volumes that have mated surfaces, but one
surface is larger than the otheryou can create a surface region on the free
area and then apply the load or constraint to that surface region.
When using family table instances in assemblies, note that any modeling
entities you create are stored with the assembly rather than with the part.
You may need to take special steps to prepare your model for 2D analysis, such as
adding a Cartesian coordinate system, or to prepare a symmetric model, such as
defining cuts along the axes of symmetry.
As a step in your part planning process, decide which types of modeling entities you
want to add to your model. After you have your plan in mind, determine the
requirements for each of the entities you will define. Here are some of the
techniques and prerequisites you may want to consider:
38
Units Settings
Before designing your model, you need to select a system of units in which
Pro/ENGINEER stores all data in the database. You can use the Pro/ENGINEER Units
Manager menu to select a system of units for your Mechanica model.
If you do not define a system of units, Pro/ENGINEER uses a default system of
unitsinch pound-mass second (inch lbm second).
You can select from a predefined system of units, create a custom system of units,
or set a default system of units for your model.
You can learn more about units by reviewing these references:
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
About Units
39
When you start your Mechanica session, the software adds a default coordinate
system to your model. This coordinate system is known as the World Coordinate
System (WCS). The WCS is a Cartesian coordinate system with an origin at 0 0 0. At
the time that it comes up, Mechanica defines the WCS as the current coordinate
system and assumes the WCS is the coordinate system it should use when creating
modeling entities.
If you want to apply your modeling entities relative to a different coordinate system,
you can set that coordinate system as current using the Edit>Current Coordinate
System command. Making a coordinate system current means that Mechanica will
base the creation of certain modeling entities on that coordinate system.
You can also create new coordinate systems in Mechanica using the Insert>Model
Datum>Coordinate System command. You can define coordinate systems you
create in Mechanica as Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical, enabling a more flexible
and accurate realization of mechanical behavior. For example, cylindrical coordinate
systems can be handy when defining cyclic symmetry constraints.
Note: If you select a 2D model type, you must choose a Cartesian coordinate
system that you want Mechanica to use as the reference coordinate system.
See Also
Example:
40
consider creating the datum features within Mechanica instead, as they will not
be visible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER.
Mechanica If you create the datum features within Mechanica, these are
known as simulation features. You can create simulation features at any time
during your Mechanica sessionbefore you add modeling entities or as you
define those modeling entities. Simulation features are only available to you
during your Mechanica sessions unless you promote them. The software turns
off these features each time you return to Pro/ENGINEER.
As such, a regions location can change if you apply design parameters that change
the shape of the original surface or volume.
A surface region is a contour that subdivides a part surface or volume to allow partial
loading, constraining, or shell pairing of that surface. In situations where you want to
constrain or load a specific portion of a part surface, you can create a region on the
surface and apply the load or constraint to that region only.
A volume region is, essentially, a cut or protrusion that subdivides a volume into two
distinct subvolumes. There are a variety of methods that you can use to define the
contour of a volume region, including extruding the volume region, revolving the
region, and developing the regions from a blend, sweep, or quilt surface. You can
also use advanced volume region creation techniques such as helical sweeps,
variable section sweeps, and sweeps based on blended sections retrieved from a file.
You use volume regions primarily if you want to refine your mesh in either native
mode or FEM mode. Additionally, in FEM mode, you can apply different material
41
properties to the parent volume and the solid chunk created by the volume region.
In this case, you place the differing material property on the surface that defines the
volume region, and the material propagates through the solid chunk. You can also
place loads, constraints, and other modeling entities on the surfaces that define the
volume region, be they internal or external surfaces.
Creating surface or volume regions can also prove handy if you want to define a
small contact region for contact analysis instead of using an entire part as the
contact region.
Pro/ENGINEER Parameters
You can use Pro/ENGINEER parameters as Mechanica material properties, certain
load and constraint values, design parameters, or measures. This functionality
enables you to do the following:
Define material properties in such a way that Mechanica can vary individual
characteristics of the materialfor instance, Young's modulus or mass
densityduring a design study
Vary Pro/ENGINEER dimensional parameters as part of a design study
Use Pro/ENGINEER parameters as the limits or goals of an optimization study
You can also use Pro/ENGINEER parameters to define the thickness of simple shells
or the stiffness properties of simple springs.
Before addressing the specific issues that you need to consider when creating
Pro/ENGINEER parameters for use in Mechanica, let us take a moment to review
some basic concepts.
In Pro/ENGINEER, you can control many aspects of part design through the use of
parameters. Parameters enable you to set particular values for a dimension, drive
the value of one dimension based on the behavior of another dimension, dynamically
suppress features based on changes in the part, and so forth.
You can define Pro/ENGINEER parameters in the following two ways:
42
There are two types of symmetry you can model in Mechanicamirror symmetry and
cyclic symmetry. Mirror symmetry relies on the principle that one segment of a
model is the mirror image of other segments. An example of this type of model
would be a rectangular plate with a hole at its center. In native mode you can use
the mirror symmetry constraint to take advantage of your model's symmetry. To use
mirror symmetry in FEM mode you must apply a displacement constraint to fix
translation normal to the plane of symmetry and fix rotations in opposition to the
plane of symmetry.
Cyclic symmetry relies on the principle that a segment of the geometry is repeated in
a cyclic manner throughout the model, but the segment is not a mirror image, either
43
in its geometry or its load scheme. An example of this type of geometry would be a
fan blade or turbine. You can only use cyclic symmetry in native mode. FEM mode
does not support this type of modeling.
The methods you use to develop these two types of symmetry differ, as does the
application of constraints and certain loads. Both types of symmetry can prove
efficient for a 3D solid or shell model. The choice of which symmetry type you use
depends on the model and the problem you wish to solve.
Note that, in some situations, you can use 2D axisymmetric modeling in place of
symmetry. While not strictly a form of symmetry, 2D axisymmetric modeling
provides an extremely efficient alternative to treating your model as a symmetric
solid. This form of modeling relies on the principle that a 2D slice of your solid
model, if rotated around an axis, can accurately depict the whole of your model's
geometry, loads, and constraints. For an example of this type of model, see Setting
up a Solid Model for a 2D Analysis on an Internal Surface.
See Also
Examples:
44
You can choose to cut the original model at the division lines, or simply apply mirror
symmetry constraints along those lines. Note that, if you use the division plan
proposed above, you will end up working with one quarter of your model. You could
also choose to cut the original model in half instead, but your resulting model would
have more elements and be less efficient for the Mechanica solver. Thus, you should
always strive to find the smallest symmetric section. The remainder of this discussion
assumes that you are working with a cut model.
To apply mirror symmetry constraints you must select enough geometric entities to
define a plane. If you cut the model as in the figure below, you can create mirror
symmetry constraints by selecting the surfaces created by the cuts. If you choose
not to cut the model, you would need to define enough datum points or axes to
define the plane.
Here, you add a mirror constraint in the X direction along the vertical cut, where the
surface would normally merge with the rest of the part geometry. Similarly, you add
a mirror constraint in the Y direction along the horizontal cut. In this way, you mimic
the way that the geometry would behave were it part of the full model. Note that
45
mirror symmetry constraints are not available in FEM mode. However, you can add
constraints simply by defining a displacement constraint and selecting the surfaces at
the horizontal and vertical cuts as the constraint references.
In addition to adding the mirror symmetry constraints at the cuts, you also need to
adjust the load on the symmetric section by dividing the additive load seen by the
model by the number of segments that result from the cut process. This situation
occurs whenever you apply your load using a total load distribution. In this case, the
model sees an additive total force load of 200 pounds100 pounds on one end of
the model, and 100 on the other. To develop the symmetric segment, you cut the
model into 4 parts. Dividing 200 by 4 yields a 50 pound load on the symmetric
segment.
Tip: If you had modeled this problem using a pressure load or force per unit
area load distribution, you would not need to divide the load. For both of these
load types, Mechanica performs any load division automatically.
46
Looking at the model as a whole, you would first plan the cut lines using a cylindrical
coordinate system as a reference. The best choice is as follows:
The segment defined by the cuts repeats four times to form the circumference of the
fan. After you cut the model, you need to add a cyclic symmetry constraint to the
model so that the solver will correctly interpret the geometry as a cyclic symmetry
segment:
Here, you add a cyclic symmetry constraint to both of the cut surfaces. Note that you
do not need to change the value of the load to reflect the fact that the load acts on a
smaller segment. This is primarily a function of the load type. For example, this
model uses a centrifugal loada body load that, in this case, behaves cyclically.
Therefore, the load requires no adjustment. However, if you were working with a
total load against the outer surface of the hole, you would need to adjust the load
just as you would for standard symmetry.
47
Note that this model does not qualify for mirror symmetry because the fan blades
are set at an angle, which would preclude mirroring. Additionally, the centrifugal load
would not mirror correctly as, in the mirror image, the direction of the load would
oppose the actual direction of the load.
Preparing a 2D Model
There are several good reasons for treating your model as a 2D model rather than a
3D model. One of the most compelling is the simplicity of 2D models from a meshing
and solution perspective. Mechanica can solve your model in a fraction of the time it
would take to mesh and solve a 3D model. However, 2D modeling is a specialized
form of simulation modeling and is appropriate only if your model displays certain
geometric, constraint, and load characteristics.
If you plan to perform 2D analysis on your model, you must first define your model
as a 2D model type using the Model Type dialog box. The software displays this
dialog box when you enter Mechanica, or you can activate the dialog box from within
Mechanica by selecting Edit>Mechanica Model Type if you want to convert a 3D
model to a 2D model during your simulation session. When you define your model as
a 2D model, you use the Model Type dialog box to select the geometry on which
you want to perform the 2D analysis and a reference coordinate system. As you
prepare your 2D model, be aware that the geometry you select for analysis must be
coplanar, and the reference coordinate system must be Cartesian.
You may need to create a Cartesian reference coordinate system for your model so
that the geometry you select for 2D analysis lies in the XY plane. For 2D
axisymmetric models, all coordinates must be positive in X. To read more about
specifying a reference coordinate system for your model, see About Coordinate
Systems.
Mechanica cannot perform 2D analysis on midsurface models, sketches, or sections.
If you have a sketch on which you want to perform 2D analysis, you can extrude the
sketch into a solid in order to carry out a 2D analysis.
See Also
Example:
48
Before you start Mechanica, take a moment to consider the effects of optimization
shape changes in a wider context. Look at the various ways you use your part and
make sure that the optimization does not inadvertently change related parts.
Click on these topics to learn how optimization affects various aspects of your part:
Optimization
Optimization
Optimization
Optimization
and
and
and
and
Suppressed Features
Assemblies
Generic Parts
Reference Parts
49
50
51
To apply settings using a dialog box, enter or select values using the items on the
dialog box. When you select a button on a dialog box, additional buttons or entry
boxes related to your selection may appear on the dialog box.
The following list describes most dialog box items and how to use them:
button
check box
display-only text
entry box
list box
option menu
tab
table
52
Mechanica displays message boxes to provide you with important information you
need before continuing with a command. Some Mechanica commands use message
boxes to display a question or a message. If this is the case, the message box
includes buttons that you can use to respond to the question. You select the buttons
on these message boxes with the left mouse button. You can also select the default
response, the button with the double border, by pressing RETURN. Like dialog boxes,
a message box is a separate window that you can move or close.
Mechanica Toolbar
You can access many of the Mechanica functions by using toolbar buttons. When you
start Mechanica, a toolbar appears to the right of the graphics window.
The toolbar is customizable. Use Tools>Customize Screen to control the position
of the toolbar, and to control which icons Mechanica displays. For more information
on customizing the user interface, search the Basic Pro/ENGINEER functional area in
the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
Note: The default selection of buttons changes depending on the Mechanica
module you are in.
Click the links in the following table to get information on the functions of each
toolbar button.
Button
Description
Module*
S, SF
SF
S, SF
S, SF
S, SF
T, TF
T, TF
T, TF
TF
S, SF
S, SF
SF
53
SF
SF
SF
New Beam
S, T, SF, TF
New Interface
SF, TF
New Weld
S, T, SF, TF
New Fastener
New Measure
S, T
New Gap
SF
New Mass
S, SF
S, T, SF, TF
New Spring
S, SF
SF
SF
SF, TF
T, TF
T, TF
TF
Selection Methods
There are several ways to select entities on your model as you are performing
various Mechanica operations. These include:
54
Model Tree Use the Model Tree to select model entities from its list of
entities and features. You can select entities from the Model Tree just as you
would select them directly on your model. You can also work from the Model
Tree, highlighting an item, and then right-clicking to display information
about the selected entity.
Object Action Select any entity on your model, or on the Model Tree, and
right-click to perform operations on the shortcut menu that appears.
Search Tool Use the Search Tool dialog box to find modeling entities by
using criteria such as name, type, and property.
Using Layers
You can group different kinds of modeling entities and control their visibility in part
or assembly mode by creating and maintaining layers. For example, by placing items
on a layer, you can show or blank the items by showing or blanking the layer. You
create and maintain layers through the Layers dialog box.
When you select
on the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar, the Layers dialog box appears.
You can also access the Layers dialog box by selecting Show>Layer Tree on the
Model Tree. Use this dialog box to:
loads
constraints
shell pairs
beams
interfaces
springs
masses
You place idealizations on layers primarily so that you can hide and show the
element renderings for a layer when working with or viewing the mesh. Note that
elements associated with simulation objects are only visible if the parent objects are
55
visible. Thus, to hide and show elements, you place the associated idealizations on
layers.
In addition, you can use layers to hide and show particular idealizations or sets of
idealizations as you develop your model. You also place idealizations on layers if you
want to transfer them to independent mode as groups.
If you transfer a model to independent mode, the layers you define become groups if
the config.pro option sim_use_layers is set to "Yes" and if the assembly or part
contains layers with geometry. Layers containing datum axes and planes do not
transfer to independent mode groups. The transfer also converts all components into
groups.
In results, you can use layers to selectively display parts of your model in the results
window display. You can display or hide beam and shell definitions that you placed
on layers before running an analysis, and you can display or hide different
components of an assembly.
Here are some of the highlights of layer creation that you should consider as you
develop layers for simulation features:
For more detailed information on layers, search the Basic Pro/ENGINEER functional
area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
Managing your model through these techniques can help you simplify and organize
its modeling entities. It can also help you meet a variety of different simulation
needs without having to create and maintain separate versions of the same model.
56
For example, assume you have a model that you want to evaluate using both static
analysis and dynamic analysis. However, you want to apply a different set of
AutoGEM controls for the static analysis than you do for the dynamic analysis. In this
case, you would create all the mesh controls in the same model. But, prior to
running the static analysis, you would use the Suppress command to turn off the
dynamic analysis AutoGEM controls. With these entities suppressed, Mechanica only
uses the static analysis mesh controls and ignores the suppressed dynamic analysis
AutoGEM controls when it creates the mesh at the beginning of the static analysis.
Thus, the Suppress command has given you the option of using either of the two
AutoGEM control sets without having to maintain separate models.
You can achieve a similar effect using family tables within the simulation
environment. In this case, you would create two family table instances in your
modelinstance1 containing the static AutoGEM controls, and instance 2 containing
the dynamic analysis controls. You would work in instance 1 when running the static
analysis and instance 2 when running the dynamic analysis.
You can suppress the following modeling entities using either the Suppress
command or the family table instances:
Loads
Constraints
Connections
Idealizations
Mesh controls
The way you use the Suppress command and create family table instances in
Mechanica is similar to how you work with this functionality in Pro/ENGINEER.
However the progression, implications, and cases for use are different. To learn
about the specifics of using suppression and family tables in Mechanica, see
Suppression and Family Tables.
To learn the basics of entity suppression and family tables, search the Fundamentals
module of the PTC Help system.
57
Simulation Display
Setting Simulation Visibilities
You can control how Mechanica displays icons and mesh entities on your model. To
do so, select View>Simulation Display or click the Setup Simulation Display
button, Mechanica opens the Simulation Display dialog box. Then, use the
following tabs on the dialog box to turn on and off particular icon displays and mesh
visibility states.
At the bottom of this dialog box is the Show Simulation Entities check box. You
can use this to display or hide all simulation entity icons. This check box appears on
all tabs.
The changes you make in the Simulation Display dialog box affect the current
session only. You can change the icon visibilities to affect all Mechanica sessions by
making changes in the config.pro file.
Settings Tab
Use this tab on the Simulation Display dialog box to control the appearance of the
icons on your model. When you create certain entities, the software places an icon
on the associated geometry. Icons enable you to keep track of entities you apply, let
you select these entities for editing or deletion, and give you an idea of where you
placed these items. Displaying or hiding the icons on your model allows you to
simplify the model's appearance making it easier to view specific areas when
necessary.
58
Value
Default Value
Display Names
No names
Icons on
Icons
Icons on
Distribution
Distribution icons on
Individual Colors
Individual colors
Icon Scale
Default size
Value
Values displayed
Arrows Scaled
Arrows scaled
Heads touching
Common Settings
Load/Constraint Display
See Also
Procedure:
59
By default, Mechanica sets all accessible icons to be visible. To hide them, you can
either use the Clear All button or turn off the icons of specific idealizations or
connections.
Idealizations, Properties, and Measures
Beams
Beam Sections
Beam Releases
Springs
Gaps
Masses
Shells
Material Assignments
Measures
End/Perimeter Welds
Spot Welds
Rigid Connections
Contact Regions
Gaps
Connections
Rigid Links
Rigid Link DOFs
Weighted Links
Weighted Link DOFs
Interfaces
Fasteners
See Also
Procedure:
Loads/Constraints Tab
Use this tab on the Simulation Display dialog box to control visibilities of load and
constraint icons. Two sections of the tab list icons available in Structure and
Thermal. Although the two products do not share the icons, each having its own set,
all icons on the tab are accessible from both products.
By default, all Structure icons are set to be visible and all Thermal icons are invisible
if you are working in Structure. In Thermal, all Thermal icons are set to be on and all
Structure icons are off. If you want to change these settings, use the Clear All or
60
Select All buttons, or make individual selections in the Structure or Thermal section
of the tab.
Structure
Constraints
Cyclic Symmetry
Forces/Moments
Pressures
Bearing Loads
Gravity Load
Centrifugal Load
Global Temperature
Structural Temperature
External Temperature
MEC/T
Temperature
Radiation
Heat Loads
Volume Heat
Thermal
Prescribed Temperatures
Cyclic Symmetry
Convection Conditions
See Also
Procedure:
Mesh Tab
Use this tab on the Simulation Display dialog box to control the appearance of
meshes generated in native mode and FEM mode. Depending on which mode you are
working in, the content of the tab changes.
Native Mode
After you generate a mesh using the AutoGEM command, Mechanica displays all
mesh elements by default. You can hide them by clicking the Clear All button on the
tab or by turning off individual entities from the following list:
61
Mesh Points
Solids
Shells
Beams
Links
You can control the size of mesh entities and the quality of mesh display using the
Mesh Display area on the Mesh tab of the Simulation Display dialog box.
FEM Mode
The FEM version of the tab provides the following options for you to control the FEM
mesh display:
See Also
Reference:
Color References
Mechanica uses color to identify modeling entities, distinguish icons and geometry,
indicate the selection state of icons, show meshes, and so forth. In addition, when it
displays fringe plots, vector plots, and graphs, Mechanica uses color to show
stresses, strains, and other types of results.
Pro/ENGINEER uses several basic color schemes, among which are the default color
scheme, the black on white color scheme, and so forth. You can work in any of these
color schemes, or customize the user interface by establishing a color scheme of
your own.
Mechanica online help refers to entity and icon color when the color has significance
from a modeling perspectivesuch as the different colors of the top and bottom
surfaces in a shell pairor when the color will help you identify an entity on your
screen. Be aware that all references to color in the online help system are based on
the default color scheme. If you use a different color scheme, you will need to
understand how the colors in your scheme correspond to the colors in the default
scheme in order to correctly interpret the online help.
For information on the Pro/ENGINEER color schemes and how to set them, search
the Fundamentals functional area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To learn how to
customize the colors Mechanica uses for result windows, see Adjusting Color Scale
for Fringe, Contour, and Vector Legends and Managing Graphs.
62
Simulation Model
Tolerance Report
Review Total Load for Structure
Review Total Load for Thermal
Review Contacts
Mechanica Mass Properties
Some of the commands on the Info menu are present for all modelsfor example,
Simulation Model. Others, such as Review Total Load and Tolerance Report,
are only present for certain types of models or for models that include the
appropriate modeling entities.
63
See Also
Reference:
See Also
Reference:
Generating Reports
There are two methods you can use to create or update a configuration file:
64
You can manually enter the various configuration options into a text file using
a standard text editor like Notepad, WordPad, or vi. You perform this process
outside of Pro/ENGINEER.
You can select the Tools>Options command from within Pro/ENGINEER.
When you select this command, Pro/ENGINEER displays the Options dialog
box. You use this form to set a configuration option, update an existing
configuration file, create a new configuration file, or activate a different
configuration file.
There are also two different types of configuration filespermanent files and sessionbased files. Permanent configuration files are usually named config.pro and sessionbased configuration files are called current_session.pro. You should understand the
difference between these files before deciding which type will best suit your
situation.
For more information on configuration files and how to create them, see the
appropriate area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To review a list of the
configuration options pertinent to Mechanica and read about issues that you may
want to consider when developing a configuration file, see Configuration File Options.
shell = /bin/csh
shell = /bin/ksh
shell = /bin/sh
For a C shell, the following syntax defines the environment variable for a Sun system
when entered from the command prompt:
set MECH_ARCH=i486_nt
Online Help
Mechanica provides several types of online documents to meet various needs that
might arise in your use of the software. For the most part, you will use the topics
found in the online help. Those topics answer questions and provide instructions
related to specific menus, commands, procedures, and processes that tie directly to
tasks you are performing in the software.
In addition to the online help, Mechanica also provides supplemental online
documents that you can use to gain a more in-depth understanding of various
aspects of the software. For an overview of basic simulation tasks and workflow,
Mechanica provides Simulation Advisor.
Mechanica documents are written for mechanical engineers and assume a working
knowledge of mechanical engineering theory, terminology, and practice. However,
you do not need specialized knowledge of design analysis to use either Mechanica
software or this documentation.
Viewing methods for Mechanica help vary as follows:
For online help, use the same methods you would use for Pro/ENGINEER. For
more information on viewing help for Pro/ENGINEER, see the Pro/ENGINEER
Help Center.
For Simulation Advisor, see Using Simulation Advisor. Simulation Advisor
primarily covers the Structure product.
There are several tools that help you navigate through the help system easily. You
can use the contents, index, and search functions to help you find specific
information, and the hyperlinks inside each help topic to jump to related information.
Most online help topics have a "Return to" link at the bottom that links to the topic's
parent page or to a previous page. You can also use the browser's Back button to
return to a previous topic.
66
IndexOnline Help
Using Mechanica
o Updates for Mechanica Contains important information that does
not appear elsewhere in the documentation and that you should be
aware of before using the current Mechanica release. Also contains
descriptions of limitations you may encounter in your use of the
software.
o Long-Term Limitations Lists long-term limitations you will
encounter when using Mechanica.
o Transferring Entities From Integrated Mode to Independent
Mode Describes how to transfer geometry, loads, constraints, and
other entities from Mechanica's integrated mode to independent mode.
o Icons Used in Mechanica Illustrates and briefly describes icons
that Mechanica uses. This information is relevant mainly to
independent mode.
o Bibliography Lists references to books and articles on topics
relevant to Mechanica.
o Glossary for Mechanica Contains brief definitions of Mechanica
terms.
Mechanica Files
o Database Considerations Discusses the Mechanica database, file
interactions, Pro/ENGINEER file management commands you can use
67
Simulation Advisor
Simulation Advisor presents an overview of basic Mechanica processes, mostly for
Structure. It starts with a general workflow and goes through each of the major
areas you need to be familiar with as you create your model.
You access Simulation Advisor through the Simulation Area top page of the
Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. The majority of the Simulation Advisor provides
information on the following:
How and when you use Simulation Advisor depends on your individual needs.
Simulation Advisor lends itself to a variety of uses. As time allows, take a quick tour
through the different areas to familiarize yourself with the overall content. If you
need information on such topics as fatigue analysis or family tables or allocating
computer resources, just to name a few, Simulation Advisor can provide you with
this type of information.
68
model type Indicate whether you want Mechanica to treat your model as a
3D model or any of several 2D model types.
simulation features Add datum geometry to your model, select and create
coordinate systems, and add surface or volume regions.
idealizations Define idealized representations of your model or portions of
your model to more accurately represent your model to the solver and
improve solver efficiency.
connections Indicate how areas of your model connect and how loads
should transfer.
constraints and loads for Structure Add the loads that affect your model
and constrain the model's spatial degrees of freedom, giving the loads
something to act against.
prescribed temperatures, convection conditions, and heat loads for Thermal
Subject your model to heat loads and define the boundary conditions that
describe the model's thermal environment.
materials Define the material your model is made of.
material orientations Describe any material orientations that you want the
solver to consider.
properties Define the properties of the idealizations in your model, such as
spring properties, shell properties, beam properties, and so forth.
measures Define measures that the solver will calculate. You can define
some measures for the entire model, some for specific areas of interest, and
some for both.
AutoGEM meshes (native mode) Create a mesh for your native mode
model, determine whether the mesh is adequate for your analysis, and refine
the mesh if necessary.
FEM meshes (FEM mode) Create and evaluate a mesh for your FEM mode
model and refine the mesh if necessary.
design parameters (native mode) Add design parameters to your native
mode model so that you can determine the effect of varying geometry and
properties in your model as you strive to improve your design.
69
Model Type
About Specifying a Product, Mode, and Model
Type
When you enter Mechanica with a new model, you need to specify the product that
you want to use, the mode that you want to operate in, and the model type. You do
this using the Model Type dialog box that Mechanica displays after you select the
Applications>Mechanica command. This dialog box includes these items:
Mode area Specify the product that you want to use. You can select
Structure or Thermal.
FEM Mode In its default state, Mechanica assumes that you want to
operate in native mode. Select this check box to work in FEM mode instead.
Advanced button Open the advanced portion of the Model Type dialog
box, enabling you to choose between 3D and 2D modeling. 3D modeling is
the default for native mode. If you plan to treat your model as a 3D model
from the beginning, you do not need to use the Advanced button. However,
if you have already specified your model as a 2D model and then want to
convert it to a 3D model, you must select the Advanced button to redefine
the model as 3D.
Note: Because FEM mode supports 3D modeling only, Mechanica
deactivates the Advanced button if you select the FEM Mode check
box.
After you have defined your model using the Model Type dialog box and saved the
model, Mechanica stores the information with your model. From this point onward,
the software no longer displays the Model Type dialog box whenever you enter
Mechanica. If you want to change the product, mode, or model type, you can use the
Edit>Mechanica Model Type command. This command opens the Model Type
dialog box with its current settings. You can switch products, modes, or model types
by altering these settings.
If you tend to work in only one product or mode and you typically work with 3D
models, you can streamline your entry into Mechanicaand possibly bypass the
Model Type dialog box altogetherthrough the use of config.pro options. There are
two situations in which this might prove useful:
70
If you only use one Mechanica product If you work primarily in one
productfor example, Thermalyou can set that product as the default for
the Model Type dialog box through the simulation_product config.pro option.
In this case, the software assumes that all your models will be 3D Thermal
models and, provided the simulation_fem_mode config.pro option is set to
"yes" or "no," will bypass the Model Type dialog box when you enter
Mechanica.
If you only use FEM mode If you work exclusively in FEM mode, you can
set FEM mode as the default for the Model Type dialog box through the
simulation_fem_mode config.pro option. In this case, the software assumes
that all your models will be 3D FEM mode models, and the FEM Mode check
IndexModel Type
box will be turned on by default whenever the Model Type dialog box
displays for a new model. If you also set the product type using the
simulation_product config.pro option, the software will default to your chosen
product and will bypass the Model Type dialog box altogether when you
enter Mechanica. You will then automatically work in FEM mode for the
chosen product.
Thermal
3D
3D
2D Axisymmetric
2D Axisymmetric
If you select one of the 2D model types, Mechanica activates the Geometry and
Coordinate System areas of the dialog box. You use these areas as follows:
Geometry area Select the 2D geometry that you want to use for your 2D
model.
Coordinate System area Select a reference Cartesian coordinate system
so that Mechanica can correctly interpret your model and verify that the loads
and constraints lie in the model plane.
Be aware that if your model meets the criteria for a 2D model type, you can save
significant calculation time when you run a design study. Additionally, if you perform
a function that removes the highlighting of your 2D model, you can use the Repaint
option to restore the highlighting.
Regardless of which model type you select, Mechanica creates a mesh made up of
elements specific to the model type. The type of elements that Mechanica creates for
the model type depends on whether you are working in Structure or Thermal.
After you select a model type, Mechanica adjusts commands and dialog boxes to
reflect the idealizations and degrees of freedom available for the model type you
selected. If you change the model type later, Mechanica will delete a variety of
modeling entities such as loads, constraints, thermal boundary conditions,
71
idealizations, and meshes. It will, however, keep predefined measures and design
parameters.
See Also
Procedures:
shells
connections
beams
spot welds
You can define loads, constraints, design parameters, and other model attributes in
six degrees of freedom for a 3D model:
translation in X, Y, and Z
rotation in X, Y, and Z
See Also
Procedure:
References:
About Idealizations
Guidelines for Working with Model Types
72
IndexModel Type
All included geometry must lie in the XY plane of the Cartesian coordinate
system that you select as the reference coordinate system for your model. If
you are working with assemblies, all included geometry from the assembly
components must lie at the same Z depth.
Loads and displacements must be in the XY plane.
For 2D plane stress models, Mechanica meshes your model using 2D plate elements.
To successfully run an analysis, you must first assign a simple or advanced shell
idealization to any surfaces you plan to include in your plane stress model. In
addition to the shell idealizations that you must assign, you can create the mass and
spring idealizations for a 2D plane stress model.
As mentioned, you must use a Cartesian coordinate system as the model type
reference coordinate system. However, you can base other modeling entities on
Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate systems. You can define loads,
constraints, design parameters, and other model attributes in two degrees of
freedom for a plane stress modeltranslation in X and Y (or the cylindrical and
spherical equivalents).
See Also
Procedures:
References:
About Idealizations
Guidelines for Working with Model Types
All included geometry must lie in the XY plane of the Cartesian coordinate
system that you select as the reference coordinate system for your model. If
you are working with assemblies, all included geometry from the assembly
components must lie at the same Z depth.
Loads and displacements must be in the XY plane.
73
If your model meets these criteria, you can model a cross-section of your structure
as a 2D plane strain model using shells or solids, or a combination of both.
Depending on your choice, Mechanica takes one of the following actions:
In addition to shell idealizations, you can create the mass and spring idealizations for
a 2D plane strain model.
As mentioned, you must use a Cartesian coordinate system as the model type
reference coordinate system. However, you can base other modeling entities on
Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate systems. You can define loads,
constraints, design parameters, and other model attributes in three degrees of
freedom for a plane strain model:
For solid treatments of your model, only two degrees of freedom are available
translation in X and Y.
See Also
Procedures:
References:
About Idealizations
Guidelines for Working with Model Types
74
IndexModel Type
All included geometry must lie in the XY plane of the Cartesian coordinate
system that you select as the reference coordinate system for your model. If
you are working with assemblies, all included geometry from the assembly
components must lie at the same Z depth.
All the geometry must lie in the X > 0 portion of the XY plane.
Loads and displacements must be specified in the XY plane.
If your model meets these criteria, you can model a cross-section of your structure
as a 2D axisymmetric model using shells or solids, or a combination of both. When
you use a cross-section for 2D axisymmetric modeling, you need to observe several
rules that govern Mechanica's ability to treat the cross-section geometry as an entity
that can be revolved about an axis. These rules differ depending on whether you are
working with surfaces or curves.
Depending on how you treat your model, Mechanica takes one of the following
actions:
In addition to shell idealizations, you can create the mass and spring idealizations for
a plane strain model.
As mentioned, you must use a Cartesian coordinate system as the model type
reference coordinate system. However, you can base other modeling entities on
Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate systems. You can define loads,
75
For solid treatments of your model, only two degrees of freedom are available
translation in X and Y.
See Also
Procedures:
References:
About Idealizations
Guidelines for Working with Model Types
shells
connections
beams
spot welds
You can define loads, constraints, design parameters, and other model attributes in
six degrees of freedom for a 3D model:
translation in X, Y, and Z
rotation in X, Y, and Z
76
IndexModel Type
See Also
Procedure:
References:
About Idealizations
Guidelines for Working with Model Types
See Also
Procedures:
References:
About Idealizations
Guidelines for Working with Model Types
77
See Also
Procedures:
References:
About Idealizations
Guidelines for Working with Model Types
All included geometry must lie in the XY plane of the Cartesian coordinate
system that with assemblies, all included geometry from the assembly
components must lie at the same Z depth.
All the geometry must lie in the X > 0 portion of the XY plane.
If your model meets these criteria, you can model a cross-section of your structure
as a 2D axisymmetric model using shells or solids, or a combination of both. When
you use a cross-section for 2D axisymmetric modeling, you need to observe several
rules that govern Mechanica's ability to treat the cross-section geometry as an entity
that can be revolved about an axis. These rules differ depending on whether you are
working with surfaces or curves.
78
IndexModel Type
Depending on how you treat your model, Mechanica takes one of the following
actions:
See Also
Procedures:
References:
About Idealizations
Guidelines for Working with Model Types
supported for 2D plane strain and 2D plane stress models, but not for 2D
axisymmetric models.
You can perform a contact analysis on two disjoint surfaces.
Mechanica cannot perform 2D analysis on midsurface models, sketches, or
sections.
Mechanica treats assemblies that include 2D components differently
depending on whether the top-level assembly component is a 2D or 3D
component. Here is a summary of the difference:
o If the top-level component is 2D, Mechanica suppresses most
simulation data from lower-level assembly components, including
loads, constraints, boundary conditions, properties, and idealizations.
o If the top-level component is 3D, Mechanica suppresses the simulation
data listed above from any 2D lower-level assembly component.
If you switch between 2D and 3D model types for the top-level component, Mechanica
suppresses or unsuppresses lower-level component simulation data according to the rules
just described.
See Also
Reference:
80
IndexFeatures
If you want to create pure shell models for any of the model types just listed, be sure to
select edges only.
4. Use the arrow selector in the Coordinate System area to select the
Cartesian coordinate system that you want to use as the reference coordinate
system for your 2D model.
All the selected geometry must lie in the XY plane of the reference coordinate system you
select. For 2D axisymmetric models only, all geometry must lie in the positive X direction
relative to the coordinate system.
See Also
References:
Features
About Features
Use the Insert>Model Datum command to create simulation features on your
model. Simulation features are modeling features, such as datum points and
coordinate systems, that you can use to help define modeling entities, such as loads
and constraints.
81
Mechanica saves and regenerates these features each time you reenter the
Mechanica environment. You can promote certain simulation features (datum points,
datum curves, datum planes, and datum axes) to Pro/ENGINEER features, where
they remain permanently visible. If you do not promote the features, they are not
visible in Pro/ENGINEER. You cannot promote coordinate systems, surface regions,
or volume regions to Pro/ENGINEER.
You can create the following simulation features. Click on these topics for more
information:
Datum points
Datum curves
Datum planes
Coordinate systems
Datum axes
Surface regions
Volume regions
You can add simulation features to your model while you are working with modeling
entities such as loads, constraints, and beams. To do so, use the datum features
creation buttons on the toolbar.
See Also
References:
82
IndexFeatures
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Creating Features
Datum Feature Creation
Use the Insert>Model Datum command and its subcommands to create datum
features. You can create the following datum features from these subcommands.
Curve Takes you directly to the CRV OPTIONS menu, from which you can
select the type of datum curve you want to create.
Plane Takes you directly to the DATUM PLANE dialog box, which you can
use to create and place the datum plane.
Axis Takes you directly to the DATUM AXIS dialog box, which you can
use to create and place the datum axis.
Point Takes you directly to the DATUM POINT dialog box, which you can
use to create and place the datum point.
Coordinate System Takes you directly to the OPTIONS menu from which
you can select the method you want to use to create the coordinate system.
For information on these methods, you can use the help information on the
status bar or search for coordinate system information in the Part Modeling
functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
83
The methods that you use to create datum points, curves, axes, and planes are the
same as those you use in Pro/ENGINEER. For more information, search the Part
Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. If you create datum
curves, datum planes, datum axes, or datum points in Mechanica, you can promote
them so they are permanently visible and accessible in Pro/ENGINEER.
Simulation Feature Creation Methods
Simulation features are modeling features that you create while you are working in
Mechanicaeither native mode or FEM mode. These features exist only in your
Mechanica session and are not visible in Pro/ENGINEER unless you promote them.
Mechanica saves and regenerates simulation features each time you reenter the
Mechanica environment.
You can use simulation features to help define modeling entities, such as loads and
constraints. You can create simulation features on your model in three different
ways:
Use the icons on the toolbar to create datum axes, datum points, datum
curves, or datum planes.
See Also
Reference:
84
IndexFeatures
Datum Point
Use the Insert>Model Datum>Point command to create datum points. You may
need datum points on your model to create a number of Mechanica modeling
entities. For example, point loads, springs, and Near Point measures require a
datum point.
When you select Insert>Model Datum>Point, Mechanica opens the DATUM
POINT dialog box, which you use just as you would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you are
working with an assembly, Mechanica displays the FEM SELCOMP menu first. Use
this menu to indicate whether you want to create the datum point at the assembly
level or on one of the assembly components.
Note: As an alternative, you can create the datum point by selecting the
Insert>Model Datum>Point command and then selecting the Sketched,
Offset Coordinate System, or Field command. If you use these methods,
you work with dialog boxes other than the DATUM POINT dialog box.
Also, you can use the
button to add a datum point to your model during the
creation of other Mechanica entities. For more information on these methods of
creating datum points, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER
Help Center.
When you create datum points, Mechanica treats the points as simulation features.
Simulation features are not visible or accessible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER
unless you promote them.
See Also
Procedure:
85
As an alternative, you can create the datum point by selecting the Insert>Model
Datum>Point command and then selecting the Sketched, Offset Coordinate
System, or Field command. If you use these methods, you work with dialog boxes
other than the DATUM POINT dialog box. For more information on these methods
of creating datum points, search the Part Modeling functional area of the
Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
Datum Plane
Use the Insert>Model Datum>Plane command to create datum planes. You may
need datum planes on your model to create a number of Mechanica modeling
entities. For example, you can use datum planes as references for modeling other
simulation features, like datum curves, volume regions, and so on.
When you select this command, Mechanica opens the DATUM PLANE dialog box,
which you use just as you would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you are working with an
assembly, Mechanica displays the FEM SELCOMP menu first. Use this menu to
indicate whether you want to create the datum plane at the assembly level or on one
of the assembly components.
Also, you can use the
button to add a datum plane to your model during the
creation of other Mechanica entities. For more information on creating datum planes,
search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
When you create datum planes, Mechanica treats the planes as simulation features.
Simulation features are not visible or accessible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER
unless you promote them.
See Also
Procedure:
2. Use this dialog box to define the datum plane placement and properties.
3. Click OK.
The DATUM PLANE dialog box functions as it does in Pro/ENGINEER. For more
information on the dialog box, search the Part Modeling functional area of the
Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
86
IndexFeatures
Datum Axis
Use the Insert>Model Datum>Axis to create datum axes. You may need datum
axes on your model to create a number of Mechanica modeling entities. For example,
you can use a datum axis when designing a cyclic symmetry constraint or defining a
coordinate system.
When you select this command, Mechanica opens the DATUM AXIS dialog box,
which you use just as you would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you are working with an
assembly, Mechanica displays the FEM SELCOMP menu first. Use this menu to
indicate whether you want to create the datum axis at the assembly level or on one
of the assembly components.
Also, you can use the
button to add a datum axis to your model during the
creation of other Mechanica entities. For more information on creating datum axes,
search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
When you create datum axes, Mechanica treats the axes as simulation features.
Simulation features are not visible or accessible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER
unless you promote them.
See Also
Procedure:
Datum Curve
Use the Insert>Model Datum>Curve command to create datum curves. You may
need datum curves on your model to create a number of Mechanica modeling
entities. For example, some loads and constraints can require a datum curve for
designing certain idealization features, like beams.
87
When you select this command, Mechanica opens the CRV OPTIONS menu, which
you use just as you would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you are working with an assembly,
Mechanica displays the FEM SELCOMP menu first. Use this menu to indicate
whether you want to create the datum curve at the assembly level or on one of the
assembly components.
Note: As an alternative, you can create the datum curve using the
Insert>Model Datum>Sketched Curve command. If you use this method,
you work with the Sketched Datum Curve dialog box.
Also, you can use the
button to add a datum curve to your model during the
creation of other Mechanica entities. For more information on creating datum curves,
search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
When you create datum curves, Mechanica treats the curves as simulation features.
Simulation features are not visible or accessible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER
unless you promote them.
See Also
Procedure:
88
IndexFeatures
Coordinate Systems
You can create a coordinate system using one of the following methods:
Click
In either case, you may want to make the new coordinate system current if you plan
to use it as a reference for multiple modeling entities.
Also see Axis and Component Equivalents in Different Coordinate Systems and
Coordinate System Guidelines for more information.
See Also
Procedures:
References:
89
Click
Datum Coordinate System Tool) on the Pro/ENGINEER
toolbar.
After using one of these methods, the COORDINATE SYSTEM dialog box appears.
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
Surface Region
Use the Insert>Surface Region command to create surface regions. Surface
regions enable you to split up a surface so you can perform an operation on a portion
of a surface, such as applying loads or constraints. Applying a load to a region is
useful for models that require forces in one or more specific areas of a surface.
Region definition is a two-step process:
90
IndexFeatures
Second, you identify the contour as a region boundary, in effect splitting the
bounded area from the parent surface. To do this, you use the SURFACE
REGION dialog box.
Before you assign a surface region, consider the effect the new region will have on
your model. After you fully define a surface region, you can apply constraints, loads,
and contact regions to the region, exclusive of the parent surface or other regions on
that surface. All rules and procedures that govern loads, constraints, and contact
regions applied to full surfaces hold true when you apply these entities to surface
regions.
See Also
Procedure:
Be sure the contours you plan to use as region boundaries are in place.
If you add surface regions to a fully periodic surface such as a cylinder, cone,
or sphere, be sure to select both the segments that make up the surface. This
approach eliminates problems like improper region handling if you leave
Mechanica and change the periodic surface's geometry.
When you add or remove a region for a surface you already defined as part of
a shell model pair, Mechanica invalidates the associated pairing scheme, and
informs you of the situation. Thus, if you plan to treat your part as a shell
model, create all regions before pairing your part surfaces.
If you cannot avoid adding or removing a region associated with a paired
surface, redefine your pairing scheme to include both the region and parent
surface as part of the pair before starting Mechanica analysis. For information
on how the software creates shell pairs, see Pairing Schemes.
If you plan to place loads on surface regions for a shell model, see Model
Entities and Idealizations for information on how Mechanica processes this
type of load.
When you add a region to a surface that already has a constraint, load, or
contact region, Mechanica associates the modeling entity with both surfaces.
The program adjusts the constraint, load, or contact region icon according to
the new placement of the entity.
Thus, if you add a region to a surface, be sure to review any associated
constraint, load, or contact region placement. Otherwise, the load the surface
sees may not be what or where you expect. In the case of constraints, the
constraint may no longer be sufficient to prevent rigid body movement.
91
Add a datum curve Create a datum curve directly on the surface you
want to split.
If the surface region you want to define requires more than one curve to
complete, you can define the region using multiple datum curves. If you use
multiple datum curves, you must compile all defining curves into a single
composite curve. For more information, search for datum curves and
composite datum curves in the Part Modeling area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help
Center.
Add a projected sketch Create the desired shape as a datum curve and
project the curve onto the surface you want to subdivide. While projecting the
curve, Pro/ENGINEER treats connected datum curves as composites.
See Also
Reference:
Datum Curve
IndexFeatures
4. Use the SURFACE REGION dialog box to define the surface region by
selecting or creating the curve that defines the region and then selecting the
surface that you want Mechanica to split into regions.
Volume Region
Use the Insert>Volume Region command to create a volume region so you can
break a part into multiple volumes. Volume regions are primarily useful for:
facilitating mesh refinement for both AutoGEM and the FEM solvers
adding heat loads to internal surfaces of a parent volume. In this case, you
apply the heat load to one or more of the surfaces created by the volume
region.
applying different material properties to different volumes in FEM mode. In
this case, you apply one material property to your part and another to the
defining surface for the volume region. Mechanica propagates the material
property throughout the volume region.
When you select the Volume Region command, Mechanica displays the SOLID
OPTS menu with these options:
These commands open various versions of the VOLUME REGION dialog boxthe
tool you use to create the geometry that will define the volume region. The
procedure for creating volume region geometry using these options is almost
identical to the procedure you use to create similar features in Pro/ENGINEER. For
more information, search the Part Modeling area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
After you create the volume region, Mechanica treats the volume region geometry as
a region boundary, in effect splitting the bounded area from the parent volume.
See Also
Procedure:
93
Var Sec Swp Create a volume region based on a variable section sweep of
a surface from the trajectories of points on the swept surface.
Swept Blend Create a volume region based on a swept blend from
sections at different points on the trajectory of sweep.
Helical Swp Create a volume region based on a sweep along the
trajectory defined by profile and pitch.
Boundaries Create a volume region based on the boundaries of a surface.
Sect To Srfs Create a volume region based on a transitional surface
between a set of tangent surfaces and a sketched contour.
Srfs to Srfs Create a volume region based on a blend from one tangent
surface to another.
From File Create a volume region based on blend sections that are
specified from a file.
TangentToSrf Create a volume region that is tangent to a surface.
For more information on these techniques, search the Part Modeling functional area
in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
Connections
About Connections
Use the Insert>Connection command to create connections in Mechanica. A
connection is the area of contact between two assembly components. When
analyzing an assembly for which you have created connections, the software uses
the connection type and definition to determine the nature of the contact between
the connected areas.
You can create the following kinds of connections:
94
IndexConnections
Native Mode
FEM Mode
welds
welds
interfaces
interfaces
fasteners
rigid links
rigid connections
weighted links
contacts
gaps
If you work with native mode assemblies that include compressed midsurface shells,
you need to consider how you want Mechanica to treat mated and overlapping
surfaces. Wherever the surfaces of a component modeled with midsurfaces mate or
overlap with the surfaces of another component, Mechanica creates automatic
midsurface connections between all contacting surfaces of the two components.
Mechanica makes an exception for any surface where you explicitly create a weld,
fastener, rigid connection, or free interface.
See Also
References:
Gaps in Parts
Gaps in Assemblies
Welds
You can use welds in Mechanica to bridge the gaps that form during shell
compression between plates that have been mated because they touch or overlap.
You can create the following types of welds:
End Welds
Perimeter Welds
Spot Welds (native mode)
When you work with native mode assemblies that include compressed midsurface
shells, you need to consider how you want Mechanica to treat mated and overlapping
surfaces. Wherever the surfaces of a component modeled with midsurfaces mate or
overlap with the surfaces of another component, Mechanica creates automatic
midsurface connections between all contacting surfaces of the two components.
Mechanica makes an exception for any surface where you create welds, fasteners, or
rigid connections. If you do not want Mechanica to apply automatic midsurface
connections to given surfaces, you need to use one of the connection types just
mentioned or assign free interfaces to those surfaces.
95
See Also
Procedures:
End Welds
Use end welds in assembly models to connect plates. Plates can be curved and
placed at oblique or right angles, such as T or L configurations. Using the end weld,
the shell mesh from one plate is extended to meet the mesh from the base plate, as
shown here:
96
IndexConnections
When Mechanica creates an end weld, it attempts to keep the neighboring geometry
consistent. When a plane surface is moved to a new location during the shell
compression process (to the midsurface of its contacting surface), sometimes the
surface cannot be extended to the new location. You must make sure, therefore, that
a surface to which you are adding an end weld can be extended in this way. If it
cannot be extended, consider using the automatic midsurface connection provided by
Mechanica.
You can use end welds to join the following entities:
See Also
Procedure:
See Also
97
Procedures:
Perimeter Welds
Use perimeter welds in assembly models to connect parallel plates, that may be
curved, along the perimeter of one of the plates, as shown here:
98
IndexConnections
See Also
Procedure:
See Also
Procedures:
99
6. Enter a thickness for the shell elements that will represent the perimeter
weld.
The perimeter weld icon appears between the two surfaces.
Spot Welds
Use spot welds to connect two somewhat parallel surfaces at a datum point you
specify. Mechanica creates a spot weld entity that connects the two surfaces using a
circular beam section to simulate the weld. Spot welds are not available in FEM
mode.
When you add spot welds to your model, Mechanica connects the two surfaces in a
circular spot at a point, and transfers displacements from one part to another. If you
are creating an assembly that has rivets, spot welds are one way to model the rivets.
When working with spot welds, be aware of the following:
The surfaces that you connect must be within 15 of being parallel to each
other, and some distance apart. The surfaces cannot be touching.
Spot welds transfer load forces. However, stresses close to the welds can be
inaccurate.
You cannot apply beam releases to the beams created with spot welds.
See Also
Procedure:
IndexConnections
For each spot weld, Mechanica adds a spot weld icon and a beam icon to your
model.
Rigid Connections
About Rigid Connections
A rigid connection connects geometric entities such as surfaces, curves, and points
so that they remain rigidly connected during an analysis. Use the
Insert>Connection>Rigid Connection>Create command to create rigid
connections in your model. Rigid connections are not available in FEM mode.
When you connect entities using rigid connections, be aware of the following:
Because Mechanica uses linear constraint equations to enforce the rigid rotations,
rather than equations with sines and cosines, you should use rigid connections only
for small rotation angles of rigidly connected entities. Use rigid connections in this
way, even if you intend to use them in a large deformation analysis.
The following apply to 3D and 2D models:
Additionally, you can use rigid connections to connect two or more parts at selected
surfaces, or to help idealize complex models. For example, you can use a rigid
connection to connect a point mass representing an engine to the engine mount bolt
holes.
You can create a rigid connection from one point to a second point. If you are
working with a 3D model, at least one of the points must meet one of these two
conditions:
You can create a rigid connection from one or more curves or surfaces on your model
to a free point that is not otherwise associated with the model geometry. Use a rigid
connection from a surface to a free point with a constraint, for example, to model a
pin support. If you create a rigid connection from one edge, to a free point, and then
to a second edge, the two edges will move together when you apply a load.
101
When you create a rigid connection to a free point, be aware of the following:
See Also
Procedures:
IndexConnections
Mechanica highlights the entities you defined as associated with this rigid connection.
4. Use the normal selection methods to deselect any of the highlighted entities,
and/or select new ones.
5. Click OK to complete the edit.
Fasteners
About Fasteners
Fasteners simulate bolt or screw connections joining two assembly components.
Using fasteners, you can simulate the load path within the assembly as well as the
amount of load carried by each bolt or screw. Fasteners are not available in FEM
mode or for Thermal.
If you plan to add fasteners to your model, the model must meet the certain basic
conditions. In most cases, Mechanica informs you if your model does not meet these
conditions as you are creating the fastener. However, certain problems do not
become apparent until you mesh or analyze the model.
Mechanica models fastener stiffness using springs. When it meshes a model that
includes fasteners, Mechanica tailors the mesh to improve results about the fastener.
The mesh also accounts for the pressure exerted by the bolt head and nut or screw
head by refining the mesh in that area.
You can use the Insert>Connection>Fastener command to create fasteners in
your model. You can create either simple or advanced fasteners:
Simple Fasteners Mechanica creates the fastener using the material and
shaft diameter you specify. The software develops all of the fastener
characteristics based solely on these specifications and various assumptions
concerning part separation, rotation, and so forth.
Advanced Fasteners You have the option of creating a fastener based on
either material and shaft diameter or on spring properties. Additionally, you
can specify various aspects of fastener behavior such as whether the fastener
carries shear, restricts rotations for the fastened parts, includes preloads, and
so forth.
Regardless of the fastener type, you can only create fasteners made of isotropic
materials.
103
After you create a fastener, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon
on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you
are deleting a fastener, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
Modeling Prerequisites
If you plan to add fasteners to your model, the model must meet the following basic
conditions:
The model must be an assembly. You can add as many fasteners to your
assembly as you want, but you can only pass any given fastener through two
components.
Mechanica does not support zero-length fasteners. When adding fasteners to
quilt assemblies, you can inadvertently create zero-length fasteners if you do
not correctly account for shell thickness when you place the assembly
components. To prevent this problem, be sure to impose offsets equivalent to
at least:
(part1 shell thickness + part2 shell thickness) / 2
When adding fasteners to midsurface assemblies, take care that the
midsurface offsets you use do not result in direct contact between two
midsurfaces you intend to fasten.
If you plan to create a fastener based on actual holes in your model, both
components must have holes through which the bolt or screw pass. In the
case of bolts, both holes must fully pierce the component. For screws, only
the component on the screw head side of the fastener connection must be
fully pierced. The component on the screw tip side can be fully or partially
pierced.
Any hole that participates in a fastener connection must be a right cylindrical
hole. In other words, the hole must be perpendicular to the component surface
and have straight sides.
The two holes must be approximately the same size, with the hole axes not
further apart than 5% of the hole diameter. The axes of the holes must also be
approximately parallel to each other. If the axes are not parallel to within 5 ,
Mechanica warns you.
104
IndexConnections
Fastener Meshes
When it meshes a model that includes fasteners, Mechanica creates the mesh
according to the type of fastener you specify and refines the mesh about the fastener
to increase the accuracy of your results. To create the mesh, Mechanica determines
whether the fastener is a bolt or screw, then creates one or two annular areas about
the fastener hole depending on whether the fastener is a bolt or screw, as shown
below. Note that the annular area serves only to guide mesh creation, and does not
appear as an entity or simulation feature on your model.
The illustration shows that if the fastener is a bolt, Mechanica creates two annular
areasone on each of the outside fastener surfaces where the bolt head and nut
would contact the fastened components. For screws, Mechanica creates the annular
area on the screw head side only.
In both cases, the size of the annular area is equivalent to the head diameter. For
simple fasteners and most advanced fasteners, Mechanica assumes the head
diameter to be 1.7 times the hole diameter. However, if you define a preload,
Mechanica instead uses the head diameter you specify as part of the preload
definition.
The annular areas act as a form of mesh control enforcing smaller elements within its
boundaries than might ordinarily be present on the surface. When Mechanica meshes
the model, it ensures that no element boundaries cross the border of the annular
area. For solid models, this surface mesh refinement extends into the volume,
radiating outward from the annular area so that you typically see a concentration of
small elements about the annular area with element size increasing as you move
105
away. This mesh refinement enables Mechanica to more accurately calculate the
pressure introduced by the fastener head and, for bolts, the fastener nut.
If you create simple fasteners or turn on Fix Separation for an advanced fastener,
Mechanica creates additional annular areas on the inner surfaces as follows.
Here, Mechanica inserts the separation annular areas where the two inner surfaces
would contact, enabling Mechanica to correctly model the separation for the solver.
These annular areas have a similar effect on the mesh as do the ones for the
fastener head and nutthey serve to refine the mesh about the separation area and
ensure that element boundaries do not cross the border.
For simple fasteners and for advanced fasteners defined using hole references or
materials and diameter, the separation annular areas are always 2 the diameter of
the fastener shaft. If you define advanced fasteners using both point references and
spring stiffness properties, the separation annular areas are always 1.4 (t1 + t2)
where t1 is the thickness of the first fastener component and t2 is the thickness of
the second.
Note: If you are working with a midsurface model or a pure surface, the
fastener head and nut annular areas physically coincide with the separation
annular areas. In this case, Mechanica uses the fastener head to determine the
size of the shared annular area.
Creating Fasteners
When you select the Insert>Connection>Fastener command, the Fastener
Definition dialog box appears. The following items appear on the Fastener
Definition dialog box:
106
Name Specify a name for the fastener. If you do not specify a name,
Mechanica uses a default name of Fastener1, Fastener2, and so forth.
References Specify the reference type and select geometric entities for
your fastener. If you already selected valid geometric references for the
fastener before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the
IndexConnections
selector arrow when the dialog box appears. Otherwise, use the selector
arrow and the regular selection methods to choose the desired geometry.
Type Specify either Simple or Advanced. The remaining fields on the
dialog box change depending on your selection.
After you define the fastener and click the OK button, Mechanica automatically
creates measures that compute the stresses in the fastener. Mechanica also adds a
fastener icon to your model. The size of the icon depends on the head size of the
fastener, which is either automatically defined or based on a preload you define.
See Also
Procedures:
Fastener References
You can select from several fastener reference types when you define the location
and nature of your fastener. The way you define references indicates the type of
fastener you are creatingbolt or screwas well as the holes or points through
which the fastener passes.
To define the fastener references, select one of the following reference types on the
Fastener Definition dialog box:
Bolt (edges of holes) Select two edges of holes. The holes can be
through either a solid or a surface. The holes you select must meet certain
criteria. Mechanica designates the hole associated with the first edge you
select as the head side of the bolt.
Bolt (points on surfaces) Select one point on each of two quilts or
midsurfaces. If you select this form of reference, your model need not contain
actual holes. Instead, Mechanica uses the points you select to form the bolt
centerline. The points you select must meet certain criteria. Mechanica
designates the surface associated with the first point you select as the head
side of the bolt.
Note: Before meshing or analyzing the model, you must assign shell
idealizations to both quilts.
Screw (edges of holes) Select two edges of holes. The holes can be
through either a solid or a surface. As with bolts, the holes you select must
meet certain criteria. Mechanica designates the hole associated with the first
edge you select as the head side of the screw.
107
Simple Fasteners
Simple Fasteners
After you select Simple as a fastener type on the Fastener Definition dialog box,
the following items appear:
Diameter Specify the diameter of the fastener shaft. You can use a realnumber value, parameter name, or expression. If you are using holes as
references, Mechanica sets the default in the Diameter field to the diameter
of the smallest fastener hole. If you change the default diameter, be sure you
do not enter a negative number or specify a diameter larger than the
diameter of the smaller hole. If you are using points as references, Mechanica
does not display a default diameter in the Diameter field.
Materials Specify the material that the fastener is made of. Click the
arrow to display a drop-down list of material properties already associated
with your model. If you do not see what you want in the drop-down list, use
the More button to display more materials, or to create a new material.
Note: Because you can not use orthotropic or transversely isotropic
materials when creating fasteners, the drop-down list contains only
isotropic materials.
IndexConnections
7. Select a material from the drop-down list. If you do not see the material you
want, click More to select a material from the library or to define a new one.
8. Click OK.
The fastener icon appears at the fastener location.
Advanced Fasteners
Advanced Fasteners
After you select Advanced as a fastener type on the Fastener Definition dialog
box, the following items appear:
Stiffness Specify the method you are using to define the fastener as
follows:
Using Material And Diameter Define the fastener by specifying
the fastener diameter and material.
Using Spring Stiffness Property Define the fastener by specifying
the spring properties of the fastener.
Depending on your choice, the items available on the dialog box change.
109
When you select the Using Material and Diameter option to define fastener
stiffness, the Fastener Definition dialog box displays or activates the following
items:
Diameter Specify the diameter of the fastener shaft. You can use a realnumber value, parameter name, or expression. If you are using holes as
references, Mechanica sets the default in the Diameter field to the diameter
of the smallest fastener hole. If you change the default diameter, be sure you
do not enter a negative number or specify a diameter larger than the
diameter of the smaller hole. If you are using points as references, Mechanica
does not display a default diameter in the Diameter field.
Materials Specify the material of the fastener. Click the arrow to display a
drop-down list of material properties already associated with your model. If
you do not see what you want in the drop-down list, use the More button to
display more materials, or to create a new material.
Note: Because you can not use orthotropic or transversely isotropic materials when
creating fasteners, the drop-down list contains only isotropic materials.
110
IndexConnections
Note that, for any spring property you select or define when creating fasteners, you
must ensure that Kyy = Kzz. Also, to prevent components from rotating relative to
each other about the fastener axis, be sure to specify a relatively high axial
rotational stiffnessTxx.
Fastener Preloads
For advanced fasteners on solid components, you can define the tensile preload that
results from the torque you expect the fastener to be tightened to. With this
information, Mechanica can calculate such behaviors as component compression and
fastener tension, allowing more realistic distribution of stresses between the fastener
and the fastened components.
If you select the Include Preload check box, the Fastener Definition dialog box
displays the following items. For any of these items, you can enter a real-number
value, parameter name, or expression.
Preload Force Define the tensile force in the fastener that results from
tightening the bolt or screw. You must express the force as a positive value.
Fastener Head and Nut Diameter Define the head and nut diameter for
the fastener. You can specify a head and nut diameter for screws as well as
bolts. If the fastener is a bolt, Mechanica uses the value you enter for both
the head and nut. For screws, there is no nut, so the value applies to the
head only. If you do not specify the value, Mechanica uses the default value
displayed in this field, which is 1.7 the fastener shaft diameter.
Separation Test Diameter Define an area within which Mechanica will
track normal stresses during analysis. Mechanica uses the value you specify
to determine a sampling area about the fastener. This area is an annulus with
the inside ring as the fastener shaft/hole diameter and the outside ring as the
separation test diameter. These annular areas are located on the inner
surfaces of the fastener components.
111
As the analysis runs, Mechanica checks the normal stresses at sampling points in the
annular area to be sure the stresses remain less than zero. Values of zero or greater
mean that there is no compression between the components and the components are
separating. Mechanica reports this situation in the analysis summary.
If you do not specify a value for Separation Test Diameter, Mechanica uses a default
value that it determines as follows:
Contact Regions
About Contact Regions
Use the Insert>Connection>Contact Region>Create command to create contact
regions for use in a native mode contact analysis.
A contact region indicates the curves or surfaces on which Mechanica considers the
effects during a contact analysis.
Mechanica ignores contact regions for all other analysis types.
You can create contact regions for:
112
IndexConnections
2D models
3D models
After you create a contact region, you can review it to ensure that you have correctly
selected the geometric entities that you want to include in the contact region. You
can also delete the contact region using the Insert>Connection>Contact
Region>Delete command
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
Contact Analysis
The distance between the curves must be less than one half of the average of
the lengths of the two curves.
At one or more points along the first curve, the normal to the first curve must
intersect the second curve.
A contact region associated with the two selected curves cannot already exist.
Mechanica also checks to see if any points in common between the two selected
curves will prevent the curves from moving completely apart during an analysis. If
there are any such points, a warning box appears and you should respond
appropriately.
For each valid pair of curves, Mechanica places a contact region icon at the point
where the curves are closest to each other, oriented along the point of closest
approach.
113
The distance between the two surfaces must be less than one half the
average of the length of the diagonals of the surfaces.
Tip: When creating contacts between surfaces, Structure limits the
separation distance and angle between the two surfaces. If you are
certain that the two surfaces will eventually contact and you want to
work around this restriction, move the surfaces together, define the
contact region, and then move them apart again.
The surfaces must be no more than 36 off parallel at one point at minimum.
A contact region associated with the two selected surfaces cannot already
exist.
For each valid pair of surfaces, Mechanica places a contact region icon at the point
where the surfaces are closest to each other, oriented along the point of closest
approach.
114
IndexConnections
You can use the Insert>Connection>Rigid Link command to create rigid links in
your model. After you create a rigid link, you can edit or delete it by selecting the
associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as
appropriate. If you are deleting a rigid link, Mechanica asks you for confirmation
first.
While creating, editing, or deleting rigid links, keep in mind the following:
Use the rules that govern the way you work with the rigid links.
Control visibility of the rigid link icons by using the View>Simulation
Display command. Mechanica places two iconsone for the link, another for
the degrees of freedomon the model.
Place the rigid links on layers.
Use object action to make any changes to the rigid links.
Mechanica outputs rigid links as RBAR cards to be used with the NASTRAN solver.
One rigid link may create multiple RBAR cards in the output NASTRAN deck. Because
Mechanica supports only NASTRAN for the rigid link output, if you try to choose
another solver, Mechanica ignores the rigid link. Mechanica does not output the rigid
link whose dependent side has constraints.
115
See Also
Procedure:
References Use to specify the reference type and select geometry for your
rigid link. The first geometric entity you select applies to the independent
side of the link, and the secondto the dependent. If you already selected
valid geometric references for your rigid link before entering the dialog box,
your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box opens.
Otherwise, use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods to
choose the desired geometry.
You can select one of the following reference types:
Note: You cannot override the displacement coordinate system that has
been earlier specified by another rigid link, load, or constraint
associated with the selected reference entity.
If you output to NASTRAN, conflicts between coordinate systems may
occur.
Note that if you change references or delete a link that has already been meshed,
Mechanica erases the mesh.
116
IndexConnections
After you create your rigid link, Mechanica displays two icons on the modelone for
the rigid link and another for the degrees of freedom.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Precedence Rules
4.
5.
6.
7.
117
These characteristics make weighted links useful when you need to attach mass
idealizations to your model without stiffening the structure.
You can use the Insert>Connection>Weighted Link command to create weighted
links in your model. After you create a weighted link, you can edit or delete it by
selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or
Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a weighted link, Mechanica asks
you for confirmation first.
While creating, editing, or deleting weighted links, keep in mind the following:
Mechanica outputs weighted links as RBE3 cards to be used with the NASTRAN solver
only. If you try to choose another solver, Mechanica ignores the weighted links.
Mechanica does not output the weighted link whose dependent side has constraints.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
118
IndexConnections
Note that if you change the references or delete a weighted link that has already
been meshed, Mechanica automatically erases the mesh.
After you create your weighted link, Mechanica displays two icons on the modelone
for the weighted link and another for the degrees of freedom.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Precedence Rules
3. If you did not select geometry for the independent side of the link before
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
to select any
entering the dialog box, choose the reference type and click
of the following geometric references:
o Point(s)
o Edge(s)/Curve(s)
o Surface(s)
For the independent side, select the Override Coordinate System check
box if you want to select a new displacement coordinate system.
For the independent side, accept the default degrees of freedom or select a
different combination of DOF.
For the dependent side of the link, select or create a point as a reference
entity.
For the dependent side, select the Override Coordinate System check box
if you want to select a new displacement coordinate system.
Click OK to save the new weighted connection. Mechanica places two icons on
the modelone for the weighted link and another for the degrees of freedom.
Interfaces
Interfaces in Native Mode
The default interface type for mated surfaces in native mode is bonded, meaning
that the surfaces will share nodes and Mechanica will, in effect, treat them as
merged surfaces. If this is undesirable, use the Insert>Connection>Interface
command in native mode to specify which surfaces you want Mechanica to treat as
free interfaces during meshing and analysis. When you select this command, the
Interface Definition dialog box appears, enabling you to assign free interfaces for
any mated surfaces in your assembly that you do not want Mechanica to treat as
bonded.
The Interface command is available only if you have a 3D assembly open. You can
define free interfaces for the following types of entity pairs in Mechanica:
Solidsolid
Solidshell
Solidmidsurface
Shellshell
Shellmidsurface
Midsurfacemidsurface
To define a free interface on a midsurface, you select the surface that will be
compressed to a midsurface.
If your assembly includes components modeled with midsurfaces, Mechanica
compresses these components during meshing, potentially creating gaps in the
assembly. To prevent these assembly gaps, Mechanica creates automatic midsurface
connections where the original surfaces of midsurface components mate or overlap
with surfaces from other assembly components. If you want to avoid these automatic
midsurface connections, you can define a free interface between the overlapping
surfaces. In this case, your model will have inconsistent meshes for the contacting
120
IndexConnections
components where you have placed the free interfaces, and there will be assembly
gaps at the free interfaces.
When you define an interface as Free, Mechanica outlines the interface and adds an
interface icon to your assembly. When you transfer the assembly to independent
mode Mechanica, the free interfaces will be outlined with a bold border.
Keep the following in mind if you work with your assembly in both native mode and
FEM mode:
The default interface type in native mode is Bonded. You cannot change the
definition of the default interface type in native mode, but you can in FEM
mode. If you define the default type in FEM mode as Free, and then enter
native mode, Mechanica uses a default interface type of Bonded.
If you specify a Bonded interface for surfaces in your assembly in FEM mode,
and then enter native mode Mechanica, the bonded interface definition will be
suppressed.
After you create an interface, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated
icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If
you are deleting an interface, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure:
To Create an Interface
Reference:
Shell Compression
your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box
appears.
Generate Compatible Mesh This option is available only for Free
interfaces, and is on by default. If you clear this check box in the Properties
area, Mechanica treats the surfaces on your interface as having no contact
and does not create geometrically-consistent node locations when it
generates the mesh for the surfaces. This is the same behavior as seen in
previous releases for the None interface type.
Note: If you defined an interface type None for your assembly in a
previous release, Mechanica converts the interface type to Free with the
Generate Compatible Mesh option turned off. If you defined an
interface type Free for your assembly in a previous release, Mechanica
converts the interface type to Free with the Generate Compatible
Mesh option selected.
You can set either Bonded or Free as the default contact type for FEM mode. In this
case, Mechanica applies the default you set to all mated surfaces in your model
except those for which you explicitly define a different type of contact. To set the
default contact type, use the Properties>Default Interface Type command.
Note: In native mode, the Free connection type is not supported as a default
setting. If you define the default connection type for your assembly as Free in
FEM mode, and open the assembly in native mode, any analyses you run will
use a default connection type of Bonded.
After you create an interface, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated
icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If
you are deleting an interface, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure:
To Create an Interface
IndexConnections
editing a gap Select the gap icon for the gap you want to edit. Then,
select Edit>Definition to re-open the Gap Definition dialog box and edit
the current settings.
deleting a gap Right-click on the gap icon for the gap you want to delete.
Then, select the Delete command from the object action menu. Mechanica
deletes the gap without confirmation.
You can control the visibility of gaps on your model by using the View>Simulation
Display command, or by placing them on layers.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Precedence Rules
For a surface-surface gap, you can select any of the following entities:
o
o
o
Axial Stiffness Define the axial stiffness value. Where applicable, this
parameter defines the stiffness or a spring factor.
Transverse Stiffness Define the transverse stiffness value. This
parameter defines elastic stiffness, characterizing resistance of the material
until the slippage occurs. This parameter is optional.
Y direction Define the Y direction by selecting a datum point, edge, curve,
axis, surface, or vertex to identify the XY plane of the element. You can also
specify a vector in the WCS.
The X direction is given by the gap length, which is the shortest distance
between the two selected references. A zero-length gap has no length between
the two references. For example, you can define a gap between a point on a
surface and the surface itself. For a zero-length gap, the X direction is normal
to the surface.
Distribution Select the method that Mechanica uses to calculate the axial
and transverse stiffnesses for your gap. This option is available only for
surfacesurface gaps. The stiffnesses are distributed uniformly across the
surfaces.
o Total The entered value represents the sum of stiffnesses for all
gap elements.
o Per Unit Area The entered value is multiplied by the surface area
to give the stiffness values. The area of the first selected surface is
used for the stiffness calculations. See Surface-Surface Gaps for more
information.
See Also
Procedure:
IndexConnections
Precedence Rules
Precedence rules for your idealizations and connections determine which modeling
entity takes precedence when you apply two modeling entities of the same type on
or between the same reference entities. There are two types of precedence rules,
modeling precedence rules and geometric precedence rules.
Modeling Precedence Rules
These rules apply when you work with assemblies, and are determined by the
assembly hierarchy:
When you apply a modeling entity from a top-level assembly, this modeling
entity takes precedence over a modeling entity applied from a subassembly or
a part.
When you apply a modeling entity from a subassembly, this modeling entity
takes precedence over a modeling entity applied from a part.
You select a higher precedence geometric entity as a reference entity for your
new modeling entity.
The higher precedence geometric entity belongs to a lower precedence
geometric entity already referenced by your existing modeling entity.
For example, if you select a single point as a reference entity for your new beam, the
new beam overrides an existing one that references a feature of points that include
this single point.
125
The following table illustrates how the precedence rules work for modeling entities
that can reference points, curves, or surfaces.
Modeling Entity or Mesh
Control
beam
spring
mass
gap
rigid link
weighted link
beam
mass (in FEM
mode)
Reference Entity
points
Geometric Precedence
Rule
A single point takes
precedence over a feature of
points or a pattern of points.
A feature of points takes
precedence over a pattern of
points.
Points take precedence over
curves, edges, and surfaces.
curves or edges
126
shell
beam (surfacesurface, in FEM
mode)
mass (in FEM
mode)
surfaces
IndexIdealizations
Idealizations
About Idealizations
You create idealizations to represent your model with a set of elements that
simplifies the actual design, resulting in a faster simulation. Idealizations are a
means of fine-tuning the design of your model.
Mechanica provides these idealizations:
Shells
Beams
Masses (Structure only)
Springs (Structure only)
Shells
About Shells
Use shells to model a thin layer of a defined thickness for your part. If your part is
relatively thin compared to its length and width, shell modeling is more efficient.
You have several options for including shells in your model:
Create a single shell as a layer on a solid. In this case, you can define the
shell as a composite of layers, or specify the material and thickness.
Create a shell pair based on the surfaces in your part. The software
compresses the pair to a midsurface that it uses in the analysis.
Create a volume-based shell that has specific material or thickness properties.
In this case, the software compresses your model to a midsurface. But, it
uses the material and thickness definitions of the shell rather than that of the
surfaces associated with the volume for the midsurface thickness.
You create both single shells and shell pairs using the Insert menu. The command
you select differs depending upon whether you want to create single shells or
midsurface compressed shells:
If your design includes shells that are made of the same material as your
part, use the Insert>Midsurface command to create shell pairs. To create a
shell pair in this way your model must include at least two surfaces on
opposite sides of a volume.
When Mechanica analyses a shell model, it compresses shell pairs to a
midsurface or set of midsurfaces. To perform midsurface compression,
Mechanica requires a pairing scheme. To ensure the successful analysis of your
shell model, you should check the shell compression before you run an
analysis.
127
If you want to create a single shell, for example as a layer on a solid, or if you
want to create a shell pair that is composed of a different material than the
rest of your part, or if you want to include properties such as laminates or
material orientation, use the Insert>Shell command.
You may choose to design a model solely with midsurface compressed shells, or your
design may benefit from a mixture of shells, solids, beams, and other idealizations. If
you are working with midsurface compressed shells, before you begin analysis, you
should define your model as a solid, as a shell, or as a mixed model. The model type
determines how Mechanica analyzes your part.
Before you create shells on your model, read about recommended geometry for your
model.
You can control the visibility of shells on your model by using the View>Simulation
Display command, or by placing them on layers.
After you create a shell, you can edit or delete it by right-clicking on the shell
idealizationeither Shell Pair or Shellin the model tree and using Edit Definition
or Delete command, as appropriate. If you are deleting a shell, Mechanica asks you
for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure:
To Create Shells
Reference:
Standard Shells
Shell Definition
Use the Insert>Shell command to define a simple or advanced shell on a model
surface. Simple shells differ from advanced shells in this way:
When you select the Insert>Shell command, Mechanica displays the Shell
Definition dialog box, which includes:
128
Name Specify a name for the shell. The software provides default names,
such as Shell1, Shell2, and so on. You can change these default names to
more meaningful names if you like.
IndexIdealizations
Surface(s) Specify the surfaces associated with the shell. If you already
selected a valid surface or surfaces for the shell before entering the dialog
box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box
appears. Otherwise, use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods
to choose the surfaces. When you select the surface, you can change the
normal direction of the shell.
Note: The software shares data across several selected surfaces or
quilts. Therefore, if you change data on one surface or quilt with
shared data, the others will be affected as well.
See Also
Procedures:
Simple Shells
After you have specified a name, associated surfaces, and the Simple shell type,
you need to provide Mechanica with the following information as well:
Material Specify the material of the shell. Click the arrow to display a
drop-down list of material properties already associated with your model. If
you do not see what you want in the drop-down list, use the More button to
display more materials, or to create a new material.
129
You can only use isotropic materials with simple shells, so the drop-down list
contains only those. If you select a non-isotropic material after clicking the
More button, the software reminds you that you must use isotropic material
properties with simple shells.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
About Materials
See Also
References:
Simple Shells
Shell Definition
Advanced Shells
After you have specified a name, associated surfaces, and the Advanced shell type,
you need to provide Mechanica with the following information as well:
130
IndexIdealizations
The Material drop-down list may not be active if you select certain shell
properties. For example, if the shell property you select is a laminate layup,
the Material drop-down list is not active.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
5.
6.
See Also
References:
Advanced Shells
Shell Definition
131
Midsurface Shells
Before You Define a Shell Model
Before you define your part as a shell model, be sure you have all the geometry you
need already in place. Following are several factors you should be aware of when
working with shell models:
the amount of time required to define surface pairs. Also, you can
sometimes reduce the amount of complex geometry you may need to
add in order to accommodate your pairing scheme.
the time required to analyze the model by reducing the number of
calculations the engine needs to complete
When determining which features to suppress, weigh the benefits of suppressing the
feature against the reduction in model accuracy.
132
Unopposed Surfaces Make sure all surfaces you shell pair have an
opposing surface.
IndexIdealizations
Pairing Schemes
Mechanica uses the surface pairs that you define to form a network of compressed
surfaces called the midsurface. When it models your part, the software places
elements on the midsurface only, using the thickness associated with each portion of
the shell to determine the depth of the elements.
For example, if you were modeling a T-bracket, you might take the approach shown
in the T-Bracket example.
Mechanica highlights the first surface or set of surfaces you select for a pair in red
and the opposing surface or surfaces in yellow. The red surface acts as a point of
reference for the pair. Mechanica uses this surface as a viewpoint when determining
which opposing surfaces in the model are part of the pair. In addition, Mechanica
defines the normal direction for a compressed midsurface from the red surface to the
yellow surface.
If you omit opposing surfaces from your model, Mechanica compresses the model
differently than if you include all opposing surfaces.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Gaps in Parts
Model Thickness
Model Entities and Idealizations
Mixed Models
Certain models contain some areas best suited for shells and others best suited for
solids.
For these models, you can create shell pairs for the areas that you want Mechanica
to treat as shells. Then, you use the following commands on the
MIDSURFACES>COMPR OPTS menu to get an idea of how Mechanica will treat
your model during analysis, provided you select the equivalent meshing options in
native mode and FEM mode.
Shells Only Select this command if you want to view what your model
would look like if you have Mechanica treat it as a pure shell model. In this
case, the software applies shell elements to the paired portion of the model at
analysis time and omits any unpaired portions from analysis.
Shells And Solids Select this command if you want to view what your
model would look like if you have Mechanica treat it as a mixed model. In this
case, the software applies shells to the paired portion of the model and solids
to the unpaired portion. This is the default option.
133
Once you have decided whether you want Mechanica to treat the model as a pure
shell model or a mixed model, you can use the Midsurface or Solid/Midsurface
option box on the AutoGEM menu to indicate your choice to the mesher and,
consequently, the solver.
Model Thickness
Mechanica uses the thickness associated with each midsurface to calculate the
thickness of the shell elements. If it encounters unopposed surfaces in your model,
the software uses the thickness of a neighboring or related pair to define the
thickness for that portion of the model.
Mechanica supports shell pairs with both constant and multiconstant thickness.
Variable thickness pairs (in FEM mode) Both opposing surfaces are
neither parallel nor concentric.
If you decide that your model is not a good candidate, rework the part geometry in
Pro/ENGINEER to improve midsurface coincidence or treat the model as a solid
instead of a shell.
See Also
References:
Gaps in Parts
Gaps in Assemblies
Model Entities and Idealizations
Unopposed Surfaces
134
IndexIdealizations
Unopposed Surfaces
For Mechanica to create a complete shell model, you need to make sure all the
surfaces you pair have an opposing surface. Unopposed surfaces can be the result of
omitting a surface or surface region from a pair, or they can occur because of slight
geometrical differences between surfaces that make up a pair.
You can use any of the following approaches to resolve problems due to unopposed
surfaces:
See Also
Procedure:
You cannot place certain types of loads or constraints on entities whose type
changes when Mechanica compresses the model. The loads and constraints
that fall into this category are loads distributed or applied based on unit type.
For example, a force load with a distribution of Force Per Unit of Length or
Force Per Unit of Area falls into this category, but a force load applied with
a Total Load distribution does not. Other types of loads and constraints in
this category include interpolated loads, bearing loads, heat loads distributed
based on unit type, pressure loads, and convection conditions.
Following are examples of entity-type changes that invalidate these types of
loads or constraints:
o
135
For example, if you decide to model a rectangular plate as a shell, Mechanica would ask
you to redefine the problem load.
If you place regional loads on both pair surfaces and those loads overlap,
Mechanica calculates the overlapping area by adding or subtracting the load
values and directions for the two regions.
Mechanica maintains constraints applied to overlapping regions.
If you place a constraint or load on a region and omit the region when you
define your pairs, the software may not include that constraint or load. In this
case, Mechanica displays a warning message when you try to analyze the
model.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Pairing Schemes
Gaps in Parts
Gaps in Assemblies
Model Thickness
Gaps in Parts
Depending on how you pair your single-part model, Mechanica can encounter gaps in
the midsurface. A gap is a section of the model where the midsurfaces do not meet.
Gaps often occur in portions of a solid model that are not symmetric. In asymmetric
models, various sections of the model have different thicknesses and the midsurfaces
of the sections do not coincide. Thus, if you define individual shell pairs for each
thickness, the midsurfaces do not meet.
In addition, gaps can occur in Pro/SHEETMETAL models, depending on how you
create your features. This situation results from the fact that Pro/SHEETMETAL does
not typically merge common feature faces, or wall junctions.
In the solid following model, there are two gaps:
136
IndexIdealizations
Be aware that no modeling information passes between gaps. For example, if you
create a constraint set that fixes the far end of section a for the model shown above,
sections b and c would not see this constraint.
Gaps can cause problems during analysis. If Mechanica analyzed the example model
using the constraint set just described, the software would interpret the model as
three independent bodies, only one of which is constrained. Because the model
contains unconstrained bodies, Mechanica would display an error message and halt
the analysis.
You can correct this problem by inspecting the model closely for gaps. When you
locate a gap, you can do one of the following:
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Gaps in Assemblies
137
Gaps in Assemblies
For assemblies, gaps typically occur at locations where two parts meet or overlap.
Pro/ENGINEER assembly constraints are such that Mechanica treats an assembly as
a single body for solid modeling. However, when you treat an assembly as a shell
and perform midsurface compression, Mechanica sees more than one body, resulting
in a gap. For an analysis of a model to be accurate, you must correct these gaps so
that the parts of the assembly move together as if they were a single body.
For assemblies, the likelihood of gaps caused by midsurface compression is greater
than it is for single parts because an assembly can have gaps between parts as well
as within a particular part. For an example of an assembly that has a gap caused by
midsurface compression, see Example: Assembly Model with Gap.
To find gaps in your model, be sure to perform a compression test before starting an
analysis.
To avoid gaps in assemblies, you must make sure the midsurfaces of the parts
connect. You can correct assembly gaps in various ways depending on your model
geometry and sensitivities. Here are some methods you can consider:
You can use end welds, perimeter welds, or, in native mode, spot welds.
You can use a rigid connection.
You can use a fastener.
You can use the Pair Place command on the MODIFY PAIR menu to define
the midsurface placement so the midsurfaces of the parts touch in the
merged area. This can result in coincident curves and surfaces, which can
cause meshing problems.
When you start your first analysis or design study for an assembly, you should
request error checking. Among other things, error checking includes a count of the
disjoint bodies in the assembly.
138
IndexIdealizations
If Mechanica finds multiple disjoint bodies during error checking, your assembly may
have gaps that you should consider before progressing further. The software does
not consider spot welds when determining the number of disjoint bodies.
Note: Do not confuse the term gaps as discussed here with the gap
idealizations that you can create in FEM mode.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Gaps in Parts
A solid model is a part that you model using solid elements like tetrahedrons,
bricks, or wedges.
A shell model is a part that you model using shell elements like triangles and
quadrilaterals. Typically, you use shell modeling when your part is relatively
thin compared to its length and width. To meet Mechanica's criteria for shell
models, your part must have either a constant or multiconstant thickness in
native mode. In FEM mode, your part can have a variable thickness.
You can change the elements used for modeling with the AutoGEM>Settings
command in native mode or the Mesh>Create command in FEM mode. For
example, you can direct Mechanica to use only triangles to model your native
mode shell model rather than using both triangles and quadrilaterals.
In native mode, Mechanica treats all models as solid models by default. To direct
Mechanica to treat your model as a midsurface shell model, or as a mixed model,
you first need to define the model, or some areas of it, using midsurface shells.
Then, use the following options buttons to indicate how Mechanica should mesh and
analyze the model:
To direct Mechanica to mesh and analyze your model as a shell model, select
the AutoGEM>Midsurface option button. The Midsurface command is
selected by default when you create shell pairs, but if you start a new session
of Mechanica with a model for which you created shells, you should check the
setting. For example, if you have defined shell pairs for the surfaces in your
139
model, but want to analyze the model as a solid without deleting the shells,
you would select the AutoGEM>Solid command instead.
In FEM mode, the way you indicate how you want Mechanica to treat models that
include midsurface shells is different. In this case, you select the model treatment
when you create the mesh.
Specifying Mesh Treatment for Models with Midsurfaces
The Solid, Midsurface, and Solid/Midsurface options on the AutoGEM menu let
you specify whether Mechanica will treat models that include midsurfaces as solid
models, midsurface shell models, or a mixture of both during meshing and analysis.
These toggle keys are only available in the native mode. In the FEM mode, you
indicate model treatment at the time you create the FEM mesh.
In models that have no midsurfaces, the Solid option is turned on and the
Midsurface and Solid/Midsurface options are deactivated. However, when you
define shell pairs for your model, the software automatically activates these two
options and turns on the Midsurface option. Provided that you keep the option on,
Mechanica meshes and analyzes the model as a shell model. If any potion of the
model is a solid, Mechanica omits that portion from the mesh and, consequently the
analysis. If you want to include the solid portions of the model, turn on the
Solid/Midsurface option instead.
For models with midsurfaces, the Midsurface option stays on by default unless you
select one of the other two options and then save your model in that state. If you
delete all the shell pairs in your model, Mechanica automatically turns off and
deactivates the Midsurface and Solid/Midsurface options, reverting to the Solid
option.
MIDSURFACES Menu
When you select Insert>Midsurface, the MIDSURFACES menu appears. From this
menu, you can use the following commands:
140
IndexIdealizations
To Create a Midsurface
You create a midsurface by pairing two surfaces. Mechanica creates a midsurface
from the surface pair and assigns shell elements to them.
1. Select Insert>Midsurface or click
.
2. Select one of the following commands:
o Auto Detect Select this command to automatically pair any
surfaces that can be automatically created.
o New Select this command to manually pair surfaces.
3. Select Constant to define a constant-thickness pair or Multi Const to define
a multi-constant-thickness pair. In FEM mode, select Constant or Variable.
4. Select the surfaces you want to include in the pair.
5. Select Show to review the model's pairing scheme.
6. Select Compress to review the midsurface compression and check for errors.
7. If you find any unpaired surfaces that you do not want to treat as a solid,
repeat the appropriate procedures from step 2.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Edit Pair This command lets you add or delete a surface from a pair.
Pair Place This command lets you change the placement of the surface
pair to any of these locations:
o the red surface of the surface pair
o the yellow surface of the surface pair
o the midsurface
o a selected surface, which can be a datum surface
For any of these choices, you can click the Adj Tan Nbrs button to change the placement
of any neighboring surface pairs that are adjacent and tangent to the surface pair you are
modifying.
Flip Pair This command lets you swap the red and yellow surfaces in order
to flip the resulting mesh normal.
Thick Type This command lets you specify whether the thickness of the
surface pair you select is constant (the default value) or multiconstant.
141
See Also
Reference:
Shell Compression
Shell Compression
Mechanica processes all solid models as single volumes. However, the software uses
a different approach when processing models with paired shells. With shell models,
Mechanica compresses the model to a midsurface or set of midsurfaces.
To perform midsurface compression, Mechanica requires a pairing scheme for the
surfaces you want to model.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Gaps in Parts
Gaps in Assemblies
Model Thickness
Model Entities and Idealizations
IndexIdealizations
wrong surfaces to pair. If there are gaps in your model, see either Gaps in
Parts or Gaps in Assemblies.
6. Select Done from the COMPRES MDL menu when you finish reviewing the
compressed model.
7. Be sure to correct any pairing problems using the commands on the MODIFY
PAIR menu.
See Also
Reference:
About Shells
3. If you want to work with the model as is, review the state of the
UseUnopposed check box.
See Also
Reference:
Unopposed Surfaces
IGES creates an IGES file that represents the shell model. You must
specify a coordinate system before the IGES file creation takes place.
SUPERTAB creates a SUPERTAB universal file that represents the shell
model.
143
If your model includes unopposed surfaces, the UseUnopposed check box appears
on this menu, and is selected by default. Clear this check box if you do not want
Mechanica to include unopposed surfaces during analysis.
See Also
Procedure:
144
IndexIdealizations
Reference:
Beams
About Beams
A beam is a one-dimensional idealization that, in three dimensions, represents a
structure whose length is much greater than its other two dimensions. You create a
beam by specifying the cross-section shape and position, the degrees of freedom at
the beam ends, and the location of the beam with respect to the axis where
Mechanica applies the beam load. Mechanica sees beams slightly differently in native
mode and FEM mode.
Native mode A beam has a constant cross section that maintains the
same dimensions from end to end. When you define your beam, you specify
the section shape and size, and the orientation for the start of the beam only.
FEM mode A beam can have a variable cross section. In other words, you
can create a tapered beam, in which the starting end has one dimension or
shape and the terminal end, another. You can also select a different section
shape and a different orientation for the beam beginning and end. If your
beam has different section shapes at the two ends, Mechanica interpolates
the cross section. FEM mode allows you to create trusses as well as beams.
When you select the Insert>Beam command, the Beam Definition dialog box
appears. Use this dialog box to create beams in native mode, and to create beams
and trusses in FEM mode. After you create a beam, you can edit or delete it by
selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or
Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a beam, Mechanica asks you for
confirmation first. To manage beam sections, orientations, and releases, use the
Properties menu.
There are three coordinate systems that govern the way Mechanica defines and
analyzes beams. To understand how to use these coordinate systems to design your
beams and to obtain the desired results for your beam read Beam Coordinate
Systems.
You can control the visibility of beams on your model by using the
View>Simulation Display command, or by placing them on layers.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Beam Elements
Precedence Rules
Creating Load Paths for FEM Meshing
145
Beam Shape Coordinate System (BSCS) The software draws the beam
sections with respect to the beam shape coordinate system.
Beam Action Coordinate System (BACS) The software applies loads to
beams at locations defined with respect to the beam action coordinate
system.
Beam Centroidal Principal Coordinate System (BCPCS) The software
defines the BCPCS based on the beam section, and reports most of the results
in this coordinate system.
When you create your beam, you use the Y Direction option on the Beam
Definition dialog box to specify how the BACS relates to the WCS. You can then
offset the BSCS from the BACS by using the options on the Beam Orientation
Definition dialog box.
See Also
References:
Creating Beams
Beam Definition Dialog Box
When you select the Insert>Beam command, the Beam Definition dialog box
appears. Use the following items on this dialog box to define your beam or truss:
146
References Specify the geometric entities for your beam. If you already
selected valid geometric references for the beam before entering the dialog
box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box
opens. Otherwise, use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods
to choose the desired geometry.
Material Specify the material Mechanica uses to create the beam.
Type In FEM mode only, specify the type of beam you want to create
either a beam or a truss. If you create a truss, you do not need to specify Y
direction, orientation, or release.
Y direction Specify the orientation of the Y axis for the beam action
coordinate system.
Start and End tabs Define the start and end properties for beams. In FEM
mode, you can specify different section and orientation properties for the two
IndexIdealizations
ends of your beam. However, in native mode, you can only specify section
and orientation properties for the beam start. These tabs include the following
items:
o Section Define the cross-section properties for beams and save
sections in a library.
o Orientation Specify the orientation of the beam shape coordinate
system with respect to the beam action coordinate system.
o Release Specify the degrees of freedom at each beam end.
Extra tab In FEM mode only,define, stress relief factors and specify
whether to include stress recovery information.
When you create a beam or a truss, Mechanica displays an icon on your model that
includes a line representing the beam X axis and a figure representing the beam
cross section.
To learn how FEM mode's FEA solvers treat beams, see ANSYS and MSC/NASTRAN.
See Also
Procedures:
To Create a Beam
To Create a Beam Section
To Define Beam Orientation
To Create a Beam Release
Beam References
The geometric entities that you use for your beam define the location and direction
of the beam X axis. Select one of the following reference types on the Beam
Definition dialog box to define the location of your beam on your model:
The points you use for any reference type requiring points can be any of the
following:
The software treats the beams you create from point features or patterns of points
as single entities. You cannot specify different properties for different beams created
from the same point feature or pattern of point features.
Beam Type
In FEM mode, only, select the type of beam you want to define on the Beam
Definition dialog box. You can define two types of beams:
148
IndexIdealizations
beam action coordinate system as perpendicular to the XY plane. The Y and Z axes
you define in this way orient the BACS.
You can define the Y direction of a beam by selecting any of the following entities on
your model:
Point Define the beam's XY plane by the X axis of the beam and its Y
vector, which extends from the start point of the beam to the selected datum
point or vertex.
Edge In FEM mode only, define the beam's XY plane with the beam's X
vector and the projection from the start point of the beam toward the
selected edge.
Curve In FEM mode only, define the beam's XY plane with the beam's X
vector and the projection from the start point of the beam to the selected
datum curve.
Axis Define the beam's XY plane with the beam's X vector and the
projection from the beam start point to the selected axis.
Surface In FEM mode only, define the beam's XY plane with the beam X
vector and the projection of the start point of the beam to the selected
surface.
Vector in WCS Define the beam's Y direction by entering the X, Y, and Z
components of a vector. The default is 0, 1, 0, which specifies a Y direction
parallel to the positive Y axis of the WCS.
See Also
Procedure:
To Create a Beam
To Create a Beam
1. Select Insert>Beam or click
149
8. Select a beam orientation from the drop-down list or click the More button to
define a new beam orientation.
9. Select a beam release from the drop-down list or click the More button to
create a new beam release.
10. On the End tab, select a beam release from the drop-down list or click the
More button to create a new beam release.
11. Select OK to accept your definition, or Cancel to close the dialog box without
creating the beam.
See Also
References:
About Beams
About Beam Sections
About Beam Orientations
About Beam Releases
Y Direction for Beams
Masses
About Masses
A mass is an idealization that you can use to represent a concentrated mass without
a specified shape. The mass of an object determines how that object resists
translation and rotation. If you are interested in the way your model behaves with
mass at a given location, but not in the geometry or other features of that mass, use
mass idealization. For example, you can represent the mass of an engine on a car
frame without specifying the engine geometry.
To create a mass, select Insert>Mass and use the Mass Definition dialog box to
create a mass and specify its properties. After you create a mass, you can edit or
delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition
or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a mass, Mechanica asks you for
confirmation first. For some types of masses, you may need to assign mass
properties. You can create mass properties by selecting Properties>Mass
Properties or from the Mass Definition dialog box as you are creating the spring.
Your options for creating masses differ in native mode and FEM mode:
150
Native mode You can add a mass to a vertex or a point. You can also add
a mass to multiple single points, point features, and point patterns in most
cases. However, if you are working in the assembly mode and want to use a
component's mass for your mass idealization definition, you can only select a
single point.
IndexIdealizations
FEM mode In addition to adding a mass to a point, you can also add a
mass that is distributed over geometric entities such as curves, edges, or
surfaces. Use distributed masses, for example, to represent the mass
contribution from paint, or from a large number of small objects. You can
select several curves, edges, or surfaces. To learn how FEM mode's FEA
solvers treat masses, see ANSYS and MSC/NASTRAN.
If you want to override the precedence rules for masses in FEM mode, you can
use the config.pro option sim_additive_mass. When you set this option to
"Yes," you can create several masses that reference the same geometric entity
and the software will include all of the masses. Also, with this option turned on
you can override the precedence rules that normally govern mass creation. For
example, if sim_additive_mass is set to "No" and you try to create two masses,
mass a on a single point and mass b on a feature of points containing the
single point, mass a on the single point overrides mass b on that same single
point, leaving mass b on the other points in the feature unchanged. But if
sim_additive_mass is set to "Yes," you can create both masses, and include
both masses in your analysis. Use this option, for example, to simulate two
layers of paint as distributed masses on a surface.
If you need to create additional datum points or curves before you begin the process
of adding masses to your model, you can use the Insert>Model Datum>Point or
Insert>Model Datum>Curve command. Keep in mind that if you want to model a
mass on a point that is separate from your model, you must connect it to the model,
for example, with rigid links or beams. Otherwise, the mass will not be included in
any analyses.
You can control the visibility of masses on your model by using the
View>Simulation Display command, or by placing them on layers.
See Also
References:
Precedence Rules
Datum Point
Datum Curve
Mass and Spring Elements
Native Mode
Mass Definition Dialog Box
When you select Insert>Mass, the Mass Definition dialog box appears. Use the
items on this dialog box to create a mass in native mode.
Type The Properties area of the dialog box changes depending upon the
type you select from the drop-down list.
o Simple Enter a real-number value for the mass, or click p to create
or select a Pro/ENGINEER parameter.
o Advanced Select a coordinate system or accept the default WCS.
You must also specify a mass property for advanced masses. The mass
properties are relative to the selected coordinate system. You can use
any mass property previously defined for your model, or you can click
the More button to define new mass properties.
Tip: You cannot locate an advanced mass on the Z axis of a
cylindrical coordinate system, or on the = 0 axis of a spherical
coordinate system.
o
See Also
References:
152
Current Select the existing current coordinate system set for the model.
WCS Set the WCS (World Coordinate System). This is the default selection.
Select Use the normal selection methods to set the coordinate system.
IndexIdealizations
See Also
Procedure:
See Also
Reference:
FEM Mode
Mass Definition Dialog Box (FEM mode)
When you select Insert>Mass, the Mass Definition dialog box appears. Use the
following items on this dialog box to create a mass in FEM mode.
153
See Also
References:
154
IndexIdealizations
See Also
Reference:
Springs
About Springs
A spring connects two points or a point to ground in your model. You can use a
vertex as a point by selecting it. Any spring you add provides the stiffness that, you
specify at the location on your model where you place it. The stiffness can be
translational (force per unit length) or torsional (torque). The force generated by the
spring is proportional to the amount of displacement that occursfor example, if you
double the displacement, you double the force.
When you model a spring, you must specify the spring's geometrical references, as
well as its stiffness and orientation. Use the Insert>Spring command to create
springs. For some types of springs, you may need to assign spring properties. You
155
Name The name of the spring. You can enter a descriptive name or accept
the default.
References Use this area to select the geometric references for your
spring. If you already selected valid geometric references before entering the
dialog box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog
box opens. Otherwise, use the selector arrow and the regular selection
methods to choose the desired geometry.
Type When you select one of these types of spring from the drop-down
list, the dialog box changes.
o Simple You define a simple spring by specifying the extensional and
torsional stiffness with a real-number value or a Pro/ENGINEER
parameter.
o Advanced You define an advanced spring by specifying the
magnitude and direction of components for the spring extensional and
torsional stiffness.
o To Ground You define this type of spring by specifying the
orientation of the components for the extensional and torsional
stiffness in terms of a selected coordinate system.
When you click OK to accept your definition, the software adds a spring icon to your
model. You can control the visibility of springs on your model by using the
View>Simulation Display command, or by placing them on layers.
After you create a spring, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on
your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are
deleting a spring, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
To learn how FEM mode's FEA solvers treat springs, see ANSYS and MSC/NASTRAN.
See Also
Procedures:
References:
156
IndexIdealizations
A spring is attached to at least one point in your model. If you need to create
additional points before you add a spring, you can use datum point creation
functionality to do so. For more information on creating points this way, see
Datum Point. You can also click a vertex to use it as a point.
A spring can act as a constraint in your model, and in some instances may be
all the constraint that you need. However, be aware that while a spring can
remove degrees of freedom in one direction, it can allow freedom of
movement in other directions.
If you plan to place springs on a shell model, see Model Entities and
Idealizations to learn about how Mechanica processes idealizations applied to
a point.
See Also
Procedures:
Simple Springs
Using Simple Springs
Use a simple spring to connect two points, two vertices, a point to a point on an
edge or a surface, a point to a pattern of points, or a point to a single point feature.
Note: You cannot define a zero-length simple spring.
Use the following areas on the simple version of the Spring Definition dialog box to
define a simple spring:
These two stiffness fields are parameter-capable edit fields. They can accept
Pro/ENGINEER parameters as stiffness values, which you can select from a displayed
list.
157
Note: If you are using a simple spring to join two parts, make sure that the
parts are attached to each other in another manner, or that they are
constrained.
Simple springs do not require that you specify an orientation.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
See Also
Reference:
To Ground Springs
Using To Ground Springs
Use a To Ground spring to connect to ground a point, multiple points, a vertex, a
point feature, or a single pattern of points.
Note: In FEM mode, To Ground springs are not supported for ANSYS.
Use the following areas on the To Ground version of the Spring Definition dialog
box to define an advanced spring:
158
IndexIdealizations
Properties Use any stiffness properties previously defined for your model,
or define new stiffness properties.
Y Direction Define the orientation of the spring by selecting a coordinate
system. This defines the directions to which the spring stiffnesses refer. You
can select any coordinate system for this purpose. The default is the WCS.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Advanced Springs
Using Advanced Springs
You can use an advanced spring to model a connection between two objects
characterized by stiffness, and in FEM mode, by damping as well.
The characteristics of an advanced spring, such as its stiffness components, are
evaluated regardless of the location of its ends, but only with regard to the X, Y, Z
directions of its coordinate system.
Use these areas on the advanced version of the Spring Definition dialog box to
define an advanced spring:
Properties Use any stiffness properties previously defined for your model,
or define new spring properties.
159
In FEM mode, advanced springs can have a zero lengththat is, they can have
coincident ends. An example might be a spring between a point on a surface and the
surface itself. To learn how the FEA solvers treat advanced springs, see ANSYS and
MSC/NASTRAN.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Two advanced springs with a common end must use the same orientation.
A constraint defined at one of the ends of the advanced spring must use the
advanced spring's coordinate system.
160
Point Use the selector arrow to select a reference point that lies in the
spring's XY plane.
IndexIdealizations
Axis Use the selector arrow to select a reference axis that is parallel to the
spring's XY plane.
Vector in WCS Specify the X, Y, and Z components, relative to the WCS,
of a direction vector that lies in the spring's XY plane. This option is the
default selection.
See Also
Reference:
4. If you did not select geometric references before opening the dialog box, click
5.
6.
7.
8.
and use the normal methods to select references on your model to specify
a location for the spring.
Define stiffness properties for the spring. You can select a previously-defined
stiffness property from the drop-down list, or you can click the More button
to define new stiffness properties.
Define the Y direction of your spring.
Enter an additional rotation if you want a value other than zero. If you do not
enter a value, the software assumes a value of zero.
Click OK to save the new spring.
Precedence Rules
Precedence rules for your idealizations and connections determine which modeling
entity takes precedence when you apply two modeling entities of the same type on
or between the same reference entities. There are two types of precedence rules,
modeling precedence rules and geometric precedence rules.
Modeling Precedence Rules
These rules apply when you work with assemblies, and are determined by the
assembly hierarchy:
When you apply a modeling entity from a top-level assembly, this modeling
entity takes precedence over a modeling entity applied from a subassembly or
a part.
When you apply a modeling entity from a subassembly, this modeling entity
takes precedence over a modeling entity applied from a part.
You select a higher precedence geometric entity as a reference entity for your
new modeling entity.
The higher precedence geometric entity belongs to a lower precedence
geometric entity already referenced by your existing modeling entity.
For example, if you select a single point as a reference entity for your new beam, the
new beam overrides an existing one that references a feature of points that include
this single point.
162
IndexIdealizations
The following table illustrates how the precedence rules work for modeling entities
that can reference points, curves, or surfaces.
Modeling Entity or Mesh
Control
beam
spring
mass
gap
rigid link
weighted link
beam
mass (in FEM
mode)
Reference Entity
points
Geometric Precedence
Rule
A single point takes
precedence over a feature of
points or a pattern of points.
A feature of points takes
precedence over a pattern of
points.
Points take precedence over
curves, edges, and surfaces.
curves or edges
shell
beam (surfacesurface, in FEM
mode)
mass (in FEM
mode)
surfaces
163
Properties
About Properties
You must assign properties to your model and to its idealizations to provide
Mechanica with the information it needs to analyze your model. Mechanica provides
the following property types:
Materials
Material Orientations
Shell Properties
Beam Sections
Beam Orientations
Beam Releases
Spring Properties
Mass Properties
For most properties, you must perform two main activitiescreating the property
and assigning the property:
Property Creation You can create properties at any time through the
Properties menu and the dialog boxes for each property type. You can also
create properties associated with idealizations as you create the idealization.
Property Assignment You can assign most properties that are associated
with idealizations while creating the idealization. For example, you can assign
spring properties as you create a spring idealization. You can assign
properties associated with geometry or with the model as a whole at any time
prior to analysis. Material properties assigned to a part or surface fall into this
category.
Deleting Properties
You can delete properties using the following commands:
164
IndexProperties
Background Information
Properties on Idealizations and Geometry
You typically assign properties to model geometry and, in some cases, idealizations.
Assigning properties to idealizations can be indirect, as in the case of assigning a
material to a part that you then compress as a midsurface shell. Or, it can take place
as part of creating an idealization on a geometric entityfor example, when you
create a beam section directly assigned to a curve. The properties you assign vary
with the type of idealization you are using:
Idealization
Properties Needed
beam
Material
Beam Section
Beam Orientation
Beam Releases
mass
Mass Value
Moments of Inertia
shell
Material
Thickness
solid
Material
Beam Sections
About Beam Sections
Use the Properties>Beam Sections command to define the shape and size of the
cross sections when you create beams. You can also define a beam section and save
it in a library file, called mbmsct.lib, for future use.
There are three categories of beam section types that you can use:
Sketched Create your own cross section using the sketch thin or sketch
solid beam type.
Standard Use Mechanica's standard cross sections, such as square,
rectangle, I-beam, and so on.
General Use Mechanica's general type to design a cross section. The
general beam section does not have a specific shape, but you must provide
the area, as well as section properties, shear parameters, and stress grids.
When you select the Properties>Beam Sections command, the Beam Sections
dialog box appears. You can also access this dialog box by clicking the More button
in the Section area of the Beam Definition dialog box. Use the items on this dialog
box to create, edit, copy, or delete beam sections.
You can create several types of beam sections from these three categories. Standard
beam sections reflect a particular predefined beam shape. You use the sketcher to
define the shapes for sketched beam sections. General types do not reflect a
particular shape. When you create a beam, Mechanica represents each of the
standard beam section types with a unique icon that represents their shape and size.
Icons for sketched sections reproduce the sketch, and General section icons are not
associated with any shape.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
166
IndexProperties
Adding to the libraries After you create a property definition, use the left
arrow button on the appropriate dialog box to move the definition from the
Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list. This places the current
property definition in your library. Be aware that Mechanica creates and saves
the property-specific library file as soon as you move the first property from
the Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list.
If the property definition you are adding has the same name as a definition
already in the library, Mechanica tells you that the name already exists and
asks if you want to overwrite it. If you select No, Mechanica does not add the
current definition to the library.
You cannot, overwrite a property definition in the Entity in Model list with a
property definition with the same name from the Entity in Library list. If you
create a new property definition with the same name as a definition already in
the library, the left arrow button becomes inactive.
Note that if you have a beam section library file (mbmsct.lib) from an earlier
release present in one of the directories where Mechanica searches for the
libraries and you save a new beam section into that library, the software
creates a beam_sections directory that includes a .bsf file for each of the
previous beam section definitions. Mechanica retains the original beam section
library file so you can archive it or use it with older Mechanica releases that
support .lib files for beam sections.
The default location for all library files is your home directory, but you can move it to
a different directory. You can use the environment variable $HOMEDRIVE to set your
home directory on Windows platforms.
When you access the library, Mechanica looks for the library file in the following
directories in this order:
1. the directory from which you started Mechanica
2. your home directory
3. the lib subdirectory of the Mechanica home directory
You can move or copy the library files into any of the above directories.
Note: For the beam section library, you can specify another location for the
beam_sections directory with the config.pro option sim_beamsec_path. You
must use a full path for this option.
168
IndexProperties
o Solid Ellipse
o Hollow Ellipse
o Sketched Solid
o Sketched Thin
Review Click this button to open the embedded browser with a summary
of the parameters that Mechanica calculates for your section.
Warp & Mass tab In FEM mode only, use this tab to define additional
beam values when you use the MSC/NASTRAN solver.
For Sketched Thin and Sketched Solid beam types, use the sketcher to
draw and dimension the cross section of your beam.
When you sketch a beam section, Mechanica displays the sketcher coordinate
system with Y as the vertical axis and X as the horizontal axis. After you leave
the section sketcher, Mechanica translates this coordinate system to one with
Y as the vertical axis and Z as the horizontal axis. When you complete the
beam the software displays a beam section icon on the appropriate model
geometry. This icon shows the beam section's shape coordinate system
(BSCS) in Y and Z, and reproduces the sketch in the correct size.
You can add sketched sections to Mechanica's section library. If you created
your sketched section in a previous release, be sure that the units for the
beam section are consistent with the current principal system of units.
If you want your solid sketched section to have a shear center that is different
from the beam centroid, you must specify values for Shear DY and Shear
DZ on the Beam Section Definition dialog box.
To view stress results for recovery points for your sketched beam section, you
must create points on the sketched section. When you view results,
Mechanica displays a graphic of your sketch showing the location of the
points. Keep in mind that the maximum number of recovery points is nine in
native mode and four in FEM mode.
Once you have completed your sketched beam sections, you can define shape
changes for these sections by creating design parameters for them. In this
case, the design parameters control the sketch dimensions you defined for
the beam section. Thus, you can dynamically modify your beam profile during
sensitivity and optimization studies. You can create design parameters using
any sketched solid or thin beam section.
Note: You cannot create design parameters for predefined Mechanica
beam sections. Only sketched sections allow design parameters.
For thin sections, you must define thickness using the Sketch>Feature
Tools>Thickness command.
169
You can only view stress recovery points in FEM mode results if you run with
the MSC/NASTRAN solver and view the .xdb results file.
There is a maximum of four beam stress recovery points. To compare the
location of the allowed stress recovery points in native mode and FEM mode,
see the help topic for each section type.
You can create beams in FEM mode that have different section types at the
start and end. Mechanica interpolates the cross-sections internally. If you
create a beam with different start and end section types, you cannot view
results for the stress recovery points.
See Also
Reference:
Beam Contribution
170
IndexProperties
The beam section icon lies in a plane orthogonal to the beam X axis, as shown in this
illustration:
Note that for general sections, the software does not display an icon. For sketched
sections, the software uses a reproduction of the sketch for the icon.
For information on the icons used for each beam section type, see Beam Section
Definition Dialog Box and select the description for the appropriate beam section
type.
Solid Sections The shear center is not calculated for solid sections. It is
assumed to be at the centroid of the section, coincident with the neutral axis.
You can modify the location of the shear center. Torsional stiffness, the
second polar moment of area J, is approximated as:
J = 4 Iy Iz / (Iy + Iz)
Note: This equation gives the exact value only for circular sections and
can have an error as high as 20% for rectangular sections. For other
shapes, the error can be even higher. Exercise caution when using the
calculated value of J. You can find exact values of J for torsional stiffness
in R.J. Roark and W.C. Young, Formulas for Stress and Strain, 6th
edition, Table 20, pages 348359.
Thin Wall Sections The calculation for this section type assumes the
thickness is small relative to the overall dimensions of the section. The
thickness is assumed to be distributed equally about both sides of the section.
It is recommended, therefore, that you use this section type only when this
length-to-thickness ratio exceeds 20:1. The overall exterior dimension of the
sketch is a suitable characteristic length for this purpose.
171
An open section:
J = 1/3 Ut3
where U is the total length of the sketched section, and t is the
thickness.
o
J = 4 Am2 t / U
where Am is the area enclosed by the loop that defines the section, t is
the thickness, and U is the total length.
For more complex sections, the software applies a numerical procedure. See
R.J. Roark and W.C. Young, Formulas for Stress and Strain, 6th edition, for
examples.
Note: For beams likely to experience torsional loading or deformation, it
is recommended that you use the standard, predefined Mechanica
sections.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the New button. The Beam Section Definition dialog box appears.
Enter a section name or use the default name.
Optionally, enter a description.
On the Section tab, select the type of beam you want to create.
In FEM mode only, on the Warp & Mass tab, define beam section
information.
7. Optionally, you can click the Review button to review the beam section
properties.
8. Click OK to save the beam section and exit the dialog box.
172
IndexProperties
See Also
References:
About Beams
About Beam Sections
Beam Orientation
About Beam Orientations
Use the Properties>Beam Orientations command to define beam orientations.
Beam orientation specifies the orientation of the BSCS relative to the BACS.
When you select this command, the Beam Orientations dialog box appears. Use
this dialog box to create, edit, select, or delete beam orientations. When you create
beam orientation definitions Mechanica saves the definition with your model file. You
can associate the beam orientation definitions with beams as you create the beam or
later.
The Beam Orientations dialog box displays a list of the beam orientations you
defined previously. When you highlight an orientation name, any description you
included with the definition appears. This dialog box includes the following buttons:
New Opens the Beam Orientation Definition dialog box to allow you to
define a new orientation.
Edit Opens the Beam Orientation Definition dialog box to allow you to
modify the selected orientation.
Copy Adds a copy of the orientation to the list. Mechanica names the copy
BeamOrientx, where x is a number calculated as one plus the number of
beam orientations in the list. To change the name, use Edit.
Delete Removes the selected orientation from the list.
For information on how the software defines beam orientation, see Beam Coordinate
Systems.
See Also
Procedure:
173
If you create a sketched beam section, the orientation of the Y and Z axes for the
BSCS is the same as the orientation of the Y and X axes in the sketcher. For a
general cross section, the software determines the BCPCS based on your
specifications, and the BSCS is essentially the same as the BCPCS for this crosssection type.
When Mechanica draws the beam section outline as part of the beam icon in the
model window, it also draws the BSCS, with a Y-shape at the tip of the Y axis and an
arrow at the tip of the Z axis.
You can position the origin of the BSCS relative to the BACS by entering values for
DY and DZ on the Beam Orientation Definition dialog box. You can also rotate the
BSCS around the beam X axis by entering a value for Orientation Angle on the
same dialog box. As an alternative adjustment, you can click the Shear Center
radio button to position the shear center of the beam section relative to the BACS.
When you assign a beam orientation to your beam, Mechanica adjusts the beam icon
in the model window to reflect the rotational and linear offsets.
174
IndexProperties
See Also
Examples:
Shear Center is the point on a beam section about which the section
rotates under deflection. For many of the standard beam sections, the
shear center is coincident with the shape origin. Channel sections and
L-sections are exceptions. For channel sections, for example, the shear
center is below the shape origin. You can view the offset of the shear
center from the shape origin when you define or edit your beam
section by reviewing beam section properties.
DX (FEM mode only) Offset of the BSCS X axis from the BACS X axis. The
offset occurs along the direction of the BSCS X axis.
DY, DZ Offset of the BSCS from the BACS along the axis direction of the
BSCS.
o
See Also
Procedure:
2. Click the New button. The Beam Orientation Definition dialog box
appears.
3. Enter a descriptive name for the beam orientation, or accept the default
name.
4. Optionally, enter a description.
5. Enter the orientation angle.
6. Select Shape Origin or Shear Center as the attribute that you want to
offset with respect to the BACS.
7. Enter values for DY and DZ. In the FEM mode, you can also enter a value for
DX.
8. Click OK to save the definition and return to the Beam Orientations dialog
box. The beam orientation definition appears in the list.
See Also
References:
About Beams
About Beam Orientation
176
IndexProperties
Beam Releases
About Beam Releases
Use the Properties>Beam Releases command to specify the degrees of freedom
you want to release for a beam's ends. If you do not define a beam release,
Mechanica fixes all degrees of freedom at the ends of the beam.
Beam releases determine the degrees of freedom that do not participate in a
connection at the end of a beam. You can specify beam releases for both straight
and curved beams if they are defined using two entities, such as point-to-point
beams. You cannot specify beam releases for beams based on edges or curves.
When you apply a beam release definition to your beam, Mechanica displays a beam
release icon on the model that illustrates which degrees of freedom are fixed and
which are free.
When you select the Properties>Beam Releases command, the Beam Releases
dialog box appears. You can also access this dialog box by clicking the More button
in the Releases area of the Beam Definition dialog box. Use the items on the
Beam Releases dialog box to manage the beam releases for your model. The dialog
box includes these items:
Description Displays any description you entered for the beam release on
the Beam Release Definition dialog box.
New Opens the Beam Release Definition dialog box to allow you to
specify the degrees of freedom for the beam end.
Copy Copies the selected beam release to a new name and adds it to the
list. Mechanica gives the copy the default name BeamReleasex, where x is a
number that is one greater than the number of beam releases in the list. To
change the name, use Edit.
Edit Opens the Beam Release Definition dialog box to allow you to
modify the current definition for the selected beam release.
Delete Remove the selected beam release from the list.
See Also
Procedure:
177
In the following illustration, the beam release has degrees of freedom released in all
six directions:
178
IndexProperties
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click the New button. The Beam Release Definition dialog box appears.
Enter a name for the beam release or accept the default name.
Optionally, enter a description.
Select the degrees of freedom you want to release by toggling on any of the
Translation or Rotation buttons.
6. Click OK to complete the definition.
See Also
References:
About Beams
About Beam Releases
Shell Properties
About Shell Properties
Use the Properties>Shell Properties command to create and manage shell
properties. If you want shells that are not homogeneous or shells that are comprised
of several layers, or plies, you must create shell properties for your model.
You can assign shell properties to the following geometric entities, depending on the
model type:
Model Type
Entity
3D
2D Plane Stress
2D Plane Strain
2D Axisymmetric
179
You can assign a shell property (its thickness and laminate matrices) to a face,
region, or datum surface. You can also define a shell property that will reside in the
shell property library, but is not assigned to a particular entity. The shell property
library file is named mshlprp.lib.
When you select the Properties>Shell Properties command, the Shell Properties
dialog box appears. You use this dialog box to define the properties of a shell as you
define the shell, or you can define a shell property and save it in the library.
Before you define shell properties, see Guidelines for Using Shell Properties. To learn
more about shell properties, see Shell Thickness.
You can define three types of shell propertieshomogeneous, laminate layup, and
laminate stiffness.
See Also
Procedure:
Adding to the libraries After you create a property definition, use the left
arrow button on the appropriate dialog box to move the definition from the
Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list. This places the current
property definition in your library. Be aware that Mechanica creates and saves
the property-specific library file as soon as you move the first property from
the Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list.
If the property definition you are adding has the same name as a definition
already in the library, Mechanica tells you that the name already exists and
asks if you want to overwrite it. If you select No, Mechanica does not add the
current definition to the library.
You cannot, overwrite a property definition in the Entity in Model list with a
property definition with the same name from the Entity in Library list. If you
180
IndexProperties
create a new property definition with the same name as a definition already in
the library, the left arrow button becomes inactive.
The default location for all library files is your home directory, but you can move it to
a different directory. You can use the environment variable $HOMEDRIVE to set your
home directory on Windows platforms.
When you access the library, Mechanica looks for the library file in the following
directories in this order:
1. the directory from which you started Mechanica
2. your home directory
3. the lib subdirectory of the Mechanica home directory
You can move or copy the library files into any of the above directories.
Note: For the beam section library, you can specify another location for the
beam_sections directory with the config.pro option sim_beamsec_path. You
must use a full path for this option.
181
Laminate
For more information about defining these property types, see the description of
Property Type.
See Also
Reference:
182
Model Thickness
IndexProperties
When you click New to create a new shell property, the Shell Property Definition
dialog box appears.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Advanced Shells
Laminate
When you click New on the Shell Properties dialog box, the Shell Property
Definition dialog box appears with these items:
183
Homogeneous Stiffness
To define a homogeneous shell property type, you must specify a value in the
Thickness field. You enter a positive value to define shell thickness for shells, 2D
shells, 2D plates, surfaces, or curves you selected. When Mechanica creates the shell
elements for the surface, it applies the thickness you specify for the shell property
equally on both sides of the selected surface. For example, if you specify a shell
thickness of 1, Mechanica places 0.5 on the top side of the surface and 0.5 on the
bottom side.
The Thickness field is a parameter-capable edit field. You can create or select a
Pro/ENGINEER parameter for the thickness by clicking the p button.
Laminate Stiffness
To define a laminate stiffness shell property type, you must specify several values for
Mechanica using the Shell Property Definition dialog box. Use the Stiffness tab
and the Mass and Additional Calc tab to move from one portion of the dialog box
to another. For each component there is a non-editable text field that displays the
units.
If you are working in the FEM mode, Mechanica does not support laminate stiffness.
The components of the following stiffnesses are relative to the material orientation
you have assigned to the shell. Entries in the fields on this dialog box are optional
unless stated otherwise. You define them using the equations described in Shell
Property Equations:
Extensional Stiffness You must enter positive real numbers for A11,
A22, and A66.
Coupling Stiffness Entries in these fields are optional.
Bending Stiffness You must enter positive real numbers for D11, D22,
and D66.
Transverse Shear Stiffness You must enter positive real numbers for
A44 and A55.
The thermal resultant coefficients reflect the additional load applied to the laminate
shell as a result of a difference in thermal properties in the ply materials. Mechanica
assumes that the temperature distribution is uniform through the thickness of the
shell. Keep this in mind when entering values in the Thermal Resultant
Coefficients area for:
Force
Moment
If you want to perform a modal analysis of your model, or if this shell property set is
to contribute to the total mass of the model, you must enter values for:
184
IndexProperties
If you click the Calculate Stresses and Strains button, more items appear.
For ease of use when modeling composites and the ability to compute ply stresses in
the postprocessor, use Laminate Layup rather than Laminate Stiffness.
Laminate Layup
A laminate consists of a number of layers, or plies, stacked on each other. When you
define your 3D shell property as a laminate layup, you can:
You can review the properties for each ply in the results.
For a picture of what a laminate layup shell looks like, see Laminate Layup
Illustration.
When you select Laminate Layup on the Shell Property Definition dialog box,
additional items appear on the dialog box:
Layup
Material or Sub-laminate
Thickness
Orientation
Number
Use the buttons to the right of the dialog box to control your laminate layup table.
For ease of use when modeling composites and the ability to compute ply stresses in
the postprocessor, use Laminate Layup rather than Laminate Stiffness.
Note: In the FEM mode, Mechanica supports laminate layup shell properties and material
orientations assigned to surfaces for NASTRAN only. If you are running an analysis with
another solver, Mechanica informs you that you cannot run the analysis with the solver
you have chosen.
See Also
References:
Spring Properties
About Spring Properties
You can define spring properties in one of the following ways, depending on the
situation.
In either case, Mechanica opens the Spring Properties dialog box, which you can
use to manage spring properties for an Advanced or To Ground spring. This dialog
box lists any stiffness properties already created for your model and lets you create
new ones.
The dialog box contains the following items:
186
IndexProperties
New Opens the Spring Properties Definition dialog box opens to allow
you to create a new spring property.
Copy Copies the selected spring property to a new name and adds it to the
Spring Properties in Model list. A new spring property appears in the list
with the default name SpringPropx, where x is one more than the number of
items created for the model. To change the name, select it and click Edit.
Edit Opens the Spring Properties Definition dialog box with the values
of the selected spring property.
Delete Removes the selected spring property from the Spring Properties
in Model list.
If you accessed the Spring Properties dialog box from the Spring Definition
dialog box, when you close the Spring Properties dialog box, the software uses the
property you selected from the Spring Properties in Model list for the current
spring definition, and displays the property name in the Spring Definition dialog
box. If you did not select a property, the first property in the Spring Properties in
Model list is selected by default.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
About Springs
Adding to the libraries After you create a property definition, use the left
arrow button on the appropriate dialog box to move the definition from the
Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list. This places the current
property definition in your library. Be aware that Mechanica creates and saves
the property-specific library file as soon as you move the first property from
the Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list.
If the property definition you are adding has the same name as a definition
already in the library, Mechanica tells you that the name already exists and
187
asks if you want to overwrite it. If you select No, Mechanica does not add the
current definition to the library.
You cannot, overwrite a property definition in the Entity in Model list with a
property definition with the same name from the Entity in Library list. If you
create a new property definition with the same name as a definition already in
the library, the left arrow button becomes inactive.
The default location for all library files is your home directory, but you can move it to
a different directory. You can use the environment variable $HOMEDRIVE to set your
home directory on Windows platforms.
When you access the library, Mechanica looks for the library file in the following
directories in this order:
1. the directory from which you started Mechanica
2. your home directory
3. the lib subdirectory of the Mechanica home directory
You can move or copy the library files into any of the above directories.
188
IndexProperties
Note: For the beam section library, you can specify another location for the
beam_sections directory with the config.pro option sim_beamsec_path. You
must use a full path for this option.
Name The name for the spring property. Enter a name or accept the
default name .
Description An optional description of the spring property.
Stiffness tab These components represent the extensional and torsional
characteristics of the spring. You should enter a non-zero value for at least
one of these items. Enter non-negative values for the following:
o
o
o
o
o
o
Damping tab (FEM mode only) Specify non-negative values for the
following properties of the spring:
o
o
o
For information on defining extensional and torsional stiffness for 2D and 3D models,
see Defining Spring Properties for 2D and 3D Models.
Note that Mechanica labels the stiffness components using Cartesian component
directions. To review the equivalent component directions for cylindrical and
spherical components, see Axis and Component Equivalents in Different Coordinate
Systems.
189
See Also
Reference:
About Springs
For 3D models, you specify extensional stiffness for Kxx, Kyy, and Kzz.
For 2D models, you specify extensional stiffness only for Kxx and Kyy.
Torsional stiffness
For 3D models, you specify torsional stiffness in Txx, Tyy, and Tzz. For 2D
plane strain and 2D axisymmetric models, you specify torsional stiffness only
in Tzz.
For 2D plane stress models, you do not specify torsional stiffness. A spring in
a 2D plane stress model does not contribute to rotations when the engine
calculates results.
2.
3.
4.
5.
IndexProperties
Cxx
Cyy
Czz
7. Click OK to accept your definition or Cancel to discard your changes and
close the dialog box.
Mass Properties
About Mass Properties
You can define mass properties in one of the following ways, depending on the
situation.
In either case, Mechanica displays the Mass Properties dialog box, which you can
use to create a mass property. From this dialog box, you can also edit, copy, or
delete an existing property. To create a new property, click New. The Mass
Property Definition dialog box appears. You use this dialog box to define the
property.
This dialog box includes the following items:
Name Enter a name for the mass property, or use the default name
provided.
Description Enter an optional description.
Mass Specify the value of the mass in units consistent with the other units
you have used in this model. You must enter a positive value.
Moments of Inertia Specify the moments of inertia about each mass
element's center of gravity with respect to the axes and principal planes of
the WCS.
For 3D models, you can specify values for Ixx, Iyy, Izz, Ixy, Ixz, and Iyz.
For plane strain and 2D axisymmetric models, you can specify a value for only
Izz. For plane stress models, you cannot specify any moments of inertia. The
default value for all moments is 0.
Depending on the situation, you may not need to specify all of the diagonal
terms when you specify moments of inertia.
Note that Mechanica labels the moments of inertia using Cartesian component
directions. To review the equivalent component directions for cylindrical and
spherical components, see Axis and Component Equivalents in Different
Coordinate Systems.
191
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
About Masses
Materials
About Materials
Use the Properties>Materials command to specify materials for geometry and
idealizations in your part or assembly and to save materials in a library. You can
assign materials to parts, surfaces, and curves. When doing so, be aware of the
following:
If you select this command in native mode, the Materials dialog box appears. If you
select the Materials command in the FEM mode, the FEM MATERIAL menu
appears.
To learn more about materials, see:
192
IndexProperties
You can use the same material properties in Structure and Thermal.
If you assign a material to a part, it is not automatically assigned to all
volumes, surfaces, and curves.
If you are working in the assembly mode, you can individually assign
materials to the parts in your assembly.
In Structure, you cannot assign materials to springs or masses.
If you assign materials to a curve in a solid or shell model, the curve's
materials are independent of the materials you assign to the part.
Mechanica maintains consistency between Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica data
for all materials for the following material properties: name, density, and
specific heat.
For Young's modulus, Poisson's ratio, shear modulus, coefficient of thermal expansion, and
thermal conductivity, consistency is maintained between the databases only for isotropic
materials.
Orthotropic materials defined in Mechanica will not be defined in the Pro/ENGINEER
database.
Material Types
You can define properties for three types of material symmetry:
These types are independent for Structure and Thermal. Thus, a material may have
isotropic structural properties and orthotropic thermal properties.
You can assign isotropic materials to any entity that requires materials.
You can assign orthotropic and transversely isotropic materials to the following
entities according to model type:
3D
part
shell
face/surface
face/surface
shell
Type
Required
mass density
Structural and
Thermal
Structural and
Thermal
Young's modulus
Structural
yes
Poisson's ratio
Structural
yes
shear modulus
Structural
194
IndexProperties
coefficient of thermal
expansion
Structural
failure criterion
Structural
specific heat
Thermal
thermal conductivity
Thermal
yes
ultimate tensile
strength
Structural
material type
Structural
fatigue strength
reduction factor
Structural
surface finish
Structural
Note: You can create isotropic material properties that are temperature-dependent by
specifying Young's modulus, Poisson's ratio, or coefficient of thermal expansion as a
function of temperature.
Material Basics
You can save materials in a library and use them across models. Both Mechanica
productsStructure and Thermalcan use the properties from a single material set.
You can use materials in the following ways:
There is no limit to the number of materials you can have in a model or in your
library.
For more information, see Materials Dialog Box or, for FEM mode, FEM MATERIAL
menu.
195
See Also
Reference:
Material Library
The material library is a convenient way to use the same material in more than one
model. When you install Mechanica, the material library consists of a set of standard
materials known as the default material library.
If you do not find the material you want in the default material library, you can
create your own material and add it to the library. When you save a material to the
library, Mechanica creates a library file named mmatl.lib in your working directory.
This new file contains all the materials in the Materials in Library listboth the
Mechanica default materials and any materials you added. There is no limit to the
number of materials you can have in your material library.
You can edit any material in the library, whether the material is part of Mechanica's
default material set or you created the material yourself. However, you cannot delete
materials from the material library. Thus, if you create a new material and save it to
the library, it will always be there.
196
IndexProperties
When you access the material library, Mechanica looks for the mmatl.lib file in the
following directories in this order:
1. the directory from which you started Mechanica (working directory)
2. your home directory
3. the lib subdirectory of the directory in which Mechanica was installed
You can move or copy the mmatl.lib file into any of these three directories.
197
For transient thermal analysis, all of these measuring systems measure conductivity
in seconds.
create, edit, copy, and delete materials from your model database
assign materials to or delete materials from your model
add a material to the library
Materials In Library
Materials In Model
Right arrow to add a material to the model from the library. This places
the material in the model database. Note that the material must still be
explicitly assigned to have an effect on an analysis.
Left arrow to add a material to the library from the model
The following buttons on the dialog box enable you to perform various actions:
198
Assign This option is not available when creating a beam definition or shell
definition. This option is inactive in the FEM mode because you perform FEM
mode material assignment from the FEM MATERIAL menu and not from this
dialog box.
New
Edit
Copy
Delete This option is not available for a material associated with an
idealization, such as a beam definition or shell definition.
IndexProperties
See Also
Procedures:
To Assign a Material
To Assign a Material in FEM Mode
To Create a Material
To Edit a Material
To Copy a Material
To Delete a Material
Assign a Material
On the Materials dialog box, click Assign to assign a material from the Materials
In Library list or the Materials In Model list to one or more geometric entities. To
add a material from either list to your model, select a material on the list, and click
Assign. You can assign materials to parts, faces/surfaces, edges/curves.
Note: The Assign button is inactive in FEM mode because you assign
materials through the FEM MATERIAL menu rather than from the Materials
dialog box.
If you select a material from the Materials In Model list and click Assign, a dropdown list of entity types appears. If you select an entity type, you should use the
normal selection methods to select one or more entities on the model.
To change the properties of a material, click Edit to open the Material Definition
dialog box where you can alter any property. You can verify an assignment by
199
selecting a material on the Materials In Model list and reviewing the highlighted
part or geometry.
After you assign materials to your model, Mechanica lists those materials on the
Model Tree. If you select the material in the Model Tree, Mechanica highlights the
part or surface to which it is assigned. For example, if you select bronze on the
Model Tree, Mechanica will highlight every part or surface that is bronze.
When assigning materials, be aware of these factors:
See Also
Procedures:
To Assign a Material
To Copy a Material
To Edit a Material
To Assign a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click
200
IndexProperties
4. Select an entity type and use the normal selection methods to select one or
more entities on your model.
The material you selected appears on the Model Tree.
5. If you are working with an assembly and you select Part from the Assign
drop-down list, you can use either the Model Tree, or the normal selection
methods, to select a subassembly or the entire assembly. In this case,
Mechanica implicitly assigns the material to all parts, datum, geometry,
edges, and surfaces in the selected assembly or subassembly.
6. When you confirm your selection, the material is assigned to the entity,
unless a material is already assigned to it.
7. If the entity you select is associated with a material other than the one you
are trying to assign, Mechanica asks if you want to change the material.
o
o
Click Yes to replace the current material with the selected material
and be returned to the Materials dialog box.
Click No to return to the Materials dialog box without changing the
material.
This message does not appear if you assigned the same material in a product
other than the one you are currently usingfor example, if you previously
assigned a material in Thermal but are now in Structure.
Continue on to About Material Orientation or return to previous.
Create a Material
Click New on the Materials dialog box to create a material.
A blank Material Definition dialog box appears on which to define the material.
After you complete the definition and click OK, the new material name appears on
the Materials In Model list.
Note that you can add a material to the Materials In Model list in the following
ways:
select a material from the library, and click the right arrow
create a new material by using the New button on the Materials dialog box
Either method adds the new material to the database, but the material is not
associated with any geometry until you assign it in either native Mode or FEM mode.
If you add a new material to the material library, the software places the new
material library in your home directory.
See Also
Procedure:
To Create a Material
201
On this dialog box, you enter the material name and an optional description, as well
as determine definitions for:
Cost
Density
The principal system of units previously set for the model determines the units that
appear by default on this dialog box. You can specify the system of units and also
create individual units for your model.
Choose one of the following tabs:
Different options appear on the Structural and Thermal tabs, depending on the
material symmetry you select:
These symmetries are independent for Structure and Thermal. A material may have
isotopic structural properties and orthotropic thermal properties. The Mechanica
library contains isotropic materials only.
You define an isotropic material for materials such as steel. For wood or fiberreinforced composite, you define an orthotropic or transversely isotropic material.
To Create a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials. In FEM mode, also select Whole Part on the
FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Click New.
The Material Definition dialog box appears.
3. Enter the appropriate material properties on the Material Definition dialog
box.
202
IndexProperties
Edit a Material
Click Edit in the Materials dialog box to edit an assigned or unassigned material in
the Materials in Model list. You can also edit a material in the Materials in
Library list, but you must first move the material to the Materials in Model list.
You can then move the edited material to the Materials in Library list, thus
overwriting the original library material.
When you click Edit, the Material Definition dialog box appears. Change the fields
in the dialog box to the values you want for your material properties. By editing a
material, you change the material on all of the geometric entities to which it was
assigned.
See Also
Procedure:
To Edit a Material
To Edit a Material
By editing a material, you change the material on all the geometric entities to which
it was assigned.
1. Select Properties>Materials or click
. In the FEM mode, also select
Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. The material you select
must be a user-created material rather than one of the standard materials in
Mechanica's material library.
3. Click Edit.
The Material Definition dialog box appears.
4. Change the fields in the dialog box to the values you want.
As a quick alternative to this procedure, you can select the material you want to edit
from the model tree. Right-click on the material or, for FEM mode solid chunks, the
material assignment, and select the Edit Definition command from the object
action menu.
203
Copy a Material
Click Copy on the Materials dialog box to duplicate a material on the Materials In
Model list. You can also copy a material in the Materials in Library list, but you
must first move the material to the Materials in Model list. Note that you cannot
make an exact copy of a material because no two materials can have the same
name. The materials may be identical in every way except their name.
The copy will exist in the model file but not be assigned until you assign the material
to a geometric entity.
See Also
Procedure:
To Copy a Material
To Copy a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click
Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
Delete a Material
Click Delete on the Materials dialog box to delete an assigned or unassigned
material from the Materials in Model list, provided that material is not assigned to
a shell or beam. You cannot delete any of the materials in the Materials in Library
list.
If you did not previously assign the material to an entity, Mechanica deletes the
material from the model database. If you assigned the material to an entity, the
204
IndexProperties
software first asks whether you want to delete the material. Click one of the
following buttons:
See Also
Procedures:
To Delete a Material
To Create a Material
To Delete a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click
. In the FEM mode, also select
Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. The material you select
must be a user-created material rather than one of the standard materials in
Mechanica's material library.
3. Click Delete.
If you did not previously assign the material to an entity, the material is
deleted from the model database.
4. When you assign the material to an entity, the software asks whether you
want to delete it. Click one of the following buttons:
o No to retain the material
o Yes to delete the material. The material is deleted from the model.
As a quick alternative to this procedure, you can select the material you want to
delete from the model tree. Right-click on the material and select the Delete
command from the object action menu.
The following commands enable you to select an object type to which to apply a
material:
The following commands on the FEM MATERIAL menu enable you to review
information about a material, in addition to assigning materials to and unassigning
materials from entities in your model:
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
206
Object Action
IndexProperties
create, edit, copy, and delete materials from your model database
assign materials to or delete materials from your model
add a material to the library
Materials In Library
Materials In Model
Right arrow to add a material to the model from the library. This places
the material in the model database. Note that the material must still be
explicitly assigned to have an effect on an analysis.
Left arrow to add a material to the library from the model
The following buttons on the dialog box enable you to perform various actions:
Assign This option is not available when creating a beam definition or shell
definition. This option is inactive in the FEM mode because you perform FEM
mode material assignment from the FEM MATERIAL menu and not from this
dialog box.
New
Edit
Copy
Delete This option is not available for a material associated with an
idealization, such as a beam definition or shell definition.
207
See Also
Procedures:
To Assign a Material
To Assign a Material in FEM Mode
To Create a Material
To Edit a Material
To Copy a Material
To Delete a Material
Assign a Material
Assign a Material in FEM Mode
Click Properties>Materials. When the FEM MATERIAL menu appears with Assign
highlighted, select one of the following object types:
If you select Solid Chunk or Shell Pair, Mechanica prompts you to select an entity
to which to assign a material.
After you select an entity on your model, the Materials dialog box appears.
208
IndexProperties
Select a material from the Materials In Library list or from the Materials In
Model list, or create a new material. After you click OK, the material is assigned to
the selected entity. Repeat this procedure for each entity to which you are assigning
a material.
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
The FEM MATERIAL menu opens and software prompts you to select an
object type to which to assign the material.
2. Select an object type on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The software prompts you to select an entity on the model.
3. Use the normal selection methods to select an entity or entities on your
model.
The Materials dialog box opens.
4. Select a material from the Materials In Model list.
5. If you want to use a material from the library, use the right arrow to move
the material from the Materials in Library list to the Materials in Model
list.
The material you selected appears on the Model Tree.
6. Click OK.
The material is assigned to the selected entity.
Create a Material
Click New on the Materials dialog box to create a material.
209
A blank Material Definition dialog box appears on which to define the material.
After you complete the definition and click OK, the new material name appears on
the Materials In Model list.
Note that you can add a material to the Materials In Model list in the following
ways:
select a material from the library, and click the right arrow
create a new material by using the New button on the Materials dialog box
Either method adds the new material to the database, but the material is not
associated with any geometry until you assign it in either native Mode or FEM mode.
If you add a new material to the material library, the software places the new
material library in your home directory.
See Also
Procedure:
To Create a Material
On this dialog box, you enter the material name and an optional description, as well
as determine definitions for:
Cost
Density
The principal system of units previously set for the model determines the units that
appear by default on this dialog box. You can specify the system of units and also
create individual units for your model.
Choose one of the following tabs:
Different options appear on the Structural and Thermal tabs, depending on the
material symmetry you select:
210
IndexProperties
These symmetries are independent for Structure and Thermal. A material may have
isotopic structural properties and orthotropic thermal properties. The Mechanica
library contains isotropic materials only.
You define an isotropic material for materials such as steel. For wood or fiberreinforced composite, you define an orthotropic or transversely isotropic material.
To Create a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials. In FEM mode, also select Whole Part on the
FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Click New.
The Material Definition dialog box appears.
3. Enter the appropriate material properties on the Material Definition dialog
box.
4. Click OK on the Material Definition dialog box.
The material you created appears in the Materials In Model list on the
Materials dialog box.
Edit a Material
Click Edit in the Materials dialog box to edit an assigned or unassigned material in
the Materials in Model list. You can also edit a material in the Materials in
Library list, but you must first move the material to the Materials in Model list.
You can then move the edited material to the Materials in Library list, thus
overwriting the original library material.
When you click Edit, the Material Definition dialog box appears. Change the fields
in the dialog box to the values you want for your material properties. By editing a
material, you change the material on all of the geometric entities to which it was
assigned.
See Also
Procedure:
To Edit a Material
211
To Edit a Material
By editing a material, you change the material on all the geometric entities to which
it was assigned.
1. Select Properties>Materials or click
. In the FEM mode, also select
Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. The material you select
must be a user-created material rather than one of the standard materials in
Mechanica's material library.
3. Click Edit.
The Material Definition dialog box appears.
4. Change the fields in the dialog box to the values you want.
As a quick alternative to this procedure, you can select the material you want to edit
from the model tree. Right-click on the material or, for FEM mode solid chunks, the
material assignment, and select the Edit Definition command from the object
action menu.
Copy a Material
Click Copy on the Materials dialog box to duplicate a material on the Materials In
Model list. You can also copy a material in the Materials in Library list, but you
must first move the material to the Materials in Model list. Note that you cannot
make an exact copy of a material because no two materials can have the same
name. The materials may be identical in every way except their name.
The copy will exist in the model file but not be assigned until you assign the material
to a geometric entity.
See Also
Procedure:
To Copy a Material
To Copy a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click
Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
212
IndexProperties
Delete a Material
Click Delete on the Materials dialog box to delete an assigned or unassigned
material from the Materials in Model list, provided that material is not assigned to
a shell or beam. You cannot delete any of the materials in the Materials in Library
list.
If you did not previously assign the material to an entity, Mechanica deletes the
material from the model database. If you assigned the material to an entity, the
software first asks whether you want to delete the material. Click one of the
following buttons:
See Also
Procedures:
To Delete a Material
To Create a Material
To Delete a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click
. In the FEM mode, also select
Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. The material you select
must be a user-created material rather than one of the standard materials in
Mechanica's material library.
3. Click Delete.
213
If you did not previously assign the material to an entity, the material is
deleted from the model database.
4. When you assign the material to an entity, the software asks whether you
want to delete it. Click one of the following buttons:
o No to retain the material
o Yes to delete the material. The material is deleted from the model.
As a quick alternative to this procedure, you can select the material you want to
delete from the model tree. Right-click on the material and select the Delete
command from the object action menu.
Unassign a Material
To Unassign a Material in FEM Mode
1. Select Properties>Materials or click
2. Select Unassign.
The software prompts you to select an object type from which to unassign a
material.
3. Select an object type from the FEM MATERIAL menu.
4. Select an entity or entities from which to delete an assigned material.
The software asks if you want to remove the reference to the material.
5. Click Yes to remove the reference to the material or No to retain the
reference to the material in your model.
If you want to unassign a material from a solid chunk, there is a quick alternative to
this procedure. Select the material assignment you want to remove from the model
tree. Right-click on the material assignment and select the Delete command from
the object action menu.
214
Whole Part Enables you to unassign a material from the whole part.
Solid Chunk Enables you to unassign a material from the solid area
defined by the surface you select.
Shell Pair Enables you to unassign a material from a shell pair.
IndexProperties
After you select an object type, select an entity from which to delete a material.
After you select an entity, the software asks if you want to remove the reference to
the material. Click Yes to remove the reference to the material or No to retain the
reference to the material in your model.
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
Material Orientation
About Material Orientation
Use the Properties>Material Orientations command to specify material
orientation for surfaces and volumes of 2D or 3D models. Mechanica uses these
properties to determine the material directions of orthotropic or transversely
isotropic material properties you assign to these entities. You may also view certain
results, such as stress, displacement, flux, and others, relative to the material
orientation of the elements associated with these entities.
If you are working with a single part, Mechanica defines the material orientation for
that part. If your model is an assembly, Mechanica enables you to define material
orientation for each of the parts that make up the assembly.
When you select Properties>Material Orientations, the Material Orientations
dialog box appears.
To learn more about using material orientation, see:
For all entities, except for surfaces of 3D models and shells, the principal
material directions are aligned with the WCS axes.
For surfaces of 3D models and shells, the principal material directions are
defined by the parameterization of the surface, and that:
o Material direction 1 is parallel to the first parametric curve of the
surface.
o Material direction 2 is set perpendicular to directions 1 and 3.
215
The Material Orientations dialog box lists all material orientations that you have
defined. You can define as many material orientations as you want without assigning
them.
216
IndexProperties
When you select one of the listed material orientations, the entities to which that
orientation is assigned are highlighted and a material orientation icon appears for
each of those entities. The icon has 3 axes and is labeled for the material directions
1, 2, and 3.
The type of entities to which you can assign a material orientation depends on:
Assign
New
Copy
Edit
Delete
If a description was entered for a selected material orientation, it appears below the
list of material orientations.
See Also
Procedures:
217
If you have previously assigned a material orientation to any of the selected entities,
Mechanica gives you the opportunity to retain the existing orientation or to change
it. Click Yes to change the orientation or No to retain the existing one.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
5. The software highlights the entity you select. (If you have previously assigned
a material orientation to any of the entities you select, Mechanica gives you
the opportunity to retain the existing orientation or to change it.)
6. Confirm your selection. The Material Orientations dialog box reappears.
See Also
Reference:
218
IndexProperties
Model Type
Entity Type
Native
3D
Part
Surface
Native
2D
Surface
FEM
3D
Surface
When you select an entity type, the Material Orientation Definition dialog box
appears.
Enter values in the dialog box fields to define a new material orientation. After you
click OK, the new material orientation appears on the Material Orientations dialog
box.
The new orientation is not assigned to your model until you assign it to a geometric
entity.
See Also
Procedure:
Be aware that when you create material orientations for a surface, you may, in
effect, be creating the material orientation for a shell, 2D plate, or 2D solid,
depending on how you have idealized your model.
If a material orientation is not assigned, the Preview button enables you to select a
surface or solid to view the material orientation icon as if the orientation were
assigned.
219
Part
When you select Part or Volume, Mechanica asks you to select the part or volume
you want, and then displays a dialog box. On this dialog box, you can specify:
220
Example:
Example:
Example:
Example:
IndexProperties
2. Click New.
In the native mode, a drop-down menu appears.
In the FEM mode, the Material Orientation Definition dialog box appears.
See Also
Procedure:
221
2. Click Edit.
The Material Orientation Definition dialog box appears.
3. Change the fields on the dialog box to the values you want for your material
orientation.
See Also
Procedure:
See Also
Procedure:
222
IndexProperties
2. Click Delete.
If you have assigned the orientation to one or more entities, the software
asks whether you want to delete it.
3. Click No to retain the previously assigned orientation. Click Yes to delete the
orientation from all of the entities to which it is assigned.
223
Structural Constraints
About Structure Constraints
In Structure and FEM mode Structure, use the Insert>Displacement Constraint
or Insert>Along Surface Constraint command to constrain entities in your model
or use relations functions. In defining constraints for a Structure model, your goal is
to fix portions of the model geometry so that the model cannot move, or can move
only in a predetermined way. Your model's constraints, along with its loads, provide
the software with the real-world conditions that it uses as the basis for analysis. In
native mode you can also use the Insert>Symmetry Constraint command to
apply constraints that allow you to take advantage of your model's geometric
symmetry.
In constraining a Structure model, you are defining the extent to which your model
can move in reference to a coordinate system. Thus, when you add constraints, you
specify translational or rotational part movement. The software assumes that any
unconstrained portion of your Structure model is free to move in all directions.
Before applying constraints, see Guidelines for Structure Constraints. Every
constraint is created as part of a constraint set. In Structure, you can use only one
constraint set per analysis.
You can choose from the following constraint types:
For each of these three constraint types, you need to consider different factors and
use different creation methods. To review information that is common to all three
constraint types, see:
Adding Constraints
Constraints, Loads, and Analysis Types
Mechanica applies the constraints you specify to all the entities that you select and
places a constraint icon at each location.
For compressed solid parts in assemblies, Mechanica automatically adds a constraint
between intersecting midsurfaces whenever possible. When Mechanica adds such a
constraint, the constrained midsurfaces are forced to deform together during a run.
If you are working in Thermal, see About Thermal Boundary Conditions for
information on applying convection conditions, prescribed temperatures, cyclic
symmetry, or in FEM mode, radiation.
224
IndexStructural Constraints
After you create a constraint, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated
icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If
you are deleting a constraint, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first. You can also
troubleshoot constraints, control constraint icon visibility, and place constraints on
layers.
To create, edit, or delete constraint sets, select Properties>Constraint Sets to
open the Constraint Sets dialog box.
See Also
Procedures:
Adding Constraints
For Mechanica to perform most types of analyses, you must constrain at least one
area of your model. When you apply constraints, Mechanica associates the
constraints with model geometry. For structural analysis, a constraint is an external
limit on the movement of a portion of your model. For thermal analysis, a constraint
is an external limit on the temperature of a portion of your model.
You can apply a constraint to a single geometric entity or to multiple entities. When
you apply a constraint to multiple entities, Mechanica does not allow you to mix
entity types, except for points and vertices, and edges and curves. For example, if
you specify a point as the first entity, all remaining entities, to which constraint
applies, must also be points or vertices.
Note: Constraints applied to vertices and to multiple datum points in
Mechanica FEM mode are suppressed in Mechanica.
In general, you should plan the placement of your constraints according to the model
type. For example, if you are working with a solid model, you should try to place
your constraints on surfaces or surface regions rather than points or curves. With
shell models, you should try to place your constraints on curves, surfaces, or surface
regions, depending on the load type. Although you can place constraints on other
entity types, this placement can adversely affect convergence.
When constraining a structural assembly, be aware that you must constrain all
independent bodies in the assembly. If the constraint set does not constrain all
bodies in the model, Mechanica is unable to run the associated analyses.
225
You can place some types of constraints on a surface that will be compressed to a
midsurface edge. When possible, Mechanica automatically transfers the constraint
from the original surface to the compressed midsurface. When not possible,
Mechanica deletes the constraints.
Constraint or Boundary
Condition
Load
structural
yes
optional
modal
yes
no
yes
optional
Constraint or Boundary
Condition
Load
static
yesa
optional
modal
yesb
no
buckling
yesc
yes
yesa
optional
prestress static
yesa
yes
prestress modal
yes
no
contact
yesa
optional
dynamic time
yes
yes
Mechanica Structure
Mechanica Thermal
thermal
Mechanica Structure
226
IndexStructural Constraints
dynamic frequency
yes
yes
dynamic random
yes
yes
dynamic shock
yes
yes
fatigue
no
yesd
steady-state thermal
yes
optional
transient thermal
yes
optional
Mechanica Thermal
Constraints on Entities
You can place displacement constraints on a variety of geometric entities including
points, vertices, edges, curves,and surfaces.
You define a displacement constraint by selecting the appropriate geometric
reference before or after opening the Constraint dialog box to indicate how
Mechanica should apply the constraint.
The geometric entities you can constrain differ according to the model type and
operating mode, as shown below:
Model Types
Constrainable Entities
3D
2D plane stress
2D plane strain
227
2D axisymmetric
Use names that are 32 characters or fewer. You can use alphanumeric
characters and underbars. Names must start with alphabetic characters.
The software does not permit you to use a name already used for another
load, constraint, or boundary condition.
Use names that uniquely and clearly identify the objective, placement, or
other key characteristic of the set. If you use the default names, you or other
users may have trouble distinguishing the sets later.
You can include as many different types of constraints as you want within a
single constraint set.
There is no limit to the number of constraint sets you can create or the
number of constraints you can include in a constraint set.
You can edit and delete the individual constraints that make up a set. You can
also edit and delete a constraint set. With constraint sets, you can change the
set description or the name.
You can remove a given constraint from its set by editing the constraint and
changing the selected set. Use the name of a set that already exists, or click
New. The software adds the constraint to that set.
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for guidelines on how to use
constraint sets in your analysis.
See Also
Reference:
228
IndexStructural Constraints
New Opens the Constraint Set Definition dialog box. Enter a name and
optional description for the new constraint set.
Note: You can also access the Constraint Set Definition dialog box by
clicking the New button in the Member of Set area on the Constraint
and Symmetry Constraint dialog boxes.
Copy Opens the Copy Constraint Set dialog box to enable you to enter a
name for the copy, or accept the default name. When you click OK, the copy
is added to the list in the Constraint Sets dialog box. The new constraint set
includes copies of the same constraints as the original constraint set.
Edit Opens the Constraint Set Definition dialog box to enable you to
modify the information that you used to specify the highlighted constraint set.
Delete Removes the highlighted constraint set.
Description Displays the optional description you entered when you
created the constraint set.
If you want the flexibility of treating each of your constraints separately, use a
unique name and unique set name for each constraint. Remember, however, that an
analysis can only access one constraint set.
Load and constraint sets provide a logical means of organizing your modeling entities
so that you can define analyses effectively and clearly. A carefully considered
approach to load and constraint set creation simplifies load and constraint selection
when defining your analyses. Although the software permits you to create each load
and constraint as a separate load set or constraint set, you can greatly reduce the
number of selections you need to make for analysis definition by grouping your loads
and constraints into sets.
See Also
Reference:
229
Geometry
Coordinate Systems
Datum Points
Regions
Points If you attempt to delete a point associated with a load or
constraint, the software informs you of the association by displaying a
message with the information that the geometry you want to delete is
referenced by a simulation feature. You can delete the point, but Mechanica
also deletes the associated load or constraint.
Surfaces If you apply a displacement constraint to a surface by selecting
the surface with Box Select or Part Boundary, and Mechanica later creates
a new surface due to a parameter change, the software does not
automatically apply the existing constraint to the new surface.
Shell Models If you plan to constrain a shell model surface, edge, region,
curve, or point that Mechanica may compress during analysis, see Model
Entities and Idealizations to learn about how the software processes
constraints placed on these geometry types.
Cyclic Symmetry Models If you plan on assigning a cyclic symmetry
constraint to a portion of a symmetric model, you must first create the model
section in Pro/ENGINEER, using the Cut feature on the original model.
Mirror Symmetry Models If you apply a mirror symmetry constraint to a
surface that is collapsed to a curve due to midsurface compression during
analysis, the software ignores the mirror symmetry constraint.
See Also
Reference:
230
IndexStructural Constraints
Displacement Constraints
When you select the Insert>Displacement Constraint command, the following
version of the Constraint dialog box appears. Use the following items on the dialog
box to define a displacement constraint in Structure:
Constraint type The translation and rotation constraints that you can
apply differ depending upon your model type and coordinate system. You
must specify the setting for each component of these constraint types.
o
If you are working with symmetry constraints in native mode or Along Surface
constraints in FEM mode, Mechanica provides a different version of the dialog box.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
231
Constraint Settings
You can select one of the following settings for each constraint option:
The software uses only the translational degrees of freedom for solid models because
solids have only three degrees of freedom. The software disregards any setting you
select for the rotational degrees of freedom. If you apply the constraint to shell or
beam models, the software uses both translational and rotational settings because
the shell formulation has all six degrees of freedom.
See Also
Reference:
232
IndexStructural Constraints
Constraint Options
The following table shows which constraint options are available for each model type
in a Cartesian coordinate system:
Model Type
Constraint Options
3D
plane stress
Trans X, Trans Y
Note: The software ignores any rotational degrees of freedom for 2D solids or
solids in 3D models. If you specify constraints on Rot X, Rot Y, or Rot Z for
these elements, the software ignores the constraints.
The software labels the coordinate directions differently if a cylindrical or spherical
coordinate system is active. The following table shows the constraint options for each
coordinate system (R=radial, T=theta, and P=phi):
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
Trans X
Trans R
Trans R
Trans Y
Trans T
Trans T
Trans Z
Trans Z
Trans P
Rot X
Rot R
Rot R
Rot Y
Rot T
Rot T
Rot Z
Rot Z
Rot P
233
See Also
References:
Trans Y
Trans Z
Rot X
Rot Y
Rot Z
Trans R
Trans T
Trans Z
Rot R
Rot T
Rot Z
Trans R
Trans T
Trans P
Rot R
Rot T
Rot P
Cylindrical:
Spherical:
234
IndexStructural Constraints
This icon indicates cyclic symmetry constraints. The icon appears on your design at
the axis of symmetry:
This icon indicates Along Surface constraints in FEM mode. The icon appears on your
design at the reference surface:
See Also
References:
Constraint Settings
Constraint Options
235
4. If you
dialog
now:
o
o
o
did not select geometric entities as references before you opened the
box, select one of the following References from the drop-down list
Surface(s)
Edge(s)
Point(s)
5. Click
Rotation
Free
Fixed
Prescribed
Function (FEM mode only)
If you select a prescribed setting, enter a value in the field to the right. You can enter a
value, mathematical expression, or parameter name in this field. The value should be in
length units for translation constraints, and in radians for rotation constraints.
See Also
References:
236
IndexStructural Constraints
Select the associated icon on the model and use Edit>Definition. Mechanica
displays the appropriate constraint definition dialog box. To change any of
your entries, simply edit the dialog box.
For Structure models only, if you want to troubleshoot or review your
constraints, you can spot-check the constraint icons to generally determine
whether you applied the constraint correctly. To learn how to spot-check a
constraint icon, you need to understand the icon layout. The constraint icon
shows which degrees of freedom you constrained. Two rows of boxes appear
at the base of the triangle, with each box indicating the state of the
displacement. Following is an example of a constraint icon:
237
You may want to define a small surface region and apply the constraint to the region
instead of to a point. This approach distributes the stresses and fluxes over a slightly
wider portion of the model, avoiding concentration problems.
Symmetry Constraints
Use the Insert>Symmetry Constraint command in Structure or Thermal to create
a cyclic or mirror symmetry constraint. This command is not available in FEM mode.
When you select this command, the Symmetry Constraint dialog box appears with
these items:
Your model can include both cyclic and mirror symmetry constraints, with these
limitations:
See Also
Procedures:
238
IndexStructural Constraints
There are two types of symmetry you can model in Mechanicamirror symmetry and
cyclic symmetry. Mirror symmetry relies on the principle that one segment of a
model is the mirror image of other segments. An example of this type of model
would be a rectangular plate with a hole at its center. In native mode you can use
the mirror symmetry constraint to take advantage of your model's symmetry. To use
mirror symmetry in FEM mode you must apply a displacement constraint to fix
translation normal to the plane of symmetry and fix rotations in opposition to the
plane of symmetry.
Cyclic symmetry relies on the principle that a segment of the geometry is repeated in
a cyclic manner throughout the model, but the segment is not a mirror image, either
in its geometry or its load scheme. An example of this type of geometry would be a
fan blade or turbine. You can only use cyclic symmetry in native mode. FEM mode
does not support this type of modeling.
The methods you use to develop these two types of symmetry differ, as does the
application of constraints and certain loads. Both types of symmetry can prove
efficient for a 3D solid or shell model. The choice of which symmetry type you use
depends on the model and the problem you wish to solve.
Note that, in some situations, you can use 2D axisymmetric modeling in place of
symmetry. While not strictly a form of symmetry, 2D axisymmetric modeling
provides an extremely efficient alternative to treating your model as a symmetric
solid. This form of modeling relies on the principle that a 2D slice of your solid
model, if rotated around an axis, can accurately depict the whole of your model's
geometry, loads, and constraints. For an example of this type of model, see Setting
up a Solid Model for a 2D Analysis on an Internal Surface.
239
See Also
Examples:
geometry
loads
other constraints
material type and orientation
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
Example:
240
IndexStructural Constraints
241
See Also
Reference:
See Also
Procedure:
242
IndexStructural Constraints
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
243
modes. To determine whether there are nonsymmetric modes, run the modal
analysis with the entire model without mirror symmetry constraints.
To define a mirror symmetry constraint, you must select sufficient geometric
references on your model to define a plane. Keep the following in mind when
selecting references:
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Example:
244
IndexStructural Constraints
245
See Also
Procedure:
246
The software considers locations at which you have not created prescribed
temperatures, convection conditions, radiation loads, or heat loads to be
insulated.
The software determines the temperature at every location of your model for
which you have not prescribed a temperature.
You do not have to select a boundary condition set to run a transient thermal
analysis. However, if no set is selected, you must select at least one load set
for the analysis to be valid.
Any point, vertex, curve, or surface to which you apply a boundary condition
must be associated with at least one element. To check associations with
geometry that will be meshed, click the appropriate icon on the model or
select the boundary condition in the model tree. Mechanica highlights the icon
and associated geometry.
Note: If you create a convection conditions in FEM mode using a vertex
as the point of application, Mechanica supresses that convection
conditions when you switch from FEM mode to native mode. If you are
working with prescribed temperatures applied to vertices, Mechanica
does not suppress the prescribed temperature for mode switches.
For both steady and transient thermal analyses, you do not have to select a
load set.
For a transient thermal analysis, you do not have to select a boundary
condition set. If you do not select a boundary condition set, however, you
must select one or more load sets for the analysis to be valid.
For steady thermal analyses, you must select one boundary condition set.
If you delete a boundary condition set or load set after you include it in an
analysis, you are also deleting that set from the analysis.
Even if you create a new set with the same name as the set you deleted, you
must edit the analysis and reselect the set name. Otherwise, you can
247
invalidate the analysis and any design studies in which you included the
analysis.
There is no limit to the number of boundary condition sets you can specify for
your model.
As you can specify only one boundary condition set for an analysis, make sure
the set contains all the required boundary conditions for that analysis. See
Boundary Condition and Load Sets in Thermal Analyses for more information.
You are not required to select a boundary condition set to run a transient
thermal analysis. However, if you do not select a boundary condition set, you
must select at least one load set for the analysis to be valid.
A thermal boundary condition set can include prescribed temperatures and/or
convection conditions.
If you click Cancel, you exit without creating either the thermal boundary condition
or the boundary condition set.
If a boundary condition for one or more of the entities you selected already belongs
to the boundary condition set, Mechanica prompts you to do one of the following:
Click Yes to replace the existing boundary condition with a new one in the
same set.
Click No to retain the old boundary condition and cancel the new one.
If you click No and want to create the new boundary condition without losing the old
one, define the constraint again and select a different boundary condition set.
Convection Conditions
Use the convection boundary conditions to define a linear convective heat exchange
condition for one or more geometric entities in Thermal. If you are working in the
FEM mode, see Convection Conditions (FEM Mode).
You can assign convection conditions to points, edges, curves, and surfaces.
When you select Insert>Convection Condition, Mechanica displays the CONV
COND menu. You use this menu to select the type of entitypoint, edge/curve, or
248
surfaceyou want to apply the convection condition to. After you select the entity
type, the Convection Condition dialog box appears. This dialog box has the
following fields:
If you want to preview the convection coefficient or bulk temperature in an FNF file
selected for import, click the Preview h or Preview Tb button. These buttons
become active only when you are importing external data from an FNF file.
When you accept the dialog box, Mechanica places a convection condition icon at
each location you selected. After you create a convection condition, you can edit or
delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition
or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a convection condition,
Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedures:
249
References:
Background
How Mechanica Calculates the Convective
Heat Transfer Rate
Mechanica calculates the convective heat transfer rate as follows:
Q = h (Te Tb)
where
Q is the convective heat transfer rate.
h is the convection coefficient.
Te is the entity temperature (the temperature of an entity such as a node or
surface).
Tb is the bulk temperature (the temperature of the fluid in contact with the
entity).
250
where
is the density, c is the specific heat, k is the conductivity, L is the largest
length scale of an element, and p is the p-order. Any time scale that is smaller than
this causes errors. For example, if you enter a time-dependent heat load or bulk
temperature that is a sine wave with a period much smaller than this value, the
solution would have a large error. Therefore any ramp function must use a period at
least as large as the local value of
computed for the elements adjacent to the heat
load or convection condition.
A convection condition having a large Biot number can create a thin layer with large
temperature gradients that is smaller than Mechanica can represent accurately.
Mechanica defines the Biot number by
where h is the convective heat transfer coefficient (also called film coefficient in
Mechanica), k is the conductivity, and L is the largest length scale of an element. If
the Biot number is much greater than 1, the solution can have a large error. You can
reduce the error in the solution by ramping the bulk temperature from the initial
condition of the model to its final value over a period of time larger than . You can
use the local value of
for the elements adjacent to the convection condition and in
many cases get accurate results, as mentioned above.
To model a time-dependent prescribed temperature, you can enter a convection
condition with a large value of h and set the bulk temperature as a function of time
equal to the desired prescribed temperature. A Biot number of 100 should be
sufficient. The bulk temperature should not vary more rapidly than in order to
avoid errors in the solution.
251
Model Type/Entity
Units
3D:
Point
2D Axisymmetric:
Point
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Strain:
Point
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Stress
Point
Curve, Edge
Surface, 2D Plate
252
Bulk Temperature, Tb
If you do not import an externally computed bulk temperature, you must specify a
bulk temperature for the software to use. Enter a real number for the bulk
temperature of the convection condition you are defining.
Time-dependent bulk temperatures (and time-dependent heat loads) are only
relevant for transient thermal analysis. For steady-state thermal analysis, be aware
of the following:
When you click OK, the software checks for problems with either the file name or the
content of the FNF file.
Guidelines for Importing External Temperature Fields
Before you import an external temperature, you must create a FEM Neutral
Format file, which Mechanica uses to import your temperature load. The FEM
Neutral Format file enables you to store an externally created temperature
field and import it into Structure. For more information, see FEM Neutral
Format File and Sample FNF File for External Temperature.
Mechanica automatically copies the FEM Neutral Format file you create into a
study directory. If you do not want this file in the study directory, you must
set a config.pro option. For more information, see Configuration File Options.
Mechanica extracts temperature data from the h-mesh Mechanica FEM
Neutral Format file by finding the h-element that encompasses the point
where the p-element temperature is desired, and performing a linear
interpolation of the temperature at the h-element's corner nodes. If the pelement point is not inside any of the h-elementsfor example, when the
253
Your imported temperature load must contain the connectivity of a linear solid
element mesh, node locations, and temperature values at the nodes.
If the temperature load mesh is not consistent, Mechanica displays an error
message.
If you defined the temperature load for part of your model, Mechanica
displays an error message indicating that it will calculate temperature through
extrapolation for parts of the model.
If you performed a design study for your model that included size or shape
changes, you must make sure the temperature field is consistent for all the
design variations included in the study.
When you import an external temperature load, you also import the model's
orientation.
Creating FNF Files for External Loads and Constraints
FEM Neutral Format (FNF) files, with the extension .fnf, are organized into sections.
When you are creating an FNF file that will be used to import an external load or
constraint, you need only five of these sections.
Each section describes its own class of objects. The order of sections in the FNF file is
critical, since information from the earlier defined sections may be required in
subsequent sections.
Note: FNF files are backward-compatible.
Create the following sections in an FNF file to import an external load or constraint:
HEADER general information about the file and the model. This section can
contain the following instructions:
o TITLE describes the name of your model
o STATISTICS provides information about the number of element
types, coordinate systems, materials, element properties, nodes, and
elements in your model
ELEM_TYPES definition of element types
MESH definition of the model's nodes and elements
LOADS description of applied constraint cases, loads, and boundary
conditions
The following table lists instructions required for importing external loads and
constraints, their standard abbreviations, and the sections in which they may
appear:
254
Instruction Names
Abbreviation
Section Name
STATISTICS
STT
HEADER
ELEM_TYPE
ETP
ELEM_TYPE
NODE
ND
MESH
ELEM
EL
MESH
CON_CASE
CC
LOADS
LOAD_TYPE
LTP
LOADS
LOAD
LD
LOADS
For more information about FNF files, see FEM Neutral Format File.
See Also
Strategies:
%ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 1 1 2 3 4
%ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 2 1 4 3 2
%END_SECT
%START_SECT : MESH
%NODE 1 DEF : -0.5 0.5 -0.5
%NODE 2 DEF : -0.5 -0.5 -0.5
%NODE 3 DEF : 0.5 0.5 -0.5
%NODE 4 DEF : 0.5 -0.5 -0.5
%NODE 5 DEF : -0.5 0 -0.5
%NODE 6 DEF : 0 -0.5 -0.5
%NODE 7 DEF : 0.5 0 -0.5
%NODE 8 DEF : 0 0.5 -0.5
%NODE 9 DEF : 0 0 -0.5
%NODE 10 DEF : -0.5 0.5 0.5
%NODE 11 DEF : -0.5 -0.5 0.5
%NODE 12 DEF : 0.5 0.5 0.5
%NODE 13 DEF : 0.5 -0.5 0.5
%NODE 14 DEF : -0.5 0 0.5
%NODE 15 DEF : 0 0.5 0.5
%NODE 16 DEF : 0.5 0 0.5
%NODE 17 DEF : 0 -0.5 0.5
%NODE 18 DEF : 0 0 0.5
%NODE 19 DEF : -0.5 0.5 0
%NODE 20 DEF : -0.5 -0.5 0
%NODE 21 DEF : -0.5 0 0
%NODE 22 DEF : 0.5 -0.5 0
%NODE 23 DEF : 0 -0.5 0
%NODE 24 DEF : 0.5 0.5 0
%NODE 25 DEF : 0.5 0 0
%NODE 26 DEF : 0 0.5 0
%ELEM 1 DEF : 1 1 1 9 6 2 5
%ELEM 2 DEF : 1 1 1 7 4 6 9
%ELEM 3 DEF : 1 1 1 8 9 5 1
%ELEM 4 DEF : 1 1 1 3 7 9 8
%ELEM 5 DEF : 1 1 1 18 16 12 15
%ELEM 6 DEF : 1 1 1 14 18 15 10
%ELEM 7 DEF : 1 1 1 17 13 16 18
%ELEM 8 DEF : 1 1 1 11 17 18 14
%ELEM 9 DEF : 1 1 1 21 14 10 19
%ELEM 10 DEF : 1 1 1 5 21 19 1
%ELEM 11 DEF : 1 1 1 20 11 14 21
%ELEM 12 DEF : 1 1 1 2 20 21 5
%ELEM 13 DEF : 1 1 1 23 17 11 20
%ELEM 14 DEF : 1 1 1 6 23 20 2
%ELEM 15 DEF : 1 1 1 22 13 17 23
%ELEM 16 DEF : 1 1 1 4 22 23 6
%ELEM 17 DEF : 1 1 1 25 16 13 22
%ELEM 18 DEF : 1 1 1 7 25 22 4
%ELEM 19 DEF : 1 1 1 24 12 16 25
%ELEM 20 DEF : 1 1 1 3 24 25 7
%ELEM 21 DEF : 1 1 1 26 15 12 24
%ELEM 22 DEF : 1 1 1 8 26 24 3
%ELEM 23 DEF : 1 1 1 19 10 15 26
%ELEM 24 DEF : 1 1 1 1 19 26 8
%END_SECT
256
%START_SECT : LOADS
%LOAD_TYPE 1 DEF : CONVECTION NODE VECTOR_2
%CON_CASE 1 DEF : TestData1
%LOAD 1 DEF : 1 1
%LOAD 1 VAL : 1 0.6 0.23
%LOAD 1 VAL : 2 0 0
%LOAD 1 VAL : 3 0.85 0.68
%LOAD 1 VAL : 4 0.25 0.45
%LOAD 1 VAL : 5 0.3 0.115
%LOAD 1 VAL : 6 0.125 0.225
%LOAD 1 VAL : 7 0.55 0.565
%LOAD 1 VAL : 8 0.725 0.455
%LOAD 1 VAL : 9 0.425 0.34
%LOAD 1 VAL : 10 0.75 0.55
%LOAD 1 VAL : 11 0.15 0.32
%LOAD 1 VAL : 12 1 1
%LOAD 1 VAL : 13 0.4 0.77
%LOAD 1 VAL : 14 0.45 0.435
%LOAD 1 VAL : 15 0.875 0.775
%LOAD 1 VAL : 16 0.7 0.885
%LOAD 1 VAL : 17 0.275 0.545
%LOAD 1 VAL : 18 0.575 0.66
%LOAD 1 VAL : 19 0.675 0.39
%LOAD 1 VAL : 20 0.075 0.16
%LOAD 1 VAL : 21 0.375 0.275
%LOAD 1 VAL : 22 0.325 0.61
%LOAD 1 VAL : 23 0.2 0.385
%LOAD 1 VAL : 24 0.925 0.84
%LOAD 1 VAL : 25 0.625 0.725
%LOAD 1 VAL : 26 0.8 0.615
%END_SECT
%START_SECT : ANALYSIS
%SOLUTION 1 DEF : THERMAL
%SOLUTION 1 CON_CASES : 1
%END_SECT
%END
257
Additionally, the following options are available for shell and solid surfaces in 3D
models:
258
Use real numbers only and ensure that the system of units you are working in
is consistent with the rest of the model.
5. Type a value for the bulk temperature, Tb.
If you do not specify a temperature, the software assumes a default of 0.
6. If you want the bulk temperature to be time-dependent, select the Time
Dependent check box under Temporal Variation.
7. If you want to define more convection conditions, repeat applicable preceding
steps until you have defined all convection conditions.
8. Click OK to accept the definition of the convection condition(s).
259
When you accept the dialog box, Mechanica places a convection condition icon at
each location you selected. After you create a convection condition, you can edit or
delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition
or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a convection condition,
Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
260
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Prescribed Temperatures
Use the Insert>Prescribed Temperature command in Thermal and FEM mode
Thermal to define a temperature boundary condition for one or more geometric or
model entities. A prescribed temperature is a thermal boundary condition that limits
the temperature of your model. See Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions and
Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions for Geometry.
When you select Insert>Prescribed Temperature, the Prescribed Temperature
dialog box appears. The dialog box has the following fields:
261
After you accept the values in dialog box, the software places a prescribed
temperature icon at each location you selected.
After you create a prescribed temperature, you can edit or delete it by selecting the
associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as
appropriate. If you are deleting a prescribed temperature, the software asks you for
confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure:
262
When you are applying spatially varying temperatures, remember that changes in
temperature throughout an entity must be smooth. Across adjacent entities,
temperatures must be equal and continuous where the entities meet. In addition,
temperature compatibility is needed in the following situations:
If you have a spatially varying temperature on a curve, the end points of that
curve cannot have independent temperatures.
If you have a spatially varying temperature on a surface, the curves on the
boundary of that surface cannot have independent temperatures.
You must define a continuous temperature on the interior of adjacent entities.
263
The interpolation you create is associated with the prescribed temperature and the
entity.
Interpolation Over Entity
Use the Interpolation Over Entity dialog box to add, preview, or remove
interpolation points, and to enter and edit a value for each point. You can use from
two to four points to define an interpolation.
The number of points you select depends on whether you are selecting a curve or
edge (usually two points) or a surface or face (usually four points).
Mechanica selects default interpolation points for some entities as follows:
Entity
endpoints
corners
surfaces
none
If you want interpolation points that are different from the default points, you can
delete the default points and create new ones.
When planning interpolated prescribed temperatures, be aware that:
264
Each value is a scale factor. Mechanica multiplies the Temperature value you
specify on the Prescribed Temperature dialog box by the interpolation
value at a given location to determine the prescribed temperature vector at
that location.
At least one of the points should have a value other than zero.
If you enter interpolation point values before entering the prescribed
temperature value on the Prescribed Temperature dialog box, Mechanica
enters a default value of 1 for Temperature.
The number of interpolation points you select determines the functional form
of the interpolation.
Function of Coordinates
Use this option to apply a prescribed temperature that is a function of the current
coordinate system (WCS or UCS). Alternatively, you can create a coordinate system
whose X axis is aligned with the entity over which you are placing the spatially
varying temperature. You can select one or more entities on which to apply this
prescribed temperature.
When you select Function Of Coordinates, the f(x) button and option menu
appear on the dialog box. Click the f(x) button and the Functions dialog box (native
mode) or Functions dialog box (FEM mode) appears. You can use this form to
create, copy, edit, or delete a function.
See Also
265
References:
266
IndexStructure Loads
Structure Loads
About Loads
Constraints and loads define the real-world environment you expect your model to
encounter. Mechanica simulates the behavior of your model under loads you define
when performing standard analyses and sensitivity studies for your model. Your
model's optimal shape and mass can also depend on the loads you define. You can
define loads on your model through the menu structure, the Model Tree, or through
relations functions.
For structural analysis, a load is a force, moment, pressure, acceleration, velocity, or
temperature that you apply to a portion of your model. For thermal analysis, a load
is a heat condition applied to a portion of your model.
See Also
References:
267
If you have run an analysis in Mechanism Design, you can also transfer loads to
Structure.
You can create loads by selecting the appropriate command on the Insert menu, or
by using object action or toolbar buttons. After you create a load, you can edit or
delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition
or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a load, Mechanica asks you for
confirmation first. You can also troubleshoot loads, control load icon visibility, place
loads on layers, and review resultant loads.
See Also
Reference:
On the left side of a relation, use the function to set a value. On the right side, use it
to get a value.
For example, if you define a point load, Load1, with FX=100, and if you want another
load, Load2, which may have been defined with different values, to have the same
value for X as Load1, you can define a relation as follows:
sim_load_value("Load2","X") = sim_load_value("Load1","X")
If you edit Load2, you can see that X is now defined as 100. Any change to Load1
will affect Load2 equally.
The sim_load_value function has an optional second argument that defines the load
component for vector or force and moment loads. When this command is used for
constraints, it only works for enforced displacements on both sides of the relation.
This argument can have the following case-insensitive values:
268
IndexStructure Loads
Loads
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
Magnitude
MAGNITUDE
THETA
THETA
PHI
MX
MR
MR
MY
MTHETA
MTHETA
MZ
MZ
MPHI
Constraints
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
Convection
Conditions
Radiation
DX
DR
DR
CONVCOEFF
EMISSIVITY
DY
DTHETA
DTHETA
AMBTEMP
AMBTEMP
DZ
DZ
DPHI
RX
RR
RR
RY
RTHETA
RTHETA
RZ
RZ
RPHI
Load Basics
Although each Mechanica load type requires a slightly different definition method,
there are several factors that govern all loads. As you prepare to add loads to your
model, bear the following points in mind:
When you apply loads, Mechanica associates the loads with part geometry. In
the case of compressed geometry, Mechanica can automatically transfer some
loads from an original surface to a compressed edge. However, it is preferable
to assign loads directly to curves if you know that you will compress the
geometry.
Mechanica supports a variety of loads. In terms of how you apply these loads
to your model, there are two basic load categoriesentity loads and body
loads.
269
An entity load is a load that you define for specific geometric entities in your
model, such as curves or surfaces. Forces and moments are examples of entity
loads.
A body load is a load that you apply to your model as a whole. Gravity is an
example of a body load. Typically, you can only use one body load per load set.
For assemblies, you may have several independent bodies in your model.
When applying a body load to an assembly, Mechanica places the load on all
bodies in the model. When loading an assembly, be aware that you must load
all independent bodies in the assembly if the analysis you plan to run requires
loads. If you do not add loads for all bodies in the model, Mechanica is unable
to run the analysis.
You can apply a load to a single geometric entity or to multiple entities. When
you apply a load to multiple entities, Mechanica does not allow you to mix
entity types. For example, if you specify a point as the first entity, all
remaining entities in the load must also be points.
In the case of multiple entities, Mechanica associates the entities by virtue of
the fact that they share a load. Thus, you cannot modify or delete the load for
each entity individually. Further, deleting any of the entities associated with
the load eliminates the load for the other associated entities.
In general, you should plan the placement of your loads according to the
model type. For example, if you are working with a solid model, you should
try to place your loads on surfaces or surface regions rather than points or
curves. With shell models, you should try to place your loads on curves,
surfaces, or surface regions, depending on the load type. Although you can
place loads on other entity types, this placement is not always optimal.
Mechanica assumes the load values you enter are consistent with your
principal system of units.
Mechanica places many loads using coordinate locations. The way Mechanica
expresses coordinate directions depends on the current coordinate system's
type, whether that coordinate system is the WCS or one you selected during
load definition. The following is a chart that defines the coordinate
nomenclature for each coordinate system type:
Cartesian
X
Y
Z
Cylindrical
R
T
Z
Spherical
R
T
P
When entering load values in Mechanica, use real numbers. You use the sign
of the value to express directionality relative to the coordinate axis for which
you are defining a load component. For heat loads, you use the sign to
indicate whether a loaded entity is a heat source or heat sink.
If you do not enter a value for a load component, magnitude, or direction,
Mechanica assumes a default of 0 for that aspect of the load. For example, if
you leave the Force X field blank for a force load, Mechanica assumes the load
has no X component.
270
IndexStructure Loads
You can also use expressions as load values. Your expression can include real
numbers, arithmetic operators, and Pro/ENGINEER parameter names.
If you apply a load to a surface by selecting the surface with Box Select or
Part Boundary, and Mechanica later creates a new surface due to a
parameter change, the software does not automatically apply the existing
load to the new surface.
Names Use names that uniquely and clearly identify the objective,
placement, or other key characteristics of the load. If you use the default
names, you or other users may have trouble distinguishing the loads later.
Geometry
Coordinate systems If you plan to make a structural load relative to any
coordinate system other than the WCS, you need to have that coordinate
system in place or you can create it as you work. You also need to make that
coordinate system current. For more information, see About Coordinate
Systems.
Datum points
Regions
Shell models If you plan to load a shell model surface, region, curve, or
point that Mechanica may compress during analysis, see Modeling Entities and
Idealizations to learn about how Mechanica processes loads placed on these
geometry types.
Placing loads on a cylindrical surface When you apply a load on a
cylindrical surface, such as a hole, the load is placed on both surfaces that
form the cylinder.
See Also
Reference:
271
New Opens the Load Set Definition dialog box. Enter a name and
optional description for the new load set.
Note: You can also access the Load Set Definition dialog box by
clicking the New button in the Member of Set area of the
Force/Moment Load, Pressure Load, Gravity Load, Centrifugal
Load, Global Temperature Load, or Structural Temperature Load
dialog boxes.
Copy Copies the selected load set and adds to the list in the Load Sets
dialog box. The new load set includes copies of the same loads as the original
load set.
Edit Opens the Load Set Definition dialog box to enable you to modify
any information you used to specify the highlighted load set.
Delete Removes the highlighted load set.
Description Displays the optional description that you entered when you
created the load set.
If you want the flexibility of treating each of your loads or constraints separately, use
a unique load and load set name for each load or constraint.
Load and constraint sets provide a logical means of organizing your modeling entities
so that you can define analyses effectively and clearly. A carefully-considered
approach to load and constraint set creation simplifies load and constraint selection
when defining your analyses. Although you are free to create a separate load or
constraint set for each of your modeling entities, you can greatly reduce the number
of selections you need to make when defining your analyses by grouping your loads
and constraints into sets.
For more information, see Guidelines for Load Sets.
See Also
References:
272
Use names that are 32 characters or fewer. You can use alphanumeric
characters and underbars. Names must start with alphabetic characters.
The software will not permit you to use a name already used for another load,
constraint, or property set.
IndexStructure Loads
Use names that uniquely and clearly identify the objective, placement, or
other key characteristic of the set. If you use the default names, you or other
users may have trouble distinguishing the sets later.
You can include as many different entities and types of loads as you want
within a single load set, with the exception of loads that affect the entire
model. You can only include one centrifugal load, gravity load, MEC/T
temperature load, or global temperature load per load set.
There is no limit to the number of load sets you can create or the number of
loads you can include in a load set.
If you attempt to delete a point associated with a load or constraint, the
software informs you of the association by pointing out that the geometry is
referenced by a simulation feature. You can delete the point, but the software
also deletes any associated load or constraint.
You can edit and delete the individual loads or constraints that make up a set.
You can also edit and delete a constraint set or load set. With constraint and
load set editing, the only aspects of the set you can change are the name or
the set description.
You can remove a given load or constraint from its set by editing the name of
the load set or constraint set.
See Also
Reference:
After you accept the dialog box, Mechanica places a load icon at each location you
selected.
See Also
Procedures:
274
For solid models, you can apply force loads to points, vertices, curves, edges,
or surfaces. However, other than TLAP moments, you should not apply
moments to edges on solid models, or to edges or surfaces of 2D plates or 2D
solids. Bear in mind that applying forces or moments to points can also result
in stress concentrations.
For shell models, you can apply forces and moments to points, vertices,
curves, or surfaces. You should avoid defining a moment that is normal to the
midsurface. Also, bear in mind that applying forces or moments to points can
result in stress concentrations.
Do not apply a moment load to a point on a solid, 2D solid, or 2D plate.
You can combine forces and moments in one load.
You define forces and moments relative to the current coordinate system. If
you do not designate a current coordinate system, the load is relative to the
WCS.
If the Z axis of a reference cylindrical or spherical coordinate system touches
an entity that you want to load, you may not be able to successfully specify a
force or load value for one or more of the directional components. Mechanica
may display a message informing you of the problem. For FEM mode, you will
see the message at run time.
IndexStructure Loads
To work around this problem, you can change the coordinate system to a
Cartesian coordinate system or re-orient the coordinate system so the Z axis
no longer touches the entity you want to load.
When you apply a force or moment, Mechanica displays a load icon on the
appropriate entities. The icon includes a vector that indicates the direction of
the load. If the vector direction does not agree with what you specified,
review the load.
Dir Vector & Mag Define the direction of the force or moment by entering
the values for the unit vectors of the selected coordinate system, and enter
the magnitude of the force in the Mag entry box. If you enter a positive
magnitude, the software applies the force or moment in the same direction as
the vector. If you use a negative value, the direction opposes the vector.
Dir Points & Mag Enter the direction of the force or moment by selecting
two points and then entering the magnitude of the force in the Mag entry
box. If you enter a positive magnitude, the software applies the force or
moment in the same direction as the vector. If you use a negative value, the
direction opposes the vector.
Note that, if you select Components or Dir Vector & Mag for centrifugal loads, the
origin of the coordinate system you select determines the location of the angular
velocity axis and angular acceleration axis. If you select Dir Points & Mag for
centrifugal loads, the angular velocity axis and angular acceleration axis pass
through the points you select.
275
If you are using a UCS for force or moment loads, the references to the WCS X, Y,
and Z axes on the dialog box are replaced as follows:
UCS Type
Axes
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Theta
Spherical
Theta
Phi
Total Load
Force Per Unit Type Type is either Length, Area, or Volume.
Total Load At Point
For points, you can select one of the following options on the Force/Moment Load
dialog box:
Total Load Distribute the load across all the points you select. In this
case, Mechanica divides the load you specify by the number of points to
determine the load that each point will bear. For example, if you specify a
load of 100 pounds and select 4 points, each point will bear a 25 pound load.
Load Per Point Apply the load you specify to each of the points you
select. In other words, if you specify a load of 100 pounds and select 4 points,
each point will bear a 100 pound load.
Spatial Variation
The spatial variation options supported in Mechanica enable you to simulate both
simple and complex load variations over the entities for which you are defining the
load. These options are useful for models that have localized load concentrations,
such as tapering loads and load reversals.
You can use Mechanica's spatial variation options to define nonuniform loads applied
to the geometry of your model. The complexity of the variation depends on the
option you select. Spatial variation options are available for Thermal heat loads and
all Structure entity loads except for bearing loads.
276
IndexStructure Loads
You can select one of the following options for specifying how you want Mechanica to
spatially vary the load you are creating:
Uniform Use this option to apply a uniform load. The values entered are
multiplied by 1 over the selected entities. The load has no spatial variation.
Interpolated Over Entity
Function of Coordinates
See Also
References:
Load Interpolation
Guidelines for Spatially Varying Loads
Example: Spatially Varying Loads
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors.
If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The
load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click
OK.
If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
277
8. Select one of these options from the drop-down list under Force to specify
magnitude and direction, and enter the appropriate values:
o Components
o Dir Vector & Mag
o Dir Points & Mag
In the directional component fields, you can enter a value, mathematical expression, or
parameter name.
Bearing Loads
Use the Insert>Bearing Load command in Structure to create a bearing load on
the surface or curve of a hole. Bearing loads are special-purpose loads that
approximate the distribution of a force in a particular direction, for example, on a
bolt through a hole. You can expect a tapering effect with this type of load. Bearing
loads approximate the pressure applied to a 3D surface (hole) or a 2D circle (ring) by
a rigid pin or axle passing through the center of a hole or ring.
For more information on bearing loads, see Guidelines for Bearing Loads.
When you select Insert>Bearing Load , the Bearing Load dialog box appears with
the following items:
278
IndexStructure Loads
See Also
Procedure:
Examples:
Bearing Load
Bearing Load on an Open Curve
Bearing Load on a Surface
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors.
If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The
load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click
OK.
If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
279
4. Select the circular curve or surface on which you want to place the bearing
load now. Your selections appear under Bearing Hole.
5. To choose another Cartesian coordinate system, click the selector arrow.
6. Select one of the following to specify the magnitude and direction of the load:
o
o
o
Components
Dir Points & Mag
Dir Vector & Mag
7. If you want to display the load that you just defined, click the Preview
button. The software displays the load distribution and direction as a series of
magenta arrows.
8. Click OK to accept the dialog box.
If the software identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it
displays a message box informing you of the situation.
If the software does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the loads
that you specified to all the entities you selected. The software also adds a load
icon to the geometry you are loading.
Centrifugal Loads
Use the Insert>Centrifugal Load command in Structure and FEM mode Structure
to create a centrifugal load on the entire model resulting from rigid body rotation of
the model. You can specify the angular velocity and/or angular acceleration, which
can have different vector directions. See Guidelines for Centrifugal Loads for more
information.
When you define a centrifugal load, you specify to which load set it belongs. Note
that you can have only one centrifugal load per load set.
When you select Insert>Centrifugal Load , the Centrifugal Load dialog box
appears with the following items:
280
IndexStructure Loads
Preview Adds arrows to your model showing the vector direction of the
centrifugal load. One of the arrows reflects the angular velocity and the other,
the angular acceleration. If you specify angular velocity as 0, Mechanica only
displays the angular acceleration arrow, and the reverse.
After you complete the Centrifugal Load dialog box, the software places an angular
velocity and/or angular acceleration load icon on the model. The icons represent
vectors.
The angular velocity icon has one arrowhead, and the angular acceleration icon has
two arrowheads, one on top of the other.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Spin Softening
Centrifugal loads are body loads available in native mode and FEM mode
Structure. These loads simulate rigid body rotation for your model. When you
define a centrifugal load, you can specify angular velocity, angular
acceleration, or both. For each of these load quantities, you need to define
either the components, two directional points and magnitude, or the direction
vector and magnitude.
For angular velocity, enter the velocity or rotation in radians per second. You
can enter a positive or negative value. You also need to define the magnitude
and direction of the load vector.
For angular acceleration, enter the acceleration or rotation in radians per
second2. As with angular velocity, you can enter either a positive or negative
value. You also need to define the magnitude and direction of angular
acceleration.
For 3D models, centrifugal load axis definitions are always relative to the
WCS, regardless of the current coordinate system. For 2D models, the axis
definitions are relative to the reference coordinate system for the 2D model.
For 2D axisymmetric models, you do not specify the direction for angular
velocity because the axis of rotation is always the Y axis of the referenced
coordinate system of the axisymmetric model. Only the magnitude of angular
velocity is required. Angular acceleration is not available in 2D axisymmetric
models.
For 2D plane strain and 2D plane stress models, only the Dir Points & Mag
option is available. You specify From and Magnitude. The axis of rotation
281
and angular acceleration vector pass through that axis location and are
perpendicular to the WCS XY plane. The software uses the right-hand rule to
determine the direction of rotation about the axis and acceleration direction.
To determine the direction of rotation, the software applies the right-hand
rule to the velocity's sign.
You can define only one centrifugal load per load set.
You cannot review a resultant centrifugal load. (Each load set is calculated
separately.)
If you are running a prestress modal analysis on a model with a centrifugal
load, Mechanica will compute modified vibrational modes to take into account
the effect of relative circumferential motions, an effect known as spin
softening.
If you select multiple load sets for an analysis, at least one load set contains a
centrifugal load, and you specify load set scaling when you view the analysis
results, you can scale the load set, but the resulting omega term (such as
rpm or rps) does not have a linear relationship with the centrifugal load. If
you need to scale velocity or acceleration, you can isolate the centrifugal load
and adjust the scale separately.
For large deformation analyses that use centrifugal loads, the results will
scale the body force, but not the velocity or acceleration. You can see the
effect of this when you compare results of an analysis that uses one
centrifugal load against the results of an analysis that uses a scaled version of
the same load. The results will scale correctly in the linear range but, scaling
may no longer provide accurate results when you enter the nonlinear range.
The direction of the load vector is from the point specified in the From field to
the point specified in the To field.
You fill in these fields by using the selector arrows to choose datum points. If
you need to create datum points at a particular location, use the
Insert>Model Datum>Point>Point command.
When you use the selector arrow to specify datum points for these fields, the
software translates the datum point location into the WCS coordinates of the
point you picked, even if a UCS was active when you picked the datum point.
In using the datum point as a reference location, the software disassociates
the vector from the defining datum points. This means that if the datum points
move during a sensitivity or optimization study, the vector remains unchanged.
282
For 2D axisymmetric models, you do not fill in these fields, because the axis
of rotation is always the WCS Y axis and the angular acceleration vector is
always parallel to the WCS Y axis.
For 2D plane strain and 2D plane stress models, you only use the To field.
The axis of rotation and angular acceleration vector pass through that axis
location and are perpendicular to the WCS XY plane. The software uses the
IndexStructure Loads
right-hand rule to determine the direction of rotation about the axis and
acceleration direction.
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors.
If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The
load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click
OK.
If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
Gravity Loads
Use the Insert>Gravity Load command in Structure or FEM mode Structure to
create an accelerational load on your entire model. See Guidelines for Gravity Loads
for more information.
283
When you define a gravity load, you specify to which load set it belongs. Note that
you can have only one gravity load per load set.
When you select Insert>Gravity Load, the Gravity Load dialog box appears with
the following items:
After you complete the dialog box, Mechanica places a gravity load icon at the origin
of the WCS, with a vector pointing in the direction of the load and the letter G at the
endpoint of the vector. The gravity load acts at the center of gravity of the part or
assembly.
See Also
Procedure:
284
You can define only one gravity load per load set.
You cannot review a resultant gravity load. (Each load set is calculated
separately.)
Gravity loads are body loads available only in Structure. These loads simulate
the force of gravity as it affects your model. When you define a gravity load,
you specify the gravitational components of the load in each coordinate
direction.
In specifying gravity, you enter values that define gravitational acceleration,
expressed as distance/time2. You can enter a positive or negative value. The
sign you enter defines the direction of gravity relative to the WCS or to
another Cartesian coordinate system.
When choosing a sign, understand that a negative value opposes the
coordinate direction. For example, if you want to simulate a downward
gravitational force of 1G (386.4 in/sec2) in the Y direction, and you are
working in in/sec2, you enter 386.4 in the Y entry box. If you simply enter
386.4, the gravitational force would be upward.
For 3D models, gravity is relative to the WCS or to another Cartesian
coordinate system you choose as the reference. For 2D models, gravity is
relative to the reference coordinate system for the 2D model or to another
Cartesian coordinate system you choose as the reference.
IndexStructure Loads
When you apply a gravity load, the software displays a gravity icon at the
origin of the WCS. The icon includes a vector that indicates the direction of
the load. If the vector direction does not agree with what you thought you
specified, review the load.
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors.
If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The
load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click
OK.
If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
Pressure Loads
You can use the Insert>Pressure Load command in a Structure or FEM mode
Structure model to create a pressure load on 3D model surfaces or 2D model curves.
For 2D models, you can only select a curve that bounds one and only one surface.
You cannot pick datum curves, free-floating curves, or curves shared by more than
one surface.
285
A positive pressure load always acts in opposition to the normal direction of an entity
at every location, even if the entity is curved. Mechanica sets the normal direction
automatically for entities as you create them.
When you select Insert>Pressure Load , the Pressure Load dialog box appears
with the following items:
The software determines the pressure load direction by the sign that you use to
specify the magnitude. Be aware of the following behaviors when determining the
sign of a pressure load:
Solid Faces If the pressure value is positive, the load pushes toward the
surface because the normal for solids is always outward from the solid face. If
the pressure value is negative, the load pulls away from the surface.
Quilts If the pressure value is positive, the load pulls in the direction
opposite of the normal direction that Mechanica displayed when you selected
the pressure load surface. If the pressure value is negative, it pulls in the
same direction as the normal direction.
Be aware that, if you switch to Pro/ENGINEER and change the surface normal of a quilt to
which you have applied a pressure load, the load direction in Mechanica changes.
See Guidelines for Pressure Loads for more information. See Example: Pressure Load
for an example of pressure load distribution.
286
IndexStructure Loads
See Also
Procedure:
Quilt Surface
Solid Face
A positive pressure load always points into the solid, unless there
is a shell on the face.
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors.
If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The
load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click
OK.
If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
287
Temperature Loads
Temperature loads enable you to simulate a temperature change over your model.
Temperature loads provide valuable information on how the structure of your model
deforms due to a particular temperature change.
Depending on how you specify the load, the temperature change is either uniform
across the model or variable according to a temperature distribution from a
Mechanica Thermal analysis. In FEM mode, function of coordinates is also a
temperature distribution option. See Guidelines for Temperature Loads.
Use the Insert>Temperature Load in Structure to:
288
create global and MEC/T temperature loads that result from temperature
changes over the model
IndexStructure Loads
You can include only one global or MEC/T temperature load in a load set.
MEC/T temperature loads are not available in FEM mode.
import external temperature loads into Structure. This option is not available
in FEM mode.
When you create a temperature load, Mechanica places a load icon near the origin of
the WCS.
After you create a temperature load, you can edit or delete it by selecting the
associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as
appropriate. If you are deleting a temperature load, Mechanica asks you for
confirmation first.
See Also
Reference:
Temperature loads are body loads available in Structure only. Use these loads
to simulate a temperature applied to the body of the model.
In Mechanica, you can define only one temperature load per load set. In other
words, you cannot place both a global and a MEC/T temperature load in the
same load set.
In Mechanica FEM mode, you can define multiple temperature loads per load set. You can
define a load set that has a global temperature load and a structural temperature load. If
you have a global temperature load and a structural temperature load, the global load
applies everywhere except on the entities with the structural load. You can include more
than one structural load in a load set, but each load must be on a different entity.
289
The difference between the model temperature and the reference temperature is the
amount of temperature change over the model.
After you complete the dialog box, the software places a temperature load icon on
your model.
See Also
Procedure:
290
IndexStructure Loads
The Global Temperature dialog box (or Global Temperature Load in FEM
mode) appears.
2. Enter a name for the load, or use the default name.
3. Select an existing load set from the Member Of Set area or use the New
button to create a new load set.
4. Use the Model Temperature entry box to enter the temperature you want
the software to apply to the model during analysis.
In FEM mode, you also select Uniform or Function of Coordinates from the
Spatial Variation area to tell the software how to distribute the temperature
load.
5. Use the Reference Temperature entry box to enter the stress-free
temperature of the model.
6. Click OK.
If Mechanica identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it
displays a message box informing you of the situation.
If Mechanica does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the load
that you specified. Mechanica also adds a temperature load icon to the
geometry you are loading.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
292
You must have defined at least one steady-state thermal or transient thermal
analysis to apply a MEC/T temperature load.
If you are importing a thermal load from a transient thermal analysis, the
transient thermal analysis must have at least one master interval with Temp
Load selected. Use the Output tab of the Transient Thermal Analysis
Definition dialog box to make this selection.
A MEC/T temperature load enables you to use the temperatures from a
previously-defined thermal analysis as a thermal load in a structural analysis.
You can run the thermal analysis in the same design study as the structural
analysis or you can run the thermal analysis before you run the structural
analysis. However, if you choose the latter approach and you have defined
dimension parameters for your model, the parameter settings you use in the
Structure design study must match those of the Thermal study.
As with the global option, you supply a reference temperature for MEC/T
temperature loads. Mechanica calculates the temperature change at a given
model location as the difference between that location's temperature as
determined in the thermal analysis and the reference temperature.
IndexStructure Loads
The mesh must be identical for the thermal and structural models. Thermal
ignores springs and masses.
Step
Mechanica sums all load sets for transient thermal analyses, but computes separate
solutions corresponding to different times.
Use the Step drop-down list on the MEC/T Temperature dialog box to display the
time steps that are defined for the transient thermal analysis associated with the
MEC/T temperature load.
For more information about how time steps are defined, see Transient Thermal
Analysis.
293
7. If you selected a steady-state thermal analysis, select a Load Set from the
drop-down list.
8. If you selected a transient thermal analysis, select a Step from the dropdown list.
9. Enter a real number or expression for the Reference Temperature.
10. Click OK to accept the dialog box.
If the software identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it
displays a message box informing you of the situation.
If the software does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the load
that you specified. The software also adds a MEC/T load icon to the geometry
you are loading.
See Also
Procedure:
294
IndexStructure Loads
Before you import an external temperature, you must create a FEM Neutral
Format file, which Mechanica uses to import your temperature load. The FEM
Neutral Format file enables you to store an externally created temperature
field and import it into Structure. For more information, see FEM Neutral
Format File and Sample FNF File for External Temperature.
Mechanica automatically copies the FEM Neutral Format file you create into a
study directory. If you do not want this file in the study directory, you must
set a config.pro option. For more information, see Configuration File Options.
Mechanica extracts temperature data from the h-mesh Mechanica FEM
Neutral Format file by finding the h-element that encompasses the point
where the p-element temperature is desired, and performing a linear
interpolation of the temperature at the h-element's corner nodes. If the pelement point is not inside any of the h-elementsfor example, when the
curved boundary of a p-element lies outside the h-meshMechanica projects
the point to an h-element face, edge, or node and performs a three, two, or
one-point interpolation.
When entire elements of the p-mesh lie outside the h-mesh, Mechanica still projects the
points onto the outer faces of the h-mesh. As the distance increases, Mechanica may not
project the point onto the closest face, but instead onto the first orthogonal projection it
finds.
Your imported temperature load must contain the connectivity of a linear solid
element mesh, node locations, and temperature values at the nodes.
If the temperature load mesh is not consistent, Mechanica displays an error
message.
If you defined the temperature load for part of your model, Mechanica
displays an error message indicating that it will calculate temperature through
extrapolation for parts of the model.
If you performed a design study for your model that included size or shape
changes, you must make sure the temperature field is consistent for all the
design variations included in the study.
When you import an external temperature load, you also import the model's
orientation.
295
4. If you do not want to use the WCS as the reference coordinate system, click
the selector arrow in the Reference area to select a different reference
coordinate system.
to
5. In the File area, enter an external temperature field file name or click
display an additional dialog box. Use this dialog box to select a .fnf file. The
default is your current directory. Select a file name from the current directory
or from another directory.
6. Enter the reference temperature you want Mechanica to apply during the
analysis. You can enter a real number or an expression.
7. Click OK.
If Mechanica identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it
displays a message box informing you of the situation.
If Mechanica does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the loads
that you specified to all the entities you selected. Mechanica also adds a
temperature load icon to the geometry you are loading.
Mechanism Loads
Use the Insert>Mechanism Load command to import a load set from Mechanism
Design Extension into Structure. Before using this command, you must use the Use
In Structure command in Mechanism Design to create the load set based on the
results of a dynamic analysis. This option is not available in FEM mode. For more
information on the Use in Structure command, see About Load Transfer to
Structure in the Mechanism Design module in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center
(Simulation functional area).
The load set that you create in Mechanism Design includes inertial and reaction
forces and gravity, as well as any applied external forces and torques. When you
create the load set, you associate the load set with a part, subassembly, or top-level
assembly file. To import the Mechanism Design load set and use the loads in
Structure, you must complete two steps:
Open the component file in Structure and import the load set.
Associate the loads that you want to use with geometric references.
It is important that you carry out both steps. If you do not associate the loads before
you exit Structure, Mechanica will not save them with the model. To associate a load,
highlight the load icon on your model, select Edit>Definition to open the
appropriate dialog box, and select a geometric reference for the load.
When you select Insert>Mechanism Load , the Mechanism Load Import dialog
box appears. Use this dialog box to specify which Mechanism Design loads you want
to include in a Structure load set. For information on the various types of imported
loads, see How Structure Imports Loads from Mechanism Design.
Note: You can import the same Mechanism Design load set several times in a
given Structure session by making sure the Clear Load Info After Import
check box on the Mechanism Load Import dialog box is not selected. This
296
IndexStructure Loads
gives you the option of associating the loads from the Mechanism Design load
set with different entities in the same model.
The Mechanism Load Import dialog box appears with a list of the loads you
exported from Mechanism Design for the component.
3. Accept the default load set from the Member Of Set area, select another
existing load set, or use the New button to display the Load Set dialog box
and create a new load set.
4. Clear the check box beside any load that you do not want to include in the
load set.
5. Check the Clear Load Info After Import box if you do not want to import
the load set more than once in the current session.
6. Click OK to create the load set.
7. Highlight each imported load icon and select Edit>Definition to associate the
load with a geometric entity, or to change the referenced coordinate system.
The various load types take you to different dialog boxes.
For reaction loads on connections, servo motors, force motors,
springs, dampers, or external forces or torques, see Force and Moment
Loads.
For centrifugal loads, see Centrifugal Loads.
For gravity loads, see Gravity Loads.
Verifying a Load
Reviewing Resultant Loads
Reviewing Total Heat Loads
Performing a Body Check for Assemblies
Handling Stress Concentrations
Check Model
297
Verifying a Load
You can review the load for entry errors by highlighting the load icon on your model
and selecting Edit>Definition. The software will display the load definition dialog
box for that load. To change any of the values you entered, simply type in new
information.
force loads
moment loads
bearing loads (native mode only)
pressure loads
If you want to review a resultant load at a particular location, you first need to add
datum points. These datum points act as references from which the software
evaluates the resultant load for the model, so place the points at locations that will
provide significant data. In considering resultant loads, be aware of the following
points:
The software calculates the resultant force. It also calculates the resultant
moments about the selected datum point. The software displays the
components of the resultant force and moment with respect to the unit
vectors of the current coordinate system.
You can view the resultant force and moments with respect to the WCS, or
you may select another Cartesian coordinate system in the model.
You can examine the effect of one or more loads. Selecting a single load is
helpful when you are trying to troubleshoot the values for a particular load.
Looking at a combination of loads can be helpful if you are concerned about
the actual load that a particular portion of the model will see during a
multiload analysis.
See Also
Procedure:
298
IndexThermal Loads
You may want to define a small surface region and apply the load to the region
instead of to a point. This approach distributes the stresses and fluxes over a slightly
wider portion of the model, avoiding concentration problems.
Thermal Loads
About Loads
Constraints and loads define the real-world environment you expect your model to
encounter. Mechanica simulates the behavior of your model under loads you define
when performing standard analyses and sensitivity studies for your model. Your
model's optimal shape and mass can also depend on the loads you define. You can
define loads on your model through the menu structure, the Model Tree, or through
relations functions.
299
See Also
References:
300
IndexThermal Loads
Time Dependent Select this check box to make your load a function of
time.
Preview Use this button to check the load for errors before you leave the
dialog box. After you complete the heat load definition by accepting the dialog
box, Mechanica places a heat load icon at each location you selected for the
heat load.
After you create a heat load, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon
on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you
are deleting a heat load, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedures:
References:
A point heat load can create theoretically infinite fluxes on a shell, solid, 2D
solid, or 2D plate. A curve or edge load on a solid element can create
theoretically infinite fluxes.
For a 2D plane strain model, a point represents a line, so a point heat load is
actually heat/time per unit length along that line.
For a 2D axisymmetric model, a point represents a circle, so a point heat load
is heat/time per unit length along that circle.
New Opens the Load Set Definition dialog box. Enter a name and
optional description for the new load set.
301
Note: You can also access the Load Set Definition dialog box by
clicking the New button in the Member of Set area of the
Force/Moment Load, Pressure Load, Gravity Load, Centrifugal
Load, Global Temperature Load, or Structural Temperature Load
dialog boxes.
Copy Copies the selected load set and adds to the list in the Load Sets
dialog box. The new load set includes copies of the same loads as the original
load set.
Edit Opens the Load Set Definition dialog box to enable you to modify
any information you used to specify the highlighted load set.
Delete Removes the highlighted load set.
Description Displays the optional description that you entered when you
created the load set.
If you want the flexibility of treating each of your loads or constraints separately, use
a unique load and load set name for each load or constraint.
Load and constraint sets provide a logical means of organizing your modeling entities
so that you can define analyses effectively and clearly. A carefully-considered
approach to load and constraint set creation simplifies load and constraint selection
when defining your analyses. Although you are free to create a separate load or
constraint set for each of your modeling entities, you can greatly reduce the number
of selections you need to make when defining your analyses by grouping your loads
and constraints into sets.
For more information, see Guidelines for Load Sets.
See Also
References:
302
Use names that are 32 characters or fewer. You can use alphanumeric
characters and underbars. Names must start with alphabetic characters.
The software will not permit you to use a name already used for another load,
constraint, or property set.
Use names that uniquely and clearly identify the objective, placement, or
other key characteristic of the set. If you use the default names, you or other
users may have trouble distinguishing the sets later.
IndexThermal Loads
You can include as many different entities and types of loads as you want
within a single load set, with the exception of loads that affect the entire
model. You can only include one centrifugal load, gravity load, MEC/T
temperature load, or global temperature load per load set.
There is no limit to the number of load sets you can create or the number of
loads you can include in a load set.
If you attempt to delete a point associated with a load or constraint, the
software informs you of the association by pointing out that the geometry is
referenced by a simulation feature. You can delete the point, but the software
also deletes any associated load or constraint.
You can edit and delete the individual loads or constraints that make up a set.
You can also edit and delete a constraint set or load set. With constraint and
load set editing, the only aspects of the set you can change are the name or
the set description.
You can remove a given load or constraint from its set by editing the name of
the load set or constraint set.
See Also
Reference:
To facilitate the application of the load, you add regions on either side of the screw
slot. These regions simulate contact sites for the screwdriver as it presses against
the slot when you apply torque. You then define two 25-pound loads in opposite
directions relative to the Y axis of the coordinate system shown above. The
opposition of these loads simulates torque applied to the screw as you twist it. You
ensure that both loads are part of a load set called torque by giving them the
Member Of Set name torque.
303
Total Load
Use this option on the Heat Load dialog box to distribute a load along the length or
area of the entity such that the integral of the load over the selected entity equals
the total prescribed value. For curves (and edges in FEM mode), Mechanica
distributes the load as load per arc length. For surfaces, Mechanica distributes the
load as load per surface area.
Follow these guidelines:
With this distribution method, the total heat load remains the same even if
the entity's length or area changes. The geometric change may result from
changes you make to the model or changes Mechanica makes during a
sensitivity or optimization design study. If you select more than one entity,
Mechanica places the load you create on each entity.
You can apply a heat load to multiple surfaces. In this case, Mechanica
distributes the load in such a way that all surfaces carry the heat load
proportional to the surface area.
Note: You cannot select the Total Load option for a 3D solid.
304
Mechanica calculates the total load on different entities in the following ways
(where Q = heat transfer rate):
IndexThermal Loads
Entity
edges, beams
curves
Q/area of entity
surfaces
The heat transfer rate is a total or distributed heat transfer rate, depending
on the distribution option you selected. You can enter any real number.
If you define interpolation points and add scale factors before you specify a
load value, Mechanica assumes a default value of 1.
The number of interpolation points you select determines the functional form of the
interpolation.
For all entities, when you are specifying the heat transfer rate:
To make the loaded entity a heat source for the model, enter a positive value
for Q, which adds heat to the model.
To make the loaded entity a heat sink for the model, enter a negative Q
value, which removes heat from the model.
The sign on the heat load icon indicates whether the load is a heat source (+) or
heat sink ().
305
Time Dependent
Select the Time Dependent check box on the Heat Load dialog box if your applied
load is a function of time. You must then specify that function over the time range
that the analysis will run.
When you select the Time Dependent check box, the Heat Load dialog box
expands to display the f(x) button and entry box in the Temporal Variation area.
The dialog box that appears for selecting functions differs depending on the entity
you chose:
Time dependence functions for heat load (Q) values are multipliers. When you make
a heat load time dependent, its computed value is Q times the time dependence
function.
If you have also specified a spatial interpolation, the heat load's computed value is Q
times the time dependence function times the spatial interpolation.
There is no default value for the time dependence function.
See Also
Procedure:
To Create a Function
306
IndexThermal Loads
4. Select an existing load set from the Member Of Set area or use the New
button to create a new load set.
and use the normal selection methods to select the particular entity
5. Click
that this load will be associated with. If the desired entity is an internal
surface, see Heat Loads on Internal Surfaces.
6. Depending on the type of entity you selected, you will provide information for
one or both of the following:
o Distribution
o Spatial Variation
7. Enter the heat transfer rate in the Q entry box.
8. To specify a time-dependent heat load, select the Time Dependent check
box. Then click the f(x) button.
Mechanica displays the Functions dialog box.
9. Select an existing function or click New or Edit to display the Function
Definition dialog box on which you can define or edit the time function for
your heat load. Click OK.
10. If you want to display the load you just defined, click the Preview button.
Mechanica displays the load distribution and direction using arrows.
11. Click OK to accept the dialog box.
If Mechanica identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it
displays a message box informing you of the situation.
If Mechanica does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the loads
you specified to all the entities you selected. Mechanica also adds a heat load
icon to the geometry you are loading.
Time Dependent Select this check box to make your load a function of
time.
After you create a heat load, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon
on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you
are deleting a heat load, the software asks you for confirmation first. You can also
review the total heat load.
See Also
Procedure:
The heat transfer rate is a total or distributed heat transfer rate, depending
on the distribution option you selected. You can enter any real number.
If you define interpolation points and add scale factors before you specify a
load value, Mechanica assumes a default value of 1.
The number of interpolation points you select determines the functional form of the
interpolation.
For all entities, when you are specifying the heat transfer rate:
To make the loaded entity a heat source for the model, enter a positive value
for Q, which adds heat to the model.
To make the loaded entity a heat sink for the model, enter a negative Q
value, which removes heat from the model.
The sign on the heat load icon indicates whether the load is a heat source (+) or
heat sink ().
Time Dependent
Select the Time Dependent check box on the Heat Load dialog box if your applied
load is a function of time. You must then specify that function over the time range
that the analysis will run.
When you select the Time Dependent check box, the Heat Load dialog box
expands to display the f(x) button and entry box in the Temporal Variation area.
The dialog box that appears for selecting functions differs depending on the entity
you chose:
308
IndexThermal Loads
Time dependence functions for heat load (Q) values are multipliers. When you make
a heat load time dependent, its computed value is Q times the time dependence
function.
If you have also specified a spatial interpolation, the heat load's computed value is Q
times the time dependence function times the spatial interpolation.
There is no default value for the time dependence function.
See Also
Procedure:
To Create a Function
After you select Component, the Volume Heat Load dialog box appears.
3. Enter a name for the heat load, or use the default name.
4. Select an existing load set from the Member Of Load Set area or use the
New button to create a new load set.
5. Click
and select the component on which you want to place the load.
6. Enter a value.
7. To specify a time-dependent heat load, select the Time Dependent check
box, and then click the f(x) button. Select or modify an existing function or
create a new function using the Functions dialog box. Click Close when you
are finished with functions.
8. When you have finished defining the heat load, click OK to accept the dialog
box.
If Mechanica identifies any problems with the way you define the load, it
displays a message box informing you of the situation.
309
If Mechanica does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the load
you specified. Mechanica also adds a heat load icon to the component.
After you create a heat load, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon
on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you
are deleting a heat load, the software asks you for confirmation first. You also review
the total heat load.
310
IndexThermal Loads
See Also
Procedure:
311
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Troubleshooting Loads
Measures
About Simulation Measures
Use the Insert>Simulation Measure command to create and assign native mode
measures. Used properly, measures serve as a powerful tool for analyzing your
model's behavior. A measure is a scalar quantity of interest that Mechanica
calculates during analyses and design studies.
During analysis, you can use measures to monitor your model's performance in
terms of particular engineering criteria. For example, if you were interested in
studying the ability of an aluminum connector to withstand pull, you might use
maximum von Mises stress as a measure. This measure would provide information
on whether the aluminum yielded under the conditions simulated during the analysis.
See Uses of Measures for more information on the wide range of functions for which
you can use measures.
See these topics for information on creating measures:
312
IndexMeasures
Results Available for Measures the types of measure results you can
access for different types of design studies
Uses of Measures
With measures, you can perform specific evaluations of aspects such as tensile,
compressive, and shear strength, rotational flexibility, mass changes, refractive
behavior, and so forth.
You can use measures to do the following:
Measure Basics
As analysis packages, Structure and Thermal have different goals. Understanding the
implications of this difference will help you understand the types of measures you
can apply as well as how to use those measures to obtain the information you are
interested in.
Regardless of the Mechanica product you are working with, there are several aspects
of measures you should be aware of when deciding which measures to use or define
for your model. To learn about these aspects, see the following:
You cannot use the same name for both a measure and a parameter.
You cannot create a new measure that is identical to a predefined measure,
unless you associate the measure with a UCS.
If you delete any entity associated with a local measure, Mechanica
automatically deletes the measure even if other entities are still associated.
You cannot delete a predefined measure or use the name of a predefined
measure for a custom measure.
User-Defined You can also create user-defined measures for your model.
These measures are often called custom measures. User-defined measures
look at many of the same quantities as the predefined measures, but provide
additional flexibility and functionality. For instance, user-defined measures
provide a means of observing a location-specific, time-specific, or frequencyspecific quantity. As with predefined measures, Mechanica automatically
calculates all relevant user-defined measures during analysis.
For information on when to create user-defined measures, see Reasons to
Create User-Defined Measures.
314
IndexMeasures
Predefined Measures
When using predefined measures, note that:
Each model contains a set of predefined measures associated with the WCS.
All predefined measures apply to the entire model.
Mechanica automatically calculates predefined measures of the appropriate
type for each analysis and design study.
You cannot delete a predefined measure.
Description
buck_load_factor
com_x
com_y
com_z
contact_area
contact_max_pres
315
inertia_xx
inertia_xy
inertia_xz
inertia_yy
inertia_yz
inertia_zz
max_beam_bending
max_beam_tensile
max_beam_torsiona
max_beam_totala
max_disp_magb
max_disp_x
max_disp_y
max_disp_z
max_prin_magb
max_rot_magb
316
IndexMeasures
max_rot_x
max_rot_y
max_rot_z
max_stress_prinb
max_stress_vmb
max_stress_xx
max_stress_xy
max_stress_xz
max_stress_yy
max_stress_yz
max_stress_zz
min_stress_prinb
modal_frequency
strain_energy
total_cost
total_mass
a. Mechanica does not calculate these measures for any dynamic analyses.
317
b. Mechanica does not calculate these measures for dynamic random analyses.
Description
energy_norm
max_dyn_flux_mag
max_dyn_temperature
min_dyn_temperature
max_flux_mag
max_flux_x
max_flux_y
max_flux_z
max_grad_mag
max_grad_x
max_grad_y
max_grad_z
max_temperature
min_temperature
318
IndexMeasures
total_cost
total_mass
User-Defined Measures
To define measures that are a function of time, frequency, local measures, or
measures relative to a coordinate system other than the WCS, you need to create a
user-defined measure. You cannot use the name of a predefined measure for a new
measure, or create a new measure that is identical to a predefined measure, unless
you associate the measure with a UCS.
Measures you define may apply to the entire model, to an entity or entities you
select (the type and number of entities you can select depend on how you define the
measure), or to an area near a point.
Keep in mind the following, when you begin working with the user-defined
measures:
If you plan to make a measure relative to a coordinate system other than the
WCS, you need to have that coordinate system in place.
If you plan to place a measure at a specific point on an exterior surface, your
part needs to include a datum point at that location unless the location is a
vertex.
If you plan to place a point measure on a shell model surface that Mechanica
may compress during analysis, see Model Entities and Idealizations to learn
about how Mechanica processes loads placed on compressed surfaces.
For more information about creating user-defined measures for different types of
analyses, read the following:
319
When you would like to monitor a model quantity over time or as a function of
frequency. For more information, see Quantity Dynamic Analyses.
When you plan to perform transient thermal analyses and would like to
monitor a model quantity over time. For more information, see Quantity
Thermal Analyses.
When you want to define a Pro/ENGINEER parameter as a measure. For more
information, see Parameter-Based Measures.
When you want to measure a quantity at a location of interest, such as a
point that may experience high stress. For more information, see Global and
Local Measures.
When you want to define the components of a measure quantity, such as
stress, relative to a coordinate system other than the WCS. For more
information, see Coordinate Systems and Measures.
If you plan to add user-defined measures to your model rather than use Mechanica's
predefined measures, refer to User-Defined Measures.
Note that you cannot use the name of a predefined measure for a user-defined
measure.
Automatically-Defined Measures
This table lists automatically-defined measures. Items in italics are variables
typically an entity name or internal identifier. Automatically-defined measures are
currently available for Structure only.
Name
Description
cntRgn_xxxcntArea
cntRgn_xxxmaxPres
fastener_tensile_force
fastener_tensile_stress
fastener_shear_force
fastener_shear_stress
fastener_separation_stress
320
IndexMeasures
a. This table shows the static form of these measures. Mechanica computes the static form of
these measures for static, prestress static, contact, and dynamic shock analyses. If "_d" appears
as a measure name suffix, the measure is the dynamic form. Mechanica computes the dynamic
form of these measures for dynamic random, dynamic frequency, and dynamic time analyses.
Point measures
Near Point measures
You can also create other types of local measures that reference your model's
idealizations, layers, or geometry. With any type of local measures, Mechanica
evaluates the measure quantity relative to a particular location on the model.
Point Measures
Mechanica evaluates the measure quantity at the application point only. Thus, the
quantity that Mechanica reports for the measure is specific to the point and contains
no direct information on the area immediately surrounding the point.
However, you can make inferences about the surrounding area by looking at a fringe
plot for the desired measure quantity and performing a dynamic query. For
information about fringe plots, see Fringe Display Type.
For Near Point measures, Mechanica develops the radius you specify as a threedimensional sphere. Thus, the portion of the model this measure considers depends
on the type, as well as the contour, of your model.
For solid models, a Near Point measure samples the interior of your model as well
as its surfaces. For shell and beam models, sampling is one- or two-dimensional, as
determined by model geometry.
If you specify a large radius that intersects more than one portion of the model,
Mechanica samples only the portion of the model that contains the application point.
Mechanica determines the sampling points from the plotting grid you specify for your
analysis. The higher the number you specify for your plotting grid, the greater the
number of sampling points and the greater the refinement of the analysis results. For
more information on plotting grids, see Output Options for Structural Analyses.
The Near Point option is available for stress, strain, heat flux, and temperature
gradient measure quantities. You can only use Near Point if you select a
Maximum, Minimum, or Maximum Abs spatial evaluation method for one of these
quantities. For more information on spatial evaluation methods, see User-Defined
Measures for Basic Analyses.
Mechanica reports a single value for the quantity you select. This value reflects the
maximum, minimum, or absolute maximum found among the sampled points.
Mechanica does not provide the location of the point where the value occurred.
Parameter-Based Measures
To enhance product versatility, Mechanica enables you to use dependent
Pro/ENGINEER parameters as measures. Parameter-based measures provide you
with a greater degree of flexibility in how you define measures and the types of
measure quantities you can ask Mechanica to evaluate.
You can use parameter-based measures for the following functions:
For information you should know before defining parameter-based measures, see
Parameter-Based Measure Basics.
See Also
Reference:
322
IndexMeasures
323
curve length
area
angle
distance
diameter
If you are interested in evaluating one of these quantities, you can define the
quantity as a Pro/ENGINEER parameter, create an associated Mechanica measure,
and run an analysis or study on your model. You can then study how the quantity
behaved during the analysis, or how it changed during the study.
324
IndexMeasures
If you plan to run a design study that relies on a regeneration analysis, note that the
only result quantities available are measures and, for optimization studies, shape
histories. In other words, the results you will view most typically are graphs of
measures relative to design parameters.
Further, regeneration analysis does not engage the engine to calculate typical
Mechanica measures such as von Mises stress. The only measures it calculates are
parameter-based measures.
Thus, you should be sure to define parameter-based measures for the model. If you
do not, you will be unable to review the results of the study. In addition, if you want
to run an optimization study based on a regeneration analysis, you must define your
goals and limits as parameter-based measures.
If you choose to run a regeneration analysis in your current Pro/ENGINEER session
and not in a separate session, the shape change is performed directly on the model
in Pro/ENGINEER's memory. Using this method enables you to complete a study
faster than running regeneration in a separate session.
When defining parameter-based measures, you should be familiar with basic points.
325
In this case, you might define an optimization design study using the following:
326
Cylindrical
Spherical
IndexMeasures
Note that Mechanica expresses displacement measures in units of length, not angle.
To simplify discussion, Mechanica help refers to a Cartesian coordinate system. If
you are working with a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system instead, make the
appropriate substitutions.
327
The types of results listed above are not available for result quantities other than
measures. For other result quantities, you can query values at specific locations or
view fringe, contour, and vector displays.
Any description you may have entered when you defined the measure
See Also
Procedures:
328
IndexMeasures
Stress, Strain
Fatigue
Velocity
Failure Index
Contact
Acceleration
Displacement
Center of Mass
Rot Velocity
Rotation
Moment of Inertia
Rot Acceleration
Force
Phase
Moment
Time
Computed Measure
329
Temperature
Heat Flux
Temp Gradient
Driven Pro Parameter
Time
330
IndexMeasures
creating during any work you do on the assembly level. If you do not select
this check box, Mechanica ignores this part level measure when you switch to
the assembly.
See Also
Procedures:
static
modal
prestress static
prestress modal
buckling
contact
The method you use to add user-defined measures for these analyses differs slightly
from the one you use for most of the dynamic analyses.
The single exception is the dynamic shock analysis. You define measures for dynamic
shock just as you would if you were defining a stress, strain, displacement, or
rotation measure for a basic analysis.
When you create user-defined measures for basic analyses, you specify a measure
that does not require a time- or frequency-based calculation. In defining this type of
measure, you indicate the quantity, component, and spatial evaluation method, with
some exceptions. Mechanica provides several options for each of these aspects of the
measure. The basic options are as follows:
Quantity
Component
Spatial Evaluation Method
331
See Also
Procedure:
332
IndexMeasures
Availability of the global spatial evaluation methods depends on the component you
choose. For stress and strain quantities, Mechanica provides an additional option
menu that enables you to specify whether the measure will be calculated over the
model or at a particular model location.
333
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
dynamic
dynamic
dynamic
dynamic
time response
frequency response
random response
shock
User-defined measures are especially important for dynamic analyses, where you
want to study the model's behavior over a time range, at a point in time, or as a
function of frequency. In fact, user-defined measures are the only measures that
apply to dynamic random analyses. With dynamic time analysis, you use userdefined measures to define the quantities you want to look at through a series of
time intervals (or time steps), over a range of time, or at a point in time. For
dynamic frequency and dynamic random analyses, you use user-defined measures to
define a quantity you want to study at given frequency intervals, or frequency steps.
334
IndexMeasures
The method you use to add user-defined measures for dynamic analyses differs
slightly from the one you use for the basic analyses. The main difference is that the
measures for most dynamic analyses require you to define the measure in terms of
time or frequency.
The exception is the measures for dynamic shock analyses, which are time- and
frequency-independent. The methods you use to define measures for a dynamic
shock analysis are the same as those you use to define a stress, displacement, or
rotation measure for a basic analysis. Thus, to learn about dynamic shock, see
Dynamic Shock Analysis.
When you define a user-defined measure for dynamic analyses, you specify a
measure that involves a time- or frequency-based calculation. In defining this type of
measure, you indicate the quantity, component, spatial evaluation method, and time
or frequency evaluation method. Mechanica provides several options for each of
these aspects of the measure, as follows:
Quantity
Component
Spatial Evaluation Method
Time or Frequency Evaluation Method
Time Stamp
See Also
Procedure:
335
Availability of the global spatial evaluation methods depends on the component you
choose. For stress and strain quantities, Mechanica provides an additional option
menu that enables you to specify whether the measure will be calculated over the
model or at a particular location.
336
IndexMeasures
3
Measure Quantities
Stress, Strain
Use stress and strain measures to measure stress and strain types in your model.
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Stress or Strain as the quantity:
Component
Spatial Evaluation
Time/Frequency Eval
See Also
Procedure:
Failure Index
Use a failure index measure to determine whether a material has failed because of
excessive stress levels, which might be caused by an applied load or an enforced
displacement constraint.
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Failure Index as the quantity:
See Also
Procedure:
Displacement
Use a displacement measure to measure displacement for your model in terms of
either magnitude or component direction.
337
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Displacement as the quantity:
See Also
Procedure:
Rotation
Use a rotation measure to measure model rotations in terms of magnitude or
component direction. Use this quantity for shell and beam elements only. Rotation
measures are not relevant for solid elements.
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Rotation as the quantity:
See Also
338
IndexMeasures
Procedure:
Force
Use a force measure to measure the spring force or the force acting on the structure
through the constraints.
When you select Force, the Quantity area of the Measure Definition dialog box
expands displaying the following options:
Reaction At Constraint
Spring
Spatial Evaluation:
o Constraint This option appears if you selected Reaction At
Constraint as a quantity. Click the arrow button to select a constraint.
o Spring This option appears if you selected Spring as a quantity.
Click the arrow button to select a spring. You can only select a pointpoint or to ground spring.
Time/Frequency Eval This check box appears only if you selected Spring
as a quantity. Select the check box if you want to define a dynamic evaluation
method for your measure. The only available method is At Each Time Step,
which directs Mechanica to calculate the value of the measure at each time or
frequency step.
See Also
Procedure:
339
Moment
Use a moment measure to measure the spring moment or the moment acting on the
structure through the constraints.
When you select Moment, the Quantity area of the Measure Definition dialog box
expands displaying the following options:
Reaction At Constraint
Spring
Spatial Evaluation:
o Constraint This option appears if you selected Reaction At
Constraint as a quantity. Click the arrow button to select a constraint.
You also need to select point(s) for this quantity.
o Spring This option appears if you selected Spring as a quantity.
Click the arrow button to select a spring. You can only select a pointpoint or to ground spring.
Time/Frequency Eval This check box appears only if you select Spring.
Select the check box if you want to define a dynamic evaluation method for
your measure. The only available method is At Each Time Step, which
directs Mechanica to calculate the value of the measure at each time or
frequency step.
See Also
Procedure:
340
IndexMeasures
Computed Measure
Use a computed measure to measure values that cannot be calculated through other
user-defined measures. You can define this measure as a function that references
any other user-defined, noncomputed measure or measures already present in the
model.
After you select Computed Measure, you can enter an algebraic expression directly
in the Expression entry box on the Measure Definition dialog box. You can also
click the Available Function Components button to access the Symbolic Options
dialog box, which you use to build your expression. The Symbolic Options dialog
box contains the following:
If you click the independent variable in the Variables box and any symbols in their
respective boxes, Mechanica places them in the Expression entry box.
When creating computed measures, always be sure that the expression you create
makes sense from a functional point of view. Mechanica does not check the validity
of the expression you create if you, therefore, create an expression that does not
make sensevon Mises stress + displacement magnitude, for exampleyour results
for the computed measure will be meaningless.
341
Velocity
Use a velocity measure to measure velocity in terms of magnitude or component
direction.
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Velocity as the quantity:
See Also
Procedure:
Acceleration
Use an acceleration measure to measure acceleration in terms of magnitude or
component direction.
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Acceleration as the quantity:
342
IndexMeasures
See Also
Procedure:
Rotational Velocity
Use a rotational velocity measure to measure rotational velocity in terms of
magnitude or component direction.
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Rotational Velocity as the quantity:
See Also
Procedure:
Rotational Acceleration
Use a rotational acceleration measure to measure rotational acceleration in terms of
magnitude or component direction.
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Rotational Acceleration as the quantity:
343
See Also
Procedure:
Phase
Use a phase measure to measure the phase for several quantities. Phase measures
can be used in dynamic frequency analyses only.
When you select Phase, a second option menu appears in the Quantity area of the
Measure Definition dialog box.
The following items also appear if you select Phase:
See Also
Procedure:
Time
Use time measures to determine the time of first or last occurrence of a measure's
value being greater or less than a specified value during an analysis.
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Time as the quantity:
344
IndexMeasures
Measure Name Use the arrow button to choose a measure from the
Measures dialog box.
First Occurrence or Last Occurrence
Greater Than or Less Than
Measure Value
This measure applies to transient thermal or dynamic time analyses only. If the
condition is never true, Mechanica returns a value of zero and also provides a
warning in the .rpt file.
See Also
Procedure:
Fatigue Measures
Use fatigue measures to specify the types of values Mechanica calculates in
determining the life of your model and the level of damage. You can use fatigue
measures, for example, to calculate fatigue damage at a specific point on your
model.
When you define fatigue measures, you must specify the following on the Measures
Definition dialog box:
See Also
Procedure:
Contact
Use contact measures to measure various aspects and behaviors of contact regions
during a contact analysis. This option appears only for models that contain contact
regions.
When you select Contact, a second option menu appears in the Quantity area of
the Measure Definition dialog box. Select an option from this menu to determine
the type of contact measure:
Area calculates the total area of all the selected contact regions
Maximum Pressure reports the maximum pressure over the selected
contact regions
Average Pressure reports the average pressure over the selected contact
regions
Load reports the contact pressure integrated over one or more contact
regions
Component This item appears if you select Force. Select a component for
Force from this option menu:
o Magnitude
o X
o Y
o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the
measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to
select a UCS.
Contact Regions Use the arrow to select one or more contact regions. If
you are defining a force contact measure, you can only select one contact
region. For all other contact measure types, you can select multiple contact
regions.
Surface(s) This option appears if you selected Force. Use the arrow to
select a surface for the contact force measure.
See Also
Reference:
Center of Mass
Use Center Of Mass to measure the location of the model's center of mass in
relation to the current coordinate system.
When you select Center Of Mass, the Component option menu appears on the
Measure Definition Dialog Box. Use the Component option menu to select a
component of your quantity from this option menu:
Magnitude
X
Y
Z
Note that Mechanica does not report Magnitude in the summary file for analysis.
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define
346
IndexMeasures
the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow
button to select a UCS.
See Also
Procedure:
Moment of Inertia
Use Moment Of Inertia to measure the moment of inertia relative to either the
current coordinate system or the principal inertial axes of the model.
When you select Moment Of Inertia, the Quantity area of the Measure
Definition dialog box expands displaying the following options:
Center of Mass
Origin
The Component option menu also appears when you select Moment Of Inertia.
Use the Component option menu to select a component of your quantity from this
option menu:
Max Principal
ZZ
Mid Principal
XY
Min Principal
XZ
XX
YZ
YY
Note that Mechanica does not report Max Principal, Mid Principal, and Min
Principal in the summary file for analysis. For the options XX, YY, ZZ, XY, XZ, or
YZ, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default
coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
See Also
Procedure:
347
For more information on parameter-based measures, see Example: Using ParameterBased Measures.
See Also
Procedure:
348
IndexMeasures
Quantity
Component
Spatial Evaluation Method
Time Evaluation Method
Time Stamp
See Also
Procedure:
349
Availability of the global spatial evaluation methods depends on the component you
choose. For temperature gradient and heat flux quantities, Mechanica provides an
additional option menu that enables you to specify whether the measure will be
calculated over the model or at a particular model location.
Availability of each time evaluation method depends on the component and spatial
evaluation method you choose. At Each Step is always available.
350
IndexMeasures
Temperature
Use a temperature measure to measure temperature in your model.
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition
dialog box after you select Temperature as the quantity:
See Also
Procedure:
351
See Also
Procedure:
This data is available in the summary file, which you can view online through the
Run command or print through your operating system. The summary file does not
include values for measures that Mechanica calculates at each step of a dynamic
analysis.
The types of results listed above are not available for results quantities other than
measures. For other results quantities, you can query values at specific locations,
view fringe, contour, and vector displays, and graph the value along element edges.
IndexMeshes
The Measures dialog box appears when you are defining the following:
Analyses This dialog box appears if you select Measures for convergence
in an analysis and then use the Measure button on the Analysis Definition
dialog box. See Convergence Quantity for Static, Prestress Static, Large
Deformation, and Contact Analyses for more information.
Design Studies This dialog box appears when you select a goal and limits
for an optimization study.
Results Window This dialog box appears when you select Measure as
the quantity when defining a result window. See Measure Results Quantity for
more information.
The two columns of the dialog box list the predefined measures relevant for the
current analysis type and all user-defined measures valid for the current product.
Select one or more measures or, if you are defining a result window, select one
measure. Click the Review button if you want to evaluate the selected measure.
After you select measures from either or both columns, click OK to close the dialog
box.
Meshes
Native Mode Meshes
About AutoGEM
Use commands on the AutoGEM menu to create and work with AutoGEM meshes in
native mode. AutoGEM is the Mechanica Automatic Geometric Element Mesher.
Because the finite elements that Mechanica's AutoGEM mesher creates are very
accurate to underlying model geometry, these elements are sometimes called
geometric elements.
The commands on the AutoGEM menu help you verify whether Mechanica can
successfully mesh your model prior to analysis and enable you to indicate how you
want your model treated during meshing. Reviewing the mesh prior to analysis can
help you determine whether the mesh will be successful and, if not, which geometry
problems caused AutoGEM to fail. You can then use several techniques to fix mesh
problems and ensure that the engine uses the corrected mesh.
The AutoGEM menu includes the following commands:
Control Create AutoGEM mesh controls for your model. When you select
the Control command, the AutoGEM Control dialog box appears. Use the
dialog box to impose mesh controls on your model, thus improving the mesh
in problem areas.
Create Create an AutoGEM mesh for your model. When you select the
Create command, the AutoGEM dialog box appears. Use the dialog box to
create, review, and save the mesh. If a mesh file is already present, the
Create command automatically loads the mesh elements.
353
Settings Review and alter AutoGEM's basic settings and limits. When you
select the Settings command, the AutoGEM Settings dialog box appears.
Use the dialog box to control the types of activities AutoGEM performs when
generating elements and to modify element shape parameters such as aspect
ratio and maximum edge turn. Adjustments to the AutoGEM Settings dialog
box are a possible method of correcting mesh problems.
Geometry Tolerance Refine geometry tolerance settings for your model
to improve the geometry prior to meshing. When you select the Geometry
Tolerance command, the Geometry Tolerance Settings dialog box
appears. Use the dialog box to ensure that Mechanica resolve slivers, cusps,
and other geometry problems in your model.
Mesh treatment options There are three model treatment options
Solid, Midsurface, and Solid/Midsurface. You use these options for
models that include midsurfaces. These options enable you to specify whether
Mechanica will treat your model as a solid, midsurface shell, or a mixture of
both during meshing and analysis.
Datum usage options There are two datum usage optionsUse Datum
Curves and Use Datum Surfaces. These options let you refine your mesh,
place certain idealizations on datum geometry, mesh datum geometry without
having to add properties, and control transfer of datum geometry to
independent mode.
While meshing your model using commands on the AutoGEM menu, AutoGEM
creates mesh elements that you can later use when calculating displacements,
reactions, stresses, thermal fluxes, and temperatures. If you want Mechanica to use
these elements when running an analysis or design study, you need to select the
Use Elements From Existing Mesh File option on the Run Settings dialog box. If
you do not want to use the AutoGEM elements, you can direct Mechanica to create
new elements by selecting the Create Elements During Run option on the Run
Settings dialog box.
When it meshes your model, AutoGEM uses the default element type for the model
type unless you specify otherwise. For example, in 3D models, solid tetrahedra are
the default element type. However, before you create the AutoGEM mesh, you can
manually create idealizations or connectionsfor example, shells, springs, masses,
welds, and so forthto alter or enhance the default AutoGEM mesh by incorporating
additional element types that better reflect aspects or behaviors of your model.
See Also
References:
354
IndexMeshes
When you select the AutoGEM>Control command, Mechanica opens the AutoGEM
Control dialog box. The AutoGEM Control dialog box includes these fields:
Depending on the mesh control type you specify in the Type field, the active fields in
the lower area of the dialog box change. For information on this area, use the links in
the list above to learn more about the dialog box version for each mesh control type.
After you have created AutoGEM mesh controls for your model, you can edit or
delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition
or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a mesh control, Mechanica asks
for confirmation first.
Edge Distribution
Use Edge Distribution on the AutoGEM Control dialog box to specify the number
of nodes and their placement intervals along curves or surface edges. Mechanica
uses the specified number of nodes when creating elements in a mesh. By specifying
the number of nodes on curves or surface edges, you control the number of nodes
for a beam, shell, and solid element.
Note: The edge distribution you define at the part or assembly component
level remains active and visible at the assembly level.
If you select Edge Distribution, you specify the following:
355
First/Last Nodal Interval Ratio Select this option to specify the ratio of
the first interval on the edge or curve to the last interval on the edge or
curve. For example, if you enter 3 as the ratio, the last interval is 3 times the
length of the first interval. Mechanica places the intermediate nodes at
graduating intervals proportional to the ratio. If you enter a ratio of 1, all the
intervals are equidistant.
Prevent Additional Nodes Ensure that the number of nodes that
AutoGEM creates is exactly the same as specified in AutoGEM control. If you
have not specified a sufficient number of nodes, Mechanica displays a warning
and may insert additional nodes based on meshing requirements.
Note: Selecting this option can cause AutoGEM to fail, thus you should
select this option only if it is absolutely necessary.
See Also
Procedure:
356
IndexMeshes
Edge Length Specify the edge length. AutoGEM ignores edges and datum
curves with lengths smaller than or equal to the length you specify. You can
specify the value for Edge Length as an absolute value by entering a number
and making sure the % check box is off. Alternatively, you can use the %
check box to specify the minimum edge length as a percent of the longest
edge of a bounding box that surrounds the model. For example, if you specify
10% as the minimum edge length and the longest edge in the model
bounding box is 5, Mechanica ignores all the edges with length less than 0.5.
Note: Mechanica does not ignore the edges or curves with lengths less
than the specified Minimum Edge Length if the edges or curves are
referenced by a load, constraint, or a beam.
After you define the Minimum Edge Length control, you can use the Preview
button to verify that you have correctly selected the edges/curves you want
AutoGEM to retain and to see which edges or curves it will ignore during meshing.
Mechanica indicates this by highlighting the edges or curves you have chosen to
retain and marking the edges or curves that are less than or equal to the Edge
Length value with purple circles.
See Also
Procedure:
357
If you know in advance that you want more solid or shell elements near a
specific location, add geometry or simulation features that AutoGEM can use
to refine the mesh, such as datum points, curves, surfaces, or regions.
Before using AutoGEM on a curve for 3D models, you need to assign a beam
idealization. AutoGEM automatically creates beam end points, as required, so
you do not need to add datum points.
Note: When you select a curve for AutoGEM and the curve does not have a beam
idealization, AutoGEM will mesh the curve, but you will encounter problems at
analysis time if you have not fully defined the beam. To prevent problems of this
sort, we recommend always adding the beam idealization before you run AutoGEM.
358
Before using AutoGEM on a curve for 2D models, you need to assign a simple
or advanced shell idealization.
Before using AutoGEM on a surface for 2D plane stress models, you need to
assign a simple or advanced shell idealization.
When you use AutoGEM on a surface or volume, make sure that the Insert
Points and Move Or Delete Existing Points options on the Settings tab of
IndexMeshes
the AutoGEM Settings dialog box are selected. For most cases, these
options enable AutoGEM to generate the best set of elements.
When you use AutoGEM on a surface, make sure all the options under
Isolate Features are active. These options direct AutoGEM to isolate:
o reentrant corners on individual surfaces
o points with loads or constraints in Structure or with heat loads,
prescribed temperatures, or convection conditions in Thermal
Create solid, shell, and beam element meshes on geometry that you specify
using the AutoGEM References area. After you create the mesh elements,
you can remove them from any selected geometric entity.
Review and evaluate information about geometry and elements in your model
using the Info menu. You can identify any missing elements in your model or
determine whether geometry problems exist.
Manage your mesh files through the File menu. After completing an AutoGEM
session, you can save your mesh. To avoid re-meshing your model later, you
can retrieve and display a previously created mesh.
359
Create Click this button when you are ready to mesh the selected
geometry. AutoGEM begins the meshing process, regularly displaying
messages that indicate its progress. You can interrupt the meshing process at
any time by clicking the Pro/ENGINEER Stop sign in the lower right corner of
the screen. For more information, see Interrupting AutoGEM.
Usually AutoGEM completes its session successfully and opens the AutoGEM Summary
dialog box at the end. Occasionally, your model may fail to mesh, especially if you are
working with complicated geometry, such as irregular surfaces or volumes, or you are
working with assemblies where the accuracy values for the components are not close
enough. For a more detailed overview of AutoGEM meshing for these geometry types, and
the strategies you can use to remedy AutoGEM failure, see Volume or Surface.
Delete Click this button if you want to remove a created mesh from the
selected geometry.
You can use the Mesh tab on the Simulation Display dialog box to control the
appearance of meshes that AutoGEM generates.
See Also
References:
Load Mesh Load the elements. This command is accessible when your
model's mesh file is present in the current directory.
Copy Mesh from Study Copy a mesh from an existing design study
directory. When you select this option, a Design Study Selection dialog box
opens, from which you can select a study that you want to use.
Save Mesh Save your mesh. Mechanica assigns a name of model.mmp to
a mesh file of a part and model.mma to an assembly mesh file. The files
reside in the current directory. If you are working with family tables or have
simplified representations of your model, see the guidelines that Mechanica
follows when naming your mesh files.
Close Close the dialog box. If you have not saved the mesh with the Save
Mesh command, the software asks whether you want to save your mesh
now.
360
IndexMeshes
Element Types
Solid Elements
A solid element is a three-dimensional element that:
Brick an element with two opposite quadrilateral faces and four faces
between the two opposite faces. Bricks are useful in models that include
volumes with two opposing faces with a similar shapewhether the volumes
are curved or planar. To connect a brick to a tetrahedron, AutoGEM must
create links so that triangular faces of two tetrahedrons can interface with a
single quadrilateral brick face.
Wedge an element with two opposite triangular faces and three
quadrilateral faces between the two opposite faces. Wedges are useful in
models that include volumes with two opposing faces with a similar shape
whether the volumes are curved or planar. They are more versatile than
bricks because AutoGEM can connect wedges to both tetrahedrons and bricks
without needing to create links.
Tetrahedron an element with one triangular face and an opposite point.
The element has three triangular faces between the triangular face and the
opposing point. Tetrahedrons are the most widely used of the solid element
types. Tetrahedrons function dependably for models with regular geometry,
but also provide an excellent solution for models with irregular shapes and
features.
361
Shell Elements
A shell element is a two-dimensional element that:
you use to subdivide a structure that is relatively thin compared to its length
and width
has a constant cross-section and thickness
When creating shell elements, AutoGEM subdivides the shell surface into the
following element shapes, depending on what you specify on the Settings tab:
For most model types, AutoGEM adds shells to your model if you have defined shell
idealizations. In assigning thickness for a simple or advanced shell idealization, be
aware that the thickness of resulting shell elements should be significantly smaller
than the length of any of the body's other dimensions and radii of curvature.
Note: If the shell element is too thin, Mechanica may have difficulty analyzing
it.
As a guideline, the ratio of the shell element's thickness to its other dimensions
should be no greater than 1 to 10 and no less than 1 to 1000.
Beam Elements
A beam is a one-dimensional element that:
represents a structure whose length is much greater than its other two
dimensions. The cross-sectional dimensions of geometry you model with one
or more beams should be small compared to the overall length and radii of
curvature. As a guideline, the ratio of the length to the other dimensions
should be no less than 10 to 1.
has a constant cross-section and thickness in native mode
Beams are only available for 3D models. AutoGEM adds beams to your model if you
have defined beam idealizations either on a curve or between a set of points, as
follows:
If you define a beam idealization on a curve, AutoGEM adds beams over the
length of the curve to reflect the curve's geometry. For example, if the curve
is linear, AutoGEM adds one beam. However, if the curve is a spline, AutoGEM
adds as many individual beams as needed to follow the profile of the curve.
If you define a beam idealization from a point or vertex to another entity type
(point, surface, curve, and so forth), AutoGEM projects a single linear beam
from the point or vertex to the entity.
AutoGEM also adds beams if you have defined spot weld connections.
362
IndexMeshes
2D Elements
Mechanica creates three types of 2D elements. Of these three types, Mechanica uses
only those that are applicable to the type of 2D model you are working with. For
example, Mechanica uses 2D solid elements and 2D shell elements for 2D
axisymmetric models, but does not use 2D plate elements for this model type. The
three element types are:
363
points
beams
springs (S)
masses (S)
springs (S)
masses (S)
springs (S)
masses (S)
curves
beams
2D shells
surfaces
shells
2D solids
volumes
solids
2D plates
Note: In the above table, S indicates that the element is available for
Structure only.
364
IndexMeshes
AutoGEM generates a full set of elements on the geometry you select in most cases.
The amount of time AutoGEM needs to create elements varies with:
Although there is no limit to the number of elements it can create, you should strive
for AutoGEM to use the minimum possible number of elements to take full advantage
of geometric element analysis, and reduce analysis time.
Tip: You may want to add mesh controls, create points, or use other techniques to
subdivide any element for which you need especially detailed data.
For 3D model types, remember that the more complex the element you use, the
more computation time Mechanica requires. Here are the 3D element types listed
from least computation time to most:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Beams
Flat shells
Curved shells
Solids
If you can build the model using one of the 2D model types, the solution takes much
less time. Where appropriate, you can also create symmetry constraints that will
further reduce element counts. For example, you can greatly simplify some
axisymmetric models by using cyclic symmetry.
2D Plane Stress
mass
mass
mass
spring
spring
spring
beam
2D shell
2D plate
shell (quadrilateral or
triangular)
2D solid
365
2D Plane Stress
beam
2D shell
2D plate
shell (quadrilateral or
triangular)
2D solid
The Volume option creates element edges on all curves associated with
boundary surfaces. Boundary surfaces are surfaces along the outer or inner
boundary of a volume. The Volume option creates element endpoints on:
o
o
366
IndexMeshes
Surface
Surface
Select the Surface option in the AutoGEM References area of the AutoGEM dialog
box to create shell elements, 2D plate elements, or 2D shell elements on one or
more surfaces that you select. AutoGEM creates the type of element appropriate for
your model type.
The description of the Surface command is divided into the following sections:
Using Surface
Strategies for Using the Surface Option
See Also
367
Reference:
Interrupting AutoGEM
Using Surface
When you select the Surface option, Mechanica asks you to select one or more
surfaces. It then begins to preprocess your model. Preprocessing evaluates your
model to determine if the surfaces and topology of your model are meshable, and
prepares your model to be meshed. AutoGEM displays messages if it determines,
during this phase, that it will not be able to mesh the model given the element limits
or other conditions.
After preprocessing is complete, AutoGEM creates a set of shell elements for the
model. AutoGEM attempts to optimize elements by trying different element
combinations until it finds a set that best meets its criteria.
Note: Element optimization for shells is typically very fast. If you think that it
is taking too long, you can interrupt the process.
Provided you selected the Quad and Tri option on the Settings tab of the
AutoGEM Settings dialog box, AutoGEM tries to reduce the number of elements
where possible after it creates a complete set of elements. It reduces elements by
combining triangular elements into quadrilateral elements. While you can interrupt
AutoGEM, allowing it to complete this stage can result in a noticeable reduction in
elements, often by 50% or so.
If your model includes idealizations such as beams, springs, or masses, AutoGEM
first meshes the surfaces, adding shell elements. It then adds the beams, springs,
and so forth.
If AutoGEM completes successfully, the AutoGEM Summary dialog box appears. If
AutoGEM does not complete successfully, it displays messages or message boxes
explaining the problem and adds this information to the log file.
See Also
Reference:
368
Use the Boundary Edges option on the AutoGEM Info menu to find and
examine unfinished areas of the model.
Inspect the geometry, for problems.
IndexMeshes
If you deselect the Insert Points and Move Or Delete Existing Points
options, AutoGEM creates the best set of elements possible without inserting
or moving points. Deselecting these options gives you more control over the
elements AutoGEM creates.
In rare cases, reduce the minimum edge angle, increase the maximum edge
angle, or increase the aspect ratio on the Limits tab.
If you are working with an assembly that fails to mesh, use Info>Tolerance
Report to check the component tolerances to make sure that they are close
enough. If not, return to Pro/ENGINEER and use Edit>Setup>Accuracy to
change the accuracy values of any component whose tolerance appears to be
too high.
Volume
Select the Volume option in the AutoGEM References area of the AutoGEM dialog
box to create solid elements in one or more volumes that you select.
The description of Volume is divided into the following sections:
Using Volume
Strategies for Using the Volume Option
See Also
Reference:
Interrupting AutoGEM
Using Volume
When you select the Volume option, Mechanica asks you to select one or more
volumes. It then begins to preprocess your model. Preprocessing searches your
model for existing elements, evaluates your model to determine if the surfaces and
topology of your model are meshable, and prepares your model to be meshed. If any
preprocessing step requires more than 30 seconds, AutoGEM displays messages in
the command area indicating its progress. AutoGEM also displays messages if it
determines, during this phase, that it will not be able to mesh the model given the
element limits or other conditions.
After preprocessing is complete, AutoGEM searches for existing elements, and
creates a mesh as follows:
This gives you a general idea of how AutoGEM is progressing. If you think that it is
taking too long, you can interrupt the process. See Interrupting AutoGEM for
information on using completion status to determine if you should interrupt
AutoGEM.
After AutoGEM creates a complete set of elements, it tries to reduce the number of
elements where possible. While you can interrupt AutoGEM, allowing it to complete
this stage usually results in a 3070% reduction in elements.
If your model includes idealizations such as shells, beams, springs, or masses,
AutoGEM first meshes any volumes, adding solid elements. It then creates the shell
mesh and, finally, adds the beams, springs, and so forth. If necessary, AutoGEM
shifts between solid and shell meshing to meet the mesh quality criteria.
If AutoGEM completes successfully or you interrupt it, the AutoGEM Summary
dialog box appears. If AutoGEM does not complete successfully, it displays messages
or message boxes explaining the problem and adds this information to the log file.
See Also
Reference:
370
IndexMeshes
Status Messages
While meshing your model, Mechanica displays and regularly updates status
messages that give you a general idea of how AutoGEM is progressing. The following
are some tips on how to interpret these messages:
Interrupting AutoGEM
You can interrupt AutoGEM at any time by clicking the Pro/ENGINEER stop sign in
the lower right corner of the screen. You may want to interrupt for one of the
following reasons:
Consult the guidelines for deciding when to interrupt AutoGEM to learn more about
the factors you should weigh.
If you interrupt the meshing session:
before you see the Creating element type elements status message,
AutoGEM will not create any elements
371
after you see the status message, AutoGEM will usually create only a partial
set of elements
AutoGEM usually responds to your interrupt request rapidly. If AutoGEM has already
begun to create elements, it displays a message box indicating the current element
completion percentage, how many elements AutoGEM has created, or what meshing
process AutoGEM is currently performing. The message box prompts you to decide
whether you really want to stop the mesh. If you click Yes, the software opens the
AutoGEM Summary dialog box. If you click No, AutoGEM resumes creating the
mesh.
When you interrupt AutoGEM during element creation, Mechanica displays the mesh
in its current, incomplete state. You can study the mesh and determine where the
problems might lie. After you correct any problems by adding datum geometry to
refine the mesh in the problem areas, relaxing the element limits, or a variety of
other methods, you can run AutoGEM against the existing mesh to complete the
element creation process.
See Also
Reference:
372
IndexMeshes
These files are overwritten with each successive AutoGEM session. If you want to
save a particular AutoGEM log file, you can rename it through the operating system.
You can access the AutoGEM log file regardless of whether AutoGEM completed
successfully or unsuccessfully, or whether you interrupted it.
373
increase the maximum edge and face angles from 175 to 178. Although these
appear to be minor changes, they can reduce the number of elements by 20-30%.
Note that you do not increase the allowable edge turn. Although increasing the edge
turn reduces the number of elements, the reduction is not appreciable.
Consequently, setting a value higher than the default generally does not produce
dramatic changes in element count.
Suppress part features that you know have little or no effect on your results.
If your model has an extremely high number of local measures, consider
deleting some of these measures.
Relax the element quality criteria on the Limits tab.
For example, you can use this dialog box to change the minimum and
maximum edge and face angles. Changing these angles can significantly lower
the number of elements for some parts. However, because the resulting
elements are less robust, your model may experience slower analysis
convergence.
Feature Isolation Determines the list of entities that AutoGEM can detect
and isolate using mesh refinement.
Settings tab Enables you to control various characteristics of element
creation, such as element type and aspect ratio.
Limits tab Enables you to set limits on AutoGEM when it is creating and
editing elements.
When you save your model, Mechanica saves the AutoGEM settings with the model.
These settings then become the current settings when you reopen the model.
374
IndexMeshes
Feature Isolation
This area appears in both Structure and Thermal, and enables you to refine the mesh
near certain geometric features or modeling entities. You use this area if your model
includes geometry, loads, constraints, or boundary conditions that would result in
mathematical singularities. Singularities are areas of theoretically infinite stress or
temperature flux and are undesirable because they can skew analysis results. For
example, point loads in shell or solid models create singularities, or stress
concentrations. In this case, your analysis solution may primarily reflect these stress
concentrations, hampering your ability to focus on overall stress behaviors that you
may be more interested in.
You use feature isolation to surround certain types of singularities in your model with
a more refined mesh. When feature isolation is active, Mechanica populates the area
around each singularity with small elements. Working outward from the singularity,
the element size increases so that it blends compatibly with the overall model mesh.
This meshing approach partially compensates for the impact of singularities on the
solution by spreading the behavior over a greater number of elementsin effect,
isolating the singularities.
For the Feature Isolation area, you can select one of two menu options
Structural or Thermal. Below this menu, the dialog box displays a list of entities
that commonly cause singularities, and that AutoGEM can detect and isolate when it
generates elements. The list is different depending on whether you select Structural
or Thermal:
Structural
Thermal
Reentrant Corners
Reentrant Corners
Point Loads
Point Constraints
AutoGEM detects both structural and thermal entities regardless of whether you are
working in either Structure or Thermal. Your model uses the same elements for the
structural and thermal versions, so you should check your settings for both the
modes before you use AutoGEM.
For example, if you are currently in Structure, but the thermal version of your model
contains a point heat load, AutoGEM detects only the point heat load if you select
that item on the thermal version of this dialog box. If Point Heat Loads is not
selected, AutoGEM creates elements that may work well only for the structural
version of your model.
See Also
375
References:
Reentrant Corners
Point Loads, Point Constraints, Point Heat Loads, Point Prescribed Temperatures,
Point Convection Conditions
Settings Tab
The tab displays these options:
Insert Points Add extra points when needed to complete a valid mesh.
Move or Delete Existing Points Move or delete existing points when
needed to optimize the element configuration for your model.
Modify or Delete Existing Elements Modify or delete existing elements
to improve or complete element creation.
Automatic Interrupt Stop AutoGEM automatically after it creates a
specified percentage of elements.
Create Links Where Needed Create links when needed to connect shell
elements to solid elements or solid quadrilateral faces to solid triangular
faces.
Detailed Fillet Modeling Create a greater number of elements near fillets
to produce smoother fringe plots.
Display AutoGEM Messages Display the messages and message boxes
that AutoGEM generates during its session. Even if you deselect this option,
the software writes the messages to the AutoGEM log file.
Delete Mesh Points When Deleting Elements When deleting mesh
elements, remove points inserted during an AutoGEM session.
Element Types Create different types of elements:
o Shells
o Solids
Limits Tab
The options on this tab enable you to set limits on AutoGEM when it is creating and
editing elements.
In general, you should use the defaults on the tab. They provide acceptable elements
for the greatest number of models. If AutoGEM encounters any problems when
generating elements, you can then change some of the settings on the tab to finetune the elements that AutoGEM creates.
The tab contains the following items:
376
Limits For Enables you to specify what kind of limits you are setting.
Select one of the following items from this list:
o Creating AutoGEM limits the angles on elements that it creates
either during initial modeling or as the result of a geometry change.
o Editing Editing limits are for element validity after smoothing or
editing. A geometry shape change caused by a design parameter
change may cause an element to violate the creation limit. If an
IndexMeshes
element violates the editing limit, you must delete the element and
allow AutoGEM to create new elements.
The limits on angles during AutoGEM element creation are set so that the
elements converge well during the analysis. To retain the same element set
during editing, the default editing limits are relaxed to reduce the element
regeneration that is required.
These relaxed editing limits enable AutoGEM to move points, which makes it
easier to maintain the original set of elements. When AutoGEM can edit
elements by repositioning points, elements are less likely to become invalid
and the model is less likely to require element regeneration.
377
Use Datum Curves This option enables you to use datum curves as a
form of mesh control. For example, you can seed your mesh by closely
surrounding a problem area with datum curves to force a more granular mesh
in that area.
Note: As an alternative to seeding the mesh with datum curves, you can
surround a problem area with a surface region. AutoGEM respects
surface regions regardless of whether you set the Use Datum Curves
option.
Use Datum Surfaces This option enables you to mesh datum surfaces
that have no associated propertiesfor example, quilts that have no shell
idealizations.
Additionally, if you want datum curves and surfaces that have no associated
modeling entities to transfer to independent mode, you need to be sure these toggle
keys are on before you use the File>Independent Mechanica command.
378
IndexMeshes
In deciding new tolerance values, you should consider the effect you want to
achieve. For example, if you find that a mesh fails because some of the edges in the
model are too small for AutoGEM to correctly resolve, you might increase the
minimum edge length tolerance value to ensure that AutoGEM could resolve the
problem edges. However, if you find that AutoGEM merges away a surface sliver that
you want to see results for, you might instead reduce the minimum surface
dimension, forcing AutoGEM to acknowledge the surface. When adjusting tolerance
values, bear the following in mind:
You should not enter extremely large values that may prevent the model from
meshing or running an analysis.
Any changes you make to the tolerance values should not diverge
significantly from the defaults in place when you open the Geometry
Tolerance Settings dialog box. As a general rule, you should keep such
changes within 10% of the defaults displayed in the dialog box.
If you enter erroneous values in any of the fields, you can reset the dialog
box to the default values.
Minimum Edge Length Specify the minimum length for the edges in your
model. Mechanica retains all the edges whose length exceeds the minimum
and merges the end points of any edge whose length is less than the
minimum into a single node. The size of the node corresponds to the length of
the original edge. You can specify the minimum length of an edge as an
absolute or relative value.
Minimum Surface Dimension Specify the dimensions of the surfaces in
your model. Mechanica retains all the surfaces whose dimensions exceed the
minimum and merges each of the surfaces whose dimensions are less than
the minimum into an edge whose length represents the original surface. If the
resulting edge is shorter than the value that appears in the Minimum Edge
Length field, Mechanica merges the surface into a vertex instead. You can
specify the minimum surface dimension as an absolute or relative value.
Minimum Cusp Angle Specify the minimum angle of the cusp formed
where two arcs meet or an arc meets an edge or surface. Mechanica
eliminates any angle less than this value by moving the node at the end of
the surfaces or edges to the nearest location that forms an acceptable angle.
In effect, Mechanica shortens the surfaces or edges. You specify the minimum
angle value in degrees. While Mechanica accepts negative values in this field,
negative values typically result in poor geometry and meshing failures. You
can eliminate the negative angles by specifying a value of zero in the
Minimum Cusp Angle field.
Merge Tolerance Specify the distance below which Mechanica will merge
mated or overlapping surfaces in midsurface assemblies. When determining
how to treat mated or overlapping surfaces in a midsurface assembly,
Mechanica uses this value as a guideline. If the mated or overlapping surface
379
is closer than the specified distance, Mechanica merges the surfaces. If the
surfaces are further apart, Mechanica creates automatic midsurface
connections instead. You can specify the merge tolerance as an absolute or
relative value.
Default
Note: To ensure that Mechanica will produce usable geometry with the tolerance
settings you specify, you should keep all tolerance settings within 10% of the default
values for the dialog box.
380
IndexMeshes
FEM Meshes
About FEM Meshes
After you define a model in the FEM mode, you can generate a finite element mesh
for it. You can mesh solids, midsurfaces, and shells separately or in any combination.
You can also mesh bars and mass idealizations.
Depending on how you configure your session, Mechanica treats the mesh as either a
transient or retained modeling object. There are special modeling implications for
both approaches, particularly if you are working with assemblies.
To control, generate, and check a FEM mesh, use the Mesh menu. Before you create
a mesh, this menu contains three commands:
Controls Opens the Mesh Control dialog box. Use this dialog box to
create mesh controls. Mesh controls determine the size of the elements,
numbering of nodes and elements, and so on. For submodels in an assembly,
you can suppress a particular mesh control type, or all mesh control types.
Create Opens the Create FEM Mesh dialog box. Use this dialog box to
specify the element type and generate the mesh.
Operations Opens the MESH OPER menu if the config.pro option
fem_mesh_operations is set to yes. Use this menu to import NASTRAN files.
See the configuration file documentation for more information.
Improve Attempts to improve the mesh. When you select Improve, the
software asks you to enter the number of additional passes you want for
mesh shape improvement. After you enter the number of passes, the
software tries to improve the shape of solid and shell elements and redraws
the model.
Erase Erases an existing mesh from memory. You can erase an individual
mesh or remove all meshes in the current assembly. This command is
particularly helpful if you are working with hierarchical assembly meshing, but
can sometimes prove useful for other meshes as well.
Note: This command only erases the mesh from memory. The Erase
command does not erase saved mesh files from disk.
Review Opens the REVIEW MESH menu so you can review meshes,
nodes, or elements.
Check Elements Opens the Element Quality Checks dialog box so you
can check element quality.
You can save the mesh data to a database file for later retrieval.
381
382
Mechanica assumes that, even if you stored a mesh for the model in the past,
you do not necessarily want to reuse that mesh in the current session.
Therefore, the software does not automatically import any existing meshes
when it brings your model into FEM mode. If you decide you want to use an
existing mesh, you can manually retrieve it.
Mechanica only retains the mesh while you are in the Mesh menu or the Run
FEM Analysis dialog box. If you leave this menu to perform modeling or
analysis definition tasks before you run your analysis, the software deletes
the mesh. In other words, for transient meshes, the software expects you to
start a run immediately after creating a satisfactory mesh. Thus, you should
define your model using the following sequence:
1. Create all modeling entities, idealizations, and properties.
2. Define all analyses.
3. Mesh the model.
4. Run the analysis.
IndexMeshes
For assembly models, you can only perform flat meshing. Because transient
mesh sessions do not call existing meshes, you cannot create a hierarchy of
existing meshes within the assembly model.
If you want to save a mesh in transient mesh sessions, you must use the
File>Save FEM Mesh command.
If you decide to configure your session for transient meshes, be sure to observe the
guidelines for working with transient meshes.
Mechanica assumes that, if you created a mesh for the model during past
sessions, you want to reuse it in the current session. Therefore, the software
automatically imports the mesh from the associated .fmp(a) file when it
brings your model into FEM mode.
Mechanica retains the model mesh throughout your session provided that you
do not add modeling entities that invalidate the mesh. Thus, you are free to
perform most activities in the order you please. This flexibility is handy in
situations where you know you may need to update your modeling entities at
various intervals.
After you create the mesh, Mechanica displays the mesh model with the
geometry model even if you leave the Mesh menu to perform such activities
as defining modeling entities, properties, and idealizations, defining analyses,
and so forth. You can control how Mechanica displays the mesh model
through the View>Simulation Display command.
For assembly models, you can create both flat meshes and hierarchical
meshes.
Mechanica saves your mesh automatically to an .fmp(a) file.
If you decide to configure your session for retained meshes, be sure to observe the
guidelines for working with retained meshes.
Meshing Guidelines
Guidelines for Transient Meshes
If you configured your session for transient meshing, make sure that you have
completed the following tasks prior to meshing a part or an assembly:
See Troubleshooting FEM Mesh Generation for help with mesh-generation problems.
See Troubleshooting FEM Mesh Generation for help with mesh-generation problems.
384
IndexMeshes
Invalidating a Mesh
If you set your session to use retained meshes, Mechanica attempts to preserve the
model mesh throughout the session, enabling you to define modeling entities and
analyses without perturbing the mesh. However, adding or modifying certain types of
modeling entities can invalidate the mesh.
For example, Mechanica treats any point that has an applied load or boundary
condition as a mesh node. Therefore, if you add a point load to a datum point in your
model, the original mesh is no longer valid because it does not account for the newly
added node.
While a variety of actions can invalidate a mesh, here is a list of the main causes of
mesh invalidation:
In Pro/ENGINEER:
o changing model geometry
o changing the way assembly components connect
o removing assembly components
Modifying or deleting datum features
Creating, modifying, or deleting surface regions or volume regions
Creating or modifying a load, boundary condition, beam, spring, gap, mass,
rigid link, or weighted link such that it references a datum point or vertex that
you have not already declared as a hard point mesh control. You can,
however, change characteristics such as the value of a load, degrees of
freedom for a constraint, and so forth without invalidating the mesh.
Creating, modifying, or deleting connectionsfor example, end welds,
perimeter welds, interfaces, and so forth
Creating or deleting idealizations that affect the way the mesh generator
meshes the part or assembly. You encounter cases such as this when:
o creating a beam idealization on a curve or deleting one from a curve
o creating or deleting a shell idealization on a quilt or surface
Mechanica only includes bars and quilts in the mesh if you define them as idealizations.
Therefore, adding or deleting these idealizations changes the way the mesh generator
would treat the part or assembly, thus invalidating the mesh.
If you invalidate a mesh, Mechanica informs you of the problem during modeling or
meshing. If you introduce the invalidating factor at modeling time, Mechanica takes
one of two actions, depending on whether the factor affects the top-level mesh or a
lower-level component mesh:
Top-level Mesh Mechanica warns you of the problem and gives you the
option of correcting the invalidating factor. If you do not correct the factor,
the software immediately removes the mesh.
Lower-level Component Mesh Mechanica warns you of the problem, but
leaves the mesh intact until you next mesh the component. At that time,
Mechanica respects the mesh, but silently ignores the invalidating factor.
385
When you attempt to generate a mesh in assembly mode and the system gives you
an error message, also consider the following:
386
IndexMeshes
component. This report shows you which components have tolerance values
that are too high so you can adjust them.
When the software fails to generate a solid mesh, check the available memory. If
you receive a memory error message, you can increase the amount of memory that
Pro/ENGINEER uses by modifying the sim_max_memory_usage configuration file
preference.
Assembly Meshing
Assembly Meshing Methods
To ensure that the meshing paradigm most closely meets your engineering needs
and design process, Mechanica provides two methods for meshing assembliesflat
meshing and hierarchical meshing. These methods have distinct modeling
assumptions, have different implications for the overall modeling flow, and address
different product development requirements.
Here is an overview of the two methods:
For details on flat meshing and its implications for your model, see Flat Meshing.
387
For details on hierarchical meshing, guidelines for its use, and implications for your model,
see Hierarchical Meshing.
After you decide which type of meshing you want to use, you are likely to develop a
workflow that matches the steps required for the mesh. However, even if you begin
your work using one type of meshing, you can switch to the other type freely. You
simply need to make sure that you have fulfilled any mesh prerequisites.
Be aware that, while you can create flat meshes regardless of whether you use
retained or transient meshes, you can create hierarchical meshes only if you
configure your session to use retained meshes.
Flat Meshing
For flat meshing, Mechanica assumes your design goal is a one-level, unified mesh
for your model. This means that the session model should include no individual
component meshes. The easiest way to assure this is to work with transient meshes.
However, if you configured your session to use retained meshes instead, you can still
create a flat mesh by erasing component meshes on your screen before you create
your top-level assembly mesh.
How realistically you define your model determines the nature of your mesh and,
consequently, your solution quality. For example, if you do not establish which
components of an assembly transmit a load, your solution will not mirror the
behavior of the assembly. Therefore, you should be sure your assembly includes
connections for any load paths occurring between components that do not have
mated surfaces or overlapping edges.
Note: If your default connection type is not Bonded, you must usually
establish explicit connections for all mated components in the load path.
When you mesh your model, the mesh generator approaches your model as a single
unit, creating coincident meshes across mated surfaces and overlapping edges. The
mesh includes any nodes established by hard points, loads, boundary conditions,
idealizations, connections, or mesh controls. The mesh generator also observes the
mesh type you select.
After you create a flat mesh, you can perform analyses using any supported solver.
You can run the analysis online or offline. You can also view the results of your
analysis within Mechanica.
388
IndexMeshes
Hierarchical Meshing
For hierarchical meshing, Mechanica assumes your design goal is a mesh model that
contains both the top-level assembly mesh and pre-existing component meshes for
one or more individual components. For convenience, this discussion refers to
components with pre-existing meshes as pre-meshed components. A pre-meshed
component can be an individual part or a subassembly.
Development of a hierarchical mesh may involve gathering meshes from multiple
designers, deciding which meshes to use or omit, and so forth. To ensure that you
complete all the required modeling phases, you may want to use a specific workflow
when developing a hierarchical mesh.
Because you can only use hierarchical meshing if you configure your session to use
retained meshes, be sure to set the fem_mesh_preserve config.pro option before
starting Pro/ENGINEER. With this option set, Mechanica checks the current directory
when you open your model in FEM mode. If it finds any existing component meshes,
it brings those meshes into the session. Thus, as your model opens, you see meshes
on pre-meshed components. Components that have no pre-existing meshes display
geometry only.
As with flat meshing, you should add connections to ensure that loads transmit
between unmeshed components that have no mated surfaces or overlapping edges.
You must also explicitly connect any pre-meshed component to the rest of the
assembly. As a prerequisite for this, the component must have hard points where
you want the connections before you generate the component-level mesh. If you do
not use hard points, Mechanica disregards the connection when you create the toplevel assembly mesh.
The way the mesh generator combines individual meshes to form a hierarchical mesh
can be complex. To learn how Mechanica builds hierarchical meshes and handles premeshed components, see Understanding Hierarchical Meshes.
After you create a hierarchical mesh, you can run your model online or output your
model for analysis with your solver. If you choose the latter method, the output is
such that it will allow the solver to handle the assembly mesh hierarchically.
However, the exact arrangement of the output file is slightly different for NASTRAN
than it is for the other solvers. After your run is complete, you can view the results
of your analysis within Mechanica.
389
necessarily need to perform the steps in this order. You can get the same results
using a different sequence, and some steps may not be required for all situations.
For example, in this workflow, the designers complete all work on the individual
components before the system integrator starts working on the top-level assembly.
However, you could easily use a workflow where the system integrator sets up all
connections for the top-level assembly before the designers work on the component
meshes. The latter workflow is especially efficient for complex component-level
meshes because the hard point locations are identified very early in the process.
390
IndexMeshes
Action
Unmeshed
Complete mesh
Partial mesh
391
After it has prepared the list of components that it needs to mesh, the mesh
generator creates the top-level mesh. The resulting mesh model contains the toplevel mesh, which includes meshes for all connections and unmeshed components.
The mesh model also contains any complete or inherited component-level meshes.
In creating the mesh, the software respects all properly established connections
between subcomponents, ensuring that the solver will be able to correctly recognize
the assembly load paths. Here is how the mesh generator treats connections:
As it proceeds, the mesh generator checks for any situations that invalidate the
mesh or cause unacceptable mesh inconsistencies. The mesh generator either
ignores the factor causing the problem or removes the mesh. The mesh generator
also checks for any node, element, or local mesh entity ID conflicts. If it finds any, it
warns you of the situation, providing a list of nodes, elements, and local mesh
entities that have numbering conflicts. To resolve this conflict, use the Mesh
Numbering or Mesh ID Offset mesh control, as appropriate.
When you output the model for use with the NASTRAN solver, Mechanica creates a
single file for the assembly. This file lists all the meshes in the model, starting with
the lowest level and working upward. It places the properties, materials, and
coordinate system records in the lower mesh structures, enabling you to separate
individual meshes from the whole and run these separately.
For other solvers, the file lists all model meshes, but does not arrange them
hierarchically. In this case, Mechanica arranges the file so that all nodes in the
assembly are in one section of the file, all elements are in another, all materials in
another, and so on. When it works with the file, the solver recreates the hierarchy
using information from each of these sections.
To see an example of how the mesh generator processes a hierarchical mesh, see
Example: Hierarchical Mesh Generation.
392
IndexMeshes
When it meshes the top-level assembly, the mesh generator preserves the existing
meshes for part f, subassembly a, and subassembly b. However, as subassembly d
has a partial mesh, the mesh generator asks whether you want to remove
subassembly d's mesh. If you do, the mesh generator creates the top-level mesh.
Here is the result:
393
394
IndexMeshes
Unmated Geometry In this case, the software does not recognize any
geometric connection and you must establish the load paths manually by
creating assembly-level beam, spring, or connection idealizations to link the
opposing surfaces, edges, or points of the components. When you create a
connection of this kind, the mesh generator treats the datum points
associated with the idealizations as nodes that enable it to generate a
consistent mesh. Because these connections serve as load paths, you should
determine the connection type and distribution based on the nature of the
load and its distribution.
To understand how you create this type of connection more fully, you can
review an example.
Type You can specify one of the following mesh control types:
o Maximum Element Size
o Minimum Element Size
o Edge Distribution
o Hard Point
o Hard Curve
o Mesh Numbering
o Displacement Coordinate System
o Ignored Mesh Control (available only for assemblies)
o Mesh ID Offset (available only for assemblies)
o Shell Element Direction
References area Depending on the mesh control type you specify in the
Type field, the active fields in the References area change. For information
on this area, use the links in the list above to learn about the References
area for each mesh control type.
When you create a mesh control, the software adds the appropriate icon(s) to your
model. For more information, see Mesh Control Icons.
After a mesh control exists on your model, you can redefine or delete it by rightclicking the mesh control icon in the Model Tree. You can also redefine a mesh
control by double-clicking the icon on your model.
396
IndexMeshes
If you enter an unusually small value for the maximum element size, the software
might create an extremely large number of elements. To warn you of this situation,
the mesh generator compares the specified size of the element with the volume of
the meshed part. If the specified element size is very small, the software displays a
message. If it cannot generate a mesh with elements that small, the software
overrides the value specified in the mesh control with the smallest value it considers
acceptable and displays a warning message.
The mesh generator only respects the Maximum Element Size and Minimum
Element Size mesh controls if you apply them to unmeshed components. If a
component has a mesh, the mesh generator silently ignores these mesh controls.
References Use the selector arrow to specify the datum point or curve for
the mesh generator to use to place an element node or nodes. If you already
selected the valid geometry before entering the dialog box, your selections
appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box appears.
Node ID Specify the node ID (Hard Point only). This option is available
only when you select a single point. When the mesh is complete, the number
397
replaces the node ID for the selected hard point. You can define a hard point
without specifying a node ID.
For hierarchical meshes, make sure your model includes part-level hard points
wherever you want to create connections for pre-meshed assembly components.
The mesh generator only respects the Hard Point and Hard Curve mesh controls if
you apply them to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the mesh
generator silently ignores these mesh controls.
You can create notes associated with specific hard points. The notes you create
transfer to the NASTRAN or ANSYS output deck as comments.
The mesh generator only respects the Edge Distribution mesh control if you apply
it to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the mesh generator silently
ignores the mesh control.
398
IndexMeshes
The geometric reference that you select for a displacement coordinate system may
also be part of the definition for other Mechanica entities, such as constraints, rigid
links, and weighted links. If you defined the constraint, rigid link, or weighted link
with a coordinate system that is not identical to the displacement coordinate system,
a conflict may arise.
In most cases where there are conflicting coordinate systems, the software uses the
most recent coordinate system. However, if you output to the NASTRAN solver, the
software tries to resolve the conflict using geometric and modeling precedence rules.
If the software cannot resolve the conflicts, a message box appears when you run
the analysis with an error message about the coordinate system conflict, and the
output process stops.
The mesh generator only respects the Displacement Coordinate System mesh
control if you apply it to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the
mesh generator silently ignores the mesh control.
399
First ID Specify the first ID for the nodes, elements, and local mesh
entities.
Increment Specify the ID increment for the nodes, elements, and local
mesh entities.
Last ID Specify the last ID for the nodes, elements, and local mesh
entities. You can leave this item blank.
If meshing generates a mesh ID that is higher than the value you specify for
Last ID, the software displays a message warning that there are conflicts in
the mesh and stops the mesh. You can resolve this problem by increasing the
Last ID value.
For assemblies, the software defines these IDs for the top-level model only. If you
switch to part mode to resolve an ID conflict within the assembly, be sure the new
range for the part does not conflict with the range of another assembly component
not previously in conflict.
The mesh generator only respects Mesh Number mesh controls if you apply them
to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the mesh generator silently
ignores these mesh controls.
IndexMeshes
which would cause a conflict when you mesh the top-level assembly. Applying an
offset to the mesh IDs when you work in the top-level assembly eliminates this
problem.
You can also use this technique when two individual component-level meshes have
mesh IDs that partially or wholly overlap, but you may find the Mesh Numbering
mesh controls easier to use in this situation.
If you select Mesh ID Offset, specify the following:
References Use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods to
specify the appropriate geometry. If you already selected the valid geometric
references before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the
selector arrow when the dialog box appears.
ID Offset Value Specify a positive integer value to be added to the IDs of
each node, element, and local mesh entity.
Before choosing offset values, be sure to check that the offset does not move the
new mesh ID range into the range of a component not previously in conflict.
If you select the Shell Element Direction option, you can specify the following:
401
Surfaces Use the selector arrow to specify the appropriate surface. If you
select a surface that, at mesh time, does not have a shell idealization or is not
part of a shell pair, Mechanica will ignore the Shell Element Direction mesh
control.
Coordinate System Direction area Use the selector arrow to specify the
reference coordinate system. After you select the coordinate system that you
want Mechanica to use as the basis for node numbering, you can select the
axis that you want the software to use to determine shell element direction.
For Cartesian coordinate systems, you can select X, Y, or Z. For cylindrical
coordinate systems, you can select R, , or Z, while you can select R, , or
for Spherical coordinate systems.
If you select a coordinate direction that is perpendicular to any shell elements
or within approximately 5 of perpendicular, Mechanica warns you at mesh
time, highlights the problem elements, and does not reorder these element
nodes.
In most cases, you should apply the Shell Element Direction mesh control before
meshing the model. For hierarchical meshes, the mesh generator only respects this
mesh control if you apply it to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh,
the mesh generator silently ignores any Shell Element Direction mesh control you
place on a previously meshed component.
Note that you can also create a shell mesh with aligned element directions by
assigning material orientations as part of defining an advanced shell idealization.
402
IndexMeshes
Type
types
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Icon
Text Description
Maximum Element
Size
A circle
MaxSize:n.n
where n.n is the size of the element
Minimum Element
Size
A circle
MinSize:n.n
where n.n is the size of the element
Edge Distribution
Filled-in circles to
represent node
locations
nnn N; rrr R
where nnn is the number of nodes and rrr is
the L1/L2 ratio
Hard Point
Hard Pt
Hard Curve
x x x
Hard Curve
Mesh Numbering
No icon
Mesh IDs: n1 n2 n3
where n1 is the first ID, n2 is the
increment, and n3 is the last ID
Displacement
Coordinate System
No icon
No icon
None
403
Mesh ID Offset
No icon
ID Off: n
where n is the mesh ID offset
Shell Element
Direction
A two-axis coordinate
system to represent X
and Y directions
ShellCSnnn
where nnn is the coordinate system you
selected when you created the mesh control
If you do not see the text description for the mesh control, select View>Simulation
Display and make sure that Display Names is selected on the Settings tab.
Solid Generates a solid mesh for your model. The meshing process creates
an optimal model of the solid volume of the meshed model with a network of
three-dimensional tetrahedral elements. The resulting mesh includes:
o tetrahedral solid elements for all solid chunks in your model
o shell elements for any simple or advanced shell idealizations that you
created for quilt surfaces
o elements for any beam, spring, gap, mass, rigid link, or weighted link
idealizations
When you select the Solid option, the Shell Element Type area is unavailable unless
your model contains appropriately defined shell idealizations.
404
IndexMeshes
If the mesh type you select provides for shell elements, the Create FEM Mesh
dialog box includes the Shell Element Type area that you use to specify how
Mechanica constructs the shell mesh portion of your model. The Shell Element
Type area provides a option list with the following items:
After selecting any of these options, click Start. The mesh generator then creates
and optimizes the mesh. To terminate mesh generation, click the stop sign displayed
in the lower right corner of the Pro/ENGINEER window.
When the mesh is complete, Mechanica displays the meshed model and the Element
Quality Checks dialog box. What the model looks like depends on the display style.
The mesh generator automatically produces a mesh that satisfies all applied mesh
controls and ensures that each constrained or loaded datum point becomes a node in
the resulting mesh.
See Also
Procedure:
405
4. Click Start.
Mechanica meshes your model, displays the mesh, and opens the Element
Quality Checks dialog box. You can use this dialog box to check the quality
of your mesh.
If Mechanica displays any error messages before it meshes your model, see
Troubleshooting FEM Mesh Generation.
5. When you finish your initial review of your model, click Close.
6. If you do not have the fem_mesh_preserve config.pro option set and want to
save your mesh, click File>Save FEM Mesh and enter the name of the file in
which you want the software to store the meshed model.
See Also
References:
406
IndexMeshes
The Shell Element Type option list includes two element types you can use to shellmesh modelstriangles and quadrilaterals.
Note that, for models that contain simple or advanced shell idealizations as well as
midsurface or boundary shells, you can define only one element type. Mechanica
applies this element type throughout the model.
An example of shell meshing shows the results of meshing the model with different
types of elements.
You can also create a partial shell mesh, where the software meshes all paired
surfaces, but ignores the unpaired ones.
See Also
Procedures:
To Create a Midsurface
To Test Shell Compression
407
When you create a partial shell mesh, you can either use the unopposed surfaces in
the shell model or ignore them, depending on how you set the UseUnopposed
option.
To eliminate unopposed surfaces to generate a full mesh, use one of the methods
recommended for pairing unopposed surfaces.
When you attempt to compress the model and the system detects unpaired surfaces,
the following events occur:
408
The system highlights the unpaired surfaces and asks you if you want to
mesh only paired surfaces.
o To halt the process, click the stop sign displayed in the lower right
corner of the Pro/ENGINEER window.
IndexMeshes
409
Quilts
A quilt represents a patchwork of connected nonsolid surfaces, and can consist of a
single surface or a collection of surfaces. A quilt contains information describing the
geometries of all the surfaces that compose a quilt, and information on how quilt
surfaces join or intersect. A part or assembly can contain several quilts.
In Pro/ENGINEER, you can assign a name to an entire quilt or to an individual
surface by selecting Edit>Set Up>Name>Other.
For more information about quilts, search the Surface functional area of the
Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
NASTRAN Deck You can select a NASTRAN bulk data deck file to import.
Node and element information is included as read-only in the bulk data deck
file. The bulk data deck is the part of the .nas file between the lines BEGIN
BULK and ENDDATA.
Mechanica imports the mesh with respect to the current model WCS. After the
deck is imported, you can define and apply hard point mesh controls to
current geometry. You cannot use a mesh imported from a NASTRAN data
deck later in an FEA solver or store the mesh in a file.
See Guidelines for NASTRAN Deck Import for information on limitations for
the file to be imported.
NASTRAN xdb You can select a NASTRAN results file (.xdb) to import.
Selecting either of these two commands displays the Pro/ENGINEER Open dialog
box, which you can use to select the desired files.
410
IndexMeshes
The greatest improvement to the mesh occurs during these two element optimization
passes, and, in most cases, you will not need to refine the mesh further. However, if
you examine a mesh and think that the mesh still requires adjustment, you can use
the Mesh>Improve command to perform additional optimization passes. As an
alternative, you may want to add mesh controls to your model in areas that concern
you, and then remesh the model.
When you select the Mesh>Improve command, Mechanica performs the number of
passes that you indicate, and displays a message in the message area indicating the
number of passes it has completed. The pass count is cumulative. In other words, if
you specify four additional passes, Mechanica will report six passes altogethertwo
passes that occurred as part of mesh creation plus the four passes you specified. The
pass count persists from session to sessionincrementing for each optimization
passuntil you erase the mesh or create a new mesh.
Be aware that the higher the pass count, the longer the mesher will need to perform
the optimization. With each pass, the amount of improvement is also less.
411
When you select the Review command or use one of the Run FEM Analysis dialog
box methods, the REVIEW MESH menu appears. This menu allows you to review
the mesh after it is created or after an analysis is run. The menu includes:
Meshes Review a mesh after you create it. You can review a list of
components by path within the top-level assembly hierarchy, the number of
elements and nodes, and the range of element and node ID numbers. You
can also review the range of element, node, and local mesh entity IDs with
the Mesh ID Offset mesh control applied. This type of review can help you
identify and resolve any numbering conflicts.
Nodes Review nodes by selecting:
o Coord Systems Select this option to display a coordinate system
icon at each selected node that will be oriented for nodal displacement.
If the coordinate system is not Cartesian, then Mechanica calculates
and displays the R, , and Z or
direction instead.
o All Highlight all element nodes and display their node IDs.
o Boundary Highlight only boundary nodes and display their node
IDs. This option only appears if the mesh includes solid elements.
o Node ID Highlight an individual node and display its ID. If you
select this option, you enter the integer ID for the node you are
interested in.
o Select Highlight an individual node and display its ID. In this case,
you use your mouse to select the node on your model.
o List Unused Generate a list of unused node IDs. You use this
option to help detect node ID conflicts in hierarchical meshes. You can
correct these conflicts by applying mesh ID offset mesh controls to the
conflicting nodes.
Elements Review elements by selecting:
o Coord Systems Display the coordinate system for the elements
that you review.
o Shell Normals Display the shell normals for the elements that you
review. This check box only appears if the mesh includes shell
elements.
o All Highlight all elements and display their element IDs.
o Boundary Highlight only boundary elements and display their
element IDs. This option only appears if the mesh includes solid
elements.
o Element ID Highlight an individual element and display its ID as
well as its node IDs. If you select this option, you enter the integer ID
for the element you are interested in.
o Select Highlight an individual element and display its ID as well as
its node IDs. In this case, you use your mouse to select the element
on your model.
o List Unused Generate a list of unused element IDs. You use this
option to help detect element ID conflicts in hierarchical meshes. You
can correct these conflicts by applying mesh ID offset mesh controls to
the conflicting elements.
Connectivity Highlight edges that are only included in one shell surface.
You can also use this command to highlight a free node on a one-dimensional
element such as a beam or spring.
If you review the mesh at run time, Mechanica adds these options to the REVIEW
MESH menu:
412
IndexMeshes
Checking Elements
Checking a FEM Mesh
Use the Mesh>Check Elements command to check the element quality of your
mesh. When you select Check Elements, the Element Quality Checks dialog box
appears.
Note: The Element Quality Checks dialog box also appears immediately
after you create a mesh, enabling you to check your mesh at that time.
Use the Quality Measures part of the dialog box to indicate which element
characteristics you want Mechanica to check. To streamline your selection process,
this area of the dialog box provides a Select All Checks button and an Unselect All
Checks button that you can use to quickly select and deselect the entire list of
quality measures.
Each Quality Measures check box represents one of seven tests performed on all
elements in the mesh:
The value initially displayed in each check box represents a basic setting for a wellformed element. If you want your mesh to meet looser or more stringent element
limits, you can increase or decrease the individual values to customize your mesh
check.
Use the Check button to perform the mesh check. When the check is complete,
Mechanica highlights any elements that do not meet the criteria in the Quality
Measures area.
If you want a more exact or permanent record of measurements for elements that
fail the check, use the Screen and File options in the Output Element Statistics
413
area of the dialog box. These options let you show the mesh check output in a text
file displayed on your screen, write the output to a file so you can review it later, or
both.
The mesh check record lists failed element IDs, sorted by element types, along with
their quality measures. You can use the Mesh>Review command to determine the
location of the element associated with each element ID.
If you find that you consistently reset one or more of the values on the Element
Quality Checks dialog box, you can use config.pro options to set the defaults for
this dialog box to values appropriate for your designs.
where E is the longest edge and h is the shortest heightthe distance between a
vertex and the opposite surface or edge.
where h is the distance between the nodes and the reference plane, and e is the
shortest edge.
414
IndexMeshes
415
where a = min (Ai) is the smallest triangle area and A = sum (Ai) is the quadrilateral
area.
416
IndexMeshes
higher than the preset bound. The Mid Ratio quality measure is used primarily by the
ANSYS FEA solver. Most other solvers disregard this mid ratio value.
Mechanica calculates the mid ratio, M, according to this formula:
M = h/L
where h is the distance between the midnode and the connecting line of the corner
nodes, and L is the distance between two adjacent corner nodes. The software
performs this test on parabolic mesh only.
Regardless of which approach you use, be aware that the .fmp(a) file stores the
mesh model only. It does not store model properties such as loads, boundary
418
IndexMeshes
Be aware that meshes created in one product are not usable in other products. For
example, if you create a mesh in Structure, you cannot retrieve it in Thermal.
Design Controls
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls command to add design
parameters to your model in order to define the way you want your model to change
during sensitivity and optimization studies. Design parameters enable Mechanica to
modify the model shape to achieve a design that meets your goals.
For information about the process of adding and verifying design parameters, see:
Switch Dim Use to review the dimension names or values for a feature
before defining a design parameter. Select Switch Dim and then a feature to
display the feature's dimension names. Select Switch Dim again to switch to
a dimension value display.
Shape Review Show how design parameters change your model's shape
at a specific value.
Shape Animate Show how design parameters change your model's shape
in steps.
Optimize Hist Use to review the shape change history of your model
during an optimization study and to overwrite your Pro/ENGINEER part with
the optimized shape that Mechanica developed.
See Also
Procedure:
Design Parameters
Overview of Design Parameters
Based on the stresses or thermal conditions revealed during analysis, you can add
design parameters to your model. Design parameters are entities that can change
the shape of the model within a specified range during a sensitivity or optimization
design study. The design parameters you create affect only the shape of the model.
For example, you can add a design parameter to a radius, setting a range within
which Mechanica translates the radius until it finds a new location that minimizes the
stress of the model. See Example: Design Parameter.
Here is an overview of the steps you should follow to assign and verify design
parameters in Mechanica. You should complete all the steps before creating and
running a design study.
1. Prepare your model for design parameters by renaming dimensions, defining
Pro/ENGINEER parameters, adding relationships, and examining the effect of
dynamic feature suppression. This step is optional.
2. Define design parameters using any independent Pro/ENGINEER dimension or
parameter. You can also create a new Pro/ENGINEER design parameter;
however, these new design parameters reference the quantities of existing
Pro/ENGINEER design parameters.
3. Review or animate the shape change.
4. Troubleshoot any shape change problems.
5. Modify or delete design parameters if necessary.
See Also
420
IndexMeshes
Procedures:
Strategy:
Assign more meaningful names to any dimensions for which you plan
to create design parameters. You can assign dimension names either when
you create design parameters or when you work with your part in
Pro/ENGINEER. For information on naming dimensions, see Strategy:
Changing Dimension Names.
Create Pro/ENGINEER relations that tie dimensions together to
produce the desired dimension relationship. In Mechanica, you use
421
422
IndexMeshes
Beam sections You can create design parameters using any sketched
solid or thin beam section.
See Also
Procedures:
Design Parameters
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Design Params command to
create, edit, review, or delete design parameters in your model. A design parameter
is a model feature on which you can instruct Mechanica to perform one of the
following actions:
423
dimensions
Pro/ENGINEER parameters
beam sections
material properties
laminate layup shell properties for shell models
When you select the Design Params command, the Design Parameters dialog box
appears. The dialog box lists all design parameters you have defined for the current
model and displays a description of the selected design parameter.
The following buttons are available on the dialog box:
For more information on using design parameters when creating laminate layup shell
properties for shell models, see Design Parameters with Laminate Layup.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Laminate Layup
424
IndexMeshes
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
4. Click Create.
The Design Parameter Definition dialog box appears.
Dimension
Pro/ENGINEER Parameter
Section Dimension
See Also
425
Procedures:
References:
2. Select a feature on your model for which you want to create design
parameters.
Mechanica displays the feature dimensions.
3. Select a dimension.
The Design Parameter Definition dialog box appears with the name and current value
of the design parameter. Mechanica also inserts reasonable minimum and maximum
values.
4. Enter a name for the dimension design parameter in the Name entry box.
Choose a name that has not been assigned to another design parameter.
5. Review the minimum and maximum values and change them if necessary.
Be sure that the values are physically appropriate. For example, a negative value is valid
for an angle but not for a length.
6. Click Accept.
The Design Parameters dialog box appears and displays the design
parameter you just created.
426
IndexMeshes
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
Features
2. If you want to use one of the listed parameters, select the parameter name.
The Design Parameter Definition dialog box appears with the name and current value
of the design parameter. Mechanica also inserts reasonable minimum and maximum
values.
5. Click Accept.
The Design Parameters dialog box appears. The dialog box now shows the
design parameter you just created.
See Also
Procedures:
427
3. Select a dimension.
The Design Parameter Definition dialog box appears with the name and current value
of the design parameter. Mechanica also inserts reasonable minimum and maximum
values.
4. Enter a name for the dimension design parameter in the Name entry box.
Choose a name that has not been assigned to another design parameter.
5. Review the minimum and maximum values and change them if necessary.
Be sure that the values are physically appropriate. For example, a negative value is legal
for an angle but not for a length.
6. Click Accept.
The Design Parameters dialog box appears. The dialog box now shows the
design parameter you just created.
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
428
Beams
IndexMeshes
Shape Review
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Review command to show
a model's shape changes in response to one or more design parameters set at values
you specify. This review shows you shape changes similar to those that will occur
during a design study and helps you spot potential problems before executing a
time-consuming study. For example, you may find conflicts between design
parameters.
The Shape Review dialog box contains the following items:
When you click the Review button to start the shape review, Mechanica displays the
model with the dimensions set to the specified values. After displaying the shape
change, Mechanica gives you the option to restore the model to its original state
before the shape review or to replace your original model with the new shape.
To see how a shape review changes a model's shape, see Example: Shape Review.
For information on problems that may occur when design parameters change your
model's shape, see:
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Shape Animate
Strategy:
429
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
Example:
Shape Review
430
IndexMeshes
See Also
References:
431
Shape Animate
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Animate command to
show the effects of one or more design parameters on your model. Shape Animate
allows you to view the shape changes in steps, not just at a specific value. You
432
IndexMeshes
should use Shape Animate as well as Shape Review to preview shape changes
and prevent problems with your design parameters before running a design study.
The Shape Animate dialog box contains the following items:
When you click the Animate button to start the shape animation, Mechanica initially
displays the model with the dimensions set to the start values. Mechanica then asks
if you want to move on to the next step in the animation. You have the option of
continuing or stopping the animation at each step. At the end of the animation, you
have the option to restore the model to its original shape before the animation or
replace the original model with the new shape.
To see how shape animation changes a model's shape, see Example: Shape
Animation.
For information on problems that may occur when design parameters change your
model's shape, see:
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Shape Review
Strategy:
433
2. Select the design parameters you want to include in the shape animation.
3. Enter or select a number for the starting value for each design parameter in
the left entry box under Settings.
4. Enter or select a number for the ending value for each design parameter in
the right entry box under Settings.
434
IndexVerifying Models
5. Select the number of steps for the animation in the Number Of Intervals
box.
6. Click Animate to start the shape animation.
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
Strategy:
Verifying Models
It is a good idea to check your model before you start your run to detect errors in
your model that can cause:
You can check your model to make sure that the work you did passes Mechanica's
validity checking. To do so, select the Info>Check Model menu option on the
Analyses and Design Studies dialog box before running your analysis or design
study. As an alternative, you can start the run and click OK to use error detection
during the run.
You might want to check your model more than once before starting a run to:
Check for errors that are specific to the analyses and design studies you
create.
Make sure that any edits you made to your model did not create any new
errors.
435
Validity Checking
Mechanica performs error checks when you select the Info>Check Model menu
option on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. For each error it finds,
Mechanica:
Unless otherwise indicated, these errors prevent you from starting a design study
run.
Mechanica's error checks fall into three categories:
The error checking process does not include model repair. Mechanica reports only
corruption errors related to modeling entities. If it encounters topological or
geometric errors, Mechanica exits and returns you to Pro/ENGINEER.
Missing properties
Invalid analysis definitions
Missing Properties
Mechanica highlights any components to which you have not assigned material
properties or other properties.
Use the Properties menu to assign any missing properties.
436
IndexVerifying Models
Mechanica also warns you if your model contains dynamic time, frequency, or
random response analyses, and you have not defined any measures of the types
calculated for those analyses.
You can define new measures with the Insert>Simulation Measure command.
Structure Errors
In Structure only, Mechanica searches for the following errors:
Missing constraints
Constraintconstraint conflicts
ConstraintConstraint Conflicts
If you place constraints on associated entities that are incompatible, and include
those constraints in the same set, Mechanica highlights the constraint icons.
For example, if you constrained a shell in the X direction, but also placed an enforced
displacement on one of the shell's edges in the same direction, the constraints will
conflict if they are in the same set.
As a general rule, you should not constrain any associated entities of an entity that
you have already constrained if you plan to include the constraints in the same set.
Missing Constraints
Mechanica makes sure that there are constraints in your model. Note that a point-toground spring is a constraint.
You cannot define an analysis for a model with no constraints, unless you select one
of the following:
See Also
References:
437
Thermal Errors
In Thermal only, Mechanica searches for the following errors:
prescribed temperatures
convection conditions
You cannot define an analysis for a model without at least one constraint set
containing one of these two conditions.
Creating Analyses
Use the Mechanica Analyses/Studies command to create and manage analyses.
For FEM mode analyses, see About FEM Analysis and About Running FEM Analyses
and Generating Output Decks.
In an analysis:
You specify some combination of constraints and loads for your model that
Mechanica uses to calculate the model's response.
You enter information that determines how Mechanica calculates and reports
results for the analysis when you include the analysis in a design study and
run the study.
IndexCreating Analyses
See Also
References:
Menu bar Perform the following activities using the options on the menu
bar:
o Create new analyses and design studies using the options available on
the File menu.
439
Analysis Types
You can create these types of analysis within each Mechanica product.
Product
Structure
Analysis Types
Static
o Large Deformation Static
o Contact
Prestress Static
Buckling
Modal
Prestress Modal
Fatigue
Thermal
Steady-State Thermal
Transient Thermal
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
440
Time Response
Frequency Response
Random Response
Shock Response
IndexStructural Analysis
Structural Analysis
About Structural Analysis
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Analyses/Studies command to define a structural
analysis.
You can define the following types of structural analyses:
For static, prestress static, large deformation, contact, and buckling analyses,
Mechanica automatically calculates all measures valid for a static analysis. For modal
and prestress modal analyses, Mechanica automatically calculates all measures that
are valid for a modal analysis.
See Sample Uses for Prestress and Buckling Analyses for an example of when you
might use each of these analysis types.
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for information on including load
sets and constraint sets in your analyses.
441
For a static, prestress static, large deformation static, and contact analysis,
you do not need a load set if you use a constraint set with an enforced
displacement. Otherwise, you must have at least one load set.
For a modal or prestress modal analysis, you do not need a constraint set if
you select Unconstrained when you define the analysis. Do not select a
constraint set that contains an enforced displacement constraint.
For any analysis type other than dynamic shock, point-to-ground springs are
equivalent to point constraints. You do not have to select a constraint set if
your model is sufficiently constrained by such springs.
For all dynamic analyses, you can select a load set that contains a thermal
load, but it will not be used for calculations.
For dynamic time, frequency, and random analyses, you can choose to have
Mechanica calculate results separately for each load set you include, or sum
the sets as if they are acting simultaneously.
If you delete a constraint set or load set after you include it in an analysis,
Mechanica automatically deletes that set from the analysis.
Even if you create a new set with the same name as the set you deleted, you
must edit the analysis and reselect the set. Otherwise, you may invalidate the
analysis, and any design studies in which you included the analysis.
442
IndexStructural Analysis
o
o
The following tabs appear on the Static Analysis Definition and Prestress Static
Analysis Definition dialog boxes:
See Also
Procedures:
Reference:
Strategy:
1 constraint set
1 or more load sets or enforced displacements
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
443
6. If nonlinear options are available for your model, you can select one of the
following:
o
o
7. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the
static analysis:
o
o
o
o
444
IndexStructural Analysis
You run a prestress static analysis in addition to a static analysis for the following
situations:
Requirements
1
1
1
a
constraint set
or more load sets or enforced displacements
or more static analyses
3D model
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
445
6. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the
prestress static analysis:
o Previous Analysis
o Output
o Convergence
7. Click OK when you complete the dialog box.
The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the
new analysis.
The following tabs are available on the dialog box when you select Calculate Large
Deformations:
Load Intervals
Temperature Distribution (appears only for models with temperaturedependent material properties)
Convergence
Output
See Also
Procedure:
Strategy:
446
IndexStructural Analysis
1 constraint set
0 or 1 load set
a 3D, 2D plane stress, or 2D plane strain model
solid and mass elements only
no links
isotropic, linear elastic material properties only
no temperature-dependent material properties
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
447
3. To select load interval options, see To Select Load Interval Options for Large
Deformation and Contact Analyses.
4. Click OK when you complete the dialog box.
The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the
new analysis.
Contact Analysis
In a contact analysis, Mechanica examines the effect of loads on contact regions.
For details, see the description of and requirements for contact analyses.
You must first select a static analysis type and then use the nonlinear option
Include Contact Regions.
For a contact analysis, select the following options on the Static Analysis
Definition dialog box as indicated:
The following tabs are available on the dialog box when you select Include Contact
Regions:
448
Load Intervals
Temperature Distribution (appears only for models with temperaturedependent material properties)
Convergence
Output
IndexStructural Analysis
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Strategy:
Contact analysis takes longer to run than linear static analysis because Mechanica
must calculate results several times iteratively.
See Contact Analyses in Design Studies for information on including contact analyses
in different types of design studies.
See Also
Strategy:
449
1 constraint set
0 or 1 load set
1 or more contact regions
In addition, you must create measures if you want to see results for specific contact
regions. You can select from the following measures: average contact pressure,
maximum contact pressure, contact area, and contact load.
Note that Mechanica does not support contact analysis for models that include shells
in the contact region. Also, Mechanica does not support large deformation
nonlinearity for contact analyses. This means that the outward normals for the
contact surfaces should not rotate more than 5 during analysis.
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
See Also
Procedures:
References:
450
IndexStructural Analysis
The following tabs appear on the Modal Analysis Definition and Prestress Modal
Analysis Definition dialog boxes:
Modes
Previous Analysis (appears only on the Prestress Modal Analysis
Definition dialog box)
Temperature Distribution (available on the Modal Analysis Definition
dialog box only for models with temperature-dependent material properties)
Convergence
Output
See Also
Procedures:
451
0 or 1 constraint set
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
452
IndexStructural Analysis
0 or 1 constraint set
1 static analysis
a 3D model
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Buckling Analysis
You can use a buckling analysis to calculate the critical load at which a structure will
buckle, as well as the model's stresses, strains, and deformations at the onset of
buckling.
In a buckling analysis, Mechanica calculates a buckling load factor (BLF) and mode
shape.
See Buckling Analysis Overview for a more detailed description of and requirements
for buckling analyses.
These items appear on the Buckling Analysis Definition dialog box:
Previous Analysis
Convergence
Output
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
454
IndexStructural Analysis
a buckling load factor (BLF). The BLF is the magnification factor by which the
loads applied in a previously specified static analysis would have to be
multiplied to produce the critical buckling load. First define a static analysis, in
which Mechanica calculates the stress stiffening of your model due to the
applied forces. You can then define a buckling analysis, which Mechanica uses
to calculate the model's elastic stiffness due to geometry and material
properties. Mechanica uses the two solutions to calculate the BLF.
the mode shape for each buckling mode you request
The buckling analysis uses the constraint set specified in the previous static analysis.
Mechanica automatically calculates all predefined measures valid for a static
analysis.
Mechanica buckling analysis is a linear eigenvalue bifurcation instability analysis as
described in The Finite Element Method, Third Edition, by O.C. Zienkiewicz, pages
513514. Large displacement or non-linear buckling investigations may produce
significantly different results, depending on the type of model and loads being
examined.
A Mechanica buckling analysis will typically overestimate the buckling load in
comparison to real world tests.
Look at the mode shape and BLF in results. For stress results, you should use the
static analysis results. For stress results at the area of buckling, multiply the stresses
from the static analysis with the buckling load factor.
See Buckling Load Factor and Optimization Studies for information on using the BLF
as a limit in an optimization study.
Requirements
1 static analysis
a 3D model
Fatigue Analysis
Use fatigue analysis to establish whether your model is susceptible to fatigue
damage when subjected to cyclic loading. The solver technology integrated with
Mechanica fatigue analysis is provided by nCode, Inc. Fatigue analysis requires a
Fatigue Advisor license from PTC.
Before defining a fatigue analysis, you must first define a static analysis. You also
must assign fatigue properties to the materials of your model in order to get valid
fatigue results.
See Fatigue Analysis Overview for a detailed description of and requirements for
fatigue analysis.
The following tabs appear on the Fatigue Analysis Definition dialog box:
Load History
Previous Analysis
Below the tabs, the following items appear in the Output area:
Plotting Grid
Calculate factor of safety
See Also
Procedure:
456
IndexStructural Analysis
Log Life the estimated number of cycles until your model breaks. Because
of the exponential nature of fatigue, it is useful to express life as a logarithm.
Log Damage the ratio between accumulated fatigue cycles and the total
number of cycles to failure. A value greater than unity indicates failure. A
value of 0.5, for example, represents a loss of 50% in the useful life of the
model. Because of the exponential nature of fatigue, it is useful to express
the damage ratio as a logarithm.
Factor of Safety the permissible factor of safety on the input load. When
the fatigue life calculated for your model is greater than the target design life,
the software carries out a back calculation to determine a permissible factor
of safety on the input load. This represents the extent to which the amplitude
of the load can be increased without compromising the target design life.
If you want the software to calculate the factor of safety, select the check box
in the Output area at the bottom of the Fatigue Analysis Definition dialog
box.
Confidence of Life the ratio between the calculated life and the target
design life. Because of the statistical nature of fatigue, the greater the
confidence the better. Values below unity indicate failure. Values greater than
3.0 usually reflect an adequate confidence of achieving the desired target life.
You can display Confidence Of Life results in a tricolored fringe display to give
an overall view of where the model will break first and where the model will
last for a greater number of cycles. Red signifies a confidence of life from 0
cycles to the number of cycles entered for desired endurance on the analysis
dialog box. Yellow signifies a confidence of life that ranges from the number
of cycles for desired endurance to 3 times that number. The difference
between these numbers is considered the marginal life. Green signifies any
number of cycles over the marginal life.
For background information on fatigue and details about the methodology used in
fatigue analysis, see the online document Understanding Fatigue Analysis.
Fatigue Advisor is optimized so you can obtain a rapid indication of whether a design
is sensitive to fatigue without having to provide the full range of input normally
required to solve this problem. The software accomplishes this by asking for input
that is relatively straightforward to obtain and by internally setting very conservative
defaults for input that you do not directly provide. Advanced fatigue users may want
to alter these defaults to examine less conservative scenarios.
Requirements
457
See Also
References:
About Materials
Fatigue Properties
Thermal Analysis
About Thermal Analysis
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Analyses/Studies command to define a thermal
analysis. A thermal analysis measures the effect of thermal loading on your model.
In Thermal, you can define two types of analyses:
458
IndexThermal Analysis
For guidelines on thermal analysis, see Boundary Condition and Load Sets in Thermal
Analyses.
For both steady and transient thermal analyses, you do not have to select a
load set.
For a transient thermal analysis, you do not have to select a boundary
condition set. If you do not select a boundary condition set, however, you
must select one or more load sets for the analysis to be valid.
For steady thermal analyses, you must select one boundary condition set.
If you delete a boundary condition set or load set after you include it in an
analysis, you are also deleting that set from the analysis.
Even if you create a new set with the same name as the set you deleted, you
must edit the analysis and reselect the set name. Otherwise, you can
invalidate the analysis and any design studies in which you included the
analysis.
The following tabs appear on the Steady Thermal Analysis Definition dialog box:
Convergence
Output
See Also
Procedure:
459
1 constraint set
460
IndexThermal Analysis
For a description of, and requirements for, transient thermal analysis, see Transient
Thermal Analysis Overview.
These items appear on the Transient Thermal Analysis Definition dialog box:
The following tabs appear on the Transient Thermal Analysis Definition dialog
box:
Temperatures
Convergence
Output
See Also
Procedure:
You can direct Mechanica to report full results or temperature loads at specified time
intervals. After you run a transient thermal analysis, with full results selected for
multiple intervals, you can view the results at the various intervals by animating the
fringe plot.
Use transient thermal analysis to find out the following types of information:
the way your model might respond to a time-dependent heat load or bulk
temperature
the thermal stresses that develop as a result of temperature changes in your
model
Requirements
a 3D solid model
isotropic material properties only
no shell or beam elements
no links
1 constraint set or 1 load set
6. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for a
transient thermal analysis.
o Temperatures
o Convergence
o Output
7. Click OK when you complete the dialog box.
The dialog box reappears with the name, type, and description of the new
analysis displayed.
Vibration Analysis
About Vibration Analysis
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Analyses/Studies command in Structure to define
a vibration analysis.
462
IndexVibration Analysis
The following four types of vibration analysis are available to Structure users:
See Also
Reference:
Sum Load Sets Select this check box if you want to combine the
results from all selected load sets.
Load Sets list Select the check boxes next to the load sets you
want to use. Click (x) to select load set functions for each one or use
the default functions.
463
For both Load Functions or Base Excitation, you can use the Include
Frequency Steps From Table check box to ensure that the solution includes
all steps in a table input function, not just those that Mechanica selects
automatically.
The following tabs appear on the dialog boxes for dynamic time, dynamic frequency,
and dynamic random analyses:
Modes
Previous Analysis
Output
See Also
Procedures:
464
IndexVibration Analysis
You can direct Mechanica to report full results at specified time intervals. For
dynamic time analysis with full results, you can animate results of a fringed display
for each time interval of your analysis.
Tip: You can define the equivalent of a base excitation case by placing a gravity load on
the model.
Requirements
1 modal analysis
1 or more load sets
465
For base excitation only, you can direct Mechanica to calculate the modal mass
participation factors to enable you to better assess the accuracy of your results.
Mechanica also calculates all valid measures for dynamic frequency analyses that you
have defined for the model.
You can direct Mechanica to report full results at specified frequency intervals.
Tip: You can define the equivalent of a base excitation case by placing a gravity load on
the model.
Requirements
1 modal analysis
1 or more load sets
IndexVibration Analysis
period of time, the longer the sampling time, the more accurate the curve. Results
are reported in terms of a response PSD.
In a dynamic random analysis, Mechanica calculates these power spectral densities
and RMS values of displacements, velocities, accelerations, and stresses at points in
your model in response to a load of specified PSD. Use a dynamic random analysis if:
For base excitation only, you can direct Mechanica to calculate the modal mass
participation factors to enable you to better assess the accuracy of your results.
Mechanica also calculates all valid measures for dynamic random analyses that you
have defined for the model. You can obtain results for the PSD of a quantity at a
point by defining measures. You can also define measures that yield the RMS value
or apparent frequency of a quantity.
Tip: You can define the equivalent of a base excitation case by placing a
gravity load on the model. The PSD is equal to gravity squared over
frequency (PSD = G^2/F) for this case.
Requirements
1 modal analysis
1 or more load sets
467
The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the
new analysis.
See Also
Procedure:
468
IndexFEM Analysis
5. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the
dynamic shock analysis:
o Previous Analysis
o Response Spectrum
o Output
6. Click OK when you complete the dialog box.
The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the
new analysis.
FEM Analysis
About FEM Analysis
After you define a FEM mode model, you can define an analysis that Mechanica runs
using the FEA solver you select. In defining an analysis, you inform Mechanica which
type of analysis you want and indicate the loads, constraints, materials, idealizations,
and so forth you want considered.
Defining a FEM analysis is an optional step. If you plan to run the FEA solver from
within Mechanica, you need to define an analysis. However, in some cases, you may
be primarily interested in generating a mesh to use with an offline solver instead. For
this application, you do not need to define an analysis.
The point in your design process at which you define an analysis depends on whether
you are working with transient or retained meshes. If you work with transient
meshes, you define a FEM analysis immediately after you define your modeling
entities, and before you mesh the model. Those of you who work with retained
meshes can define a FEM analysis anytime before you start a run, although you
typically want to define loads and constraints first.
You define a FEM analysis by selecting the Analysis>FEM Analysis command. The
dialog box you use to define FEM analyses changes depending on whether you are
specifying a structural or thermal analysis or a modal analysis.
New Define a new analysis. If you select this command, the Analysis
Definition dialog box appears. This dialog box changes depending on
whether you are specifying a structural or thermal analysis or a modal
analysis.
Edit Modify an existing analysis. If you select this command, Mechanica
displays a list of analyses for you to choose from. Once you select an
469
analysis, the Analysis Definition dialog box for that analysis appears. You
use this dialog box to redefine the analysis.
Copy Copy an existing analysis under a new name. If you select this
command, Mechanica displays a list of analyses for you to choose from. Once
you select an analysis, you use the entry box in the message area to enter a
name for the analysis copy. This function proves useful if you plan to run a
number of analyses that have only minor differences.
Delete Delete an existing analysis. If you select this command, Mechanica
displays a list of analyses for you to choose from. Once you select an
analysis, Mechanica deletes it.
Type Specify the type of analysis you want to run, in this case Structural
or Thermal.
Description Optionally, enter a description of the analysis.
Constraint Sets or Boundary Condition Sets Use this area to add and
remove constraint or boundary condition sets you have defined for your
model. You can also use this area to suppress constraint or boundary
condition types within the set. Mechanica lists all sets you have added on a
table in this area. This area includes three buttons:
o Add Add a constraint set to the table. When you click this button,
Mechanica displays a list of all constraint sets in the model. You can
select one or more constraint sets to add.
o Remove Remove a highlighted constraint set from the table.
o Suppress Constr or Suppress BCs Suppress one or more
constraint or boundary condition types in the set.
Load Sets Use this area to add and remove load sets defined for your
model. You can also use this area to suppress load types within the set.
Mechanica lists all load sets you have added on a table in this area. This area
includes three buttons:
o Add Add a load set to the table.
o Remove Remove a highlighted load set from the table.
o Suppress Loads Suppress one or more load types in the load set.
See Also
Procedure:
470
Type Specify the type of analysis you want to run, in this case Modal.
Description Optionally, enter a description of the analysis.
Constraint Sets Use this area to add and remove constraint sets you have
defined for your model. You can also use this area to suppress constraint
types within the set. Mechanica lists all constraint sets you have added on a
table in this area. This area includes these buttons:
o Add Add a constraint set to the table. When you click this button,
Mechanica displays a list of all constraint sets in the model. You can
select one or more constraint sets to add.
o Remove Remove a highlighted constraint set from the table.
o Suppress Constr Suppress one or more constraint types in a set.
Parameters Use this area to define the parameters you want the modal analysis
to observe. This area includes these fields:
Number of Modes Specify the number of modes you want the NASTRAN
or ANSYS solver to generate data for. The default is 4 modes.
First Frequency Guess Provide an estimate of the first mode natural
frequency. NASTRAN is the only solver that uses the information you enter in
this field. The default is 1.000.
Frequency Range Using the From and To fields, specify the lower and
upper ends of the frequency range you want to evaluate.
See Also
Procedure:
to
You specify one or more analyses for which you want Mechanica to calculate
results.
You indicate whether you want Mechanica to calculate those results for the
original model or for variations on the original model.
If you delete a component of a design study, you need to redefine the study.
472
Memory Allocation
Restrictions When Specifying Multiple Working Directories
Managing Memory and Swap Space
Guidelines for Managing Disk Space Resources
Managing Performance
Although these topics pertain to both Structure and Thermal users, Structure runs
are more computationally intensive. Therefore, these strategies are probably more
helpful to Structure users.
See Also
References:
Engine Input Files When you start the run, Mechanica writes engine input
files. These files include the following (study is the name of the design study
you selected): study.mdba copy of the model fileand study.lok.
The study.lok file prevents you from defining result windows before sufficient
data is available. Mechanica deletes the file when the run has progressed
sufficiently to enable you to define result windows. For example, if a run
terminates with an error, you may be able to access partial results if the
study.lok file is gone.
Mechanica places these files in a subdirectory with the same name as the
design study you are running. It places the subdirectory within the directory
for output files that you specify in the Run Settings dialog box.
Output Files The engine also creates output files in which it places the
results of the design study. These files contain the results of the previous run
of the same design study, and may contain useful results even if the run did
not complete successfully. The engine output files are placed in the same
subdirectory as the engine input files for the design study.
Menu bar Perform the following activities using the options on the menu
bar:
o Create new analyses and design studies using the options available on
the File menu.
o Modify existing analyses and design studies using the
Edit>Analysis/Study menu option. You can also copy or delete
analyses or design studies using the options on the Edit menu.
o Set up a run using the Run>Settings menu option or selecting the
Configure Run Settings button on the toolbar to display the Run
Settings dialog box.
o Create a batch file to run more than one analysis or design study at a
time using the Run>Batch menu option.
o Check your model before you start a run by using the Info>Check
Model menu option.
o Start, stop, or restart analyses and design studies using the options on
the Run menu or the buttons on the toolbar.
o Monitor the status and view a detailed summary of a run using the
Info>Status menu option.
o Review the error and warning messages generated during a run using
the Info>Diagnose menu option.
Toolbar Use the toolbar buttons to perform many of the functions
available on the menu bar.
Analyses and Design Studies Table Lists the name and type of analyses
and design studies for the current model. To perform an action on a specific
analysis or design study, highlight it in the list and select the action from the
options on the menus or use the toolbar buttons.
Description Displays a description, if available, of the analysis or design
study you select from the list.
474
See Also
Procedure:
result windows for all quantities on the Result Window Definition dialog
box that are valid for each analysis in the study
measure values listed in the summary file for each analysis
When you define a standard study, you can set parameters for the selected analyses
for a modified version of your model.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Set Parameters
Select this item if you want Mechanica to calculate results for a modified version of
your model. You define this modified version by setting one or more parameters to
different values.
When you select Set Parameters, a list of the parameters you created appears in a
scroll box.
Select one or more parameters from the list. The computation time for the study is
not affected by the number of parameters you select.
For each parameter you select, enter a value from 0 to 100 in the Settings column.
This value is a percentage of the range for the design parameter associated with a
given parameter. Mechanica uses this value to determine the position of the design
parameter.
You can enter one of the following symbolic values instead of a numerical value:
min or minimum
max or maximum
These symbolic values represent the parameter's minimum or maximum value. You
can use lowercase or uppercase letters.
Minimum is always 0 and maximum is always 100.
476
The Design Study Definition dialog box contains the following items:
Analyses Select one or more analyses from this list. Mechanica calculates
results separately for each analysis. You also view results separately for each
analysis.
Increasing the number of intervals increases the computation time for the
design study.
You can enter from 1 to 999 intervals. The default is 10.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Optimization Study
Using Global Sensitivity Studies Effectively
See Also
References:
Standard Study
Global Sensitivity Study
Regeneration Analysis
A regeneration analysis is a predefined analysis that regenerates your Pro/ENGINEER
model. Because regeneration analysis does not import geometry or generate
elements for the part, it is a quick method of running a design study without having
to first set up an analysis.
You can select regeneration analysis for the following design study types:
Local Sensitivity
Global Sensitivity
Optimization
When you select regenerate (Model Regeneration Only) from the list of
analyses, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis and generates a summary and log
report.
For local and global sensitivity studies, you can run a regeneration analysis from the
design study dialog box. The regenerate option appears automatically in the list of
existing analyses for the model.
For optimization studies, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis automatically if any
of the following are true:
If a study is a candidate for regeneration analysis, you can choose either of two
modes in which to run the analysis:
479
See Also
Procedures:
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Parameters, Settings
Use these items to select and enter a value for one or more parameters you created
for the model.
Selecting additional parameters has an insignificant effect on computation time for
the study.
Next, enter a value in the Settings column to determine each parameter's position
at the start of the local sensitivity study.
If you select multiple parameters, Mechanica updates the model to reflect the
settings for all parameters you selected. Mechanica then varies each parameter
independently about the Settings value and calculates a single set of values for your
model's measures for each parameter.
This value is a percentage of the range for the design parameter associated with a
given parameter.
You can enter one of the following symbolic values instead of a numerical value:
481
Regeneration Analysis
A regeneration analysis is a predefined analysis that regenerates your Pro/ENGINEER
model. Because regeneration analysis does not import geometry or generate
elements for the part, it is a quick method of running a design study without having
to first set up an analysis.
You can select regeneration analysis for the following design study types:
Local Sensitivity
Global Sensitivity
Optimization
When you select regenerate (Model Regeneration Only) from the list of
analyses, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis and generates a summary and log
report.
For local and global sensitivity studies, you can run a regeneration analysis from the
design study dialog box. The regenerate option appears automatically in the list of
existing analyses for the model.
For optimization studies, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis automatically if any
of the following are true:
If a study is a candidate for regeneration analysis, you can choose either of two
modes in which to run the analysis:
See Also
Procedures:
482
See Also
Reference:
Mechanica does not calculate the value for measures using the At Each Step
option when you use dynamic time, frequency, or random response analyses
in an optimization study.
You cannot select the At Each Step option for measures for the optimization
goal or limits.
Goal
Limits on Measures
Track
Parameters, Min, Init, Max
Optim Convergence (%)
Max Iterations
Repeat P-Loop Convergence
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Strategy:
Optimizing a Model
Goal
Use this area of the Design Study Definition dialog box to select a measure to
minimize or maximize as the goal of the optimization. For example, you might want
to minimize mass or reaction forces for your model. When defining a goal, you
cannot select a measure unless you have defined an analysis for which that measure
is valid. However, you can select a measure associated with different analyses.
Defining a goal is optional, but if you do not define a goal, you must define limits.
Without a goal, Mechanica searches for the first feasible design that satisfies the
limits you define. If you do not want to define a goal, deselect Goal on the Design
Study Definition dialog box.
484
The Goal area of the dialog box includes a Goal option menu that you use to
indicate the goal and a Select button that enables you to select the measure you
want to use as the basis for the goal.
The Goal option menu provides these selections:
Note that the Minimize and Maximize options take into account the sign of the goal
measure's value, while the two Absolute Value options do not.
Clicking the Select button displays the Measures dialog box. You use the option
menu in the upper right corner of this dialog box to choose the type of measure you
want to selectStructural or Thermal. You cannot select a measure unless you
have defined an analysis for which that measure is valid. You can select measures
associated with multiple analyses.
Once you select a measure and exit the Measures dialog box, Mechanica displays
the name of the measure you select on the Design Study Definition dialog box.
Mechanica also displays an analysis name, except for measures like total_cost and
total_mass that are calculated for all analyses. If there is more than one analysis you
can use the Select button beside the analysis name to indicate the analysis you
want the optimization study to run.
Depending on the analysis type you select, you may have the option of selecting
specific load sets or modes. If you select a modal and prestress modal analysis, you
also have the option of enabling mode tracking.
Limits on Measures
Use this area of the Design Study Definition dialog box to select one or more
measures to act as limits for the optimization, and to define the mathematical limit
you want Mechanica to observe for each measure.
Each limit you define is a mathematical statement including the measure, an
operator, and a value (for example, max_stress_prin < 100). Mechanica seeks to
keep the measures you select within the limits you specify during the study. For
example, you might want to ensure that an aluminum model does not exceed 20,000
psi for a von Mises stress measure. If you set this von Mises stress value as an
optimization limit (max_stress_vm < 20000), Mechanica will move the model toward
20,000 psi in an attempt to find a more efficient model that still meets that limit, as
well as any goal you set.
485
Defining limits is optional, but if you do not define limits, you must define a goal.
Without limits, Mechanica searches for the optimum value of your goal anywhere in
the full range of the parameters you select. When defining a limit, you cannot select
a measure unless you have defined an analysis for which that measure is valid.
However, you can select a measure associated with different analyses.
The Limits on Measures area of the dialog box includes a Create and Delete
button that you use to create and delete the measure limits. Clicking the Create
button displays the Measures dialog box. You use the option menu in the upper
right corner of this dialog box to choose the type of measure you want to select
Structural or Thermal. You cannot select a measure unless you have defined an
analysis for which that measure is valid. You can select measures associated with
multiple analyses.
Once you select a measure and exit the Measures dialog box, Mechanica displays
the name of the measure you select on the Design Study Definition dialog box and
adds fields that enable you to select an operator (<, >, or =) and value for the
measure limit. When entering values, use units consistent with the units you have
used previously with this model. Mechanica reports some rotation measures in
radians. You must enter the limits of rotation measures in radians
(1 radian = 57.29578 ).
Note: You can use the same measure as a limit more than once.
After you select a measure as a limit, Mechanica displays an analysis name below the
limit definition area, except for measures like total_cost and total_mass that are
calculated for all analyses. If there is more than one analysis you can use the Select
button beside the analysis name to indicate the analysis you want the optimization
study to run.
Depending on the analysis type you select, you may have the option of selecting
specific load sets or modes. If you select a modal and prestress modal analysis, you
also have the option of enabling mode tracking.
486
The minimum and maximum values define a range across which you want Mechanica
to vary each selected parameter during the study. The initial value defines the
position of the design parameter at the start of the optimization study.
Enter a value from 0 to 100, representing a percentage of the range for the design
parameter associated with a given parameter.
You can enter one of the following symbolic values instead of a numerical value:
the change in the goal quantity from the previous optimization step relative to
its initial value is within the convergence value
the change in the goal quantity relative to the parameters is within the
convergence value (the slope of a graph of the goal vs. the parameters is
close to 0)
the goal cannot be improved from the current design point without violating
one or more of your specified limits
Mechanica also uses the convergence value to determine if a limit is met. For
example, if the convergence is 1%, Mechanica keeps to the limit value give or take
1%.
If a limit value is near zero, the optimizer uses one-tenth of the specified
convergence value as an absolute limit. For example, if you use the default
convergence value of 1, a zero limit is considered met if its measure has a value of
0.001 (one-tenth of 1 percent) or less.
Mechanica continues the optimization study until it reaches either the convergence
value or the Max Iterations value you enter below.
You can enter any number between 0 and 100 for convergence, but if you enter a
number below 0.1 or above 25, Mechanica asks you to confirm the value you entered
when you click Accept.
487
Max Iterations
Use Max Iterations to specify the maximum number of iterations you want
Mechanica to carry out during the optimization study.
The minimum number of iterations is 1. If you enter a number above 50, Mechanica
asks you to confirm the value you entered when you click Accept. The higher the
number of iterations, the longer it takes for Mechanica to reach the goal.
Mechanica continues the optimization study until it reaches either the Max
Iterations value or the value for Optim Convergence %.
Regeneration Analysis
A regeneration analysis is a predefined analysis that regenerates your Pro/ENGINEER
model. Because regeneration analysis does not import geometry or generate
elements for the part, it is a quick method of running a design study without having
to first set up an analysis.
You can select regeneration analysis for the following design study types:
Local Sensitivity
Global Sensitivity
Optimization
When you select regenerate (Model Regeneration Only) from the list of
analyses, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis and generates a summary and log
report.
For local and global sensitivity studies, you can run a regeneration analysis from the
design study dialog box. The regenerate option appears automatically in the list of
existing analyses for the model.
For optimization studies, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis automatically if any
of the following are true:
If a study is a candidate for regeneration analysis, you can choose either of two
modes in which to run the analysis:
488
Index
See Also
Procedures:
See Also
Procedures:
References:
Optimization Study
Regeneration Analysis
489
Running Solvers
Native Mode Solvers
Running Analyses and Design Studies
Use the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box to run the analyses and design
studies you create. The dialog box displays a list of existing analyses and design
studies.
To run an analysis or design study, select it from the list, and then use the following
options to set up and manage the run:
Run menu
o Start Start running the analysis or design study you select.
o Stop Stop running the analysis or design study you select.
o Restart Restart a previously stopped analysis or design study.
o Batch Create the engine input files necessary to run one or more
analyses or design studies.
o Settings Open the Run Settings dialog box, which enables you to
change certain settings Mechanica uses for the run.
Info menu
o Status Open the Run Status window, which enables you to view
the status of a run. You can select the Detailed Summary check box
at the bottom of the window to view a detailed summary of the run.
o Diagnose Open the Run Diagnostics dialog box, which enables
you to review the warning and error messages.
o Check Model Perform model error checks to determine whether
there are problems that would prevent an analysis or study run from
starting such as missing properties, problems with constraints or
boundary conditions, invalid analysis definitions, and so forth.
See Also
Procedures:
References:
490
IndexRunning Solvers
You may want to check your Mechanica settings to determine how the
software processes your model during analyses and design studies.
You can use Mechanica settings to determine the following:
491
If there are no modeling or meshing errors, Mechanica starts running the analysis.
Menu bar Perform the following activities using the options on the menu
bar:
o Create new analyses and design studies using the options available on
the File menu.
o Modify existing analyses and design studies using the
Edit>Analysis/Study menu option. You can also copy or delete
analyses or design studies using the options on the Edit menu.
o Set up a run using the Run>Settings menu option or selecting the
Configure Run Settings button on the toolbar to display the Run
Settings dialog box.
o Create a batch file to run more than one analysis or design study at a
time using the Run>Batch menu option.
o Check your model before you start a run by using the Info>Check
Model menu option.
o Start, stop, or restart analyses and design studies using the options on
the Run menu or the buttons on the toolbar.
o Monitor the status and view a detailed summary of a run using the
Info>Status menu option.
o Review the error and warning messages generated during a run using
the Info>Diagnose menu option.
Toolbar Use the toolbar buttons to perform many of the functions
available on the menu bar.
Analyses and Design Studies Table Lists the name and type of analyses
and design studies for the current model. To perform an action on a specific
analysis or design study, highlight it in the list and select the action from the
options on the menus or use the toolbar buttons.
Description Displays a description, if available, of the analysis or design
study you select from the list.
492
IndexRunning Solvers
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Setting Up a Run
Select the Run>Settings menu option or the Configure Run Settings button on
the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box to access the Run Settings dialog
box.
Use this dialog box to specify the locations of the output and temporary files, any
elements you want to use from an existing study, the output file format, and the
solver settings. The Run Settings dialog box includes the following options:
Directory for Output Files Select the directory for the output files
generated by the run.
Directory for Temporary Files Select the directory for the temporary
files generated by the run.
Elements Select the source of the elements Mechanica uses during a run.
Output File Format Select an output format for the output file.
493
Solver Settings Use this area to specify settings for the solver:
o Memory Allocation (MB) Select the check box and enter the
appropriate number of megabytes to allocate for the memory.
o Use Iterative Solver Select the check box to use the iterative
solver and enter the maximum number of iterations and at which Ploop pass the iterative solver should take over from the direct solver.
Defaults Select this button to return the settings on the dialog box to the
default values.
494
IndexRunning Solvers
Elements
You can specify the elements you want Mechanica to use when you run an analysis
or design study by selecting one of the following options on the Run Settings dialog
box:
Click the Select button to display the Select Existing Study Directory dialog box
that lists the studies in the current directory. When you return to the Run Settings
dialog box, the directory path of the study you selected appears.
Memory Allocation
Select Memory Allocation to turn on RAM allocation. This setting is turned off by
default. The value you enter sets the amount of RAM reserved for solving equations
and for storing element data created by the iterative solver. The engine dynamically
allocates the rest of the memory it needs for the run.
Before you run design studies, you can set the amount of RAM the engine uses.
Depending on the amount of RAM installed in your machine, you might be able to
improve the engine solver performance by changing this setting.
When you select Memory Allocation, Mechanica displays the default value of 128
megabytes. You can change this default value by setting the config.pro value for
sim_max_memory_uasge to a different number. The value you enter must be
greater than 0.1.
Some tips for setting this value include:
For specific information about specifying solver RAM, see Guidelines for Allocating
RAM for Solver and Element Data.
495
See Also
References:
if you ran out of disk space running a design study using the direct solver
if a run is very time-consuming using the direct solver
if you are running a linear static analysis and your model is a solid
If you are running a global sensitivity or optimization design study, you must
select Repeat Convergence when you create the study.
If you are running a local sensitivity or optimization design study, none of the
analyses in the study can have temperature loads in Structure that refer to
thermal analyses.
If your design study contains any modal analyses, Mechanica does not use
the iterative solver for those analyses.
For some models, the iterative solver may not converge. If a design study does not
converge, the run terminates, and you must re-run the study without the iterative
solver.
When you select this item, the following additional items appear on the dialog box:
Maximum Iterations
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
496
IndexRunning Solvers
Start
Select the Run>Start menu option or select the Start Run button on the Analyses
and Design Studies dialog box to start the run of a selected analysis or design
study.
You can use one of the following methods to start an analysis or design study run:
Run directly from within Mechanica by selecting the Run>Start menu option
or the Start button on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box.
Run from your operating system command prompt. Create the input files for
each study by selecting the Run>Batch menu option on the Analyses and
Design Studies dialog box. You can then run each study in succession by
using the mecbatch command.
If you enter an invalid design study, you will see an error message.
Mechanica asks if you want error detection during the run.
If your study is a candidate for a regeneration analysis but no other analysis
type, the Run Mode dialog box appears, enabling you to:
o run the study within the current Pro/ENGINEER session. The study
runs faster, but you cannot work in Pro/ENGINEER while the study
proceeds.
o run the study as a separate task while you continue working in the
same Pro/ENGINEER session
See Also
Procedure:
Do you want to delete any output files that are already present for a
previously run study? Before deleting these files, make sure that you do not
need the data they contain. If in doubt, you can specify a different directory
for output files for the current run or copy the design study to a new name.
You can specify the directory for the output files using the Run>Settings
menu option.
Do you want to delete any temporary files located in the study.tmp directory
(study is the name of the design study you selected)?
Mechanica automatically deletes temporary files when a run completes
normally. If temporary files are still present, it means that a previous run of
the same design study ended in error, was stopped before it completed, or is
currently running.
497
If the files are left over from a previous run, you can safely delete them. If the
design study is currently running, you should wait until it is finished before
starting a new run.
Error Detection
If you do not request error detection, Mechanica goes to the next step. If you skip
error detection, and your model contains errors, the run could terminate later with a
fatal engine error.
If you request error detection, Mechanica checks the model for errors.
Mechanica carries out the same checks as it does when you select Info>Check
Model on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box, with these additions:
If you select a design study that contains analyses from both Structure and
Thermal, Mechanica checks for both Structure-specific and Thermal-specific
errors, and displays entities specific to both products during error detection.
Mechanica checks for some additional errors that Check Model does not
detect.
Once a run has started, Mechanica checks for errors in the following areas:
o
o
o
o
matching parameters
convergence measures
optimization studies
temperature distribution
boundary edges
boundary faces
Even if you previously used Check Model, you should check your model again to
catch errors introduced since you used Check Model, and to take advantage of the
extra checks performed at this time.
Once Mechanica checks your model for errors, you can resolve them.
498
IndexRunning Solvers
See Also
References:
Restart
To restart an analysis or design study, select the Run>Restart menu option on the
Analyses and Design Studies dialog box.
You can restart a standard design study or one of the following analysis types:
static
prestress static
modal
prestress modal
buckling
steady-state thermal
Note that Restart does not work for analyses that use the single-pass adaptive
method.
See Also
References:
Raise the maximum polynomial order in the event that the analysis did not
converge the first time.
Change the plotting grid, making it larger for more refined results, or smaller
to use less disk space or CPU time. This can have an effect on the
convergence for analyses that converge on measures.
Change the option to calculate stresses, rotations, or heat flux. This is useful,
for example, if you forgot to ask for stress output the first time the analysis
was run.
499
runs the stopped analysis from the last completed p-pass, but does not
continue to the other analyses in a design study
Note: When running the analysis again, the engine overwrites most
existing data for that analysisif you do not want Mechanica to overwrite
these results, you should make a copy of the study before you restart
the analysis.
if the design study contains more than one analysis, displays the names of
the analyses in the design study and prompts you to select the name of the
analysis you want to restart
saves all the information in the summary (.rpt), log (.stt), and measure
convergence plotting (.res) files and appends new data to them
gives you the opportunity to save the current restart run to a batch file so you
can run it later
500
Click Cancel on any of the messages. Mechanica returns to the dialog box.
Click Continue on all of the messages. Mechanica runs the analysis with the
updated values.
IndexRunning Solvers
Batch
Creating a Batch File
Select the Run>Batch menu option on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog
box to create a batch file.
When Mechanica creates a batch file, it generates the engine input files necessary to
run one or more design studies from your operating system. By default, Mechanica
names the batch file mecbatch and places it in the directory from which you started
Mechanica. If you change the name of the batch file or the directory, the new name
or directory becomes the default for the next batch file you create.
Use the Batch menu option to:
See Also
References:
If output files for the design study already exist for the specified design study,
Mechanica asks you if you want to delete them.
Mechanica creates output files during a run. These files contain the results of
the previous design study run, and may contain useful results even if they
were created during a run that did not complete successfully.
Before deleting the files, make sure that you do not need the data that they
contain. If in doubt, you can specify a different directory for output files for the
current run, or copy the design study to a new name.
If you decide to save the existing files and not proceed with the run, Mechanica
does not start the run and returns you to the Analyses and Design Studies
dialog box.
501
If a batch file already exists, Mechanica asks if you want to append this
design study to the existing batch file.
If you do not append the design study to the existing batch file, Mechanica
gives you the opportunity to overwrite the existing mecbatch file with a new
one for the current design study.
Mechanica asks if you want error detection.
If you do not check for errors, or if no errors were detected, Mechanica takes
the following steps:
o
o
Stop
To stop running a selected analysis or design study that you started during the
current Mechanica session, select Run>Stop or the Stop Run button on the
Analyses and Design Studies dialog box.
Note: You cannot use Stop to cancel a run you started in a previous
Mechanica session, or a run you started directly from the operating system by
using the mecbatch or msengine commands.
When you select Stop, Mechanica does the following:
502
If the selected analysis or design study is not running, Mechanica informs you
that it is not.
If Mechanica is currently running the selected analysis or design study started
during the current session, Mechanica gives you the opportunity to confirm
that you want to stop the run.
If you confirm the stop, Mechanica terminates the run and displays a
message that the run has successfully been stopped.
IndexRunning Solvers
Review errors and messages generated when you are running an analysis or
design study by selecting the Info>Diagnose menu option.
Check the status of your run by selecting the Info>Status menu option or
clicking the Display Study Status button.
See the log file for a run by selecting the Detailed Summary check box. The
log file appears in the same window as the status. You can toggle between
the status and the log by selecting and clearing the Detailed Summary
check box.
See Also
References:
Status/Summary
To access a summary report for the analysis or design study you select, select the
Info>Status menu option, or the Display Study Status button on the Analyses
and Design Studies dialog box.
You can use the summary report to:
The summary report includes the following information for the entire analysis or
design study:
a model summary at the beginning, listing the model type and the number of
elements, points, edges, and faces in the model
a running status of convergence information that shows how far the analysis
has gone, plus the quality of the convergence and the estimated error
a memory and disk usage summary at the end, including the total elapsed
time, total CPU time, maximum memory usage, and the amount of disk space
used by various files
503
You can toggle between the status report window and the detailed summary report
by selecting or clearing the Detailed Summary check box at the bottom of the
status report window.
If you access the status report while the run is in progress, Mechanica adds new
information to the dialog box as the engine updates the report file.
You can access this same file through your operating system. The file is called
study/study.rpt, located in the directory for output files (where study is the name of
your design study).
See Also
References:
a model summary at the beginning, listing the model type and the number of
elements, points, edges, and faces in the model
a running status of convergence information that shows how far the analysis
has gone, plus the quality of the convergence and the estimated error
a memory and disk usage summary at the end, including the total elapsed
time, total CPU time, maximum memory usage, and the amount of disk space
used by various files
The contents of the body of the summary report vary by design study and analysis
type:
IndexRunning Solvers
potential singularities. Mechanica does not include this information when all of the
external edges have potential singularities.
For static and contact analyses, Mechanica displays the following information:
Load Set Name The name of the load set to which the RMS stress error
estimate applies.
Stress Error Obtained by sampling the local error estimates along
external edges. The estimate excludes regions with potential singularities
(constraints, reentrant corners). You can use the stress error as an
uncertainty for local stress values.
% Of Max Prin Str Keep in mind that if the maximum principal stress
occurs at a singular region of the model, Mechanica excludes it from the
sampling when evaluating the stress error estimate. In this case, the % Of
Max Prin Str can be artificially low.
To assess the achieved stress accuracy, it is always better to use the absolute
stress error estimate (from the previous column) rather than this relative
value.
For modal, prestress modal, and buckling analyses, Mechanica displays the following
information:
mode
stress error (% of Max Modal Stress)
Error Messages
For all design studies, the summary report also issues two types of error messages:
Results for a run may be available, even if the run ended with an error:
For each p-loop pass in a static, prestress static, modal, prestress modal,
buckling, or contact analysis, Mechanica calculates displacement and stress
results.
For each p-loop pass in a steady-state thermal analysis, Mechanica calculates
temperature and flux results.
For the quick check convergence method, Mechanica displays a warning after
the convergence loop log, informing you that convergence has not been
checked.
505
For the multi-pass adaptive convergence method, following the final p-loop
pass, Mechanica writes a message stating that convergence to the specified
percentage either was or was not attained.
If your run did not converge, you can review a convergence graph for most of the
quantities that Mechanica uses for convergence.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
(sec):
(sec):
(kb):
(kb):
29.27
23.48
3731
253
(sec):
(sec):
29.27
23.48
Elapsed Time the total time from the start of the run through the previous
milestone, or step
CPU Time the time your CPU has been in use from the start of the run
through the previous milestone, or step
Step Elapsed Time the total time for the previous milestone, or step
Step CPU Time the time your CPU was in use during the previous
milestone, or step
If an error causes your run to fail, Mechanica displays a message at the end of the
log. You can find a more specific error message in the summary window. To see the
summary window, select Info>Status on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog
box.
If no log file exists for the design study you select, Mechanica displays a message
that it cannot find the file.
If the machine you are using to run the engine is equipped with parallel processors,
Mechanica automatically uses all CPUs in the system for the run. However, you can
manually specify the number of CPU's devoted to the run if you want to limit the
number of CPUs you use.
506
IndexRunning Solvers
In cases where the ratio of elapsed time to CPU time is close to a value of 1 with one
CPU, your solution times may benefit from running the engine in parallel processing
mode. For other ratios, you may experience performance degradation. For
information on the benefits and limitations of parallel processing as well as a
discussion of how to manually specify the number of CPU's, see Strategy: Running
the Engine with Parallel Processing.
Diagnose
Select the Info>Diagnose option on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box
to open the Run Diagnostics dialog box. Use this dialog box to review the warnings
and errors that Mechanica generates during a run.
The software highlights the geometry associated with each error and places a marker
on each instance of faulty meshing.
See Also
Reference:
Incomplete runs If a run ends in an error, in some cases you might still
be able to display intermediate results if there is one completed p-pass. The
engine calculates stress and displacement values or temperature and flux
values after each p-pass. You can also create p-level fringe plots from
intermediate results.
Depending on the nature of the error, however, the engine may not produce
convergence information for the run.
On UNIX systems, you can also use intermediate results for a run that is still in
progress.
Note: Keep in mind that the engine overwrites existing intermediate
results each time it writes new results.
At certain points during a run, Mechanica locks the results files so it can write data to
them. When this occurs, you cannot access intermediate results.
Study does not converge If the summary report says that your study did
not converge during the run, and you used the multi-pass adaptive
convergence method, you should look at a convergence graph to get more
information.
For more information, see Strategy: Fixing Convergence Problems.
507
You may also be able to circumvent run problems by managing your computer
resources effectively. For technical information on resource and performance
management, see Managing Memory and Swap Space, Guidelines for Managing Disk
Space Resources, and Managing Performance.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Running more than one application at a time This might not be a true
performance problem unless the applications are competing with each other
for access to the CPU, memory, or disk. If performance is lower than you
expect, consider what other applications might have been competing for
resources.
Determine whether the problem is repeatable by rerunning the job when there
is little or no other activity on the machine.
508
IndexRunning Solvers
mounted disk might transfer data at only 1 MB/sec. Use local disks whenever
possible.
Using swap space that is not local to the machine Add local swap
space and avoid using remote swap space.
Using swap space or disk space that is not dedicated to that purpose
Some operating systems allow an area of a disk to be shared dynamically
between temporary files and swap space. Switching from this type of dynamic
sharing to dedicated disk space or dedicated swap space can provide much
better performance. You can also gain performance by placing the swap space
and the scratch files on separate physical disks.
Running a large job with insufficient machine RAM The performance
of many programs suffers when the virtual memory usage exceeds the
available machine RAM. However, Mechanica typically uses only a small part
of memory at a time. Therefore, performance can remain stable even when
the reported total memory usage is 2 or 3 times machine RAM, and
sometimes as much as 5 times machine RAM.
If you follow the guidelines for all run-setting parameters and you still suspect poor
performance, compare the ratio of elapsed time to CPU time and compare the
memory usage for this job with previously run jobs using similar models. Make sure
all runs were made on the same machine under the same work load conditions.
Similar models should have the same element and analysis types and use the same
type of solver.
If the ratios of elapsed time to CPU time and memory usage to machine RAM are
both high, you might need to install more machine RAM in order to improve
performance. In some cases, it helps to decrease the solram allocation or reduce the
size of the model you are analyzing.
For more information on the use of virtual memory, see Managing Memory and Swap
Space.
mecbatch
This command lets you to run a single design study or a series of design studies from
your operating system.
Mechanica runs the studies in the order in which you enter them into the batch file.
If one study ends in an error, Mechanica continues running the remaining studies in
the file.
You can monitor the status of the runs and review the summary file by selecting
Info>Status or the Display study status button on the Analyses and Design
Studies dialog box.
See Also
509
References:
Use mecbatch
Sample mecbatch File
Use mecbatch
The mecbatch command executes from your operating system the run of one or
more design studies you previously included in a batch file.
To use mecbatch, for each study you want to include in a batch file, do the
following:
The msengine command for an individual design study contains information you
entered on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. Each time you select
Run>Batch on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box, Mechanica places an
msengine command for a design study.
msengine
Use this command to run a single design study from your operating system. You can
run a study containing structural analyses, thermal analyses, or both. In order to use
this command, you need engine input files.
When you select Run>Batch on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box,
Mechanica does the following:
510
writes the input files that the Structure engine needs for the run, but does not
actually start the run
places an msengine command in a batch file each time you use the Batch
option
IndexRunning Solvers
Optionally, you can run a single design study by manually entering the same
msengine command that Mechanica placed in the batch file. You do this by entering
the following at the command prompt:
msengine study [options]
where study is a directory with the same name as your design study. This directory
contains the engine input files.
You also use the msengine command to access external optimizers for design
optimization.
After the msengine command executes the run of your design study, you can
monitor the status of the run and review the summary file by selecting Info>Status
on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box.
Use msengine
You can specify one or more of the following options after the input directory name:
511
You will always need a standard study for function evaluation. If the external
optimizer can benefit from gradient information, use a local sensitivity study.
If you are running a function evaluation, enter this command:
msengine extopt <standard study name>
If you are running a gradient evaluation, enter this command:
msengine extopt <local sensitivity study name>
Before executing either of these commands, you need to write a wrapper code that
defines the design problem and calls the external optimizer, which in turn calls
Mechanica.
The wrapper code calls the external optimizer, which generates the mech_extopt.in
file, and is read by Mechanica. When the study finishes running, Mechanica sends
data containing the design objectives and the limits to a mech_extopt.out output
file.
For information on the format of these files, see:
512
IndexRunning Solvers
513
FEM Solvers
About Running FEM Analyses and Generating
Output Decks
Once you generate the mesh for your model successfully, you can perform additional
reviews of your mesh, run a FEM analysis from within Mechanica using one of the
supported FEA solvers, or generate an output deck that you can use outside of
Mechanica. You perform these activities by selecting the Analysis>FEM Solution
command and completing the Run FEM Analysis dialog box.
Before you start a run, you should have created all modeling entities and generated
a mesh for your model. If you plan to run an analysis instead of outputting a deck,
you should also have defined an analysis.
To give you a general idea of the process you might use, here is a description of how
you use the Run FEM Analysis dialog box to prepare for and start a FEM analysis
run or to generate an output deck for one of the FEA solvers:
514
Be aware that this process varies depending on your needs. For some models, you
may feel comfortable omitting the mesh review cycleproceeding immediately with
an online run or deck generation. For other models, you may only want to complete
the mesh review phase.
Solver Select the solver you want to use for your run or for which you
want to generate an output deck. You can also create a neutral file deck for
use with solvers that Mechanica does not directly support.
Analysis Select the type of analysis you want the FEA solver to run or for
which you want Mechanica to create an output deck.
Element Shape Use the buttons in this area to specify the element shape,
which, in turn, determines the order of the finite elements. Higher order
elements can, in some cases, result in better model definition.
Analyses Select one or more analyses that you want to include in the run
or output deck. Mechanica displays a list that includes the names of all
analyses you have created for the analysis category you selected on the
Analysis option menu. For example, if you selected Modal on the Analysis
option menu, Mechanica lists each of the modal analyses you defined for the
model.
When Mechanica outputs the deck or sends the model to one of the solvers, it
refers to the analyses you select to determine which loads, boundary
conditions, and constraints to include in the run.
Coord System Select the coordinate system that the solver should use
when formulating results. You cannot select a coordinate system if you select
Display Only on the Solver option menu. If you do not select a coordinate
system, Mechanica uses the WCS.
Aux Coord System Select any additional coordinate systems you want to
include in the run. You can select one or more individual coordinate systems
from the list by highlighting items on the list or select all coordinate systems.
You cannot select an auxiliary coordinate system if you select Display Only
on the Solver option menu.
NASTRAN Analysis Template Select a template to use for the NASTRAN
analysis. This area only appears if you select MSC/NASTRAN on the Solver
option menu.
run methods area Use the remaining three items on the dialog box to
indicate how you want Mechanica to process the runonline, in the
background, or by outputting a deck for the chosen solver.
After you complete an online or background run, the system stores the model mesh
and the FEA results in a single database file called model.frd (where model is the
name of the model). You use this file when you view results in the postprocessor. To
515
fully understand how Mechanica uses the .frd file and what this file contains, see
Storing and Retrieving FEA Results.
Selecting a Solver
Use the Solver option list on the Run FEM Analysis dialog box to select a solver for
your FEM analysis run or mesh review. The Solver option list includes the following:
Display Only Display a solver mesh for your model independent of solver
type.
ANSYS Perform a structural, modal, or thermal analysis of your model
using the ANSYS solver. You can also use this option if you want to create an
output deck formatted for use with ANSYS.
MSC/NASTRAN Perform a structural or modal analysis of your model
using the NASTRAN solver. You can also use this option if you want to create
an output deck formatted for use with NASTRAN.
If you are using MSC/NASTRAN as a solver, it creates a NASTRAN results file
with the .xdb extension in addition to the model.frd file. Mechanica FEM mode
gives you a direct access to the .xdb file, so you can view NASTRAN results in
the postprocessor. For more information, see Loading NASTRAN Results
Database.
FEM Neutral Output a FEM Neutral File (FNF file) for use with solvers
other than the ones Mechanica supports. If you want to use this option, the
solver you plan to use must be able to correctly read the FNF format.
516
When you select an analysis type, Mechanica adds all existing analyses of that type
to the Analyses area of the dialog box. You can then select one or more individual
analyses from that area. You can also choose not to select an analysis.
Note that, if you select Structural from the Analysis option menu, Mechanica lists
both structural and modal analyses in the Analyses area. If you select a modal
analysis under these circumstances, Mechanica runs a structural analysis that
includes the constraints, frequency specifications, and so forth from the modal
analysis definition.
Element Shape
Use the Element Shape area on the Run FEM Analysis dialog box to determine
the type of elements the solver will use. The Element Shape area includes the
following:
Linear Use linear elements for the run or the output deck. Linear elements
have only corner nodes, straight edges, and planar faces. These elements are
best suited for models with relatively planar and straight-edged topologies,
and can improve solution times for these models. Mechanica outputs linear
elements as follows:
o shell elements Uses 3-node elements for triangular mesh and 4node elements for quadrilateral mesh.
o solid elements Uses 4-node elements.
Parabolic Use parabolic elements for the run or the output deck. When
Mechanica runs with or outputs parabolic elements, it uses the same mesh,
but adds mid-edge nodes to each element. These added nodes aid in the
approximation of model curvature by enabling the mesh elements to flex at
the added nodes. This ability to flex enables the elements to conform to
curved model surfaces better. Mechanica outputs parabolic elements as
follows:
o
If you select Parabolic, you can use the Fix Elements button to adjust the
mesh. This button adjusts mid ratios so that they do not exceed values you
specified on the Element Quality Checks dialog box. The Fix Elements
button is particularly useful if your model has a moderate to high degree of
curvature.
If you want to use the model data outside of Mechanica, you can also output a deck
for the solver of your choice. To indicate which of these methods you want
Mechanica to use, you select one of the three items in the run methods area near the
bottom of the Run FEM Analysis dialog box.
Note: If you plan to run online or in the background, you must supply the
software with the correct path to the FEA executable. You provide the path by
including the appropriate options in your configuration file.
The run methods area of the dialog box includes these items:
Output to File Outputs a deck formatted for the solver you selected. You
can use this deck outside of Mechanica as input for your solver. If you select
this option, you must also enter the filename that you want Mechanica to use
when writing the deck.
You can also output to user-defined solver other than the ones that appear on the Solver
option list, provided the solver supports a FEM Neutral File.
Run On-Line Runs the solver online saving mesh and results in the
model.frd file. This ties up the Pro/ENGINEER session until the processing is
complete. When it is complete, the system automatically enters the
postprocessor and loads the results section from the name.frd file into
memory.
Run in Background Runs the solver in the background and stores the
results in the file model.frd, where model is the name of your model. Your
current session is not interrupted and you can continue working with another
model. After the processing is complete, you can view the analysis results in
the postprocessor.
Your ability to view FEA solver results in the Mechanica postprocessor depends on
the solver you used as well as whether you ran the solver online or output a deck.
See Also
Procedures:
518
When you select the Review command or use one of the Run FEM Analysis dialog
box methods, the REVIEW MESH menu appears. This menu allows you to review
the mesh after it is created or after an analysis is run. The menu includes:
Meshes Review a mesh after you create it. You can review a list of
components by path within the top-level assembly hierarchy, the number of
elements and nodes, and the range of element and node ID numbers. You
can also review the range of element, node, and local mesh entity IDs with
the Mesh ID Offset mesh control applied. This type of review can help you
identify and resolve any numbering conflicts.
Nodes Review nodes by selecting:
o Coord Systems Select this option to display a coordinate system
icon at each selected node that will be oriented for nodal displacement.
If the coordinate system is not Cartesian, then Mechanica calculates
and displays the R, , and Z or
direction instead.
o All Highlight all element nodes and display their node IDs.
o Boundary Highlight only boundary nodes and display their node
IDs. This option only appears if the mesh includes solid elements.
o Node ID Highlight an individual node and display its ID. If you
select this option, you enter the integer ID for the node you are
interested in.
o Select Highlight an individual node and display its ID. In this case,
you use your mouse to select the node on your model.
o List Unused Generate a list of unused node IDs. You use this
option to help detect node ID conflicts in hierarchical meshes. You can
correct these conflicts by applying mesh ID offset mesh controls to the
conflicting nodes.
Elements Review elements by selecting:
o Coord Systems Display the coordinate system for the elements
that you review.
o Shell Normals Display the shell normals for the elements that you
review. This check box only appears if the mesh includes shell
elements.
o All Highlight all elements and display their element IDs.
o Boundary Highlight only boundary elements and display their
element IDs. This option only appears if the mesh includes solid
elements.
o Element ID Highlight an individual element and display its ID as
well as its node IDs. If you select this option, you enter the integer ID
for the element you are interested in.
o Select Highlight an individual element and display its ID as well as
its node IDs. In this case, you use your mouse to select the element
on your model.
o List Unused Generate a list of unused element IDs. You use this
option to help detect element ID conflicts in hierarchical meshes. You
can correct these conflicts by applying mesh ID offset mesh controls to
the conflicting elements.
Connectivity Highlight edges that are only included in one shell surface.
You can also use this command to highlight a free node on a one-dimensional
element such as a beam or spring.
If you review the mesh at run time, Mechanica adds these options to the REVIEW
MESH menu:
519
the model's mesh elements and nodes output in a format compatible with the
particular FEA program to be used
all material data assigned to the model
all properties assigned to the model
all analyses applied to the model
For the NASTRAN solver, Mechanica outputs component meshes into sections
of a single file. Each section groups together all items that belong to a
particular component, such as coordinate systems, materials, properties,
nodes, elements, and so on.
For other solvers, Mechanica lists separately all assembly nodes, all
coordinate systems, all materials, and so forth. The solver then restores the
hierarchy according to information each list provides.
520
input_file input file in the FEM Neutral format with the extension .fnf
output_file solution results file in the FEM Neutral format with the
extension .fnf
For example:
/abc/def/fea_solver model.fnf model_res.fnf
If it finds a solution, the user solver should return a zero value upon termination.
521
Reviewing Results
Results for Native Mode
About Results
Use the Analysis>Results command to display the results of an analysis or design
study. You view results by defining and displaying one or more result windows. For
additional information on FEM mode results, see About FEM Results.
The type of model and the items you select in your analysis or design study
determine the quantities, locations, and displays that are available in results.
Mechanica displays your results using the display format, combined with the quantity
and location you select, to define your result window. Only certain combinations of
quantities and displays are valid depending on the type of model, design study, or
analysis you select for the result window. In addition, a selection in one category
might not be valid with some items in the other categories.
You can access results for both structural and thermal analyses after you select
Analysis>Results. For information you should know about this command, see
Before You Use the Results Command.
If you have a model open when you select the Analysis>Results command,
Mechanica handles this model differently depending on the mode you are using. This
affects the state of your working model while you are looking at results.
When you select the Analysis>Results command, Mechanica opens the Results
user interface. Use this user interface to view, evaluate, and generate reports on
analyses and design studies. You use the Result Window Definition dialog box to
define and display your results.
Once you have found a combination of results that work well for your application,
you can save these results as a template using the File>Save As Template
command. After you have saved a template, you can recall that template using the
Insert>Results Window from Template command. This command opens the
Insert Result Windows from Template dialog box.
You can also see results information in the summary file available through the
Analysis>Mechanica Analyses/Studies command. This information gives you an
idea of how well the model withstands the effects of the loads and constraints you
apply in your design studies.
Even if a design study run is still in progress or ended in error, you might still be able
to display results. You can also get information about convergence problems from
looking at results. For more information, see Troubleshoot Run Problems.
522
IndexReviewing Results
The Results user interface incorporates a menu bar, toolbar, a set of basic functions,
and a built-in workflow designed to facilitate results viewing. This workflow enables
you to set up a variety of result views, evaluate individual results, and control scaling
and visualization of multiple results so that you can easily compare one quantity of
interest with another.
Here is a step-by-step overview of what we suggest as your workflow:
1. Viewing results You define result windows, display and hide them, and
control how they appear on-screen and in your reports.
2. Evaluating results You study the result windows you defined, probe
specific areas of your model, and compare your findings for one model,
design study, result quantity, or set of conditions with your findings for
another.
3. Saving result windows You save the set of result windows you created
so that you can review or re-use them later.
4. Generating reports You prepare printed and online reports for evaluation
and presentation.
While this sequence represents the most linear approach to reviewing results, you
may find that you move back and forth through these steps as you refine the result
views you have set up.
Tip: You can perform many operations in the Results user interface against
both single and multiple windows. For example, you can change backgrounds
for multiple windows, rotate multiple result windows, and so forth.
To select a single result window, move your cursor to the window and leftclick it. Mechanica highlights the window border in yellow. To select multiple
result windows, press the SHIFT key and left-click each of the windows you
want. If you select multiple result windows, Mechanica deactivates certain
commands, such as Edit>Result Window and Export>VRML.
523
File menu Provides commands that control such basic functions of the
Results user interface as opening result sets, closing the interface, saving
result definitions, and generating reports.
Edit menu Provides commands that modify result definitions, legends,
cutting and capping planes, and annotations.
View menu Provides commands that control such aspects of results
viewing as model position, shading, and overlays. You can also use this menu
to display or hide result windows, start and stop animations, change or save
the orientation of your model, and control the visual characteristics of result
windows.
Insert menu Provides commands that define result windows, cutting
planes, capping planes, and annotations.
Info menu Provides commands that probe your model for specific items of
interest such as quantity maximums and minimums, exact quantities at
model locations you select, and so forth. Also provides commands to display
node IDs, element IDs, and node result values in FEM mode.
Format menu Provides commands that format result window values, color
spectrums, and scales.
Utilities menu Provides commands that refine your results and let you
perform result comparisons against the same scale.
Window menu Provides commands that let you manipulate your result
windows within the Results user interface.
The Results user interface also includes a toolbar whose buttons give you fast access
to the most frequently used commands on the menus just discussed.
Action/Name
Open Closes the current set of result definitions and opens a new one.
Save Saves the result windows currently available in the Results user
interface.
Save As Saves the result windows currently available in the Results
user interface to a .rwd file you specify.
Print Prints all currently displayed result windows.
Insert Lets you create a result window definition.
524
IndexReviewing Results
525
Each of these commands clears the current contents of the Results user interface.
When you select any of these commands, Mechanica prompts you to save any result
windows currently defined for the results session. If you want to save the result
windows, reply Yes. Mechanica displays the Save Results Window dialog box. Use
this dialog box to create a new .rwd file or save the result windows to an existing
.rwd file.
526
Display and hide result windows You display result windows through
the View>Display command or by clicking the Display button on the
toolbar. When you select this command, the Display Result Window dialog
box appears, enabling you to select and deselect various result windows to
display.
IndexReviewing Results
You hide windows by clicking the Hide button. You can hide a single window
or multiple windows. You will find this particularly handy as you prepare to
generate reports.
You can also make a selected result window occupy the entire Result user
interface work area through the Windows>Full Screen command. This
command expands the current window to occupy the work area.
When you set up your result windows as you want, you can begin to evaluate and
compare results. Once you have studied your result windows, you may also want to
alter, copy, or delete some of them.
See Also
Procedures:
Name and title area Enter a name and title for the result window. The
name you enter appears in the list on the Display Result Window dialog
box. The title appears at the bottom center of the result window. You can
change the name and title at any time.
Study Selection Select the design study or analysis that the software will
use to generate the result display. You can also use this area to select modes,
527
load sets, time steps, and load steps if these are part of the analysis or design
study you select.
Display Type Select the type of display for your result window.
Quantity tab Select the quantity for your result window. After you select a
quantity from the first option menu, you may see additional option menus or
buttons you can use to complete selecting a quantity.
Display Options tab Select various options for displaying your results.
The available options depend on the display type you choose.
Display Location tab Select specific locations on your model to display in
the results window.
If you are still working with the Result Window Definition dialog box, click
the OK And Show button.
If you have finished defining results and are working in the Results user
interface, click the Display button on the toolbar and select result windows
from the Display Result Window dialog box. As an alternative, you can use
View>Display.
See Also
Procedure:
528
Design Study Select the design study for which you want to display the
results. The design study name appears in the display-only text box to the
right of the button. In FEM mode, if you are loading results directly from a
NASTRAN .xdb file, use the button to open the Load NASTRAN XDB dialog
box. On this dialog box, you need to select the .xdb file from which you want
the software to read the results.
IndexReviewing Results
Analysis Select an analysis that is part of the design study you select.
Step/Combination Select a subset of design study results.
Step/Combination Selection
The step/combination selection table displays different columns depending on the
design study you select. You can select one or more subsets to include in the result
display. If there is only one subset for a design study, the subset is selected by
default and you cannot clear it.
The possible subsets in the step/combination selection table are:
You can query linearized stresses for your model by selecting Model as the
display type, Stress as the quantity, and Linearized as the component.
When the result window displays, select Linearized Stress Query from the
Info menu.
Quantity Tab
Use the Quantity tab on the Result Window Definition dialog box to select a
quantity for your result window display. The choices that appear on the Quantity tab
depend on the design study and display type you select. The items that are available
change immediately if you change the design study or display type.
These are the items that can appear on the Quantity tab:
Quantity Select the quantity you want to display in the result window. The
menu displays only the quantities that are valid for the design study and
display type you choose. The quantity you select determines which of the
remaining items appears on the Quantity tab.
Secondary Quantity Option Menu Select a secondary quantity to display
in the result window. This item appears if you select Fatigue, Reaction,
Shell Resultant, or Beam Resultant from the Quantity option menu.
Component Select the component you want to display in the result
window. The menu displays only components that are valid for the quantity
you select from the Quantity menu, and only appears for certain quantities.
Relative To Select the reference for a directional component. This item
appears only if you select a directional component.
Graph Location Select the type of location you want to use for your graph
results display. This area appears only if you select a display type of Graph.
The following additional items are available depending on the quantity you select and
whether beams or shells are present in the model. These items do not appear in FEM
mode.
In addition to using the Quantity tab to define your basic result quantity, you use
the Display Options tab and Display Location tab to further refine the result
window display.
See Also
Procedure:
530
IndexReviewing Results
If you select a display type and then select a design study or quantity that is not
compatible with that display type, Mechanica removes the display type from the
option menu and displays only the valid display types for that design study and
quantity combination.
Display Location Select the type of location you want to display in your
result window. The options available on this menu vary depending on the
design study, display type, and quantity you select. These items can appear
on the menu:
o All Display all locations in the result window. This is the default
value.
o Beams Display beams in the result window.
o Curves Display curves in the result window.
o Surfaces Display surfaces in the result window.
o Volumes Display volumes in the result window.
o Components/Layers Display specific components or layers in the
result window.
Select the Use All check box to display all Beams, all Curves, all Surfaces, all Volumes, or
all Components/Layers in the result display window.
Location Selector Arrow Use the selector arrow to select the specific
entity on your model that you want to display in the results window. You can
select more than one entity. If you accept the default All, the selector arrow
is unavailable.
531
(Result Window)
(Select All).
(Deselect All).
IndexReviewing Results
See Also
Procedure:
Text Change the font, the font size, and the font color.
Note Location Select the location where you want the annotation text to
appear. The annotation appears to the right of the point you select.
Leader Create one or more leaders for the annotation. You select a point
on your model and Mechanica draws the leader line from the annotation to
that point. Use the arrow button to put an arrow at the end of the line. If you
reorient the model, the end of the leader line that is on the model moves with
the model.
Display Leader Arrow Display an arrow at the end of the leader.
Mouse Sketch Create a circle, square, or multiple line shape.
Style Open the Note Style dialog box.
Use the Preview button at any time to apply any changes you have made without
closing the dialog box.
See Also
Procedures:
533
Evaluating Results
The way you evaluate results depends on the type of result window you are working
with. For example, if you are examining fringe plots, you are likely to be interested in
the location of the quantity maximum, the value of the quantity at specific locations,
how one quantity compares with another, and so forth. If you are looking at
animations, you are likely to be interested in how the model deforms, the pattern of
deformation at different steps, how behavior in one mode compares with behavior in
another, and so forth.
Here is an overview of methods and tools you can use to evaluate the different types
of Mechanica results:
Fringe, contour, and vector plots You perform three basic activities
depending on how deeply you need to examine the model for the result
quantity:
o Adjust the legend, perform comparisons with other result windows,
and, if necessary, shade or unshade your model.
o Probe your model for specific information like maximum and minimum
locations or how the interior of your model responded during analysis.
o In FEM mode, display information about the element ID's, node ID's,
and values of the result quantity at each node.
Graphs You perform two basic activities depending on how much detail
you need on the quantity:
o Adjust the graph, perform comparisons with other result windows.
o Probe the graph to obtain more exact values for specific segments of
the graph or points on the graph.
Animations You can start, stop, and control stepping and speed for the
animation. You can also perform comparisons with the original model shape
as well as with other animations.
Once you have evaluated your results, you should save the result definitions for later
use. At this point, you can also generate reports on your results.
After you have studied your result windows, you may also find that you want to
alter, copy, or delete some of them.
534
File>Open Use to start a new result session with the result windows active
and displayed. This command is convenient if you have just started your
results session or if you are finished looking at any result windows you may
have created in the current session.
IndexReviewing Results
Before executing this command, Mechanica checks to see if any you have
changed any of the result windows in the current session. If so, the software
asks you whether you want to save the result windows. If you respond Yes,
the software executes a Save command before starting the new result
session.
When you select either of these commands, a dialog box appears. Select the name of
the file you want to load or enter it without the .rwd extension Mechanica gave the
file.
See Also
Procedure:
535
Saving Results
After you create one or more result windows, you can save these windows to a file
for later use. Mechanica saves result windows in .rwd files. Saving result windows
makes it easier to restore and add to your work. You can also use result windows as
templates for developing result windows for multiple models.
Use one of these commands on the File menu to save your result definitions:
Save Use to save the current set of result definitions and associated views
in a single .rwd file. If you defined the set of result windows in the current
session and this is the first time you have saved them, Mechanica saves the
windows to a file named Untitled.rwd. If the result windows displayed were
saved to a named .rwd file in the past, Mechanica saves them to the named
file.
Save As Use to save the current set of result definitions and associated
views as a named .rwd file. When you click Save As, Mechanica displays the
Save Result Windows dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose a directory
and name the file. Do not include the .rwd extension in the file name you
enterMechanica appends this automatically.
When you use Save As to create a named .rwd file, the name of the .rwd file
appears in the Results user interface title bar whenever you load the named
.rwd file using Insert>Results Window From File as the first activity in your
results session.
Save As Template Use to save the current result window definition and
some of the result window attributes as a named template as a .rwt file.
When you click Save As Template, Mechanica displays the Save Results
Template dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose a directory and name the
file. Do not include the .rwt extension in the file name you enterMechanica
appends this automatically.
You can optionally store the legend values, model orientation, annotations, and
deformed scale for the result window as part of the template. Once you create
a result window definition as a template, you can create other result windows
from the template by selecting the Insert>Results Window From Template
command.
Regardless of which approach you use, be aware that Mechanica includes paths for
the study directories referenced by the result windows in the .rwd file. Mechanica
uses an absolute path when it writes this information to the .rwd file, but you can
instruct Mechanica to use a relative path instead through the sim_pp_path_absolute
config.pro option.
You can retrieve a set of saved windows using one of the load commands.
536
IndexReviewing Results
See Also
Procedures:
Generating Reports
Once you define and display result windows, you can generate reports that capture
the vital points of your analyses and design studies. Mechanica provides you with the
ability to print reports in a wide variety of print formats, to output reports as HTML,
and to generate VRML reports. For graphs, you can generate specialized graph
reports so you can study the graph sampling points in depth.
Use these commands located on the File menu to generate reports:
When preparing to generate reports, you may want to pay particular attention to the
aesthetics of the result windows you are printing or exporting. You should also
consider formatting the result windows to emphasize the aspects of the result you
want to focus on when you share the information with others.
For example, blended or dark background colors may make it difficult to read some
of the information, depending on the quality of your printer. You may want to
eliminate excess text from the result window by using Format>Result Window and
turning off labels. You may want to work with the Format Legend dialog box to
ensure that you are using the best color scale to reflect what takes place in a fringe
plot. You can highlight parts of your results and add information using annotations.
537
To perform these activities, you should become familiar with how to use the
postprocessor. To learn about entering and working with the postprocessor, see
Using the Postprocessor.
538
Automatically After you have run a FEM solver online, the system opens
the postprocessor and loads an .frd file with FEM mesh and results, into
memory.
By using the File>Open FEM Results command Mechanica stores FEM
meshes and analysis results in .frd files. You can choose to load the stored
.frd file. Be aware that the software can only retrieve the file that contains
both mesh and results and is compatible with the current model.
By selecting the Analysis>Results command This action enables you
to load the NASTRAN results database, which gives you an access to more
types of available results. You can use the Analysis>Results command only
if you have performed an analysis of the FEM model on the MSC/NASTRAN
solver and have an .xdb NASTRAN file available.
IndexReviewing Results
Once you enter the postprocessor, Mechanica displays the Results user interface that
overlays the Pro/ENGINEER work area and menu bar. You can use the Results user
interface to view graphical representations of analysis results by creating and
manipulating result windows.
Another useful tool is the RESULTS menu that appears as an extension of the menu
manager to the right of the work area. The menu does not open if you select the
Analysis>Results command and are reading results from the NASTRAN .xdb file.
On the RESULTS menu you can:
You can view more types of available results, such as beam stresses, beam
and shell resultants, shear and moment for beams, beam stress recovery
points, and so forth.
You can view results as either averaged or unaveraged values when you
display your results as a fringe plot. There are, however, logical limitations on
averaging.
As a prerequisite for loading NASTRAN results, you need to perform analyses for
your FEM model using the MSC/NASTRAN solver. When you run the solver, it creates
a NASTRAN results file with an .xdb extension and stores it in the current directory.
When you click the Results command, it opens the Results user interface and
displays a file selection dialog box, which you use to specify the .xdb file you want to
load.
Once you specify the NASTRAN .xdb file, the postprocessor can read information
about nodes, elements, and their connectivity, as well as results from the file. Also,
the postprocessor looks for a FEM mesh and results .frd file associated with the
current model in session and selected .xdb file. The postprocessor uses the .frd file
to read mesh data only.
If you have solved your model offline, the .frd file may not be present in your current
directory, but you can still view results from the .xdb file. Depending on whether the
.frd file is present or not, Mechanica takes one of these actions:
If the .frd file is present, Mechanica reads the mesh data from the .frd file into
memory and displays a mesh in the Pro/ENGINEER window. You can have
539
access to meshed geometric entities and select them as needed. Also, you
can view results by layers and display saved views.
If the .frd file is not present, Mechanica continues to display the current
model and you have no access to meshed geometry. Graph results, layers, or
saved views become unavailable.
When defining a result window, you can select from a variety of display types,
quantities, and locations. The exact options and combinations available depend on
the type of model and the analysis type you select when you define your analysis.
Also, you can use only certain combinations of quantities and displays. For more
information on defining your results window, see Result Window Definition Dialog
Box.
See Also
Procedure:
Result Windows
Working with the Results User Interface
When evaluating analysis and design study results, you work within the Results user
interface. This user interface lets you view, evaluate, and manage results for your
analyses and design studies. The Results user interface is independent of the
Mechanica workspace. The way you open the Results user interface depends on the
mode in which you are operating Mechanica.
540
IndexReviewing Results
The Results user interface incorporates a menu bar, toolbar, a set of basic functions,
and a built-in workflow designed to facilitate results viewing. This workflow enables
you to set up a variety of result views, evaluate individual results, and control scaling
and visualization of multiple results so that you can easily compare one quantity of
interest with another.
Here is a step-by-step overview of what we suggest as your workflow:
1. Viewing results You define result windows, display and hide them, and
control how they appear on-screen and in your reports.
2. Evaluating results You study the result windows you defined, probe
specific areas of your model, and compare your findings for one model,
design study, result quantity, or set of conditions with your findings for
another.
3. Saving result windows You save the set of result windows you created
so that you can review or re-use them later.
4. Generating reports You prepare printed and online reports for evaluation
and presentation.
While this sequence represents the most linear approach to reviewing results, you
may find that you move back and forth through these steps as you refine the result
views you have set up.
Tip: You can perform many operations in the Results user interface against both single
and multiple windows. For example, you can change backgrounds for multiple windows,
rotate multiple result windows, and so forth.
To select a single result window, move your cursor to the window and left-click it.
Mechanica highlights the window border in yellow. To select multiple result windows, press
the SHIFT key and left-click each of the windows you want. If you select multiple result
windows, Mechanica deactivates certain commands, such as Edit>Result Window and
Export>VRML.
File menu Provides commands that control such basic functions of the
Results user interface as opening result sets, closing the interface, saving
result definitions, and generating reports.
541
The Results user interface also includes a toolbar whose buttons give you fast access
to the most frequently used commands on the menus just discussed.
Action/Name
Open Closes the current set of result definitions and opens a new one.
Save Saves the result windows currently available in the Results user
interface.
Save As Saves the result windows currently available in the Results
user interface to a .rwd file you specify.
Print Prints all currently displayed result windows.
Insert Lets you create a result window definition.
Edit Lets you edit a result window definition.
Copy Lets you copy result window definitions.
Delete Deletes the selected result windows.
Display Lets you pick which result windows you want to display.
542
IndexReviewing Results
Each of these commands clears the current contents of the Results user interface.
When you select any of these commands, Mechanica prompts you to save any result
windows currently defined for the results session. If you want to save the result
windows, reply Yes. Mechanica displays the Save Results Window dialog box. Use
this dialog box to create a new .rwd file or save the result windows to an existing
.rwd file.
543
Viewing Results
To view results, you perform three activitiesdefine result windows, display result
windows, and control the general appearance of the result windows you define. The
Results user interface features easy, direct methods of defining result windows as
well as a variety of view controls. Here is an overview of the method you use to view
results:
Display and hide result windows You display result windows through
the View>Display command or by clicking the Display button on the
toolbar. When you select this command, the Display Result Window dialog
box appears, enabling you to select and deselect various result windows to
display.
You hide windows by clicking the Hide button. You can hide a single window
or multiple windows. You will find this particularly handy as you prepare to
generate reports.
You can also make a selected result window occupy the entire Result user
interface work area through the Windows>Full Screen command. This
command expands the current window to occupy the work area.
When you set up your result windows as you want, you can begin to evaluate and
compare results. Once you have studied your result windows, you may also want to
alter, copy, or delete some of them.
See Also
Procedures:
544
IndexReviewing Results
Defining Results
Result Window Definition Dialog Box
Use the Result Window Definition dialog box to define the contents of a result
window.
Valid quantity and display combinations depend on whether you are working in
native mode or FEM mode as well as on the type of model, design study, and
analyses you select for the result window. In addition, a selection in one category
may not be valid with some items in the other categories.
When you select Analysis>Results, the Result Window Definition dialog box
appears. In FEM mode, you can use the Results command when you want to load
results directly from a NASTRAN .xdb file. To load Mechanica FEM mesh and results
file, select File>Open FEM Results.
The Result Window Definition dialog box consists of these main areas:
Name and title area Enter a name and title for the result window. The
name you enter appears in the list on the Display Result Window dialog
box. The title appears at the bottom center of the result window. You can
change the name and title at any time.
Study Selection Select the design study or analysis that the software will
use to generate the result display. You can also use this area to select modes,
load sets, time steps, and load steps if these are part of the analysis or design
study you select.
Display Type Select the type of display for your result window.
Quantity tab Select the quantity for your result window. After you select a
quantity from the first option menu, you may see additional option menus or
buttons you can use to complete selecting a quantity.
Display Options tab Select various options for displaying your results.
The available options depend on the display type you choose.
Display Location tab Select specific locations on your model to display in
the results window.
545
If you are still working with the Result Window Definition dialog box, click
the OK And Show button.
If you have finished defining results and are working in the Results user
interface, click the Display button on the toolbar and select result windows
from the Display Result Window dialog box. As an alternative, you can use
View>Display.
See Also
Procedure:
Design Study Select the design study for which you want to display the
results. The design study name appears in the display-only text box to the
right of the button. In FEM mode, if you are loading results directly from a
NASTRAN .xdb file, use the button to open the Load NASTRAN XDB dialog
box. On this dialog box, you need to select the .xdb file from which you want
the software to read the results.
Analysis Select an analysis that is part of the design study you select.
Step/Combination Select a subset of design study results.
Step/Combination Selection
The step/combination selection table displays different columns depending on the
design study you select. You can select one or more subsets to include in the result
display. If there is only one subset for a design study, the subset is selected by
default and you cannot clear it.
The possible subsets in the step/combination selection table are:
546
IndexReviewing Results
Quantity Tab
Use the Quantity tab on the Result Window Definition dialog box to select a
quantity for your result window display. The choices that appear on the Quantity tab
depend on the design study and display type you select. The items that are available
change immediately if you change the design study or display type.
These are the items that can appear on the Quantity tab:
Quantity Select the quantity you want to display in the result window. The
menu displays only the quantities that are valid for the design study and
display type you choose. The quantity you select determines which of the
remaining items appears on the Quantity tab.
Secondary Quantity Option Menu Select a secondary quantity to display
in the result window. This item appears if you select Fatigue, Reaction,
Shell Resultant, or Beam Resultant from the Quantity option menu.
547
The following additional items are available depending on the quantity you select and
whether beams or shells are present in the model. These items do not appear in FEM
mode.
In addition to using the Quantity tab to define your basic result quantity, you use
the Display Options tab and Display Location tab to further refine the result
window display.
See Also
Procedure:
If you select a display type and then select a design study or quantity that is not
compatible with that display type, Mechanica removes the display type from the
option menu and displays only the valid display types for that design study and
quantity combination.
548
IndexReviewing Results
Display Location Select the type of location you want to display in your
result window. The options available on this menu vary depending on the
design study, display type, and quantity you select. These items can appear
on the menu:
o All Display all locations in the result window. This is the default
value.
o Beams Display beams in the result window.
o Curves Display curves in the result window.
o Surfaces Display surfaces in the result window.
o Volumes Display volumes in the result window.
o Components/Layers Display specific components or layers in the
result window.
Select the Use All check box to display all Beams, all Curves, all Surfaces, all Volumes, or
all Components/Layers in the result display window.
Location Selector Arrow Use the selector arrow to select the specific
entity on your model that you want to display in the results window. You can
select more than one entity. If you accept the default All, the selector arrow
is unavailable.
(Result Window)
o Model
8. Select a quantity from the Quantity option menu on the Quantity tab.
9. Select the Display Options tab and choose among the display options to
determine the appearance and behavior of your model in the result window.
10. Select the Display Location tab and choose a location from the option menu.
If you want to use all entities of a certain location type, select the Use All
check box. To select a single entity, click the selector arrow.
11. To display the result window, click OK And Show. To close the dialog box
without displaying the result window, click OK.
See Also
Procedure:
550
(Select All).
(Deselect All).
IndexReviewing Results
Text Change the font, the font size, and the font color.
Note Location Select the location where you want the annotation text to
appear. The annotation appears to the right of the point you select.
Leader Create one or more leaders for the annotation. You select a point
on your model and Mechanica draws the leader line from the annotation to
that point. Use the arrow button to put an arrow at the end of the line. If you
reorient the model, the end of the leader line that is on the model moves with
the model.
Display Leader Arrow Display an arrow at the end of the leader.
Mouse Sketch Create a circle, square, or multiple line shape.
Style Open the Note Style dialog box.
Use the Preview button at any time to apply any changes you have made without
closing the dialog box.
See Also
Procedures:
Evaluating Results
The way you evaluate results depends on the type of result window you are working
with. For example, if you are examining fringe plots, you are likely to be interested in
the location of the quantity maximum, the value of the quantity at specific locations,
how one quantity compares with another, and so forth. If you are looking at
animations, you are likely to be interested in how the model deforms, the pattern of
deformation at different steps, how behavior in one mode compares with behavior in
another, and so forth.
551
Here is an overview of methods and tools you can use to evaluate the different types
of Mechanica results:
Fringe, contour, and vector plots You perform three basic activities
depending on how deeply you need to examine the model for the result
quantity:
o Adjust the legend, perform comparisons with other result windows,
and, if necessary, shade or unshade your model.
o Probe your model for specific information like maximum and minimum
locations or how the interior of your model responded during analysis.
o In FEM mode, display information about the element ID's, node ID's,
and values of the result quantity at each node.
Graphs You perform two basic activities depending on how much detail
you need on the quantity:
o Adjust the graph, perform comparisons with other result windows.
o Probe the graph to obtain more exact values for specific segments of
the graph or points on the graph.
Animations You can start, stop, and control stepping and speed for the
animation. You can also perform comparisons with the original model shape
as well as with other animations.
Once you have evaluated your results, you should save the result definitions for later
use. At this point, you can also generate reports on your results.
After you have studied your result windows, you may also find that you want to
alter, copy, or delete some of them.
Saving Results
After you create one or more result windows, you can save these windows to a file
for later use. Mechanica saves result windows in .rwd files. Saving result windows
makes it easier to restore and add to your work. You can also use result windows as
templates for developing result windows for multiple models.
Use one of these commands on the File menu to save your result definitions:
Save Use to save the current set of result definitions and associated views
in a single .rwd file. If you defined the set of result windows in the current
session and this is the first time you have saved them, Mechanica saves the
windows to a file named Untitled.rwd. If the result windows displayed were
saved to a named .rwd file in the past, Mechanica saves them to the named
file.
Save As Use to save the current set of result definitions and associated
views as a named .rwd file. When you click Save As, Mechanica displays the
Save Result Windows dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose a directory
and name the file. Do not include the .rwd extension in the file name you
enterMechanica appends this automatically.
When you use Save As to create a named .rwd file, the name of the .rwd file
appears in the Results user interface title bar whenever you load the named
552
IndexReviewing Results
.rwd file using Insert>Results Window From File as the first activity in your
results session.
Save As Template Use to save the current result window definition and
some of the result window attributes as a named template as a .rwt file.
When you click Save As Template, Mechanica displays the Save Results
Template dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose a directory and name the
file. Do not include the .rwt extension in the file name you enterMechanica
appends this automatically.
You can optionally store the legend values, model orientation, annotations, and
deformed scale for the result window as part of the template. Once you create
a result window definition as a template, you can create other result windows
from the template by selecting the Insert>Results Window From Template
command.
Regardless of which approach you use, be aware that Mechanica includes paths for
the study directories referenced by the result windows in the .rwd file. Mechanica
uses an absolute path when it writes this information to the .rwd file, but you can
instruct Mechanica to use a relative path instead through the sim_pp_path_absolute
config.pro option.
You can retrieve a set of saved windows using one of the load commands.
See Also
Procedures:
Generating Reports
Once you define and display result windows, you can generate reports that capture
the vital points of your analyses and design studies. Mechanica provides you with the
ability to print reports in a wide variety of print formats, to output reports as HTML,
and to generate VRML reports. For graphs, you can generate specialized graph
reports so you can study the graph sampling points in depth.
Use these commands located on the File menu to generate reports:
o
o
o
When preparing to generate reports, you may want to pay particular attention to the
aesthetics of the result windows you are printing or exporting. You should also
consider formatting the result windows to emphasize the aspects of the result you
want to focus on when you share the information with others.
For example, blended or dark background colors may make it difficult to read some
of the information, depending on the quality of your printer. You may want to
eliminate excess text from the result window by using Format>Result Window and
turning off labels. You may want to work with the Format Legend dialog box to
ensure that you are using the best color scale to reflect what takes place in a fringe
plot. You can highlight parts of your results and add information using annotations.
FEA Parameters
Creating FEA Parameters
Mechanica FEM mode postprocessing supports the creation of parameters based on a
model's finite element analysis. You can use created parameters to drive model
geometry by including them in relations and regenerating the model.
After you run an analysis on your model, you can create different types of
parameters for any combination of analysis tests, applied analysis, or selected model
geometry, provided you obtain your results from an .frd file. To obtain results from
an .frd file, you must use the File>Open FEM Results command or run a FEM
solver online and look at the results available immediately after the run completes.
You cannot create FEA parameters if you select Analysis>Results instead of using
one of these two methods.
You access parameter creation and management commands by selecting
Parameters from the RESULTS menu displayed when you use either of the two
methods just discussed. You create the parameters you want by selecting the
Create command and using the Define Parameter dialog box.
You can specify parameters based on multiple analyses, multiple modes, and
multiple geometric entities. If you are working with a shell model, you can define
parameters based on a particular shell side. Mechanica only updates parameters
when you enter the postprocessor after successfully solving the FEA program online.
See Also
554
IndexReviewing Results
Procedures:
To Create Parameters
To Output Parameters
To Delete Parameters
To Create Parameters
You can create parameters for your results provided you obtain your results from an
.frd file. To obtain results from an .frd file, you must use the File>Open FEM
Results command or run a FEM solver online and look at the results available
immediately after the run completes. You cannot create parameters if you select
Analysis>Results instead of using one of these two methods.
1. Select File>Open FEM Results and select the result file for the current
model. As an alternative, perform an online FEM solver run.
Mechanica displays the RESULTS menu.
Analysis Statistics
Reviewing FEM Analysis Statistics
After you run an analysis on your meshed model using a finite element analysis
program, you can review thermal, structural, or modal analysis statistics, provided
you obtain your results from an .frd file. To obtain results from an .frd file, you must
use the File>Open FEM Results command or run a FEM solver online and look at
555
the results available immediately after the run completes. You cannot review
statistics if you select Analysis>Results instead of using one of these two methods.
Mechanica can output the following statistics from the analysis results:
applied analyses
type of resultquantities such as von Mises stress, heat flux, strain energy,
for example
side of the shell elements the analysis results data were calculated fromtop,
bottom, average of both, or both
maximum value of the result on the model
minimum value of the result on the model
average value of the result on the model
variance of the result on the model
location of result maximum on the model
location of result minimum on the model
Mechanica can generate these statistics for the entire model or for selected parts,
surfaces, edges, vertices, or hard points. For edges, Mechanica provides the
additional option of generating a graph of values measured along the edges.
Mechanica also supports mid-node data processing for parabolic elements.
You specify the statistics you want using the Postprocessing Info dialog box. You
can request that Mechanica output analysis statistics to an information window on
your screen, to a readable ASCII text file, or to both the screen and a file.
See Also
References:
556
IndexReviewing Results
557
Mechanica reports values for the selected quantity in all three translational and
rotational directions at each of the hard points you select. Hard point reports are
useful for recording the exact analysis data for the quantity you choose across all the
hard points in your model.
You specify the statistics you want using the Postprocessing Report dialog box.
You can request that Mechanica output hard point reports to an information window
on your screen, to a readable ASCII text file, or to both the screen and a file.
See Also
References:
558
IndexReviewing Results
1. Select File>Open FEM Results and select the result file for the current
model. As an alternative, perform an online FEM solver run.
Mechanica displays the RESULTS menu.
Version
ANSYS
8.0
MSC/NASTRAN
2004
559
Common Facilities
Working With Normals
Surface Normals
Use the Normal>Surface command to display the normal direction for each surface
and to change the direction for one or more surfaces. This command appears for 3D
models.
Because Mechanica sets the normal direction separately for each surface when you
create it, the direction of the normals for adjoining surfaces may end up in opposite
or inconsistent directions.
See Normal Direction for Surfaces and Shells for information on how Mechanica
creates and uses normal directions.
When you select Surface, magenta arrows appear displaying the normal direction
for each surface in your model. Mechanica also displays a utility menu with the
following commands:
Fix
Flip
Mechanica checks whether you have fixed surface normals at certain points in the
modeling process.
560
IndexCommon Facilities
The top of a surface or shell is always in the normal direction. The surface or
shell displayed on the screen represents the midsurface of the element. You
can view results for stress quantities at the top or bottom of a surface or
shell.
Shell Normals
Use the Surfaces selector arrow on the Shell Definition dialog box to display the
normal direction for each shell and to change the direction for one or more shells.
Because Mechanica sets the normal direction separately for each shell when you
create it, the direction of the normals for adjoining shells may end up in opposite or
inconsistent directions.
561
See Normal Direction for Surfaces and Shells for information on how Mechanica
creates and uses normal directions.
You can fix or flip the shell normals if your shell is not part of a volume, or part of a
shell pair in a midsurface compressed model. When you use the Surfaces selector
arrow to select the shell on your model, a magenta arrow appears displaying the
normal direction. Do one of the following to fix or flip the normal direction:
Select the shell, and then select the shell again to flip the direction of the
arrow that shows the normal direction.
On the SIM SELECT menu, select Fix Normals or Flip Normals.
Mechanica checks if you have fixed normals at certain points in the modeling
process.
To reverse the normal direction of a compressed midsurface, use the MODIFY PAIR
Menu.
New Click this button to create a function. The Function Definition dialog
box appears.
There is no limit to the number of functions you can create for a given model.
Copy Click this button to copy the function you select from the list. The
Copy Function dialog box appears, displaying the name of the selected
function. Use the default or enter a name for the copy, then click OK.
Mechanica adds the new name to the list. You cannot copy a system function.
Edit Click this button to edit or review the function you select. The
Function Definition dialog box appears, containing the values you entered
for the selected function. You cannot review a system function.
Delete Click this button to delete the currently selected function. You
cannot delete a system function.
IndexCommon Facilities
See Also
Procedure:
To Create a Function
Examples:
Function of Coordinates
Modeling Specialized Loads with a Cylindrical Coordinate System
563
constants, operators, and functions, which you can also find on the Symbolic
Options dialog box.
The expression cannot include another function or refer to the same function.
Following is an example of a function:
if (time<10, sin (pi*time/5), 0)
For all functions, if you click the independent variable in the Variables box and the
other symbols in their respective boxes, Mechanica places them in the Symbolic
entry box. You can also type in the expression, using the Valid Symbols table as a
guide.
Note: For material properties, the only valid independent variable is
temperature.
Independent Variables
The Variables box displays the name of the independent variable or variables
available for the type of function you are defining. You can use these independent
variables as part of the expression that defines the function.
Valid Symbols
You can use the following symbols when defining a symbolic function:
Functions
Definitions
asin(x)
acos(x)
atan(x)
atan2(y,x)
ln(x)
log(x)
base 10 logarithm
abs(x)
sqrt(x)
square root
min(x,y)
564
/2
/2
IndexCommon Facilities
max(x,y)
sign(x,y)
mod(x,y)
if(c,x,y)
bound(x,lo,hi)
dead(x,lo,hi)
ceil(x)
floor(x)
near(x,y,delta)
Constants:
pi
= 3.14159...
= 2.71828...
Arithmetic Operators:
add
multiply
divide
exponentiate
Logical Operators (these operators return 1.0 for true, 0.0 for false):
unary "not"
==
equal
565
!=
not equal
<
less than
>
greater than
<=
>=
&&
logical and
||
logical or
Grouping Operators:
( )
parentheses, grouping
enter at least one value for the independent variable in the independent
variable column, which is on the left side of the table
Values in this column must be in either increasing or decreasing sequence, and
you cannot use a single number more than twice.
566
IndexCommon Facilities
Interpolation Method
Use this option to select the interpolation method for each variable. The first option
menu specifies a method for the independent variable, and the second option menu
for the dependent variable. Each option menu contains these two options:
Graph Click this button to display the graph. Mechanica opens the
Graphtool window and displays the graph.
To Create a Function
Use this procedure to create a function in Mechanica. This procedure assumes you
are in the Function Definition dialog box.
1. Use the default or enter a function name.
2. Enter a description of the function. This step is optional.
3. Use the default or select a coordinate system. (This option is not available for
time-dependent functions.)
4. Select the type of function you want to createSymbolic or Table.
567
New Opens the Function Definition dialog box where you can create a
new function. There is no limit to the number of functions you can create for a
given constraint.
Copy Opens the Copy Function dialog box where you can copy the
function you select from the list of functions. Use the default or enter a name
for the copy. When you close the dialog box, Mechanica adds the new name
to the list. You cannot copy a system function.
Edit Opens the Function Definition dialog box where you can edit or
review the function you select. You cannot edit or review a system function.
Delete Deletes the currently selected function. You cannot delete a system
function.
Name Use the default name or enter a new name for the function.
Description (optional) Enter a description of the function.
Coordinate system Click the selector arrow to select a coordinate system
for your model.
Definition Use this area to define your function using an algebraic
expression, that can contain only the following:
o An independent variable listed on the Symbolic Options dialog box.
Click the Available Function Components button to access the
dialog box.
o The constants, operators, and functions listed on the Symbolic
Options dialog box.
The expression cannot include another function or refer to the same function.
The following is an example of a function:
if (pi<10), sin (pi*pi/5), 0)
568
IndexCommon Facilities
For all functions, if you click the independent variable in the Variables box and
the other symbols in their respective boxes, Mechanica places them in the
Symbolic entry box. You can also type in the expression, using the Valid
Symbols table as a guide.
See Also
Procedure:
Examples:
Function of Coordinates
Modeling Specialized Loads with a Cylindrical Coordinate System
Independent Variables
The Variables box displays the name of the independent variable or variables
available for the type of function you are defining. You can use these independent
variables as part of the expression that defines the function.
Definitions
abs(x)
acos(x)
asin(x)
atan(x)
ceil(x)
cos(x)
floor(x)
ln(x)
log(x)
base 10 logarithm
sin(x)
sqrt(x)
square root
tan(x)
/2
/2
569
sinh(x)
cosh(x)
tanh(x)
exp(x)
if(c, x, y)
Constants:
pi
= 3.14159...
Arithmetic Operators:
+
add
multiply
divide
exponentiate
Logical Operators (these operators return 1.0 for true, 0.0 for false):
!
unary "not"
==
equal
!=
not equal
<
less than
>
greater than
<=
>=
&
logical and
logical or
Grouping Operators:
( )
570
parentheses, grouping
IndexCommon Facilities
571
Additional Information
Long-Term Limitations
When you work with Mechanica, you should be aware of various limitations that
affect the way the product operates. To learn about limitations, read the following:
Topic
General Limitations
Model and Analyses Limitations
General Limitations
Following is a list of general limitations:
572
IndexAdditional Information
573
A
analysis
An examination of your model through which Mechanica determines how the model
behaves under specified conditions. You run an analysis as part of a standard or other
design study.
Structure calculates your model's response to a set of loads and constraints. See also
these analysis types: buckling, contact, dynamic frequency response, dynamic random
response, dynamic shock response, dynamic time response, modal, prestress modal,
prestress static, and static.
Thermal calculates your model's response to a set of heat loads that are subject to
specified prescribed temperatures and/or convection conditions. See also steady-state
thermal.
animation
A dynamic display of mode shapes, static displacement results, a variety of fringed
results, and shape changes for a sensitivity or optimization study in both products.
associativity
How any entity (such as geometry, load, boundary condition) in Mechanica relates to any
other entity. If one entity is related to a second entity, the definition of the first entity
depends on the definition of the second. For instance, if a load is associated with a point
and that point moves, the load also moves.
574
IndexAdditional Information
axisymmetric model
A two-dimensional model for which the geometry, loads, deformations, prescribed
temperatures, and convection conditions are symmetric about an axis of rotation. For
example, you can use an axisymmetric model type for a cylindrical or spherical structure,
such as a storage tank.
B
beam
See beam element, flexible beam.
beam element
A one-dimensional entity used to represent part or all of a structural component that has
a length much greater than its other two dimensions. The beam element axis lies on a
curve or edge. In Structure, you describe the cross section by a set of section properties
and an orientation. See also CY, CZ, IYY, IZZ, J, orientation, shear FY and FZ, and theta.
575
boundary edge
An edge associated with only one shell or solid, unless the edge is associated with a solid
and a shell coincident with a face of that solid. See also boundary face.
boundary face
A face that belongs to only one solid element. See also boundary edge.
C
C1 continuous curve or surface
A mathematical description of a curve or surface. A curve or surface is C1 continuous if
both the direction and the magnitude of its first derivatives vary continuously everywhere
on the curve or surface.
576
IndexAdditional Information
check button
A square button on a dialog box. From a group of check buttons, you can select one or
more.
conductivity (T)
The physical property of a material that, for a given temperature gradient, governs the
rate at which heat energy is transferred within the material.
constraint (S)
An external limit on the movement of a structure or part of a structure. You can constrain
your model in any of the six degrees of freedomtranslation or rotation about any of the
three coordinate directions.
577
contour plot
A type of result display that superimposes a set of curves on the model. Each curve has a
color that represents a constant value of a specified scalar quantity. You also have the
option of labeling contour plots for black-and-white printing.
Examples of scalar quantities include stress, displacement, temperature, or flux
components.
convergence
The method Mechanica uses to find a solution to an analysis, based on your requirements
and restrictions. There are two main convergence methods in Mechanica: multi-pass
adaptive and single-pass adaptive.
coordinate system
A generic term for a system of coordinates enabling you to define precise locations of
entities. Mechanica uses a default world coordinate system. In addition, you can create
three types of user coordinate systemsCartesian, cylindrical, and spherical.
You can specify orientation of a beam or spring by defining its local coordinate system.
See also local coordinate system, user coordinate system, view coordinate system, and
world coordinate system.
current body
The body that is active and available for modification. You are always using the current
body.
578
IndexAdditional Information
current directory
The directory from which you started Mechanica.
current model
The model you currently have open on the screen. Mechanica allows you to open only one
model at a time. See also model.
CY (S)
The distance off a beam's neutral axis in the local Y direction at which you direct
Structure to report bending stresses.
cyclic symmetry
A type of constraint that you create by making cuts in a model at two symmetric
surfaces. Subsequent analyses can be done on the symmetric surfaces only, which can
significantly reduce the analysis time.
CZ (S)
The distance off a beam's neutral axis in the local Z direction at which you direct
Structure to report bending stresses.
D
damping coefficient (S)
The percentage of critical damping of a mode in a dynamic frequency response, random
response, or time response analysis. A damping coefficient of 100% means the model is
critically damped and does not vibrate freely. A damping coefficient of 1% means the
amplitude decays by about 6% over a period of oscillation. See also critical damping.
degrees of freedom
A means of expressing the potential motion of a mechanical system.
579
design study
An examination of your model using one or more analyses you previously defined
(standard study). A design study may also use an analysis to examine alternatives to your
design (optimization and sensitivity studies). See also global sensitivity study, local
sensitivity study, optimization study, and standard study.
dialog box
A separate window, invoked by a command, in which you enter values and other
information.
dimension parameter
A range of values you associate with a Pro/ENGINEER dimension. As the parameter value
changes during a shape review, shape animation, sensitivity study, or optimization study,
Mechanica also regenerates the associated dimension in both the Pro/ENGINEER and
Mechanica versions of the model. You use dimension parameters to change your model's
shape.
displacement (S)
The movement of a point on the model, measured as the change in position relative to
the point's location on the undeformed model. Displacements are calculated by default
during an engine run.
580
IndexAdditional Information
E
element
An entity based on your model's geometry that Mechanica uses to analyze your model.
Types of elements include beams, shells, solids, 2D shells, 2D solids, and 2D plates.
Structure also has mass and spring elements.
You create elements by using AutoGEM, Mechanica's automatic element generation
technology. AutoGEM creates elements for your model at the start of every analysis. You
can also manually start AutoGEM during your modeling session to evaluate and refine
your mesh. See also AutoGEM or geometric element modeling.
Encapsulated PostScript
A PostScript file you can include in another PostScript file. Encapsulated PostScript files
are used to place illustrations in a PostScript document. You cannot print out an
Encapsulated PostScript file on its own. See also PostScript file.
entity
A general term for anything in a model, including points, curves, springs, beams, and so
forth. There are also entities specific to each productfor example, loads and constraints in
Structure and convection conditions and heat loads in Thermal.
581
entry box
A box on a dialog box in which you enter data. You make an entry box active by moving
your mouse cursor over the box and pressing the left mouse button.
F
film coefficient (T)
In convective heat transfer through a surface, the constant of proportionality between the
flux through the surface and the difference between the surface temperature and the bulk
temperature.
flux (T)
The rate at which heat energy is transferred per unit area.
fringe plot
A type of result display that superimposes a set of colored regions on the model. Each
color represents a different range of values of a specified scalar quantity, such as stress,
displacement, temperature, or flux.
G
G1 continuous curve or surface
A mathematical description of a curve or surface. A curve or surface is G1 continuous if
the direction, but not necessarily the magnitude, of its first derivatives varies smoothly
everywhere on the curve or surface.
582
IndexAdditional Information
GEA
See geometric element analysis.
GEM
See geometric element modeling.
GEO
See geometric element optimization.
583
values at regular intervals in a parameter's range. You can vary more than one parameter
simultaneously. See local sensitivity study, optimization study, and standard study.
H
heat capacity (T)
A property that indicates the ability of a material to absorb heat from the external
surroundings. It represents the amount of energy required to produce a unit temperature
rise.
HPGL
Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language, a page description format you can use to print on a
plotter or printer that supports HPGL.
584
IndexAdditional Information
I
inertia (Iy, Iz) (S)
Factors that you specify for the second moment of area for a beam element. Along with
Young's modulus, these properties describe stiffness in bending about a beam's principal Y
and Z axes.
isotropic
Describes a material with an infinite number of planes of material symmetry, making the
properties equal in all directions. You enter a single value for each property. You can
assign isotropic materials to any element type.
IYY (S)
A beam cross section's second moment of area describing stiffness in bending about the
local Y axis.
IZZ (S)
A beam cross section's second moment of area describing stiffness in bending about the
local Z axis.
J
J (S)
A beam cross section's effective second polar moment of area describing stiffness in
torsion. For circular cross sections, the effective second polar moment of area is equal to
the actual second polar moment of area.
L
Large Deformation Analysis
An option you can select to compute large deformation results for static structural
analyses only, using nonlinear equations. This is only available for 3D, 2D plane strain,
and 2D plane stress model types.
585
limit
A value or range of values for a specified measure that Mechanica must respect during an
optimization study.
list box
A list of items on a dialog box with a scroll bar to its right.
load (S)
A force you place on your model. You can specify the direction and magnitude of the
force. See also bearing load, centrifugal load, gravity load, pressure load, and
temperature load
load set
A grouping of structural loads or heat loads placed on a single model. You can include
load sets in most analysis types. Mechanica calculates results separately for each load set,
unless you use the Sum Sets option for a dynamic analysis.
M
mass element (S)
An element that represents a concentrated mass and concentrated moment of inertia at a
particular point of a model.
mass properties
Properties calculated from a model's geometry and material properties. The mass
properties for the full model are included in the summary file when you run a design
study with certain types of analyses.
586
IndexAdditional Information
material damping
A material property that allows you to model the dissipation of energy, caused by friction,
heat exchange, or deformation, that occurs during a contact event.
material orientation
The principal material directions, relative to the current coordinate system, associated
with the surfaces, volumes, shells, solids, 2D solids, or 2D plates in your model. You can
specify both the coordinate system axis with which each principal material direction is
aligned and an angle of rotation for those directions. See also orientation.
material properties
Properties of the material you assign to geometry or elements. The following table
indicates the material properties for each product:
Material Property
Product
Conductivity
S, T
Mass Density
S, T
Poisson's Ratio
Shear Modulus
Young's Modulus
material set
A set of material properties. Material sets can reside in a material library and can be
assigned to one or more entities in your model.
587
MCAD
Mechanical computer-aided design, a type of software you can use to draw a mechanical
model design. Pro/ENGINEER is an example of an MCAD program.
measure
A scalar quantity of interest that Mechanica calculates in a design study. You can set up
measures to monitor specific aspects of your model's performance. For instance, you
might want to know the stress tangent to a fillet for the later calculation of fatigue.
You can use measures as convergence criteria for an analysis or for an optimization study
goal or limit. You also use measures to measure sensitivity to parameter changes in a
local or global sensitivity design study.
During a design study, Mechanica calculates results for the measures that are valid for
each analysis in the study. For example, a stress measure is calculated for a static
analysis but not for a modal analysis.
menu
A list of commands you can execute.
588
IndexAdditional Information
menu item
A command or submenu listed on a menu.
message box
A box Mechanica displays that contains a message or a question.
model
Your representation on the computer of a structure or object. You can associate analyses
and design studies with a model.
modeling
The process of simplifying and abstracting a structure, object, or physical system so that
it can be represented mathematically and studied with the aid of a computer.
589
model type
The dimensional treatment you want Mechanica to apply for your model. The available
model types are 3D, 2D plane strain, 2D plane stress, or 2D axisymmetric.
N
net heat flux (T)
A measure that Thermal calculates by finding the total amount of heat that flows through
one or more of the boundaries of one or more elements. For example, in 3D models,
Thermal can calculate the net heat flux for the endpoints of beams, the edges of shells,
the faces of solids, or a combination of these.
O
optimization study
A design study in which Mechanica adjusts one or more parameters to best achieve a
specified goal or to test feasibility of a design while respecting specified limits. See also
global sensitivity study, local sensitivity study, and standard study.
590
IndexAdditional Information
orientation (S)
A property of beams and two-point springs. Orientation is a vector with three WCS
components. This vector specifies the beam's or spring's local Z axis relative to the WCS.
See also material orientation.
orthotropic
Describes a material with symmetry relative to three mutually perpendicular planes. You
can assign orthotropic properties to surfaces and parts.
P
parameter space
The representative space, internal to Mechanica's code, in which Mechanica represents
geometric entities. Mechanica simultaneously represents all geometry by two methodsthe
actual 2D or 3D representation of your model, and the 1D, 2D, or 3D parametric
representation that Mechanica uses to manipulate geometric entities.
Mechanica performs many operations on geometric entities in parameter space and then
maps the entities back to 3D space. As a result, the appearance of an entity may differ
significantly from its parametric representation.
phase (S)
The angle by which an output quantity is out of phase with the force that prompted the
response. A negative angle means that the output quantity lags behind the force.
p-level
The highest polynomial order to which Mechanica performs calculations on a given edge
during a run of a design study. See also polynomial order.
plotting grid
The locations at which Mechanica calculates values for displacement, stress, temperature,
flux, and other quantities. Mechanica places a grid across each element and calculates a
value at each location where two grid lines cross, or where a grid line intersects an
element edge.
You can determine the size of the grid when you define an analysis by specifying how
many intervals along each element edge Mechanica uses to create the grid. The grid size
affects the level of detail of the results.
591
polynomial order
When Mechanica runs a design study, it calculates the value of specified quantities at
successively higher polynomial orders for each edge until it reaches convergence or the
maximum polynomial order. Mechanica uses functions that may range from linear to a 9th
order polynomial, although you can specify a subset of that range when you define an
analysis. See also convergence and p-level.
PostScript file
A file written in the PostScript language, a page description language. You can create
color or black-and-white files in PostScript format from Mechanica to print out on
PostScript printers.
p-pass
A single analysis calculation by the Structure engine with each element edge set to a
particular polynomial order. After each p-pass, Mechanica updates the polynomial orders
of the edges for the next p-pass. The process continues until either convergence or the
maximum polynomial order is reached.
592
IndexAdditional Information
Mechanica
A family of design analysis products that enable you to simulate and optimize the
structural and thermal performance of your designs before you build prototypes. The two
main Mechanica products are as follows:
These two products are integrated, so that you can access either product from inside a
single user interface.
Your installation may also include the optional Vibration module, a vibration analysis tool
integrated with Structure.
prompt
A request for a single input that appears on the command line.
properties
See CY, CZ, IYY, IZZ, J, mass properties, material properties, orientation, shear FY and
FZ, shell properties, theta.
push button
A button on a dialog box that enables you to select an action that Mechanica performs.
Typical push buttons include OK or Cancel.
593
Q
Q (T)
The heat rate you apply to selected entities when you create a heat load.
R
radio button
A diamond-shaped or circular button on a dialog box. From a group of radio buttons, you
can select only one.
resultant (S)
You can define a resultant force or resultant moment measure. Structure calculates the
resultant force measure by integrating the total traction forces acting on one or more of
the boundaries of one or more elements.
Structure calculates the resultant moment measure by integrating the product of a
moment arm and the traction forces acting on one or more of the boundaries of one or
more elements.
In 3D models, Structure can calculate a resultant measure for the endpoints of beams,
the edges of shells, the faces of solids, or a combination of these. The value of a resultant
measure is equal to the sum of the resultants for all of the entities selected.
result window
A single display of a design study result. A result window contains one quantity, such as
stress or displacement, defined over a location, such as an edge or the entire model, in a
specific graphic display, such as a graph or fringe plot.
594
IndexAdditional Information
right-hand rule
A method for determining the direction of the positive Z axis relative to the positive X and
positive Y axes. If your right hand is in front of you with the palm up, your thumb
pointing to the right represents the positive X axis, and your index finger pointing straight
ahead represents the positive Y axis. If you then bend your middle finger up by 90 , it
represents the direction of the positive Z axis.
rotation (S)
The local change in orientation at a location on the model relative to the undeformed
model.
run
During a run, the engine performs the calculations needed to provide results for a
specified design study.
S
sensitivity study
A "what if" design study where Mechanica uses parameters to study variations in the
design of your model to help you find the best design. See also global sensitivity study
and local sensitivity study.
shape history
An animation sequence showing the changing shape of your model during each step of an
optimization or global sensitivity design study. You also use a shape history result window
definition to save the optimized version of a model.
595
shell element
A three- or four-sided entity used to represent part or all of a structural component that
has a thickness much smaller than its other two dimensions. Mechanica displays the shell
element midsurface.
shell properties
The properties you assign to a shell depend on its type. For a homogeneous shell, which
consists of a single material whose properties do not vary through the shell's thickness,
you assign a thickness.
For a laminated shell, which consists of one or more materials whose properties may vary
through the shell's thickness, you specify laminate stiffness properties.
simulation features
Features that you can create in the Mechanica environment that allow you to focus on a
portion of your model that the feature will simulate. Simulation features are only visible in
the Mechanica environment, and include datum points, coordinate systems, datum curves,
surface regions, and volume regions.
singularity
A region of the model where the results are theoretically infinite for any physical quantity,
such as displacement, stress, temperature, or heat flux. Singularities usually result from
point loads, point constraints, and reentrant corners.
596
IndexAdditional Information
solid element
A cubical, tetrahedral, or wedge-shaped entity you use in Mechanica to represent a part
or all of a three-dimensional structural component.
spatial variation
The process by which Mechanica spatially varies a Structure load or a Thermal heat load.
You can direct Mechanica to vary a load or heat load linearly, quadratically, or cubically
along an edge, curve, face, or surface.
spline
A continuous curve that is typically composed of several polynomial segments.
spring (S)
An idealization that represents an elastic spring connection between two points or an
elastic spring connection to ground at a single point.
standard study
A study in which Mechanica calculates results for one or more analyses. You can specify
different parameter settings for the analysis. See design study, global sensitivity study,
local sensitivity study, and optimization study.
597
T
temperature load (S)
A body load due to a temperature change over the model. A temperature change causes
local expansion or contraction of the model. You can cause the model to resist expansion
or contraction by using constraints. The two types of temperature load are MEC/T and
global.
theta ( ) (S)
A property of beams and two-point springs. Theta is the angle between the principal Z
axis and the local Z axis. The default local Y axis lies in the plane of the beam unless
theta is nonzero.
598
IndexAdditional Information
transversely isotropic
Describes a material with rotational symmetry about an axis that you can assign to
surfaces and parts. The properties are equal for all directions in one plane, the plane of
isotropy. You enter two values for each property, one for the plane of isotropy, and one
for the remaining principal material direction.
true angle
The actual, absolute 3-D angle (as opposed to a projected angle).
2D axisymmetric model
See axisymmetric model.
2D plate element
A three- or four-sided element that represents a plate in a 2D plane stress model.
599
2D shell element
A one-dimensional entity that represents a shell element in a 2D plane strain or 2D
axisymmetric model.
2D solid element
A three- or four-sided element that represents a 2D plane strain or 2D axisymmetric
model.
U
UCS
See user coordinate system.
600
IndexAdditional Information
VCS
See view coordinate system.
Vibration
An optional vibration analysis module integrated with Structure.
volume
A set of associated surfaces that visually represents an entity with volume. A volume
must be closed, but can have interior voids.
W
WCS
See world coordinate system.
work area
The largest window of the Mechanica screen, where you create and modify models, and
review results. By default, the work area is below the command area and tools button
area and to the left of the design menu area.
601
Y
Young's modulus (S)
The ratio of stress to strain for a specific material, describing its stiffness. You specify
Young's modulus when you define material properties.
yield stress
The value of stress at or above which a material no longer exhibits linear elastic behavior.
602
IndexAdditional Information
Coordinate Systems
Following are the icons Mechanica uses to represent coordinate systems. Mechanica
displays coordinate systems in yellow. If you designate a coordinate system as the
current coordinate system, Mechanica highlights this coordinate system in green.
World Coordinate System or Cartesian User Coordinate System
603
This icon appears when you create a Cartesian coordinate system. This icon
also represents the WCS. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in
response to view changes.
Connections
Following are the graphic representation Mechanica uses for connections:
Welds
This icon appears when you create an end or perimeter weld between
components in an assembly. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in
response to view changes.
Spot Welds
This icon appears when you create a spot weld between entities. The size of
the disks in this icon depend on the diameter you specify for the spot weld.
The icon changes orientation in response to view changes. Spot welds are
only available in native mode.
604
IndexAdditional Information
Interfaces
This icon appears when you create an interface between components in an
assembly. The version without dots represents a free interface while the
version with dots represents a bonded interface. The icon changes
orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes.
Rigid Connections
This icon appears when you create a rigid connection between components in
an assembly. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to
view changes. Rigid connections are only available in native mode.
Constraints
Structure and Thermal have only one type of constraint in commoncyclic
symmetry. Following is the default icon Mechanica uses for cyclic symmetry:
This icon appears at each location where you apply a cyclic symmetry
constraint. The icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view
changes.
Material Orientations
Following is the graphic representation Mechanica uses for material orientation.
This icon appears when you review the material orientation of a surface,
shell, or part. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to
view changes.
605
Idealizations
Following are the default icons Structure uses for mass and spring idealizations:
Masses
This weight shape represents a mass concentrated at a point. The mass icon
does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes.
606
IndexAdditional Information
Connections
Structure has only one connection that it does not share with Thermal, namely
contacts. Following is the default icon Structure uses for contact regions:
This icon appears when you define a contact region between two curves in a
2D model or between two surfaces in a 3D model. The icon does not change
orientation or scale in response to view changes. Contacts are only available
in native mode.
Constraints
Following are the default icons that Structure uses for constraints:
Constraints
This icon appears at each location where you apply a constraint. The icon
does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes.
This icon shows which degrees of freedom you constrained. Two rows of
boxes appear at the base of the triangle, with each box representing a
degree of freedom. The top row of boxes represents displacement degrees of
freedom, and the bottom row of boxes represents rotational degrees of
freedom.
Boxes corresponding to degrees of freedom that you constrained or for which
you prescribed a displacement are filled. Boxes corresponding to degrees of
freedom that you designated as free are empty.
For example, this icon indicates that displacement in the x and y directions
are constrained and rotation about the z axis is also constrained.
607
Loads
Following are the default icons that Structure uses for loads:
Force Loads
This icon, with a single arrowhead, appears on an entity to which you apply
a force load. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view
changes.
Moment Loads
This icon, with a double arrowhead, appears on an entity to which you apply
a moment load. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to
view changes.
608
IndexAdditional Information
Gravity Loads
This icon appears when you apply a gravity load to your model. The vector
changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes. Structure
places this icon at the WCS origin.
MEC/T Temperature
This icon appears when you apply a MEC/T temperature load to your model.
The icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes.
Structure places this icon at the WCS origin. MEC/T temperature loads are
only available in native mode.
External Temperature
This icon appears when you import an externally calculated or measured
temperature load to your model. Structure places this icon near the WCS
origin.
Structural Temperature
This icon appears distributed across the entity when you create a structural
temperature load. Structural temperature loads are only available in FEM
mode.
609
Pressure Loads
When you apply a pressure load, this arrow-type icon appears normal to
shells, faces, and surfaces, or perpendicular to edges or 2D shells. The icon
changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes.
Convection Conditions
This icon appears on an entity for which you define a convection condition.
This icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes.
Radiation
This icon appears on an entity for which you define a radiation boundary
condition. This icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view
changes. Radiation boundary conditions are available in FEM mode only.
Heat Loads
This icon appears on an entity to which you apply a heat load. It does not
change orientation or scale in response to view changes.
The sign on the icon indicates whether the load magnitude is positive or
negative, that is, a heat source or a heat sink. For spatially varying loads,
which may change sign, the sign on the icon corresponds to the sign of the
entry for Q, which multiplies the interpolation.
610
IndexAdditional Information
Bibliography
This document contains a bibliography of information on topics relevant to
Mechanica. The bibliography is divided into the following sections:
Topic
General Finite Element
Fatigue
P-method
Optimization
Mechanics
Formulas and Numerical Results
Heat Transfer
Fatigue
Baumel, A. and Seeger, T. "Materials Data for Cyclic Loading, Supplement 1."
Materials Science Monographs, 61. Pub: Elsavier.
Morrow, J. "Fatigue Design Handbook." Advances in Engineering. Vol. 4. Society of
Automotive Engineers, Warrendale, PA. (1968): Sec 3.2, pp 2129.
611
Smith, K. N., Watson, P., and Topper, T. H. "A Stress-Strain Function for the Fatigue
of Metals." Journal of Materials. Vol. 5, No. 4, (1970): 767778.
p-Method
Babuska, I., and Suri, M. "The p- and h-p Versions of the Finite Element Method, an
Overview." Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering. 80 (1990): 5
26.
Babuska, I., and Szabo, B. "On the Rates of Convergency of the Finite Element
Method." International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering. 18 (1982):
323341.
Babuska, I., Szabo, B., and Katz, I. N. "The p-Version of the Finite Element Method."
Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics. (1981): 515545.
Szabo, B. "Geometric Idealizations in Finite Element Computations." Communications
in Applied Numerical Methods. 4 (1988): 393400.
Szabo, B. "Mesh Design for the p-Version of the Finite Element Method." Computer
Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering. 55 (1986): 181197.
Szabo, Barna, and Ivo Babuska. Finite Element Analysis. New York: Wiley, 1991.
Szabo, B., and Sahrmann, G. "Hierarchic Plate and Shell Models Based on pExtension." International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering. 26 (1988):
18551881.
Optimization
Bennett, J.A., and M.E. Botkin. The Optimum Shape. New York: Plenum, 1986.
Haug, Edward J., and Jasbir S. Arora. Applied Optimal Design. New York: Wiley,
1979.
Haug, Edward J., Kyung K. Choi, and Vadim Komkov. Design Sensitivity Analysis of
Structural Systems. London: Academic Press, 1986.
Vanderplaats, Garret N. Numerical Optimization Techniques for Engineering Design.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1984.
Wismer, David A., and R. Chatterly. Introduction to Nonlinear Optimization. New
York: North-Holland, 1983.
Mechanics
Gere, James M., and Stephen P. Timoshenko. Mechanics of Materials. 2nd ed.
Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole Engineering Division, 1984.
612
IndexAdditional Information
Heat Transfer
Holman, J. P. Heat Transfer. 6th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1986.
Incropera, Frank P., and David P. Dewitt. Fundamentals of Heat Transfer. New York:
Wiley, 1981.
Kreith, Frank, and Mark S. Bohn. Principles of Heat Transfer. 4th ed. New York:
Harper & Row, 1986.
613
Database Considerations
To support the many activities it performs, Mechanica adds information to existing
Pro/ENGINEER files and creates database files in the directory that stores your
Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly.
To learn about Mechanica database files, how the software maintains the database,
and other related issues, read the following:
Topic
Native Mode Files
Using Pro/ENGINEER File Commands
FEM Database Considerations
Support for Pro/INTRALINK and Windchill
In reading this material, bear in mind that you do not need an in-depth
understanding of the Mechanica database in order to work with your model. Treat
these discussions as background information only.
614
IndexAdditional Information
.prt file This file stores information about part geometry and all simulation
entities for the part.
.mdb file The content of this file depends on whether or not you have
actually run an analysis or design study. When you begin a run or create a
mecbatch file, the .mdb file contains a subset of simulation entities such as
measures, materials, analysis definitions, and so forth. Once the analysis or
design study begins to run, Mechanica updates this file to include the model
mesh.
.asm file This file stores information about assembly geometry and all
simulation entities for the assembly.
.mda files As with the .mdb file, the content of these files depends on
whether or not you have actually run an analysis or design study. When you
begin a run or create a mecbatch file, the .mda file contains a subset of
simulation modeling entities for your assembly. Once the analysis or design
study begins to run, Mechanica updates this file to include model mesh.
To help prevent data loss and enable you to return to a prior model if you encounter
problems, the software creates .prt or .asm backups each time you perform a save
through the Pro/ENGINEER File menu. The backup files are as follows:
.prt and .asm files an earlier version of the file. For the most recent
backup, use the file with the next-to-highest number, although you can also
access an earlier version of the part or assembly by opening files with lower
numbers.
Session files Each session of Pro/ENGINEER or Mechanica generates one
session record, or playback file in case you need to replay a session.
Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica use a trail.txt.X (where X is an interger) file to
store session records. The software starts a new trail.txt.X file at the
beginning of each session, incrementing the integer to create a unique
identity.
To learn more about the file structure and some of the guidelines you should observe
as you work with these files, read the following:
Topic
Overview of File Creation
Starting a New Model
Moving to Independent Mode
615
1. When you open Pro/ENGINEER, the software creates a trail file, trail.txt.x,
which tracks your actions in Pro/ENGINEER. The software stores this file in
the current directory.
2. When you create and save a part, Pro/ENGINEER saves the geometry,
relations, and so forth in a part (.prt) file, which it stores in the pro directory
(where pro is the directory that contains the Pro/ENGINEER part).
3. After you enter Mechanica, the software stores Mechanica entities that you
add to the partmodeling entities, analysis definitions, and design study
definitionsin the .prt file. It stores this data each time you save the model.
4. When you run an analysis or design study, Mechanica creates a study
directory (where study is the name of your design study). The software then
copies the .prt file into this directory, creates an .mdb file, and merges the
simulation information from the .prt file into the .mdb file.
The .mdb file that appears in the study directory carries the study name.
However, the .prt file that appears in the study directory carries the original
name of the part.
As Mechanica runs the analysis or design study, it updates the .mdb file by
adding mesh data. Mechanica uses this information to display model results.
616
IndexAdditional Information
Note: While Mechanica is active, the only commands you can select from the
list below are Save, Save a Copy, Backup, and Delete. To use the other
commands, you must select a different Pro/ENGINEER application.
File menu
option
Action taken by Mechanica
Erase
Delete
This command provides two optionsCurrent and Not Displayed. Both options
close the Mechanica model without saving.
This command provides two optionsOld Versions and All Versions.
Delete All Versions closes and deletes the Mechanica model. If there is no
Mechanica model in memory but one exists on disk, the software deletes that model.
Delete Old Versions has no effect in Mechanica.
Save
Save A
Copy
Saves the Mechanica model under the new name. The name of the Mechanica model
in memory does not change. If there is no Mechanica model in memory but a file of
that name exists, the software copies the file to a new name matching the new
Pro/ENGINEER part.
Backup
If you have accessed Mechanica at least once during the current Pro/ENGINEER
session, saves a backup of the Mechanica model in a directory you specify.
617
Description
modelname.ans
modelname.nas
modelname.fnf
Description
modelname.bde
File listing problem mesh elements that fail a requested quality check
modelname.fmp
modelname.fma
modelname.frd
modelname.inf
File listing a definition of your model and finite element results statistics
modelname.plt
618
IndexAdditional Information
Topic
Model Files
Meshing Files
FEM Mode Meshing Files
Support for Windchill
Model Files
When you enter Mechanica, model files, .prt and .asm, are read from the
active workspace.
If your active workspace does not contain a Mechanica model, but there is a
model on disk in the current working directory, it will be read from disk and
checked into the workspace.
In either case, when you save your model, Mechanica writes it to the active
workspace. The software also automatically creates a Pro/INTRALINK dependency
between a Mechanica model and its associated Pro/ENGINEER model when it saves
the model to your active workspace.
Mechanica reads certain auxiliary files from the workspace, such as those containing
temperature fields for structural analysis. These files are not written to the
workspace, so you must either check these files out of common space or import
them into a workspace before Mechanica can access them directly.
Meshing Files
If you are working in Pro/INTRALINK, the following points apply to your AutoGEM
.mmp and .mma files in Mechanica.
619
If you retrieved the mesh file from commonspace, when you select the
File>Save Mesh command on the AutoGEM dialog box, the software checks
the mesh file out and then saves it to the same workspace.
Retrieving files Here are the rules that Mechanica uses to determine
which mesh file to retrieve when you open a mesh file and a part file in your
Pro/INTRALINK workspace.
o If you check out both the mesh file and the model file from
commonspace into your workspace at the same time, and then open
Mechanica, the software tries to check out the latest version of the
mesh file that is compatible with the model file. If it cannot find an
appropriate version of the mesh file, it uses the version of the mesh
file that is specified by the user configuration.
o If you check out a model file from commonspace into your workspace
without simultaneously checking out a mesh file, open Mechanica, and
then use the AutoGEM dialog box to retrieve a mesh file, the software
will try to find a compatible mesh file. If no appropriate file is
available, Mechanica displays an error message.
o If you check out a mesh file from commonspace into your workspace
without checking out a model file, the software automatically checks
out an associated model file.
When you create a mesh file, it is added to the same Windchill document as
the Mechanica model file.
When you retrieve a part or assembly file from a Windchill cabinet, the latest
version of the .mmp or .mma file corresponding to the model file is also
retrieved.
If you update a .mmp or .mma file, the version number of the Windchill
document is incremented.
The behavior when you retrieve or save .fma and .fmp files is identical to that for the
.mmp and .mma files.
620
IndexAdditional Information
Engine Files
Refer to the following topics for information on different categories of engine files:
Topic
mecbatch
Engine Input Files
Temporary Engine Files
Engine Output Files
mecbatch
The mecbatch command executes from your operating system the run of one or
more design studies you previously included in a batch file. When you create a batch
file, you can specify a name for the batch file or use the default name mecbatch
(mecbatch.bat on Windows). Mechanica places the file in the directory from which
you started Mechanica.
621
Contains a snapshot of the model database for your part at the time
you start the analysis or design study.
study.mda
meshed_stdmdl.mdb
study.lok
An empty file that locks the directory for results viewing when
analysis or design study is running. The file is automatically deleted as
soon as results are available.
Mechanica places the files in a directory called study, and places study in the
directory for output files you specify through the Run>Settings command on the
Analsyses and Design Studies dialog box.
622
the study directory created during a run (where study is the name of the
design study you run)
the analysis subdirectory of the study directory (where analysis is the name
of the analysis in that study)
IndexAdditional Information
the step#### subdirectory of the study directory (where the four pound
signs (####) represent the number of the master interval defined for the
dynamic structural or transient thermal analysis in four-digit format)
study.cnv
study.dia
Communicates an error code to the user interface in the event of a nonrecoverable condition during the engine run.
study.d##
study.err
study.g##
study.hst
study.l##
Contains plotting data for local sensitivity. Two points give a linear
sensitivity plot for each measure versus the selected design parameters.
The two pound signs (##) represent the design parameter number in twodigit format.
study.mcd
study.neu
study.opt
623
study.pas
study.pnu
study.res
study.rpt
study.rst
Contains the state of the last pass for a multi-pass adaptive analysis.
Mechanica uses this file if you decide to restart an analysis that you had
previously stopped.
study.solution
study.stt
Contains the start and completion times of major steps in the engine run.
You can access this file through detailed summary you can review using
the Info>Status command on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog
box.
study.s##
study.ter
study.t##
Mechanica also creates the following engine output files for structural analyses only:
study.a##
624
Contains the rotations. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set
or mode number, in two-digit format.
IndexAdditional Information
study.b##
study.f##
study.fatigue##
study.h##
study.i##
Contains the velocity phases from a dynamic frequency analysis. The two
pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format.
study.j##
study.k##
Contains the rotation phases from a dynamic frequency analysis. The two
pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format.
study.m##
study.q##
study.r##
study.ss##
study.coe
Contains information that the engine uses if you run a dynamic analysis
using the Use Previous Modal or Dynamic Analysis option.
study.v##
study.w##
625
study.y##
study.p##
study.n##
study.buc
study.mor
study.c##
Mechanica also creates the following engine output file for thermal analyses only:
study.tld
Library Files
Mechanica creates and adds to the following library files when you place a material
set, beam section set, shell property sets, or spring stiffness set in the library with
the Add To Library button on the appropriate dialog box:
mmatl.lib
beam_section.bsf
mshlprp.lib
mspstf.lib
626
IndexAdditional Information
A default material library resides in the lib subdirectory of the Mechanica home
directory.
When you start a Mechanica product, Mechanica searches for library files in the
following directories, in this order:
Mechanica uses the first copy of the appropriate configuration or library file it finds.
If you choose to add a material, beam section, spring stiffness, or shell property to
the library, Mechanica creates a new version of the appropriate library file as follows:
If Mechanica finds the file in the current directory or your home directory,
Mechanica replaces the existing file with the new version.
If Mechanica finds the file in the lib subdirectory or does not find the file,
Mechanica places the new file in your home directory.
Results Files
Individual Mechanica products create the following results files (file represents the
name you assign to the file):
file.rwd
file.grt
Contains in tabular form the XY values for a results graph you create for all
Mechanica products. You create this file when you generate a graph report.
AutoGEM Files
Mechanica creates the following files when you use AutoGEM:
model.agm
Contains information about the most recent AutoGEM operation you executed
for the current model. You can access the AutoGEM log file regardless of
whether AutoGEM completed successfully or unsuccessfully, or you interrupted
it.
Mechanica saves the AutoGEM log file as model.agm (where model is the
name of your model). Mechanica overwrites these files with each successive
AutoGEM session. If you want to save a particular AutoGEM session, you can
rename it through the operating system.
untitled.agm
Mechanica saves the AutoGEM log file as untitled.agm if you have not named
your model. Mechanica overwrites these files with each successive AutoGEM
session. If you want to save a particular AutoGEM session, you can rename it
through the operating system.
627
Contains your model's mesh data in ASCII format. Use this output file with the
ANSYS solver.
model.nas
Contains your model's mesh data in ASCII format. Use this output file with the
MSC/NASTRAN solver.
model.fnf
Contains information about an entire finite element model. Use the FEM
Neutral output file to exchange data between Pro/ENGINEER and FEA
programs.
In addition, Mechanica FEM mode creates the following files during the finite element
modeling process.
model.bde
model.fmp
Contains mesh data of a part. Mechanica creates this file in the current
directory while generating the finite element mesh of your model.
model.fma
Contains mesh data of an assembly. Mechanica creates this file in the current
directory while generating the finite element mesh of your model.
model.frd
Contains model's mesh and results data. Mechanica creates this file while
performing a finite element analysis of your model.
model.inf
model.plt
Miscellaneous Files
Mechanica creates the following files when you start the product:
mech_trl.txt.X
(where X is an
interger)
628
IndexAdditional Information
Information Transfer
Transferring Entities From Integrated Mode to
Independent Mode
This document describes how to transfer geometry, loads and constraints, and points
out what to consider before you use the File>Independent Mechanica command
to transfer a model from integrated mode to independent mode Mechanica.
To learn about transferring these entities, read the following:
Topic
Transferring Geometry
Geometry Transfer Limitations
Transferring Loads and Constraints
Import Considerations
What Does Not Transfer
Transferring Geometry
To learn about transferring geometry, read the following:
Topic
Transferring Geometric Entities
Importing Geometry into Mechanica
Pro/ENGINEER
Mechanica
arc
arc
629
Bspline
NURBS
Bspline surface
NURBS surface
cone
revolved surface
Coons patch
Coons surface
cylinder
ruled surface
face
trimmed surface
fillet surface
NURBS surface
surface of revolution
revolved surface
line
line
planar surface
planar surface
ruled surface
ruled surface
spline
spline surface
tab cylinder
ruled surface
torus
revolved surface
Bezier surface
630
IndexAdditional Information
General Rules
Keep the following points in mind when importing your model into independent mode
Mechanica:
When you import a surface, the defining curves may be trimmed away. You
can check a surface's defining curves by reviewing a surface through the
Entity command on the Review menu.
You can return defining curves to your model using the Untrim Surface
command on the Edit>Geometry menu.
After you import midsurface geometry into Mechanica, you should use the
Review>Boundary Curves command to make sure there are no unintended
cracks in your model. Cracks can occur if any curves and surfaces do not
maintain their associations.
When you import an assembly that contains mated surfaces, Mechanica
merges the two surfaces into a single surface.
If you create contacts for two parts with mated surfaces, Mechanica treats the
two parts as separate, unmerged entities and places contacts on all surfaces
631
it considers valid for the contact. Should you then decide to work with the
model in independent mode, Mechanica eliminates any superfluous contacts
when it merges the surfaces during import.
During import, Mechanica makes all surface normals consistent. For surfaces
that are part of the boundary of a single volume, the normals are always set
outward.
Import Considerations
Before you transfer your part or assembly to Mechanica, you should be aware of the
following:
632
Some of the geometry you import into Mechanica may not have the accuracy
that Mechanica requires. In these cases, Mechanica uses the geometry's
topological data to construct a valid model.
IndexAdditional Information
If you delete any of the geometry that Mechanica has transformed, you may
not be able to recreate it accurately because Mechanica's geometry creation
facilities are not the same as those of Pro/ENGINEER.
When you import geometry, Mechanica highlights, but does not merge, partly
coincident curves so you can carry out any needed edits.
When you import a part, you cannot use some of the Mechanica commands
on the Geometry>Model>Design Variables, and Edit>Geometry menus.
These commands are displayed as inactive. If you save your model in
Mechanica or unlink the model from Pro/ENGINEER, these commands become
available again.
Mechanica provides a Settings dialog box that you use to define the
characteristics of geometry imported from an MCAD product. This dialog box
defines such characteristics as the tolerance Mechanica applies in determining
whether to merge geometry, the maximum surface aspect ratio, and so forth.
If you are not satisfied with the results of an MCAD import, varying these
settings can improve the quality of the import. To access the Settings dialog
box, use the File>Import>Settings command.
If a gap in your model is bigger than 1/1000th of the model size, Mechanica
may not trim the surface at the gap. If it cannot trim the surface, Mechanica
will not create a volume in your model.
At times, two distinct nodes, edges, or faces in a single Pro/ENGINEER part
are so close together that they must merge in Mechanica. When such a merge
occurs, the .mnl file will contain one of the following warning messages
(where name is the number of the entity or of the nodes, edges, or faces):
Curve name is a boundary curve.
or
Curve name is partially coincident with another curve.
Although the resulting model is a valid volume in Mechanica, the two nodes,
edges, or faces are associated to each other, preventing the model from
behaving as you intended it to.
633
634
IndexAdditional Information
635
Lines starting with a pound sign (#) as well as empty lines are treated as
comments and are skipped (except for the first line).
Information in a FEM Neutral Format file is organized into sections. Each section
describes its own class of objects. The order of sections in the FEM Neutral Format
file is critical because information from the earlier-defined sections may be required
in the sections that follow. You can skip some of the sections that are not relevant to
the model description.
Note: The FEM Neutral Format is backward-compatible.
A FEM Neutral Format file must start with an identification line used to recognize the
FEM Neutral Format. The identification line format follows.
#PTC_FEM_NEUT n <flags>
where:
n revision number of the FEM Neutral Format file (corresponds to the revision
number of the specification). The default is 3.
flags reserved for future use.
An identification line can appear as follows:
#PTC_FEM_NEUT 1
Include the creation date as a comment:
#DATE Wed Mar 22 13:56:07 EET 2000
Defining an Object
Define each object in a FEM Neutral Format file with "instructions." An instruction line
starts with a percent sign (%). It consists of fields separated by spaces and/or
tabulations.
An instruction line includes the following components:
IndexAdditional Information
You can define an object using one instruction or a group of instructions. If you use a
group of instructions, follow these guidelines:
If the object contains more than one instruction, you must combine the
objects together as a group.
You must assign the same instruction keyword obj_id to all instructions in the
group.
You must assign the key definition (DEF) to the first instruction in the group.
To learn about the instructions and items you will work with in defining a FEM
Neutral Format file, see the following:
Topic
List of Available Sections
List of Available Instructions
Special Instructions
Definitions of Some Fields Used in Instructions
637
Abbreviation
Section Name
START_SECT
STS
END_SECT
ENS
END
END
outside a section
ALIAS
ALS
TITLE
TTL
HEADER
STATISTICS
STT
HEADER
ELEM_TYPE
ETP
ELEM_TYPE
COORD_SYS
CS
COORD_SYSTEMS
MATERIAL
MAT
MATERIALS
ELEM_PROP
EP
PROPERTIES
ELEM_END_PROP
EEP
PROPERTIES
NODE
ND
MESH
ELEM
EL
MESH
EDGE
EDG
MESH_TOPOLOGY
SURFACE
SRF
MESH_TOPOLOGY
LOAD_TYPE
LTP
LOADS
CON_CASE
CC
LOADS
LOAD
LD
LOADS
SOLUTION
SLU
ANALYSIS
RESULT_TYPE
RTP
RESULTS
638
IndexAdditional Information
RESULT
RES
RESULTS
Special Instructions
FEM Neutral Format files include special instructions. To learn about these special
instructions, see the following topics:
Topic
Start and End of a Section
End Instruction
Defining Aliases
END Instruction
The END instruction appears as follows:
%END
The END instruction is optional. In a FEM Neutral Format file, all lines appearing after
END are skipped.
Defining Aliases
The ALIAS (ALS) instruction is used to define aliases.
You can define an alias for any keyword (instruction or key) and use it instead of the
full name or abbreviation.
639
Note: Do not create an alias with the name reserved for keywords and
standard abbreviations: this results in an error.
If several aliases are defined for a keyword, only the last one is considered valid. You
can use only alphanumeric aliases.
An alias is defined as follows:
%ALIAS : keyword alias
where:
keyword = full name or its abbreviation.
alias = user-defined alias.
A Typical Alias
%ALIAS : CON_CASE C
%ALIAS : EL FEM_ELEMENT
Referencing IDs
Use the following format to reference IDs of various geometry objects:
640
IndexAdditional Information
Value Types
Value_type appears in instructions describing applied loads/constraints and obtained
results. Typically, the format is as follows:
data_type <MASKABLE>
where:
data_type is one of the following:
SCALAR (SCL)
VECTOR_2 (VEC2) a vector with two components
VECTOR (VEC) a vector with three components
VECTOR_6 (VEC6) a vector with 6 components
TENSOR (TNS)
MASKABLE indicates that the instruction may have skipped (not defined) components.
MASKABLE can be defined for VECTOR_6 only.
For TENSOR, defined in the XYZ coordinates, the order of the components is the
following:
TX, TY, TZ, TXY, TYZ, TXZ
and the tensor is defined as:
T(X,Y,Z) = TX*X*X + TY*Y*Y + TZ*Z*Z + 2*TXY*X*Y + 2*TYZ*Y*Z + 2*TXZ*X*Z
The statement "Value corresponds to the given Value_type" means that the value is
one of the following:
1
2
3
6
641
A solver should create a file that contains all the information from the input file
"model.fnf," and append to this information the ANALYSIS and RESULTS sections.
You then end up with a file that contains all the information originally defined in the
input file, as well as the ANALYSIS and RESULTS data.
The solution results are expected to be in exact correspondence with model
definitions.
To learn about these sections and the instructions they can contain, see the following
topics:
Topic
HEADER Section
ELEM_TYPES Section
COORD_SYSTEMS Section
MATERIALS Section
PROPERTIES Section
MESH Section
MESH_TOPOLOGY Section
LOADS Section
ANALYSIS Section
RESULTS Section
HEADER Section
The HEADER section can contain the TITLE (TTL) and STATISTICS (STT) instructions.
IndexAdditional Information
%TITLE : bracket
ELEM_TYPES Section
The ELEM_TYPES section contains the ELEM_TYPE (ETP) instruction.
643
Supported Types
Class
SOLID
TETRA (TET)
SHELL
TRIANGLE (TRI),
QUAD (QUA)
BAR
SPAR,
BEAM,
GAP,
ADV_BEAM (ADB),
SPRING (SPR),
ADV_SPRING (ADS)
POINT
Sub_type can be LINEAR (LIN) or PARABOLIC (PAR). The default is LINEAR. This field
must be skipped if Class is BAR or POINT.
Typical ELEM_TYPE Instructions
%ELEM_TYPE 1 DEF : SOLID TETRA PARABOLIC 4 6 4
644
IndexAdditional Information
%ELEM_TYPE 2 EDGE : 1 1 2 4
%ELEM_TYPE 2 EDGE : 2 2 3 5
%ELEM_TYPE 2 EDGE : 3 3 1 6
%ELEM_TYPE 2 FACE : 1 1 2 3
%ELEM_TYPE 2 FACE : 2 1 3 2
COORD_SYSTEMS Section
The COORD_SYSTEMS section contains the COORD_SYS (CS) instructions.
CARTESIAN (CAR)default
CYLINDRICAL (CYL)
SPHERICAL (SPH)
IndexAdditional Information
X_vect0, X_vect1, and X_vect2 global coordinates of the X-vector of the described
coordinate system.
The abbreviated form for X_VECTOR is X.
Orig0, Orig1, and Orig2 global coordinates of the origin of the described coordinate
system. The abbreviated form for ORIGIN is ORG.
MATERIALS Section
The MATERIALS section contains the MATERIAL (MAT) instruction.
YOUNG_MODULUS (YNG)
POISSON_RATIO (PSN)
SHEAR_MODULUS (SHR)
MASS_DENSITY (DNS)
THERMAL_EXPANSION_COEFFICIENT (TEC)
THERM_EXPANSION_REF_TEMPERATURE (TER)
STRUCTURAL_DAMPING_COEFFICIENT (SDP)
STRESS_LIMIT_FOR_TENSION (SLT)
STRESS_LIMIT_FOR_COMPRESSION (SLC)
STRESS_LIMIT_FOR_SHEAR (SLS)
THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY (THC)
EMISSIVITY (EMS)
SPECIFIC_HEAT (SHT)
648
IndexAdditional Information
PROPERTIES Section
The PROPERTIES section may contain the following instructions:
ELEM_PROP (EP)
ELEM_END_PROP (EEP)
649
For beam elements with additional end properties, the key REF can be used to
reference instructions, defining the appropriate end properties (that is,
ELEM_END_PROP).
The supported element properties (keys of the ELEM_PROP instruction) are listed in
the following table.
Property Name
Abbreviation
Used for
THICKNESS
THI
SHELL elements
CROSS_SECTION_AREA
XSA
MASS_VALUE
MAS
MASS elements
MOMENT_OF_INERTIA
INE
GAP_VALUE
GV
GAP elements
NORMAL_STIFFNESS
NST
GAP elements
SLIDE_STIFFNESS
SST
GAP elements
EXTENSIONAL_STIFFNESS
EST
SPRING elements
TORSIONAL_STIFFNESS
TST
SPRING elements
VECTOR_STIFFNESS
VST
ADV_SPRING elements
DAMPING
DMP
ADV_SPRING elements
STRESS_RECOVERED
SRV
SHEAR_STIFF_FACTOR_IN_XZ_PLANE
SSZ
ADV_BEAM elements
SHEAR_STIFF_FACTOR_IN_XY_PLANE
SSY
ADV_BEAM elements
SHEAR_RELIEF_COEFF_IN_XZ_PLANE
SRZ
ADV_BEAM elements
SHEAR_RELIEF_COEFF_IN_XY_PLANE
SRY
ADV_BEAM elements
650
IndexAdditional Information
651
Abbreviation
Used for
CROSS_SECTION_AREA
XSA
BEAM and
ADV_BEAM
elements
PIN_FLAG
PIN
ADV_BEAM
elements
MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_ABOUT_Z_AXIS
MIZ
ADV_BEAM
elements
MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_ABOUT_Y_AXIS
MIY
ADV_BEAM
elements
AREA_PRODUCT_OF_INERTIA
API
ADV_BEAM
652
IndexAdditional Information
elements
TORSION_STIFFNESS_PARAMETER
TSP
ADV_BEAM
elements
NONSTRUCT_MASS_PER_UNIT_LENGTH
NML
ADV_BEAM
elements
Y_COORD_OF_POINT_C
YCC
ADV_BEAM
elements
Z_COORD_OF_POINT_C
ZCC
ADV_BEAM
elements
Y_COORD_OF_POINT_D
YCD
ADV_BEAM
elements
Z_COORD_OF_POINT_D
ZCD
ADV_BEAM
elements
Y_COORD_OF_POINT_E
YCE
ADV_BEAM
elements
Z_COORD_OF_POINT_E
ZCE
ADV_BEAM
elements
Y_COORD_OF_POINT_F
YCF
ADV_BEAM
elements
Z_COORD_OF_POINT_F
ZCF
ADV_BEAM
elements
NONSTR_MASS_MOMENT_PER_UNIT_LEN
NMU
ADV_BEAM
elements
WARPING_COEFFICIENT
WRC
ADV_BEAM
elements
Y_COORD_OF_GRAVITY_CENTER
YGC
ADV_BEAM
elements
Z_COORD_OF_GRAVITY_CENTER
ZGC
ADV_BEAM
elements
Y_COORD_OF_NEUTRAL_AXIS
YNA
ADV_BEAM
elements
Z_COORD_OF_NEUTRAL_AXIS
ZNA
ADV_BEAM
elements
653
654
IndexAdditional Information
655
MESH Section
The MESH section may contain the following instructions:
NODE (ND)
ELEM (EL)
656
IndexAdditional Information
Element Placement
This instruction has the following format:
node1_id node2_id ... [cs_id] [offsets]
For SOLID and SHELL elements, placement is a list of node_id's for all element
nodes. Corner nodes should be listed first in the order referenced in ELEM_TYPE;
then mid-nodesin the order of element edges. The format is as follows:
node1_id ... nodeN_id
where:
N num_nodes for linear elements from the corresponding ELEM_TYPE definition, or
(num_nodes + num_edges) for parabolic elements.
For MASS and To Ground SPRING elements, placement is defined as follows:
node_id <cs_id>
where:
node_id ID of the element node.
cs_id ID of the elemental coordinate system. For MASS elements, cs_id is required
only if inertia is defined for the element; that is, Prop_id is defined, and it references
a set of properties with the MOMENT_OF_INERTIA line.
For SPAR, GAP, SPRING elements, placement is:
node1_id node2_id
where:
node1_id, node2_id IDs of its end nodes.
For BEAM, ADV_BEAM elements, placement is defined as follows:
node1_id node2_id cs_id <offset1 offset2>
where:
node1_id, node2_id IDs of its end nodes.
cs_id ID of the elemental coordinate system.
offset1 vector representing the offset of the first bar end from node1 in the
elemental coordinate system.
657
offset2 vector representing the offset of the second bar end from node2 in the
elemental coordinate system.
The default for offset1 and offset2 is a zero vector.
For ADV_SPRING element, placement is:
node1_id node2_id cs_id
where:
node1_id, node2_id IDs of its end nodes.
cs_id ID of the elemental coordinate system.
Refer to the following example:
%ELEM_TYPE 5 DEF : BAR BEAM * 2 1 0
...
...
%COORD_SYS 3 DEF : * CARTESIAN
%COORD_SYS 3 X_VECTOR : 0. 1. 0.
%COORD_SYS 3 Y_VECTOR : 1. 0. 0.
%COORD_SYS 3 Z_VECTOR : 0. 0. -1.
%COORD_SYS 3 ORIGIN : 0.88 -99. -1.5
...
...
%ELEM_PROP 2 DEF : 5
%ELEM_PROP 2 CROSS_SECTION_AREA : 0.01 0.021
%ELEM_PROP 2 MOMENT_OF_INERTIA : 0. 0. 0.
...
...
%MATERIAL 1 DEF : ALUM ISOTROPIC
%MATERIAL 1 YOUNG_MODULUS : 1.900000E+07
658
IndexAdditional Information
MESH_TOPOLOGY Section
The MESH_TOPOLOGY section may contain the following instructions:
EDGE (EDG)
SURFACE(SRF)
LOADS Section
The LOADS section may contain the following instructions:
LOAD_TYPE (LTP)
CON_CASE (CC)
660
PRESSURE (PRE)
FORCE (FOR)
MOMENT (MOM)
DISPLACEMENT (DSP)
TEMPERATURE (TEM)
ACCELERATION (ACC)
ANG_VELOCITY (AVE)
CONVECTION (CNV)
RADIATION (RAD)
HEAT_FLUX (HFL)
HEAT_SOURCE (HSR)
FREQ_RANGE (FRQ)
IndexAdditional Information
NUM_MODES (MNU)
INIT_GUESS (ING)
661
Placement
If Placement_type in LOAD_TYPE is:
662
IndexAdditional Information
ANALYSIS Section
The ANALYSIS section may contain the SOLUTION (SLU) instruction.
RESULTS Section
The RESULTS section may contain the following instructions:
RESULT_TYPE (RTP)
RESULT (RES)
663
DISPLACEMENT (DSP)
STRESS (STR)
STRAIN (STN)
REACTION_FORCE (RF)
ERROR_ESTIMATE (ERR)
THERMAL_STRAIN (THS)
TEMPERATURE (TEM)
HEAT_FLUX (HFL)
HEAT_GRADIENT (HGR)
MODE_FREQUENCY (FRQ)
Result_type
NODE
ELEM
ERROR_ESTIMATE
ELEM_NODE
BODY
MODE_FREQUENCY
664
Result_type
DISPLACEMENT, REACTION_FORCE, STRESS, STRAIN, TEMPERATURE,
HEAT_FLUX, HEAT_GRADIENT
IndexAdditional Information
ELEM
ERROR_ESTIMATE
ELEM_NODE
BODY
MODE_FREQUENCY
ELEM_FACE
FACE_NODE
Placement of Results
The following table lists possible placements depending on Placement_type given in
the RESULT_TYPE instruction.
665
Placement_type
Placement
ELEM
elem_id
ELEM_FACE
elem_id face_in_el_id
ELEM_NODE
elem_id node_in_el_id
FACE_NODE
NODE
node_id
BODY
none
IndexAdditional Information
667
Specialized Information
Understanding Fatigue Analysis
This document provides background information on fatigue and describes the
methodology used in Mechanica fatigue analysis. It covers the following topics:
Topic
History of Fatigue
Physics of Fatigue
The E-N Approach
Strain Cycles
Includes the effect of mean residual stresses, hysteresis loop capture and
rainflow cycle counting.
Factors that Affect Fatigue Life
Includes Component Size, Loading Type, Surface Finish, Surface Treatment
(that is, Mechanical Treatments, Plating, and Thermal Treatments), and Effect
of Surface Treatments on Endurance Limit.
History of Fatigue
The majority of component designs involve parts subjected to fluctuating or cyclic
loads. Such loading induces fluctuating or cyclic stresses that often result in failure
by fatigue. About 95% of all structural failures occur through a fatigue mechanism.
The damage done during the fatigue process is cumulative and generally
unrecoverable, due to the following:
It was well-known that wood or metal could be made to break by repeatedly bending
it back and forth with a large amplitude. But, it was then discovered that repeated
stressing can produce fracture even when the stress amplitude is apparently well
within the elastic range of the material. When fatigue failures of railway axles
became a widespread problem in the middle of the nineteenth century, this drew
668
IndexAdditional Information
attention to cyclic loading effects. This was the first time that many similar
components had been subjected to millions of cycles at stress levels well below the
monotonic tensile yield stress. Between 1852 and 1870 the German railway engineer
August Whler set up and conducted the first systematic fatigue investigation.
Some of Whler's data are for Krupp axle steel and are plotted, in terms of nominal
stress (S) vs. number of cycles to failure (N), on what has become known as the S-N
diagram. Each curve on such a diagram is still referred to as a Whler line.
669
Physics of Fatigue
Since 1830, it has been recognized that metal under a repetitive or fluctuating load
will fail at a stress level lower than required to cause failure under a single
application of the same load.
The following diagram shows a simple component subjected to a uniform sinusoidally
varying force. After a period of time, a crack can be seen to initiate on the
circumference of the hole. This crack will then propagate through the component
until the remaining intact section is incapable of sustaining the imposed stresses and
the component fails.
670
IndexAdditional Information
A crack initiates in this way until it reaches the grain boundary. At this point the
mechanism is gradually transferred to the adjacent grain
When the crack has grown through approximately 3 grains, it is seen to change its
direction of propagation. Stage I growth follows the direction of the maximum shear
plane, or 45 to the direction of loading. During Stage II the physical mechanism for
fatigue changes. The crack is now sufficiently large to form a geometrical stress
concentration. A tensile plastic zone is created at the crack tip as shown in the
following diagram. After this stage, the crack propagates perpendicular to the
direction of the applied load.
As the physical mechanism for fatigue is divided into two stages, the methods of
analysis are also conventionally divided into two stages. Stage I is typically analyzed
using the local strain (or E-N) approach, while Stage II is analyzed using a fracture
mechanics based approach.
A complete fatigue prediction could therefore use a combination of both methods:
Total Life = Life to initiation + Life taken to propagate crack to failure
671
However, most engineering components spend most of their time at either one stage
or the other. In this case, it is normal to conservatively consider only one stage. For
example, in most ground vehicle designs, life is typically governed by time to
initiation. Components are relatively stiff and the materials fairly brittle. Once the
crack has initiated, it takes a relatively short time to propagate to failure.
By contrast, many aerospace applications use flexible components made of very
ductile materials. In this case, cracks propagate relatively slowly and so the fracture
mechanics approaches are usually more appropriate.
The physical nature of fatigue was not widely understood during the early days.
August Whler therefore took a more pragmatic view of fatigue analysis. The method
he developed later became known as nominal stress (or S-N) fatigue analysis. This
did not differentiate between the Stage I and II growth methods and instead related
the nominal stress range to the time taken to complete failure.
Though S-N analysis is still widely used in test-based fatigue analysis, it has one
major drawback for CAE applications. Fatigue initiation is driven by local plastic
strains, but S-N analysis uses elastic stress as the input. Therefore, S-N analysis is
unsuitable for performing CAE analysis on components containing local areas of
plasticity. For this reason local strain (or E-N) methods are more universally suitable.
Mechanica fatigue analysis uses the E-N method.
672
IndexAdditional Information
Mechanica uses a generic set of fatigue properties to model low alloy steels,
unalloyed steels, aluminum alloys, and titanium alloys. These generic properties
have been compiled by Baumel Jr. and Seeger and are known as the Uniform
Material Law. While they cannot be expected to give accurate fatigue lives for
practical purposes, they are ideal for determining whether a component is likely to
suffer from fatigue problems, and whether a more detailed analysis is needed before
commissioning. For more information on the Uniform Material Law, see Materials
Science Monographs, 61, "Materials Data for Cyclic Loading, Supplement 1."
The following discussion covers two aspects of fatigue theory that are critical to an
understanding of the how Fatigue Advisor measures fatigue:
Topic
Strain Cycles
Factors That Affect Fatigue Life
Strain Cycles
Before looking in more detail at the E-N procedure, it helps to understand the three
different types of cyclic strains that contribute to the fatigue process. The following
diagrams and descriptions explain each separate type.
The first figure illustrates a fully-reversed strain cycle with a sinusoidal form. This is
an idealized loading condition typically found in rotating shafts operating at constant
speed without overloads. This is also the type of strain cycle used for most fatigue
tests. For this kind of cycle, the maximum ( max) and minimum ( min) strains are of
equal magnitude but opposite sign. Usually tensile strain is considered to be positive
and compressive strain negative. The strain range, r, is the algebraic difference
between the maximum and minimum strains in a cycle.
r
max
min
a,
max
/2=(
min)
/2
673
The second figure illustrates the more general situation where the maximum and
minimum strains are not equal. In this case, they are both tensile and define a mean
offset, m = ( max + min) / 2, for the cyclic loading.
As mentioned above, most basic fatigue data are collected using fully-reversed loads.
Therefore, these data are not directly applicable for strain cycles with a non-zero
mean ( m 0). In order to predict more realistic life estimates for strain cycles with
tensile or compressive mean stress, results of the tests conducted using fullyreversed loads are corrected. The choice of corrective approach to use depends on
whether the mean stress is primarily tensile or compressive.
The reason for this can be seen in the following plot which schematically illustrates
the effect of mean stress on the strain-life (E-N) curve. Viewed conceptually, tensile
mean stress acts to pull open a crack while compressive mean stress works to keep
it closed. Typically the effects are concentrated at the long life end of the diagram,
with tensile mean stress reducing life and compressive mean stress extending it.
674
IndexAdditional Information
Since the tests required to calculate E-N curves for a range of mean stresses are
quite expensive, several empirical relationships have been developed to model the
effect of mean stress. Of all the proposed methods, two have been most widely
accepted:
For loading sequences which are predominantly tensile in nature, the Smith, Watson,
Topper approach is more conservative and is therefore recommended. In the case
where the loading is predominantly compressive, particularly for wholly compressive
cycles, the Morrow correction can be used to provide more realistic life estimates.
Mechanica uses both methods and the most appropriate method is automatically
chosen. For more information on the Smith, Watson, Topper approach, see "A
Stress-Strain Function for the Fatigue of Metals", Journal of Materials, Vol. 5, No. 4,
1970. For more information on the Morrow correction, see "Fatigue Design
Handbook", Advances in Engineering, Vol. 4, Society of Automotive Engineers, 1968.
The next figure illustrates a more complex, variable amplitude loading pattern that is
closer to the cyclic strains found in real structures.
675
For variable amplitude loading it is necessary to extract the fatigue damaging cycles
from the signal and then evaluate the damage carried out by each cycle. The total
damage is the sum of the damage caused by each individual cycle. Each fatigue cycle
is extracted by a process known as hysteresis loop capture. The loci of the stress and
strain are plotted as shown in the following diagram.
When a stress-strain hysteresis loop is closed, then the strain range and mean stress
are returned and the damage calculated using the E-N curve modified for mean
stress correction. This analysis is carried out over the whole strain time signal until
all the cycles have been extracted and the total damage evaluated. A very efficient
algorithm has been developed to perform cycle extraction known as: Rainflow Cycle
Counting. This is the algorithm that Mechanica uses.
Mechanica normally uses a linear elastic solution to determine the pseudo-elastic
strains in a component. In other words, the solution ignores plasticity. Before
proceeding with the fatigue analysis, these strains are automatically converted into
non-linear elastic-plastic strains using Neuber's relationship.
676
IndexAdditional Information
The
The
The
The
To account for these effects, specific modifying factors are typically applied to the
test result so that:
e
= 'eCnotchCsizeCloadCsur . . .
tension where the stress gradient is absent. The value for Csize is estimated from one
of the following.
If the diameter of the test specimen shaft is d < 6 mm:
Csize = 1
If the diameter of the test specimen shaft is 6 mm < d < 250 mm
Csize = 1.189d-0.097
The effect of size is particularly important for the analysis of rotating shafts such as
might be found in vehicle powertrains.
For situations where components do not have a round cross section, the following
equation calculates an equivalent diameter, deq, for a rectangular section under
bending with width (w) and thickness (t):
deq2 = 0.65wt
The Influence of Loading Type
Fatigue data measured using one type of cyclic loading, axial tension for example,
may be "corrected" to represent the data that would have been obtained had the test
been performed using some other loading methodology such as torsion or bending.
The standardized rotating bend test calls for tests to be carried out under conditions
of fully reversed bending.
In moving from one loading condition to another, the values of Cload to be used with
the endurance limit, e are detailed below:
Measured
Loading
Target
Loading
load
Axial
to
Bending
1.25
Axial
to
Torsion
0.725
Bending
to
Torsion
0.58
Bending
to
Axial
0.8
Torsion
to
Axial
1.38
Torsion
to
Bending
1.72
Thus, using the values from this table, if an axial tension load produces a strain of
e, the strain produced under a bending load would be 1.25 e.
In addition to influencing the endurance limit, loading conditions can also influence
the Basquin slope, b, which is used when plotting the E-N curve on log-log scale.
This effect is usually taken into account by modification of the strain at 103 cycles,
678
IndexAdditional Information
3, as well as
factor:
Measured
Loading
e.
Target
Loading
C'
modification
load
Axial
to
Torsion
0.82
Bending
to
Torsion
0.82
Torsion
to
Axial
1.22
Torsion
to
Bending
1.22
679
Note that some of the curves presented in this figure include effects other than just
surface finish. For example, the forged and hot rolled curves include the effect of
decarburization.
Other diagrams present the surface finish correction factor in a more quantitative
way by using a quantitative measure of surface roughness such as RA (the root mean
square) or AA (the arithmetic average). The following diagram shows the effect of
surface roughness on the surface finish correction factor.
Values of surface roughness associated with each of the manufacturing processes are
readily available in handbooks, as in the example below:
Type of Finish
(Microns)
Surface Roughness
Lathe-formed
2.67
0.15
Hand Polished
0.13
Ground
0.18
Superfinished
0.18
0.05
680
IndexAdditional Information
At time T=1, bending moment M1 is being applied and is in the elastic range.
At time T=2, the bending moment has increased to M2, the yield stress (Sy)
has been reached, and the surface undergoes plastic deformation.
When the external force is removed, the regions that were plastically
deformed prevent the adjacent elastic regions from complete elastic recovery
to the unstrained condition. In this way, the elastically deformed regions are
681
left in residual tension, and the plastically deformed regions are in a state of
residual compression. The result is the stress distribution at time T=3.
For many purposes, residual stress can be considered identical to the stresses
produced by an external force. Thus, the presence of a compressive residual stress
at the surface of a component will effectively decrease the probability of fatigue
failure.
The preceding figure illustrates the superposition of applied and residual stresses.
682
IndexAdditional Information
Surface treatments are divided broadly into mechanical, thermal, and plating
processes. The first two processes provide a compressive layer. The plating process
provides a tensile residual stress. Following is detailed description of each process:
683
Geometry
Not Nitrided
Nitrided
Un-notched
310
620
Semicircular notch
175
600
V notch
175
550
Plating Chrome and nickel plating of steel components can decrease the
endurance limit by more than half, due to the creation of tensile residual
stresses at the surface. These tensile stresses are a direct result of the plating
process itself. As in the case of mechanically induced surface stresses, the
effect of plating is most pronounced at the long life end of the spectrum and
also with higher strength materials.
Introducing a compressive residual stress prior to the plating process such as
shot peening or nitriding can reduce the harmful effects of plating. Annealing
components after plating, thereby relieving the tensions, is an alternative
approach.
Shot Peened
Cold Rolled
Nitrided
Polished
+15%
+50%
+100%
Ground
+20%
+0%
+100%
Machined
+30%
+70%
+100%
Hot Rolled
+40%
+0%
+100%
684
IndexAdditional Information
Cast
+40%
+0%
+100%
Forged
+100%
+0%
+100%
Whatever correction was made by the surface finish, applying a surface treatment
will have a subsequent effect based on the preceding table. For example, if
machining reduces the endurance limit by 30%, then from the table it can be seen
that cold rolling will recover the loss by increasing the limit 70%.
685
Overview
The formulae given in this document express the fundamental relationships between
shell forces, moments, strains, curvature changes, and shell properties and results.
These formulae are provided to unambiguously define the conventions used to
describe the various modeling and results data for shells.
You specify properties that define the mechanical behavior of laminate shells on the
laminate stiffness version of the Shell Property Definition dialog box. See About
Shell Properties for more information. At the point for which you want to see results,
you define the following properties relative to the material orientation:
You can review the following results quantities with respect to the material
orientation at the point of interest or with respect to a coordinate system. See
Relative Results for more information.
686
IndexAdditional Information
See the List of Symbols for the symbols that represent these terms.
These formulae and their descriptions are not meant to be a tutorial for the analysis
of shells. More detailed information concerning the modeling of laminated or
orthotropic shells may be found in the texts by Jones (1), Reddy (2), Tsai (3), Ugural
(4) and others. The Bibliography describes these texts.
The figures and equations presented in this section are given for flat shells, or plates.
The engineering concepts presented here generalize to curved shells, but the
mathematical descriptions of curved shells are more complicated and will not be
given.
687
As mentioned above, it is assumed that the displacement of any point (x, y, z) in the
shell can be expressed in terms of the displacement and rotation of the point (x, y,
0) on the midsurface of the shell. Specifically, it is assumed that:
where:
and
) and curvature
Note that Equation (A.2) contains the tensor shear strain components,
and
,
and not the engineering shear strain components, which are twice the values of the
tensor shear strain components.
For flat shells, the tensor shear strain components are:
and
688
IndexAdditional Information
The following figure illustrates the sign conventions employed for the resultant forces
and moments, and transverse shear forces. Note that a positive moment,
,
induces positive strain,
, in the top half of the shell (z > 0) and negative strain in
the bottom half of the shell (z < 0).
689
The relationship between the shell resultants, and the midsurface strains and
curvature changes are given by:
690
IndexAdditional Information
and:
and
and
The shell stiffness and thermal resultants introduced in Equations (A.6) and (A.7) are
defined by integrating the material properties of the shell through the thickness of
the shell. The extensional, bending, and extensional-bending stiffnesses are given
by:
and:
and:
691
where
where:
Note that if the material of the shell is distributed symmetrically about the
midsurface, then the integral in Equation (A.9) vanishes and the extensional-bending
coupling stiffnesses
are identically zero.
The resultant thermal forces and moments are given by:
and:
where:
If the change in temperature is uniform through the thickness of the shell, then the
in Equations (A.12) and (A.13) may be removed from the integral, resulting in
Equations (A.14) and (A.15):
692
IndexAdditional Information
where
coefficients, which are given by:
The mass properties for shells are also obtained by integrating the material property
data through the thickness of the shell. The mass per unit area, , is given by:
where
, is given by:
693
List of Symbols
The following table defines the symbols used in this document:
Symbol
Definition
coefficients of thermal expansion
(i,j = 1,2,6)
(k,l = 4,5)
(i,j = 1,2,6)
(k,l = 4,5)
material stiffness
(i,j = 1,2,6)
694
IndexAdditional Information
(i,j = 1,2,6)
shell thickness
displacement
displacement of the shell midsurface
x, y
midsurface coordinates
Bibliography
1.
2.
3.
4.
695
Verification Guide
Verification Overview
Mechanica is a family of design analysis products. The main products are Structure
and Thermal. Several optional modules are tightly integrated with these main
products.
Mechanica documentation is written for mechanical engineers. It assumes a working
knowledge of mechanical engineering theory, terminology, and practice. However,
you do not need any specialized knowledge of design analysis to use Mechanica
software or its documentation.
Read the following topics for information on using this book, Verification Guide, and
for an overview of the documentation available for the current release of Mechanica.
This preface covers:
Topic
Using This Guide
References
696
IndexAdditional Information
Organization
Here are the topics covered in this guide:
Structure Models
Static Analysis
Modal Analysis
Thermal Models
Vibration Models
Buckling Models
Buckling Analysis
Nonlinear Models
697
Large Deformation
Analysis
Optimization Models
Optimization Analysis
The results in this guide are from the current release of Mechanica running on the
Sun workstation.
If you are running these programs on a different platform, your results and what you
see on the screen may differ slightly from the results and graphics in this document.
We have not discovered any significant differences in any results on the different
platforms that we support.
Identification System
The verification problems are identified by their study name. For example, mvsm003
indicates that this is the third Structure modal analysis problem in the Verification
Guide. The study names are determined by the following convention:
698
IndexAdditional Information
s Static
l Laminate
t Dynamic Time Response
f Dynamic Frequency Response
k Dynamic Shock Response
b Buckling
c Contact
d Large Deformation
p Prestress
o
Thermal
s Steady-State
t Transient
Optimization
o Optimization
Use these design study names if you want to run a study or review results.
699
Results Conventions
This section describes the conventions used in the results table included for each
problem. Following is an example of a results table:
Theory
Radial Deflection @
Load
2.8769e
3
MSC/
NASTRAN
2.8715e3
Structure
% Difference
2.8725e
3
0.18%
(m=disp_x_radial)
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
33
Refer to the following information for an explanation of each column in the results
table:
Beneath the results quantity name, in parentheses, is additional information you can
use to view the results on your system. In this area, you will find one or more pieces
of information (xxxx is the name of the measure, analysis, or load; x is the mode
number):
When multiple analyses, loads, or measures exist in a study, the analysis name and
load name, measure name, or mode number are listed.
You can use this information in two ways. You can view or print out the study.rpt file
in a shell, or you can view the information in the summary file for the design study.
To display the summary file, open the model with the same name as the study,
700
IndexAdditional Information
select Run from the Main menu, then select Status. Next, select Summary from the
Design Study Status dialog box and find the measure name.
For verification problems, the bottom line of the table displays the convergence
percentage and the type of convergence, the maximum p-level order reached at
convergence, and the number of equations required for convergence. For Structure
models, the convergence option Local Edge Disp & Local Strain Energy is abbreviated
as Local Disp and SE in this guide. For Thermal models, the convergence option Local
Temp and Energy Norm is abbreviated Local Temp and EN.
Installation Instructions
The verification models are on the Pro/ENGINEER CD-ROM you received. The models
are in the ms_verf.23 directory. You install the Mechanica verification models with
your Mechanica installation.
References
Following is a list of references used in this guide:
701
702
IndexAdditional Information
Static
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Comparison:
Reference:
703
Description:
Find the radial deflection at the loaded end of a cantilever cylinder that is
modeled axisymmetrically.
Note: Element B is optional, but has been included here to increase the accuracy of
results in the area local to the loaded end and to reduce computation time.
Specifications
Element Type:
2D shell (2)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 6
radius: 5
thickness: 0.01
704
IndexAdditional Information
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraint:
Load:
placed on point C: FX = 1
Distribution: N/A
Spatial Variation: N/A
Theory
Radial Deflection @
Load
2.8769e
3
MSC/
NASTRAN
2.8715e3
Structure
% Difference
2.8725e
3
0.15%
(a=disp_x_radial)
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
33
Static
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 15
Reference:
705
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
2D shell (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
radius: 40
thickness: 1
Material Properties:
706
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
IndexAdditional Information
Constraints:
Location
Degrees of Freedom
clamped
placed on point B:
simple
placed on point B:
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
clamped
uniform
simple
uniform
Theory
ANSYS
Structure
% Difference
7200
7152
7200
0.0%
Max P: 5
No. Equations:
15
29701
0.0%
Max P: 5
No. Equations:
16
Maximum Stress
2970
2989
(m=max_prin_mag, a=simple)
707
Static
Model Type:
2D Plane Stress
Comparison:
Reference:
Singer, Ferdinand L. Strength of Materials. Harper & Row, 1962, Art. 52, p.
133.
Description:
Find the bending stress at the fixed end for a cantilever plate subjected to
an in-plane shear load.
Specifications
Element Type:
2D plate (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 3
height: 0.6
thickness: 0.1
708
IndexAdditional Information
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Loads:
The theoretical results are based on elementary beam theory. Structure models the actual physical
structure, capturing the singular stresses present at the constrained corners. Setting Poisson's
ratio equal to zero reduces the model to its elementary form.
Theory
MSC/
NASTRAN
Structure
% Difference
6.0e4
5.5190e4
6.0121e4
0.20%
(m=max_stress_xx)
Max P: 4
No. Equations:
22
Static
Model Type:
2D Plane Strain
709
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to
Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I.
Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0
Cost Per Unit Mass: 0
Young's Modulus: 1000
Poisson's Ratio:
0.49 (case 1)
0.499 (case 2)
0.4999 (case 3)
Thermal Expansion: 0
710
IndexAdditional Information
Conductivity: 0
Constraints (UCS):
Loads:
Theory
Structure
% Difference
5.0399e
3
5.0395e3
< 0.01%
Max P: 6
No. Equations:
38
5.0555e3
0.09%
Max P: 6
No. Equations:
38
(m=rad_disp)
5.0602e
3
(m=rad_disp)
711
5.0623e
3
5.0577e3
0.09%
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
46
(m=rad_disp)
Static
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Comparison:
Reference:
Crandall S.H., Dahl N.C. , and Larnder T.J. An Introduction to the Mechanics
of Solids. 2nd ed. NY: McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1972, pp. 293-297.
Description:
712
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (3)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
inner radius: 6
height: 8
thickness: 6
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints (UCS):
Loads:
713
Stress Radial
r = 6.5
(m=r6_5_radial)
Stress Hoop
Theory
MSC/
NASTRAN
Structure
%
Difference
8.03
8.05
7.9721
0.72%
14.69
14.73
14.69
0.0%
.30
.30
.26636
2.98%
6.96
6.96
6.96
0.0%
(m=r6_5_hoop)
Stress Radial
r =
11.5
(m=r11_5_radial)
Stress Hoop
(m=r11_5_hoop)
Max P: 4
Static
Model Type:
3D
714
No. Equations: 54
IndexAdditional Information
Comparison:
Reference:
Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Book Co., 1982, p. 96.
Description:
A cantilever beam is subjected to a load at the free end. Find the deflection
at the free end and the bending stress at the fixed end.
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 30
Beam Properties:
Area: 0.310
J: 0.0631
IYY: 0.0241
IZZ: 0.0390
CY: 0.5
CZ: 0.375
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Material Properties:
715
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Loads:
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection @ Tip
Theory
MSC/
NASTRAN
Structure
% Difference
2.3077
2.3077
2.3077
0.0%
38461
38461
38461
0.0%
(m=max_disp_y)
Max P: 4
No. Equations:
24
Static
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 2
Reference:
716
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (4)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 480
Beam Properties:
Area: 50.65
J: 7893
IYY: 1
IZZ: 7892
CY: 15
CZ: 15
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Material Properties:
717
Constraints
Loads:
Location
Degrees of Freedom
placed on point B:
placed on point D:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
uniform
uniform
Theory
ANSYS
Structure
% Difference
11400
11404
11404
0.03%
0.182
0.182
0.182
0.0%
(m=max_beam_bending)
718
Max P: 4
No. Equations:
96
IndexAdditional Information
Static
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to
Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I.
Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
Description:
extension
in-plane shear
out-of-plane shear
twisting loads
Find the tip displacement in the direction of the load for
each case.
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (3)
Units:
IPS
719
Dimensions:
length: 6
width: 0.2
thickness: 0.1
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
total load
uniform
in_plane
total load
uniform
out_plane
total load
uniform
twist
placed on point E: MX = 1
total load
N/A
Theory
Structure
% Difference
3e5
2.998e5
0.06%
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
extension
720
IndexAdditional Information
0.1081
(l=in_plane, m=max_disp_y)
0.1078
0.27%
0.4321
0.4310
0.27%
0.034081
0.03393
0.44%
(l=out_plane,
m=max_disp_z)
Max P: 6
No. Equations:
396
There is a typographical error in Table 3 (p. 10) of MacNeal-Harder for the twist load on a
straight beam. It should read 0.03408.
Static
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to
Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I.
Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
721
Description:
extension
in-plane shear
out-of-plane shear
twisting
Find the tip displacement in the direction of the load for
each case.
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (3)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 6
width: 0.2
thickness: 0.1
Material Properties:
722
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
IndexAdditional Information
Constraints:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
total load
uniform
in_plane
total load
uniform
out_plane
total load
uniform
twist
placed on point E: MX = 1
total load
N/A
Theory
Structure
% Difference
3e5
2.998e5
0.08%
0.1081
0.1078
0.32%
0.4321
.4307
0.32%
0.034081
0.03393
0.44%
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
extension
723
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
492
There is a typographical error in Table 3 (p. 10) of the McNeal-Harder reference for the twist
load on a straight beam. It should read 0.03408.
Static
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to
Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I.
Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
Description:
A curved beam, spanning a 90 arc, is fixed at one end and free at the other.
If the beam is subjected to in-plane and out-of-plane loads at the free end,
find the tip displacement in the direction of the load for both cases.
724
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (2)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Loads:
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
725
in_plane
total load
uniform
out_plane
total load
uniform
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.08734
0.08834
1.14%
0.5022
0.50057
0.32%
(l=in_plane, m=tip_disp_y)
Max P: 6
No. Equations:
234
Static
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to
Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I.
Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
Description:
A flat plate is simply supported on all four edges. One quarter of the plate is
modeled using symmetry. The plate is loaded with two different loads,
including uniform pressure and a point load at the center. Find the
displacement at the center of the plate.
726
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (2)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 5
width: 1
thickness: 0.0001
Material Properties:
Constraints
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Location
Degrees of Freedom
727
Loads:
pressure
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
uniform
N/A
N/A
pressure = 1e4
point
placed on B: FZ = 1e4
Displacement @ Center
Theory
Structure
% Difference
12.97
12.97
0.0%
16.96
16.80
0.94%
(l=pressure, m=disp_z_cen)
Displacement @ Center
(l=point, m=disp_z_cen)
Max P: 9
No. Equations:
465
Static
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to
Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I.
Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
728
IndexAdditional Information
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (2)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 5
width: 1
thickness: 0.0001
Material Properties:
Constraints
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Location
Degrees of Freedom
729
Loads:
pressure
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
uniform
N/A
N/A
pressure = 1e4
point
placed on B: FZ = 1e4
Displacement @ Center
Theory
Structure
% Difference
2.56
2.604
1.71%
7.23
7.194
0.49%
(l=pressure, m=measure1)
Displacement @ Center
(l=point, m=measure1)
Max P: 9
No. Equations:
823
Static
Model Type:
3D
730
IndexAdditional Information
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to
Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I.
Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (4)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
radius: 10
731
Material Properties:
Constraints
Loads:
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Location
Degrees of Freedom
placed on point D
fixed in TransT
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation
placed on point C: FR = 1
N/A
N/A
placed on E: FR = 1
N/A
N/A
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.0924
0.0933
0.97%
(m=disp_rad)
732
Max P: 9
No. Equations:
965
IndexAdditional Information
Static
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to
Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I.
Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (2)
Units:
IPS
733
Dimensions:
length: 12
width: 1.1
thickness: 0.32
angle of twist 90o (from fixed to free end)
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Loads:
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
in_plane
total load
uniform
out_plane
total load
uniform
734
IndexAdditional Information
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.005424
0.005407
0.31%
0.001754
0.001771
0.97%
(l=in_plane, m=disp_tip_y1)
Max P: 6
No. Equations:
303
Static
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to
Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I.
Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
Description:
735
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 25
radius: 25
arc span: 40
thickness: 0.25
Material Properties:
736
Mass Density: 0
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
IndexAdditional Information
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
(UCS)
(UCS)
(UCS)
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
uniform
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.3024
0.3008
0.53%
(m=disp_z_mid)
737
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
148
Static
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Reference:
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
738
2D shell (4)
IndexAdditional Information
Units:
MNS
Dimensions:
radius: 1
thickness: 0.025
Material Properties:
Constraints
constraint1
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Location
Degrees of Freedom
placed on point A:
placed on point E:
fixed in TransY
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
load1
739
Theory
Structure1
% Difference
38.5
38.62
0.3%
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
72
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results, you must
define a result window for the Stress ZZ (Bottom), and query the value at point D.
Static
Model Type:
Plane Stress
Reference:
Description:
740
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
2D plate (2)
Units:
MNS
Dimensions:
thickness: 0.1
Material Properties:
Thermal Expansion: 0
741
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Location
Degrees of Freedom
constraint1
fixed in TransX
placed on point B:
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
load1
Stress XX at point B
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.247
0.247
0%
(m=measure1)
742
Max P: 8
No. Equations:
136
IndexAdditional Information
Static
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (6)
Units:
MNS
743
Dimensions:
length: 10
thickness: 0.1
Material Properties:
Constraints
constraint1
Loads:
load1
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Location
Degrees of Freedom
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution
Spatial Variation
total load
uniform
total load
uniform
744
IndexAdditional Information
Theory
Structure1
% Difference
108.8
110.05
1.1%
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
870
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results, you must
define a result window for the measure Stress XX (Top and Bottom), and query the value at point
M. Then average the top (114.9) and bottom (105.2) values.
Static
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
745
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (1)
Units:
MNS
Dimensions:
radius: 1
thickness: 0.01
Material Properties:
746
Thermal Expansion: 0
IndexAdditional Information
Constraints
constraint1
Loads:
load1
Conductivity: 0
Degrees of Freedom
Location
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution
Spatial Variation
uniform
Theory
Structure1
% Difference
60.0
59.6
.67%
747
Max P: 5
No. Equations:
66
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results, you must
define a result window for measure Stress XX (Top) with Face Grid on, and query the value at
point E.
Static
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. 5th Edition.
NY: McGrawHill Book Co. 1982, p. 64.
Description:
This Beam Sections model contains the following element types and corresponding
results:
Topic
748
IndexAdditional Information
Square Beam
Rectangle Beam
Hollow Rectangle Beam
Channel Beam
I-Section Beam
L-Section Beam
Diamond Beam
Solid Circle Beam
Hollow Circle Beam
Ellipse Beam
Hollow Ellipse Beam
Note: In all cases, the displacement results are dependent upon the direction of the
load. Thus, in this problem, all the results listed as Deflection at Tip may be
interpreted as positive or negative.
Square Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
Square Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
a: 0.25
Beam Properties:
Area: 0.0625
J: 0.000549316
IYY: 0.000325521
IZZ: 0.000325521
CY: 0.125
CZ: 0.125
Material Properties:
749
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
sq_d_x
1.6e3
1.6e3
0%
750
IndexAdditional Information
transverse y
sq_d_y
9.216e1
9.215996e1
0%
transverse z
sq_d_z
9.216e1
9.215996e1
0%
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
sq_s_ten
1.6e3
1.6e3
0%
transverse y
sq_s_bnd
1.152003e6
1.151999e6
0%
transverse z
sq_s_bnd
1.152003e6
1.151999e6
0%
Stress:
Convergence:
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
751
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Rectangle Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
Rectangle Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
b: 1
d: 0.25
Beam Properties:
752
Area: 0.25
J: 0.00438829
IYY: 0.0208333
IZZ: 0.00130208
IndexAdditional Information
Material Properties:
CY: 0.125
CZ: 0.5
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
753
axial
rct_d_x
4.0e4
4.0e4
0%
transverse y
rct_d_y
2.304e1
2.304e1
0%
transverse z
rct_d_z
1.44
1.44
0%
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
rct_s_ten
4.0e2
4.0e2
0%
transverse y
rct_s_bnd
2.880e5
2.880e5
0%
transverse z
rct_s_bnd
7.200e4
7.200e4
0%
Stress:
Convergence:
754
IndexAdditional Information
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
b: 1
bi: 0.875
755
d: 0.25
di: 0.125
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Area: 0.140625
J: 0.00343323
IYY: 0.013855
IZZ: 0.00115967
CY: 0.125
CZ: 0.5
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
756
IndexAdditional Information
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hrct_d_x
7.112e4
7.111e4
0.02%
transverse y
hrct_d_y
2.5869e1
2.5869e1
0%
transverse z
hrct_d_z
2.1653
2.1653
0%
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hrct_s_ten
7.112e2
7.111e2
0.02%
transverse y
hrct_s_bnd
3.2337e5
3.2337e5
0%
Stress:
757
transverse z
hrct_s_bnd
1.0826e5
1.0826e5
Convergence:
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Channel Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
758
Channel Beam
0%
IndexAdditional Information
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
b: 1
di: 1
t: 0.125
tw: 0.125
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Area: 0.375
J: 0.00179932
IYY: 0.0369466
IZZ: 0.0898438
CY: 0.625
CZ: 0.645833
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
759
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
chnl_d_x
2.6667e4
2.6667e4
0%
transverse y
chnl_d_y
3.339e1
3.339e1
0%
transverse z
chnl_d_z
8.1198e1
8.1198e1
0%
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
Stress:
Load
760
IndexAdditional Information
axial
chnl_s_ten
2.6667e2
2.6667e2
0%
transverse y
chnl_s_bnd
2.087e4
2.087e4
0%
transverse z
chnl_s_bnd
5.244e4
5.244e4
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
I-Section Beam
761
Specifications
Element Type:
I-Section Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
b: 1
di: 1
t: 0.125
tw: 0.125
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Area: 0.375
J: 0.00179932
IYY: 0.0209961
IZZ: 0.0898438
CY: 0.625
CZ: 0.5
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
762
Magnitude:
IndexAdditional Information
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
I_d_x
2.6667e4
2.6667e4
0%
transverse y
I_d_y
3.3391e1
3.3391e1
0%
transverse z
I_d_z
1.4288
1.4288
0%
Stress:
763
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
I_s_ten
2.6667e2
2.6667e2
0%
transverse y
I_s_bnd
2.0870e4
2.0870e4
0%
transverse z
I_s_bnd
7.1442e4
7.1442e4
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
764
IndexAdditional Information
transverse z
0%
264
L-Section Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
L-Section Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
b: 1
d: 1
t: 0.125
tw: 0.125
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Area: 0.25
J: 0.00119955
IYY: 0.0105794
IZZ: 0.0423177
CY: 0.789352
CZ: 0.433047
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
765
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
L_d_x
4.0e4
4.0e4
0%
transverse y
L_d_y
7.0892e1
7.0892e1
0%
766
IndexAdditional Information
transverse z
L_d_z
2.8357
2.8357
0%
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
L_s_ten
4e2
4e2
0%
transverse y
L_s_bnd
5.5611e4
5.5959e4
0.62%
transverse z
L_s_bnd
1.228e5
1.228e5
0%
Stress:
Convergence:
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
axial
0%
264
767
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Diamond Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
Diamond Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
b: 0.25
d: 0.25
Beam Properties:
768
Area: 0.03125
J: 0.000146484
IYY: 8.13802e5
IZZ: 8.13802e5
CY: 0.125
CZ: 0.125
IndexAdditional Information
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
dmnd_d_x
3.2e3
3.2e3
0%
769
transverse y
dmnd_d_y
3.6864e2
3.6864e2
0%
transverse z
dmnd_d_z
3.6864e2
3.6864e2
0%
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
dmnd_s_ten
3.2e3
3.2e3
0%
transverse y
dmnd_s_bnd
4.608e6
4.608e6
0%
transverse z
dmnd_s_bnd
4.608e6
4.608e6
0%
Stress:
Convergence:
Load
770
Max
P
No.
Equations
IndexAdditional Information
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
r: 0.25
Beam Properties:
Area: 0.19635
J: 0.00613592
IYY: 0.00306796
IZZ: 0.00306796
771
Material Properties:
CY: 0.25
CZ: 0.25
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
placed on point A: fixed in all DOF
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
772
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
IndexAdditional Information
axial
crcl_d_x
5.093e4
5.093e4
0%
transverse y
crcl_d_y
9.77848
9.77848
0%
transverse z
crcl_d_z
9.77848
9.77848
0%
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
crcl_s_ten
5.093e2
5.093e2
0%
transverse y
crcl_s_bnd
2.44462e5
2.44462e5
0%
transverse z
crcl_s_bnd
2.44462e5
2.44462e5
0%
Stress:
Convergence:
773
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
ri: 0.25
774
IndexAdditional Information
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Area: 0.147262
J: 0.00575243
IYY: 0.00287621
IZZ: 0.00287621
CY: 0.25
CZ: 0.25
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
placed on point A: fixed in all DOF
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
775
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hcr_d_x
6.7906e4
6.7906e4
0%
transverse y
hcr_d_y
1.04304e1
1.04304e1
0%
transverse z
hcr_d_z
1.04304e1
1.04304e1
0%
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hcr_s_ten
6.7906e2
6.7906e2
0%
transverse y
hcr_s_bnd
2.6076e5
2.6076e5
0%
transverse z
hcr_s_ten
2.6076e5
2.6076e5
0%
Stress:
776
IndexAdditional Information
Convergence:
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Ellipse Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
Ellipse Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
777
a: 1
b: 0.25
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Area: 0.785398
J: 0.0461999
IYY: 0.19635
IZZ: 0.0122718
CY: 0.25
CZ: 1
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
778
IndexAdditional Information
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
elps_d_x
1.2732e4
1.2732e4
0%
transverse y
elps-d_y
1.527887e1
1.527887e1
0%
transverse z
elps_d_z
2.4446
2.4446
0%
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
elps_s_ten
1.273239e2
1.27324e2
0%
transverse y
elps_s_bnd
1.527887e4
1.527884e4
0%
Stress:
779
transverse z
elps_s_bnd
6.11155e4
6.111573e4
Convergence:
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Element Type:
780
0%
IndexAdditional Information
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
a: 1
b: 0.25
ai: 0.875
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Area: 0.184078
J: 0.0191184
IYY: 0.081253
IZZ: 0.00507832
CY: 0.25
CZ: 1
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
placed on point A: fixed in all DOF
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
781
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The
values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hel_d_x
5.4325e4
5.4325e4
0%
transverse y
hel_d_y
3.6922e1
3.6922e1
0%
transverse z
hel_d_z
5.9075
5.9075
0%
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hel_s_ten
5.4325e2
5.4325e2
0%
Stress:
782
IndexAdditional Information
transverse y
hel_s_bnd
3.6922e4
3.6922e4
0%
transverse z
hel_s_bnd
1.4769e5
1.4769e5
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max
P
No.
Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse
y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
783
Static
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Book Co., 5th edition, Table 32, Case 1.
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
784
tets (133)
IndexAdditional Information
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 20
Ro: 6
Ri: 4
Material Properties:
Constraints
constraint1
Loads:
Conductivity: 9.254
Location
Degrees of Freedom
placed on point A:
placed on point B:
fixed in TransY
placed on point D:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution
Spatial
Variation
785
pressure
total load/unit
area
uniform
Theory
Structure
% Difference
2600
2630
1.2%
1000
1003
0.03%
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
12411
Static
Model Type:
3D Cyclic Symmetric
Reference:
Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Book Co., 5th edition, Table 29, Case 3c.
Description:
786
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
shells (3)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
R: 10
Material Properties:
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
787
Constraints
constraint1
Location
Edges @
= 0 &
Degrees of Freedom
= 90:
cyclical symmetry
Edge @ z = 0:
fixed in TransZ
Placed on point C @
r = 10,
= 0, z = 0:
Load:
Direction:
Magnitude:
gravity
0.0
386.4
0.0
zz at point A:
788
Theory
Structure
%
Difference
0.989
1.1%
IndexAdditional Information
tt at point B:
-1
-0.983
Max P: 9
1.7%
No.
Equations:
773
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Description:
789
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (4)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 2.5
width: 2.5
thickness: 0.5
Shell Properties:
790
IndexAdditional Information
Extensional Stiffness
A11=10.266
A12=0.1252
A16=0
A22=10.266
A26=0
A66=0.3
ExtensionalBending Coupling
Stiffness
B11=0
B12=0
B16=0
B22=0
B26=0
B66=0
Bending Stiffness
D11=0.25965
D12=0.0026082
D16=0
D22=0.1681
D26=0
D66=0.00625
A55=0.275004
A45=0
A44=0.275004
791
7.2915e5
1.5191e5
Force
N11=0
N22=0
N12=0
Moment
M11=0
M22=0
M12=0
CZ
Ply Orientation
(Degrees)
Material
0.25
trniso1
0.25
trniso1
Material Properties:
792
IndexAdditional Information
Young's Moduli
E1=4e1
E2=1
E3=1
Poisson's Ratio
Nu21=0.25
Nu31=0.25
Nu32=0
Shear Moduli
G21=0.6
G31=0.6
G32=
E2/[2*(1+Nu32)]
Coefficients of Thermal
Expansion
Constraints:
a1=0
a2=0
a3=0
Loads:
uniform pressure load over the entire surface = 1
Theory
Structure
% Difference
793
Displacement
11.596
11.596
0%
Bending Moment1
1.4094
1.40638
0.21%
Max P: 5
No. Equations:
223
To verify this Mechanica result, create a query result window for the quantity Moment:Shell
Resultant:XX. Show the result window and query for the value in the upper left corner of the
model. This is obtained using View:Model Min. The absolute value of this negative number is
greater than the value reported using View:Model Max and is reported here.
794
IndexAdditional Information
Modal
Model Type:
2D Plane Strain
Comparison:
Theoretical Results
Reference:
Roark, R.J. and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGraw-
795
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
2D shell (1)
Units:
MKS
Dimensions:
width: 2
thickness: 0.01
Material Properties:
Constraint:
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
IndexAdditional Information
Fundamental Frequency
(Hz)
Theory
Structure
% Difference
2.1393
2.1375
0.08%
(mode=1)
Max P: 4
No. Equations:
12
Modal
Model Type:
2D Plane Stress
Comparison:
Theoretical Results
Reference:
Roark, R.J. and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Book Co. 1982. pp. 576578.
Description:
797
Specifications
Element Type:
2D plate (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 36
width: 4
thickness: 0.1
Material Properties:
Constraint:
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Theory
798
Structure
% Difference
IndexAdditional Information
Fundamental Frequency
(Hz)
101.326
100.99
0.33%
(mode=1)
Max P: 6
No. Equations:
42
Modal
Model Type:
2D Plane Strain
Comparison:
Theoretical Results
Reference:
Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain, NY: McGrawHill Book Co. 1982. pp. 576578.
Description:
799
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (2)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 36
width: 4
Material Properties:
Constraint:
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Fundamental Frequency
(Hz)
Theory
Structure
% Difference
106.219
106.50
0.26%
(mode=1)
800
Max P: 5
No. Equations:
58
IndexAdditional Information
Modal
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 67
Reference:
Timoshenko, S., and Young, D.H. Vibration Problems in Engineering. 3rd ed.
NY: D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1955. p. 425, Art. 68.
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (1)
801
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Theory
ANSYS
Structure
%
Difference
322.64
322.64
322.64
0.0%
(model=1)
Convergence %: 0.0% on
Frequency
Max P:
2
No. Equations: 10
Modal
Model Type:
3D
802
IndexAdditional Information
Comparison:
Theoretical Results
Reference:
Love, A.E.H. A Treatise on the Mathematical Theory of Elasticity. 4th ed. NY:
Dover Publications. 1944. p. 452, Art. 293b.
Description:
Determine the first and second modal frequencies for the radial vibration of
a ring modeled as a one-quarter model.
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
radius: 2
Beam Properties:
Area: 0.01
J: 1.008e3
803
Material Properties:
Constraints:
IYY: 1e3
IZZ: 8.33e6
CY: 1
CZ: 1
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Theory
Structure
% Difference
Mode 1 Frequency
(Hz)
625.65
624.43
0.19%
Mode 2 Frequency
(Hz)
3393.06
3369.13
0.70%
Convergence %: 0.0% on
Frequency
804
Max P: 9
No. Equations:
50
IndexAdditional Information
Modal
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 62
Reference:
Timoshenko, S., and Young, D.H. Vibration Problems in Engineering. 3rd ed.
NY: D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1955. p. 392, Art. 62.
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 16
width: 4
805
thickness: 1
Material Properties:
Constraint:
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Theory
ANSYS
Structure
%
Difference
259.16
260.99
259.15
0.004%
Frequency (Hz)
(mode=1)
Convergence %: 0.0% on
Frequency
Max P:
4
No. Equations: 60
Modal
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theoretical results
Reference:
Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formula for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Co. 1982. p. 576.
Description:
806
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (3)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 36
radius: 1
thickness: 0.1
807
Material Properties:
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraint:
Theory
Structure
% Difference
62.05
62.08
0.05%
Frequency (Hz)
(mode=1)
Convergence %: 0.3% on
Frequency
Max P: 6
No. Equations:
246
Modal
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 62
Reference:
Timoshenko, S., and Young, D.H. Vibration Problems in Engineering. 3rd ed.
NY: D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1955. p. 392, Art. 62.
Description:
808
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 16
width: 4
depth: 1
Material Properties:
Constraint:
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Fundamental Frequency
(Hz)
Theory
ANSYS
Structure
%
Difference
259.16
260.99
259.25
0.03%
(mode=1)
Max P:
4
No. Equations: 72
Modal
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
Determine the first to eighth modal frequencies for the in-plane vibration of
a cross with a pin joint at points A, B, C, & D.
810
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (4)
Units:
NMS
Dimensions:
length: 5
Beam Properties:
Area: 0.015625
J: 4.069e5
IYY: 2.0345e5
IZZ: 2.0345e5
CY: 0.0625
CZ: 0.0625
Material Properties:
811
Constraints:
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Theory
Structure
% Difference
11.336
11.324
0.11%
17.709
17.637
0.4%
17.709
17.665
0.2%
45.345
45.155
0.4%
57.390
56.692
1.2%
57.390
57.002
0.7%
812
Max P: 8
No. Equations:
157
IndexAdditional Information
Modal
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
Determine the first to fifth modal frequencies for the axisymmetric vibration
of an annular plate.
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (3)
Units:
NMS
813
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
constraint1
Location
Degrees of Freedom
placed on curve MP
fixed in TransZ
Theory
Modal 1 Frequency
814
Structure
% Difference
IndexAdditional Information
(Hz)
18.583
18.551
0.17%
Modal 2 Frequency
(Hz)
140.15
138.22
1.4%
Modal 3 Frequency
(Hz)
224.16
224.16
0%
Modal 4 Frequency
(Hz)
358.29
355.80
0.7%
Modal 5 Frequency
(Hz)
629.19
620.43
1.4%
Max P: 9
No. Equations:
1044
815
Steady-State Thermal
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 95
Reference:
Kreith, F. Principles of Heat Transfer. 2nd ed. PA: International Textbook Co.,
1959.
Description:
816
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (1)
Units:
Hr Ft Btu F
Dimensions:
length: 0.6666
Beam Properties:
Area: 0.00694
J: 0
IYY: 0
IZZ: 0
Shear FY: 0
Shear FZ: 0
CY: 0
CZ: 0
Mass Density: 1
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Material Properties:
817
Thermal Expansion: 0
Young's Modulus: 0
Conductivity: 25
Prescribed Temperatures:
Location/Magnitude:
therm_constr1
Convection Conditions:
Location/
Film Coefficient:
Bulk Temperature:
therm_constr1
Temperature at Tip B
(m=tip_temp)
Theory
ANSYS
Thermal
% Difference
68.594
68.618
68.583
0.16%
Max P:
5
No. Equations:
5
Steady-State Thermal
Model Type:
2D Plate
Reference:
Description:
818
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
2D plate (2)
Units:
Hr M W C
Dimensions:
length: 1.0
width: 0.6
Material Properties:
Prescribed
Temperatures:
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Young's Modulus: 0
Conductivity: 52
Location/Magnitude:
819
therm_constr1
Convection Conditions:
Location/
Film Coefficient:
Bulk
Temperature:
therm_constr1
Theory
Thermal
% Difference
18.3
18.3
0.0%
Max P:
9
No. Equations:
79
Steady-State Thermal
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Reference:
Description:
A cylinder has a prescribed heat flux around part of the boundary. The
bottom side is maintained at a certain temperature and the top is insulated.
Find the temperature at point E.
820
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (2)
Units:
Hr M W C
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Young's Modulus: 0
Conductivity: 52
Prescribed Temperatures:
Location/Magnitude:
therm_constr1
821
Heat Loads
Location/Magnitude
Distribution
Spatial Variation
therm_load1
heat/time
per unit area
uniform
Theory
Thermal
% Difference
213.6
213.1
0.2%
Max P:
8
No. Equations:
72
Steady-State Thermal
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Reference:
Description:
A hollow cylinder has a prescribed heat flux over the central part of the inner
surface; the ends are insulated. The top, bottom, and outer surfaces are
maintained at a uniform temperature. Find the temperature at point G.
822
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (2)
Units:
Hr M W C
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Prescribed Temperatures:
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Young's Modulus: 0
Conductivity: 52
Location/Magnitude:
823
Therm_constr1
Heat Loads
Location/Magnitude
Distribution
Spatial Variation
Therm_load1
hear/time
per unit area
uniform
Theory
Thermal
% Difference
59.82
59.85
0.05%
Max P:
9
No. Equations:
133
Steady-State Thermal
Model Type:
2D Unit Depth
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 92
Reference:
Description:
A two-layer wall is surrounded by heated fluid on both the inner and outer
surfaces; the ends are insulated. Find the temperatures at the inner and
outer surfaces.
824
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (2)
Units:
Hr Ft Btu F
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 1
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Young's Modulus: 0
Conductivity:
Convection Conditions:
Location/Film Coefficient:
Bulk Temperature:
Therm_constr1
3000
80
825
Theory
ANSYS
Thermal
% Difference
2957
2957.2
2957.2
N/A
336
336.7
336.7
0.2%
(m=inner_temp_1)
Max P:
2
No. Equations:
13
Steady-State Thermal
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 96
Reference:
Kreith, F. Principles of Heat Transfer. 2nd ed. PA: International Textbook Co.,
1959.
Description:
826
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (2)
Units:
Hr Ft Btu F
Dimensions:
length: 0.6666
width: 0.083333
height: 0.083333
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 1
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion:
0
Young's Modulus: 0
Conductivity: 25
Prescribed
Temperatures:
Location/Magnitude:
827
thermal_constr1
Convection
Conditions:
Location/Magnitude:
Bulk
Temperature:
therm_constr1
Temperature at Tip
(m=tip_temp_1)
Theory
ANSYS
Thermal
% Difference
68.592
68.618
68.533
0.09%
Max P:
9
No. Equations:
303
Steady-State Thermal
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Reference:
Description:
828
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
solid 1(2)
Units:
Hr Ft Btu F
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 1
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Young's Modulus: 0
Conductivity: 1.0
Prescribed Temperatures:
Location/Magnitude:
therm_constr1
829
Theory
ANSYS
Thermal
% Difference
Point A (m=node_1_temp)
0.0
0.0%
Point B (m=node_11_temp)
6.8
7.4427
6.8533
0.8%
Point C (m_node_21_temp)
15.6
16.361
15.3693
1.5%
Point D (m_node_31_temp)
26.8
27.411
26.5707
0.9%
Point E (m=node_41_temp)
40
40
40.0
0.0%
Max P:
9
No. Equations:
622
Steady-State Thermal
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
830
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
Shell (10)
Units:
Hr M W C
Dimensions:
length: 0.6
width: 0.4
thickness: 1
Material Properties:
Poisson's Ratio: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Young's Modulus: 0
Conductivity: 52
Prescribed Temperatures:
Location/Magnitude:
therm_constr1
831
Theory
Thermal
% Difference
260.5
260.6
0.04%
832
Max P:
9
No. Equations:
198
IndexAdditional Information
Transient Thermal
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Holman, J.P. Heat Transfer. 5th ed. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., 1981.
Example 4.2.
Description:
833
Specifications
Element Type:
tet (167)
Units:
Dimensions:
radius 0.25
length 6.5
Properties:
Mass Density
8000 kg/m3
Thermal Expansion
1.4e-5 m2/s
Conductivity
45 W/m C
Specific Heat
401.79 J/kg C
834
s m W C
IndexAdditional Information
Prescribed Temps:
Location/Magnitude:
therm_constr1
everywhere: 35 C
therm_load1
Point E
(m=temp_2_5)
Theory
Thermal
% Difference
79.3
79.05
0.31%
Single-Pass Adaptive
Convergence
Max P:
6
No. Equations:
3046
Transient Thermal
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Holman, J.P. Heat Transfer. 5th ed. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., 1981.
Example 4.5.
835
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (48)
Dimensions:
Properties:
Mass Density
2700 kg/m3
Specific Heat
900 J/kg C
836
Units:
s m W C
IndexAdditional Information
Conductivity
215 W/m C
Prescribed Temps:
Location/Magnitude:
therm_constr1
Initial temperature
Point A
(m=pnt_1_25cm)
Theory
Thermal
% Difference
147.7
144.12
2.42%
Max P:
4
No. Equations:
964
837
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 74
Reference:
Thomson, W.T. Vibration Theory and Applications. NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc. 2nd
printing, 1965. p. 99, Article 4.1.
Description:
838
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Mass Properties:
M: 0.5
Mxx: 0
Mxy: 0
Mxz: 0
Myy: 0
Myz: 0
Mzz: 0
Kxy: 0
Kxz: 0
Kyy: 0
Kyz: 0
Kzz: 0
839
Constraints:
Loads:
placed on point B: FY = 10
Distribution: N/A
Spatial Variation: N/A
Theory
ANSYS
Structure1
% Difference
0.909297
0.90693
0.9093
< 0.01%
0.3418
0.34252
0.3418
0.0%
Max P:
N/A
No.
Equations: 1
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results,
you must define a displacement result window and query the result at t = 0.1.
840
IndexAdditional Information
Dynamic Frequency
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 90
Reference:
Description:
841
Specifications
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Mass Properties:
M: 0.5
Mxx: 0
Mxy: 0
Mxz: 0
Myy: 0
Myz: 0
Mzz: 0
842
Kxx: 200
Kxy: 0
Kxz: 0
Kyy: 0
Kyz: 0
Kzz: 0
IndexAdditional Information
Constraints:
Location:
Degrees of Freedom:
constraint1
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
load1
N/A
N/A
Loc.
Theory
ANSYS
Structure1
% Diff.
point
A
0.8227/0
0.8227/0
0.8227/0
0%
point
B
0.4627/0
0.4627/0
0.4627/0
0%
point
A
0.5115/
180
0.5115/
180
0.5115/180
0%
point
B
1.2153/
180
1.2153/
180
1.215/180
0%
point
A
0.5851/
180
0.5851/
180
0.5851/180
0%
point
B
0.2697/0
0.2697/0
0.2697/0
0%
Max P: 1
No.
Equations: 2
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results,
you must define a measure result window and view the graph.
843
Dynamic Shock
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 70
Reference:
Description:
844
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (2)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 240
height: 14
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Area: 273.9726
J: N/A
IYY: 333.333
IZZ: 333.333
CY: 7
CZ: 7
Mass Density:
0.00073
Constraints:
Location:
Degrees of Freedom:
845
constraint1
placed on point A
placed on point B
placed on point C
Response
Spectrum:
Frequency:
Displacement:
resp_spectrum1
0.44
10
0.44
Theory
ANSYS
Structure
% Difference
Frequency
6.0979
6.0974
6.0953
0.04%
Max. Displacement
0.560
0.553
0.560
0%
20158
20156
20138
0.1%
(m=disp_max)
Max. Bending
Stress
846
Max P: 6
No. Equations:
70
IndexAdditional Information
Buckling
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
MSC/NASTRAN
Reference:
Description:
847
Specifications
Element Type:
beams
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 5
Beam Properties:
Area: 10
J: 1e20
IYY: 1e20
IZZ: 1.907e4
CY: 1
CZ: 1
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Material Properties:
Constraints:
848
IndexAdditional Information
Theory
MSC/
NASTRAN
%
Difference
Structure
% Difference
106.097
106.386
0.3%
106.073
0.02%
Max P: 4
Mode
1
No.
Equations:66
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
MSC/NASTRAN
Reference:
Description:
849
Specifications
Element Type:
shell
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 10
width: 10
thickness: 0.1
Shell Properties:
Ply lay-up: 0/90/90/0
Extensional Stiffness
850
A12=18,779
A16=0
A22=A11
A26=0
IndexAdditional Information
A66=37,500
ExtensionalBending
Coupling Stiffness
B11=0
B12=0
B16=0
B22=0
B26=0
B66=0
Bending Stiffness
D11=2,198.75
D12=15.6495
D16=0
D22=367.762
D26=0
D66=31.25
Transverse Shear
Stiffnesses
A55=27,585
A45=0
A44=17,925
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0.002
Young's Moduli
E1=3e7
E2=750,000
E3=750,000
Poisson's Ratio
Nu21=0.25
Nu31=0.25
Nu32=0
Shear Moduli
G21=375,000
G31=375,000
G32=
E2/[2*(1+Nu32)]
Coefficients of
Thermal Expansion
Constraints:
a1=0
Loads:
a2=0
Fixed
outer
Fixed
Fixed
a3=0
851
Theory
Structure
% Difference
268.73
267
0.6%
852
Max P: 6
No. Equations:
455
IndexAdditional Information
2D Contact
Model Type:
Plane Strain
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Roark, R.J. and Young, W. Formula for Stress and Strain. NY; McGraw-Hill
Co. 1982. p. 517.
Description:
853
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
R1: 1
R2: 1
Material Properties:
Constraints:
854
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
fixed in all but y on vertical edges; fixed in all but x on bottom edge
IndexAdditional Information
Loads:
Theory
Structure
% Difference
Contact Area
0.0481
0.0483
0.42%
26450
26545.44
0.36%
Max P: 9
No. Equations:
865
3D Contact
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Roark, R.J. and Young, W. Formula for Stress and Strain. NY; McGraw-Hill
Co. 1982. p. 517.
Description:
855
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
R1: 2
R2: 3
Material
Properties:
Mass Density: 1
Thermal Expansion: 1
Conductivity: 1
Constraints:
Loads:
856
IndexAdditional Information
Total Load=-100000
Theory
Structure
% Difference
Contact Area
0.0507
0.0482
4.9%
740285
753247.2
1.75%
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
1391
857
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
858
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (56)
Units:
cm, N
Dimensions:
length: 120
width: 3
Material Properties:
depth: 2
Mass Density: 0
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
859
Loads:
vertical
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
pressure
Spatial
Variation:
uniform
Theory
Structure
% Difference
3.5
3.79
8.3%
17.0
17.39
2.3%
Convergence: SPA
RMS Stress Error Estimates: 0.4 %
860
Max P: 7
No. Equations:
4152
IndexAdditional Information
Prestress Modal
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS
Reference:
Description:
861
Specifications
Element Type:
plate
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
radius: 15
thickness: 0.01
Material Properties:
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Loads:
862
IndexAdditional Information
Theory
ANSYS
%
Difference
Structure
% Difference
Mode 1
94.406
94.471
0.07%
94.437
0.03%
Mode 6
216.77
217.38
0.28%
217.07
0.14%
Mode
15
339.85
342.98
0.92%
341.297
0.45%
Max P: 9
No. Equations:
978
863
Static
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
A five-bar truss has the following conditions for optimization: the crosssection area for bars AB, CD, BE, and CE are kept the same; bar BC has an
independent cross-section area, and the load applied on point E is 20000 psi.
Find the minimum weight of the truss with the maximum tensile stress in the
model under 20000 psi.
864
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (5)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Area: 0.1
J: 0
IYY: 0
IZZ: 0
Shear FY: 0
Shear FZ: 0
CY: 1
CZ: 1
Poisson's Ratio: 0
865
Constraints:
constraint1
Thermal Expansion: 0
Conductivity: 0
Location
Degrees of Freedom
all beams
points A and D
Loads:
Location/Magnitude
Distribution
Spatial Variation
load1
point E: -20000
uniform
N/A
Design
Variables:
Location:
Min to Max:
Current:
length of bar BC
480 to about 0
480
240 to about 0
240
dvar_1
0.1 to 10
0.1
dvar_2
placed on bar BC
0.1 to 10
0.1
dvar_4
0.1 to 10
0.1
866
IndexAdditional Information
Optimization Parameters
Optimization Goal:
Limits:
Quantity
Magnitude
measure8
< 20000
measure9
< 20000
measure10
< 20000
measure18
> -20000
measure19
> -20000
measure20
> -20000
Theory
Structure
%
Difference
63.5
63.59
0.1%
Convergence %: 1%
867
ascii
Specifies that the engine writes the engine output files in ASCII format.
bsram ram_size
Specifies the amount, in megabytes, of block solver RAM the engine uses for
equation solving. The value must be greater than 0.1. If you do not specify a value,
or if you omit this option, the engine allocates 8 megabytes by default.
Note: The bsram and elram options have been superseded by the solram
option. If you choose to use bsram and/or elram, you must specify them on
the msengine command line, or by editing the mecbatch file.
This allocation and the elram allocation represent part of the memory the engine
uses to run a design study. The engine dynamically allocates the rest of the memory
it needs for the run.
You can use the default allocation for any run. If you have a lot of RAM on your
machine, large models will run faster if you specify a higher RAM. You can slow the
run substantially if you specify an allocation that is too large to fit in available RAM.
You can also slow the run if you do not specify sufficient space, especially if you
specify less than the default.
As a general guideline for large models, set this value to one-half of your machine
RAM if you do not use the -iter option, and to one-quarter of your machine RAM if
you do use the -iter option. The optimal value also depends on other factors, such as
what other processes are running on your machine.
For more information, see Setting Up a Run.
elram ram_size
Specifies the amount, in megabytes, of RAM available to store element matrices
created by the iterative solver. This option is only relevant if you are also using the iter option. The value must be greater than 0.1. If you do not specify a value, or if
you omit this option, the engine allocates 2 megabytes by default.
Note: The bsram and elram options have been superseded by the solram
option. If you choose to use bsram and/or elram, you must specify them on
the msengine command line, or by editing the mecbatch file.
This allocation and the bsram allocation represent part of the memory the engine
uses to run a design study. The engine dynamically allocates the rest of the memory
it needs for the run.
868
IndexAdditional Information
You can increase the speed of the iterative solver by increasing the amount of RAM
you allocate with this option.
As a general guideline, set this value to one-quarter of your machine RAM. Do not
set this value to more than half of your workstation installed RAM. The optimal value
also depends on other factors, such as what other processes are running on your
machine.
-gdp
Specifies that the engine use an algorithm other than the default algorithm for an
optimization design study. This algorithm, gradient projection (GDP), is an
alternative to the default algorithm, sequential quadratic programming (SQP).
If you allow the optimizer to run in its natural state, Mechanica begins the run using
SQP. However, if it encounters an invalid model during an optimization and its
several recovery attempts fail, the software attempts to resolve the problem by
automatically switching from SQP to GDP for the remainder of the run.
In some situations, you may want to use the -gdp option to enforce the GDP
algorithm throughout the optimization. When making this decision, you should
understand the advantages and disadvantages of each algorithm.
SQP typically finds the optimum design faster than GDP does. The disadvantage of
SQP is that it does not guarantee that your design satisfies your limits at the end of
each iteration. It only guarantees that the optimum design satisfies your limits.
This means that if SQP ever fails to find an optimum design, there may be no
intermediate designs available that are improvements over the initial design. In
contrast, GDP tends to produce a series of intermediate designs that satisfy your
limits while getting closer to the goal. Thus, if speed is not an issue and you want to
ensure the availability of interim designs, use the -gdp option.
i input_dir
Specifies the location of the directory containing the engine input files. This is the
directory with the same name as the design study you are running. The directory is
the same as the directory for output files you specify on the Run Settings dialog
box.
By default, Mechanica places this directory in the current directory.
iter n
Specifies that the engine uses the iterative solver after polynomial pass n, a number
from 1 to 8. For more information on the iterative solver, see Select the Solver.
869
-massnorm
This option specifies that the engine mass-normalizes mode shape vectors instead of
unit-normalizing them in modal analysis.
p password
Specifies an optional password.
solram ram_size
Specifies the amount, in megabytes, of memory to be allocated for direct solver
memory and for element data for the iterative solver. This option when used
overrides any values specified for the elram and bsram options. If you do not use
the solram option, solver memory is 128 megabytes by default.
sturm option
Specifies whether or not the Structure engine performs a Sturm sequence test for a
modal analysis. By default, the engine performs this test in certain situations to
ensure that it has identified the correct number of modes of vibration.
You can control Sturm sequence checking by using one of the following options:
sturm default
sturm always
sturm never
T
Specifies that Mechanica run the design study in demo mode. The run cannot exceed
a polynomial order of 4 in demo mode.
870
IndexAdditional Information
w working_dir1:working_dir2:...
Specifies the location of the directory or directories in which the engine places
temporary files during the run. Mechanica creates a subdirectory in the working
directory called study.tmp (study is the name of the design study you are running),
and deletes the directory at the end of the run.
If you are running a large model or the disk space available on your computer is
divided among several different directories, it may help to specify multiple working
directories for your Mechanica job. You can specify the list of directories to be used
as working directories from either the operating system command line or by editing
the command line in a Mechanica batch file.
You specify the list of working directories with the w option, as follows (where dir1,
dir2, and so forth, are your directory names):
<install_dir>/bin/msengine... w dir1:dir2:...:dirn
If you specify multiple working directories, Mechanica sequentially places temporary
files in the working directories as they reach capacity. When using multiple
directories, be sure that you specify enough directories, and that the directories are
large enough, to complete your run. If the directories are filled before the run
completes, the run will terminate. You must order your directories in the following
way to allow for how Mechanica places the files:
Large files, with .bas extensions, fill the directories from left to right.
Therefore, specify the largest and fastest directories first in the directory list.
The .bas files hold data such as the element stiffness and mass matrices and
the factored global stiffness matrix.
Mechanica fills the first directory you specify in the command line, followed by
the second directory, and so on, until it reaches the dirn directory. For
example, Mechanica uses the directory dir1 until it is filled, then dir2 is used,
and so on.
Other files, such as .tmp files, go only into the last directory specified (dirn).
The dirn directory must be big enough to hold all of the .tmp files. Be sure
that the last directory can hold at least 50 MB of data. On very large models,
this directory may need to hold as much as 5 or 6 GB. Again if you exceed the
allotted directory space, the run will terminate, so be sure the last directory
specified is sufficiently large.
Input and output files (those with the extensions .mdb, .rpt, .stt, .err, or
.pas) can go in the last directory specified, or in a separate directory from the
w list. For higher performance during pre- and post-processing, you can
move the input and output files back to the fastest disk.
The working directory is the same as the directory for temporary files you
specify on the Run Settings dialog box. By default, Mechanica places this
directory in the current directory.
871
About Interfaces
In addition to end welds and perimeter welds, you can use interfaces to connect
surfaces in an assembly model. When you create an interface, you specify how
Mechanica will treat a particular pair of mated or overlapping surfaces during
meshing and analysis. Mechanica provides two basic interface typesbonded and
free.
IndexAdditional Information
Before applying thermal constraints, see Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions
or Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Condition Sets.
See Also
Procedures:
About Units
Before designing your model, you should define a principal system of units in
Pro/ENGINEER using the Edit>Set Up>Units command in either part or assembly
mode.
As you build your model, Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica associate your principal
system of units to all aspects of the model-building process. Thus, Pro/ENGINEER
and Mechanica store your model's data and perform analyses based on your principal
system of units. You must enter all modeling data in the principal system of units,
except on the Material Definition dialog box.
Before choosing a principal system of units, see Guidelines for Specifying Units.
873
When you select the Units command, the Units Manager dialog box appears. The
dialog box includes the following tabs:
The Description box at the bottom of the Units Manager dialog box displays a
short description of the selected unit or system of units. The following icon appears
in front of the description for predefined units or systems of units:
See Also
References:
Accuracy
This value represents the acceptable fractional temperature error used to determine
the time step. The time step may vary by many orders of magnitude during the
course of an analysis, depending on the loads and constraints. At the beginning of an
analysis, the time step can be especially small. Since the energy norm in the model
is zero at the start of an analysis, the errors in energy norm are normalized by a
small value.
This value works with the temperature variation value to control the accuracy of the
time integration. For example, if you set Accuracy to a value of 0.001 and set
874
IndexAdditional Information
Estimated Variation to a value of 200, the Thermal engine attempts to keep timestep errors in temperature to a value of 0.2 degrees or less.
Mechanica controls the accuracy of transient thermal analyses by varying the p-order
of element edges and the time step used for numerical integration. These values
change as an analysis progresses. Two parameters affect the time step size on the
Analysis Definition dialog box for transient thermal analysisAccuracy and
Estimated Variation.
Errors in temperature must be less than the product of the estimated temperature
variation and the accuracy.
See Also
Reference:
Levels Use to select or enter the number of levels you want in the legend.
This, along with Minimum and Maximum, determines the amount of detail
in your plot. You can select any number between 1 and 9.
Color Spectrum Use to select the color spectrum you want. You can select
Structural, Thermal, Huescale, Grayscale, Colorset1, Colorset2,
Rainbow, Red Yellow Green, Fatigue, or Mechanica Classic.
Invert Color Scale Use to invert the color spectrum you have chosen. For
example, an inverted Structural spectrum uses red as a minimum value and
dark blue as a maximumthe opposite of the normal Structural spectrum.
875
Maximum Use to set the maximum value for the legend. You must select
a value that lies between the maximum and minimum of the quantity as
determined by the analysis or study. These values appear as the default
values in the Format Legend dialog box's Maximum and Minimum text
boxes. Depending on how you set the maximum and minimum, Mechanica
may redistribute the intervening scale.
The maximum and minimum values you enter in the Format Legend dialog
box determine how the shading will be graded for your model. You can use
these values to get a better idea of how a particular range of values is
distributed over your model.
Minimum Use to set the minimum value for the legend. You must select a
value that lies between the maximum and minimum of the quantity as
determined by the analysis or study.
Color Scale Use the controls in this area to determine the color spectrum
of your model and how many levels the legend contains.
Show View Min/Max Use to toggle the minimum and maximum values
shown in the result window label on and off. The minimum and maximum
values appear in gray on the legend. Toggling this control off streamlines the
appearance of your result window.
Show Legend Use to toggle the legend on and off.
In addition to adjusting the minimum and maximum values, you can also adjust
individual legend values through the Edit>Legend Value command.
876
IndexAdditional Information
Regardless of which method you used to adjust a legend, you can return a legend to
its original state through the Utilities>Reset Legend command.
If you decide to set either of these options to a state other than the default, you
should do so based on correlation with test data.
877
If you decide to set either of these options to a state other than the default, you
should do so based on correlation with test data.
878
IndexAdditional Information
biaxiality parameter
Another parameter that you may want to adjust is variable amplitude load history.
Fatigue Advisor enables you to specify either a constant or variable amplitude load
history when you define your fatigue analysis. If you decide to use a variable
amplitude load history, you can either enter the data or import an ASCII file defining
the load history. Importing a variable load history file can allow you to better
correlate test results. Note that you do not need to change any config.pro default
settings to utilize an ASCII file as the variable amplitude load history.
Alignment
The alignment options are available only if you selected Current View for the
graphic size.
The two options are:
Landscape Select this option to orient the graphic along the horizontal
axis. The graphic is wider than it is high.
Portrait Select this option to orient the graphic along the vertical axis. The
graphic is higher than it is wide.
The following table shows the valid minimum angles and the defaults for edges and
faces during creation and editing (all angles are in degrees):
Minimum Angles
879
Defaults
Entity
Valid Range
Creating
Editing
Edge
0 to 30
Face
0 to 30
The following table shows the valid maximum angles and the defaults for edges and
faces during creation and editing (all angles are in degrees):
Maximum Angles
Defaults
Entity
Valid Range
Creating
Editing
Edge
150 to 179
175
179
Face
150 to 179
175
179
These settings control the minimum and maximum angles that AutoGEM uses.
Allowable Errors
In most cases, Mechanica does not start a run if it finds errors. There are a few
errors that do not prevent a run from starting, including:
Action/Name
Edit Study Opens the dialog box for the analysis or design study you
select so you can modify it.
Copy Study Copies an analysis or design study.
880
IndexAdditional Information
Create an Analysis or
Design Study
Modify an Existing
Analysis or Design Study
Set Up an Analysis or
Design Study Run
881
menu option.
Monitor a Run
Defining the analysis You need to define the type of analysis you want
Mechanica to perform and indicate the analysis conditions.
Running the analysis You need to instruct Mechanica to run the analysis.
Note: Before you run an analysis, you should verify Mechanica's run
settings. Run settings determine which solver the engine uses, how
much memory you want to allocate, and so forth.
Reviewing the results of the analysis You need to evaluate the results
of the run to determine how your model behaved.
See Also
References:
882
IndexAdditional Information
You can animate fringe, vector, or model result displays using the Display Options
tab on the Result Window Definition dialog box. You cannot animate fatigue or
linearized stress results.
When you select Animate on the Display Options tab, these options become
available:
Auto Start Start the animation as soon as the result window displays.
You can also start and stop the animation using the View>Start,
View>Step Forward, and View>Stop commands, or the corresponding
toolbar buttons on the result window.
If you define a deformed result display, you can toggle the deformed overlay on the
animation by selecting View>Overlay in the Results user interface window.
When you display the result window for an animated model, you can speed up or
slow down the animation by moving the slider on the toolbar in the appropriate
direction.
For information on controlling your animation, see Controlling Animations.
883
See Also
Procedure:
ANSYS
Writing an ANSYS output file creates a PREP7 file in ASCII format called
filename.ans.
Use the fem_which_ansys_solver config.pro option to specify which ANSYS solver
you plan to useFrontal, Iterative, or Powersolver. The values are: FRONTAL
(default), ITERATIVE, and POWERSOLVER.
The following table lists the mesh elements written to the ANSYS output file for the
various mesh types and idealizations.
Analysis
ANSYS
Linear Thermal
SHELL57
Linear Structural
SHELL43
Parabolic Structural
SHELL93
Linear Thermal
SOLID70
Parabolic Thermal
SOLID87
Linear Structural
SOLID92
Parabolic Structural
SOLID92
Beams
All
BEAM44
Trusses
All
LINK8
Springs
All
COMBIN14
Advanced Springs
All
MATRIX27
Masses
All
MASS21
Gaps
All
COMBIN40
Shells
Tetrahedral Solids
Note that Mechanica does not output radiation to ANSYS. Also, for gaps, the gap
value is Gap and the normal stiffness is K2. ANSYS supports zero-length
idealizationsidealizations that have no length, such as an idealization between a
point on a surface and the surface itselffor gaps and advanced springs only.
884
IndexAdditional Information
Apparent Frequency
Mechanica calculates the effective frequency of a PSD output by integrating over the
frequency range.
This option is available for certain quantities if you selected At Point for Spatial
Evaluation and base the measure on one of the directional components. Mechanica
only calculates measures that use the Apparent Frequency dynamic evaluation
method for dynamic random analyses.
Area
Enter the cross-sectional area for each beam section. You must enter a positive
value. Because General beam section types lack geometry, for the purpose of
calculating torsional stress, Mechanica assumes that the cross section is circular.
spot welds
contacts
Note: In FEM mode, Mechanica respects part-level loads and constraints at the
assembly level.
For example, if you are working in native mode and you model the individual parts of
your assembly in part mode, the software ignores the loads you assigned to each
part after you access Mechanica from assembly mode. When you access Mechanica
from assembly mode, you can then define loads relevant to the assembly as a whole.
In any case, modeling entities that you assign while working from assembly mode
have no bearing on modeling entities you assign while working from part mode, and
the reverse.
885
At Each Step
Mechanica calculates the value of the measure at each time step for a dynamic time
response analysis or at each frequency step for a dynamic frequency or random
response analysis.
If you selected At Each Step as the time or frequency evaluation method, you can
obtain a cumulative measure value for all steps by selecting the Cumulative check
box.
Mechanica does not report the measure values in the summary file, but you can plot
these values as a function of time or frequency through the Results command.
886
shells
ribs
ears
thin protrusions
sheet metal
IndexAdditional Information
When you select Auto Detect, Mechanica highlights the pairs that it was able to
create. One surface in each pair is red and the other yellow. If you determine that
Auto Detect did not pair all the applicable pairs in the model, use New to complete
the pairing process manually. See Example: Unpaired Surface on L-Bracket for an
example of geometry with unpaired surfaces.
Part
o
o
o
o
For more information on simplified representations and family tables, search the
Assembly and Welding functional area and the Fundamentals functional area of the
Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
AutoGEM Overconstrained
We recommend that you run AutoGEM against all of the surfaces and volumes in
your model at the same time. This approach assures a cohesive mesh.
However, if you mesh your model in stages, selecting volumes one or two at a time,
examine the volume interfaces before you start. Be sure to use AutoGEM on the
volume that includes the smallest features near the interface before you use it on the
volumes with larger features.
This is because, after you use AutoGEM on one of the volumes in a model, the
element faces on that volume become constraints that AutoGEM must respect while
887
processing other adjacent volumes. If you start with volumes that have larger
features near the interface, the existing large elements at the volume interface may
overconstrain AutoGEM when you then try to mesh adjacent volumes with smaller
features.
You can correct this situation through the AutoGEM Settings dialog box. In this
case, you select Modify Or Delete Existing Elements and select the volume filled
with elements as well as the unfilled volume. AutoGEM then completes the unfilled
volume and modifies the existing elements in the filled volume as required.
Automatic Interrupt
Select this option on the Settings tab if you want AutoGEM to automatically stop
when it has created a specified percentage of elements.
If you select this item, Mechanica displays an additional line on the AutoGEM
Settings dialog box where you enter the percentage of completion at which you
want Mechanica to stop AutoGEM.
Automatic Interrupt is useful when you know from previously using AutoGEM on
your model that you will encounter swap space or AutoGEM problems if you allow
AutoGEM to continue. You can use the AutoGEM log file to determine the point at
which you should interrupt the AutoGEM process.
888
IndexAdditional Information
Cylindrical
Spherical
T=0, Z=0
P=0, T=90
T=90, Z=0
P=90, T=90
T=0
Mechanica documentation usually uses the Cartesian axes to describe the action of
various commands. If you are using cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems, you
need to substitute the appropriate equivalents of the X, Y, and Z axes.
In addition, Mechanica dialog boxes use Cartesian component nomenclature for
certain property types. This table lists the cylindrical and spherical equivalents:
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
XX
RR
RR
YY
ZZ
ZZ
XY
XZ
RZ
YZ
889
Base Excitation
You can use this option if the modal analysis you selected for your dynamic analysis
contains at least one constrained modal analysis. Otherwise, Base Excitation is not
available.
If no loads are defined on your model, you must define the dynamic analysis using
base excitation.
When you select Base Excitation, these items appear on the dialog box:
Direction Enter WCS coordinates that specify the direction in which the
constrained parts of your model move in response to the forcing function. For
2D models, you only enter X and Y coordinates.
Relative to You can have displacement, velocity, and acceleration results
calculated with respect to ground or to supports.
Beam Contribution
Use the Include Contribution From Beams area of the Quantity tab to select the
beam contributions you want to use for the result window. This area does not appear
on the dialog box unless there are beams in the model and they were part of the
design study or analysis. In FEM mode, you can see this area only when you are
loading results from an MSC/NASTRAN .xdb file. However, in this case, Include
Contribution From Beams area is inactiveshowing you which contributions
Mechanica will include in the result window, but not allowing you to select
contributions.
Note: The discussion below pertains to all quantities that allow specific
measurement of beam behavior except for Strain Energy.
The options in the Include Contribution From Beams area determine the values
that the software uses to plot along the beam curve in the result display. All of the
check boxes are selected by default. If you clear all three, the result window does
not display any beams.
If you select beam bending, beam tensile, beam torsional stress, or beam total from
the Component option menu, the check boxes in the Include Contribution From
Beams area become unavailable. In FEM mode, since your selection is limited to
beam total, the check boxes always remain unaccessible.
890
IndexAdditional Information
For quantities that have beams, except for strain energy, the selections in the
Include Contribution From Beams area include:
Bending Include bending for beams in the result display. In FEM mode,
this box is always checked.
Tensile Include tension for beams in the result display. In FEM mode, this
box is always checked.
Torsional Include torsion for beams in the result display. In FEM mode,
this box remains unchecked.
Maximum Use the maximum value to evaluate the beams in your model.
Minimum Use the minimum value to evaluate the beams in your model.
Maximum Absolute Use the signed value that has the maximum absolute
value to evaluate the beams in your model. If the absolute values of the
maximum value and minimum value are equal, Mechanica uses the maximum
value.
Recovery Point Use one of the locations at which Mechanica reports
stresses for the beams in your model.
When reviewing beam resultant results, you should be aware of the sign conventions
used for beam resultant forces and moments. An understanding of the sign
conventions will help you interpret your results correctly.
891
If you accessed the Beam Sections dialog box from the Beam Definition dialog
box, when you close the Beam Sections dialog box, Mechanica uses the section you
selected from the Beam Sections in Model list for the current beam definition, and
displays the beam section name in the Beam Definition dialog box.
892
You do not need to save your current model when you activate
results.
You do not need the original model to access results, only the study
directory containing the results from a run. For Results, Mechanica opens
a copy of the model it makes when you start a run.
IndexAdditional Information
Save your result windows before exiting Mechanica if you want to use
them again. Mechanica does not keep result windows between results
sessions.
Use the File>Save command in the Results user interface to save result
windows and either the File>Open command or the Insert>Results
Window from File command to re-use saved result windows.
Mechanica saves the result window definitions in an .rwd file. If you define a
result window for a design study, save it, and then rerun the same design
study, the original result window definition may no longer be valid. You can
change result window definitions for a particular design study whether or not
you change anything about the design study just by modifying the values and
settings you use when you define the result window.
BLF Convergence
The convergence index is the maximum percentage change of any BLF (buckling load
factor).
In a buckling analysis, Mechanica calculates BLF and mode shape for each buckling
mode you specify. The BLF is the magnification factor by which the loads applied in a
previously specified static analysis would have to be multiplied to produce the critical
buckling load.
For more information, see Buckling Analysis.
Boundary Edges
Mechanica highlights all boundary edges. A boundary edge is an edge associated
with only one shell or solid, unless the edge is associated with a solid and a shell
coincident with a face of that solid.
If your model contains boundary edges that are not associated with a curve,
Mechanica highlights just those edges separately. You can use this information to
identify missing elements.
Boundary Faces
Mechanica highlights all boundary facesfaces that belong to only one solid.
Although these are not actually errors, you can check each boundary face to make
sure it does not represent a missing element.
If your model contains boundary faces that are not associated with a surface,
Mechanica highlights just those faces separately. You can use this information to
identify missing elements.
893
Deselect all the items under Feature Isolation area on the AutoGEM
Settings dialog box. This disables any mesh refinement that AutoGEM would
normally use to isolate problem features.
Use AutoGEM on all surfaces that form the volume boundary. Use box
selection to select all of the boundary surfaces at the same time.
Let AutoGEM run at least a few minutes after seeing the Creating <element
type> elements status message.
Interrupt AutoGEM when it reaches the maximum percentage completion or
when the element count starts to increase rapidly. After you interrupt, use the
Boundary Edges option on the AutoGEM Info menu to find incomplete
areas. Additionally, look for areas with too many points. This should help you
find the problem areas on the volume boundary.
Modify the geometry in the problems area. For example, if the problem occurs
near a round, try altering the radius of the round.
894
Build Query When you select the Build Query option, the Search Tool
dialog box changes to include the Query Builder section in the dialog box.
This section allows you to define rules and operations for your search. The
Query Builder uses the Boolean AND and OR operations. You can change the
operation by selecting the required operation in the Operator column.
IndexAdditional Information
After you have defined the rules for your model, you can add, remove, or
update the rules by using the Add, Remove, or Update options, respectively.
The Add option adds a new rule to the Query Builder. The Remove option
removes a selected rule while the Update option replaces a selected rule with
the current rule.
Save Query Saves a query. After you have built a query, you can save the
query by selecting Options>Save Query. Specify a layer name in the Save
Rules dialog box to save your query as a new layer. Mechanica displays the
new layer in the Model Tree. Select Layer in the Status tab to display layers
in the Value field. Include or exclude selected simulation entities so that only
the required items are displayed in the mesh.
For dynamic random response analyses, select the following item if you want
Mechanica to calculate full results:
For dynamic analyses with base excitation, select the following item if you want
Mechanica to calculate factors important in determining if enough vibration modes
obtained from modal analysis are included to ensure accurate results.
You cannot access full results for quantities you deselect here. Mechanica calculates
all measures valid for the analysis, regardless of your selections here. You can
895
access results for measures through the summary report or by graphing the measure
in a results window.
Note: If you select Time/Frequency Eval when you define a dynamic
measure, you can access results only through a results window.
You cannot access results for any quantity you deselect here.
For static, prestress static, large deformation static, contact, and buckling analyses,
Mechanica does calculate all stress and rotation measures even if you do not select
Stresses and Rotations on the analysis dialog box. But you cannot access the same
results for measures that you can when you select Stresses, Rotations, and
Reactions.
896
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
References:
Uses the origin and the X axis location to define the X axis.
Defines the Y axis as perpendicular to the X axis and in the plane defined by
the origin, the X axis location, and the Y axis location.
If the Y axis location is not on a line perpendicular to the X axis, Mechanica
places the positive Y axis in the direction perpendicular to the X axis that is
closest to the location you specified.
The Y axis still lies in the same plane in which you placed it:
897
The positive Z axis is perpendicular to the XY plane with the positive direction
determined by the right-hand rule.
Mechanica automatically makes the new coordinate system current.
Channel
The icon for a channel beam section type looks like this:
When you select Channel as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog
box, you must enter positive values for the following beam cross-section dimensions:
b
t
di
tw
If you are interested in examining the exact effects of shear on a beam, enter values
for Shear FY and Shear FZ. These factors represent the ratio of a beam's effective
"shear area" to its true cross-sectional area for shear in the principal Y and Z
directions.
You must enter a positive value for each of these properties. The default is
0.833333, which is accurate for rectangular cross sections.
When you click Accept, if your section type has fewer than two planes of symmetry,
Mechanica informs you that the beams should be loaded or braced to prevent twist
under shear loading.
Stress recovery points for channel beam section types are illustrated below. The
figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right shows
the points for FEM mode.
898
IndexAdditional Information
Clear Query Tags Use to delete query tags one by one. This function can
be useful if you just want to remove some of the tags. For example, you may
want to generate a report with only some of the query tags still in place.
Clear All Query Tags Use to delete all query tags at once. This function
can be useful if you want to clear your model view as efficiently as possible.
a1
a2
a3
These values represent the thermal expansion coefficient in each of the three
principal material directions of the model.
For transversely isotropic material properties, enter the following two values for
coefficients of thermal expansion:
a1
a2 = a3
These values represent the thermal expansion coefficient in each of the three
principal material directions of the model, with equal values in directions 2 and 3.
You should enter values for this property if you plan to place a thermal load on the
model.
899
Comparing Animations
Comparing animations helps you make important decisions about your model or
models. One of the most common reasons you compare animations is to help you
determine which of several models shows the most desirable behavior pattern for the
quantity, mode, and so forth.
You can also compare animations of the same model to:
900
Learn how the animated shapes compare with the original model shape. Use
the View>Overlay toggle to superimpose a wireframe of the original model
over the animation of the model. The Overlay command is only available for
unfringed animations.
Learn how the model behaves for different analysis conditions. In this case,
you animate the same model using different load sets, constraint sets, or
analysis types to get a better idea of overall reaction to multiple
environments.
Learn how the model behaves for different modes. This shows you which
modes are likely to be a problem and how a quantity distributes at the same
IndexAdditional Information
stage for different modes. To learn more, see Example: Comparing Mode
Animations for the Same Model.
Learn how the model behaves at different stages of the animation. This shows
you how a quantity distributes at different times or how resonance behaves
over time. To learn more, see Example: Comparing Animation Stages for the
Same Model.
Cyclic Symmetry
901
Comparing Results
For many models, one of the most valuable understandings you can have is how the
quantities you are interested in compare with each other. While you can perform this
comparison by studying the legends and scales for the various result windows or by
looking at the measures in your analysis Summary file, Mechanica provides tools to
make comparing results easier.
The Results user interface provides functionality that lets you tie the scale of one
result window to that of another.
To tie scales for two result windows, use Utilities>Tie and its subcommands. The
method for tying graphs together is slightly different from the method for tying
fringe, contour, and vector plots.
Component
When you define your result window display, you can select a component to further
define the quantity you choose.
The items available on the Component option menu depend on the quantity you
choose from the Quantity option menu. For more information on the components
available for each quantity, select the quantity from this list:
Acceleration
Beam Bending
Beam Resultant
Beam Tension
Beam Torsion
Beam Total
Displacement
Fatigue
Flux
Reaction
Rotation
Rotation Acceleration
Rotation Velocity
Shear & Moment
Shell Resultant
Stress, Strain, and Thermal Strain
Temp Gradient
Velocity
902
IndexAdditional Information
903
For stress and strain quantities If you choose Stress or Strain as the
measure quantity, you can select from a variety of components. These
components fall into three categoriesderived, normal/shear, and beam.
Mechanica provides the following derived stresses and strains: von Mises,
Tresca, maximum principal, minimum principal, and maximum absolute
principal.
Note that for dynamic random response analyses, Mechanica does not calculate
stress or strain measures with von Mises, Max Shear (Tresca), Max
Principal, Min Principal, or Max Abs Principal as components.
For normal/shear stresses and strains, Mechanica provides the three normal
stress/ strain directions as well as the three shear stress/strain directions.
These directions are relative to the current coordinate system.
Mechanica provides the following beam measures: beam bending, beam
tensile, beam torsion, and beam total. Beam total is a combined measure that
reports both beam bending and beam tensile stress/strain.
For all other valid quantities If you choose any of the other quantities
valid for dynamic analysesexcept for Timeyou can select either a
magnitude component or one of the X, Y, Z component directions. For
magnitude, Mechanica calculates the measure using all three component
directions. For component directions, calculations are axis-specific relative to
the current coordinate system.
For dynamic random response analyses, Mechanica does not calculate
measures with a Magnitude component.
IndexAdditional Information
If you select one of the component directions instead, Mechanica determines the
moment of inertia relative to the current coordinate system in the direction you
selected.
von Mises
XY*
Max Shear
XZ*
Max Principal
YZ*
Min Principal
Beam Bending
Beam Tensile
XX*
Beam Total
905
YY*
ZZ*
Beam Torsional
*If you select any of these options, use the arrow button to select a coordinate
system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is
the WCS. You can also select a UCS.
Note: Mechanica derives von Mises strain in the same way as von Mises stress,
and maximum shear strain in the same way as maximum shear stress. For
more information, see option information for Strain Results Quantity or Stress
Results Quantity.
Structure expresses stress values and directions somewhat differently than they are
sometimes described in textbooks. To learn more about how Structure stresses
relate to textbook examples, see How Stress Components Relate to Textbook
Examples.
906
Component and Layer Tree Use to select the components or layers you
want to display, hide, or isolate in the results window. If the model is an
assembly, the Layer Tree displays the components of an assembly and any
layers containing beam or shell definitions that exist in the model. If the
IndexAdditional Information
model is a part, the Component and Layer Tree displays only layers that
contain beam or shell definitions.
Buttons Use to determine which components or layers are visible in the
results window.
In general, it is better to use Isolate to visualize the parts and layers of interest in
the result window display. Use Blank to exclude a few items from the result window
display.
If you define assembly-level shell/beam definitions on part-level geometry, blanking
the part also blanks the shell/beam definitions unless they are in an isolated layer.
For more detailed information on layers, search the Basic Pro/ENGINEER functional
area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
907
this menu depend on the design study, display type, and quantity combination you
select.
These are the options that can appear on the Component menu if you select
Acceleration, Displacement, Reaction, Rotation, Rotation Acceleration,
Rotation Velocity, or Velocity:
If you change the coordinate system type for your results display, the directional
components in the Component option menu change to reflect the new coordinate
system. For example, if you change from the Cartesian coordinate system to the
cylindrical coordinate system, the labels change from X, Y, and Z to R, T, and Z. For
more information, see Results Relative to Coordinate Systems.
In FEM mode, the only available component specific to beams is Beam Total for the
stress quantity. It appears when you display results from the NASTRAN .xdb file.
908
IndexAdditional Information
If you change the coordinate system type for your results display, the directional
components in the Component option menu change to reflect the new coordinate
system. For example, if you change from the Cartesian coordinate system to the
Cylindrical coordinate system, the labels change from X, Y, and Z to R, T, and Z. For
more information, see Results Relative to Coordinate Systems.
Log Life Shows the estimated number of cycles until your model breaks.
Because of the exponential nature of fatigue, it is useful to express life as a
logarithm.
Log Damage Shows the ratio between accumulated fatigue cycles and the
total number of cycles to failure. A value greater than unity indicates failure.
A value of 0.5, for example, represents a loss of 50% in the useful life of the
model. Because of the exponential nature of fatigue, it is useful to express
the damage ratio as a logarithm.
Factor of Safety Shows the permissible factor of safety on the input load.
When the fatigue life calculated for your model is greater than the target
design life, the software carries out a back calculation to determine a
permissible factor of safety on the input load. This represents the extent to
which the amplitude of the load can be increased without compromising the
target design life.
If you want the software to calculate the factor of safety, select the check box
in the Output area at the bottom of the Fatigue Analysis Definition dialog
box.
Confidence of Life Shows the ratio between the calculated life and the
target design life. Because of the statistical nature of fatigue, the greater the
909
confidence the better. Values below unity indicate failure. Values greater than
3.0 usually reflect an adequate confidence of achieving the desired target life.
You can display Confidence Of Life results in a tri-colored fringe plot to give
an overall view of where the model will break first and where the model will
last for a greater number of cycles. Red signifies from 0 cycles to the number
of cycles entered for Desired Endurance (considered 1x) on the analysis
dialog box. Yellow signifies from 1x to 3x (considered the marginal life).
Green signifies any number of cycles over the marginal life (3x). The default
is 3x, but you can change this by changing the value of
sim_fatigue_safety_margin in the configuration file.
For fatigue analyses, Mechanica reports results for all surfaces on your model, but
not the interior of your model.
If you change the coordinate system type for your results display, the directional
components in the Component option menu change to reflect the new coordinate
system. For example, if you change from the Cartesian coordinate system to the
Cylindrical coordinate system, the labels change from X, Y, and Z to R, T, and Z. For
more information, see Results Relative to Coordinate Systems.
910
X - The quantity in the X direction or about the X axis. X is not available for
reaction moment, rotation, rotation acceleration, and rotation velocity for all
2D models.
IndexAdditional Information
Y - The quantity in the Y direction or about the Y axis. Y is not available for
2D plane strain and 2D axisymmetric models.
Z - The quantity in the Z direction or about the Z axis. Z is not available for
any 2D model.
P Axial force
Vy Shear force in the Y direction
Vz Shear force in the Z direction
Mx Torsional moment
My Bending moment about the Y axis
Mz Bending moment about the Z axis
Max Principal the maximum principal shell resultant. For mixed locations
that include beams, Max Principal specifies total stress or strain for beams.
Min Principal the minimum principal shell resultant
XX normal shell resultant along the X axis
XY shear shell resultant acting in the Y direction on the plane whose
outward normal is parallel to the X axis
YY normal shell resultant along the Y axis
If you select Transverse Shear Force from the secondary quantity option menu,
these options appear on the menu:
X shear force acting in the Z direction on the plane whose outward normal
is parallel to the X axis
Y shear force acting in the Z direction on the plane whose outward normal
is parallel to the Y axis
type for your results display, the directional components in the Component option
menu change to reflect the new coordinate system. For example, if you change from
the Cartesian coordinate system to the Cylindrical coordinate system, the labels
change from XX, YY, and ZZ to RR, TT, and ZZ. For more information, see Results
Relative to Coordinate Systems.
Max Principal the maximum principal stress or strain. For mixed locations
that include beams, Max Principal specifies total stress or strain for beams.
For an example of a Max Principal stress vector display, see Example: Max
Principal Stress Vector Plot.
Min Principal the minimum principal stress or strain
Mid Principal the principal stress or strain that has a numerical value
between max principal and min principal (only for 3D models)
von Mises a combination of all stress components. This component is not
available for Strain or Thermal Strain quantities.
Maximum Shear one-half the maximum absolute difference between the
principal stresses or strains. This component is not available for Strain or
Thermal Strain quantities.
XX normal stress or strain along the X axis
XY shear stress or strain acting in the Y direction on the plane whose
outward normal is parallel to the X axis
XZ shear stress or strain acting in the Z direction on the plane whose
outward normal is parallel to the X axis. This component is only available for
3D models.
YY normal stress or strain along the Y axis
YZ shear stress or strain acting in the Z direction on the plane whose
outward normal is parallel to the Y axis. This component is only available for
3D models.
ZZ normal stress or strain along the Z axis. This component is only
available for 3D models.
912
IndexAdditional Information
Native mode expresses stress values and directions somewhat differently than they
are sometimes described in textbooks. To learn more about how native mode
stresses relate to textbook examples, see How Stress Components Relate to
Textbook Examples.
A conflict may occur if you use the same or adjacent geometry to define two
modeling entities. For example, if you define constraint a using a surface, and
constraint b using an edge of that surface, a conflict could occur. In this case,
the geometric precedence rules would respect constraint b over constraint a.
A conflict may occur when coordinate systems are associated with two parts
in an assembly. In this case, the assembly hierarchy of the part determines
the precedence. You can view the assembly hierarchy in the Model Tree.
A conflict may occur when coordinate systems are associated with a part or
subassembly as well as a top-level assembly. In this case, you can suppress
the part or subassembly coordinate system by using the Ignored Mesh
Control option on the Mesh Control dialog box.
A conflict may occur when coordinate systems associated with different
entities, such as constraints and mesh controls, share a geometric entity or a
node.
See Also
References:
914
IndexAdditional Information
have contact regions defined. Contact regions allow the two volumes to
separate during the simulation.
If you compress the parts using midsurface compression, you can use end
welds or perimeter welds, or let the software create automatic midsurface
connections, to eliminate the gaps that occur between mating edges or
surfaces of the parts. This ensures that touching entities remain connected.
For more information, see Gaps in Assemblies.
If a part does not touch any other part, Mechanica treats the part as an
unconnected body.
Depending on the tolerance between parts and the degree to which parts touch,
Mechanica may or may not connect some of the parts in an assembly. For example,
if you create the following assembly, Mechanica connects the parts as shown:
The two rectangular parts are close enough to be within tolerance, and they share
enough surface for Mechanica to merge them into a single body. However, the
sphere and rectangle have only one point of contact. Therefore, Mechanica does not
merge the sphere with the rest of the assembly. In this case, the assembly would
contain two connected parts and one unconnected parttwo bodies in all.
Before you run an analysis or design study, Mechanica asks you whether you want
error detection. If you do, Mechanica checks for various modeling conditions
including the presence of multiple bodies in the model. Should it encounter more
than one body, Mechanica displays a message indicating the number of separate, or
disjoint, bodies it finds. You can use this information to determine whether parts you
thought were connected are truly connected. If you see an unexpected number of
bodies, you may want to cancel the analysis or study and correct the assembly.
915
If you have a part and an assembly open at the same time, and the part is a
component of the assembly, the part and assembly interact as follows:
o Saving the assembly automatically saves any changes you made to
the part.
o Any feature or idealization you add to the part is automatically
transferred to the assembly.
Running an analysis automatically saves the model.
With Rigid Mode Search Use this item if you want Mechanica to look for
and report rigid body modes when it runs a design study containing this
analysis.
You should select this item if your model is not fully constrained or if you are
not sure. Otherwise, you will get a fatal error when you try to run a design
study containing this analysis.
If your model is fully constrained, selecting With Rigid Mode Search does not
cause any problems, but does add to the run time.
Note: If you select Unconstrained, Mechanica automatically selects
With Rigid Mode Search for most models. For details, see
Unconstrained.
916
IndexAdditional Information
Tx, Ty, Tz
Total Load
Total Load
917
The constraints that Mechanica adds bridge this gap, and link the overlapping
portions of the two compressed surfaces.
If your assembly contains two solids that intersect in a "T" formation, it might look
like the drawing below. When these solids are compressed to their midsurfaces,
Mechanica attempts to add a constraint between the edge of one midsurface and the
corresponding area on the other.
918
IndexAdditional Information
Use the associated selector arrow to display your model and pick the entity you want
to use in your results display.
Contour Labels
Use this command to turn on or off lettered labels on the contour plot. Use the
Format>Result Window command. Select or clear the Contour Labels box on the
Format Result Window dialog box. The Contour Labels box is active only if you
selected Label Contours when you defined the result window.
Select Labels to toggle the labels on or off. When Labels is active, Mechanica
displays a series of labels along each contour curve. The labels are capital letters.
Labels are especially useful if you are printing black and white hard copy. Otherwise,
the contour colors generally provide enough information.
Contour Display your results model with contour lines. Selecting this check
box activates the IsoSurfaces and Label Contours check boxes.
Displaying your model using contour lines is ideal for shell or 2D models. For
solids, you can get a more informative display of model behavior if you select
the IsoSurfaces check box as well.
Label Contours Select this item to display the value for each contour
curve directly in the result window.
You probably need to label a contour plot only if you are printing black and
white hard copy. The contour colors generally provide enough information
when you look at a result window on the screen or on a color hard copy.
To change the density of the contour labels so there are more or less in a given area,
select Utilities>Relabel Contour from the Results user interface menu bar.
919
Controlling Animations
Mechanica provides commands that let you control how an animation progresses.
You can execute these commands either from the View menu or through toolbar
buttons. The animation controls are:
No Mesh No mesh lines are visible, and the software displays only the
model geometry. Use this display type if you want to simplify the appearance
of your model so you can focus solely on the geometry. This is particularly
handy as you add loads, boundary conditions, and other properties to the
geometry.
Note: This option is not available when Mechanica is displaying the
mesh model only.
Wireframe Geometry lines are white and element lines are yellow. The
software displays all elements with boundary faces. For solid models, this
display type has the most complex appearance.
Hidden Line Visible geometry lines are white and element lines on visible
surfaces are yellow. Hidden geometry and hidden element edges are gray.
The software displays all elements with boundary faces.
No Hidden Visible geometry lines are white and external, visible surfaces
of elements are yellow. The software does not display hidden geometry and
hidden element edges. For solid models, this display type has the simplest
appearance.
Shading Visible geometry lines are red and external, visible edges of
elements are blue. The software does not display hidden geometry and
hidden element edges. Be aware that, if you customize the colors you use for
shading, the Shading option may display element lines using different colors.
If you are displaying your model geometry as shaded and you select the
Shading mesh display option, Mechanica retains geometry shading. However,
920
IndexAdditional Information
Use the Mesh Display area on the Mesh tab of the Simulation Display dialog box
to control the appearance of a mesh. This area includes:
To display shells with the actual thickness, clear this check box. Displaying
actual thickness lets you make sure that shells in a mesh are correctly defined
and have the intended thickness. Note that if a shell is made up of layers,
Mechanica displays the shell elements with the total shell thickness and not
with the individual layer thicknesses.
Display Quality Change the display quality of a mesh for better viewing of
the curved elements. Select Coarse, Medium, or Fine where Fine is the
921
Model view Model view is the view angle, size, and position of your model
as it appears in the result window. You can find controls for manipulating the
model view on the View menu. All model view controls operate over single or
multiple windows.
Model view controls on the View menu include:
o
o
o
922
IndexAdditional Information
Convergence Indicators
The convergence loop log also lists convergence indicators at each pass. These
percentages are based on changes between the current pass and the preceding pass,
and provide an indication of the accuracy of the results.
If you intentionally define an analysis that requires only a single p-loop pass by
setting the minimum and maximum polynomial orders to the same value, Mechanica
sets the convergence indicators to 100% and warns that convergence has not been
checked, because there is no preceding pass with which to compare.
The Structure engine calculates the following convergence indicators:
Measure Convergence
Frequency Convergence
BLF Convergence
Local Disp/Energy Index, Local Temp/Energy Index
Global RMS Stress Index
Global Energy Index
Convergence Measures
Mechanica checks if measures are associated with any analyses in a design study
that use the Measure option for convergence. If there are no convergence
measures, Mechanica displays an error message and does not start the run.
Convergence Method
Convergence gives you an idea of how accurate your results are. If your analysis
does not reach convergence during a design study, the results may not have the
desired accuracy. In this case, you need to modify your model.
Select one of these convergence methods for Mechanica to use when it runs your
analysis:
923
This table summarizes which methods are available for different analysis and model
types:
Analysis Types
Multi-Pass
Adaptive
Single-Pass
Adaptive
Quick Check
available
available
available
available
prestress static
available
not available
available
not available
available
available
See Also
Reference:
924
IndexAdditional Information
For the Quick Check method, the tab displays the polynomial order of 3.
See Also
Procedure:
The following items appear on the tab only for steady thermal analysis with the
Multi-Pass Adaptive convergence method selected:
See Also
Procedure:
When you run a design study, the engine performs calculations at increasingly
higher polynomial orders for each element edge. An analysis converges when
the difference in the results of the last two calculations is within the
percentage you specify here.
The engine finishes calculating results when the analysis converges, or when
it has reached the maximum polynomial order that you specified.
Lower convergence percentages yield more accurate results, but Mechanica
may take longer to reach convergence. You should balance the level of
925
accuracy you need with the amount of time it will take to run a design study
containing this analysis.
926
IndexAdditional Information
Use this option if you are interested in details of mode shapes and modal stresses. This
option provides high accuracy, but can also mean greater computation time.
927
For static, prestress static, large deformation, and contact analyses, you can select
one of these options:
928
Mechanica saves user coordinate systems with your model. When you reopen
a model, Mechanica automatically uses the current coordinate system active
when you last saved the model as the current coordinate system for the new
IndexAdditional Information
Cylindrical
Spherical
You select one axis for each material direction. Since you must select a different
coordinate system direction for each material direction, Mechanica automatically
selects the remaining axis for the third direction after you select axes for the first
two directions.
929
The same load defined in a cylindrical coordinate system with FR=1 now points in the
radial direction as shown below:
930
IndexAdditional Information
Note that the T = 0 axis is the line along which T = 0 and Z = 0, and the T = 90 axis
is the line along which T = 90 and Z = 0.
931
Note that the P = 0 axis is the line along which P = 0 and T = 90, and the P = 90
axis is the line along which P = 90 and T = 90.
The following illustration shows you how to determine the direction of the unit
vectors for theta and phi using the right hand rule (r, , ).
932
IndexAdditional Information
One use of the Copy command is to create a result window that acts as a
simple template for other result window definitions you want to create for the
same design study. If you use Copy this way, Mechanica is able to skip some
of the definition steps, making the general process of defining result windows
quicker.
Cost
This property is optional.
Enter a value for cost per unit mass if you want:
To specify cost per unit mass, you can type in a value or click the P button to assign
a parameter.
Use the Boundary Faces command on the AutoGEM Info menu to find and
examine unfinished areas of the model.
If AutoGEM creates an incomplete set of elements, you can try adding points
along curves and surfaces. Then, delete the existing mesh and run AutoGEM
again.
If the volume contains a small feature close to a large feature, you can try
adding points to the large feature.
Reduce the minimum edge and face angles, increase the maximum edge and
face angles, or increase the aspect ratio on the Limits tab on the AutoGEM
Settings dialog box. Try this strategy only when other strategies have failed
or when your model has some very thin surfaces.
Review the AutoGEM log file to determine what percentage of elements
AutoGEM completed. Select the Automatic Interrupt option on the
AutoGEM Settings dialog box, and enter the completion percentage at which
you want to interrupt AutoGEM. After AutoGEM interrupts itself, add points in
the incomplete region.
After you have taken one or more of these steps, you can run AutoGEM again.
You can do either of the following:
o
o
933
Creating
You can override the default limits for creating elements when your model contains
angles constrained by geometry to less than the angles allowed on the dialog box.
Online help uses the term geometry-constrained to refer to such elements.
For example, the angle in the following geometry-constrained element is smaller
than the limit of 5 on the dialog box:
934
Defining mesh controls You can control the way Mechanica creates the
mesh in a number of ways. For example, you can limit element size and
define points and curves in your model so that Mechanica adds nodes at these
locations. You can control node ID ranges or instruct Mechanica to use a
specific coordinate system when creating the mesh. You typically define mesh
controls before you create the mesh, but you may find that you want to
impose additional controls after you review the mesh.
Creating a mesh When you instruct Mechanica to create a FEM mesh, it
subdivides the model into a set of smaller, simpler, interconnected
components called finite elements used by FEA solvers. Finite elements differ
IndexAdditional Information
from the geometric elements that Mechanica creates for its native P-code
solver in that finite elements have a more regular, consistent shape.
For FEM meshes, you can create solid, shell, and bar meshes, or a mesh that
incorporates all three element types.
Reviewing and refining a mesh After you mesh your model, you can
examine the element quality by checking such characteristics as aspect ratio,
warp angle, edge angle, skew, and so forth. You can also review more general
aspects of the mesh to determine its quality, the connectivity of its nodes,
whether it has sufficient granularity, and so forth. If you are not satisfied with
the mesh, you can improve it by:
o asking the FEM mesher to optimize the mesh
o using the information you gathered during your mesh review to create
additional mesh controls. With new mesh controls in place, you then
remesh the model.
See Also
References:
When you define force or mass as your primary unit, the other becomes a derived
unit. For example, if you select force as one of your primary units, mass becomes a
derived unit for your model. The connection between these two systems is given by
Newton's second law of motion:
force = mass x acceleration
the dimensions of which are: F = ML/T2
935
When you click the New button, the System Of Units Definition dialog box
appears. Enter a name for the new system of units and use these radio buttons to
determine the basic physical dimension type:
Mass Length Time (MLT) Select this radio button if you want your
system of units to be based on mass.
Force Length Time (FLT) Select this radio button if you want your
system of units to be based on force.
Length
Mass or Force
Time
Temperature
See Also
Procedure:
Custom Unit
Use the New button on the Units tab of the Units Manager dialog box to create a
custom unit. A custom unit is a unit that the user defines.
You can combine predefined units and custom units to create a custom system of
units.
When you click the New button, the Unit Definition dialog box appears. Select an
option from the Physical Dimension list for the type of unit you want to create:
936
IndexAdditional Information
After you click OK on the Unit Definition dialog box, the name of the new custom
unit appears in the list of units on the Units Manager dialog box.
See Also
Procedure:
X_Axis_GridColor 5.019608e-01f,5.019608e-01f,0.000000e+00f
X_Axis_GridEnabled 1
X_Axis_GridStyle 2
X_Axis_LabelColor 1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f
X_Axis_LabelEnabled 1
X_Axis_LabelFont graphtool_font
X_Axis_LabelFontHeight 1.500000e-01f
X_Axis_Thickness 4
X_Axis_TickColor 1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f
X_Axis_TickFont graphtool_font
X_Axis_TickFontHeight 1.000000e-01f
X_Axis_TickHorizontal 1
Y_Axis_Color 1.000000e+00f,0.000000e+00f,0.000000e+00f
Y_Axis_DisplayLabel 1
Y_Axis_GridColor 5.019608e-01f,5.019608e-01f,0.000000e+00f
Y_Axis_GridEnabled 1
Y_Axis_GridStyle 2
Y_Axis_LabelColor 1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f
Y_Axis_LabelEnabled 1
Y_Axis_LabelFont graphtool_font
Y_Axis_LabelFontHeight 1.500000e-01f
Y_Axis_Thickness 2
Y_Axis_TickColor 1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f
Y_Axis_TickFont graphtool_font
Y_Axis_TickFontHeight 1.000000e-01f
Y_Axis_TickHorizontal 1
If you want to save the configurations you have selected, choose the option
Automatically Save To filename. The default value for filename is config.win. The
default directory is the current working directory.
See Also
938
IndexAdditional Information
Procedure:
Cylindrical UCS
When you define a cylindrical user coordinate system, you enter the coordinates,
which include the origin and the locations of the axes. Mechanica creates the
coordinate system as follows:
Uses the origin and the Z axis location you specify to define the Z axis.
Makes the T = 0 axis perpendicular to the Z axis and in the plane defined by
the origin, the Z axis location, and the T = 0 axis location.
If you specified a T = 0 axis location that is not on a line perpendicular to the
Z axis, Mechanica places the positive T = 0 axis in the direction perpendicular
to the Z axis that is closest to the location you specified.
The T = 0 axis still lies in the same plane in which you placed it:
The positive T = 90 axis is perpendicular to the other axes with the positive
direction determined by the right-hand rule.
Mechanica displays an icon that shows the origin of the new user coordinate system
and the direction of each axis.
The orientation of the icon depends on the orientation of the axes you entered. Here
are two views of the icon:
939
For all Modes Assigns a single damping coefficient to all modes. You enter
a single value, without a % symbol, in the entry box.
For Individual Modes Assigns a separate damping coefficient to each
mode in the analysis.
Function of Frequency Defines damping as a function of frequency.
The normal range for damping coefficients is from 0% to 50%. If you enter values
outside this range, Mechanica asks you to confirm each value.
IndexAdditional Information
only available for your Mechanica sessions unless you promote them
not visible on your part or assembly while you are working at the
Pro/ENGINEER level unless you promote them
As an alternative, you can add datum points to your model in Pro/ENGINEER before
entering Mechanica. In this case, the datum points are available for all your
Pro/ENGINEER sessions as well.
Default
Select the Default command to set the view of your model back to the default
orientation.
A model appears in its default view orientation when it is first created, but a
retrieved model appears in the orientation in which it was last saved.
You can resume the default view at any time.
Selecting the analysis type You need to select the type of analysis
structural, modal, or thermalthat you want Mechanica to perform.
Defining the analysis conditions You need to indicate the loads and
constraints that you want the FEA solver to consider for the run. For modal
analysis, you need to indicate the modes and frequency range you want to
solve for.
For some models and in some situations, you may be primarily interested in
generating a mesh to use with an offline solver rather than running an FEM analysis
within Mechanica. In this case, you do not need to define an analysis.
See Also
References:
941
WCS, Three Point, UCS, and Screen For absolute values, Mechanica
calculates the depth by measuring the value you enter along the axis normal
to the reference plane, using the model geometry nearest the reference entity
as a starting point.
For percentage values, Mechanica measures the percentage along the axis
normal to the reference plane, with the exact position determined by the
distance between the widest portion of your model along that axis normal.
Isosurfaces For absolute values, enter a value in the legend range for the
result window. Mechanica displays the isosurface nearest that value.
For percentage values, Mechanica uses the top and bottom values in the
legend range to convert the percent you enter to a specific legend value. The
software then displays the isosurface nearest the calculated legend value.
o First Point Establishes the point of origin for the coordinate system
o Second Point Establishes the direction of the X axis
o Third Point Establishes the direction of the Y axis
UCS Create the cutting or capping surface relative to a coordinate system
you defined for the model. The UCS you select must be Cartesian.
When you select this option, Mechanica adds a selection area to the dialog
box. Use the selector arrow in this area to select the UCS.
942
IndexAdditional Information
Screen Create the cutting or capping surface relative to the angle at which
you are currently viewing the model in the result window.
Isosurface Create the cutting or capping surface based on the nearest
isosurface. This option is only available for fringe plots.
The Isosurface option behaves differently depending on whether you are
working with cutting surfaces or capping surfaces:
o
o
When you preview your shape changes, you may find that some design controls do
not behave as you want them to. In this case, you need to modify the design control.
You may also need to alter or define Pro/ENGINEER relations to help control the
shape change.
See Also
References:
943
See Also
Procedure:
To Create Parameters
944
IndexAdditional Information
945
T1, T2, T3 These degrees of freedom specify translation of the node along
an axis or axes of the coordinate system you select.
R1, R2, R3 These degrees of freedom specify rotation of the node about
an axis or axes of the coordinate system you select.
T1, T2, T3 These degrees of freedom specify translation of the node along
an axis or axes of the coordinate system you select.
R1, R2, R3 These degrees of freedom specify rotation of the node about
an axis or axes of the coordinate system you select.
Density
Enter a positive value for the mass density associated with this material. This
property is optional, unless you plan to define a modal, prestress modal, or any
dynamic analyses for the model in Structure.
To specify mass density, you can type in a value or click the P button to assign a
parameter.
946
IndexAdditional Information
check the status of an analysis or design study during a run. Mechanica adds
new information to the log as the engine updates the log file
access information about a completed run
You can access this same file through your operating system. The file is called
study/study.stt, located in the directory for output files (study is the name of your
analysis or design study).
Log information includes the following:
the start and end times for calculating an analysis within the design study
the time for starting a p-loop pass in an analysis
other points at which the engine starts an action
947
For more information about the displayed log information, see Time and Disk Usage
Information.
See Also
Reference:
View Max Use to find the location of the quantity maximum for the model
view in the result window. If you rotate your model, move it, or change its
size, you need to select the View Max command again to obtain a new
maximum.
View Min Use to find the location of the quantity minimum for the model
view in the result window. If you rotate your model, move it, or change its
size, you need to select the View Min command again to obtain a new
minimum.
Model Max Use to find the location of the quantity maximum for the
model as a whole. If Mechanica does not display a value, you may need to
rotate your model to find where the value lies.
Model Min Use to find the location of the quantity minimum for the model
as a whole. If Mechanica does not display a value, you may need to rotate
your model to find where the value lies.
When you select any of these commands, Mechanica marks each location with a
small gray triangle icon and displays the value next to the icon. A triangle pointing
up indicates a maximum. A triangle pointing down indicates a minimum. If the plot
has a maximum or minimum at multiple locations, Mechanica marks one location and
displays a message box telling you there are more.
When you have finished reviewing a value, you can clear it from the result window
for better model visibility.
948
Planning and building your part You need to build your model
geometry. You build your geometry in Pro/ENGINEER using methods that
promote easy simulation modeling and improve analysis times.
IndexAdditional Information
Simplifying your model You can speed up your solution times and ease
your simulation modeling tasks if you work with a simplified model.
Pro/ENGINEER provides various techniques that you can use to simplify your
model before or during your Mechanica session.
Defining a system of units for your model You need to define a system
of units for your model. You can select a predefined system of units or create
a custom system of units.
Defining modeling prerequisites for your model You can define a
variety of modeling prerequisites in Mechanica. For example, you can define
coordinate systems for your model. Mechanica uses coordinate systems to
help determine the direction and placement of a load, the orientation of a
material, and for certain types of constraints.
You can also define datum geometry, surface regions, and volume regions.
These features give you a more versatile approach to placing loads,
constraints, connections, and idealizations.
Defining modeling entities for your model You can add the following
modeling entities:
o Materials You need to define the material or materials that your
model will be made of. You can also define material orientations.
o Constraints For Structure, you need to define the extent to which
your model can move in space. For Thermal, you need to define the
convection conditions and prescribed temperatures that act as
boundary conditions for the model.
o Loads For Structure, you need to define the external forces that act
on your model relative to its constraints. For Thermal, you need to
define the heat loads that act on your model.
Defining idealizations Mechanica typically treats Pro/ENGINEER parts
and assemblies as solid models. Some models, or portions of a model, may
be better suited for other types of meshesshell or bar meshes, for example.
To accommodate this type of model, Mechanica provides you with the ability
to create shell or beam idealizations that the software will include when you
mesh the model. You can also add specialized idealizations such as masses,
gaps, and springs. These entities enable you to model concentrated masses,
enforced gaps between geometry, and general six-degree-of-freedom spring
connections between points.
Defining connections You can define various connections in your model.
For example, you can create contact regions for your model or add spot
welds. Connections tell Mechanica where the different parts of your model
contact as well as describe the nature of that contact. Mechanica uses this
information to develop an appropriate mesh.
See Also
949
References:
Planning and building your model You need to build your model
geometry. In integrated mode, you build your geometry in Pro/ENGINEER
using methods that promote Mechanica modeling and analysis.
Simplifying your model You can speed up your solution times and ease
your simulation modeling tasks if you work with a simplified model. You can
use various techniques to simplify your model within Pro/ENGINEER.
Defining a system of units for your model You need to define a system
of units for your model. You can select a predefined system of units or create
a custom system of units.
Defining modeling prerequisites for your model You can define a
variety of modeling prerequisites in Mechanica. For example, you can define
coordinate systems for your model in Mechanica. Mechanica uses coordinate
systems to help determine the direction and placement of a load, the
orientation of a material, and for certain types of constraints and measures.
You can also define datum geometry, surface regions, and volume regions.
These features give you a more versatile approach to placing loads,
constraints, measures, and idealizations.
950
Defining modeling entities for your model You can add the following
modeling entities:
o Materials You need to define the material or materials your model
will be made of. You can also define material orientations.
o Constraints For Structure, you need to define the extent to which
your model can move in space. For Thermal, you need to define the
convection conditions and prescribed temperatures that act as
boundary conditions for the model.
o Loads For Structure, you need to define the external forces that will
act on your model relative to its constraints. For Thermal, you need to
define the heat loads that act on your model.
Defining idealizations Mechanica treats Pro/ENGINEER parts and
assemblies as solid models. As an alternative, you can define your model as a
shell or beam model. Shell and beam modeling can reduce run times and disk
space requirements.
IndexAdditional Information
Shell modeling is appropriate for parts that are thin in one dimension, such as
sheet metal parts. Beam modeling is a good choice for parts that are thin in
two dimensions, such as rods or struts. With beam modeling, you can define
your entire model as a set of beams, or you can define beams for a portion of
the model and use solids or shells for the remainder.
You can also add specialized idealizations such as masses and springs. These
entities enable you to model concentrated masses and general six-degree-offreedom spring connections.
See Also
References:
Diamond
The icon for a diamond beam section type looks like this:
When you select Diamond as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition
dialog box, you must enter positive values for these cross-section dimensions:
b
d
951
Stress recovery points for diamond beam section types are illustrated below. The
figure on the left shows the points in native mode, and the figure on the right shows
the points in FEM mode.
Direct VRML
Use File>Export>Direct VRML to export files in VRML format. You can export one
non-animating discrete colored fringe plot (excluding p-level plots) at a time using
this command.
After you select this command, the Export VRML dialog box appears. If there is
more than one fringe plot available, you are prompted to select one.
Tip: You should minimize the number of graphical entities required to
visualize the results. This reduces download time and improves graphics
performance.
Mechanica can export fringes as VRML 1.0 or VRML 2.0 format files. You can use a
config.pro option to control the VRML format Mechanica uses as well as whether the
VRML report will include feature edges.
See Also
Procedure:
952
IndexAdditional Information
When you select Displacement from the Quantity option menu, Mechanica may
alter the selections on the Quantity tab. Some selections do not appear unless the
item is part of the analysis or design study you choose. The possible selections
include:
Amplitude Use this option button to indicate that you want Mechanica to
display displacement in terms of amplitude. This button is available for FEM
mode dynamic analyses only.
Phase Use this option button to indicate that you want Mechanica to
display displacement in terms of phase. This button is available for FEM mode
dynamic analyses only.
Component Select a component. The directional components that appear
on this option menu change if you change the coordinate system using the
Relative To option menu.
Relative To Display results relative to a directional component.
Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the
result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the
entity you want to use in your results display. This area appears only if you
select a display type of Graph.
Display Element IDs Turn element IDs on and off for a result window.
Display Node IDs Turn node IDs on and off for a result window.
953
Display Result Values Turn a display of node values on and off for a
result window. This command is only available for the following quantities:
o Displacements
o Rotations
o Reactions
o Temperatures
See Also
Procedure:
You can use the Mesh And Model check box on the Mesh tab of the Simulation
Display dialog box to display both the geometry and mesh models while you are
working with functionality in which only the mesh model is active. This prevents
portions of your model from disappearing from the screen if you remove a mesh.
Here are the situations in which only the mesh model is active:
954
IndexAdditional Information
You use the No Mesh option to turn off the mesh line display. Regardless of how you
set the Mesh and Model check box, you can only use the No Mesh option when
both the geometry and mesh models are active in the overall modelfor example,
when you add properties, loads, constraints, and so forth. You cannot use the No
Mesh option if only the mesh model is active.
If you plan to use Pro/ENGINEER parameters in Mechanica, you may find it handy to
create all parameters before you enter Mechanica. If you are creating parameters
through the Tools>Parameters command, be aware that Mechanica does not
accept parameters that are created using Integer or String as a parameter type.
955
Be aware that Mechanica limits many modeling entity names to 16 characters. You
can use alphanumeric characters and underbars only. Names must always start with
alphabetic characters. Because Mechanica uses the Pro/ENGINEER parameter names
as design parameter and measure names, always observe these naming conventions
when creating Pro/ENGINEER parameters. If your Pro/ENGINEER parameter name is
too long, the software will truncate it.
For your convenience, Mechanica also enables you to define Pro/ENGINEER
parameters from the dialog boxes that you use to create design parameters. In this
case, the software only accepts a constant, numerical value as the Pro/ENGINEER
parameter definition. You can use the Pro/ENGINEER parameters defined by this
method as design parameters onlyyou cannot use them as measures.
Note: Mechanica does not enable you to define Pro/ENGINEER parameters
from the dialog boxes you use to create measures.
To raise the cutting or capping surface move the mouse upward in the
positive Y screen direction.
To lower the cutting or capping surface move the mouse downward in
the negative Y screen direction.
956
IndexAdditional Information
At Each Step Mechanica calculates the value of the measure at each time
or frequency step.
Maximum Mechanica calculates the maximum value over all time or
frequency steps, or over a specified time range.
Minimum Mechanica calculates the minimum value over all time or
frequency steps, or over a specified time range.
Max Absolute Mechanica calculates the maximum magnitude value over
all time or frequency steps, or over a specified time range.
RMS Mechanica calculates the root mean square value of the measure over
the frequency range.
Apparent Frequency Mechanica calculates the effective frequency of a
PSD output by integrating over the frequency range.
At Time Mechanica calculates the value of a measure at a specified time.
The measure is calculated only for dynamic time analyses.
The Dynamic Evaluation area also includes a Time Stamp check box that you can
use to obtain information on the time at which Mechanica satisfies your measure
quantity and component.
At Each Step Mechanica calculates the value of the measure at each time
step for a transient thermal analysis. Mechanica does not report the measure
values in the summary file, but you can plot these measures as a function of
time through the Results command.
Maximum Mechanica calculates the maximum value for a transient
thermal analysis. This option is not active if the Spatial Evaluation method
is Minimum or Maximum Abs. Mechanica reports this value in the summary
file.
Minimum Mechanica calculates the minimum value for a transient thermal
analysis. This option is not active if the Spatial Evaluation method is
Maximum or Maximum Abs. Mechanica reports this value in the summary
file.
Maximum Abs Mechanica calculates the maximum absolute value for a
transient thermal analysis. This option is not active if the Spatial Evaluation
method is Maximum or Minimum, or if the Component is Magnitude.
Mechanica reports this value in the summary file.
At Time Mechanica calculates the value of a measure at a time you
specify. The measure is calculated only for a transient thermal analysis.
957
Over Analysis Mechanica calculates the value over all the time steps of
the transient thermal analysis.
Over Time Range Mechanica calculates the value over a specified time
range of the transient thermal analysis.
If you select the Time Stamp check box, Mechanica creates a time stamp measure that
saves the time at which a maximum, minimum, or max abs condition occurs.
Dynamic Query
Show the value of the result window's quantity at locations you select. You can query
one location or multiple locations:
One location Drag the cursor over the location. While you drag, a dialog
box shows the value at each location the cursor crosses. To cancel, click the
Done button.
Tip: Some locations may be difficult to select at certain views. If you
have trouble selecting a query location, try changing the view and
selecting the location again.
958
IndexAdditional Information
Error Resolution
During error checks, Mechanica displays message boxes asking you whether or not
you want to place the highlighted entities into groups. It does not consider boundary
edges and faces to be errors and does not prevent the run from starting.
If your model contains errors, Mechanica returns you to the Analyses and Design
Studies dialog box without executing the run. If your model contains no errors,
Mechanica continues on to the next step.
If your model does not contain errors, or if you did not check for errors, Mechanica
takes the following steps:
saves the model, prompting you to enter a model name if you have not
previously saved it
writes the engine input files and starts the engine
Estimated Variation
You use Estimated Variation to indicate the expected difference between the
maximum and minimum temperature in the model during the analysis. You can enter
a value or select Auto. If you select Auto, the engine estimates a value from the
applied heat loads and convection conditions.
If you enter a value, it must correspond to the temperature variation that you expect
your model to experience during the analysis. This value, which must be a positive
number, works with the value you set in the Accuracy field to control the accuracy
of the time integration.
The estimated temperature variation you enter need only be the correct order of
magnitude to ensure that Mechanica controls time integration errors properly and
efficiently. If you enter a value for estimated temperature variation that is too small,
the engine may warn that it took too many time steps. However, if at any point in
the analysis the actual temperature variation exceeds your specified value, or the
value estimated by the engine from the applied heat loads, the engine proceeds with
the larger value, computed as a result of the time integration.
If the engine warns that the estimated temperature variation was too large, the
solution may still be sufficiently accurate because of the control of errors in energy
norm. You can verify this by re-running the analysis a second time with the
Estimated Variation equal to the value of temperature variation reported by the
engine in the original analysis.
959
Alternatively, you can use the quick check analysis to compute the temperature
variation in the model and enter that value for Estimated Variation before running
a transient thermal analysis with single-pass adaptive convergence.
A cutting surface is a plane that slices your model and trims both the top and
bottom away. You can define more than one cutting surface for your model.
A capping surface is a plane that slices your model and trims either the top or
bottom away. You can only define one capping surface for your model.
The left result window above shows a model with multiple cutting surfaces. The most
valuable of these is the first from the bottom, which indicates how far the high stress
(red) area intrudes into the interior of the model. The right result window shows the
same model with a capping surface that removes the upper two thirds of the model.
960
IndexAdditional Information
Cutting and capping surfaces are particularly useful for thick models, models that
may have significant variations of interior stress, or models that may undergo
unseen deformations. Consider zooming in on areas of interest for cutting or capping
surfaces to get a more exact idea of how quantities behave inside your model.
If you find that a cutting or capping surface is not giving you the information you
need, you can modify or delete it.
See Also
Procedures:
961
962
IndexAdditional Information
In addition, you can use Solid Chunk to apply different materials to solid areas of
mixed models provided that the solid areas are isolated through the use of
interleaved idealizations, as shown below:
When you assign bronze to this model using the Whole Part option, the entire
model receives bronze as its material. However, you can override bronze for the solid
area on the right side of the model by assigning a different materialin this case,
brassto the surface on the far right side of the model using the Solid Chunk
option. The midsurface shell acts a barrier, in effect isolating the solid chunk on the
right side of the model. Mechanica applies brass to the right side solid, propagating
that material through the tetrahedral mesh until it reaches the bounding midsurface.
Note that you could achieve the same effect using the Solid Chunk option for the
top, bottom, or left surface (upper or lower) of the right side solid. However, had you
selected the front or back surface for the Solid Chunk option, brass would have
propagated through both the right and left side solid, leaving the midsurface bronze.
Also, had you wanted to assign the midsurface a different material, you could have
done so with the Shell Pair option.
963
In this case, if the design parameters you create to translate hole 1 and hole 2 have
too large a range, Mechanica may optimize the shape so that the bolt holes are in
conflict, and you could no longer place both bolts.
964
IndexAdditional Information
965
966
IndexAdditional Information
Example: Brick
A brick (or hexahedron) has six quadrilateral faces, twelve edges, and eight points:
967
Be sure all animation result windows are displayed. Select the first window and use
View>Step Forward to find the first frame you are interested in. Select the second
window and use Step Forward to find the next frame you are interested in. Repeat
this process for all result windows until you have set all the result windows to
different stages.
Here is an example of a comparison between Step 9 and Step 15 for the same
model, showing the different deformations for the two steps:
You can use animation comparisons like the one above to help determine when areas
of the model move into higher quantity ranges and when certain deformations begin
to take place. Since you can also see this behavior by simply stepping through an
animation, you may find that this type of comparison is primarily useful for
generating formal reports.
968
IndexAdditional Information
Note: Both windows use the same number of frames and show the same frame of the
animation, forming the basis of comparison.
969
970
IndexAdditional Information
1. Open the part or subassembly. At this point the part or subassembly should
not yet have a mesh. If it does, erase the mesh.
2. Create datum points wherever you want to form connections with the toplevel assembly. As Mechanica uses these datum points to determine the load
path, consider the distribution and placement carefully.
3. Define each datum point as a hard point mesh control, and then mesh the
model. The resulting mesh establishes a node at every hard point.
4. In assembly mode, open the top-level assembly. The component meshed in
step 3 should appear with its mesh.
5. Connect all pre-meshed components in the load path to the top-level
assembly by creating a beam, spring, gap, rigid link, or weighted link.
For the pre-meshed components, be sure to use one of the hard points
established in step 3. For the top-level components, use any applicable
geometry as the end of the idealization or link, as shown in this example:
Here, there is a spring idealization that connects hard point 3 on the meshed
part to datum point 10 on the unmeshed part.
6. Mesh the top-level assembly. When the mesh generator encounters
connections with pre-existing meshes, it uses the hard points as element
nodes and routes the beam, spring, gap, or rigid or weighted link to the
meshed nodes, as shown below:
971
Note that the mesh of the left part has nodes at all the hard points along the
edge, but the elements of the left and right parts only have a coincident node
where the spring is. These two nodes are where the load transmits.
The mesh on the left is an inherited mesha pre-existing mesh that the toplevel assembly mesh inheritswhile the mesh on the right and the spring
element are both part of the top-level assembly mesh.
This process varies slightly if you are connecting two pre-meshed components
together. In this case, you need to create the connection hard points for both
components before generating the respective component meshes. After both
components have meshes that account for the hard points, you mesh the
connections in the top-level assembly. In this case, the assembly mesh consists of
only those elements that represent connection idealizations.
Once you understand the steps just described and their implications, you may want
to review some techniques that will help you create desired effects and handle
special situations.
972
IndexAdditional Information
973
Mechanica projects a Cartesian coordinate system onto a surface or shell in the same
manner as Mechanica projects a vector.
974
IndexAdditional Information
When you pattern the holes in this way, the surface placement of hole 2 is tied to
hole 1 through the dimensioning scheme. If you took this approach, and then
assigned a horizontal translation design parameter for hole 1, Mechanica would move
hole 2 along with hole 1. Depending on the range of movement you defined for hole
1, you could encounter unexpected topology conflicts between hole 2 and the left
surface of the plate, as shown below:
To move hole 2 independently, you would define a translation design parameter for
hole 2. However, in this case, all movement would be based on the position of hole
1, which would also be dynamic.
975
This bracket is made of steel and supports a bookshelf that rests on two rods. The
bracket ears and vertical face slide into a die-cast slot in the shelf post. The support
holes accept a rod with a predetermined diameter.
If you want Mechanica to look at all the features of the shelf bracket when
performing shape changes instead of focusing only on the shelf plate and holes, you
might develop the part as follows:
In this case, you define the shelf plate (feature 1) as the base feature and build the
rear plate (feature 2) off the back surface of the base feature. Because you want
Mechanica to move the two holes independently, you design each as a separate
feature (feature 3 and feature 4).
When planning the rounds (feature 5 and feature 6), you can choose between two
alternatives. You can either incorporate the rounds into the profile of feature 1 as
you build that feature or you can treat the rounds as a separate feature.
976
IndexAdditional Information
For the purposes of Mechanica, you should strongly consider the latter method. With
this method, you can suppress the rounds if Mechanica encounters a conflict between
a round and the movement of any of the defining surfaces.
977
In working with function loads, be aware that the resultant load depends on a
number of factors, such as the orientation of the coordinate system, the
dimensioning scheme you used for your part, and so forth. As a result of these
dependencies, you may need to work through the function dialog box more than
once to achieve the exact load conditions you want.
Because function loads are complex, you may find it particularly useful to verify the
load by clicking the Preview button on the Load Definition dialog box. The preview
function shows the relative load magnitude at different points on the entity. You
might also find it useful to verify the load. To review loads, select Info>Review
Total Load after you define the load. The method you use varies depending on
whether you are performing the review for a force, moment, bearing, or pressure
load in Structure or a heat load in Thermal.
For your second beam, you select two single points, one of them belonging to the
feature of points referenced for the first beam. The second beam overrides the one
that already existed between the same single points. The remainder of the first beam
referencing the point feature is not changed.
978
IndexAdditional Information
If you turn off Insert Points, AutoGEM is unable to create a full set of elements on
the surface. The display of surfaces is turned off so you can clearly see the shells:
If you turn on Insert Points, AutoGEM adds the points it needs to finish creating
elements, as shown below. Again, the display of surfaces is turned off:
979
980
IndexAdditional Information
In the invalid 3-component assembly, part a and part c are fastened with a bolt or
screw. Part b lies between parts a and c, directly in the fastener path, causing
problems with the fastener path regardless of the fact that, in a physical model, the
bolt or screw could easily pass through all 3 parts. The invalid 2-component
assembly presents a similar situationin this case, with the lower horizontal member
of part a causing the problem. Again, this construction would not present any issues
in a real world environment, but Mechanica considers it invalid.
As you can see, the valid assembly includes two components, one of which
incorporates two spacers. Note that, while the spacers enforce a distance between
the two components, the fastener path includes no interfering geometry. Because
the fastener path is clear, you can model the connection between the two
components using a bolt or screw.
981
If you applied the load with a force per unit of length distribution to the top or
bottom curve for the surface shown above, Mechanica would keep the load. If you
loaded both the top and bottom curve, Mechanica would calculate the compressed
load based on the value of both loads.
When you create a laminate stiffness shell property set, you can realign the default
material orientation.
IndexAdditional Information
For a 0 laminate, the 1 direction of the ply is aligned with the 1' direction of the
material. For a 90 laminate, the 1 direction of the ply is aligned with the 2' direction
of the laminate.
983
984
IndexAdditional Information
segment of the hole, as though a rod smaller than the radius of the hole were pulling
outward against the far surface of the hole.
To accomplish this, you could create a specialized load as a function of a cylindrical
coordinate system, as follows:
In this case, you would create a cylindrical coordinate system as shown above. You
would then create a force-per-unit-area load based on the following symbolic
function:
if(theta>=pi/3&&theta<=pi/3,cos(theta),0)
The load resulting from this function has a sinusoidal profile, with the load at its
greatest where T=0. The load tapers symmetrically about T=0, reaching a 0 force at
T=60 and T=60. This load profile is similar to that of a bearing load. However,
Mechanica's bearing load always applies to a 180 segment, while this load applies to
a 120 segment.
985
In this case, you select all three top surfaces and pair them with the three
corresponding bottom surfaces. When it processes the pair, Mechanica compresses
the bottom surfaces and top surfaces into a single, continuous midsurface. The
software divides the midsurface into segments that coincide with the layout of the
top surfaces and associates the individual thicknesses with each of these segments.
Note: Make sure the compressed midsurfaces all intersect so that there are no gaps or
discontinuities. If they do not intersect, correct the model manually to eliminate the gaps.
When it builds elements during an analysis run, Mechanica places half of the
thickness on top of the midsurface and half on the bottom. If your model includes
shell pairs of variable thickness, or one where you have modified the pair placement,
the shape of the final model may be different from that of the uncompressed model,
as in the following example:
IndexAdditional Information
987
Here, the extruded length of the model is substantially greater than its circular
profile. Note that the diagonal measurement taken when the extruded length lies in
the WCS XY plane is about 2.5 times longer than the diagonal measurement taken
when the circular profile lies in the XY plane. Further, Mechanica determines the
bounding box based on the nodal placement. If the model had included nodes only at
the top and bottom, the bounding box and the resulting diagonal for the circular
profile version would both have been a vertical line.
Thus, when you develop a ratio for Relative to Model and Relative to Part, you
need to be sure you have a reasonable estimate of what the bounding box will look
like and how long the diagonal will be. If you do not keep this in mind, you may
enter a ratio value too large with respect to the diagonal, and Mechanica will be
unable to apply the tolerance.
988
IndexAdditional Information
In the next figure, only the orientation angle is changed, causing the BSCS to rotate
around the X axis.
In the last figure, both the orientation angle and the DY, DZ offsets have non-zero
values. The software performs the rotation first, then translates the BSCS along the
rotated BSCS axes to satisfy the DY and DZ offset values.
989
You can choose to change only the orientation angle is changed, as shown below,
causing the BSCS to rotate around the X axis.
Lastly, you can specify non-zero values for both the orientation angle and the DY, DZ
offsets. The software performs the rotation first, then translates the BSCS along the
rotated BSCS axes to satisfy the DY and DZ offset values, as shown below.
990
IndexAdditional Information
991
If you deselect the Point Loads option on the AutoGEM Settings dialog box,
AutoGEM creates eight shells. The display of surfaces is turned off so you can clearly
see the shells:
If you select the Point Loads option, AutoGEM creates an additional small element
to isolate that point. Again, the display of surfaces is turned off:
992
IndexAdditional Information
This bracket is made of steel and supports a bookshelf that rests on two rods. The
bracket ears and vertical face slide into a die-cast slot in the shelf post. Note that the
support holes accept a rod with a predetermined diameter.
If you were trying to determine the best design for this part, you would probably
want to optimize the shape for the lowest mass that would support a specified
weight. In this case, you might want to change the following aspects of the design:
the
the
the
the
angle of curve a
length of the part
thickness of the part
placement of the rod support holes
993
However, due to external restrictions like the support rod diameter, you cannot
change the following three aspects of the design:
If you had no interest in optimizing this part, you might design the bracket as a
single plate with a uniform thickness and treat the body of the plate as a single
Pro/ENGINEER feature. However, because you plan to optimize for mass, you want
Mechanica to be able to change any aspect of the design that reduces the mass. This
objective can affect the way you develop your part in Pro/ENGINEER.
For example, one of the aspects directly tied to mass is part thickness. Because the
bracket ear shape and part height cannot change, you cannot alter the part thickness
if you develop the bracket as a single plate. Instead, you might choose to treat the
body of the plate as two separate featuresa rear plate and a shelf plate, as shown
below:
This approach lets you maintain a predefined thickness for the rear plate while
allowing Mechanica to vary the thickness of the shelf plate.
994
IndexAdditional Information
995
If you turn off Reentrant Corners, AutoGEM creates four shell elements. The
display of surfaces is turned off so you can clearly see the shells:
996
IndexAdditional Information
The reentrant corners have a total of seven small elements. The reentrant corner
shown below has three:
997
Example: Relations
With properly defined relations, you can create complex shape changes with fewer
design parameters. For example, you can use relations to decrease the size of the
following rectangular slot while maintaining its proportions and centering. As you
look at the figure, note that the slot is dimensioned to default datum planes for
orientation purposes.
In this case, the width of the slot (slt_width) is 3/4 the length of the slot
(slt_length). To maintain this proportionality and ensure that the slot remains in the
center of the model, you would assign the following relations:
Because relations control dtm_wid and slt_width, you would only need to create
design parameters for dtm_len and slt_length. Without these relations, you would
need to define four design parameters to simulate the movementone for each
dimension.
998
IndexAdditional Information
Mechanica uses the right-hand rule to determine the direction of each rotation. If
you had entered a positive angle, the material directions would have rotated in the
other direction.
First, you would define a cut through the solid in Pro/ENGINEER to create an
external, planar surface. Then, in Mechanica you select the resulting surface for your
999
Be aware that, in some cases, when you define a cut through a 2D axisymmetric
model, you may not be able to select only the surface that you want to include in
your analysis. Pro/ENGINEER may instead select multiple surfaces created by the
cut. If this occurs, you can define a surface region that includes only the surface or
surfaces required to define your 2D model. You can then use the Sketcher to sketch
the curve and the Use Edge geometry tool to trace around the geometry. The
surfaces created by the cut are effectively separated, and you are able to select the
geometry required for the 2D analysis.
1000
IndexAdditional Information
In this case, the scale values are staggered such that point 3 sees 100% of the load
and point 0 sees no load. The points in between see a load that is proportional with
their specific scale factors, as calculated in relation to the interpolation point scale
factors.
The load above has a Force Per Unit Length spatial distribution. If you apply a
total load instead, Mechanica normalizes the load throughout the curve such that the
total load applied to the curve equals the load value on the dialog box.
When applying interpolated loads, Mechanica works in parameter space. Parameter
space is representative space, internal to Mechanica's code, in which Mechanica
represents model geometry. Mechanica calculates the interpolation in parameter
space and then maps the interpolation back to the entity over which the interpolation
is defined.
This means that Mechanica may not apply the interpolated load in exactly the way
you expect. Thus, with interpolated loads, be sure to use the Review button on the
Load Interpolation dialog box to verify that Mechanica applied the load as desired.
The review function shows the relative load magnitude at different points on the
entity.
The above example is one of the simplest forms of an interpolated load. Depending
on how you use the scale factor in relation to interpolation point location, you can
shape interpolated loads in a more complex manner.
1001
Example: T-Bracket
In the following approach, Mechanica compresses shell pair a to form the horizontal
plane of the T-bracket and shell pair b to form the vertical plane.
Note: If your model includes a meeting of more than two surface pairs, make sure the
compressed midsurfaces all intersect at a common point or axis. If they do not, correct
the model manually to ensure a proper intersection.
The original model in the above example was created as a solid model. However, if
you created this model using Pro/SHEETMETAL, the software may not merge the
common surface of the two perpendicular plates, resulting in a gap between the two
midsurfaces. In this case, you may need to correct the geometry to ensure that
Mechanica solves the model correctly.
Example: Tetra
A tetra (or tetrahedron) has four triangular faces, six edges, and four points:
1002
IndexAdditional Information
In this case, the L-bracket round does not have a surface that the software can pair
it with. To remedy the situation, you should suppress the round, as in solution A, or
create an opposing round, as in solution B.
1003
In the first example, both parts are solids, so there is no need to constrain the
component rotations. However, the constraint for part b allows translation in the X
and Y directions, thus failing to prevent part b from rotating about the fastener axis.
In the second example, both parts are fully constrained so there is no unwanted
rotation. Even though the parts cannot rotate, you can still model realistic behaviors
like flexion at the fastener by placing a force load on the front surfaces near the
centerline of the fastener holes.
The examples just discussed involve fixing rotations using constraints, but you can
also fix rotations by adding other fasteners, provided you consider extra fasteners
acceptable for your model and your model includes reference geometry.
1004
IndexAdditional Information
This bracket is made of steel and supports a bookshelf that rests on two rods. The
bracket ears and vertical face slide into a die-cast slot in the shelf post. Note that the
support holes accept a rod with a predetermined diameter.
Looking at the prior example, you can omit the following two items from your initial
design:
the rear plate, provided it is stiff enough not to affect the analysis results
the rounds
If you leave these items out of your initial design, the part you prepared for
Mechanica would resemble the following:
As you can see, all nonessential areas of the design are gone. Only the portion you
want to analyze or optimize remains. At this point, you can perform a complete
Mechanica analysis, sensitivity study, and optimization for your part.
1005
After Mechanica develops the optimized shape for this part, you can add the rear
plate and rounds. To ensure that the part is still valid, always return to Mechanica for
a standard analysis of the complete part.
1006
IndexAdditional Information
Example: Wedge
A wedge (or pentahedron) has two triangular faces, three quadrilateral faces, nine
edges, and six points:
1007
Excel
Use this command to write the graph data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. This
command is only available if you select a single graph result window.
After you select File>Export>Excel, Mechanica displays the Export To Excel
dialog box. Enter a path and file name on the dialog box. When you click OK,
Mechanica creates a file with an .xls extension. The file contains a pictorial rendition
of the graph as well as a numeric table of graph results at given intervals. Following
is a sample spreadsheet.
1008
HTML Report Name Specify the file name, including path, to which you
want to save the .htm file.
Browser Title (optional) Enter the title that will appear on the title bar of
the browser.
HTML Report Title (optional) Enter the title that will appear at the top of
the report.
Item This menu lists the windows selected for inclusion in the report. In
addition to the windows, a Title Block, Introduction, and Conclusion section
are listed as well. Selecting on any one of these brings up the attributes for
that window in the content layout to the right of the list.
o Title Block (optional) Controls the appearance of the table of
contents, as well as other descriptors.
o Introduction (optional) Enter an introduction you want included in
the report.
IndexAdditional Information
Graphic Format Use JPEG File Interchange Format for a fringe plot or if
your results have many colors. The more colors your results have, the more
useful the JPEG format is.
Graphic Size Select the current view, ISO A7, ISO A6, or ISO A5.
Alignment Select Landscape or Portrait, if available.
Height This text box displaying the height of the graphic cannot be edited.
Width This text box displaying the width of the graphic cannot be edited.
Look In Shows the path to the current directory and the list of files in that
directory is shown below.
Name Displays the name of the VRML file to be exported.
Type Lists all files that end in .wrl, the type for VRML files.
Shear Relief Enter values in this area for the components of the shear
relief coefficient in the XY plane and XZ plane. You may want to specify a
shear relief coefficient if your beam is tapered and includes thick flanges. In a
tapered flanged beam, the flanges support a portion of the transverse shear
load, and the shear relief coefficients take this support into consideration. For
a beam for which the thicknesses at ends A and B are given by hA and hB,
respectively, the shear relief coefficient is given by:
S = 2(hA - hB)/(hA + hB)
1009
Include Stress Recovery Check this box if you want Mechanica to include
beam stress recovery points in analyses.
Selectable Entities
3D
3D
3D
2D
Surfaces
2D (Any)
2D
Surfaces
Failure Criterion
Specify strength properties for isotropic and transversely isotropic materials to
determine whether a material has failed under given loading conditions. These
properties are stored in the material library. Select None if no failure criterion is
required.
To view the results, display a fringe plot. If the failure index is equal to or greater
than 1, the material has failed.
Failure index measures and results are not available if you do not request stress
quantities.
For Isotropic Properties Select one of the following stress quantities from the
Failure Criterion tab:
For Transversely Isotropic Properties Select one of the following from the
Failure Criterion tab:
These failure criteria are valid only for 3D shells. The 1 and 2 on the dialog box
quantities denote the 1 and 2 directions of the material.
1010
IndexAdditional Information
When reviewing failure index results, be sure to consider the failure modes of the
material.
If you select Failure Index from the Quantity option menu and Graph as your
display type, Mechanica adds the Graph Location selection to the Quantity tab.
Use the associated selector arrow to display your model and pick the geometric
entity you want to use in your results display.
Fatigue Properties
The following options for material properties appear on the Fatigue tab on the
Material Definition dialog box:
Ultimate Tensile Strength Enter a value between 50 MPa and 4000 MPa.
Material Type Select an option for the type of material you are using:
Unalloyed steels, Low Alloy steels, Aluminum alloys, Titanium alloys, or None.
Surface Finish Select an option for the surface finish of your model:
o Polished
o Ground
o Good Machined
o Average Machined
o Poor Machined
o Hot Rolled
o Forged
o Cast
o Water Corroded
o Seawater Corroded
o Nitrided
o Shot Peened
o Cold Rolled
Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor Enter a fatigue strength reduction
factor (Kf) greater than 1. This factor is used to reduce the endurance limit to
account for unmodeled stress concentrations, such as those found in welds.
See Also
Procedure:
1011
See Also
Reference:
Maximum
Minimum
Average
Variance
Point of max
Point of min
Value (at a specific location on the model)
Action/Name
No Mesh Removes mesh lines from your model. The mesh remains
intact, but does not appear on your screen.
Wireframe Turns geometry lines white and element lines yellow. The
software displays all elements with boundary faces.
Hidden Line Turns visible geometry lines white and element lines on
visible surfaces yellow. Hidden geometry and hidden element edges are
gray. The software displays all elements with boundary faces.
No Hidden Turns visible geometry lines white and external, visible
surfaces of elements yellow. The software does not display hidden
geometry and hidden element edges.
Shaded Turns visible geometry lines red and external, visible edges of
elements blue. The software does not display hidden geometry and hidden
element edges.
1012
IndexAdditional Information
These buttons become available only when you work in FEM mode.
Part
o
o
o
o
For more information on simplified representations and family tables, search the
Fundamentals functional area and the Assembly and Welding functional area of the
Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
FEM Mode
FEM mode enables you to create a mathematical model based on a Pro/ENGINEER
part or assembly, then analyze that part using any of several third-party finite
element solvers such as NASTRAN, ANSYS, and so forth. The activities you perform
in FEM mode are similar to those you perform in native mode. You complete such
tasks as adding modeling entities such as loads, constraints, and so forth as well as
defining analyses. However, unlike native mode, you must explicitly create a mesh
for your model instead of having Mechanica perform this step automatically at run
time. You also need to explicitly output your model to one of the supported FEA
solvers, which analyzes the structural or thermal integrity of the model based on how
you set up the simulation.
See Also
References:
analysis definitions. Note that, for modal analysis definitions, the solver may
ignore the frequency range you specified in the Analysis Definition dialog
box.
calculated results
To output your model to the FEM Neutral Format, select the PTC FEM Neutral
Format option from the Solver option menu on the Run FEM Analysis dialog box.
See FEM Neutral Format File for details.
Fix Normals Use this option to adjust all surfaces so that the normal
directions in each element are consistent across the model. Mechanica
changes the normal direction of some surfaces to make the normals as
consistent as possible.
For certain models, it is not possible to generate a completely consistent set of
directions. Review the normals and use Flip to fine-tune the global fix.
Flip Normals Use this option to change the direction of the normal in
selected surfaces.
Select the surfaces. Mechanica flips the direction of the arrow for each surface
you selected.
1014
IndexAdditional Information
that using this approach improves mesh quality, but at some expense to the mesh's
geometric accuracy.
Alternate methods of improving mesh quality include:
1015
Units
3D:
2D Axisymmetric:
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Strain:
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Stress:
Curve, Edge
Surface, 2D Plate
The units for moment loads are the units for the force loads multiplied by length.
1016
IndexAdditional Information
If the entity's length or area changes, either through changes you make to
the model or through changes Mechanica makes during a sensitivity or
optimization design study, the total load on the entity changes accordingly.
For example, if you wanted to apply a load of 100 pounds to a 25x25 inch
surface using the force per unit method, you would define a load with each 1x1
inch area of the surface seeing 0.16 pound. The cumulative effect of the load is
100 pounds.
In this case, if the surface shrank to 1x1 inch during optimization, the
remaining area would still see 0.16 pounds. Thus, although the load on the
individual unit of area does not change, the original 100-pound surface load
drops to 0.16 pounds.
Because all modeling data for 2D plane strain models is in terms of per unit
depth, you enter the total load on a curve, edge, or 2D shell in terms of the
total applied per unit depth.
For 2D axisymmetric models, a load on a curve, edge, or 2D shell defines
what is physically an area load. You enter the amount of such a load as a
force per unit area on the surface that the curve, edge, or 2D shell
represents.
A load on a 2D solid defines what is physically a volume load. You enter this
type of load as a force per unit volume on the body that the 2D solid
represents.
You can apply a force-per-unit load to multiple surfaces. In this case,
Mechanica places the same load on each surface unit regardless of the area of
the surface.
Background Color Controls the background color for the result window.
Title Displays a title at the bottom of the result window.
Label Displays a result description in the upper left corner of the result
window. The contents of this area depend on the type of analysis and result
window.
1017
You can use the Format>Result Window command to control the display format
for multiple windows at once. To do so, use the SHIFT key and left-click to select the
windows you want. Then select Format>Result Window. Mechanica tailors the
Format Result Window dialog box to include only characteristics that are common
to all of the selected windows.
See Also
Procedures:
Frequency Convergence
The convergence index is the maximum percentage change of any modal frequency.
For more information on frequency, see Modal and Prestress Modal Analyses.
Frequency Range
Enter the minimum and maximum frequencies of excitation for the range over which
you want Mechanica to report results for dynamic frequency and dynamic random
analyses.
The minimum frequency must be greater than or equal to 0.
The default maximum frequency is Automatic, which is 1.5 times the highest
natural frequency calculated.
If you select the User-defined option, you can enter a value for the maximum
frequency.
1018
IndexAdditional Information
You can use fringes to determine whether certain results are reasonable. For
example, you can look at the fringe plot of maximum principal or von Mises stress for
static analyses, or flux magnitude for thermal analyses.
You can also create a contour display using the Fringe display type. To get a better
idea of what a fringe plot looks like, you can review an example. Also, before
defining a fringe display, be sure to read the information in Tips for Fringe Displays.
When you select Fringe from the Display Type option menu, the options available
on the Display Options tab become specific to fringe plot result window displays.
The Display Options tab displays some or all of these items depending on the
design study and the selections you make on the Quantity tab and the Display
Options tab:
Select Dynamic Query from the Info menu to show the value of the result
window's quantity at locations you select.
1019
The direction of the load vector is from the point specified in the From field to
the point specified in the To field.
You fill in these fields by using the selector arrows to choose points or
vertices.
When you use the selector arrow to specify points for these fields, the software
translates the point location into the WCS coordinates of the point you picked,
even if a UCS was active when you picked the point.
In using the point as a reference location, the software disassociates the vector
from the defining points. This means that if the points move during a
sensitivity or optimization study, the vector remains unchanged.
For 2D axisymmetric models, you do not fill in these fields because the
angular acceleration vector is always parallel to the WCS Y axis.
For 2D plane strain and 2D plane stress models, you use only the To field.
The angular acceleration vector passes through that axis location and is
perpendicular to the WCS XY plane. The software uses the right-hand rule to
determine acceleration direction.
Full Results
Use this column to specify the intervals at which Mechanica reports full results.
Mechanica always reports measure results, but only reports stresses, displacements,
strains, and forces at intervals that you designate.
You can also turn full results on or off for all intervals with the Select All and
Deselect All buttons.
This column does not appear for dynamic random analyses.
If you defined one or more functions for your model, the Functions dialog
box appears. Select a function from the dialog box.
If no function name exists for your model, the Function Definition dialog
box appears on which you can define one or more functions.
After you select or define a function and click OK, the function name appears in the
text box next to the (x) button on the Material Definition dialog box.
1020
IndexAdditional Information
Function of Coordinates
Use this option to apply a structure constraint (FEM mode), thermal boundary
condition, or load that is a function of the current coordinate system. You can select
one or more entities on which to apply the constraint or load.
You define this variation by specifying a function that Mechanica uses as a scale
factor. If you are using Function of Coordinates for loads or thermal boundary
conditions, Mechanica typically multiplies the load value by the scale factor to
approximate the load behavior. For force/moment loads and heat loads, Mechanica
makes an exception if you defined the load distribution as Total Load. In this case,
Mechanica applies the function, respecting its shape, but does not multiply the
function by the load value. Thus, the software maintains the original total load value.
When you select this option, the f(x) button and entry box appear on the dialog box.
Click the button and the Functions dialog box (native mode) or Functions dialog
box (FEM mode) appears under one of the following conditions:
You can use this dialog box to create, copy, review, or delete a function.
For an example, see Example: Function of Coordinates.
Function of Frequency
Select this option to define damping as a function of frequency.
Click the f(x) button. If you have previously defined a damping coefficient function,
the Functions dialog box appears. Select an existing function or click New to define a
new function.
If you select New, the Function Definition dialog box appears. Use this dialog box
to define a new function.
To select a different function, click the f(x) button and the Functions dialog box
appears. You select an existing function or click New to define a new function.
1021
1D Entities:
2 points
3 points
4 points
2D Entities:
2 points
3 points
4 non-colinear points
4 collinear points
Mechanica uses representative space to calculate interpolation and may not apply
the interpolated load, heat load, or prescribed temperature in exactly the way you
expect. Click the Preview button on the Interpolation Over Entity dialog box to
see a display of vector arrows that show the relative magnitude of the load, heat
load, or prescribed temperature at different points on the entity.
1022
IndexAdditional Information
General
There is no predefined shape for a General beam section type. When you create a
beam with a general section, the beam icon on your model includes only the Y and Z
axes. For General beam section types, you must define values for the following on
the Beam Section Definition dialog box:
Area
Iyy, Izz, Iyz
J
Shear Fy, Shear Fz
Shear Dy, Shear Dz
Use the Stress Grid option to enter Y and Z offset values for each stress
recovery point. You must specify stress grid values in order to view results for
beam stress recovery points for general beam sections.
Use the Review button to display the section properties of a beam section.
The default graphic for a general beam section type is illustrated below for native
mode. Note that this graphic appears regardless of the stress recovery point
locations that you define using the Stress Grid. That is, the software does not
display a graphic with the entered locations when you define your results window. In
FEM mode, the software uses the first four points that you define for the section.
The result windows you plan to tie must be of the same type. You can tie the
legends for fringe, vector, and contour plots together. You can also tie the
scales of graph plots to each other. However, you cannot tie a graph to a
fringe, contour, or vector plot.
You cannot tie values for unfringed animations or model result windows
because there are no values to tie.
If you are working with fringe, contour, and vector plots, the quantities must
be in the same general category. For example, you can tie a von Mises stress
fringe plot to a maximum principal stress fringe plot, but not to a
displacement fringe plot.
If you are working with graphs, there are a number of special guidelines to
bear in mind.
1023
See Also
Procedure:
You
You
and
You
You can specify whether you want Mechanica to display the Point Data report on
your screen, to output the report to a file, or both. Since you typically use Point
Data reports for on-the-fly examination of your model, displaying the report on your
screen is the most common of these choices.
1024
IndexAdditional Information
Because Mechanica must recover data for each plotting grid point at every
time step or frequency step, choosing any of the global spatial evaluation
methods may result in a time-consuming dynamic analysis run.
For example, if you select Maximum for a displacement measure in a dynamic
time analysis, Mechanica calculates the maximum displacement at every
plotting grid point. The software repeats this process for each time step.
However, bear in mind that once you define a global measure using one type
of spatial evaluation, Mechanica requires an insignificant amount of additional
1025
time to calculate a different measure that uses the same type of spatial
evaluation.
In other words, if you specified Maximum as a spatial evaluation method for a
von Mises stress measure as well as a maximum principal stress measure,
there would be no appreciable time difference between running a dynamic
analysis that used only one of the measures and running an analysis that used
both measures.
If you select stress or strain as the quantity, Mechanica provides you with an
additional option menu that enables you to determine whether the software
considers the entire model or samples various points within a specified radius
of a model location. The latter type of measure is called a Near Point
measure. For more information on Near Point measures, see Global and
Local Measures.
Label Edit the graph's label, which appears in the upper left corner of the
graph window. If you want to change the style, color, and size of the font,
click the Text Style button. Use the Display Label check box to display the
label or remove it from the window.
Background Color Modify the background color. Click the Edit button to
customize the blended background color. If you deselect the Blended
Background check box, click the color selection button to change the
background color.
Selection Color Change the color you use to highlight points on your
graph.
1026
IndexAdditional Information
A study that did not converge when you used the multi-pass adaptive
convergence method. In this case, you can create a convergence graph to get
more information on why the study did not converge.
When you select Graph from the Display Type option menu, the Display Options
tab and the Display Location tab become unavailable.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Graph Location
Graph Location
Use the Graph Location area on the Quantity tab to select specific locations for
your graph result window display.
The Graph Location area includes these items:
Graph Location Select from the option menu the locations you want to
display in your graph result window. You can select multiple connected beams
or curves. In FEM mode, you can select multiple connected edges. The
options on the menu include:
o Curves
o Beams
o P-Pass (Measure quantity only)
o Optimization Pass (Measure quantity only, optimization study only)
o Design Param
o Time
o Frequency
Location Selector Arrow Use the selector arrow to select the specific
entity on your model that you want to display in the graph results window.
The selector arrow is available only for curves and beams.
Graph Report
Use this command to write the graph data to a text file. After you select
File>Export>Graph Report, you enter a path and file name in the Export To Text
dialog box.
When you click Save, Mechanica creates a text file with a .grt extension. This file
contains header information consisting of the graph quantity, an indication of
selected geometry, axis designations, and so forth. Immediately after the header
information, Mechanica lists the graph values for each axis in vertical format.
See Also
1027
Procedure:
Graphic Size
Select one of the following graphic sizes:
Current View Results are the same size as they appear in the Mechanica
results window.
ISO A7 74 x 105 mm
ISO A6 105 x 148 mm
ISO A5 148 x 210 mm
Graphing Statistics
You can generate analysis statistics for the entire model or for selected surfaces,
edges, vertices, or points. If you select an edge or connected series of edges as a
reference on the Postprocessing Info dialog box, you also can display a graph of
the quantity as measured at those edges.
To help you compare edge behavior, you can select components for your quantity.
When you select multiple components, the resulting graph shows each component's
curve in a different color, and provides a legend to help you distinguish the
components.
You can specify whether you want Mechanica to display the edge graph on your
screen, output the edge data to a file, or both. When Mechanica displays your edge
graph on-screen, it provides a dialog box that lets you output the graph to any of
several printer types. If you choose to output the edge graph data to a file,
Mechanica generates a .dat file which you can open and format in a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet.
See Also
Procedure:
Graphtool Window
You use the Graphtool window to view and manage different types of graphs. In
Mechanica, the Graphtool can draw functions or graph various analysis results.
After you display your graph, you can interact with it in several ways. To find out the
x and y values for any graph point, click on this point and a message box appears
showing the values. To work with the graph and manage its appearance, use toolbar
buttons or the following menu commands:
1028
File
o
IndexAdditional Information
o
o
View
o Toggle Grid Display grid lines for your graph or turn them off.
o Repaint Refresh the view of your graph, removing all temporarily
displayed information.
o Refit Restore a graph to its original state. Use this command after
you zoom in on a particular graph segment to return to an
unsegmented state. Mechanica automatically redraws the complete
graph in the current window.
o Zoom In Zoom in on the graph to get a close-up view. This
command is especially useful when your graph contains too many
points, 100 or more. Zooming in on certain points helps you to display
a specific segment of interest.
Format
Graph Open the Graph Window Options dialog box to manage
your graph and its display window.
point constraints
prescribed temperatures applied to a point
convection conditions applied to a point
loads applied to a point
loads distributed as a total load at point
interpolated loads
resultant loads
connections such as welds, weighted links, rigid links, and rigid connections
idealizations such as springs, masses, beams, and trusses
local measures associated with a point
FEM mesh hard points
AutoGEM mesh seed points
Be aware that, although you can apply constraints, force loads, and moment loads to
points, this application method can cause high stress concentrations that make the
correct interpretation of analysis results difficult. You can often produce a more
realistic effect by distributing the load or constraint over a small surface region or
using a TLAP instead.
1029
If you decide to use point loads or constraints, always place your datum points on a
boundary curve or surface. Do not locate these points in the interior of the part. You
can add datum points to your model singly or, if you are adding the points in
Pro/ENGINEER, as a pattern.
Although datum points prove useful for certain types of modeling, large numbers of
datum points in your part can result in slower Mechanica performance. If your part
includes datum points that have no use in Mechanica, consider suppressing these
points before accessing Mechanica.
For a static or prestress analysis with the direct solver, block solver RAM
should not exceed one-half of your machine RAM. In this case, the RAM
allocation for element data has no effect and the default value is the ideal
choice.
For a static or prestress analysis with the iterative solver, block solver RAM
and the RAM allocation for element data together should not exceed threequarters of your machine RAM. A recommended starting point is to allocate
one-tenth of your machine RAM for your block solver and one-half of your
machine RAM for element data.
For a modal, prestress modal, or buckling analysis, block solver RAM and the
RAM allocation for element data together should not exceed one-half of your
machine RAM. A recommended starting point is to allocate one-quarter of
your machine RAM for the block solver and one-quarter for element data.
Block solver RAM and the RAM allocation for element data together should
never exceed three-quarters of your machine RAM.
You can find specific information about the block solver RAM and the RAM allocation
for element data in the element calculations section of the study/study.pas file,
located in the directory for output files.
To set solver RAM allocation, refer to Guidelines for Setting Solram.
1030
IndexAdditional Information
Always configure swap space from a fast local disk. Using swap space from a
remote computer can severely degrade performance.
If possible, allocate swap space on disks that are not used for the Mechanica
working directories.
The amount of swap space you need is the maximum of the three values
listed below:
o 250 MB
o 3 your machine's RAM
o 1.5 maximum job memory (see below)
1031
Subassembly
To use a subassembly as the component for your mass idealization, you must
assign mass properties to all of the parts in the subassembly using one of the
methods above. Be sure to use the Edit>Setup>Mass Props command and
save the subassembly before you leave Pro/ENGINEER.
If you have not assigned any mass properties for your subassembly or its
components in either Pro/ENGINEER or Mechanica, you can use the
Pro/ENGINEER Edit>Setup>Mass Props command to calculate mass
properties for the entire subassembly. Select Geometry and Parameters
under Source, and enter a density value. When you click OK, Pro/ENGINEER
calculates mass properties for all the components in your subassembly based
on that density.
See Also
Procedures:
To Assign a Material
To Assign a Material in FEM Mode
References:
Assign a Material
Assign a Material in FEM Mode
For any level except the minimum and maximum levels, you cannot change
the value to a number greater than the next level up or less than the next
level down.
If you want to set a new value that would violate this rule, start from the top or bottom
level and change each level in turn to make room for the new value.
1032
The minimum value must always be less than the maximum value.
IndexAdditional Information
The calculation time at each polynomial order increases significantly over the
previous order.
A low convergence percentage may require a high polynomial order.
If an element did not converge during a run until a polynomial order of 7 or
higher, you may want to divide that element.
You may save time by using a maximum polynomial order of 5 for a
preliminary run and then checking the results to see how close the results are
to the convergence you want.
1033
A GRID command for a point not in the default coordinate system should
follow the command for the referenced coordinate system.
Two grid points (nodes) that have the same ID but different coordinates are
not allowed in the same file or included files.
Two elements with the same ID are allowed only if they reference exactly the
same grid points (nodes). This guideline also applies to different files read
with an INCLUDE statement.
Elements referencing scalar pointspoints without coordinatescannot be
created.
Mechanica does not display the center node for CQUAD elements.
The continuation of a command should follow on the next line.
Mechanica does not import the Replication command.
When you define a large displacement analysis, do not include constraint sets
containing prescribed displacement constraints that reference cylindrical or
spherical coordinate systems.
Although you can specify prescribed displacements in contact analyses, you
should take care not to place these on geometry that is part of the contact
region.
The software assumes the displacement values you enter are consistent with
your principal system of units.
1034
IndexAdditional Information
The optimal values also depend on other factors, such as what other processes are
running on your machine, and the total amount of swap space available on your
machine. If increasing RAM allocation causes a decrease in performance or a
shortage of swap space, some performance gains might still be possible by
increasing RAM allocation to above the default values, but below the recommended
maximums.
For solver RAM settings that exceed maximum or minimum ideal settings, refer to
Strategy: If Solver RAM Is Too High and Strategy: If Solver RAM Is Too Low.
You can select only one geometric entity when applying an interpolated load.
You need a minimum of two datum points to define an interpolated surface
load. For interpolated curve loads, Mechanica also requires a minimum of two
points, but it uses the curve end points as a default. If you do not want to use
the end points, you need to add two datum points to the curve.
When calculating function-based loads, Mechanica uses radians as the system
of units. To calculate load application, you may need to convert the entity
dimensions to radians.
For interpolated loads, you normally use scale factors that lie between 0 and
1. However, you can use larger values if you want to increase the value or
vector of the original load through multiplication.
You can define the scale factor as either a positive or negative value. If you
use a negative value, you reverse the load direction. Additionally, if you
express the load value as a negative number and you use a negative scale
value, the signs cancel each other and the load value becomes positive.
For curves, Mechanica assumes the end points of the curve as the first two
interpolation points. If you do not want to use these points, you can select
other points on the curve. For surfaces, Mechanica does not assume any
interpolation points and you need to select each of the points you want to
use.
If you define interpolation points and add scale factors before you specify a
load value, Mechanica assumes a default value of 1. In the case of forces and
moments, the software defines this default as an FY = 1 force.
1035
These units of force are not generally used, so you should change the system
of units before applying loads in Mechanica.
You can also set a default principal system of units in Pro/ENGINEER using
the Tools>Options command.
Use Consistent Units for Parts and Assembly You can specify units in
part or assembly mode. If you are working in assembly mode, the units for all
the parts must be the same as the assembly. You need to make sure your
parts and assembly use consistent units. Also, when you specify values in
Mechanica, you need to keep those values consistent with your principal
system of units.
Entering Numerical Data When you enter numerical data for quantities
with physical dimensions, Pro/ENGINEER interprets the data as having units
consistent with the principal system of units.
Density Pro/ENGINEER displays density as mass per unit volume, not
weight per unit volume.
Modeling Data Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica store all data for your
model in terms of the principal system of units. When you design a model,
you should select a system of units in Pro/ENGINEER before defining modeling
data.
Exporting to Independent Mode If you plan to export your model to
Mechanica independent mode, make note of your system of units. Mechanica
does not display your system of units in independent mode.
Material Library Mechanica displays in the material library only materials
with units.
To mesh your model successfully, you should keep the following points in mind when
you create surface-surface connections and interfaces:
1036
In most cases, the selected surfaces must belong to different parts in your
assembly. If you are creating an interface, however, you can select a quilt
surface and a solid surface on the same part.
You cannot select two surfaces of different geometric types. For example, you
cannot create a surface-surface perimeter weld between a cylindrical surface
and a planar surface.
If you want to create a solid mesh in which the meshes on the two surfaces
are compatible, you cannot use offset mate constraints when you create the
IndexAdditional Information
Both graphs must have the same location category for the X axis and the
same quantity category for the Y axis, no matter which command you select.
For example:
o
In Structure, you can tie a graph using Stress XX for the quantity to a
second graph using Max Prin Stress, but not to a second graph using
Disp Mag or Measure as the quantity.
In Thermal, you can tie a graph using Temp Gradient X for the
quantity to a second graph using Temp Gradient Mag, but not to a
second graph using Flux Mag or Measure as the quantity.
If Iteration is the location, you cannot use the Tie Loc or Tie Both
commands.
If two graphs use different types of values on either axisthat is, if one is
linear and one is logarithmicyou cannot tie them. See the description of the
Log Scale check boxfor more information.
1037
Heat Flux
This check box enables you to have heat flux calculated as part of your analysis. This
option is selected by default and works as a toggle.
If you do not want heat flux calculated, deselect this option. Be aware that if you do
not select Heat Flux, you cannot access results for heat flux when you look at
results for your analysis.
1038
IndexAdditional Information
To define a heat load for surface a, which would also include the mated portion of the
surface, you would select surface a as the reference.
To define a heat load for mated surface bc, you would first create a surface region
for the portion of surface c that is mated to surface b.
To define a heat load for the bottom surface of volume region d, you would first
create the volume region.
Hollow Circle
The icon for a hollow circle beam section type looks like this:
When you select Hollow Circle as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition
dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section
dimensions:
R
Ri
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for hollow circle section types. The
figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right shows
the points for FEM mode.
1039
Hollow Ellipse
The icon for a hollow ellipse beam section type looks like this:
When you select Hollow Ellipse as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition
dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section
dimensions:
a the length of the major (longer) cross section of the outer ellipse
b the length of the minor (shorter) cross section of the outer ellipse
ai the length of the major (longer) cross section of the inner ellipse
Mechanica calculates the inside minor axis by making its ratio to the inside
major axis the same as the ratio of the outside minor axis to the outside
major axis, as shown in this equation:
Inside Minor = (Outside Minor/Outside Major)
Inside Major
If you want to examine the exact effects of shear on a beam, enter positive values
for Shear Factor FY and Shear Factor FZ. These factors represent the ratio of a
beam's effective "shear area" to its true cross-sectional area for shear in the
principal Y and Z directions. The default is 0.833333, which is accurate for
rectangular cross sections.
The figures below illustrate the stress recovery points for hollow ellipse section types.
The figure on the left shows the points in native mode, and the figure on the right
shows the points in FEM mode.
1040
IndexAdditional Information
Hollow Rect
The icon for a hollow rectangle beam section type looks like this:
When you select Hollow Rect as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition
dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section
dimensions:
b
d
bi
di
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for hollow rectangle beam section
types. The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the
right shows the points for FEM mode.
1041
Joint Connections
a
Cam-follower Connections
Combined normal and tangential reaction
forces at cam contact point
Slot-follower Connections
Reaction force on slot connection
Gear Pairs
Reaction moment for standard gear pair on
rotational joint axis
1042
IndexAdditional Information
Force/Torque
Forces applied to points
Point-to-point forces
Gravity
Combined gravitational force and translational
component of inertial acceleration
Inertial Forces
Angular velocity (as Centrifugal1_Vel)
and
Angular acceleration (as Centrifugal1_Acc)
a. TLAP = Total Load at Point
1043
The diagram below describes the directions of the stress components in a standard
textbook application.
The following items explain the relation between the textbook definition of stresses
and the values reported by Structure:
IndexAdditional Information
too many characters or characters that are invalid in Structure. There are a few
points you should keep in mind when using these loads in Structure.
Structure imports the loads, with the exception of the gravity and centrifugal
loads, as unassociated Total Load At Point (TLAP) loads. You must associate
each load with a geometric reference in order for it to be retained with the
model when you complete your session of Structure.
When Structure imports loads from Mechanism Design, it creates a datum
point for the unassociated TLAP, unless one exists. In the case of loads based
on reaction forces on translational joint axes in Mechanism Design, the
location of the datum point is at the intersection of the zero reference plane
for the selected body and the translational axis. You can change the location
of this zero reference plane by using the Joint Axis Settings dialog box in
Mechanism Design.
For reaction forces on rotational joint axes, the location of the datum point is
at the center of the rotational joint axis. This location is determined by
Mechanism Design and not easily modified.
Mechanism Design defines loads with respect to the body's LCS. When you
import these loads into Structure, the loads are defined with respect to the
model's WCS.
When you display the direction for a gravity load by highlighting the name in
the Mechanism Load Import dialog box, the shaded arrow appears at the
center of gravity of the component, but its icon is shown at the model's WCS.
Structure combines the angular inertial velocity and acceleration components,
called Centrifugal1_Vel and Centrifugal1_Acc, respectively, that are
imported from Mechanism Design into a single centrifugal load. When you edit
the centrifugal load in Structure, the Centrifugal Load dialog box includes
the magnitudes of the velocity and acceleration components.
For information on how specific forces and moments transfer from Mechanism Design
to Structure loads, see How Loads Transfer to Structure.
See Also
Reference:
HTML Report
Use File>Export>HTML Report to publish results on the web. You can export
multiple graphic results at a time using this command. If the results are animated,
Mechanica adds a movie icon to the bottom of the report. Click this icon to view the
animation in MPEG form.
After you select HTML Report, the Export HTML dialog box appears. This dialog
box enables you to specify a title and enter introductory remarks, comments, and a
conclusion for your web report. In the Item area, select the window you wish to
annotate, then enter your comments in the Comment section in the Content area.
1045
Height and width measurements of the result graphics appear for all size options
except Current View. In this case, results are the same size as they appear in the
Mechanica result window.
See Also
Procedure:
I-Beam
The icon for an I-beam beam section type looks like this:
When you select I-Beam as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog
box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section dimensions:
b
t
di
tw
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for I-beam beam section types.
The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right
shows the points for FEM mode.
1046
Beams are connected when they share common endpoints. Shells are
connected when they share a common edge and the endpoints of that edge.
IndexAdditional Information
Solids are connected when they share a common face and the edges and
endpoints of that face.
Beams are best connected to shells when the beam and shell share a common
edge and the endpoints of that edge. Shells are best connected to solids when
the shell and solid share a common face and the edges and endpoints of that
face.
Two adjacent shells that share two points but no common edge can cause an
error.
For example, you can attach a network of beams or shells to a set of solids
such that the connection has structural integrity without need for further
constraints. If you attach only one end of a beam or only one edge of a
surface to a solid, you may need to use links to weld the rotational degrees of
freedom to the solid.
If you attach a single spring directly to a solid, you must constrain the
rotational degrees of freedom of the spring, as shown in the following
illustration.
1047
Insert Points
Select this option on the Settings tab if you want AutoGEM to add extra points when
needed to help create elements in complex areas of your model.
If you select Insert Points, AutoGEM may add the following types of points:
1048
IndexAdditional Information
If the template and options combine to produce more than 16 windows, then only
the first 16 will be shown.
Unless you are doing a modal analysis of a free body with rigid mode search on, your
model must satisfy the following rules:
Attach the structure to ground such that you can apply loads to the structure
from any direction without causing rigid body motion.
Connect all parts of the structure to each other such that you can apply loads
to any part of the structure without causing unopposed motion of any part of
the structure.
The structure must be capable of resisting loads from any direction by transmitting
the loads to ground at the constraints. If the structure or any part of the structure is
capable of undeformed motionrigid-body translation or rotationunder some type
of loading, you must add appropriate constraints to resist that rigid-body motion.
See Also
Reference:
Singularities
The interpolation you create is associated with the load and the entity.
1050
IndexAdditional Information
The following illustration shows curve selections that are invalid for 2D axisymmetric
models:
When you define your model as a 2D axisymmetric model, Mechanica checks for
curves that break the first two rules. If it finds any problems of this sort, Mechanica
displays a warning box indicating that it cannot change the model type because the
geometry does not lie in the positive X direction relative to the reference coordinate
system.
If it encounters a curve that breaks the third rulecoincidence with the Y axis
Mechanica allows the model, but any analyses you attempt to run may fail.
1051
When you define your model as a 2D axisymmetric model, Mechanica checks for
surfaces that break these rules. If it finds any problems of this sort, Mechanica
displays a warning box indicating that it cannot change the model type because the
geometry does not lie in the positive X direction relative to the reference coordinate
system.
Isotropic
If you select Isotropic material symmetry on the Structural tab on the Material
Definition dialog box, the following tabs appear:
Properties
Failure Criterion
Fatigue
Specific Heat
Thermal Conductivity
Each field that has dimension can have its own units and Mechanica scales the values
you enter when the units change.
Isotropic Properties
Select the Properties tab to enter values for the following properties. You can define
any of these properties as a function of temperature or you can assign a parameter
value to define a property. You can either type in a value or click the (x) button to
define a function or P button to assign a parameter as appropriate.
Each field that has dimension can have its own units, and Mechanica scales the
values you enter when the units change.
1052
Poisson's Ratio You must enter the name of a Poisson's ratio function or
a value between 0.9999 and 0.4999. The default is 0.3.
IndexAdditional Information
Young's Modulus You must enter a positive value or, if Young's modulus
varies with temperature, the name of a Young's modulus function for this
property.
Coeff. of Thermal Expansion This property is optional, but you should
enter a value if you plan to place a thermal load on the model.
Izz
Note that Iyz is zero for beam sections for which the BSCS is the same as the
BCPCS.
J
Enter the effective second polar moment of area for each beam section. This
property describes stiffness in torsion. You must enter a positive value. For more
information on J, see Todhunter and Pearson's History of the Theory of Elasticity,
Dover, 1960.
L-Section
The icon for an L-section beam section type looks like this:
When you select L-Section as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition
dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section
dimensions:
b
t
di
tw
1053
If you are interested in examining the exact effects of shear on a beam, enter
positive values for Shear Factor FY and Shear Factor FZ. These factors represent
the ratio of a beam's effective "shear area" to its true cross-sectional area for shear
in the principal Y and Z directions. The default value is 0.833333, which is accurate
for rectangular cross sections.
Note: An L-section beam type has fewer than two planes of symmetry. Therefore, make
sure the beam is loaded or braced to prevent twist under shear loading.
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for L-section beam section types.
The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right
shows the points for FEM mode.
Labels
Use this check box to turn labels on and off in a result window. The labels are the
lines of textual information shown in the upper left corner of each window.
Selecting the Label check box toggles the display of labels in the result window or
multiple windows you select.
Any change you make to the labels with this command stays with the result window,
stored in the .rwd file, until you edit the window definition or exit the Results user
interface.
Each result window contains one or more of these labels, depending on how you
define the window:
the selected quantity and its units, and any scale factor you specified for a
graph
the maximum value in a contour, fringe, or vector plot
the minimum value in a contour, fringe, or vector plot
the maximum displacement value for a deformed model unless the quantity is
stress or strain
the scale of deformation for structural analyses
the mode number and, if available, frequency, for modal analyses
the buckling load factor for buckling analyses
the load set, if available, for static, dynamic, and thermal analyses
See Also
Procedure:
1054
To Set Labels
IndexAdditional Information
Layup
When you define shell properties for laminate layup-type shells, you can specify the
layer repetition pattern. Use the drop-down list under Layup Symmetry on the
Shell Property Definition dialog box. You can select one of these options:
a b c
Symmetrical
a b c c b a
Antisymmetrical
a b c -c -b -a
The dialog boxes require that you complete a table that defines the layers in your
laminate. Each line in the table represents either a ply or sub-laminate of the shell
property being defined. Note that the row numbers decrease as you go down the list
since plies are traditionally numbered from the bottom up.
Legend Value
Use this command on the Edit menu to change one or more of the values on the
legend along the right side of a fringe, fringe animation, contour, or vector result
window.
If no result window is currently selected, the Selection dialog box appears and you
can select one or more result windows from the list to edit.
The legend shows the colors used in the plot and the range connected to each color.
Mechanica calculates the level of each fringe boundary by distributing the levels
linearly from minimum to maximum.
After you select the command, select a value from the legend. Then enter a new
value.
For more information about entering new values, see Guidelines for Changing Legend
Values.
If you enter a new minimum or maximum value, Mechanica may ask if you want to
redistribute levels.
Mechanica regenerates the plot to take the new levels into account.
1055
See Also
Procedure:
1056
IndexAdditional Information
At the top of the dialog box, Mechanica displays the WCS coordinates of the locations
you selected.
The middle area of the dialog box displays the values of your selected stress quantity
at the three locations, or two in the case of 2D models. It also lists the maximum of
the values. These results are in terms of the local coordinate system.
For information on how Mechanica calculates these values, see Linearized Stress
Value Calculation.
The dialog box also contains these items:
Membrane and bending stress values are obtained from numerical integration
along the line between location 1 and location 2 as follows:
where:
is any local stress component
L is the distance from location 1 to location 2
Total stress is the value calculated by Mechanica, and the peak stress is
defined by:
Peak = Total (Membrane + Bending)
Peak, Total, and Bending Stresses vary along the line from location 1 to location 2;
however, membrane stress remains constant.
Mechanica then processes the component values of these stresses at each point to
obtain principal and von Mises stresses, using the standard formula for principal and
von Mises stress.
Note: The formula for peak and total stress applies for each component of stress, but not
for the principal or von Mises stress.
For axisymmetric models, similar formulas are used, with correction terms to
account for the offset of the neutral bending axis from the midpoint.
Life In the Desired Endurance field, enter the number of life cycles for
which you want your part to last.
Loading Select Constant Amplitude or Variable Amplitude for the
loading type. Different options appear on the tab depending on which loading
type you select.
See Also
Procedure:
1058
IndexAdditional Information
Load Interpolation
Use the Load Interpolation dialog box to add, preview, or remove interpolation
points, and to enter or edit a value for each point. You can use from two to four
interpolation points on the geometry and assign a scale factor to each point.
Mechanica selects default interpolation points for some entities, as follows:
Entity
endpoints
corners
surfaces
none
If you want different interpolation points than the defaults, you can delete the
defaults and create new ones.
When planning interpolated loads, be aware of the following:
At least one of the points should have a value other than zero. For
interpolated loads, you normally use scale factors that lie between 0 and 1.
However, you can use larger values if you want to increase the value or
vector of the original load through multiplication.
Each value is a scale factor. Mechanica multiplies the force and moment
values (for structural loads) or the heat transfer rate value (for heat loads) by
the interpolation value at a given location to determine the load vector at that
location.
You can define the scale factor as either a positive or negative value. If you
use a negative value, you reverse the load direction. Additionally, if you
express the load value as a negative number and you use a negative scale
value, the signs cancel each other and the load value becomes positive.
If you enter interpolation points and add scale factors before entering load
values, Mechanica enters a default value of 1 for FY.
The number of interpolation points you select determines the functional form
of the interpolation.
1059
(Select All) Click this button if you want full results for all load
intervals.
(Deselect All) Click this button if you do not want full results for all
load intervals.
See Also
Procedure:
To Select Load Interval Options for Large Deformation and Contact Analyses
1060
IndexAdditional Information
The software does not retain any information on the dialog box when you click OK to
exit the dialog box.
The software does not retain any information on the dialog box when you click OK to
exit the dialog box.
1061
Defines
Function of
Default
dynamic time
amplitude
time
impulsea
dynamic frequency
amplitude
frequency
uniformb
phasec
frequency
zerod
frequency
uniformb
dynamic randome
1062
IndexAdditional Information
Supported
Details
Point
Yes
Deformation-independent load
Curve/Edge
Yes
Surface/Face
Yes
Beam
No
Shell
No
Spring
No
Bearing
No
Centrifugal
Yes
Gravity
Yes
Deformation-independent load
Pressure
Yes
Temperature
No
Constant Amplitude Use this option for models with constant amplitude
loading. This is the easiest way to input load history data and is selected by
default. Constant Amplitude provides three Amplitude Type options:
o
PeakPeak Uses a Min Load Factor of 1.0 and a Max Load Factor
of 1.0.
1063
o
o
Variable Amplitude Use this option for models with variable amplitude
loading. You can define the variation of the amplitude by manually entering
load factors to specify the datum points of the amplitude curve. You can enter
up to 100 load factors. Use the following buttons to modify the table that
defines the variation of the amplitude.
o
o
o
Add Row Adds numbered rows to the table. When you click Add
Row, the Enter Rows dialog box appears. In the Start At field, enter
the row number where you want to begin adding rows. In the Num
Rows field, enter the number of rows you want to add. When you click
OK, Mechanica adds the new rows and preserves any load factors you
entered in rows above or below the new rows.
Delete Deletes rows from the table. When you click Delete, you
can use the Enter Rows dialog box to specify a Begin Row and End
Row. When you click OK, Mechanica deletes all rows numbered from
the Begin Row through the End Row.
Clear All Click this button to delete all rows.
Import Click this button to import the load factor data from a text
file into the table. You can import an unlimited number of cycles from
a text file.
Analyses Click this button to select one or more analyses from this list.
Mechanica calculates results separately for each analysis. You also view
results separately for each analysis.
1064
IndexAdditional Information
Local Temperatures And Local Energy Norms is the default convergence option.
The contact area covers only a small portion of one or more element faces
involved in the contact, a situation that can cause inaccurate contact pressure
results.
You select Localized Mesh Refinement.
If the mesh refinement fails during the first pass, Mechanica continues with a second
pass using the original mesh. During the second pass, you can view the results of the
first pass. If you decide not to continue with the second pass, you can stop the
analysis.
Log Scale
Use the Log Scale check box on the X Axis and Y Axis tabs of the Graph Window
Options dialog box to change the values on the graph's X or Y axis to a logarithmic
scale.
After you select Log Scale for an axis, Mechanica converts the values on the
appropriate axis to log base 10. If you then deselect the check box, the values return
to a linear scale.
Following are the limitations of these commands:
You cannot convert an axis to a log scale if the axis contains any non-positive
values.
You cannot change the scale of a graph that is tied to another graph.
You cannot tie two graphs that are not using the same scale on both axes.
For example, if graph 1 uses log scale on the x axis and linear scale on the y
axis, and graph 2 uses linear scale on both axes, you cannot tie them in any
way. If you change the x axis on graph 2 to log scale, you can then tie the
graphs.
Managing Graphs
When you select the Format>Graph command, Mechanica displays the Graph
Window Options dialog box. Use this dialog box to define the visual characteristics
1066
IndexAdditional Information
of the graph display window. For example, you can change the background color of
the window or the color of the x and y axes to improve the overall appearance of
your graph. You can also specify new axis labels or adjust the scale for the graph to
have a better view. The dialog box contains the following tabs:
Y Axis Use to modify the appearance of the graph's y axis, its label and
grid lines, and to change the scale for the graph.
X Axis Use to modify the appearance of the graph's x axis, its label and
grid lines, and to change the scale for the graph.
Data Series Use to control the appearance of data series for the graph
you select and to toggle the legend.
Graph Display Use to control the display of the graph's title and to change
the background color of the window.
You can customize the basic settings for graph displays and, consequently, for this
dialog box by using the bmgr_pref_file config.pro option to set graph defaults.
When the virtual memory used by your programs exceeds the available real
memory, performance may suffer. Performance suffers most when the
operating system must make frequent transfers between real memory and
the swap space areathat is, when the program repeatedly accesses more
virtual memory than is available in machine RAM.
Performance is acceptable only when transfers between real memory and the
swap space area are infrequentthat is, when the virtual memory area used
by the program is smaller than the available machine RAM.
For 32-bit machines, Mechanica cannot access more than 2 GB of virtual memory,
regardless of the amount of RAM or swap space available on your computer. For 64bit machines, Mechanica is limited to about 8 GB. If your operating system has
memory limits, Mechanica might be able to access even less virtual memory. If
Mechanica attempts to use more than the maximum available memory, your job is
likely to fail.
You may be able to correct the failure by:
1067
Managing Performance
The engine log file (study/study.stt file) maintains detailed information on how much
memory, disk space, elapsed time, and CPU time the engine uses as your job runs.
You can review this file to monitor resource requirements and performance. For
example, reviewing Step Elapsed Time and Step CPU Time can help you predict how
much time a particular job step will take at a future p-pass. Results inconsistent with
the trends in this file can help you identify and fix performance problems and
resource shortages.
See Also
References:
1068
IndexAdditional Information
1069
The component that you use to define your mass cannot contain volumes that
will be meshed as solids during a FEM analysis.
You can select a curve or surface on a master representation or a simplified
representation. For information on simplified representations, search the
Fundamentals functional area in the PTC Help system.
The component that you use to define your mass can be specified as excluded
or substituted in the simplified representation. In this case, select the
excluded or substituted component from the Model Tree when you define your
mass.
After you define a mass by component, you can confirm the values of the
mass, moments of inertia, and center of gravity for the component by using
object action or by right-clicking the mass item under Idealizations on the
Model Tree and selecting the Info command. The moments of inertia and
center of gravity are reported in terms of the component's WCS.
The location of the selected point affects the analysis of your FEM mesh data.
If the point you select for your mass idealization coincides with the center of
gravity of the component, you can output mesh data to the ANSYS or
MSC/NASTRAN solvers.
If the point you select for your mass idealization does not coincide with the
center of gravity of the component, you can only output to the NASTRAN
solver. You cannot use the other FEM solvers with this type of mass
idealization. After you run the NASTRAN solver, you can view the center of
gravity offset on the NASTRAN output.
Matching Parameters
Mechanica checks if standard design studies with Set Parameters selected
reference another design study. This can happen if the study contains a dynamic
analysis with Use Previous Modes selected, or an analysis that includes a MEC/T
temperature load.
In either case, Mechanica checks that the parameters and parameter settings are the
same in both the current study and the other study referenced by an analysis in the
current study. If the parameters do not agree, Mechanica displays an error message
and does not start the run.
1070
IndexAdditional Information
Similarly, Mechanica uses the material properties assigned to the surface only if you
also assign a shell property to the surface.
Be aware that if you assign material properties to a part, curve, or surface in part
mode, those material properties are not available in assembly mode, and the
reverse. For example, if you assigned AL2014an aluminum from Mechanica's
material libraryto body1 in part mode, the software does not automatically assign
AL2014 to body1 in assembly mode. Therefore, if you ultimately plan to work with
your parts as an assembly, you should strongly consider assigning material
properties in assembly mode.
Mechanica treats each material you assign to a part or curve as a material set. Each
material set consists of a set of material property values that you specify on the
Material Definition dialog box.
You can assign three types of material properties to the model: isotropic, orthotropic,
and transversely isotropic. Most engineering materials are isotropic.
If you are working with a curve instead of a part, you can assign isotropic material
properties only.
For 3D material orientations, you select one of the following six combinations of the
current coordinate system directions for the three principal material directions:
Material Direction:
1071
Mechanica automatically changes the label above the third column of check buttons
from Z to Z when necessary to reflect the fact that the material orientation is righthanded.
Note: The material directions 1, 2, and 3 correspond to the directions
understood on the Material Properties dialog box when you enter
orthotropic or transversely isotropic properties.
When you click a Material Direction option button:
Material or Sub-laminate
Enter the name of a previously defined material for your shell definition. You can also
use a previously defined laminate as one of the plies when you define a laminate
layup-type shell.
To specify a material or sub-laminate as part of your shell definition, use one of
these methods on the laminate layup version of the Shell Property Definition
dialog box:
1072
Mechanica displays only those shell properties whose structural properties are
those of a laminate layup.
IndexAdditional Information
The dialog box does not allow recursive definitions. A shell property cannot
reference itself as a sub-laminate.
You cannot select shell properties defined for a 3D model if the active model
is 2D.
If you select a previously defined laminate, you cannot edit the value in the
Thickness entry box.
See Also
Reference:
About Materials
Required
Structure
Structure
ultimate compressive
strength
Structure
shear strength
Structure
normalized Tsai-Wu
interaction term
Structure
Property
1073
Max Absolute
For a dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis, Mechanica calculates
the maximum magnitude value over:
If you select the Time Stamp check box, Mechanica creates a time stamp measure
that saves the time at which a maximum absolute condition occurs.
Mechanica reports this value in the summary file.
This option is not available if the Spatial Evaluation method is Maximum or
Minimum, or if the Component is Magnitude, von Mises, Max Principal, or Min
Principal.
1074
IndexAdditional Information
During element creation, the value of this item cannot exceed 100 . The default for
creating elements is 95 .
The default limit for editing is 100 . You cannot exceed the editing limit.
If you enter a value for the edge angle that is not within the range allowed for that
mode, Mechanica prompts you to reenter a value within the proper range.
Maximum
For a dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis, Mechanica calculates
the maximum value over:
If you select the Time Stamp check box, Mechanica creates a time stamp measure
that saves the time at which a maximum condition occurs.
Mechanica reports this value in the summary file.
This option is not available if the Spatial Evaluation method is Minimum or Max
Abs.
1075
You can find the measure value in the summary file. If you select a spatial evaluation
of Minimum or Maximum Abs, this option is not available.
1076
IndexAdditional Information
1077
When you select Of Ply Top/Bottom, a spin box appears on the dialog box for
entering the ply number for which to display the results.
IndexAdditional Information
If the solver exceeds the number of iterations, Mechanica terminates the run. When
you re-run the study, allow the block solver to complete one more pass by increasing
the After P-Loop Pass number by 1.
Measure Convergence
The Structure engine calculates and reports in the summary report the convergence
percentage of each measure. The convergence index is the maximum percentage
change of any measure. The percentage change is the difference between the
current pass and the preceding pass divided by the value at the current pass. For
multiple load sets, the value is the maximum over all load sets.
1079
See Types of Measure Results Graphs to learn about the kinds of results you can
display using Measure as the quantity.
Failure index
Stress measures with the components von Mises, Tresca, Max Principal,
Min Principal, or Max Abs Principal
Other measures with the component Magnitude
ndp
design_parameter_name_1
design_parameter_name_2
value_1
value_2
design_parameter_name_ndp
nobj
objective_name_1
objective_name_2
value_ndp
objective_name_nobj
nlim
limit_name_1
analysis_name_nobj
1080
analysis_name_1
analysis_name_2
analysis_name_1
IndexAdditional Information
limit_name_2
analysis_name_2
limit_name_nlim
analysis_name_nlim
where
objective_value_1
objective_value_2
objective_value_nobj
limit_value_1
limit_value_2
limit_value_nlim
This file contains nobj objective values and nlim limit values.
1081
Fatigue Advisor works entirely within Mechanica Structure. You simply specify an
existing static analysis, then define the material properties and loading history along
with the required design life for the study. You can either use the material library
and load history generator included in the software or import this information.
Fatigue Advisor calculates the following results quantities:
You can define and review these results using standard Mechanica visualization tools
including fringes, contours, and graphs. In addition, you can define and track local
and global measures of the results quantities for sensitivity and optimization design
studies. You can create parametric geometry models, assign a permissible range to
each parameter, and specify design goals and performance limits.
See Also
Reference:
1082
About Materials
IndexAdditional Information
Member of SetThe name of the load set. The default name for load sets
imported from Mechanism Design is MechanismLoadSetx, where x is a
number incremented with each succeeding load set. Place the pointer over
the load set name to view the name of the Mechanism Design result set used
to generate the loads.
You can select an existing load set from the drop-down list, or create a new set
by clicking the New button to display the Load Set Definition dialog box.
Load InfoList of all loads available for import, with the magnitude for each
load under Value. Select the check boxes for those loads that you want to
include in the selected load set. The units are given in the current unit
system. To review the direction of the load, highlight the load name. The
software displays a shaded magenta arrow showing the direction of action.
For information on how the software imports loads, see How Structure
Imports Loads from Mechanism Design.
Clear Load Info After ImportControls whether the imported load
information remains in the current session. If you check this box, you can
only carry out one load import in a given session. If you do not check this
box, you can import the same load set several times.
suppressing features that are not germane to the analysis. You can make this
process easier if you use these techniques:
o Create the simulation model using a family table instance of the
Pro/ENGINEER model that suppresses the features not critical to the
analysis.
o Place features that you want to suppress or resume for a particular
analysis on a layer. You can then use the commands on the Layers
dialog box to control which features the analysis includes. Access the
Layers dialog box by selecting the Show>Layers Tree command on
the Model Tree, or by clicking
1083
See Also
Reference:
Minimum
For a dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis, Mechanica calculates
the minimum value over:
If you select the Time Stamp check box, Mechanica creates a time stamp measure
that saves the time at which a minimum condition occurs.
Mechanica reports this value in the summary file.
This option is not available if the Spatial Evaluation method is Maximum or Max
Abs.
1084
IndexAdditional Information
1085
When you first switch from creating to editing mode, Mechanica checks that the
creation edge and face angles are between 5 and 175 and warns you if the angles
are not in this range. Select Accept to keep the values you selected for the angles.
Select Cancel to change the creation limits back to the previous limits.
Modes Included Specify which modes from the modal analysis you want
included in the dynamic analysis.
Damping Coefficient (%) Assign damping coefficients to the modes in
the analysis.
See Also
Procedure:
1086
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedure:
Model Accuracy
In Pro/ENGINEER, model accuracy is the granularity, or precision, with which the
software creates the geometry. For example, model accuracy determines such
characteristics as how finely the software tessellates the model's curves. A finely
tessellated curve is a smoother curve, whereas a coarsely tessellated curve would
give the appearance of a series of straight lines that approximate the shape of the
curve. Model accuracy in assemblies can determine whether geometry is treated as
merged or separate as well as how successfully you can mesh two components.
There are two types of model accuracyrelative accuracy and absolute accuracy.
Pro/ENGINEER applies a relative accuracy value when it creates geometry. The
default relative value is the same regardless of the part size. Pro/ENGINEER
determines the overall accuracy of the geometry by multiplying the relative accuracy
value by the part size to determine the absolute accuracy of the geometry.
Thus, using the default relative accuracy, the software would create a small part with
a greater degree of geometric refinement than a large part. For example, if the size
of a small part were 100 and the relative accuracy were 0.012, the absolute accuracy
of the geometry would be 1.2. If the size of the larger part were 10,000 and the
relative accuracy were also 0.012, the absolute accuracy of the geometry would be
120.
The significant difference between the geometric accuracy of these two parts can
make it difficult to create a cohesive assembly that includes both parts. In this case,
if you were to mate the two components, the differences in tessellation refinement
could cause geometric incompatibilities.
This is of particular concern for meshing, where the software uses the geometry to
determine element edge length, element size, and so forth. For instance, if you
mated the two example parts along a nonlinear curve, Mechanica might experience
problems in trying to match the small elements that would be a byproduct of the
small part's refined tessellation with the larger elements that the larger part's
coarser tessellation would produce.
1087
to display your original model with all loads, constraints, and other model
entities
to display your FEM model's geometry in its original form
to display and animate your model's structural deformations. You can use
Model this way in standard design studies only.
to display the optimized shape of your model
to display the linearized stresses of your model
to display an undeformed model as a rendering of the analysis model
The Display Options tab displays some or all of these items depending on the
design study and quantity you choose and the selections you make on the tab:
1088
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Global Temperature
MEC/T Temperatures
External Temperatures
Modes Included
Use this item to specify which modes from the modal analysis you want included in
the dynamic analysis. You can specify this in two ways:
All Select if you want to include all modes from the modal analysis in the
dynamic analysis.
Below Specified Frequency Select to limit the modes included. Enter a
frequency in the entry box.
1089
For more information about how the Modified Mohr failure criterion is calculated,
see Shigley, Joseph Edward, Mechanical Engineering Design, First Metric Edition.
New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1986.
Each field that has dimension can have its own units and Mechanica scales the values
you enter when the units change.
See Also
References:
1090
Cutting Surf and Capping Surf Use to modify the position or orientation
of a specific cutting surface or capping surface in your result window.
IndexAdditional Information
Delete Cutting Surf and Delete Capping Surf Use to delete a specific
cutting surface or capping surface in your result window.
The point is associated with a single curve, a single surface, or both a curve
and surface associated with each other.
The point is not associated with model entities such as loads, measures, or
material properties.
The point is not a user-created datum point.
MPEG
Export MPEGs to produce animated reproductions of your results. This feature can be
used to help create presentations. The software offers the option of saving the
animation of a single window as an MPEG file for just this reason. You can access this
command using the File>Export>MPEG command.
This command opens the MPEG Export dialog box. This dialog box enables you to
specify a title and to determine the size and quality of the animation export. You can
choose from five available options. The options are:
NTSC Web
NTSC CDROM
PAL Web
PAL CDROM
Custom
The height, width, and number of frames per second are controlled by the option
selected. You can only edit these options if you choose Custom.
See Also
Procedure:
1091
1092
File Selection Button Select a path and name for the MPEG file.
Output Settings Controls the size and quality of the image using specific
standards. You can select from four pre-set options, or use the custom
selection.
o NTSC Web
o NTSC CDROM
o PAL Web
o PAL CDROM
o Custom Selecting Custom allows you to edit the FPS, Height, and
Width options.
Image Quality Use this area to control the quality of the animation.
o FPS Specifies the number of pictures per second for the animation.
Generally, the more frames per second, the smoother the animation
will appear. The maximum value is 30.
o Compression Controls the file compression. The default is 0.75.
The higher the number, the higher the quality of the picture.
Image Size Use this area to define the size of the generated MPEG in
pixels.
o Height Control the height of the animation.
o Width Control the width of the animation.
Duration Use this area to control the length of the animation. You can
define the duration in two ways:
o Number of Frames Define the duration of the animation by a
specific number of frames.
o Seconds Define the duration of the animation by a specific amount
of time.
IndexAdditional Information
MSC/NASTRAN
Writing an MSC/NASTRAN output file creates an MSC/NASTRAN file in ASCII format
called filename.nas.
The following table lists the mesh elements written to the MSC/NASTRAN output file
for the various mesh types and idealizations.
Shells
Tetrahedral Solids
Element Type
MSC/NASTRAN
Triangular Linear
CTRIA3
Triangular Parabolic
CTRIA6
Quadrilateral Linear
CQUAD4
Quadrilateral Parabolic
CQUAD8
CTETRA
Beams
CBEAM
Trusses
CROD
Springs
CBUSH
Masses
CONM2
Rigid Links
RBAR
Weighted Links
RBE3
Gaps
Be aware that Mechanica does not support or output thermal loads and constraints.
Also, for gaps, stiffness properties are specified on the PGAP card. These properties
include UO, the initial gap value, KA, the normal stiffness, and KT, the slide stiffness.
MSC/NASTRAN supports zero-length idealizationsidealizations that have no length,
such as an idealization between a point on a surface and the surface itselffor gaps
and advanced springs only.
For an MSC/NASTRAN solution, you can use the fem_solver_time_limit config.pro
option to interrupt the solver after the specified time limit. The default value is 60
(60 minutes).
If you place simulation entities on layers and want to review a file containing layer
data, you can use the sim_output_ids_for_layers config.pro option to generate an
1093
XML file that lists the layers. Mechanica outputs this file at the same time that it
outputs the .nas file and places it in the same directory as the .nas file.
See Also
Strategies:
NASTRAN Templates
You control what goes into the .nas file through a NASTRAN template file that you
specify in the NASTRAN Analysis Template area of the Run FEM Analysis dialog
box.
The NASTRAN Analysis Template area includes a file selector that you can use to
browse for a NASTRAN template file. Once you select a template file, you can set
that file as the default template for the model by clicking the Default button.
The format of the NASTRAN template file is as follows:
[optional, user supplied File Management and NASTRAN statements]
[optional, user supplied Executive Control statements]
@include_promesh_executive_control_section (optional)
[optional Executive Control statements]
CEND
[optional Case Control commands]
@include_promesh_case_control_section (optional)
@include_promesh_case_control_section_as_comments (optional)
[more optional, user supplied Case Control commands]
BEGIN BULK
[optional, user supplied Bulk Data instructions]
@include_promesh_bulk_data_section (optional)
[more optional, user supplied Bulk Data instructions]
ENDDATA
There are four special optional lines in this template file:
1094
IndexAdditional Information
@include_promesh_executive_control_section
@include_promesh_case_control_section
@include_promesh_case_control_section_as_comments
@include_promesh_bulk_data_section
If these lines are present in the template file (case-insensitive), the software
replaces them with data output from Mechanica FEM mode as it processes the
NASTRAN input file.
Font Use this area to define the font for your annotation. You can define
the following:
o Style Select the font style for your annotation. Click the color
button to define the color of the font.
o Height Enter the font height in the scroll box.
Text Box Use this area to define the text box properties:
o Draw Border Surround the annotation text with a box.
o Color Fill Type Select from Background, Solid, or None. If you
select Solid, click the color button to define the color of the text box.
Leader Use this area to define the appearance of the leader and arrow.
You can define the following:
o Color and Thickness Select the leader thickness from the option
menu and click the color button to define the leader color.
o Arrow Style Click one of the style buttons to define the arrow
style.
Mouse Sketch Define the color and thickness of the mouse sketch lines.
Click the Preview button to view your changes as you make them, or click OK to
close the dialog box.
Number
Enter the number of times the ply definition listed in the table is repeated for this
laminate. You can also use a counter to increment the number from 1 to 100.
Mechanica does not accept negative values in this field. If the value is zero,
Mechanica ignores the ply. The Number field for at least one of the plies in the
laminate must contain a non-zero, positive number.
1095
Number of Modes Select this option to specify the number of modes you
want Mechanica to calculate above a specified minimum frequency. You can
enter or select a number from 1 to 9999 in the Number Of Modes field.
If you select Rigid Mode Search, Mechanica includes rigid modes in the
number of modes it reports.
this case, add the number of rigid modes to the number of non-rigid modes
you want reported, so you get results for all the modes you want.
For example, a 3D model with no constraints has six rigid body modes. If you
want four non-rigid modes, you should enter 10 for Number Of Modes.
1096
All Modes in Frequency Range Select this option if you want Mechanica
to report all modes within a frequency range. Use Minimum Frequency and
Maximum Frequency to define the range.
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
References:
Object Action
Object action is a feature that enables you to perform an action on an object you
select on your model or in the Model Tree. You can right-click highlighted simulation
entities in the Model Tree or entity icons on your model to display a shortcut menu
listing Mechanica operations that you can perform on the entity.
The list of simulation entities on which you can perform object action operations
includes, but is not limited to, the following:
loads
constraints
beams
shells
masses
springs
shell pairs
perimeter welds
end welds
simulation features
gaps (FEM mode)
mesh controls (FEM mode)
rigid links (FEM mode)
weighted links (FEM mode)
interfaces
meshes
material assignments
simulation measures
As you move your cursor over an icon representing any simulation entity that has
been set for prehighlighting, the software highlights the icon in red. If your cursor
pauses, a display tag appears showing the entity name. If you select a highlighted
icon or select an entity directly from the Model Tree, the icon highlights in red on the
model and you can right-click to display the shortcut menu to perform operations on
the entity.
The object action operations are always in effect, whether or not prehighlighting is
set for a simulation entity.
See Also
Reference:
1097
See Also
Reference:
whether the surface you omitted is on the red side of the pair or the yellow
side of the pair
the state of the UseUnopposed toggle on the COMPRES MDL menu
For example, if you designed a collet and wanted to constrain a small section of the
outside surface, you might add a region to the model. If you then omitted the region
1098
IndexAdditional Information
from your pairing scheme, Mechanica would compress and subsequently analyze the
model differently depending on which surface had the red highlighting. To see how
the compression results change when the unopposed surface is on the red side or
the yellow side of the pair, see the collet cross section illustration.
After you pair your model, you can inspect the pairing scheme by shading your
model. To shade your model, select View>Shade and highlight Shell Pairs in the
Model Tree. Reviewing the shaded model can disclose areas that are unpaired but
may not be noticeable in the wireframe view of the model.
Optimization Studies
The report contains the following information for each iteration, or step, of the
optimization:
The parameter value is a percentage of the range for the design parameter
associated with the parameter. This value tells you where Mechanica has moved the
design parameter at a specific stage of the optimization.
At the end of the study, Mechanica lists the values for each parameter and measure
for the best design found.
1099
Standard studies Look at the results to find out how your model
behaved during a single analysis or combination of analyses. If you
used a particular parameter setting for a standard design study, you
can use the results to determine how your model behaved at that
parameter setting.
These results can help you determine the feasibility of a design. They can
also help you evaluate the effect of slightly modifying an optimized shape
to bring it within manufacturing tolerances.
Sensitivity studies Look at the results to find out which design
controls had an effect on your goals. Additionally, use the results to
determine appropriate starting points and range limits for your
parameters during optimization.
o Optimization studies Look at the results to see the optimized
shape and determine whether the final shape is acceptable.
Accepting the optimized design If you want to go forward with your
model's optimized shape instead of the original shape, you need to accept the
optimized design. When you accept an optimized design, Mechanica updates
your original Pro/ENGINEER model to reflect any shape changes.
o
See Also
References:
Order of Rotation
Mechanica rotates the material coordinate system in this order:
1. Rotates the material coordinate system about Material Direction 1.
2. Rotates the material coordinate system about the new Material Direction 2
created by the first rotation.
3. Rotates the material coordinate system about the new Material Direction 3
created by the first two rotations.
Mechanica uses the right-hand rule to determine the direction of each rotation.
Orientation
Enter the orientation for the ply or sub-laminate. For a single ply, the orientation is
the amount the material is rotated about the material direction perpendicular to the
shell or surface (the material orientation 3 direction). See the illustration for more
information.
1100
IndexAdditional Information
For sub-laminates, the orientation is the amount by which the entire sub-laminate is
rotated.
Enter positive or negative real number values for the orientation. If you have more
than one ply, you can specify multiple orientations by entering the values separated
by a slash. For example, enter 0/90/45/45 for a 4-ply laminate.
To enter a negative orientation, insert a minus sign before the number in the entry
box. For example, the negative orientation of a ply can be entered as 45.
The entry box for orientation is parameter-capable. Right-click in the Orientation
field of the Shell Property Definition dialog box and select Parameter from the
menu.
Note: If you enter multiple values for the orientation, you cannot use
expressions based on parameters, and you cannot mix parameter names and
real numbers. For example, you cannot use an expression such as
90/45/ANGLE.
See Also
Reference:
Fixed View buttons Use to quickly orient your model to any of several
standard views, including isometric, trimetric, front, back, left, right, top, and
bottom.
Pan controls Use to move your model horizontally and vertically within
the window. To pan your model, enter values in the Horizontal and Vertical
text boxes. Negative values move your model to the left and down. Positive
values move your model to the right and up. If you want to see the effects of
panning live, use the Horizontal and Vertical slider controls instead of the
text boxes.
Zoom controls Use to increase and reduce the size of your model within
the window. To increase model size, enter positive values in the Zoom text
box. To reduce the size, enter negative values. If you want to see the effects
of zooming live, use the Zoom slider control instead.
Refit button Use to fit your model in the window. This button counteracts
the Zoom controls.
Center button Use to center your model in the window. This button
counteracts the Pan controls.
1101
Spin controls Use to spin your model about the model spin center or the
screen center. If you use the model center as your spin reference, the model
spins about the X, Y, and Z axes. If you use the screen center as your spin
reference, the model spins about the horizontal, vertical, and center axes of
the screen.
To spin your model, enter positive or negative values in the three text boxes.
If you want to see the effects of zooming live, toggle the Dynamic Update
box on and then use the Spin slider controls.
Fixed
o
o
o
Orthotropic
If you select Orthotropic material symmetry, additional items appear on the
Material Definition dialog box. For these items, enter values in terms of material
directions 1, 2, and 3.
If you select the Structural tab, the following properties appear:
Poisson's Ratio
Young's Modulus
Shear Modulus
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
1102
Specific Heat
Thermal Conductivity
IndexAdditional Information
Output Format
Use this option to specify the format that you want Mechanica to use when printing
to a file.
You can use the following output formats for Windows:
You can use the following output formats for both Windows and UNIX:
PostScript (Vector) Prints a PostScript file for any printer that supports
the PostScript page description language.
HPGL2 (for exporting plots only) Prints a file in the Hewlett-Packard
Graphics Language. This format is used to print on a plotter or printer that
supports HPGL2. Use it for graphs and contour plots. Some plotters might not
fill solid areas such as shaded areas or fringe plots properly. When the plotter
does fill solid areas, the fill might damage the paper or plotter pens.
Using HPGL2 format to produce a fringe plot produces an extremely large plot file. It is
strongly recommended that you use a contour plot instead.
You can use the following additional output formats for UNIX only:
If you do not have sufficient disk space when you output a file, such as a PostScript
file, Mechanica may terminate.
Output Formats
The options you select from the Output to File dialog box determine the format and
element types included in the output file. The following is a summary of supported
FEA programs that generate shell and solid element meshes.
1103
ANSYS
MSC/NASTRAN
FEM Neutral Format
If you use the default option, Automatic Intervals Within Range, Mechanica
selects appropriate intervals at which to report results. You specify a time range by
entering a minimum time and a maximum time. You have the option to select Auto
to automatically enter the maximum time.
If you select User-defined Output Intervals, the following items become
available:
(Select All) Click this button if you want to save full results and
temperature load data for all intervals.
(Deselect All) Click this button if you do not want to save full results
and temperature load data for any intervals.
1104
Stress
Strain
IndexAdditional Information
Thermal Strain
Displacement
Reaction Force
Temperature
Heat Flux
Temperature Gradient
Calculate Select the quantities and factors for which Mechanica calculates
results.
Output Intervals (not available for dynamic shock analysis) Specify the
number of intervals in the time or frequency range at which you want
Mechanica to report results.
See Also
Procedure:
See Also
Procedure:
1105
Heat Flux This option is selected by default. You must deselect this option
if you do not want to calculate heat flux.
Plotting Grid Specify the density of the plotting grid that determines
where Mechanica calculates results.
Output Intervals Appears only for transient thermal analysis. Select this
option to specify the number of intervals in the time range at which you want
Mechanica to report results.
See Also
Procedure:
1106
Analysis Select one or more of the model's analyses. If you select multiple
analyses, Mechanica outputs the statistics for all the analyses in a single
report or graph.
Mode Select one or more modes. This option is only available for modal
analysis statistics.
Result Select one of the result quantities available for the Structure or
Thermal analysis.
Component Select one of the components available for the quantity you
selected. If you want to generate an edge graph, you can select multiple
components. In this case, all the entities you select in the Reference field
must be edges.
Shell Side For shell models, select the shell side for which to generate
statistics.
Reference Select the whole model or click the selector arrow to specify
one or more geometric entities for which to generate statistics. The geometric
entities you can select from are surfaces, edges, vertices, and hard points. If
your model is an assembly, you can also select individual parts.
Coord System area Select a coordinate system to use as a reference for
showing results. Also, specify its type as follows:
IndexAdditional Information
Use the four buttons at the bottom of the dialog box to indicate the type of analysis
statistics you want to review. These buttons are as follows:
See Also
Procedures:
1107
Use the Report button at the bottom of the dialog box to generate the hard point
report. The report lists the values for each hard point, as measured in reference to
the coordinate system you selected. The report provides a value for each
translational and rotational axis.
See Also
Procedure:
Overlay
Use to superimpose the undeformed model over the animation. Select this command
to turn the overlay display on or off.
When you first access the View menu, Overlay is active unless you deselected the
Overlay option when you defined the result window.
1108
IndexAdditional Information
If you want to create a new coordinate system to use as a reference, use the
Insert>Model Datum>Coordinate System command.
If you want to create a new coordinate system to use as a reference, use the
Insert>Model Datum>Coordinate System command.
Suppress the feature Suppress the feature that causes the problem. This
saves both modeling and calculation time, but also sacrifices the most in
model accuracy.
1109
Pan
Pan modifies the location of the model relative to the display window by moving the
frame of reference horizontally or vertically. The Pan area contains two items:
1110
IndexAdditional Information
Paper
Size Select one of the following page sizes from the option menu:
F (40.0 x 28.0 in.)
E (44.0 x 34.0 in.)
D (34.0 x 22.0 in.)
C (22.0 x 17.0 in.)
B (17.0 x 11.0 in.)
A (11.0 x 8.5 in.)
A0 (1189 x 841 mm)
A1 (841 x 594 mm)
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
A3 (420 x 297 mm)
A4 (297 x 210 mm)
Variable in Inch
Variable in mm
Height Select the page height from the option menu. This option is available if
you select the Variable in Inch or Variable in mm option for size.
Width Select the page width from the option menu. This option is available if you
select the Variable in Inch or Variable in mm option for size.
Here, you define the mass parameter as equal to the mp_mass Pro/ENGINEER
system parameter. You use the ("") portion of the equation to indicate that you want
Mechanica to measure the mass for the current part.
After you define the Pro/ENGINEER parameter, you create a measure in Mechanica
that calls the Pro/ENGINEER parameter mass.
1111
After you define this relation, you create a measure in Mechanica that references the
Pro/ENGINEER parameter bladesurf. By default, Mechanica names this measure
bladesurf.
1112
IndexAdditional Information
to determine how your model behaves under the loads, constraints, and other
conditions you define.
See Also
Reference:
Pro/ENGINEER Parameters
1113
Parameter Button
Click the P button to define a parameter-specified property. The Select
Pro/ENGINEER Parameter dialog box enables you to select or create a
Pro/ENGINEER parameter. After you click Accept and return to the Material
Definition dialog box, you can convert the parameter into a Mechanica design
parameter.
Select a parameter from the dialog box. After you click Accept, the parameter name
appears in the text box next to the P button on the Material Definition dialog box.
Mechanica does not write parameters to the library but evaluates the parameters
and writes their current value to the library.
Percent Convergence
If you selected Multi-Pass Adaptive for the convergence method, you enter a
percentage to determine the accuracy level. The percentage applies to the
convergence quantities you select.
1114
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Strategy:
Percent Convergence
Convergence gives you an idea of how accurate the results are. If an analysis does
not reach convergence during a design study, the results may not have the desired
accuracy. In this case, you need to make modifications to your model to get better
results.
Enter the percentage you want Mechanica to use to determine convergence for this
analysis. This option is available only with the multi-pass adaptive convergence
method.
The default convergence value is 10%. For most analyses, you should enter a value
from 1% to 25%. If you enter a convergence value outside this range, Mechanica
asks you to confirm the value you entered.
Phase Type
The following options appear on the second option menu if you select the Phase
quantity:
of
of
of
of
of
of
Displacement
Velocity
Acceleration
Rotation
Rotational Velocity
Rotational Acceleration
Plotting Grid
When you define an analysis, you specify the refinement of the plotting grid over
which Mechanica reports displacement and stress results for static and modal
analyses and temperature gradient, and flux results for steady-state thermal
analyses. The value you specify determines the number of intervals along each edge
of each element that Mechanica uses to create plotting grids. Mechanica calculates
quantity values at the intersections of grid lines.
Use the following strategies for specifying the plotting grid refinement:
For a higher plotting grid refinement, the engine requires a greater amount of
computation time and a significantly greater amount of disk space for its
output files. In addition, viewing results is more time-consuming.
Note: If you enter a higher number, the grid will be finer, and
Mechanica reports values from more locations on each element. At
lower numbers, Mechanica takes less time to calculate results, and the
data takes up significantly less space. The default is 4.
For models consisting primarily of beams, set the plotting grid refinement to
10 for the highest possible resolution. For these problems, the overhead of
the finer plotting grid is negligible.
Mechanica reports precise results for each grid intersection point and interpolates
these values to show results elsewhere.
1116
IndexAdditional Information
Plotting Grid
The value you specify determines the number of intervals along each edge or across
each face that Mechanica uses to create plotting grids. Mechanica calculates quantity
values at the intersections of grid lines.
Enter a number from 2 to 10 to determine the level of detail Mechanica uses to
report results of the analysis.
If you enter a higher number, the grid will be finer, and Mechanica reports values
from more locations on each element. At lower numbers, Mechanica takes less time
to calculate results, and the data takes up significantly less space. The default is 4.
Mechanica reports precise results for each grid intersection point and interpolates
these values to show results elsewhere.
Any of these point-based modeling entities could distort the results in elements
adjacent to the point by introducing singularitiesareas of theoretically infinite stress
for Structure or infinite flux for Thermal. Thus, whenever possible, you should apply
loads and constraints to curves and surfaces, not points.
If you must apply the load, constraint, or boundary condition to a point instead of a
curve or surface, you can use the check boxes in the Feature Isolation area on the
AutoGEM Settings dialog box to mitigate the effects of the singularity on your
results. This enables AutoGEM to create small transitional elements around the
singularity, lessening the stress or flux concentration.
To take advantage of feature isolation for point loads, constraints, and boundary
conditions, you should create these entities on your geometry before using AutoGEM
to mesh the model. As a general rule, you should keep these items selected for all
models.
For an example of how this feature works, see Example: Point Loads
1117
PointPoint Pairs
When you select PointPoint Pairs from the Reference option menu on the Beam
Definition or Spring Definition dialog boxes, you can create multiple beams or
springs on individual pairs of points. These beams or springs will all share the same
definition. In contrast, if you select PointPoint, PointSurface, or PointEdge
from the Reference option menu, the definition applies to only one spring or beam
at a time.
To create multiple beams or springs, you select PointPoint Pairs from the
Reference option menu, click the selector arrow under the Reference option menu,
and then select the beginning and end points of each beam or spring you want to
create. You must select an even number of points and you can select the same point
twice. All the settings you make on the dialog box will apply to all the beams or
springs you create before you click the OK button.
You can use the PointPoint Pairs option to create multiple continuous or individual
beams or springs, all having the same definition. For example:
1118
You can create a continuous string of end-to-end beams or springs where the
end of one beam or spring is at the same point as the beginning of the next.
As shown on the left in the example below, you can create four continuous
end-to-end beams or springs that have the same beginning and end point by
clicking points 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, and 1, in that order.
You can create multiple individual beams or springs by clicking the beginning
and end points of each one. As shown on the right in the example below, you
can create two individual beams or springs that do not touch each other by
clicking points 1, 2, 3, and 4.
IndexAdditional Information
Poisson's Ratio
Enter values for Poisson's Ratio, the ratio of lateral contraction to longitudinal
extension for a bar in tension. You can define this property or you can assign a
parameter to the property. Type in a value or click the P button as appropriate.
For orthotropic material properties, enter values for:
Nu21
Nu31
Nu32
Nu21 = Nu31
Nu32
There are two widely used, but conflicting, definitions of Poisson's ratios for
anisotropic materials. Mechanica uses the definition described by Tsai in Composite
Design. For more information, see Tsai Definition for Poisson's Ratios.
You can change the labels for Poisson's ratios on the orthotropic and transversely
isotropic tabs of the Material Definitions dialog box. In the config.pro file, if the
default for the sim_mat_poissons_notation is set to the default value, TSAI, the
labels are Nu21, Nu31, and Nu32. When it is set to JONES, the labels are Nu12,
Nu13, and Nu23, respectively.
1119
Polynomial Order
The values you specify for minimum and maximum polynomial orders determine the
polynomial order Mechanica uses when analyzing your model.
For each value, you can enter a number from 1 to 9. The default minimum is 1. The
default maximum is 6.
The engine begins with all element edges at the minimum polynomial order and
repeats its calculations at increasingly higher polynomial orders for each edge until it
reaches one of the following values:
1120
IndexAdditional Information
Type
Length
Mass
Force
Time
Temp
MKS
MLT
kg
N *
sec
CGS
MLT
cm
erg *
sec
mmNs
FLT
mm
tonne *
sec
FPS
FLT
ft
slug *
lbf
sec
IPS
FLT
in
lbf
sec
Pro/ENGINEER
Default
MLT
in
sec
lbm
* derived unit
For a description of each predefined system of units and its basic dimensions, see
System of Units in Unit Conversion Tables. The Pro/ENGINEER default, inch poundmass second (inch lbm second), is not a standard system of units, and thus is not
described in System of Units.
Predefined Units
You can combine predefined units with custom units to create a custom system of
units.
The following predefined units for length, mass, force, time, and temperature are
available in Pro/ENGINEER:
Length
Mass
Force
Time
Temperature
cm
dyne
day
ft
kg
kg-f
hr
in
lbm
kip
micro-sec
micron
ounce-m
kN
min
mil
mg
lbf
msec
slug
sec
1121
mm
ton-m
ounce-f
tonne
ton
week
Use Static Analysis Results From Previous Design Study Select this
option to use results from a previously run static analysis when you include a
static analysis in a buckling analysis. If this option is not selected, Mechanica
runs the static analysis as part of the buckling analysis.
Design Study Select a design study to include in the buckling analysis if
you selected the option Use Static Analysis Results From Previous
Design Study.
Static Analysis Select a static analysis to include in the buckling analysis.
Load Set Select a load set to include in the buckling analysis.
Number of Buckling Modes Enter the number of buckling modes that
you want Mechanica to calculate for this analysis.
Note: When you include a buckling analysis in an optimization study,
Mechanica tracks only the first mode, since that mode will cause failure
first.
See Also
Procedure:
1122
IndexAdditional Information
Use Modes From Previous Design Study Select this option to use
results from a previously run modal analysis in the dynamic analysis. If this
option is not selected, Mechanica runs the modal analysis as part of the
dynamic analysis.
Design Study Select a design study to include in the dynamic analysis if
you selected the option Use Modes From Previous Design Study.
Modal Analysis Select a modal analysis to include in the dynamic
analysis.
Constraint Set Mechanica displays the constraint set for the selected
modal analysis.
See Also
Procedure:
Use Static Analysis Results from Previous Design Study Select this
option to use results from a previously run static analysis. If this option is not
selected, Mechanica runs the static analysis as part of the fatigue analysis.
Design Study If you selected the option Use Static Analysis Results
From Previous Design Study, select the design study that includes the
previously run static analysis.
Static Analysis Select the static analysis that you want to use.
Load Set Select a load set.
See Also
Procedure:
Use Static Analysis Results From Previous Design Study Select this
option to use results from a previously run static analysis when you include a
static analysis in a prestress analysis. If this option is not selected, Mechanica
runs the static analysis as part of the prestress analysis.
Design Study Select a design study to include in the prestress analysis if
you selected the option Use Static Analysis Results From Previous
Design Study.
Static Analysis Select a static analysis to include in the prestress analysis.
1123
See Also
Procedure:
IndexAdditional Information
The reason for this restriction lies with how Mechanica uses design parameters
during a design study. When it performs a design study, Mechanica varies the value
of the selected design parameters within the range you specified as you defined the
design parameter and study. This, in turn, changes the value of the Pro/ENGINEER
driving parameter.
If you define the Pro/ENGINEER parameter as a variable instead of a constant, you
can create situations where both Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica try to change the
parameter. The resulting conflicts would prove undesirable for the study.
In creating the Pro/ENGINEER parameters that you plan to use as design
parameters, take special care not to use these parameters in relations that would in
any way restrict their movement in Mechanica. In other words, do not use these
parameters on the left side of any relation equations.
To learn more about using Pro/ENGINEER parameters as design parameters, see
Design Parameters.
These detailed probes help you decide how well your model behaves as a whole,
whether the model needs to be improved, and, if so, where the improvements should
take place.
1125
Probing Graphs
After you initially evaluate your results and adjust your result windows for efficient
viewing, you can examine your results more closely by probing specific aspects of
the result window. You can study a segment of your graph to get a more exact
impression of the values in that area.
These detailed probes can help you get a more exact idea of how your model
behaves at certain key points in the graph. For example, if you are working with the
results of a dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis, you may want to
segment the graph around some of the resonant peaks so that you can study the
peaks in more detail, as shown below.
The result window on the left is a full graph of displacement in the Z direction for a
dynamic frequency analysis. The result window on the right is a segmented version
of the first graph, showing the details of the point values from 1.0 on the frequency
scale, and capturing the displacement peak. Note that this example also segments
the graph at 0.01 along the displacement measure scale to provide easier
interpretation of the point values on the graph.
1126
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedure:
To Segment a Graph
1127
Prestress load is too high or exceeds the buckling load Decrease the
prestress load and rerun the model.
Projected Vector
When you select Projected Vector from the Relative To option menu, Mechanica
displays a second option menu with the following items:
For more information on how Mechanica projects a vector onto a surface, see
Example: Project a Vector onto a Surface.
IndexAdditional Information
Property Type
Use these items in the Shell Property Definition dialog box to select the type of
shell properties you want to define:
The items on the remainder of the dialog box are different depending on which
property you select. Click the following links for more information:
1129
Homogeneous
Laminate Stiffness
Laminate Layup
For basic analyses, do not select velocity, acceleration, rotational velocity, rotational
acceleration, phase, or time. These quantities apply to dynamic analyses only.
1130
IndexAdditional Information
Stress
Strain
Displacement
Rotation
Velocity
Acceleration
Rotational
Velocity
Rotational
Acceleration
Phase
Failure Index
Thermal
Fatigue
Force
Moment
Moment of Inertia
Center of Mass
Time
Driven Pro
Parameter
Contact
Computed Measure
See Also
Procedures:
References:
1132
Temperature
Temperature
Gradient
Heat Flux
Time
Driven Pro
Parameter
Computed Measure
IndexAdditional Information
Acceleration
Beam Resultant
Contact
Pressure
Displacement
Failure Index
Fatigue
Flux
Measure
P-Level
Reaction
Reactions at
Point
Constraints
Rotation
Rotation
Acceleration
Rotation Velocity
Shear & Moment
Shell Resultant
Strain
Strain Energy
Stress
Temp Gradient
Temperature
Velocity
FEM Mode
Beam Resultant
Displacement
Flux
Reaction
Rotation
Shear & Moment
Shell Resultant
Strain
Strain Energy
Stress
Temp Gradient
Temperature
Thermal Strain
Thermal Strain
Energy
After you select a quantity from the Quantity option menu, additional selections
appear that you can use to define the quantity.
For information on how Mechanica handles quantities for modal and dynamic
analyses, see Quantity Notes for Modal and Dynamic Analyses.
See Also
Procedure:
1133
For modal analyses, values for all quantities are not absolute. You cannot
compare them to quantities from any other type of analysis. Mechanica unit
normalizes displacements and rotations to 1.0 by dividing all displacements
by the maximum displacement response. All other modal quantities are mass
normalized. If you want to mass normalize displacements and rotations, use
the massnorm engine option.
If you select Full Results when you define your analysis, the result window
displays all valid quantities plus all valid measures. If you do not select Full
Results, the result window displays only the valid measures.
See Also
Procedure:
1134
IndexAdditional Information
Dynamic Query Use to find quantity values at any point on your model.
You can use this command to pinpoint exact locations or to study a
continuously updated quantity as you use your mouse to scan your model.
If you use the command to label a series of locations on your model with their
calculated values, you may want to clear these values from the result window
after you study them to restore a clean model view.
Radius
When you choose Near Point, Mechanica displays an entry box showing a default
value of 5% of the model size. Use this entry box to type in another radius value if
desired. The radius you specify is three-dimensional rather than planar. Thus, the
portion of the model considered depends on the model's contours. For more
information, see Near Point Measures.
You use the Point(s) selector arrow to select the application area for the measure.
For more information about the Reaction quantity, see Reaction Results Reporting.
Mechanica reports point reactions in force units and reports curve and edge
reactions in force per unit length units.
Mechanica does not report reaction force data at constraints you associated
with a UCS.
Mechanica calculates reaction force values for each element at locations
shared by more than one element. Mechanica reports the maximum of those
values at the shared location when displaying results.
Mechanica always reports the maximum reaction force at locations shared by
more than one element.
See Also
Procedure:
1136
IndexAdditional Information
Select a beam section from the list of beam sections available in your model.
Mechanica lists every beam section you created while defining your beams.
The list contains shape names, such as Square, Rectangle, and so on, for
standard cross-sections, and section names, such as my_beam_section, for
sketched and general cross-sections. After you select a shape or section
name, Mechanica displays a graphic showing the locations of the recovery
points on the beam section.
If you run in FEM mode with the NASTRAN solver, you may not always be able
to see the cross-section names and the graphic displaying the recovery points.
If you open the .xdb file alone in a session without the model file or .frd file
active in the session, the list displays only default names, with numbers
corresponding to the PBEAM property card IDs in the .xdb or .nas file. For
example, Section1 corresponds to PBEAM ID 1, Section2 corresponds to
PBEAM ID 2, and so on. For all beam sections, regardless of the type,
Mechanica displays the graphic corresponding to a general beam section. If
you view results from the .frd file in FEM, the beam section names and the
graphic displayed are the same as in native mode.
Also in FEM mode, if your beam has different section types at the start and
end, no section name will be included in the list. You cannot view recovery
point results for this type of beam. However, if the sections at the start and
end of the beam are of the same type, but of different dimensions, you can
view results.
Select a recovery point from the list of available points. The list contains the
maximum number of recovery points allowed for the type of beam section
that you selected. For example, solid circle sections have nine recovery
points, L-sections have eight recovery points, while sketched sections have
the number of points you specified when sketching a section.
In FEM mode, the number of points is always four.
1137
Rectangle
The icon for a rectangular beam section type looks like this:
When you select Rectangle as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition
dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section
dimensions:
b
d
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for rectangular beam section
types. The figure on the left shows the points in native mode, and the figure on the
right shows the points in FEM mode.
1138
IndexAdditional Information
Redistribute Levels
If you enter a minimum value greater than the level above it, or a maximum value
less than the level below it, Mechanica prompts:
Do you want to redistribute levels linearly from first to last <y>?
To keep the new minimum or maximum value, you must enter y. Mechanica cannot
use the new value without redistributing levels.
Reentrant Corners
This option enables AutoGEM to detect reentrant (for example, inside) corners on an
individual surface in your model and place a transitional set of small elements around
them. A reentrant corner can be an area of high stress or flux concentration. Placing
small elements around reentrant corners helps prevent these stress or flux
concentrations near the local feature from degrading the efficiency of the analysis
process in larger neighboring elements. For an example of how this AutoGEM feature
works, see Example: Reentrant Corners.
AutoGEM does not detect reentrant corners that span more than one surface.
AutoGEM also does not detect reentrant corners on volumes.
This item appears on both the Structure and Thermal versions of the dialog box, and
works the same way in either mode.
1139
For surfaces and shells, Mechanica displays the current coordinate system
(the WCS is selected by default). You can select another coordinate system if
you wish.
For parts, solids, volumes, 2D plates, and 2D solids, Mechanica displays
Material Directions 1, 2, and 3, which you can change on the dialog box if you
like.
A menu appears that lets you define the following items:
o Projected X axis This option is the default value, and the only
available choice in FEM mode. It defines Material Direction 1 to be the
direction of the X axis of the referenced coordinate system projected
onto the surface.
o Projected closest axis This option defines Material Direction 1
through a series of calculations.
To calculate this value, the software first determines which of the
three coordinate system directions(X, Y, Z) or (R, T, Z) or (R, T, P)
is closest to the surface normal. Next, the software picks the
coordinate system direction that follows the previously selected
direction. For example, if the X direction is closest to the surface
normal, the software selects the Y direction. Or, if the Z direction is
closest to the surface normal, the software picks the X direction. The
projection of this direction onto the surface is defined as Material
Direction 1.
Refit
Select the Refit command or click the Refit button on the toolbar to refit the model
to the screen so that you can see the entire model. A refitted model uses 80 percent
of the screen. You can also refit the model by clicking Refit on the Orientation
dialog box
1140
IndexAdditional Information
Relabel Contour
Use this command to change the number of lettered labels that appear on the
contour plot. The command is Utilities>Relabel Contour. You specify label density
on the Result Window Definition dialog box.
Labels are only visible for the contour plot if you select the Labels toggle on the
Format Result Window dialog box
When you define the result window, you set the initial state of labels. See Contour
Results Display for information.
When you select the Relabel Contour or Relabel command, Mechanica prompts
you to enter a new value for label density. The density is an integer from 1 to 10.
Use lower numbers to get more labels.
Relative To
When you select a directional component for a quantity, you can choose the
reference direction of the component from the Relative To option menu. The
reference options available on the Relative To menu vary depending on the
quantity.
Use the Relative To menu to display results relative to:
a coordinate system
the material orientation
the ply orientation
the beam orientation
Entities you must add before using AutoGEM You must add
idealizations, connections, and simulation features that you want to use as a
basis for another modeling entityfor example, a datum point that will be
used to apply a measurebefore running AutoGEM. Additionally, if your
model includes point loads, constraints, or boundary conditions, you must add
them as well. All of these modeling entities influence the mesh. If you do not
add them before using AutoGEM, the mesh will not correctly account for these
entities.
While it may not be absolutely necessary in all cases, we strongly recommend that you
also define all properties before running AutoGEM. Defining properties before you run
AutoGEM enables you to use the All With Properties option in the AutoGEM
References area of the AutoGEM dialog box.
Entities you can add before or after using AutoGEM Provided all
reference simulation features and geometry are in place before you run
AutoGEM, you can add loads, constraints, and boundary conditions before or
after using AutoGEM. These entities must use curves, surfaces, or
components as references; they should not use points. Also, you can add
measures before or after you run AutoGEM. While Mechanica correctly
accounts for modeling entities that you add to geometry after you run
AutoGEM, it is a good practice to add all modeling entities prior to meshing
the model.
1142
Displacement
Velocity
Acceleration
IndexAdditional Information
o
o
See Also
Procedure:
The only directory that can be shared with the study directory (also known as
the directory for output files) is dirnthe last directory you specify.
Mechanica fills dir1 to dirn completely with the .bas files if necessary, leaving
no space for other types of files. In order to ensure that the study directory
has adequate space, write it to a file system separate from any working
directory.
Your engine job will stop if the study directory runs out of space.
The only directory that can be NFS-mounted is dirn. Directories dir1 to dirn1
must be local file systems. The .bas files cannot split past the first NFS
directory in the list because of NFS limitations.
Directories dir1 to dirn must have enough space available to run your job.
There may be less available space than you expect. For example, if another
job is using one of the directories in the list at the same time as your job is, it
may decrease the available space.
You can increase the space available to your job by:
o
o
o
For dynamic time analysis, you can specify a time range over which you want
Mechanica to report results by entering a minimum time and maximum time.
For dynamic frequency and dynamic random analyses, you can specify a
frequency range by entering minimum and maximum frequencies.
(Select All) Click this button if you want full results for all intervals.
(Deselect All) Click this button if you do not want full results for all
intervals.
Measures Output Intervals per Master Interval Enter a positive
number up to 999. In general, computation time increases with the number of
measures output intervals.
1144
IndexAdditional Information
Components
Cartesian
X, Y, Z
Cylindrical
R, T, Z
Spherical
R, T, P
Mechanica saves the coordinate system you select when you save a result window
definition.
1145
1146
IndexAdditional Information
This figure shows the actual results when the two parts are modeled as solids
resulting in no slippage along the common surface.
This figure shows what happens when you use midsurface compression with
automatic midsurface connections. Mechanica displaces the assembly about four
times further than it does for solid parts.
If the difference between the actual displacement and the displacement reported by
Mechanica is beyond an acceptable tolerance, consider one of these alternatives:
1147
Beam Section "Name" The summary displays the name you specified
when you defined the beam section. If you have assigned the beam section to
a beam on your model, when you click this link the beam highlights in the
model window.
Description The summary displays the optional description you included
with the section definition.
Type The summary displays the beam section type, such as square,
channel, or sketched. In addition, for standard section types, the summary
displays a figure that illustrates the section dimensions.
Feature Type For sketched sections, this entry is either thick or thin.
Orientation For sketched sections, the summary explains how the
coordinate axes in the sketch relate to those in the beam shape coordinate
system.
Dimension(s) The summary displays the dimensions you entered when
defining a standard section.
Area The summary displays the area computed for the beam section based
upon the specified dimensions. For general sections this is the entered value.
Iyy, Izz, Iyz The summary displays the values for Iyy and Izz about the
centroid with respect to both the beam centroidal principal (BCPCS) and beam
shape (BSCS) coordinate systems. It also includes Iyz in terms of the BSCS.
J The summary displays the effective second polar moment of area about
the centroid for the beam section.
Shear Area Factor The summary displays the values you specified for Fy
and Fz with respect to the BCPCS. For channel, L, and sketched sections, it
also lists the values with respect to the BSCS.
Shear Center The summary displays values for Dy and Dz with respect to
the BCPCS. For those sections in which the BSCS is not coincident with the
BCPCS, the summary also lists values for Dy and Dz with respect to the
BSCS.
Centroid The summary displays the computed Y and Z coordinates
specifying the location of the origin of the BCPCS system relative to the BSCS.
Rotation of Principal Axis The summary displays the computed value for
the rotation of the BCPCS around the beam X axis relative to the BSCS. The
value is typically non-zero only for sketched sections and L-beams.
Stress Computation Offsets The summary displays the maximum
positive values of the Y and Z offsets for the beam stress recovery points.
Grid Points For all sections, the summary displays the Y and Z coordinates
of the stress recovery points with respect to the BCPCS. In addition, for
standard section types, the summary displays a figure that relates the labels
for the stress recovery points to the beam section shape. Note that in FEM
mode there is a maximum of four stress recovery points.
1148
Warp Coefficient
Non-Structural Mass per Unit Length
Non-Structural Mass Moment per Unit Length
Coordinates of Non-Structural Mass Center of Gravity The summary
displays the Y and Z coordinates with respect to the beam shape coordinate
system.
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
References:
Review Layup
Opens the Laminate Layup Review dialog box, which displays all the individual
plies of the laminate, with the sub-laminates expanded into individual plies.
Mechanica substitutes all the current parameter values and provides the total
thickness at the bottom.
You can save the information on the Laminate Layup Review dialog box in a text
file. Select the File>Save command at the top of the dialog box. In the Save As
dialog box, select a directory to save the file. The default is the current working
directory. Accept the default name, shellpropname_layup.inf, or enter another name.
Review Stiffness
Opens the Laminate Stiffness Review dialog box. You can save the information on
the Laminate Stiffness Review dialog box in a text file. Select the File>Save
command at the top of the dialog box. In the Save As dialog box, select a directory
to save the file. The default is the current working directory. Accept the default
name, shellpropname_stiffness.inf, or enter another name.
You cannot change the information in any of the fields on the Laminate Stiffness
Review dialog box. However, you can select the text in a field and copy it to a
clipboard to paste into another application. For example, you can copy the text from
one of the fields on this dialog box and then close the box. Create a new laminate
1149
stiffness shell property, then click in the field where you want to add the copied
information. Right-click and select Paste to add the information from the Laminate
Stiffness Review dialog box.
For more information about the terms on this dialog box, see Laminate Stiffness.
Reviewing Analyses
When you select Analyses from the REVIEW MESH menu, Mechanica displays a
sequence of menus that let you specify the analysis, load and constraint names, and
load and constraint locations for the mesh information you want to see.
The first menu Mechanica displays is the SEL ANALYSN menu. This menu includes a
list of the analyses that you defined for the mesh.
After you select an analysis, Mechanica displays the LOADS BC menu. This menu
lists all of the load and constraint types you defined for the load sets and constraint
sets in the analysis you selected. You use this menu to select a single load or
constraint type or select all of them. Be aware that a given load type may include
multiple loads of a similar category, and the same holds true for constraint types.
After you select a load or constraint type, Mechanica displays the CONS PLACE
menu, which enables you to select the entity you want to examine. The selections on
this menu vary depending on whether you applied the load or constraint to elements
or nodes. Here is a list of the possible selections:
1150
All Display all nodes and elements associated with the loads and
constraints. This item only appears if you select Display All on the LOADS
BC menu.
All Elements Display all elements associated with the load or constraint
type. This item only appears if you select a load or constraint type applied to
surfaces.
Element Id Display the associated load and constraint on the specified
element Id.
IndexAdditional Information
All Nodes Display all elements associated with the load or constraint. This
item only appears if you select a load or constraint applied to points or
curves.
Node Id Display the associated load and constraint on the specified node
Id.
Select Display the associated load or constraint on the selected elements
or nodes.
You cannot edit the information in this box. If you need more details on the
definition, use Edit>Result Window to see the original version of the
Result Window Definition dialog box.
See Also
Procedure:
1151
Reviewing Connectivity
Use the Review>Connectivity command to find:
places where shell surfaces that should attach to one another are not
connected.
places where one or more nodes on a one-dimensional element do not
correctly connect with the mesh. This type of review proves very useful for
complex models with numerous connections. For example, if you were
working with a beam model with a large number of interconnected beams or
multiple beams connecting at a single point, a connectivity review would show
you beams that are not fully connected to adjoining beams.
Boundary Edges Highlight edges that are only associated with one shell
surface.
Boundary Nodes Highlight nodes at the boundary ends of beams, springs,
gaps, and other one-dimensional elements. A boundary end of a onedimensional element is a node associated only with the one-dimensional
element, itself, and not with any other mesh component.
1152
IndexAdditional Information
the displacement to verify that the model is deforming the way you expect it
to. Change the scale factor to make the deformed shape look more
reasonable, if necessary.
To examine the magnitude of the displacements, define another result
window using a display type of Fringe or Vectors with the same quantity and
location.
Stress To create a result display for static analyses that shows the
distribution and magnitude of stresses, select Fringe as the display type,
Max Principal, von Mises, or Beam Total as the component, and All as the
location. You can determine whether the distribution and magnitude of stress
look reasonable.
Locations where the stresses differ greatly across element boundaries are
areas where altering the mesh can facilitate convergence.
1153
RMS
Mechanica calculates the RMS (root mean square) value of the measure over the
frequency range.
This option is available for certain quantities if you selected At Point for Spatial
Evaluation and base the measure on one of the directional components. Mechanica
only calculates measures that use the RMS dynamic evaluation method for dynamic
random analyses.
Rotate About
This button lets you specify additional rotations about one or more material
directions, depending on the model type. These rotation angles enable you to modify
the orientation of the material directions from those you specified higher on the
dialog box.
When you select this check box, additional items appear on your dialog box,
depending on the model type and the type of material orientation you have selected:
IndexAdditional Information
When you select Rotation Acceleration from the Quantity option menu,
Mechanica may alter the selections on the Quantity tab. Some selections do not
appear unless the item is part of the design study you choose. The possible
selections include:
1155
If you do not prevent rotation using one of these methods, the model will be
underconstrained. In this case, one or both components will spin and the
solver will fail.
Note that, for simple fasteners, Mechanica does not provide any automatic
mechanism for preventing rotation as part of the fastener definition. Therefore,
you need to add constraints or create one or more additional, appropriatelylocated fasteners.
For the Rotation quantity, you must select Rotations as an analysis output
when you define the analysis.
You cannot specify rotation as a quantity for 2D plane stress models.
For FEM mode, the Rotation quantity is available for all models, but only returns
nonzero results for beam and shell models.
When you select Rotation from the Quantity option menu, Mechanica may alter the
selections on the Quantity tab. Some selections do not appear unless the item is
part of the design study you choose. The possible selections include:
Amplitude Use this option button to indicate that you want Mechanica to
display rotation in terms of amplitude. This button is available for FEM mode
dynamic analyses only.
Phase Use this option button to indicate that you want Mechanica to
display rotation in terms of phase. This button is available for FEM mode
dynamic analyses only.
Component Select a component. The directional components that appear
on this option menu change if you change the coordinate system using the
Relative To option menu.
Relative To Display results relative to a directional component.
Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the
result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the
entity you want to use in your results display. This area appears only if you
select a display type of Graph.
Mechanica reports rotation in radians (1 radian = 57.29578 ) and displays the SRSS
of the rotation components you select.
1156
IndexAdditional Information
Mechanica reports rotation velocity in radians per unit of time and displays the
square root of the sum of the squares (SRSS) of the rotation components you select.
%ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 3 1 5 4
%ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 4 1 2 3
%END_SECT
%START_SECT
%NODE 1 DEF
%NODE 2 DEF
%NODE 3 DEF
%NODE 4 DEF
%NODE 5 DEF
%NODE 6 DEF
%NODE 7 DEF
%NODE 8 DEF
%ELEM 1 DEF
%ELEM 2 DEF
%ELEM 3 DEF
%ELEM 4 DEF
%ELEM 5 DEF
%ELEM 6 DEF
%END_SECT
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MESH
-0.5 -0.5 -0.5
-0.5 -0.5 0.5
-0.5 0.5 0.5
0.5 -0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5
-0.5 0.5 -0.5
0.5 0.5 -0.5
0.5 -0.5 -0.5
1 1 * 1 4 7 5
1 1 * 2 5 6 3
1 1 * 2 5 1 6
1 1 * 6 1 7 5
1 1 * 2 4 1 5
1 1 * 1 8 7 4
%START_SECT : LOADS
%LOAD_TYPE 1 DEF : TEMPERATURE NODE SCALAR
%CON_CASE 1 DEF : TestData1
%LOAD 1 DEF : 1 1
%LOAD 1 VAL : 1 0
%LOAD 1 VAL : 2 0.15
%LOAD 1 VAL : 3 0.75
%LOAD 1 VAL : 4 0.4
%LOAD 1 VAL : 5 1
%LOAD 1 VAL : 6 0.6
%LOAD 1 VAL : 7 0.85
%LOAD 1 VAL : 8 0.25
%END_SECT
%START_SECT : ANALYSIS
%SOLUTION 1 DEF : THERMAL
%SOLUTION 1 CON_CASES : 1
%END_SECT
%END
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Reference:
msengine
Type of Model
Example
Prestress Static
pretension cable
ski lift
Prestress Modal
rotating machinery
turbine blade
Buckling
bulkheads
Saved Views
Use the View>Saved Views menu option or the Saved Views button on the
toolbar to change the orientation of your model to a saved view or to save the
current view.
When you select the View>Saved Views menu option, the Saved Views dialog
box appears with the following options:
Saved view list Lists the views you save in Pro/ENGINEER or results.
Set Repositions your model to the orientation of the saved view that you
select from the list.
Save Saves the current orientation of your model. To save the view, type a
name that is 31 characters or less in the text box and select Save. The view
appears on the Saved Views list.
When you select the Saved Views button on the toolbar, an alphabetical list of
saved views appears. Select a view from the list to reorient your model in the result
window.
1159
Search Tool
Use the Edit>Find command to access the search tool that allows you to search for
simulation entities in a model. When you select the Edit>Find command, the
Search Tool dialog box appears. This dialog box includes four tabsAttributes,
History, Status, and Geometry. Mechanica uses only specific rules on the
Attributes and Status tabs to perform the search for simulation entities.
The search tool allows you to specify the search criteria based on the type of the
model. The supported types of models are 2D, 3D, Structure, and Thermal in native
and FEM modes. Additionally, the search tool allows you to define rules to build and
save queries. You save the search queries by defining a new layer in the model.
Defining a layer while saving a query allows you to group certain simulation entities
on a layer. Use the Search Tool dialog box to:
Structural loads
Thermal loads
Structural constraints
Thermal boundary conditions
Idealizations
Connections
Simulation measures
Material assignments
AutoGEM Controls
FEM mesh controls
After you apply the rules and specify the search criteria, Mechanica highlights and
displays the search results.
1160
IndexAdditional Information
Select Include submodels if you want to search for simulation entities in the
submodels of the assembly.
In Mechanica, you use two tabsAttributes and Statusto examine the simulation
entities in your model. The Attributes tab enables you to search for classes of
simulation entities, and the Status tab lets you search for simulation objects on the
layers you have created in your model.
The Attributes tab on the Search Tool dialog box allows you to define the rule for
Mechanica to use when searching for simulation entities in the model you have
selected. You can search by selecting a rule class from Name, Type, or Property.
Depending on the rule class you select, the fields in the Criteria area of the dialog
box change.
Name Search for simulation entities by Name. Specify the search criteria
by selecting the required Comparison operation from the available list.
Select or enter the required value or manually type the name for the
simulation entity in the Value list. Based on the model you have selected, the
fields in the Value list are populated at runtime. Mechanica searches the
model for simulation entities that match the values specified in the
Comparison and Value fields.
For example, you have selected "is equal to" as the comparison operation and the
value specified is BEAM1, Mechanica searches for entities that have the name
BEAM1 and displays the search results in the items found: window. Additionally,
Mechanica highlights these items in the Model Tree.
Type Search for simulation entities by Type. Specify the search criteria by
selecting the required Comparison operation, the Category type the entity
belongs to, and the Value of the entity from the lists, respectively.
Property Search for simulation entities by Property. Specify the search
criteria by selecting the required Property type and Comparison operation.
Select or manually enter the value for the entity in the Value field.
For the entity value, you can type an alphabetic character followed by a wild
card. For example, B*. The wild card is represented by a *.
You use the Status tab to examine the contents of a layer that you have defined for
your model. When you are working in Mechanica, the Status tab has only one active
option button, Layer. The Layer option button lists all the layers available in the
model. Layer is a rule that allows you to search for simulation entities in any of the
layers in your model by selecting the operation from the Comparison field and the
desired layer from the Value field.
The Value list contains all layers in your model regardless of the method you used to
create the layerthe Layer tool or the Search Tool query builderor whether you
created these layers in Pro/ENGINEER or in Mechanica. Select Add New option to
include the new layer in the Query Builder.
You can also use the Options button in the Search Tool dialog box to search for
simulation entities in the model you have selected by building a query, saving the
1161
query, highlighting and displaying selected items, and displaying the filtered
selections.
Use the Find Now option in the Search Tool dialog box to display a list of
simulation objects that the filter finds and, in case of only one matching object,
highlights the object. In case of more than one object, you can select an object, and
Mechanica highlights that object. You can view the search results in the items
found: window. Use the New Search option to start a new search by defining rules,
operations, and criteria for the new search operation.
Force Specify that you want to evaluate beam resultant forces, shell
resultant forces, or reaction forces at point constraints.
Moment Specify that you want to evaluate beam resultant moments, shell
resultant moments, or reaction moments at point constraints.
Transverse Shear Force Specify that you want to evaluate shell
transverse shear in the Z direction. This option is available only if you select
Shell Resultant as your quantity.
The components that appear on the Quantity tab change depending on whether you
select Force, Moment, or Transverse Shear Force. For more information, see the
component topics for Beam Resultant, Shell Resultant, Reaction, or Reactions at
Point Constraints.
Segmenting a Graph
When your graph has too many points and looks crowded, you can segment it to
display a specific section of interest. Segmenting a graph is especially useful for
dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis results, which may contain
100 or more points in Structure. You can use one of the following methods to
segment your graph:
After you finish studying a particular graph segment, you can restore a graph to its
original, unsegmented state. Use the View>Refit command. After you select the
1162
IndexAdditional Information
If you want to try the iterative solver, you should monitor how much time and disk
space your models take to run with each type of solver. In this way, you can
determine which solver is best for which type of model.
Note: For jobs running the direct solver, an elapsed time/CPU time ratio much
greater than 4 may indicate a problem. For jobs running the iterative solver, a
ratio much greater than 7 may indicate a problem. The iterative solver
generally has a higher ratio of elapsed to CPU time because it does more I/O
per calculation than the direct solver.
For static, prestress static, or steady-state thermal analyses, the dialog box
displays the name of the first load set you included in the analysis. If you
included more than one load set, you can use the Select button to select a
different load set.
For modal and prestress modal analyses, select a mode number. The dialog
box displays Mode 1. If you specified more than one mode in the analysis,
you can use the Select button to select a different mode number.
Mechanica reports the frequency for each mode by number in the summary
file after you run a standard design study. You can use the summary from a
previously run standard study to choose a mode number to enter in this
1163
dialog box. Use the Info>Status command on the Analyses and Design
Studies dialog box to access the summary file.
geometric dimensions
materials
loads
prescribed displacements
idealizations (mass, springs, beams)
Mechanica design parameters based on Pro/ENGINEER dimensions or
beam sections
in a global sensitivity study, start and end values of Mechanica design
parameters based on Pro/ENGINEER dimensions or beam section
dimensions
in an optimization sensitivity study, minimum and maximum values of
Mechanica design parameters based on Pro/ENGINEER dimensions or
beam section dimensions
When you click OK in the Warning message box, Pro/ENGINEER sets the selected
system of units as the principal system of units for your model.
See Also
1164
IndexAdditional Information
Procedure:
Beam Area Select the beam components to include in the result window
definition. Mechanica displays up to six graph curves on separate graphs
depending on the number of beam components you select.
Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the
result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the
entity you want to use in your results display.
The values for these properties are relevant for non-doubly-symmetric beam sections
(those that are not symmetrical about two normal axes). For many standard beam
sections types such as square and rectangle, the shear center and the beam centroid
are the same.
For channel, thin sketched, and L-sections, Mechanica calculates these values
automatically. For general and solid sketched beam sections, you need to calculate
the values yourself and specify them on the dialog box.
You can load a beam directly through its shear center, eliminating torsion from the
element's behavior, by aligning the section to the assigning curve. To do this, you
can use the Beam Orientation functionality to apply beam offsets. You can view the
offset distances to enter for beam orientation when you review beam section
properties. Note that the values given on this review for Shear Center are reported
with respect to the BCPCS. Alternatively, you can select the Shear Center option on
the Beam Orientation Definition dialog box and leave the offset values set to
zero.
Native mode assigns the default value of 0.833333, which is accurate for
rectangular cross sections.
FEM mode interprets the value as undefined.
Shear Modulus
Enter positive values for the shear moduli of the material. You can define this
property or you can assign a parameter to the property. Type in a value or click the
P button as appropriate.
For orthotropic material properties, enter values for:
G12
G13
G23
These values represent the shear modulus in each of the three material directions.
1166
IndexAdditional Information
For transversely isotropic material properties, enter a value for the shear modulus of
the material in two of the three principal planes of the material for the model. The
dialog box shows the following shear modulus values:
G12 = G13
G23 = E2/(2 X (1 + Nu32))
Enter a single positive value for the 21 and 31 planes. Structure automatically
calculates the value for the 32 plane, using the equation shown on the dialog box.
Note: For both orthotropic and transversely isotropic, G21 is also denoted as
G12, G31 as G13, and G32 as G23.
Shear Strength
For all transversely isotropic failure criteria, if you enter a value for this quantity
keep the following in mind:
Ss must be positive.
You must also enter values for ultimate tensile strength and ultimate
compressive strength.
Each field that has dimension can have its own units and Mechanica scales the values
entered when you change the units.
Shell Contribution
Use the Include Contribution From Shells area of the Quantity tab to select the
shell contributions you want to use for the result window. This area does not appear
on the dialog box unless there are shells in the model and they were part of the
design study.
Note: The discussion below pertains to all quantities that allow specific
measurement of shell behavior except for Strain Energy.
The options in the Include Contribution From Shells area determine the values
used for plotting the result display. All of the check boxes are selected by default.
The selections in the Include Contribution From Shells area are as follows:
There are two option menus below the check boxes. These are the possible options
available on the first option menu, and they determine the options available on the
second menu:
1167
1168
IndexAdditional Information
Shell Side
If your model's mesh comprises shell elements, you can generate analysis statistics,
hard point reports, and parameters based on a specific area:
Shell Thickness
The properties of a shell are determined by thickness, material, and shape. The
following points are true for shell thickness:
In this illustration, the face of the entity that appears in the work area is the
midsurface of the entity. For example, if you assign a thickness of 1 to a shell, the
element actually has a thickness of 0.5 in each direction.
1169
1170
Select Select a geometric reference for the location of the entity you are
placing on your model. Depending on the type of entity you are adding, this
can be a point, curve, or surface, or any of several other reference types.
Individual Select an individual surface on the model.
Surf Options Select the surface that you want using advanced surface
selection functionality to indicate the type of surfaces you want to include or
exclude.
Part Boundary Select the boundary surfaces of the model.
Box Select Select multiple geometric entities by left-clicking and dragging
your mouse to rubber-band the entities.
Quilts When defining shells only, use this option to select a whole quilt.
Fix Normals When defining shells and pressure loads, use this option to
fix the normals of specified quilt surfaces.
Flip Normals When defining shells and pressure loads, use this option to
flip the normals of specified quilt surfaces.
Single Select a single datum point on your model.
Feature Select a feature of datum points on your model.
Pattern Select a pattern of datum points on your model.
IndexAdditional Information
Simulation Model
Use the Info>Simulation Model command to view information about your model in
Mechanica. When you select this command, an information window appears with
your model's name and model type, as well as summaries of the materials,
idealizations, connections, loads, and constraints in your model.
For example, here is an information window entry for a spring:
Spring "Spring1"
File
o
o
o
Edit
o
o
o
o
o
o
View
o Line Number Turn on or off the display of line numbers. This
command is not active in edit mode.
You can also display the information window by using the shortcut menu in the Model
Tree.
1171
Singularities
Mechanica Structure is based on the theory of linear elasticity, which is a useful
approximation of physical reality. Linear elasticity allows solutions that have infinite
values of displacement or stress. These solutions with infinite values are called
singular elastic states and the locations where they occur are called singularities.
At the location of a singularity and in the small area around the singularity, the
theoretical elasticity solution is not a valid representation of physical reality because
displacement and stress cannot be infinite. Outside the area of the singularity, the
theoretical elasticity solution is valid. Structure attempts to represent the singular
representation as accurately as possible using polynomial functions.
1172
IndexAdditional Information
Singularities cause edges in a model to require a high p-level for convergence, thus
resulting in a longer solution time. Some of the most common locations where
element singularities can occur include:
at reentrant corners
at point loads and constraints
along line loads and constraints on solids
at the interface between elements of different properties, materials, or
element types
See Also
Strategy:
Minimizing Singularities
Line, Edge
Surface, Face
Beam
Shell
disp
ok
disp
stress
ok
stress
disp
ok
disp
stress
ok
stress
disp
n/a
disp
stress
n/a
stress
Solid
ok
disp
ok
stress
ok
disp
ok
stress
ok
disp
1
stress
ok
1
This information also applies to temperatures and fluxes that result from heat loads,
convection conditions, and prescribed temperatures in Thermal.
1173
Line, Edge
Surface, Face
Beam
Shell
Solid
disp
stress
ok
disp
stress
ok
stress
n/a
disp
ok
disp
ok
n/a
stress
ok
stress
ok
disp
ok
disp
stress
ok
stress
disp
ok
disp
stress
ok
disp
stress
ok
1. Timoshenko and Goodier, Theory of Elasticity, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill Book Co. Section 36:
Concentrated Force at a Point of a Straight Boundary.
2. Timoshenko and Goodier, Theory of Elasticity, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill Book Co. Section 138:
Force on Boundary of a Semi-infinite Body.
This information also applies to temperatures and fluxes that result from heat loads,
convection conditions, and prescribed temperatures in Thermal.
Solid Circle
The icon for a solid circle beam section type looks like this:
When you select Solid Circle as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition
dialog box, you must enter the radius of the circular beam cross section in the R
text-entry box. The value you enter must be a positive number.
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for solid circle beam section types.
The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right
shows the points for FEM mode.
1174
IndexAdditional Information
Solid Ellipse
The icon for a solid ellipse beam section type looks like this:
When you select Solid Ellipse as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition
dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section
dimensions:
a
b
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for solid ellipse section types. The
figure on the left shows the points for the native mode, and the figure on the right
shows the points for the FEM mode.
1175
Solids
This option enables AutoGEM to create different types of solids after you select one
of the following options:
Tetra Creates a purely tetrahedral mesh. This option is ideal for irregular,
chunky models where none of the other solid element types would be
appropriate.
Wedge, Tetra Creates a mesh that may include tetrahedra, wedges, or
both, based on model geometry. Use this option for models that are at least
partially composed of thin sections (2.5D) with opposing surfaces. AutoGEM
selects the element type that works best in each area of your model, and
finds the most efficient mesh for the geometry. The result will be that the thin
areas of the model will contain wedges and the thick areas will contain
tetrahedra. If you use this option instead of the Tetra option, your element
count may be significantly lower and your solution times, faster.
Brick, Wedge, Tetra Creates a mesh that may include tetrahedra,
wedges, bricks, or any combination of these element types, based on model
geometry. Use this option for models that are at least partially composed of
thin sections (2.5D) with opposing surfaces. AutoGEM selects the element
type that works best in each area of your model, and finds the most efficient
mesh for the geometry. The result will be that the thin areas of the model will
contain wedges or bricks and the thick areas will contain tetrahedra. If you
use this option instead of the Tetra or Wedge, Tetra options, you may be
able to minimize the number of elements in your model and achieve faster
solution times.
Exporting and reviewing the model You export and review a model to
examine its mesh quality, how loads and constraints apply to the mesh, verify
materials, and so forth. We recommend this step before using the exported
deck with an outside solver or running a FEM analysis within Mechanica. While
this step is optional, it provides you the advantage of reviewing the mesh and
model to ensure that you are satisfied before committing to a lengthier solver
run.
Running an analysis You run an analysis by outputting your model,
including one or more analysis definitions, to one of the supported FEA
solvers or by starting a supported solver from within Mechanica.
FEA solvers create a mathematical approximation of the model, its boundary
conditions, and its loads. It then analyzes the structural or thermal integrity of
the model based on the analysis you specified and the way you defined the
simulation features, materials, and mesh.
1176
IndexAdditional Information
In FEM mode, you can perform online runs with the NASTRAN and ANSYS
solvers from within Mechanica, or run either of these solvers in the
background. FEM mode also enables you to output NASTRAN or ANSYS decks
for use outside Mechanica or output the model as a neutral file.
Reviewing results After you run your analyses, you can import the solved
model into Mechanica's postprocessor and review the results. You can
examine such graphical renditions of model behavior as fringe plots,
animations, and graphs, define FEA parameters for your results, review
analysis statistics, and look at results information at particular points in your
model.
See Also
References:
At Point Mechanica calculates the value at the point or points you select.
Maximum Mechanica calculates the maximum value. This option is not
available for Min Principal or Max Abs Principal components.
Minimum Mechanica calculates the minimum value. This option is not
available for Max Principal or Max Abs Principal components.
Maximum Abs Mechanica calculates the value with the greatest absolute
value. This option is not available if you selected Max Principal, Min
Principal, or any of the components for the Fatigue quantity, or if you
selected Magnitude as the component for another quantity.
For the options Maximum, Minimum, and Maximum Abs, a second option menu
appears. For the At Point option, this menu appears as an advanced option only if
you selected Stress, Strain, Failure Index, or Fatigue as your quantity. The menu
contains the following items:
1177
At Point Mechanica calculates the value at the point or points you select.
Maximum Mechanica calculates the maximum value.
Minimum Mechanica calculates the minimum value.
Maximum Abs Mechanica calculates the value with the greatest absolute
value. This option is not available if you selected Magnitude as the
component for your quantity.
Range Mechanica calculates the temperature range. This option is only
available if you selected Temperature as the quantity.
For the options Maximum, Minimum, and Maximum Abs, a second option menu
appears. For the At Point option, this menu appears as an advanced option only if
you selected Temperature Gradient or Heat Flux as your quantity. The menu
contains the following items:
1178
IndexAdditional Information
within the specified radius. This option is not available if you selected At
Point.
Over Selected Idealizations Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the
quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over
the idealizations you select.
Over Selected Components Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the
quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over
the assembly's component you select.
Over Selected Layers Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's
maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over the layers
you select.
Over Selected Geometry Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the
quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over
the geometric entities you select.
entire model or its selected area for the quantity's maximum absolute value.
This value is the largest value, regardless of the sign of the value. For
example, if the model stress ranged from 10 to 25 ksi, the value would be
25 ksi.
This option is inactive if you select Max Principal or Min Principal as the component for
a Stress or Strain quantity. This option is also inactive if you select Magnitude as the
component for one of the other quantities.
1180
IndexAdditional Information
Spherical UCS
When you create a spherical user defined coordinate system, you specify the
coordinates, which include the origin, the direction of the T = 0 (theta = 0) axis, and
the direction of the P = 0 (phi = 0) axis.
Mechanica creates the coordinate system as follows:
Uses the origin and the T = 0 axis location to define the T = 0 axis.
Makes the P = 0 axis perpendicular to the T = 0 axis and in the plane defined
by the origin, the T = 0 axis location, and the P = 0 axis location.
If you specified a P = 0 axis location that is not on a line perpendicular to the
T = 0 axis, Mechanica places the positive P = 0 axis in the direction
perpendicular to the T = 0 axis that is closest to the location you specified.
The P = 0 axis still lies in the same plane in which you placed it:
The positive P = 90 axis is perpendicular to the other axes with the positive
direction determined by the right-hand rule.
Mechanica displays an icon, showing the origin of the new user coordinate system
and the direction of each axis.
The orientation of the icon depends on the axes you entered. Here are two views of
the icon:
1181
Spin
Spin orients the model by spinning it about a specified spin center. The Spin area
contains the following items:
Spin center button Click this button to spin your model using the spin
center axis.
o X Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its x axis.
o Y Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its y axis.
o Z Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its z axis.
Screen center button Click this button to spin your model using the
screen center axis.
o H Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its horizontal
axis.
o V Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its vertical axis.
o C Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its center.
Spin Softening
For prestress modal analyses, Mechanica automatically compensates for the effect of
relative motions when a centrifugal load is present on a model. The software adjusts
the stiffness matrix to account for this effect, which is referred to as spin softening.
The spin softening modification term includes only derivatives of centrifugal loads
that are due to angular velocity, and those with displacements. It does not include
derivatives of centrifugal loads that are due to angular acceleration, nor does it affect
moment terms for beams or shells, or derivatives due to rotations.
Note: Springs are allowed in prestress analysis, but Mechanica does not
compute stress-stiffness effects for springs. For a prestress modal analysis on
a model with centrifugal loads, a spring, and a mass, the system stiffness
decreases due to spin softening, and there is no stress-stiffening for the
spring.
Spring References
You can define the location of a spring on your model by selecting one of the
following reference types from the References area on the Spring Definition
dialog box:
1182
IndexAdditional Information
The points you use for any reference type requiring points can be any of the
following:
The software treats the springs you create from point features or patterns of points
as single entities. You cannot specify different properties for different springs created
from the same point feature or pattern of point features.
Square
The icon for a square beam section type looks like this:
When you select Square as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog
box, you must enter a positive value in the a text-entry box for its cross-section
dimension.
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for square beam section types.
The figure on the left shows the points for the native mode, and the figure on the
right shows the points for the FEM mode.
1183
You can save the version of the model Mechanica creates when you run an offset
study.
1184
IndexAdditional Information
1185
If you use the iterative solver, Mechanica runs a first pass using the block
solver at p=2, followed by a second pass using the iterative solver at p=3.
Using the heat flux error estimate from the second pass, Mechanica performs
a third and final pass.
The polynomial order for beams is 9 for the final pass.
Quick Check (No Convergence) This method is available for all models.
It does not check convergence.
Mechanica performs a single pass analysis with uniform p=3. You can use this
method to verify that you have defined your analysis correctly.
1186
If more than one analysis is available, you can select a different analysis for
your model and send it to the solver. When you click OK on the Run FEM
Analysis dialog box and the system detects an .frd file that already contains
solution results, the system prompts you to decide whether or not to
overwrite the existing results.
o If you select Yes, the system runs the analysis and stores the results
in the present .frd file.
o If you select No, the system prompts for the name of the file where
you want to store the new results. Thus, the original .frd file remains
intact.
You can only retrieve an .frd file that contains results.
You can only retrieve a stored mesh and results file that corresponds to the
current model in session. If the system detects that you modified the model,
it warns you that the model does not correspond to the stored mesh and
terminates the retrieval process. Mechanica only allows changes to the model
that do not cause changes in the mesh. For example, changing the value of a
pressure load is acceptable, but adding or deleting a hard point or a force is
not.
IndexAdditional Information
1187
Almansi strain
Green strain
The Almansi strain tensor e can be defined using the deformation gradient tensor F
and the left Cauchy-Green tensor b, as follows:
The components of strain reported by Mechanica are the engineering strains gij,
defined as follows:
gij = eij , where i = j
gij = 2eij , where i j
1188
IndexAdditional Information
If an optimization study ends with a message in the report file that says
changes in the goal quantity were insignificant relative to its initial value, you
can use local sensitivity to check the goal quantity. Set the start position of
each parameter to the optimized position.
1189
After the sensitivity study completes, graph the goal quantity against each
parameter, and check to see whether the slope of each graph is close to zero.
A slope that is not near zero indicates that the optimization study may not
have reached the optimum goal value. In this case, you may want to redefine
the optimization study and run it again.
If you run the optimization again, use the parameter values from the final
optimum model of the last optimization study as the starting point in the new
study.
You can monitor the progress of the optimization study by selecting the
Info>Status command on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box.
The summary file gives you a running account of the optimization process,
with comments and warnings as the Structure engine searches the design
space.
IndexAdditional Information
3. If the two sets of displacements are in good agreement, then the problem
was linear. If however, the two sets of displacements are not reasonable
ratios of each other, then the problem is non-linear.
As an example, consider a circular aluminum plate, 1 mm thick, 200 mm in
diameter, pinned at its circumference and subject to a uniform pressure load.
Pressure
Load
0.005 MPa
0.0001 MPa
Maximum Displacement of
Initially Flat Plate
Maximum Displacement of
Initially Curved Plate
4.58 mm
0.026 mm
0.0916 mm
0.0888 mm
For the plate subject to a pressure load of 0.005 MPa, results are non-linear. To
make physical sense, the displacement of the initially curved plate should not be 200
times less than that of the initially flat plate.
Results for the plate subject to a pressure load of 0.0001 MPa show displacement
results for the initially curved plate just 3% less than for the initially flat plate. Thus,
at this very small pressure, linear analysis is a fairly good approximation.
For the response to be linear, the general rule for plates and shells is that the
deflection should be less than the thickness.
1191
If you decide to return a graph to its original state, use the Format Graph dialog
box to re-enter the original settings.
IndexAdditional Information
Define and show a fringe plot of the p-level. This will show the polynomial
level to which Mechanica calculated to reach convergence for each edge. If
one or two elements went to much higher p-levels than the rest, you should
try dividing those elements by adding datum points in that location to seed
the mesh.
If an element did not reach convergence at the location where a load, heat
load, constraint, convection condition, or prescribed temperature is applied on
a point, or at a small feature of significance, you should be sure you have the
appropriate point options selected in the Feature Isolation area of the
AutoGEM Settings dialog box. Proper use of these options enables AutoGEM
to create small elements surrounding the point or near the small feature.
Check the convergence value you entered when you defined the analysis. If
that value is too tight, especially if it is below 1%, you should try loosening it.
Check the polynomial order you entered when you defined the analysis. If the
maximum is lower than 9, you should try increasing it.
If you are primarily interested in a quantity other than the convergence
quantity, check if that quantity converged. You only need to rerun the study if
the quantity of interest did not converge or come close to converging.
See Also
Strategy:
1193
Define and run an analysis using the quick check convergence option. With
this option, the engine runs the analysis at a polynomial order of 3. You can
then check stress and deformation results for structural analyses, or
temperature gradient and flux results for thermal analyses. These results can
reveal problems in the model, such as cracks or missing loads and
constraints.
Then, you might want to consider running an analysis with reduced tolerance
or reduced maximum polynomial order values. For example, if the model is
large and it would require several hours to achieve 10% convergence,
consider first setting convergence to 20% and the maximum p-order to 6.
Once the run is complete, review a fringe plot of the p-level reached by each
edge. For edges that reach the maximum p-order, you may want to make the
following changes:
o
o
o
There will not be enough machine RAM for other important data. For example,
Mechanica allocates many large, non-solver memory areas that will cause
excessive swapping unless you leave enough spare machine RAM.
Except for the solver, Mechanica allocates memory for other operations as
needed. These other memory allocations can become large and, in
combination, are often larger than the solram allocation. Even for computers
with very large machine RAM, if you set the solram value too high, you may
force the other memory areas used by Mechanica out of RAM and into swap
space.
There will not be enough RAM for the operating system to do disk caching.
Disk caching improves file system performance by holding file data in RAM for
faster access.
Setting solram to 0.5 times machine RAM is usually the best compromise between
reducing the amount of disk I/O and leaving enough machine RAM for disk caching
and for other data. By limiting the solram allocation to half the machine RAM or less,
you greatly increase your chances of achieving optimal performance. If there is too
much demand on machine RAM and swap space, system performance can be
severely degraded. In this situation, decreasing solver RAM can increase overall
system performance.
1194
IndexAdditional Information
Define a p-level plot for that analysis and use Dynamic Query to identify the
locations of the edges with maximum p-levels.
Consider whether the high p-level is due to a local singularity. If so, you can
address the problem by spreading the constraints or loads over a larger area
or excluding noncritical elements from the convergence check.
If these techniques are not an option, then break up the model into smaller
elements in the critical areas that did not converge. Although this method can
be tedious, it is a reliable way of improving convergence.
1195
Note that in the positive direction of the beam element, positive Fx acts in the
positive normal X direction. However, in the negative direction of the beam element,
positive Fx acts in the negative normal X direction. The resultant moments follow the
same sign convention.
Applying this resultant force and moment convention to a typical example, note how
the results of a beam model solved in Structure relate to a free-body diagram.
In the cut section, the resultant forces Fy and moment couple Mz act to maintain
equilibrium. In beam a, Fy is negative while, in beam b, Fy is positive. Mz is negative
1196
IndexAdditional Information
in both beams. Structure always reports values for the resultant forces and moments
for the positive direction of the free-body diagram.
The X axis for beams is along the length of the beam, with the positive X direction
determined when you select the beam references. To find the positive beam
direction, look at the orientation of the beam icon axes. The beam icon displays the Y
and Z axes for the BSCS. You can determine the positive X direction using the righthand rule.
Since Mechanica reports resultant values based on the positive beam direction,
review the orientation of the BSCS before running an analysis to ensure that results
will make sense to you. If the orientation is reversed, the sign of resultant forces and
moments will change.
Sometimes, when trying to avoid element singularities, you impose too few
constraints. In these cases, a run may end with an error message in the summary
file indicating that your model is insufficiently constrained. For more information on
how to address this condition, see Insufficiently Constrained Models.
1197
Each step of a global sensitivity study can take almost as much time as a
standard run of the same model. Take this into account when you specify the
number of intervals. A greater number of intervals will require longer run
time.
The key result you obtain from a global sensitivity study is a sensitivity graph
that indicates which values of the design parameters correspond to less mass,
higher stress, higher frequency, or lower flux, and so forth. This information
serves as a guide to help you improve the design.
By looking at sensitivity graphs for measures you plan to use for the
optimization goal and limits, you can determine which parameters are likely
to have the most effect on those measures. You can also determine the
portion of a parameter's range that has the most effect on the measures.
1198
IndexAdditional Information
Only a single user is using the computer at the time of the run.
The computer is equipped with a fast disk, ample memory, and individual
processors that are fast in and of themselves.
The ratio of elapsed time to CPU time is close to a value of 1 with one CPU.
Your model is large, solid, and blocky in shape.
Even if these conditions are present, your elapsed run time might improve only
slightly when you run the engine in parallel processing mode because parallel
processing accelerates just a few phases of the overall solution process.
The main disadvantage of parallel processing is that, if you are running other jobs at
the same time as Mechanica, you can experience performance bottlenecks. Thus,
unless you expect substantial gains from using all CPUs in your system for the
engine or you have no other jobs planned for your system during the engine run,
you may want to limit the number of CPUs dedicated to the engine.
If you do not want to use all of the CPUs in your system for the engine job, you can
set the environment variable MEC_NUM_THREADS to the anticipated number of idle
CPUs on the machine. For example, on a 4-CPU machine with one CPU-intensive job
running in addition to the parallel job, set MEC_NUM_THREADS to 3.
Note that Mechanica does not support parallel processing on the HP 32-bit platform.
radius
omega2
You can correct for this by creating a load set that contains only the centrifugal load
and rerunning the analysis with this load set. Then, determine the total load resulting
from the centrifugal load set. Using this information, you can determine the true
1199
scale factor you need to enter to achieve the desired load scaling. To determine the
scale factor, apply the following formula:
scale value = (WN/WE)2
Where WN is the acceleration or velocity specified in the load definition and WE is the
acceleration or velocity you want to achieve through scaling.
In either case, the best solution is to refine the mesh through the AutoGEM
Settings dialog box, recreate the mesh, and rerun the analysis. You can use items
on the AutoGEM Settings dialog box to divide the elements near the local effects,
such as concentrated loads, cracks, reentrant corners, and thickness discontinuities
between shells.
If this proves difficult, increasing the maximum polynomial order is an alternative.
(But if you require high polynomial levels in areas of interest, you should consider
refining your mesh). With smaller elements, convergence is more likely to occur and
thus will ensure better results in the areas of interest.
For transient thermal analyses, if you suddenly switch on heat loads and convection
conditions, your changes will adversely affect analysis convergence. If all heat loads
and convection conditions are smooth functions that are zero at the start of the
analysis, the engine will generally select smaller values for the p-orders. For more
information on how to smooth these functions, see Ramping of Heat Loads and
Convection Conditions.
See Also
Procedure:
1200
IndexAdditional Information
1201
Measures you might want to graph include strain_energy or max_disp_mag for static
analyses, modal_frequency for modal analyses, and energy_norm,
max_temperature, or max_flux_mag for thermal analyses.
Note that if an analysis converges on local displacement and strain energy or local
temperatures and local energy norms, the stress or flux values may not converge.
The following graph shows that maximum von Mises stress values are still increasing
as of the final p-pass and, therefore, did not converge.
1202
IndexAdditional Information
Tip: To facilitate convergence, create a layer of small elements around features that
exhibit high stress or flux concentrations. For more information, see Singularities.
1203
Before running a local sensitivity study, use Shape Review. Set the value for
each parameter to the starting position you plan to use. Then use the Review
menu to check the shape of the model at those settings.
Before running a global sensitivity study, use Shape Animate and set the
values for each parameter to the range you plan to use for the study. Then
review an animation of the model's changes across each of those ranges.
Before running an optimization study, use Shape Review to review all
parameters at their starting positions. You can also use Shape Review to
look at combinations of parameters you think could create possible shape
change conflicts.
For example, if setting the radius of a curve to 100% of its range while
setting the translation of that curve to 0% of its range could cause the
geometry to significantly change its shape, review the shape using that
combination.
Then use Shape Animate to vary your parameters across different ranges
and in different combinations to find any problems the engine might
encounter while optimizing the model.
At a minimum, animate your model across the entire range of each parameter
you plan to include in the optimization study.
You can also use the results of local and global sensitivity studies to predict
how the engine might change particular design parameters to achieve your
goal. Use this information to set the parameter ranges for your optimization
study.
Stress Grids
When you click the arrow beside Stress Grids on the Beam Section Definition
dialog box for general beam sections, the dialog box expands to display a table of
text-entry boxes. Enter the Y Offset and Z Offset values for stress recovery points
for your section. You can define y and z values for up to nine points for the native
mode, and four in the FEM mode. You must specify values in the stress grid in order
to view results for beam recovery points.
1204
IndexAdditional Information
If your model is made up of brick, wedge, or tetrahedral elements that have the
same isotropic materials, Mechanica uses a different calculation that increases the
rate of stress convergence, yielding more accurate stress results at a lower
polynomial order.
Mechanica does not use this algorithm to compute the stresses in models made up
of:
non-isotropic materials
more than one material property
non-solid elements (the algorithm is used for solids in the same model)
In reporting stress results, if identical positive and negative stresses are the highest
stresses, Mechanica reports the positive stress. If the negative value is slightly
higher than the positive value, Mechanica still reports the positive value.
Isotropic
Orthotropic
Transversely Isotropic
These symmetries are independent for Structure and Thermal. A material may have
isotopic structural properties and orthotropic thermal properties.
The Mechanica library contains isotropic materials only. Also, if you selected
Edge/Curve as a geometry type, the Orthotropic and Transversely Isotropic
options are inactive.
1206
IndexAdditional Information
The difference between the entity temperature value and the reference temperature
is the amount of temperature change over the model.
See Also
Procedure:
The UCS Z axis must be parallel to the WCS Z axis. (In Pro/ENGINEER, the
UCS Z axis must be parallel to the reference UCS Z axis.)
The UCS origin must lie in the WCS Z=0 plane.
Mechanica does not report reaction force data at constrained points and edges when
the constraint is associated to a UCS.
In FEM mode, there may be a conflict between your constraint coordinate systems
and coordinate systems associated with connections and mesh controls.
You can add datum points within Mechanica as you define your constraints. These
datum points are available for your Mechanica sessions only. They are not visible on
your part or assembly while you are working at the Pro/ENGINEER level.
As an alternative, you can add datum points to your model in Pro/ENGINEER before
entering Mechanica. In the latter case, the datum points are available for all your
Pro/ENGINEER sessions as well.
Any point, curve, or surface you constrain must be associated with at least
one element. To check associations with geometry that will be meshed, click
the constraint icon on the model or select the constraint in the Model Tree.
Mechanica highlights the constraint icon and associated geometry.
A structure boundary condition defined at a point or on a curve can result in
theoretically infinite stresses. See Handling Stress Concentrations for
information on working around this problem.
Any constrained curve constrains the edges, beams, or 2D shells that lie on
that curve.
Any constrained surface constrains the shells, solid faces, 2D solids, or 2D
plates that lie on that surface.
Any constrained edge constrains the beams and 2D shells that lie on that
edge.
1208
If you place a load on a curve, the load applies to any edges associated with
that curve.
IndexAdditional Information
If you place a load on a surface, the load applies to any elements associated
with that surface.
A point load can create theoretically infinite stresses (for structural loads) or
fluxes (for heat loads) on a shell, solid, 2D solid, or 2D plate. A curve or edge
load on a solid element can create theoretically infinite stresses (for structural
loads) or fluxes (for heat loads).
For a 2D plane strain model a point represents a line. You can apply a load to
a point as either a total load or as a load per unit length using the Total Load
or Load Per Unit Length options, respectively. Because the depth of the
model is considered to be unity, these two options are equivalent.
For a 2D axisymmetric model, a point represents a circle. You can apply a
load to a point as either a total load or as a load per unit length using the
Total Load or Load Per Unit Length options, respectively. For example, if
you specify a load of 100 pounds per unit length, the total load on the entire
circle will be 100
r pounds, where r is the radius of the circle. But if you
specify a load of 100 pounds as the total load, then the total load remains
100 pounds.
Forces and moments applied to points You can select single points,
vertices, point features, or patterns of points. Be aware that force and
moment loads applied to points can introduce high stress concentrations in
your model.
Interpolated loads If you want to apply an interpolated load, you may
need to add datum points for the software to use when calculating load
variations.
Interpolated surface loads require between two and four datum points. You do
not need to add datum points for interpolated curve loads because the
software uses the end points of the curve as default interpolation points. If
you do not want to use the end points, you can add up to four datum points
to the curve.
Total load at point (TLAP) If you want to apply a total load to a single
point, use this option. This creates a distributed load that is statically
equivalent to a resultant load at a point.
Vector-based or axis-based loads If you want to apply a load that
requires a vector, such as a bearing load, you can define the vector using
coordinates or by picking datum points. If you choose the datum point
method, you must define two datum points to indicate vector direction.
Axis-based loads, such as centrifugal loads, also require two datum points if
you want to define the axis using datum points instead of coordinates.
Resultant loads If you want to review a resultant load, you need to add
datum points at the locations for which you want the software to calculate a
resultant load.
1209
For most loads, you can add datum points within Mechanica as you define the load.
These datum points will be available for your Mechanica sessions only. They are not
visible on your part or assembly while you are working at the Pro/ENGINEER level.
As an alternative, you can add datum points to your model in Pro/ENGINEER before
entering Mechanica. In the latter case, the datum points will be available for all your
Pro/ENGINEER sessions as well.
1210
IndexAdditional Information
Entity type check boxes Use these check boxes to suppress individual
load, constraint, or boundary condition types. There is a check box for each
kind of entity you can suppress for the type of set you are working with. As
an example, if you are working with a boundary condition set, the dialog box
provides Temperature, Convection, and Radiation check boxes.
1211
which problem you want to solve and open the associated model instance,
working through the problem in that instance only.
When working in a family table instance, be aware that Mechanica promotes
any modeling entity you create within an instance to the generic model.
However, the modeling entity appears as suppressed, and you must resume
the entity if you want to use it in the generic model or any of the other
instances.
Note: When you are working in Mechanica, you can only add simulation
modeling entities to the family table. You cannot add Pro/ENGINEER
values, features, components, or parameters. You also cannot create
new family table instances while you work in Mechanica.
See Also
References:
Surface-Surface Gaps
Keep the following points in mind if you want to create gaps between two surfaces:
1212
When you select two surfaces as the gap references, Mechanica creates gaps
between each of the mesh nodes. In the figure below, Mechanica applied a
boundary mesh to an assembly with offset-mated surfaces. The purple lines
represent the gaps between the mesh nodes.
IndexAdditional Information
If you select the Per Unit Area option under Distribution when you define
your surfacesurface gap, the software uses the total area of the first surface
that you select to calculate the axial and transverse stiffness values.
However, if the two surfaces that you select only partially overlap, the
software first determines the portion of the first surface area that it can use
to form a coincident mesh during meshing, and uses that area for the
calculation of stiffness values. For example, in the illustration above, if you
first selected the top surface on the lower, smaller box for your surface
surface gap definition, Mechanica would designate that surface for the Per
Unit Area calculation. The actual value the software uses in the calculation
would consist of only that surface area with the purple gap icons.
A gap can be applied between two surfaces in a model containing shells
compressed to midsurfaces. If you specify your model as a midsurface shell
model, and the first surface you select for your gap undergoes midsurface
compression to an edge, the software uses the area of the surface before
compression for the distribution calculation.
Native mode
FEM mode
1213
your model. For more information about the systems of units provided in
Pro/ENGINEER, see Predefined Systems of Units.
The following buttons appear on the Systems Of Units tab:
See Also
Procedures:
1214
Create hard point mesh controls for all pre-meshed components as soon as is
practical. If you create hard points early in the design process, you may be
able to avoid remeshing individual components solely to make the mesh
account for the hard points.
Create beam, spring, and gap idealizations, as well as rigid and weighted links
for the top-level assembly before meshing the component. If you create the
idealizations first, you may find placement of the hard points easier because
you have already established where the connections will lie.
If you want to connect two pre-meshed components to each other, be sure
you have hard points on both components.
If you want to establish geometrically-consistent node locations for two
touching components, you can create exactly matched points on the premeshed component and the component you want to connect it to. You then
use zero-length advanced springs to connect the points. This technique works
best if you follow a specific process.
IndexAdditional Information
Be sure that the connections you create do not conflict with the physical
design of the assembly. For example, if you have two pre-meshed
components that share a surface region, you should make sure the
connections line up properly for the shared region.
Temperature Distribution
Mechanica checks if a temperature load exists for an analysis that depends on it.
1215
See Also
Procedure:
These additional items appear on the tab only if you select MecT for Distribution:
1216
Use Temperatures From Previous Design Study You can select this
check box option if you want to use temperature results from a previously run
steady thermal analysis for the initial temperature in your transient thermal
analysis. If this option is not selected, Mechanica runs the steady thermal
analysis as part of running the transient thermal analysis.
Design Study If you selected the option Use Temperatures From
Previous Design Study, select a design study to include in the transient
thermal analysis.
Thermal Analysis Select a steady thermal analysis.
Load Set Select a load set.
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedure:
Thermal Measures
Mechanica uses one or more measures to determine convergence. Select Measures
for convergence if you are interested either in results for one or more specific
quantities, such as maximum flux magnitude, or in results at a particular location,
such as a boundary condition or local flux concentration.
Using Measures can help improve accuracy for the quantities in which you are
interested, and may also lower the computation time for your design study.
When you select Measures as the convergence option, the Measures button
becomes available. Click this button to select thermal measures from the Measures
dialog box. You can select any global or local thermal measures.
For more information about measures in general, see About Simulation Measure.
Isotropic
Orthotropic
Transversely Isotropic
1217
The Mechanica library contains isotropic materials only. Also, if you selected
Edge/Curve as a geometry type, the Orthotropic and Transversely Isotropic
options are inactive.
Specific Heat Enter a positive value for the material's specific heat.
Thermal Conductivity Enter a positive value for the material's
conductivity. To specify thermal conductivity, you can type in a value or click
the P button to assign a parameter name.
1218
Specific Heat Enter a positive value for the material's specific heat.
IndexAdditional Information
Specific Heat Enter a positive value for the material's specific heat.
Thermal Conductivity Enter positive values for these two aspects of the
material's conductivity:
o k1
o k2=k3
These values represent the conductivity in each of the three principal material directions
of the model.
To specify thermal conductivity, you can type in a value or click the P button to assign a
parameter name.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the ply for the material you are defining. The thickness may
be zero, in which case Mechanica ignores the layer.
Note: The sub-laminate thickness may depend on the current values of
parameters.
The entry box for thickness is parameter-capable. Right-click in the Thickness field
of the Shell Property Definition dialog box and select Parameter from the menu.
When Mechanica creates the shell elements for the plies, it calculates the total,
combined thickness of all the plies and applies the plies so that the total thickness is
distributed equally on both sides of the selected surface. For example, let us say you
specify three plies with thicknesses as follows:
Ply 1 thickness = 2
Ply 2 thickness = 7
Ply 3 thickness = 4
1219
In this case, the total thickness of all three plies is 13 so Mechanica places 6.5 of the
thickness on the top of the surface and 6.5 on the bottom. Thus, 4.5 of ply 2's
thickness lies atop the surface and 2.5 of ply 2's thickness lies below.
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Graph Quantity Ties the quantity data on the Y axes of two graphs.
Graph Location Ties the location data on the X axes of two graphs.
Graph Both Ties the data on both axes of two graphs.
After you select one of the Tie commands, select another graph result window.
Mechanica sets up a new interval for the data on each axis that works for both result
windows. This may involve changing one or both graphs. Mechanica redraws either
graph for which the interval has changed.
For more information on these commands, see Guidelines for Tying Graphs.
1220
IndexAdditional Information
For a description of how to tie a group of graph windows together so that they all
share a common range, see Tie Multiple Graph Result Windows.
See Also
Procedures:
At Each Step
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum Absolute
At Time Mechanica calculates the value of a measure at a time you
specify. The measure is calculated for transient thermal analyses.
1221
At Each Step
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum Absolute
RMS Mechanica calculates the RMS (root mean square) value of the
measure over the frequency range and reports this value in the summary file.
This option is only available if you selected At Point as the spatial evaluation
method.
Apparent Frequency Mechanica determines the effective frequency of a
PSD output by integrating over the frequency range and reports this value in
the summary file.
Mechanica calculates apparent frequency by averaging the number of zero-crossings for
the PSD output. The apparent frequency is equivalent to the frequency of a sine wave
that crosses zero the same number of times.
This option is only available if you select At Point as the spatial evaluation method.
Time Range
Specify a minimum and a maximum time for the time range that defines the start
and finish time for the analysis. In Mechanica, all of the predefined systems of units
measure conductivity in seconds.
The units you use to measure time must be consistent with your system of units and
the units for measuring conductivity. For example, if you want to measure
conductivity in BTUs per hour, you may need to change your system of units.
For more information, see Time Range Specification.
1222
IndexAdditional Information
Time Range
Enter the minimum and maximum times for the range over which you want
Mechanica to report results for a dynamic time analysis. The impulse load is applied
at the minimum time.
The minimum time must be greater than or equal to 0.
The default maximum time is Automatic, which is three times the period of the first
mode. If you use the Automatic option, the range will cover three oscillations for
the first mode.
If you select the User-defined option, you can enter a value for the maximum time.
Time Stamp
This item is available only if you select Maximum, Minimum, or Maximum
Absolute as a time evaluation option. If you select Time Stamp, Mechanica
automatically creates a measure that saves the time at which a minimum,
maximum, or maximum absolute condition occurs.
For dynamic analyses, if you do not create any time- or frequency-based measures,
be sure not to select Automatic Intervals within Range for the results output
when you define your analysis. Otherwise, some dynamic analyses will not produce
any results.
Time/Frequency Eval
Activate the optional Dynamic Evaluation menu, which you use to select a time or
frequency evaluation method.
If you select the Time/Frequency Eval check box, Mechanica calculates the
measure for dynamic time and dynamic frequency analyses. Mechanica also
calculates the measure for dynamic random analyses provided you base the measure
on a directional component and take the measure at a point. Note that if you select
1223
Failure Index as the quantity, Mechanica calculates the measure for dynamic time
analyses only.
For most quantities, if you do not select Time/Frequency Eval, Mechanica
calculates the measure for dynamic shock, static, prestress static, and contact
analyses.
Maximum, Minimum,
Maximum Abs
RMS, Apparent
Frequency
At Time
The selection you make on the Time/Frequency Eval option menu determines in
what type of analysis you can use the measure.
Analysis Type
At Each Step
Maximum, Minimum
At Time
At Each Step
Maximum, Minimum
At Each Step
RMS
Apparent Frequency
1224
IndexAdditional Information
For models with a large number of elements, you should look at your results
on a contour plot before attempting a fringe plot. Drawing a fringe plot for a
large model can be time-consuming. You save time by using a contour plot to
view results data.
If you want to display fringe and contour result windows that match exactly,
enter one less number of contour levels than fringe levels.
Titles
Use this command to turn on and off the title of a result window, or to edit the text
of the title. The title appears centered at the bottom of the window. You can include
a title and a subtitle in this block.
When you select Titles, you also select a result window if you are displaying more
than one. Mechanica then toggles the title display in that result window.
To edit the title, use the Edit>Result Window command.
Any change you make to the title with this command stays with the result window
until you either edit the window definition or close the Results user interface.
If you have the title block displayed when you print your work area, it appears in the
printed copy.
See Also
Procedure:
To Set Titles
1225
5. To display or turn off the leader arrow at the end of the leader line, select or
clear the Display Leader Arrow check box.
6. To draw a circle, square, or multiline shape on the result window, select
, or
and use your mouse to create the desired shape.
7. To make changes to the font, text box, leader, arrow, or mouse sketch styles,
click the Style button.
The Note Style dialog box appears.
8. When you finish making all changes to the annotation and styles, click OK.
IndexAdditional Information
2. Click New.
The Material Definition dialog box appears.
3. Select the Structural tab.
4. Verify that Isotropic is selected for the material type. You can use only
isotropic materials for fatigue analysis.
5. Select the Fatigue tab.
6. Enter a value for Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS).
7. If you want to change the units for UTS, select the units from the list to the
right.
8. Select a Material Type.
9. Select a Surface Finish.
10. Enter a value for Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor (Kf).
Default values display all icons without names and show icons when you spin
your model. All load and constraint icons appear in individual colors, and load
icons are not scaled or displayed with heads touching.
3. Change any of the default values.
4. Select OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.
1227
See Also
Reference:
About Beams
1228
IndexAdditional Information
5. If you selected UCS as your surface definition method, use the selector arrow
to select the desired coordinate system.
6. For all surface definition methods except Isosurfaces, select XY, YZ, or ZX
as the reference plane.
7. Select Above or Below to indicate which side of the capping surface
Mechanica should trim.
8. Enter the depth of the cut along the axis normal to the plane. If you want
Mechanica to calculate the value you enter as a percentage rather than an
absolute value, select the % check box.
9. Click OK to close the dialog box.
See Also
Procedure:
References:
Predefined Units
Systems of Units Management
1229
See Also
Procedure:
Reference:
Predefined Units
1230
IndexAdditional Information
6. For all surface definition methods except Isosurfaces, select XY, YZ, or ZX
as the reference plane.
7. Enter the depth of the cut along the axis normal to the plane. If you want
Mechanica to calculate the value you enter as a percentage rather than an
absolute value, select the % check box.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box.
See Also
Procedure:
Standard
Global Sensitivity
Local Sensitivity
Optimization
1231
1232
IndexAdditional Information
To Create an Interface
1. Select the Insert>Connection>Interface command.
The Interface Definition dialog box appears.
7. Click OK.
1234
IndexAdditional Information
1235
To Create Shells
1. Select the Insert>Shell command or click
1236
IndexAdditional Information
1237
1238
IndexAdditional Information
1239
o
o
Mechanica does not check Pro/ENGINEER parameters to determine which ones are
dependent. Rather, the software displays all Pro/ENGINEER parameters defined as
relations or defined with Real Number as the Type.
4. Review the list box at the bottom of the dialog box to determine which types
of analyses are valid for the measure.
5. Click OK. Each of the custom measures shows up on the Measures dialog
box.
See Also
1240
IndexAdditional Information
Reference:
IndexAdditional Information
2. To display the fringe in continuous tones rather than discrete colors, select
Continuous Tone.
3. Enter the number of legend levels to display or accept the default.
4. To include displacements or deformation when you display your model, select
Deformed.
5. To display the edges of the elements in your model, select Show Element
Edges.
6. To animate your results, select Animate.
1243
1244
IndexAdditional Information
Select an item from the second option menu to complete the phase type.
Select one of the following components: Magnitude, X, Y, Z.
For the components X, Y, and Z, select a coordinate system.
Select a spatial evaluation.
With the arrow button, select a point or appropriate reference entities as
required by your selection for spatial evaluation.
Select a dynamic evaluation method.
If you want to know the time at which a minimum, maximum, or maximum
absolute condition occurs, select the Time Stamp checkbox.
Review the list box at the bottom of the dialog box to determine which types
of analyses are valid for the measure.
Click OK. Each of the custom measures shows up on the Measures dialog
box.
1245
3. Select the desired boundary condition set from the Member of Set dropdown list.
4. If you want to create a new boundary condition set, click the New button to
display the BC Set Definition dialog box. Enter a name and optional
description for a new constraint set.
under
5. If you did not select surfaces before entering the dialog box, click
References and use the normal selection methods to select one or more
surfaces on your model.
6. Select one of the following to specify the Spatial Variation for the
Emissivity:
Uniform
Function of Coordinates Click f (x) to open the Functions dialog
box.
Select Reaction from the Quantity option menu on the Quantity tab.
Select a secondary quantity from the secondary quantity option menu.
Select a component from the Component menu.
Select an option from the Relative To option menu.
If you select Graph from the Display Type option menu, select an option
from the Graph Location option menu, then use the selector arrow to select
the location from your model.
IndexAdditional Information
All
Beams
Curves
Surfaces
Volumes
Components/Layers
3. Click the selector arrow to select one or more entities on your model of the
location type you selected.
1248
IndexAdditional Information
Select Shell Resultant from the Quantity option menu on the Quantity tab.
Select a secondary quantity from the secondary quantity option menu.
Select a component from the Component menu.
If you select a directional component, select an option from the Relative To
option menu.
1249
2. If beams are present in the design study, make the appropriate selections in
the Include Contribution From Beams area.
3. If shells are present in the design study, make the appropriate selections in
the Include Contribution From Shells area.
4. If you select Graph from the Display Type option menu, select an option
from the Graph Location option menu, then use the selector arrow to select
the location from your model.
Select a component.
For the components XX, YY, ZZ, XY, YZ, and XZ, select a coordinate system.
Select a spatial evaluation.
With the arrow button, select points and appropriate reference entities as
required by your selection for spatial evaluation.
If you selected Near Point for spatial evaluation, enter a radius value.
If you want to define a dynamic analysis, select a time or frequency
evaluation.
Review the list box at the bottom of the dialog box to determine which types
of analyses are valid for the measure.
Click OK. Each of the custom measures shows up on the Measures dialog
box.
IndexAdditional Information
1251
Click the arrow button to select a measure from the Measures dialog box.
Select First Occurrence or Last Occurrence.
Select Greater Than or Less Than.
Enter a value for the measure in the text box.
Review the list box at the bottom of the dialog box to determine which types
of analyses are valid for the measure.
6. Click OK. Each of the custom measures shows up on the Measures dialog
box.
1252
IndexAdditional Information
1253
1254
IndexAdditional Information
1. Select a spring property from the drop-down list. If you do not see the spring
property you want, click More to define a new spring property.
2. If you are creating the fastener with hole edges as references, select a
separation option from the Fix Separation option menu.
3. If you are creating the fastener with hole edges as references and want to
include a preload, select the Include Preload check box.
4. Enter a real-number value, parameter name, or expression for the following
fields in the Include Preload area:
Preload Force
Fastener Head and Nut Diameter
Separation Test Diameter
5. Click OK.
The fastener icon appears at the fastener location.
5. If you defined more than one analysis of the relevant type, use the Select
button to select the analysis you want.
6. If you included more than one load set for a static, prestress static, or steadystate thermal analysis, use the Select button to select a different load set.
7. If you selected a modal and prestress modal analysis, select a mode number.
8. If you want Mechanica to track a specific mode shape, select Track.
1255
3. Select the measure you want to minimize or maximize and click OK.
Mechanica returns you to the Design Study Definition dialog box.
4. Select a mathematical operator (<, >, or =) and enter a value for the
selected measure in the same row as the measure name.
Tip: You can enter a numerical value or c for the current value.
5. If you defined more than one analysis of the relevant type, use the Select
button to select the analysis you want.
6. If you included more than one load set for a static, prestress static, or steadystate thermal analysis, use the Select button to select a different load set.
7. If you selected a modal and prestress modal analysis, select a mode number.
8. If you want Mechanica to track a specific mode shape, select Track.
Repeat steps 2 through 9, and any subsequent steps that apply, for each measure
you selected as a limit.
IndexAdditional Information
2. Enter in the Desired Endurance field the number of life cycles you want to
include in the analysis.
3. Select a loading typeConstant Amplitude or Variable Amplitude.
Different options appear on the tab depending on the loading type you select.
4. If you selected Constant Amplitude, select one of the following options for
Amplitude Type:
o
o
o
PeakPeak
ZeroPeak
User-Defined
5. If you selected User-Defined in step 4, enter values for Min Load Factor
and Max Load Factor.
6. If you selected the loading type Variable Amplitude in step 3, enter a load
factor for each row in the table to define the amplitude curve for one life
cycle.
You can use the Add Row button to add rows to the table, or the Delete and
Clear All buttons to remove rows.
You also can import the load factor data from a text file directly into the table.
Click the Import button and then select the file from the Open File dialog
box.
To Delete Parameters
You can delete a model's obsolete FEA results-based parameters as desired. If you
do so, be sure to delete or edit any relation that references deleted parameters.
If you want to create or delete parameters for your results, you must obtain your
results from an .frd file. To obtain results from an .frd file, you must use the
File>Open FEM Results command or run a FEM solver online and look at the
1257
results available immediately after the run completes. You cannot create or delete
parameters if you select Analysis>Results instead of using one of these two
methods.
1. Select File>Open FEM Results and select the result file for the current
model. As an alternative, perform an online FEM solver run.
Mechanica displays the RESULTS menu.
1258
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedure:
References:
About Results
Troubleshoot Run Problems
1259
See Also
Procedures:
See Also
Procedures:
1260
IndexAdditional Information
1262
IndexAdditional Information
8. If you have selected a contour result window only and want to toggle contour
labels, click Contour Labels.
9. Click OK.
IndexAdditional Information
2. To redefine the surface definition method, select a method from the Define
By option menu.
3. If you changed your surface definition method to Three Points, use the
selector arrow to select three points.
4. If you changed your surface definition method to UCS, use the selector arrow
to select the desired coordinate system.
5. If you want to redefine the reference plane orientation, select XY, YZ, or ZX,
as appropriate.
6. If you want to change the cutting surface depth, use one of the following
methods:
o Manually change the depth by entering a new value in the Depth
entry box.
o Dynamically change the depth by clicking Dynamic and dragging the
mouse to increase or decrease the depth. Click the middle mouse
button when you are finished repositioning the cutting surface.
Mechanica updates the Depth value on the Results Surface Definition dialog box to
reflect your change.
2. Modify the dimensions you want to change and repaint the work area.
The offset coordinate system updates.
Top
Right
Left
4. Use the SEL PARAM menu to select the parameters that you want to display
or save.
5. Complete the selection process and close the SEL PARAM menu and display
or save the parameter information.
1266
IndexAdditional Information
2. Select a system of units from the list on the Systems Of Units tab.
3. Click the Info button.
The Information Window appears displaying units information for the selected system
of units. You can scroll down or sideways for more information.
See Also
Procedure:
1267
See Also
Procedure:
3. Select one of the following options from the Run Mode Choice dialog box:
o Run in Current Session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables you to
observe the effects of the parameter changes and reduces the analysis
run time. While the study is running, you cannot work in this session
of Pro/ENGINEER.
o Run in Separate Session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables you to
continue working in the current session of Pro/ENGINEER while
Mechanica runs the design study. You will not be able to observe
parameter changes until either the study is complete or you interrupt
it.
4. Select Run to start the analysis.
5. When the study is complete, you can choose to keep the new values or return
to the original values.
1268
IndexAdditional Information
You can check to see if the regeneration analysis is complete by looking for a
directory named regenerate in the directory from which you launched
Mechanica.
See Also
Procedures:
See Also
Procedure:
To Segment a Graph
This procedure assumes you have selected a graph results window.
1. Select the Segment Graph command.
2. Select the first graph segment point.
3. Select the second point.
Mechanica redraws the graph.
4. If necessary, you can do one of the following for the next step:
o Segment the graph further.
o Use Full Graph to restore the original graph.
See Also
Procedures:
1270
IndexAdditional Information
1.
2.
3.
4.
4. If you selected For All Modes in step 3, enter a value without a % symbol
for the damping coefficient you want to assign to all modes.
5. If you selected For Individual Modes in step 3, enter damping coefficient
values for each mode in the list that appears for this option.
You can use the Fill button to change all zero values to the percent value immediately
above them. Use the Clear button to change all values to zero.
See Also
Procedures:
1271
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedures:
1273
See Also
Procedures:
1274
IndexAdditional Information
The table displays numbered rows representing the number of intervals you
selected.
8. Use the default values for each interval to specify the spacing between
intervals or click the User-defined Steps button to enter values.
If you click User-defined Steps, you can use the Space Equally button to
evenly space the steps.
9. Select the Full Results check boxes next to the intervals for which you want
to save full temperature and flux results.
10. Select the Temp Load check boxes next to the intervals for which you want
to save temperature load data for importing a thermal load or a temperature
field into Structure.
You can also click
intervals or click
1275
See Also
Procedure:
1276
IndexAdditional Information
Reference:
See Also
References:
About Units
Guidelines for Specifying Units
Predefined Systems of Units
1277
See Also
Procedures:
Strategy:
Improving Convergence
IndexAdditional Information
o
o
Single-Pass Adaptive
Quick Check
Note: If you are creating a steady thermal analysis and selected
Multi-Pass Adaptive, continue with the following steps.
To Set Labels
You can toggle the labels displayed on a result window on or off. The labels are the
lines of information shown in the upper left of each window.
1. Select Format>Result Window. Mechanica displays the Format Result
Window dialog box.
2. Select Labels to turn on or off. Mechanica toggles the label that appears in
the upper left corner of your result window.
1279
Any change you make to the labels stays with the result window until you edit the
window definition or close your result window.
To Set Titles
You can toggle the title of a result window on or off. The title appears centered at the
bottom of the window.
1. Select Format>Result Window. Mechanica displays the Format Result
Window dialog box.
2. Select Titles to turn the title on or off. Mechanica toggles the title.
Any change you make to the title stays with the result window until you edit the
window definition or close your result window.
Select Analysis>FEM Solution. The Run FEM Analysis dialog box appears.
Select the FEA program to access.
Select the analysis type from the Analysis option menu.
Use the Linear or Parabolic buttons to select the order of finite elements.
Select the analyses that you want to include in the solver run from the
Analyses list. This step determines the constraints, boundary conditions, and
loads that Mechanica outputs.
6. If you do not want to use the WCS as the reference coordinate system, select
a different coordinate system from the Coord System option menu.
7. If desired, use the Aux Coord Systems area to select one or more auxiliary
coordinate systems to include in the output deck.
8. If you are using the NASTRAN solver and want to use a customized NASTRAN
template, select a NASTRAN template.
1280
IndexAdditional Information
Acceleration
Beam Resultant
Contact Pressure
Displacement
Failure Index
Fatigue
Flux
Measure
P-Level
Reaction
Reactions at Point Constraints
Rotation
Rotation Acceleration
Rotation Velocity
Shear & Moment
Shell Resultant
Strain
Strain Energy
Stress
Temp Gradient
Temperature
Thermal Strain (FEM only)
Thermal Strain Energy (FEM only)
Velocity
Note: The P-Level quantity does not require a procedure. For information on
this quantity, see P-Level Results Quantity.
1281
2. Enter WCS coordinates to specify the direction in which the constrained parts
of your model move in response to the forcing function. For 2D models, enter
only X and Y coordinates.
3. Select an option for calculating displacement, velocity, and acceleration
results relative to ground or to supports.
To return to the procedure for creating your analysis, click one of the links below.
Otherwise, return to previous.
See Also
Procedures:
Fringe
Contour
Vectors
Graph
Model
IndexAdditional Information
provides a drop-down menu that you can use to suppress or activate the
entity.
7. In each of the model instances, suppress or activate the modeling entities in
the modeling entity columns appropriately to what you are planning to
simulate with the instance.
8. Select OK.
After you create the desired family table instances, you can switch to the instance
you want to work with. When you open the instance model in Mechanica, the
modeling entities that you suppressed in the family table do not appear in the Model
Tree and no associated icons appear in the work area.
9. Use the Windows menu to switch to the desired instance.
When the instance model is opened, the modeling entities that you suppressed
in the family table get suppressed in the instance model.
1283
If you use this method, you would use the appropriate Graph command six times to
tie a group of four result windows.
See Also
Procedure:
1284
IndexAdditional Information
2. Click
. Locate and select the name of the file you want to import.
3. If you want to preview the bulk temperature, click the Preview Tb button. If
the preview does not produce the expected results, check to make sure that
the reference coordinate system is correct.
4. Type a value for the convection coefficient, h.
5. If you want bulk temperature to be time-dependent, select the Time
Dependent check box under Temporal Variation.
6. Click OK to accept the definition of the convection condition.
The software performs a simple test on the FNF file to check that it has a mesh
and the required load.
2. Click
. Locate and select the name of the file you want to import.
3. If you want to preview the convection coefficient, click the Preview h button.
4. If you want to preview the bulk temperature, click the Preview Tb button. If
either preview does not produce the expected results, check to make sure
that the reference coordinate system is correct.
5. If you want bulk temperature to be time-dependent, select the Time
Dependent check box under Temporal Variation.
6. Click OK to accept the definition of the convection condition.
1285
The software performs a simple test on the FNF file to check that it has a mesh
and the required load.
2. Click
. Locate and select the name of the file you want to import.
3. If you want to preview the convection coefficient, click the Preview h button.
If the preview does not produce the expected results, check to make sure
that the reference coordinate system is correct.
4. Type a value for the bulk temperature, Tb.
5. If you want the bulk temperature to be time-dependent, select the Time
Dependent check box under Temporal Variation.
6. Click OK to accept the definition of the convection condition.
The software performs a simple test on the FNF file to check that it has a mesh
and the required load.
1286
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedures:
1287
If you do not select this check box, Mechanica will run a static analysis as part of running
your fatigue analysis.
4. If you want to multiply the stress results from a previous static analysis, enter
a Load Scale Factor.
5. If you are creating a prestress static analysis, you have the option to select
the Combine Results With Results From Previous Static Analysis check
box.
IndexAdditional Information
Tolerance Report
Use the Info>Tolerance Report command if you experience problems meshing an
assembly model in either native mode or FEM mode. This command displays a report
that lists the tolerance values for all assembly components whose model tolerance
contributes to the global tolerance for the assembly. If the assembly contains entities
such as quilts or beams, the report includes the tolerance value for the assembly
itself. The report includes all those components that have geometry, and is arranged
in descending order with components that have the highest tolerance values listed
first. To better understand how to use the values in this report, you need background
information on model accuracy, both relative and absolute.
Tolerance, as reported by Mechanica, is calculated in a manner similar to absolute
accuracy. However, the calculated values are somewhat different. You use the
Mechanica Info>Tolerance Report command to compare the toleranceand, in
effect, the accuracyof assembly components if your assembly mesh fails. For
Mechanica to mesh the assembly successfully, these values must be very close to
each other.
When reviewing a tolerance report, look for significant differences in the tolerance
values of components, the assembly as compared to the components, and so forth.
Although it can vary depending on the assembly, a significant difference is generally
considered to be a difference in the decimal order of magnitude. For example, the
difference in two tolerance values of 0.274 and 0.513 would not typically be
significant, but the difference between 2.874 and 0.513 probably would be.
If you notice significant differences in the tolerance values reported by Mechanica,
return to Pro/ENGINEER and use the Edit>Setup>Accuracy command to decrease
the relative or absolute accuracy value for the component whose tolerance value is
too high. If you want to change the accuracy value for the top-level assembly, work
in assembly mode. If you want to change the accuracy value for one component,
work in part mode. When working with the Accuracy command, be aware that a
decrease in the accuracy value actually represents an increase in the accuracy, or
precision, of the geometry. After you lower the accuracy value, the tolerance value of
the component will decrease as well. For more information on accuracy, see the Part
Modeling area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
1289
When you select Top, Bottom, or Top And Bottom from the first option menu, the
second option menu appears. If the model does not contain laminate shells, only the
first of these items is available on the option menu:
Shell Select this option to display a quantity at the top, bottom, or top and
bottom of the shell location.
Ply Select this option to display a quantity at the top, bottom, or top and
bottom of the ply location. This option is only available if there are shells with
laminate properties in the model.
When you select Ply, a spin box appears enabling you to select the ply for
which to show the results.
Total Load
Use this option to distribute a load along the length or area of the entity such that
the integral of the load over the selected entity equals the total prescribed value. For
curves (and edges in FEM mode), Mechanica distributes the load as load per arc
length. For surfaces, Mechanica distributes the load as load per surface area.
Follow these guidelines:
If you select more than one entity, Mechanica distributes the load equally
across all selected entities.
For 3D models, Mechanica distributes the total load you enter on the selected
entities in the following ways:
Entity
edges, beams
curves
load/area of entity
surfaces
Note: You cannot select the Total Load option for a 3D solid.
1290
Because all modeling data for 2D plane strain models is in terms of per unit
depth, you enter the total load on a curve, edge, or 2D shell in terms of the
total load applied per unit depth.
For 2D axisymmetric models, a load on a curve, edge, or 2D shell defines
what is physically an area load. You enter the amount of such a load on the
surface that the curve, edge, or 2D shell represents.
A load on a 2D solid defines what is physically a volume load. You enter this
type of load on the body that the 2D solid represents.
IndexAdditional Information
The total load remains the same even if the length or area changes, either
through changes you make to the model or through changes that Mechanica
makes during a sensitivity or optimization design study.
For example, if you define a load of 100 pounds for a 25x25 inch surface, each
1x1 inch area of the surface sees 0.16 pounds of the load. Should Mechanica
optimize the surface such that it shrinks to a 1x1 inch area, the remaining area
would see the entire 100 pounds. Thus, although the overall 100-pound load
remains steady for the model, a much smaller surface area bears the load.
Track
In Structure only, this item appears if you select modal_frequency as the measure
for the goal or a limit. Select this item to direct Mechanica to follow a particular
mode through the optimization, even if that mode's frequency becomes greater or
less than a neighboring mode's frequency.
As Mechanica modifies a design parameter during optimization, frequencies of
different modes can change, so that mode 2 at the beginning can become mode 3 at
the end.
For example, if you enter 2 for the Mode Number and select Track, Mechanica
tracks at each step of the optimization the frequency of the mode whose shape is
closest to the shape of mode 2 in the original model.
Mechanica reports the mode number of the frequency in a summary file, which you
can access with the Info>Status command on the Analyses and Design Studies
dialog box.
If you do not select Track, Mechanica optimizes whatever mode has the second
lowest frequency, even if the mode shape changes.
Keep the following points in mind if you select Track:
Mode tracking requires the polynomial order on each edge to remain constant
during the optimization. Mechanica calculates values for the analysis
connected to the modal_frequency measure at the first interval of the
optimization. Mechanica then uses the polynomial order it reached to achieve
convergence in the first interval at each remaining interval.
1291
Do not select Track for a rigid mode. If your analysis contains rigid modes,
Mechanica ignores them when tracking a non-rigid mode.
For buckling analyses, Track is not available. Since the smallest positive
buckling mode is the mode that will cause failure first, Mechanica
automatically tracks the lowest positive mode.
2D models
models with shell or beam elements
models with transversely isotropic or orthotropic materials
models with links
Transient thermal analyses take longer to run than steady-state thermal analyses.
For some runs, you may want to use the Quick Check convergence method to get a
quick reading of your model. When you do use the single-pass adaptive convergence
method, allow more time for your run.
Note: For transient thermal analyses, if you suddenly switch on heat loads and convection
conditions, these changes can adversely affect analysis convergence. If all heat loads and
convection conditions are smooth functions that are zero at the start of the analysis, the
engine will generally select smaller values for the p-orders. For more information on how
to smooth these functions, see Ramping of Heat Loads and Convection Conditions.
Transversely Isotropic
If you select this type of material symmetry on the Structural tab on the Material
Definition dialog box, the following tabs appear:
Properties
Failure Criterion
1292
Specific Heat
IndexAdditional Information
Thermal Conductivity
Poisson's Ratio
Young's Modulus
Shear Modulus
Coeff. of Thermal Expansion
Make sure you have one of the browsers listed in Viewing Specifications for
Simulation Advisor.
Make sure you have set the browser as suggested.
Troubleshooting Constraints
To help ensure a successful run, you may want to verify your constraints and, if you
are working with an assembly, perform a pre-run error detection pass. To learn
about constraint verification and other technical tips, read the following:
Verifying a Constraint
Performing a Body Check for Assemblies
Handling Stress Concentrations
Checking Your Model
Insufficiently Constrained Models
1293
, and the
as Nu.
In the above expression, 1, 2, and 3 denote the three principal material directions.
In a uniaxial tension test pulling in the 1 direction, the ratios of transverse normal
strains,
and
, is given by:
and
Also, since the elasticity matrix is symmetric, the following relation between
Poisson's ratios and Young's moduli holds:
Therefore, if
, then
and
The values you enter for Poisson's ratios must satisfy the requirement that the
determinant of the 6 X 6 constitutive equation matrix above is positive.
1294
IndexAdditional Information
Shows the measure's value after each p-loop pass. Use this
graph to see how well the analysis converged.
You can create this graph only if the analysis uses the multipass adaptive convergence method. The location is P-Pass.
Optimization
Local or Global
Sensitivity
UCS-Based Measures
If you want to use a UCS in creating a measure, you must define the UCS before you
define the measure. If you are using a UCS, the references to the WCS X, Y, and Z
axes on the dialog boxes are replaced as follows:
Cartesian UCS
Cylindrical
UCS
Spherical UCS
If you select any of the options on the Measure Definition dialog box that require a
coordinate system selection, use the arrow button to select a coordinate system
relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS.
You can also select a UCS.
For more information, see About Coordinate Systems.
For Transversely Isotropic Properties For all failure criteria, if you enter
values for this quantity:
You must also enter values for ultimate tensile strength and shear strength.
For Transversely Isotropic Properties For all failure criteria, if you enter
values for this quantity:
1296
You must also enter values for ultimate compressive strength and shear
strength.
IndexAdditional Information
Unconstrained
If you select this item, Mechanica automatically selects With Rigid Mode Search
and looks for and reports rigid body modes for an unconstrained analysis.
You might select this option if you want to examine rigid body vibrations.
If your model contains point-to-ground springs, you can select Unconstrained
separately from With Rigid Mode Search. Point-to-ground springs are the
equivalent of constraints. You still have the option of selecting With Rigid Mode
Search, but you do not have to select it as long as the springs sufficiently constrain
your model.
Understanding Accuracy
Accuracy is a dimensionless number that is used to control local time integration
errors. A local time integration error indicates that the error is estimated for each
time step in the analysis, independent from the results of previous time steps,
whereas a global time integration error depends on the entire time integration. The
engine selects the size of the time step to keep local time integration errors in
temperature smaller than the product of accuracy and estimated temperature
variation, and errors in energy norm smaller than the product of accuracy and
energy norm.
Specifying an accuracy value of 0.001 does not guarantee that all results are within
one-tenth of one percent of the exact solution. This is mostly because the accuracy
of the solution is affected strongly by the spatial discretization, but also because the
global time error is not controlled. To improve the spatial discretization, the engine
increases or decreases the p-orders as needed to keep the flux jumps at element
boundaries below a target value. Some models require more elements to capture
thin layers with sharp temperature gradients that result from fast convection
conditions or rapidly-varying heat loads.
New Opens the BC Set Definition dialog box. Enter a name and optional
description for the new boundary condition set.
1297
Note: You can also access the BC Set Definition dialog box by clicking
the New button in the Member of Set area on the Prescribed
Temperature, Convection Condition, and Radiation Condition
dialog boxes.
Copy Creates a copy of the highlighted boundary condition set and adds it
to the list.
Edit Opens the BC Set Definition dialog box with the information you
used to specify the highlighted boundary condition set.
Delete Removes the highlighted boundary condition set.
Description Displays the optional description you entered when you
created the boundary condition set.
If you want the flexibility of treating each of your boundary conditions separately,
use a unique name and set name for each boundary condition. However, remember
that a thermal analysis can only use one boundary condition set.
Heat load and BC sets provide a logical means of organizing your modeling entities
so you can define analyses effectively and clearly. A carefully considered approach to
heat load and BC set creation simplifies heat load and boundary condition selection
when defining your analyses. Although the software permits you to create each heat
load and boundary condition as a separate heat load set or BC set, you can reduce
the number of selections you need to make for analysis definition by grouping your
heat loads and boundary conditions into sets.
See Also
References:
1298
IndexAdditional Information
Topic
Introduction
Basic Equalities
System of Units
Basic Units
Examples of Values for Gravitational Acceleration and Selected Properties of Steel
Correspondence Between Mass and Force
Correspondence Between Mass and Pounds-mass
Conversion of Basic Units
Correspondence Between Degrees Celsius and Degrees Fahrenheit
Note: Throughout this document, scientific notation is written as you would type it in
Mechanica. For example,
2.07 x 1011 is written as 2.07e11.
Introduction
Mechanica does not store information concerning the physical dimensions (units) of
the numerical data that you enter. Therefore, whenever you enter numerical data
into Mechanica, you must ensure that you are using a consistent set of units.
For example, if you enter distance in terms of inches and force in terms of poundsforce, then you must enter Young's modulus in terms of pounds-force per square
inch. In this system of units, Mechanica reports stress in terms of pounds-force per
square inch.
If you do not use a consistent set of units when entering data, the values computed
by Mechanica will be meaningless. This document provides an overview of the
physical dimensions of many of the quantities in Mechanica.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this document:
L = length
M = mass
T = time
F = force
1299
E = energy (heat)
P = power
D = temperature (such as F, C, K)
R = angle radian
When choosing a consistent set of units, you must decide which quantities will form
the basic physical dimensions and which quantities will be derived from the basic
dimensions. Usually, you will choose either mass, length, and time (MLT) or force,
length, and time (FLT) as the basic dimensions. The connection between these two
systems is given by Newton's second law of motion:
force = mass x acceleration
the dimensions of which are:
F = ML/T2
Some quantities in Thermal are usually expressed in terms of energy and power, the
dimensions of which are determined from their definitions:
energy (work, heat) = force x distance
E = FL
power = energy time
P = E/T
Basic Equalities
Following is a list of many of the quantities in Mechanica and the physical dimensions
of each expressed in terms of common physical dimensions and also in terms of MLT
and FLT.
Quantity
Common
MLT
FLT
length
time
mass
FT2/L
1300
IndexAdditional Information
force
ML/T2
temperature
area
L2
L2
L2
volume
L3
L3
L3
velocity
L/T
L/T
L/T
acceleration
L/T2
L/T2
L/T2
angle, rotation
rotational velocity
R/T
R/T
R/T
rotational acceleration
R/T2
R/T2
R/T2
density
M/L3
M/L3
FT2/L4
moment, torque
FL
ML2/T2
FL
F/L
M/T2
F/L
ML/T2
F/L2
M/LT2
F/L2
F/L
M/T2
F/L
translational
F/L
M/T2
F/L
1301
stiffness
rotational stiffness
FL/R
ML2/T2R
FL/R
coefficient of
thermal expansion
/D
/D
/D
L4
L4
L4
mass moment of
inertia
ML2
ML2
FLT2
FL
ML2/T2
FL
power, heat
transfer rate (P)
E/T
ML2/T3
FL/T
temperature gradient
D/L
D/L
D/L
heat flux
P/L2
M/T3
F/TL
thermal
conductivity
P/LD
ML/T3D
F/TD
convection
coefficient
P/L2D
M/T3D
F/LTD
specific
heat (Cp)
E/MD
L2/T2D
FL/MD
1302
IndexAdditional Information
System of Units
To define a system of units, you assign a unit of measure to each of the physical
dimensions. This section provides the units of the above quantities in four different
systems of units, two different metric systems, MKS and mmNs, and two different
English systems, FPS and IPS. The MKS system of units uses MLT as the basic
dimensions. The mmNs, FPS, and IPS systems of units use FLT as the basic
dimensions.
MKS
Following are the basic and some of the derived units of the MKS system:
Basic Units
M: kilogram (kg)
L: meter (m)
T: second (sec)
D: degree Celsius ( C)
mmNS
Following are the basic and some of the derived units of the mmNS system:
Basic Units
F: Newton (N)
L: millimeter (mm)
T: second (sec)
1303
D: degree Celsius ( C)
FPS
Following are the basic and some of the derived units of the FPS system:
Basic Units
F: pound-force (lbf)
M: lbf-sec2/ft = slug
L: foot (ft)
E: ft-lbf
T: second (sec)
P: ft-lbf/sec
D: degree Fahrenheit ( F)
IPS
Following are the basic and some of the derived units of the IPS system:
Basic Units
F: pound-force (lbf)
M: lbf-sec2/in
L: inch (in)
E: lbf-in
T: second (sec)
P: lbf-in/sec
D: degree Fahrenheit ( F)
1304
IndexAdditional Information
Basic Units
Using the definitions from the previous section, the units of the quantities in these
four systems are as follows:
Units
Metric
(MKS)
Metric
(mmNS)
English
(FPS)
English
(IPS)
length
mm
ft
in
time
sec
sec
sec
sec
mass
kg
tonne
slug
lbf-sec2/in
force
lbf
lbf
temperature
area
m2
mm2
ft2
in2
volume
m3
mm3
ft3 (cu-ft)
in3 (cu-in)
velocity
m/sec
mm/sec
ft/sec
in/sec
acceleration
m/sec2
mm/sec2
ft/sec2
in/sec2
angle, rotation
rad
rad
rad
rad
rotational
velocity
rad/sec
rad/sec
rad/sec
rad/sec
rotational
acceleration
rad/sec2
rad/sec2
rad/sec2
rad/sec2
1305
density
kg/m3
tonne/mm3
slug/ft3
lbfsec2/in4
moment, torque
N-m
N-mm
ft-lbf
in-lbf
N/m
N/mm
lbf/ft
lbf/in
lbf
lbf
N/m2
(Pa)
N/mm2
(MPa)
lbf/ft2
lbf/in2
(psi)
translational
stiffness
N/m
N/mm
lbf/ft
lbf/in
rotational stiffness
N-m/rad
N-mm/rad
lbf-ft/rad
lbf-in/rad
coefficient of
thermal expansion
/ C
/ C
/ F
/ F
moment of
inertia of beam cross-sectional area
m4
mm4
ft4
in4
kg-m2
tonne-mm2
slug-ft2
lbf-in-sec2
mJ
ft-lbf
in-lbf
mW
ft-lbf/sec
in-lbf/sec
temperature
gradient
heat flux
1306
C/m
W/m2
C/mm
mW/mm2
F/ft
lbf/ft-sec
F/in
lbf/in-sec
IndexAdditional Information
thermal
conductivity
W/m- C
mW/mm- C
lbf/sec- F
lbf/sec- F
convection film
coefficient
W/m2- C
mW/mm2C
lbf/ft-secF
lbf/in-secF
specific
heat (Cp)
J/kg- C
mJ/tonneC
ftlbf/slug- F
in2/sec2F
The numerical values of conductivity are the same in the MKS and mmNS systems
and in the FPS and IPS systems.
In Structure, units of modal frequency results are always cycles per unit time or Hz.
The units of time are affected by the force/length/time units you used to define the
model. Structure never reports modal frequency in terms of radians per unit time.
Units
Metric
(MKS)
Metric
(mmNS)
English
(FPS)
English
(IPS)
g (gravitational
acceleration)
9.81
m/sec2
9810 mm/sec2
32.2
ft/sec2
386 in/sec2
density (steel)
7830.0
kg/m3
7.83e-9
tonne/mm3
15.2
slug/ft3
7.33e-4 lbsec2/in4
2.07e11
N/m2
2.07e5 N/mm2
4.32e9
lb/ft2
3.0e7 lb/in2
coefficient of thermal
expansion (steel)
12e-6/ C
12e-6/ C
6.5e-6/ F
6.5e-6/ F
1307
thermal
conductivity (steel)
43.37
W/m- C
43.37
mW/mm- C
5.4
lbf/sec- F
(25 Btu/
hr-ft- F)
5.41bf/sec- F
(2.083 Btu/
hr-in- F)
1308
IndexAdditional Information
mm
ft
in
1 m =
1000
3.281
39.37
1 mm =
1.0e-3
3.281e-3
3.937e-2
1 ft =
0.3048
304.8
12
1 in =
2.54e-2
25.4
8.333e-2
kg
tonne
(N-sec2/mm)
slug
(lb-sec2/
ft)
lb-sec2/in
1 kg =
1.0e-3
6.852e-2
5.71e-3
1 tonne =
1000
68.52
5.71
1 slug =
14.59
14.59e-3
8.333e-2
Moments of Inertia
1309
kg m2
tonne mm2
slug ft2
lbf-sec2
-in
1 kg m2 =
1000
.738
8.85
1 tonne mm2 =
1e-3
7.375e-4
8.85e-3
1.356
1.356e3
12
0.113
113
1/12
1 slug ft
1 lbf-sec2-in =
lb
1 N =
0.2248
1 lb =
4.448
N-mm
lb-ft
lb-in
1 N-m =
1000
0.7376
8.851
1 N-mm =
1.0e-3
7.376e-4
8.851e-3
1 lb-ft =
1.356
1356
12
1 lb-in =
0.113
113
8.33e-2
1310
IndexAdditional Information
kg/m3
slug/ft3
lb-sec2/
in4
1 kg/m3 =
1e-12
1.94e-3
9.36e-8
1 tonne/mm3 =
1e12
1.94e9
9.36e4
1 slug/ft3 =
515
5.15e-10
4.82e-5
1 lb-sec2/in4 =
1.07e7
1.07e-5
20700
N/mm2
lb/ft2
lb/in2
1 N/m2 =
1e-6
2.09e-2
1.45e-4
1 N/mm2 =
1e6
20900
145
1 lb/ft2 =
47.9
47.9e-5
6.94e-3
1 lb/in2 =
6890
6.89e-3
144
1 N/m =
N/mm
1.0e-3
lb/ft
lb/in
6.8525e-2
5.7104e-3
1311
1 N/mm =
1000
68.525
5.710
1 lb/ft =
14.593
1.4593e-2
8.33e-2
1 lb/in =
175.118
1.7512e-5
12
N-mm/rad
lb-ft/rad
lb-in/rad
1 N-m/rad =
1000
0.7376
8.851
1 N-mm/rad =
1.0e-3
7.376e-4
8.851e-3
1 lb-ft/rad =
1.356
1356
12
1 lb-in/rad =
0.113
113
8.33e-2
W/m- C
mW/
mm- C
Btu/
hr-ft- F
Btu/
hr-in- F
lbf/
sec- F
1 W/m- C =
0.5777
4.817e-2
0.1249
1 mW/mm- C =
0.5777
4.817e-2
0.1249
1 Btu/hr-ft- F =
1.731
1.731
8.333e-2
0.2162
1312
IndexAdditional Information
1 Btu/hr-in- F =
20.76
20.76
12
2.594
1 lbf/sec- F =
8.007
8.007
4.626
0.3854
Units
3D:
Curve, Edge, Beam
Solid
2D Axisymmetric:
Curve, Edge, 2D Shell
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Strain:
Curve, Edge, 2D Shell
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Stress:
1313
Curve, Edge
Surface, 2D Plate
Units Management
You can use the Units tab on the Units Manager dialog box to create, copy, edit,
and delete units.
This tab displays a list of existing units in Pro/ENGINEERpredefined units and any
custom units. You can select a Type option to display units of a particular type only.
For more information about the units provided in Pro/ENGINEER, see Predefined
Units.
The following buttons appear on the Units tab:
See Also
Procedures:
1314
IndexAdditional Information
graph The command undoes ties you created with the Tie>Graph Both,
Tie>Graph Quantity, or Tie>Graph Location commands.
fringe, contour, and vector plots The command undoes ties you created
with the Tie>Legend command.
When you select Untie, Mechanica restores the original range for the current window
if the range was altered when you tied the window. Mechanica redraws the display if
the ranges have changed.
To untie any other windows you tied to the current window, access the Control
menu for each window separately and then select Untie.
See Also
Procedure:
The dialog box displays the name of a standard design study, modal analysis,
and the constraint set for the selected modal analysis. If you have multiple
studies or analyses, you can select the ones you want to use.
Keep these points in mind when using this option:
o
o
You cannot place the current dynamic analysis in the same design
study as the previous modal analysis you select.
The design study containing the previous modal analysis must be in
the same directory as the design study in which you place the current
dynamic analysis.
You must run the design study that contains the modal analysis prior
to running the current dynamic analysis so that the modes from the
previous analysis are available.
Product
Independent
variable
Dependent variable
Dynamic Time
Analysis Definition
Structure
time
amplitude
time or frequency
base excitation
frequency
damping coefficient
frequency
amplitude
frequency
phase
frequency
damping coefficient
time or frequency
base excitation
frequency
frequency
damping coefficient
time or frequency
base excitation
Dynamic Frequency
Analysis Definition
Dynamic Random
Analysis Definition
Structure
Structure
Dynamic Shock
Analysis Definition
Structure
frequency
base excitation
Material
Structure (native
mode only)
temperature
Young's modulus
temperature
Poisson's ratio
1316
IndexAdditional Information
temperature
coefficient of thermal
expansion
Force/Moment Load
Structure
coordinates (WCS or
UCS)
spatial variation of
force/moment load
Pressure Load
Structure
coordinates (WCS or
UCS)
spatial variation of
pressure load
Global Temperature
Load
coordinates (WCS or
UCS)
spatial variation of
global temperature
load
Structural
Temperature Load
coordinates (WCS or
UCS)
spatial variation of
structural temperature
load
Constraint
coordinates (WCS or
UCS)
translation and
rotation directions
Convection
Condition
time
bulk temperature
coordinates (WCS or
UCS)
spatial variation of
convection coefficient
and bulk temperature
Radiation Condition
coordinates (WCS or
UCS)
spatial variation of
emissivity and
ambient temperature
Prescribed
Temperature
Thermal
coordinates (WCS or
UCS)
spatial variation of
temperature
Heat Load
Thermal
coordinates (WCS or
UCS)
spatial variation of
heat load
time
heat load
1317
The dialog box displays the name of a standard design study, static analysis,
and load set. If you have multiple studies, analyses, or load sets, you can
select the ones you want to use.
Note: For sensitivity and optimization studies, Mechanica always reruns
the static analysis at each parameter setting, even if you select Use
Static Analysis Results From Previous Design Study.
If you select this item, Mechanica takes the temperatures for the load you are
creating from a thermal analysis that you run before you run the static or modal
analysis.
The names of a design study, analysis, and load set appear on the dialog box. If you
have multiple studies, analyses, or load sets, you can select the ones you want to
use.
Note: In a sensitivity or optimization design study, Mechanica automatically
runs the thermal analysis at each parameter setting, even if you select Use
Temperatures From Previous Design Study.
1318
IndexAdditional Information
User-defined Steps
Use this button to specify the spacing between steps in the time or frequency range.
You can enter different values for each step. The values you enter must be in
increasing order from step to step.
When you click User-defined Steps, you can also use the Space Equally button to
evenly space the steps.
You cannot enter any values for the steps if you selected Auto for the maximum of
the time or frequency range. The dialog box shows Auto for each step in the table.
1319
For an example of a global sensitivity curve plotting von Mises stress as a function of
change in radius, see Varying a Single Design Parameter in a Global Sensitivity
Study.
See Also
Strategy:
1320
IndexAdditional Information
Note that with the maximum set low, you see much more detail on the lower half of
the original range than you do in the original model. On the other hand, you can get
more definitive information on the upper half of the original range, with the minimum
set high. For example, were you to zoom in on the left hole for the version that
shows the minimum set high, you would see a more exact representation of the
stress distribution around the high stress area at the bottom of the hole.
Tip: You can also control the level of detail in your plots by specifying either fewer or
more legend levels.
1321
If you set limits within the same analysis that conflict with each other, Mechanica
attempts to satisfy only one of the conflicting limits. For example, if you assigned
contradictory values to two related measures such as max_stress_xx < 1 and
max_stress_prin > 2, Mechanica interprets the limit as meaning it should either keep
max_stress_xx less than 1 or keep max_stress_prin greater than 2.
Contents View the Contents, which includes all help topics connected to
menus or commands, but does not include many lower-level help topics. Click
a topic title to display the help topic.
The Contents list is hierarchical. Use the + and symbols next to a book to
open or close the list that comes under that book. There are no topics
associated with the books. Use the vertical scroll bar to move up and down the
Contents list. Use the horizontal scroll bar to move left and right.
Index View the Index. Type the first few letters of the item you are
looking for. The index scrolls down to the appropriate part of the list.
To open the topic that goes with an index entry, either double-click the entry
or select the entry and select the Display button.
Search Search the help system for topics that contain one or more
keywords that you enter. Type one or more keywords in the search pattern
text box. When you click the Find button, a list of topics that contain the
keyword appears.
To open one of the topics from the search, either double-click the topic you
want or click the topic and select the Display button.
Searches are not case-sensitive. Use Boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT) to
combine search terms. Use wildcards (* or ?) if you also want to see variations
of the search term, or enclose the search term in quotation marks if you want
to search for an exact phrase.
You can also use the hyperlinks inside each help topic to jump to related information.
Among other links, most online help topics have a "Return to" link at the bottom.
This contains one of the following types of links:
1322
A link to the topic's parent page. If you arrive at the topic from a different
page, use the browser's Back button instead.
A link called "previous". This is identical to the browser's Back button. If you
need to go back more than one level, use the Back button.
IndexAdditional Information
Tabs At the top of the Simulation Advisor window, there are tabs that
organize the information into different areas. Click a tab to display the topic
list and first page of information for that area.
Topic List On the tabs, Simulation Advisor lists the topics related to the
tab's area of information. Click a topic to display it.
Hyperlinks Within each topic there are hyperlinks that take you to related
information both in Simulation Advisor and in the Mechanica online help
system. Click the hyperlink to access the related information.
Note: Hyperlinks to Mechanica help topics require that you have Mozilla
or Internet Explorer.
1323
Validate
Click this button on the Limits tab if you want AutoGEM to verify that all elements
meet the limits. If all elements satisfy the limits, a message box states that all
elements satisfy the limits for creating or editing.
If there are elements that do not satisfy the limits on this dialog box, Mechanica
highlights all the elements that do not satisfy the currently displayed limits. A
message box asks if you want to create a new group and add the highlighted entities
to this group.
1324
IndexAdditional Information
For Max Principal Stress or Min Principal Stress, Mechanica displays a vector
plot for both quantities. See an example of a Max Principal Stress vector plot.
1326
IndexAdditional Information
Make sure Java, JavaScript, and style sheets are enabled in your browser.
In Mozilla, select Edit>Preferences, go to the Advanced category and select
Enable Java. Next, select the Scripts & Plugins subcategory and ensure that
the Navigator check box is selected.
In Internet Explorer select Tools>Internet Options, then do the following:
o
To enable Java, select the Advanced tab and select the Java JIT
Compiler For Virtual Machines Enabled (requires restart) check
box under the Java VM heading.
To enable style sheets, select the General tab, click the Accessibility
button, and make sure the options under Formatting are not
selected.
See Also
Reference:
1327
Non-Structural Mass per Unit Length Enter the non-structural mass per
unit length. A non-structural mass is a mass that responds to gravity, but
does not strengthen the structurefor example, fluid running in a pipe that
you have modeled as a beam. Non-structural masses can have different
moments of inertia and gravitational centers than the beam you are creating.
Non-Structural Mass Moment per Unit Length Enter the non-structural
mass moment of inertia per unit length.
Y Coordinates of Non-Structural Mass C.G. Enter the Y coordinates of
the non-structural mass center of gravity.
Z Coordinates of Non-Structural Mass C.G. Enter the Z coordinates of
the non-structural mass center of gravity.
1328
IndexAdditional Information
Add a row to the layup table above the selected row. If none of the
rows are selected, when you click this button Mechanica adds a row to the top
of the table.
Clear all of the values from the table, but leave the rows.
1329
Graph This field appears on the Y Axis tab only and displays a list of
subgraphs when they are available. Mechanica uses subgraphs to plot
multiple sets of data that share a common x axis but have different y axes.
From the list, select a subgraph for which you want to customize the y axis.
Axis Label Use the input field to edit an axis label. The label is a textual
line that appears next to each axis. You can change the style, color, and size
of the label's font by clicking the Text Style button. Use the Display Axis
Label check box to turn the axis label on or off.
Range Change the range of the axis. You can use this area to reset
minimum and maximum values so that the window displays a specified
segment of the graph.
Tick Marks Set the number of major and minor tick marks on the axis.
Tick Labels Change the alignment of value labels for the major tick
marks. If you want to change the style, color, and size of the font, click the
Text Style button.
Grid Lines Select the style for the grid lines. If you want to change their
color, click the color selection button.
Axis Modify the thickness of the axis. Click the color selection button if you
want to change the axis color.
Scaling Use this area to adjust the scale for your graph:
o Log Scale Change the values on the axis to a logarithmic scale.
Using a logarithmic scale can provide you with additional information
that you may not be able to see on a normal scale.
o Scale This field appears on the Y Axis tab only. You can use it to
change the scale of the y axis.
1330
Point Defines the XY plane with the gap X vector and the selected point.
IndexAdditional Information
Edge Defines the XY plane with the gap X vector and the projection from
the first point of the gap to the selected edge.
Curve Defines the XY plane with the gap X vector and the projection from
the first point of the gap to the selected datum curve.
Axis Creates a line through the first point of the gap, which is parallel to
the selected axis. The parallel line and the gap's X axis form the XY plane of
the gap.
Surface Defines the XY plane with the gap X vector and the projection of
the first gap point to the selected surface.
Vector in WCS Defines the XY plane with the gap X vector and a line
projected from the first gap point in a direction parallel to the X, Y, or Z
vector in the WCS. The default vector is 0, 1, 0, which defines the Y direction
in the WCS.
Not defined The gap definition does not include a Y direction. You cannot
select this option if you output to the NASTRAN solver. Mechanica blocks
output to NASTRAN if the Y direction for gaps in the model is not defined.
See Also
Procedure:
Young's Modulus
Enter values for the Young's Modulus (the modulus of elasticity) of the material. You
can define this property or you can assign a parameter to the property. Type in a
value or click the P button as appropriate.
For orthotropic material properties, enter positive values for:
E1
E2
E3
These values represent the Young's modulus along each of the three principal
material directions of the model.
For transversely isotropic material properties, enter positive values for the following
two Young's modulus values:
E1
E2 = E3
These values represent the Young's modulus along each of the three principal
material directions of the model, with equal values in directions 2 and 3.
1331
1332
Index
acceleration measure................... 342
2
acceleration results ..................... 874
2D models
advanced springs ........................ 159
2D axisymmetric model type
analysis
Structure ............................... 75
creating .................................. 872
Thermal ................................. 78
dynamic frequency ................... 465
2D axisymmetric model type ....... 75
dynamic random ...................... 466
2D plain strain model type
dynamic shock ......................... 468
Structure ............................... 73
dynamic time........................... 464
Thermal ................................. 77
FEM
2D plain strain model type .......... 77
modal .................................. 471
2D plane stress model type
overview .............................. 469
Structure ............................... 73
structural and thermal............ 470
Thermal ................................. 77
FEM ........................................ 469
2D plane stress model type ......... 77
modal ..................................... 452
defining .................................... 81
modifying .............................. 1090
elements ................................ 363
planning for optimization .............48
preparing.................................. 48
prestress modal ....................... 453
2D models ................................... 48
prestress static ........................ 444
3
selecting measures ................... 332
3D model type ........................72, 76
static ...................................... 443
A
structural ................................ 441
acceleration measure
thermal................................... 458
defining .................................1253
types ...................................... 440
overview................................. 342
1333
vibration................................. 462
workflow................................. 881
geometry tolerances
assemblies
automatic connections
assemblies................................... 37
AutoGEM
1334
Index
guidelines................................ 279
buckling analysis
overview ................................. 454
in results ...............................1144
beams
centrifugal loads
creating.................................. 146
components - defining heat loads .. 307
in results ................................ 891
normals .................................. 561
releases.................................. 177
sections.................................. 166
configuration file
beams....................................... 145
options ...................................... 3
bearing loads
defining .................................. 279
connections
contact analysis
perimeter welds......................... 96
contact regions
2D models............................... 113
3D models............................... 114
connections ................................. 94
constraint sets
overview................................. 229
constraint sets ........................... 229
constraints, Structure
along surface .......................... 245
displacement
in results............................... 1145
1336
Index
creating..................................88
datum planes
creating..................................86
datum points
overview................................. 935
creating..................................85
custom unit
creating.................................1229
editing...................................1260
design parameters
defining .................................. 425
adding.................................... 242
datum features
design studies
coordinate systems
defining
creating ................................. 90
overview ................................ 89
creating................................ 439
spherical .............................1181
datum axes
creating ................................. 87
datum curves
E
elements
overview................................. 348
1338
Index
fasteners
gaps
creating................................ 124
overview .............................. 122
defining ..............................1241
material
fatigue .....................................1081
meshes
features
checking............................... 413
troubleshooting..................... 386
overview................................1013
fringe plot for results
radiation constraint .................. 266
contour plots ........................... 919
running FEA solvers online ........ 516
displaying values ...................... 958
running FEM analysis................ 514
overview ............................... 1018
supported FEA solvers .............. 559
tips....................................... 1225
FEM mode ................................1013
fringe plot for results ................. 1018
FEM Mode command ................... 381
function
flat FEM meshes ......................... 388
in FEM mode
flux results quantity ...................1015
creating................................ 571
force and moment loads
overview .............................. 568
defining .................................. 277
valid symbols ........................ 569
distribution ............................. 276
in FEM mode............................ 568
guidelines ............................... 274
in native mode
force and moment results
creating................................ 567
beam resultant ........................ 891
overview .............................. 562
reaction .................................1135
symbolic
shear and moment..................1165
overview............................ 563
shell resultant ........................1168
valid symbols ..................... 564
shell transverse shear .............1145
symbolic............................... 563
force and moment results ...........1133
in native mode ......................... 562
force measures
1340
Index
function..................................... 562
icons
toolbar......................................53
gravity loads
defining .................................. 285
icons ...........................................53
idealizations
defining .................................1243
shells...................................... 127
overview................................. 351
springs.................................... 155
heat loads
defining
iterative solver
overview................................. 300
reviewing................................ 311
defining................................ 285
heat loads
defining
creating.................................. 448
overview................................. 447
layers
defining................................ 306
overview................................... 55
layers ......................................... 55
load sets
defining................................ 293
loads
basics..................................... 269
bearing loads
creation.............................. 1083
defining................................ 297
centrifugal loads
defining ............................... 283
force and moment loads
defining ............................... 277
pressure loads
defining................................ 288
relations functions .................... 268
structure loads
distribution........................... 276
gravity loads
1342
Index
temperature loads
overview................................. 150
and optimization......................48
operating modes
stress..................................... 337
process overview........................68
ucs-based ..............................1295
product line
uses....................................... 313
overview ................................21
Structure................................22
Thermal .................................22
overview................................. 291
toolbar......................................53
Mechanica
2D analysis ............................... 48
workflow ...................................68
midsurface compression
FEM mode..............................1013
modal analysis
modeling strategies
1344
Index
model types
2D axisymmetric structure .......... 75
N
NASTRAN
2D plate thermal........................ 77
3D ......................................72, 76
guidelines ................................. 79
normals
plane strain............................... 73
selecting................................... 80
model types................................. 71
modeling features......................... 81
moment measures
defining .................................1244
overview................................. 340
defining .................................1245
parameters
overview................................. 347
1345
phase measure
defining .................................1245
overview................................. 344
Pro/ENGINEER Relations menu...... 268
types ....................................1116
phase measure........................... 344
plane strain model type ................. 73
Index
material orientation
fringe................................. 1018
graph................................. 1026
shell
vectors............................... 1325
labels.................................... 1054
shell....................................... 179
location............................531, 549
properties.................................. 164
saving..............................536, 552
quantity in results......................1133
titles..................................... 1225
toolbar.............................524, 541
results
animation................................ 883
graphing................................1066
templates
quantity.................................1133
relative..................................1141
saving ...........................536, 552
reporting ......................... 537, 553
templates .........................536, 552
result windows
results ....................................... 522
annotating .................... 533, 551
results in FEM mode
basics functions ............. 526, 543
creating parameters ................. 554
changing.............................1151
comparing............................ 902
editing ................................1260
statistics
graphing............................. 1028
output................................ 1106
printing...............................1124
reviewing ............................1151
saving views........................1159
titles ..................................1225
1348
Index
rigid connections
for FEM
creating.................................. 102
overview................................. 101
defining .................................1248
overview................................. 343
rotation measure
stopping.................................. 502
defining .................................1247
run............................................ 490
overview................................. 338
S
rotation measure ........................ 338
saved views in results ................ 1159
rotation results quantity .............1156
shear & moment results quantity. 1165
rotation velocity measure
shell elements ............................ 362
defining .................................1249
shell models
overview................................. 343
compression ............................ 142
rotation velocity measure ............ 343
defining shells
rotation velocity results quantity..1157
advanced.............................. 130
run
simple.................................. 129
accessing summary report ........ 503
defining shells.......................... 128
batch file ................................ 501
shell models ............................... 127
error detection ........................ 498
shell normals .............................. 561
1349
shell properties
springs
thickness ...............................1169
creating
simple..................................... 157
simulation features
creating...............................81, 83
guidelines ................................. 84
promoting to Pro/ENGINEER........ 83
static analysis
solvers
strain measure
iterative.................................1163
solvers .....................................1163
stress measure
Index
overview................................. 337
adding.................................... 225
temp gradient measure................ 351
defining .................................. 236
temp gradient results quantity .... 1215
guidelines ............................... 230
temperature gradient measure
sets ....................................... 229
defining ................................ 1243
troubleshooting ......................1293
overview ................................. 351
using in structural analyses ....... 442
temperature gradient measure...... 351
Structure constraints................... 224
temperature loads
Structure loads
global temperature change ........ 290
basics..................................... 269
guidelines................................ 289
guidelines ............................... 271
importing external temperatures 294
heat loads............................... 300
MEC/T..................................... 291
spatial variation ....................... 276
structural in FEM mode ........... 1206
Structure loads........................... 267
using in Structure..................... 291
study, selecting in results ..... 527, 545
temperature measure
summary report for design study .. 503
defining ................................ 1251
suppressed features in optimized parts
............................................... 49
1351
Thermal ...................................... 22
thermal analysis
titles, in result windows ............. 1225
measures for........................... 350
TLAP load................................. 1291
thermal analysis ......................... 458
to ground springs ........................ 158
thermal constraints and boundary
conditions
overview................................. 873
prescribed temperatures
defining ............................... 265
thermal constraints and boundary
conditions ............................... 873
time measures
defining .................................1252
overview................................. 344
1352
Index
V
velocity measure
defining .................................1253
overview................................. 342
1353